JP2023165838A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preferably suggesting a determination result.SOLUTION: A game machine executes determination by first determination means, based on establishment of a first determination condition, and based on a specific determination result of the first determination means, executes a privilege game advantageous to a player. A first performance for suggesting the determination result of the first determination means is executed by first performance execution means. Determination by second determination means is executed based on establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. A second performance for suggesting a determination result of the second determination means can be executed in an overlapped state to the first performance. When the first and second performances are overlapped and executed by executing the second performance, in the second performance, a specific performance mode capable of suggesting the determination result of the first determination means suggested by the first performance can be executed. Therefore, the determination result can be preferably suggested.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine.

In game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a determination is made as to whether it is a hit or not, and if the determination result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. There are games that run special bonus games.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-217766

However, in such conventional gaming machines, it may be difficult to suggest the determination results in a suitable manner.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably suggest the determination result.

To achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a first discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a first discriminating condition, and a discriminating result of the first discriminating means that is a specific discriminating result. a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the game; a first performance execution unit that executes a first performance for indicating the determination result of the first determination unit; A second discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition, and a second effect for indicating the discrimination result of the second discriminating means, which overlaps with the first effect. a second performance execution means capable of executing the second performance, and the second performance execution means is configured to perform the first performance and the second performance in duplicate by executing the second performance. Furthermore, in the second performance, a specific performance mode capable of suggesting the determination result of the first discriminating means indicated by the first performance can be executed.

In the gaming machine according to claim 2, in the gaming machine according to claim 1, the second effect execution means executes the second effect before the first effect indicates the determination result of the first discrimination means. It is configured to be able to execute the specific performance mode in the performance.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, comprising: a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter; a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means; The first determining condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second determining condition is established based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entering means. This is established based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, including a first state in which a game ball can enter, and a state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball than in the first state. a second state; a variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second state; a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means; and a second determining means. Based on the fact that the result is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, the variable ball entry means executes a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period. variable game execution means, and the second performance execution means is configured to perform the specified game in the second performance executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the second determination result. It is configured to be able to suggest the presentation mode.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the gaming state after the end of the bonus game is a first gaming state in which the determination by the first determining means is likely to be executed, and the first game state. a second gaming state in which the determination by the second determining means is more likely to be executed than the state; and gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least The game apparatus further includes a game state changing means for changing the game state from the first game state to the second game state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the first discriminating means executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition; a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player; a first performance execution means for executing a first performance for indicating the determination result of the first determination means; and the first determination condition. A second discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a different second discriminating condition, and a second effect for showing the discrimination result of the second discriminating means can be executed in overlap with the first effect. a second performance execution means, and the second performance execution means is configured to perform the second performance when the first performance and the second performance are overlapped by executing the second performance. In the performance, the present invention is configured to be able to execute a specific performance mode that can suggest the determination result of the first determining means indicated by the first performance.

This has the effect that the determination result can be suitably suggested.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the second effect execution means is configured to perform a process in which the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is indicated by the first effect. Since the configuration is such that the specific performance mode can be executed in the second performance, the determination result of the first determination means can be determined by checking the second performance without having to confirm the first performance to the end. can be confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter and a first ball entering means different from the first ball entering means are provided. 2 ball entering means, the first determining condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second determining condition is the This is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means.

This allows the player to play the game by paying attention to the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, there is a first state in which a game ball can enter, and a game ball that is lower than the first state. a second state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the game ball; a variable ball entry means that can be varied; a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means; Based on the fact that the determination result of the second determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time. variable game execution means for executing a variable game according to the present invention; In the second presentation, the specific presentation mode can be suggested.

This has the effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the determination result of the second determination means will be the second determination result.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 4, a first gaming state in which the determination by the first determining means is likely to be executed is provided as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. and a second gaming state in which the determination by the second determining means is easier than the first gaming state. A gaming state changing means is provided for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition in the first gaming state.

Thereby, in the first gaming state, it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the specific condition will be met, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart showing the flow of effects displayed on the third symbol display device in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ending of the jackpot game in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during probability change in the first embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol does not fluctuate after the first special symbol starts fluctuating in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol hits a small hit during RUSH in the mode. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is fluctuating after the first special symbol starts fluctuating in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol stops fluctuating while the first special symbol is fluctuating. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a state where the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is jackpot A during RUSH in the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a jackpot C or a jackpot D. (a) is a diagram showing a forgetting card reminder screen in the first embodiment, and (b) to (d) are timing charts showing the timing of displaying the forgetting card reminder screen in the first embodiment. be. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in a RAM 203 of the main control device 110. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number table. It is a schematic diagram which showed the content of the 2nd winning random number table typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small win type selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of a variation pattern selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability variation table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the potential probability table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a general figure fluctuation pattern table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the main control device in the first embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the stop display mode selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the additional effect selection table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram of the electrical configuration of the display control device in the first embodiment. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating images when the power is turned on. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces B to D. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams illustrating the back surface E. FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the game state update process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation pattern selection process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation execution process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off stop process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing the starting prize winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a through gate passage process executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process performed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart showing a small winning operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prize winning process performed by MPU in a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a stop type command reception process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing status command processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the win-related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing jackpot related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing small hit related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 12 is a flowchart showing a remaining number of times updating process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing temporary stop related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a fluctuation restart process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. It is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing various counter updating processes executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. . 3 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing rush entry command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. 3 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in a display control device. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when jackpot C is won in a variable probability state in the second embodiment. It is a relationship diagram of the game content of the special figure 1 game and the granted privilege after the probability change state is set in the second embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol is fluctuating when the winning symbol of the first special symbol is stopped in the second embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the second embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents when the second special symbol stops while the winning symbol of the first special symbol in the form stops. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection 2 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the loss type selection table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of two tables for time saving and certainty variation. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a second embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol determination period setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows processing during fixed time performed by MPU in a main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol movement stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol determination period setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 2 off stop process 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in 2nd Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the remaining number of times update process 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing temporary stop related processing 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing restart processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart showing symbol confirmation related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing various counter updating processes 2 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment. It is a relationship diagram of the game content of the special figure 1 game and the granted privilege after the probability change state is set in the third embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the end of the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the first change after the jackpot. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third variation after the jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the fourth variation after the jackpot. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third fluctuation after the jackpot when the third fluctuation after the jackpot is a jackpot in the third embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the third fluctuation after the jackpot. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the second fluctuation after the jackpot when winning the special drawing 1 small hit. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number 3 table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small win type selection 3 table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable pattern selection 3 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variable pattern selection 3 table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation A table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variable B table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variable C table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variable D table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of three tables for potential confirmation. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a third embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation effect selection table. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 off fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 off stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing winning information related processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot related processing 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 3 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for variable probability performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the game flow of the pachinko machine in 4th embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when a special drawing jackpot is won during the variable probability state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the flow when the time is shortened during the variable probability state. This is a timing chart shown in FIG. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents of RUSH entering due to the number of time reductions reached in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing that the RUSH is in the midst of fluctuations in special chart 1 jackpot in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display contents to be notified. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents when winning a falling lottery during a probability state in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when winning a falling lottery during a probability state in the fourth embodiment. 2 is a diagram showing the display screen when winning the jackpot in 2. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of display contents during super RUSH in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table in 4th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a fourth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability mode selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the falling lottery table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a notification selection table. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing game state update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing state command processing 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a potential mode setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the falling effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which showed small hit related processing 4 executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 4th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 4 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fall notification process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the variable winning device for small winnings. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable prize winning device for small winnings. It is an operation diagram of the small winning variable winning device seen from the back side. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game in the case where the special symbol 1 jackpot is won during the probability variable state in the fifth embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the time is shortened during the probability variable state in the fifth embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display content when a small win is won in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display content during a small win game. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball passes through a falling gate during a small winning game in the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball passes through a falling gate during a small winning game. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the vehicle does not pass. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the small winning ends, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content during the potential state (invincible mode). FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a fifth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 5 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario storage area. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a fifth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning entrance passage process performed by MPU in the main control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows fall gate passing processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows small hit control processing 5 performed by MPU in a main control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing state command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hit related process 5 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passage related process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 5th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing typically the composition of ROM of a main control device in a 6th embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a sixth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot state flag, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small win state flag. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variation condition determination process performed by MPU in a main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation start process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation start process 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening/closing process 6 performed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the round execution process performed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot interruption process performed by MPU in the main control device in 6th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows ending execution processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit control processing 6 executed by MPU in the main control device in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end process performed by MPU in the main control device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 7th embodiment. It is an enlarged view which expanded the flow path unit in 7th Embodiment. (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the closed state (buried state) in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the closed state (buried state). ) is a perspective view schematically showing a ball flow when (a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the open state (protruding state) in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory is in the open state (protruding state). ) is a perspective view schematically showing a ball flow when (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the second symbol hits during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when the second symbol hits during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball enters the ball. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a loss during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents when a ball is flowing down a delay path during special figure 2 fluctuation in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the ball is flowing down the normal path during the special figure 2 variation during the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents when V passes during a small winning game in the form. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when V is not passed during a small winning game in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in the time saving state in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents when time saving state A is set. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the seventh embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 random number table, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 2 random number table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 7 table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special drawing 1 jackpot type selection table, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number 7 table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 7 table. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern 7 table. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first time-saving variation pattern table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second time-saving variation pattern table. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an open scenario 7 table. It is a schematic diagram showing typically the flow of transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when passing the small winning V in the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of RAM of the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a delay path state flag. It is a flowchart which shows timer interrupt processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving number update process performed by MPU in a main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot control processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit control processing 7 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electric accessory opening/closing process 7 performed by MPU in the main control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows main processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 7th embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the winning related process 7 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit start processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time-saving production related process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process at the time of the end of a common map performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 7 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variable display setting process for special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passage monitoring process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control device in a 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 8th embodiment. (a) is a plan view schematically showing a case where the opening/closing door 3650f of the second attacker 3650 in the eighth embodiment is in an open state, and (b) is a plan view schematically showing the second attacker 3650 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a plan view schematically showing a case where an opening/closing door 365Of is in a closed state. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in 8th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the flow of a ball to a 2nd attacker. It is a partial enlarged view of the game board in 8th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the flow of the ball to the 2nd ball entry port. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during a jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a ball enters a second ball entrance. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the ending screen of the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram after the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot C in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the special figure 2 game screen. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents when a special figure 2 small hit is won in the normal state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display content when a special figure 2 small hit is won in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents when winning. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents during the special figure 2 game during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the end of the final special figure variation during the time saving state in the eighth embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of display contents of time. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 8 table in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st winning type selection 8 table in 8th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of an operation scenario 8 table in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario type in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second random number 8 table in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern selection 8 table in the eighth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of eight tables for normal/potential definite use in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of eight tables for time saving/probable variable use in the eighth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in an eighth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. FIG. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing special symbol fluctuation start processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting prize winning process 8 performed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process performed by MPU in the main control device in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 8 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing command determination processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the number-of-pending ball related processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the process at the time of a decrease performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit control processing 8 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving termination process performed by MPU in a main control device in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing game state update processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the ninth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 10th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the stop screen of the jackpot symbol in the 10th embodiment, and (b) is an example of the display content during the symbol confirmation period in the jackpot C in the 10th embodiment. FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in a tenth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a second random number table of 10; It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a specific winning motion pattern table. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in a tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control device in 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the tenth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows specific ball entry processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 10th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of 10th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the content of a performance in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a high probability second winning random number 11 table 202ja in a modification of the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a low probability second winning random number table 202ja in a modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a random number 11 table 202jb. It is a flowchart which shows the through-gate passage process 11 performed by MPU in a main control device in the modification of 7th Embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modification of the seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the common figure effect setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 7th Embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a special drawing 2 small hit is won during a probability state in a modified example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display contents when the special drawing 2 is won during the probability state. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot content suggestion production in a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the performance result of a jackpot content suggestion production in a modification of the fourth embodiment. This is a diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a ROM of a sound lamp control device in a modification of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the sound lamp control device in a modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a suggestion mode selection table in a modification of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a suggestion effect selection table in a modification of the fourth embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modification of the fourth embodiment. It is a flow chart showing jackpot related processing 11 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in a modified example of the fourth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows small hit related processing 11 executed by MPU in a sound ramp control device in a modification of a 4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion production setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 11 for special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the suggestion mode setting process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in the modification of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the liquid crystal performance execution management process 11 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 4th Embodiment. (a) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the ending performance executed during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot in the eleventh embodiment. (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the probability change state and time saving state before the river breakthrough effect is executed in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough performance in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough performance in the eleventh embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the river is successfully broken through and the continuation of the chance zone is notified. (a) shows an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment when the river is successfully breached in the river breakthrough performance and the transition to the potential state (RUSH) is notified. (b) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment when the river breakthrough effect fails and the transition to the normal state is notified. FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the gaming state and the transition of performance mode in the case where the chance zone is set after the end of the jackpot in the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the small winning effect of the second special symbol is being executed, which suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol is likely to be a jackpot. It is a figure showing an example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number table in the 11th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the jackpot type selection table in 11th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability variation table in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the potential probability change table in the 11th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of a main control device in an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning effect selection table in the 11th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning sound selection table in the 11th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing gaming state update processing 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the second winning process 12 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the eleventh embodiment. 12 is a flowchart showing state command processing 12 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flow chart showing small hit related processing 12 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 12 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time-saving effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display setting process 12 for special figure 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 11th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 12th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the number of probability changes in the normal mode in the twelfth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 81 when it transitions to a normal state by making it pass. (a) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the preparation state after transitioning to the consecutive game mode and before becoming able to actually acquire prize balls in the twelfth embodiment. (b) is a diagram showing a game ball entering the second ball entrance in the preparation state in the twelfth embodiment and winning a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a 3-symbol display device 81. FIG. (a) In the twelfth embodiment, the reserved ball of the first special symbol is released at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive game mode, and the second special symbol is drawn twice in a row during the preparation mode. It is a diagram showing the change over time in the performance mode when the second special symbol is a small hit in the third lottery of the second special symbol. It is a diagram showing a change over time in the performance mode when the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition to is the lottery result corresponding to "Jackpot D12". (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit random number table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern scenario table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a diagram. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the jackpot type selection table in 12th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variable probability/probability start table in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a time-saving start table in the twelfth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal start table in the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RUSH table in the twelfth embodiment. It is a diagram. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 off fluctuation processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 12th embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 off stop processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 12th embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process 13 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal effect setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 12th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows variable display setting processing 13 for special figure 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 12th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the preparation state setting process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 12th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number table in the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the jackpot type selection table in 13th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variable probability/probability start table in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 14 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the thirteenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a modification of the 13th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing a falling path of a game ball in a state where the electric accessory is closed in a modification of the thirteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing a downstream path of the game ball in a modified example of the thirteenth embodiment. It is a figure showing the falling path of the game ball in the state where the object is opened. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 14th embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a variation pattern scenario table in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the jackpot type selection table in 14th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation A table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a probability variation B table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a normal table in the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine in the fourteenth embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 15th embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing the falling path of the game ball in the time saving state in the 15th embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the falling path of the game ball in the potential state in the 15th embodiment. It is a diagram. In the 15th embodiment, it is a diagram showing the gaming state and the transition of the performance mode when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won during the probability variable state. (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of variation per special symbol in a probability variable state in the fifteenth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 in the fifteenth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the number of time reductions has passed during the jackpot fluctuation. It is a schematic diagram which schematically showed the content of the 2nd winning random number table in 15th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability variation table in the 15th embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the potential probability change table in the 15th embodiment. It is a schematic diagram. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device when the river breakthrough effect is started in a modification of the eleventh embodiment.

<First embodiment>
Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 87, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there are provided a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side of the inner frame 12, and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the front frame serves as an opening/closing axis on the side where the hinges 19 are provided. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively unlocked by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates 16a is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 12). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination part 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 that is cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and includes a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, rails 61, 62, and general prize winnings. It is configured by assembling the opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device 65, the out opening 66, the through gate 67, the variable display unit 80, etc., and its peripheral portion is connected to the inner frame 12 ( (see Figure 1). The base plate 60 is made of wood with thin plates pasted together, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 cannot be seen from the front side of the base plate 60 by the player. The general winning hole 63, the first ball entrance hole 64, the second ball entrance hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board It is fixed from the front side of 13 with tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is installed, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is installed at the inner side of the outer rail 62. An arcuate inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area where games are played is formed by the behavior of the players. The game area is an area defined by the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and an outer edge member 73 made of resin that connects the rails (a region where prize openings, etc. are arranged, and where shots are fired). (area where the ball falls).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 12) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated.

At the upper right side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2), a first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) is provided. The first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and mainly displays the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. be exposed. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 (37A, 37B) displays whether the ball has entered the first ball entry port 64 (upper first ball entry port 64b1, lower first ball entry port 64b2); It is configured so that it can be used depending on whether the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 or not. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 2, in this embodiment, an upper first ball entrance 64b1 and a lower first ball entrance 64b2 are provided as triggers for lottery of the first special symbol. In the following description, when both the upper first ball entrance hole 64b1 and the lower first ball entrance hole 64b2 are indicated, the term ``first ball entrance hole 64'' will be simply used.

Specifically, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable probability state, a time saving state, or a normal state, and to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a variable state by a lighting state. It also indicates whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a definite variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, a missed symbol, or a small winning symbol by the lighting state, and the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state. , a 7-segment display device displays the number of rounds during jackpots and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it is determined to be a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots determined here are 15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R time saving jackpot, and 2R time saving jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the variation ends, but also display a symbol according to the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot. .

Here, "15R variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds and then shifts to (sets) a high probability state of special symbols and a variable probability state which is a high probability state of normal symbols. ``2R probability variable jackpot'' is a jackpot where the maximum number of rounds is (sets) a transition to a probability variable state where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds. In addition, "15R time-saving jackpot" is a time-saving state that is a low probability state of special symbols and a high probability state of normal symbols after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times). ) is a jackpot that is set, and a "2R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which a time-saving state is set for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 50 times) after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. .

In addition, the "high probability state of special symbols" is a state in which the jackpot probability of special symbols is increased, in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to a special gaming state. The "high probability state of normal symbols" is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbols (second symbol) is increased, in other words, a state of the game where it is easy to release the electric accessory 64a.

In addition, in the game state (variable probability state, time saving state) in which the "high probability state of normal symbols" is set, not only the probability of winning the normal symbol (second symbol) increases, but also the lower first ball entrance 64b2 As the time when the electric accessories 64a associated with are released, a longer time is set compared to the gaming state (potential state, normal state) in which the "low probability state of normal symbols" is set. When the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (open state), the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 compared to when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state (closed state). This will make it easier to win prizes. Therefore, during the probability change state or the time saving state, the ball is likely to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the electric accessory 64a is released due to a hit than in the normal state. In addition, during the probability change state or time saving state, the winning probability of the second symbol does not change, and the time when the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened and the electric accessory is determined by one hit. At least one of the number of times 64a is opened may be changed. In addition, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is released in one hit are not changed. Only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to the normal state.

A plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged in the gaming area, from which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. Furthermore, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central part of the gaming area. The variable display device unit 80 is configured to display information on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B when a ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting winning). A third symbol display device 81 includes a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a “display device”) that displays a variable display of a third symbol (decorative symbol) in synchronization with the variable display, and a ball to the through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided, which is comprised of an LED that variably displays a normal symbol (second symbol) using passage as a trigger.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 12), so that, for example, the upper, middle, and lower three Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

In this way, the decorative third symbol is dynamically displayed so as to correspond to the dynamic display of the first symbol (special symbol) displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and the third symbol is dynamically displayed. By configuring the display mode to be notified to the player, the display mode during the dynamic display period can be unified ( For example, even if the processing load on the main control device 110 is reduced by using a blinking display mode that repeatedly turns on and off in 0.1 second units, the movement of the third symbol set in the audio lamp control device 113 For example, by variably setting the display mode based on the lottery result of the first symbol (special symbol), a dynamic display mode (the first symbol) that can suggest to the player that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. (a presentation mode using three symbols) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a normal symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (the "○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 It is configured to be in an activated state (operated to an open state) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter in the high probability state of the normal symbol (variable probability state, time saving state) than in the low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, potential state) as the gaming state. It is set so that As a result, during the high probability state of the normal symbol, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that more winning lots can be drawn than in the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

Therefore, during the variable probability state and during the time saving state, it is possible to set the game state as a game state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2. In addition, in this embodiment, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 differ depending on whether the variable probability state is set as the gaming state or the time saving state is set. The same display mode is set as the background mode displayed on the screen, so that it is difficult for the player to grasp the current gaming state. With this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of guessing the current gaming situation.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in a plurality of game states in which high probability states of normal symbols are set, the dynamic display mode of the third symbol and the background mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same. The display mode is configured to be set. Therefore, when the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is unified, it is possible to prevent the player from easily understanding the current gaming state based on the operating status of the electric accessory 64a. be able to.

In addition, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the open time or number of openings of the electric accessory 64a per hit, etc. If the state is such that it is easy for the ball to enter the first ball entry opening 64b2, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is set to be shorter during the variable probability state or time saving state than during the normal state, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state. Furthermore, the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 64a for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board in the right area (right side area) of the variable display unit 80. The through gate 67 is configured so that a portion of the balls flowing down the game board among the balls shot onto the game board can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times a ball passes through the through gate 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and displayed on a second symbol holding lamp (not shown). is also lit up. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided, corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

Next, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment will be briefly explained. In the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols and high probability state of normal symbols), time saving state (special symbol state), There are four game states: low probability state for symbols and high probability state for normal symbols) and potential state (high probability state for special symbols and normal state for normal symbols). The system is configured such that the potential state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

In other words, when the probability state is set, the variable time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By specifying the time period to be shorter than when the time period is set, it is possible to most efficiently carry out a lottery that is advantageous to the player.

In the first embodiment, in order to make the lottery with the second special symbol more advantageous to the player than the lottery with the first special symbol, in the lottery with the second special symbol, the first variable The first specific winning hole 65a of the winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period of time (1.5 seconds x 1 time, 0.2 seconds x 6 times, or 0.06 seconds x 8 times). Therefore, in the lottery for the second special symbol, even if you do not win the jackpot, you are given many opportunities to enter the ball into the first special winning hole 65a and win the prize ball, so the lottery for the first special symbol This is more advantageous than a lottery. Hereinafter, to simplify the explanation, the winning lottery result in which the first specific winning hole 65a is opened will be referred to as a "small win."

In the lottery of the second special symbol, the first specific prize opening 65a is opened not only when there is a jackpot but also when there is a small prize. can continue to increase. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of a potential state. In a general gaming machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in this embodiment, the probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous ). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is in progress, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating due to a stop symbol of a jackpot or small win, the other fluctuation display will show the remaining fluctuation time and lottery. Regardless of the result, a missed stop symbol will be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent a problem in which the other variable display is confirmed to be a win or a small win while a jackpot or a small win is being executed, and the jackpot or small win is started overlappingly.

Here, with reference to FIG. 2, various configurations provided in the game area and the flow of balls fired toward the game area in the first embodiment will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 of this embodiment is configured so that the game area is divided into a left side area and a right side area by a variable display unit 80 disposed in the center of the game area. .

In this embodiment, the fired ball does not pass through the foul ball prevention valve 68 until the operating handle 51 is rotated 20 degrees (rotated clockwise) from the initial position (state not rotated by the player). The ball is fired with a certain firing strength. Therefore, the fired ball finally flows backward through the firing channel formed between the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 and becomes a foul ball. The foul ball that flows backwards passes through the starting position of the firing channel (the lower left end of the outer rail 62 shown in FIG. 2), and the foul ball opening (see FIG. 1) that communicates with the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 1). (not shown) flows down and is refluxed into the upper tray 17. With this configuration, even if a foul ball occurs when the player operates the operation handle 51 to fire the ball at a desired firing intensity, the foul ball remains in the firing path and the game is not played. It is possible to prevent interference with the

Next, when the amount of operation (rotation amount) of the operation handle 51 is in the range of 20 to 80 degrees from the initial position (state where the player is not rotating it), the ball is fired with a firing intensity that is such that it flows down the left side area described above. In the range of 81 degrees to 120 degrees (81 degrees to 120 degrees, which is the maximum amount of rotation of the operating handle 51), the ball is fired with such a firing intensity that it flows down the above-mentioned right side area.

In other words, the present embodiment is configured such that the area in which the ball falls can be varied based on the amount of operation of the operation handle 51, that is, based on the player's operation. Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the first embodiment, when a game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the operation amount of the operation handle 51 is adjusted so that the ball flows down the left side area. Instead of a game played by adjusting the ball (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), a game is played by adjusting the operation amount of the operating handle 51 so that the ball flows down the right side area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, while a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, the player only has to keep the operation handle 51 rotated to the upper limit (rotated 120 degrees). Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player play an appropriate game.

Next, the left side area of the game board 13 will be explained with reference to FIG. Details will be described later, but in the first embodiment, the gaming states are a normal state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state), a time saving state (special symbol low probability state: normal symbol high probability (time saving) ) state), probability variable state (special symbol high probability (probability variable) state: normal symbol high probability (time saving) state), potential state (special symbol high probability (probability variable) state: normal symbol low probability (normal) state) is configured to be set. In addition, a jackpot game state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result wins a jackpot, and a small win game state that is executed when the special symbol lottery result wins a small win are set. It is configured.

Among them, when the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state are set as the game state, the variable display unit 80 is set so as to play a left-handed game in which the ball flows down the left side area of the game board 13. A right-handed game in which the game method is guided to the player using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 provided, and the ball is caused to flow down to the left side area of the game board 13 when a potential state is set. The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used to guide the player on the gaming method so that the player can play the game. Furthermore, during the jackpot game state or the small win game state, the system is configured to guide the player's gaming method (left-handed game, right-handed game) according to the game status before winning.

In addition, as a guidance method for each game method (left-handed game, right-handed game), for example, the game method suitable for the current game state can be always displayed, or the game method can be configured so that the game method that is suitable for the current game state is always displayed, or when the game method is changed only after switching. It may also be configured to display the gaming method. In addition, between left-handed games and right-handed games, a gaming method that is likely to be set for a long period of time (left-handed games in this embodiment) is set as a normal game, and when a gaming method other than the normal game (right-handed games) is played. It may be configured such that the game method is constantly displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the guidance is not displayed when the player is forced to play a left-handed game.

As in this embodiment, when there are two types of gaming methods for the player to select, by not displaying the display mode that guides one gaming method, it is possible to guide the other gaming method. In other words, it is possible to guide a plurality of gaming methods depending on whether or not to display one display mode. In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used in order to guide the player about the gaming method, but the display mode is not limited to this. As described above, a configuration may be used in which the player is notified of the gaming method by not displaying a specific display mode, or a configuration may be used in which the player is notified using audio or lamps.

In the left side area of the game board 13, a through gate 67 and a general prize opening 63 are arranged. Further, an upper first ball entry port 64b1 is provided at a lower position of the variable display unit 80 so that a ball flowing down the left side region can enter therein. A lower first ball entrance hole 64b2 to which an electric accessory 64a is attached is provided below the upper first ball entrance hole 64b1. This electric accessory 64a allows the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 when the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 when the normal symbol (second symbol) lottery is won after the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is configured to variably operate from a closed state (first state) in which it is difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b to an open state (second state) in which it is easy (possible) for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2. ing.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is in a state where the lottery can be executed (the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 is not executed, and a jackpot game or a small prize game is executed). When a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 in the state in which the lottery is not performed, the special drawing 1 lottery is executed. That is, the ball entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is an opportunity to execute the lottery of the first special symbol.

In addition, in a state in which the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) cannot be newly executed (a state in which the fluctuation of the special symbol 1 has already been executed, or a jackpot game or a small prize game is being executed) When a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2, a storage means is provided for storing the right of the ball to enter up to a predetermined number (four). ing.

Therefore, even while the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being executed, the player can continue to play the game, so that the performance of the game can be improved. In addition, in this embodiment, it is provided only in the storage means for storing the right of the ball to enter and the first special symbol.

80% of the balls flowing down the left side area due to left-handed games pass through the through gate 67, and about 8% of the fired balls (8 out of 100 balls) enter the upper first ball entrance 64b1. A spherical flow path is formed by structures such as multiple nails and windmills. In addition, when the electric accessory 64a is in the closed state, about 0% of the balls enter the lower first ball entrance port 64b2, and when the electric accessory 64a is in the open state, the ball enters the lower first ball entrance hole 64b2. The ball flow path is formed so that about 25% of the balls enter 64b2. That is, it is difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (the electric accessory 64a is open), the upper first ball entrance 64b1, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 (the electric accessory 64a is closed) in that order. It is configured so that

As described above, the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are configured to provide the player with the privilege of paying out prize balls in addition to the privilege of executing the lottery of the first special symbol. It is configured so that four prize balls are paid out to the player every time one ball enters the ball. In addition, in this embodiment, the same number (4) of prize balls are awarded both when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 and when a ball enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a different number of prize balls may be set for each ball.

On the other hand, in the right side area of the game board 13, a second ball entrance 640 and a first variable winning device 65 are provided. The second ball entry port 640 is configured so that a second special symbol lottery is executed when a ball enters, and a plurality of slots are arranged so that about 50% of the balls flowing down the right side area enter the second ball entry port 640. A ball channel is formed by the nail. Here, the balls that do not enter the second ball entrance 640 flow down toward the first variable winning device 65 provided below the right side area.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the time (variable time) from when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed until the lottery result is displayed is long. The configuration is such that a short variation time (1 second) is set in a state where a variable time of time (10 minutes) is set and a potential state is set.

In other words, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, rather than playing a left-handed game and entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 to execute the lottery of the first special symbol, play a right-handed game. It is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entry port 640 in order to draw the second special symbol, but since a long variable time (10 minutes) is set, the game efficiency is reduced. It becomes very bad. Therefore, in the normal state, the player plays a left-handed game and executes the lottery of the first special symbol.

In addition, since the second ball entrance 640 is set with one prize ball, if a right-handed game is performed with the normal state set, the ball fired in the right-handed game at a rate of about 50%. Even if the ball enters the second ball entry port 640, the number of balls will not increase.

Further, when a time saving state or a variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the state becomes a high probability state with normal symbols, and the electric accessory 64a becomes easy to open. However, since the through gate 67, which triggers the lottery of normal symbols to open the electric accessory 64a, is provided only in the left area, the lower first ball entrance 64b2 makes it easier for balls to enter than in the normal state. The player is configured to play a left-handed game in order to cause the ball to enter the ball.

On the other hand, in a state where the probability state is set as the game state, the normal symbol is in a low probability state and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to release, and as described above, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. Since the variable time (1 second) is set, it is an appropriate game to play the right-handed game and execute the lottery of the second special symbol. Here, in the first embodiment, only the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small win (winning probability approximately 1/2). If you win a small win, the first variable winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 1.5 seconds) as a small winning game, and you win 10 points for each ball that enters the first variable winning device 65. The configuration is such that a number of prize balls are awarded.

That is, when the probability state is set as the game state, by having the player continue to play the right-handed game, a second special symbol lottery with the aim of winning a small win, and a small win game, can be executed continuously.

As shown in FIG. 2, a second variable winning device 650 is provided at the bottom of the gaming area. The second variable winning device 650 operates to open the rotating door 650f when a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol so that the rotating door 650f is moved toward the front and the second specific winning opening 650a is in an open state where a ball can be won. It is something that will be done. This second variable winning device 650 is configured so that both balls flowing down the left side area due to a left-handed game and balls flowing down the right side area due to a right-handed game can enter the ball equally. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed in which the second variable prize winning device 650 is opened, the gaming method used before the jackpot game may be continued, and the player is informed of the gaming method. It is possible to suppress complicated changes.

When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (upper first ball entry port 64b1, lower first ball entry port 64b2) described above, a first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is activated. ) is turned on, and as a result of the first ball entry switch being turned on, a jackpot lottery is performed in the main controller 110 (see FIG. 12), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. It will be done.

On the other hand, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ball entrance switch is turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is a winning port from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, and the second ball entry port 640 is a prize entry port from which one ball is paid out when a ball enters. This is one of the winning slots where the ball is paid out as a prize ball. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64. are set to be the same (both are 4 balls), and are made to be different from the number of prize balls paid out (1 ball) when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640, but when a ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1. The number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2 may be different from the number of prize balls paid out when the ball enters the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

In this case, for example, the number of prize balls for the upper first ball entrance 64b1 is set to 4, the number of prize balls for the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2, and a normal state in which it is difficult for balls to enter is set. In the case where the ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1, the benefit for the ball entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 is increased, and when a specific game state (variable probability state, time saving state) is set, the lower ball becomes easier to enter the ball. Even if balls frequently enter the first ball entry port 64b2, the player may not receive an excessive amount of prize balls. The number of prize balls in the ball entrance 64b2 may be set to 5, and when a specific game state (variable probability state, time saving state) is set, a large benefit may be given to the player.

In addition, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 (for example, both are 5 It may also be configured as

An electric accessory 64a is attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2. This electric accessory 64a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 64a is in a closed state (regulated state), making it difficult for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry opening 64b2. There is. On the other hand, if the "○" symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol lottery) that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 64a is in an open state (allowed state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2.

As mentioned above, during the variable probability state and the time saving state, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during the normal state, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is shorter, so the variable display of the second symbol is , the symbol "○" is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is in the open state (allowed state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change state or the time saving state, the time during which the electric accessory 64a is opened is also longer than during the normal state. Therefore, during the variable probability state or the time saving state, it is possible to create a state in which the ball enters the lower first ball entry opening 64b2 more easily than during the normal state.

As described above, the lower first ball entrance 64b2, that is, the ball entrance to which the electric accessory 64a is attached, can be in a state where it is easy for a ball to enter depending on the set game state (first state); A state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the ball (second state) can be set. In other words, from the perspective of ease of ball entry, the first state is an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the second state is an unfavorable gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (more disadvantageous than the first state). becomes.

Here, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (when the first special symbol lottery is executed) and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (the second special symbol lottery ), the probability of a jackpot is the same, and if the low probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery will be executed with a predetermined low probability (for example, 1/280) of a jackpot. When a high probability state of the special symbol is set, a lottery is executed in which a jackpot is achieved with a predetermined high probability (for example, 1/30) that is easier to win than in a low probability state. However, the type of jackpot that is selected (set) in the case of a jackpot is set to be different between the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment allows the player to choose how to shoot the ball (playing method) as "left-handed (left-handed game)" or "right-handed game," depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. It can be changed to ``Uchi (right-handed game)''. Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. A ball that flows down the gaming area and does not land in any of the winning holes (ball entrances) 63, 64b1, 64b2, 65a, 640, 650a passes through the out hole 66 as shown in the figure. You will be guided to the ball ejection path where the ball will not be discharged. The out port 66 is arranged below the lower first ball entry port 64b2. Although the first embodiment has a configuration in which the game area has one outlet 66, other configurations may be used, and two or more outlet ports 66 may be provided.

By providing a plurality of out ports 66 in this way, it is necessary to form a ball flow path for ultimately concentrating the balls fired into the game area in one location (the location where the out ports 66 are provided). Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the various devices constituting the gaming area can be increased. Specifically, for example, it is preferable to provide an outlet exclusively for balls that have flown down the left side area and an outlet exclusively for balls that have flown down the right side area. Further, when a plurality of out ports are provided, it is preferable to provide a notification means for notifying the player that the ball entry port is the out port. This prevents a situation in which a ball enters the entrance (actually, an exit) provided in the gaming area but is not awarded any benefits, causing discomfort to the player. be able to.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls using a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 12), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen, FIG. 4(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol (a decorative symbol dynamically displayed in response to the dynamic display of the first symbol) is composed of nine types of main symbols numbered from "1" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a rear pattern imitating various animals with numbers ``1'' to ``9'' attached thereto. Specifically, for example, the number "1" is assigned to the rear design imitating an elephant, and the number "2" is assigned to the rear design imitating a lion. In this way, by displaying the third symbol in a manner that combines the backward symbol and numbers, it is possible for the player to see the display manner of the backward symbol ( The type of the third symbol can be roughly determined by the color, outline, size, etc.), and when the third symbol is stopped and displayed, the number attached to the rear symbol can be identified to ensure the type of the third symbol. can be made to understand.

In addition, in the present first embodiment, the combination of the rear symbol and the number forming the third symbol is not varied, but the combination of the rear symbol, the display mode, and the number may be changed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a lottery result different from the lottery result (type of the third symbol) predicted by the player while the third symbol is dynamically displayed. It is possible to provide a game that never gets boring. In addition, by setting the combination pattern of the backward symbol and numbers as the third symbol to be changed regularly according to the lottery result of the special symbol or the set gaming state, for example, the combination pattern of the backward symbol and the number as the third symbol can be The accuracy of predicting the game content based on the display mode (combination of backward symbols and numbers) that is stopped and displayed can be improved, and the fun of making predictions can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result performed by the main controller 110 is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display ends. It is structured so that a jackpot will occur later. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special symbol lottery result is configured to win a small hit, and when the special symbol lottery result is a small win, the main symbol is a specific combination (for example, "341"). It will stop and be displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, the combination of the main symbols that are stopped and displayed differs depending on the lottery results of the special symbols, so that the lottery results are easier to understand for the player, but this is not limited to this. For example, the same main symbol may be stopped and displayed whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small win.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, with approximately 3/4 of the upper portion being the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the rest being the main display area Dm. Approximately 1/4 of the lower side is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

In the main display area Dm, three symbol rows L1, L2, and L3, upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. In each of the symbol rows L1 to L3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row L1 to L3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row L1 to L3 is periodically scrolled from left to right (usually from right to left) for variable display. will be held. In particular, in the upper symbol row L1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row L2 and lower symbol row L3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, third symbols are displayed in three rows on the left, middle, and right for each of the symbol rows L1 to L3. The left vertical line, middle vertical line, and right vertical line of this main display area Dm are set as effective lines V1 to V3, respectively. In addition, a diagonal line going down to the right and a diagonal line going up to the right in the main display area Dm are set as effective lines V4 and V5, respectively. In each game, a third symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) on the active lines V1 to V5 in the order of upper symbol row L1→lower symbol row L3→middle symbol row L2. This stopped display state is maintained for at least 1 second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a certain period of time (more than 1 second), the player can check whether the combination of the third symbol corresponds to a jackpot (if the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is one). Furthermore, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the active lines V1 to V5 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot video (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

In addition, if the combination of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed is a combination that corresponds to a loss and there are held balls, after a 1-second stop display (confirmed display), a variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the held balls will be displayed. is started. In addition, when a plurality of reserved balls exist, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest ball entered in terms of time.

On the other hand, if there is no held ball and the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the special symbol is stopped and displayed for one second (confirmed display), the third symbol will continue to be displayed in a stopped state. . This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) passes or a new ball enters either the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. If a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed (confirmed display), a demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration screen) indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. .

It is rare for a player to continuously shoot a ball for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) without a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. In many cases, when the third symbol is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds), it is because the player has quit playing, and the pachinko machine 10 is not playing any games at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, a player who is about to select the pachinko machine 10 to start a game can easily determine whether or not a game is being played based on the presence or absence of a demonstration effect being displayed. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 before a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, then A variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided in a laterally elongated manner below the main display area Dm. This sub-display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that entered the first ball entrance 64. In this embodiment, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37) is displaying a variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol. In this case, the number of balls entered is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the sub-area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. The number of pending symbols displayed in this sub-display area Ds allows the player to clearly recognize the number of pending balls whose variable display is currently pending. In this embodiment, only the variable display of the first special symbol can be held, and the variable display of the second special symbol is not stored. Therefore, only the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

In addition, in the display screen shown using FIG. 4(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm, and a third symbol is dynamically displayed (fluctuating display) in the main display area Dm. 4 (a) in all game states. It is not necessary to form each area shown in .For example, when making the player pay attention to an effect that suggests whether or not the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot, the display area of the sub-display area Ds may be used. It may be configured to perform an impressive performance by reducing (erasing) and expanding the display area of the main display area Dm. On the other hand, when executing an effect that changes the display mode of the reserved symbols or a game guide explaining future game content by emphasizing it in the sub display area Ds, the display area of the main display area Dm is reduced and the sub The display area Ds may be enlarged to provide effects that are easy for the player to understand.

Furthermore, depending on the set gaming state and the performance mode being executed, an area for displaying the number of pending symbols or an area for executing a preview performance may be formed in the main display area Dm, or a sub-display area may be formed. An area for performing variable display of the third symbol may be provided in the display area Ds.

Next, an example of display contents actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained with reference to FIG. 4(b). On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main symbols and sub-symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. Furthermore, three main symbols and three sub-symbols are displayed on the right and left sides of the display area Dm. These show the lottery results of the first special symbol in the normal state. Furthermore, a small area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in the upper center portion of the main display region Dm. In this small area Dm1, a variable display of three third symbols in a simple manner consisting only of numbers "1" to "9" is executed. Also in this small area Dm1, the jackpot starts when three third symbols composed of the same numbers are stopped and displayed. In addition, the reason why the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol is displayed in a simpler manner than the third symbol indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is that it is basic in the normal state and the variable probability state. This is because the lottery for the first special symbol is executed at the same time, and the lottery for the second special symbol is rarely executed.

Therefore, by configuring the variable display of the first special symbol to be mainly executed to be displayed in a larger display area, the game result is displayed more clearly. In addition, in the following explanation, the variable display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each gaming state (in the normal state and variable probability state, the variable display of the first special symbol corresponds to this) will be referred to as the main variation, and the A variable display of a special symbol that is rarely executed when playing a regular game method (in a normal state or a probability variable state, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponds to this) is referred to as a sub-variation.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a state in which the probability change state is set, a long period of time (up to 10 minutes) The system is configured such that the fluctuating display (dynamic display) is executed and the gaming state shifts from the variable probability state to the potential state at the timing when the variable display is started. During the period in which the probability state is set (the period from when the fluctuating display that results in a jackpot is executed until the fluctuating display ends and the jackpot game starts), the lottery of the second special symbol will not be performed. The game is configured so that a game aiming at a small win is executed. Therefore, when the potential state is set as the gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol becomes the main variation, and the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the sub variation.

In the small area Ds1 in the sub-display area Ds, the same number of reserved symbols imitating bird faces as the number of reserved balls of the first symbol are displayed. At the start of the variable display based on the corresponding reserved balls, the reserved symbols are shown to enter the inside of the house displayed on the right side in the small area Ds1. This allows the player to easily understand that the variable display corresponding to the reserved balls has started. Further, in the small area Ds1, a preview effect is sometimes performed such as a reserved symbol making a special movement or another character appearing.

In this embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to four times, and may be held up to three times. It may be set to less than or equal to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, it may be configured such that entry of the ball into the second ball entry port 640 can be suspended. In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved pitches may be displayed as a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four areas may be displayed in a mode that differs by the number of reserved balls. (For example, it may be displayed in different colors or lighting patterns.) Moreover, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps in a lit state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the variable display effect of the third symbol in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 5 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the variable display performance that is executed in response to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the changing situation of each special symbol. Here, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be briefly explained. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display (dynamic display) for indicating the lottery result of the second special symbol. ) and can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

Then, in a state where variable probability states (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) are set, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed, the high probability state for normal symbols occurs. is configured to shift to a low probability state, and the gaming state shifts from a variable probability state to a probability state. While this potential state is set, the fluctuating display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery results of the second special symbol is set short, so it is not possible to perform many lottery draws of the second special symbol. This is the period when it is possible (special map 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In this embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2, so during the period when the potential state is set as the gaming state, the small win A game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) that is advantageous to a player who frequently executes a small winning game that is executed when a player wins a prize and can win a large number of prize balls.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the period in which the probability state is set (special symbol 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that won the jackpot in the probability variable state. (Special figure 1 jackpot is changing), so when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the jackpot game will be executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) are set consecutively, it is possible to continuously provide various benefits to the player. I can do it.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won with one special symbol (special symbol 2) and a small winning game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special symbol 1) is interrupted (variation display period When the small winning game ends, the suspended measurement of the variable display period is restarted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantageous period from being subtracted during the small winning game, so regardless of the number of small winning games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a fixed special figure 2 fluctuating advantageous period.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special symbol 1), the other special symbol (special symbol 2) which is changing is displayed in a stop display mode indicating a loss. It is configured to force a stop. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where a small winning game is executed during a big winning game.

As described above, in this embodiment, the content of control over the fluctuation of the other special symbol is varied depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (a lottery result that can give the first benefit to the player), the fluctuation of the other special symbol is used to indicate that the lottery result is a loss. If the lottery result of one special symbol is a small win (a lottery result that can give the player a second benefit different from the first benefit), the other special symbol changes. is stopped until the provision of the second benefit ends (until the small winning game ends), and restarted after the provision of the second benefit ends. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a loss, the variation of the other special symbol is configured to be executed as is.

With this configuration, based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the lottery contents (the lottery result and the period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be varied, and the player's It is possible to provide a variety of gameplay features.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can provide a benefit to the player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is changed depending on the content of the benefit. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that grants the player the most advantageous benefit (jackpot game), the lottery result that corresponds to the change in the other special symbol during execution may not be the lottery result that grants the benefit. Even if there is a lottery result, we will forcibly stop the fluctuations so that the lottery results are out of order, and suppress excessive benefits from being given to players. In this case, in order to prevent the award of benefits based on the lottery of the other special symbol during the small winning game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol that is being executed, the variable display is displayed. It becomes possible to interrupt only period measurement.

Therefore, in a state where multiple special symbols (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2) are changing at the same time, the least advantageous benefit for the player is awarded, and the most advantageous benefit that will be awarded later is awarded. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which players are no longer played, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which players are uncomfortable from occurring.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the potential state is set as the gaming state, a short period (0.5 seconds) of variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), The game is configured so that small winning games can be executed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the probability state as the gaming state is the case where a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability variable state is set, and the condition for the probability state to end is set as the first special symbol. is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed, so the jackpot game is executed after the first advantageous period that is advantageous to players who frequently execute small winning games. A second gaming period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set consecutively, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

Next, the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. As shown in FIG. 5, when the jackpot game state is set as the game state, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays the contents of the jackpot game, such as the round of the jackpot game currently being executed. The round number display mode to show the number of rounds, the acquisition amount display mode to show the number of balls acquired, the type to suggest the type of the jackpot game being executed (number of rounds, game state set after the jackpot game ends) The number of jackpots won during a period in which a non-normal state (variable probability state, potential state, time saving state) is continuously set without the normal state being set as the suggestion display mode or gaming state (so-called number of consecutive chances) ) etc. are displayed in a jackpot game display mode.

Then, at the timing when the jackpot game ends (see FIG. 5(a)), if the current jackpot type is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) that sets a variable probability state as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, the As shown in 6(a), a performance mode (chance zone mode) is displayed that aims to set a potential state advantageous to the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6(a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game will be explained. FIG. 6(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 6(a), on the ending screen of the jackpot game, a comment "Entering the chance zone!!" indicating that a variable probability state will be set after the jackpot game is finished is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, a character 811 that is displayed during a period in which the variable probability state or the probability state is set is displayed. This character 811 is configured so that it does not appear (is not displayed) during the period in which the normal state is set, and the period in which the character 811 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is A gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state is created.

With this configuration, the player can understand the outline of the currently set game state by knowing whether or not the character 811 is displayed on the display screen, so that the player can play the game in an easy-to-understand manner. can be provided.

In addition, a comment "Aim for RUSH!!" is displayed in the main display area Dm to aim for the potential state to be set. Further, in the guide display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, characters "left-handed hit" are displayed as a guide display mode for making the player play a left-handed game. This makes it possible for the player to easily understand that when a variable probability state is set, the player will play a left side game aiming at the left side area. In addition, in this embodiment, the second variable winning device 650, which is opened during the jackpot game, is able to control both the ball fired in the left-handed game (the ball that flowed down the left area) and the ball fired in the right-handed game. , are arranged at positions where prizes can be won (downstream positions of the gaming area (see FIG. 2)), and the characters ("left hit", "right hit") displayed in the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game, i.e. The gaming method guided during the jackpot game is configured to be varied according to the gaming state before the jackpot game is executed.

Specifically, the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is determined, and if it is determined that the gaming state is one in which a left-handed game is guided (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state), a guidance display during the jackpot is displayed. If it is determined that the player is in a gaming state (probable state) in which a right-handed game is guided, "left-handed game" is displayed, and "right-handed game" is displayed as a guidance display during a jackpot. Thereby, when a jackpot game is executed, it is possible to save the effort of having the player change the playing method.

In addition, the main display area Dm includes a special figure 1 display area Dm1 for displaying a third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 display area for displaying a third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Dm2 is formed, and according to the example shown in FIG. 6(a), "777" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 as a display mode corresponding to the jackpot game currently being executed (ending screen being displayed). Displayed. In addition, in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, "-" is displayed as a non-variable display mode indicating that the second special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner.

In this embodiment, if the special symbol has not been displayed in a variable manner even once after the power is turned on, the above-mentioned non-variable display mode is configured to be displayed. By displaying this non-fluctuation display mode, it becomes possible for the player to predict the past game history (variation history of special symbols).

Although the present embodiment is configured to display the above-mentioned non-fluctuation display mode, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be configured to display a predetermined display mode (initial display mode) that indicates a deviation. Alternatively, if it is determined that the elapsed period since the last variable display was executed has exceeded a predetermined period (for example, 30 minutes), the display displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 and the special figure 2 display area Dm2. The display may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner such as an initial display mode or a non-variable display mode.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. In a state where the variable probability state is set as the game state (see FIG. 5(b)), the game state is such that it is easy to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by playing the left-handed game. In other words, the variable probability state is a state where the electric accessory 64a is easy to open because the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, and the ball is easy to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2.

The contents of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during this probability change state will be explained with reference to FIG. 6(b). FIG. 6(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the probability change state. As shown in FIG. 6(b), the comment "In the chance zone" indicating that the current gaming state is a variable state is displayed in the sub-display area Ds in a manner that scrolls horizontally (from right to left). Ru.

In the main display area Dm, an effect in which the character 811 moves (runs) in the horizontal direction (from left to right) is displayed. Then, "Left hit" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3, and a fluctuating display indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuating is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. Furthermore, at this point, the second special symbol has not been newly changed from the state shown in FIG. 6(a) (because the ball has not entered the second ball entrance 640 due to the right-handed game). , the non-variable display mode "-" is continuously displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a plurality of movement display patterns of the character 811 are stored in the variable probability state, and the lottery results (results of judgment) of the first special symbol in the variable probability state are The motion display pattern of the character 811 is configured to be set differently accordingly. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting whether or not the lottery result of the first special symbol will win the jackpot during the probability change state.

After the display screen shown in FIG. 6(b) is displayed, when a variable display is executed to indicate that the lottery result of the first special symbol has won the jackpot, the display shown in FIG. 7(a) is displayed. The screen will be displayed. FIG. 7(a) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents displayed when the fluctuating display of winning the jackpot is started in the probability variable state. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming state shifts from the variable probability state to the probability state at the timing when the variable display indicating that the first special symbol has won a jackpot is started during the variable probability state. It is configured as follows.

Therefore, since the gaming state shifts to a state advantageous for the player (potential state) at the timing when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, the first special symbol fluctuates in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 of the display screen. While the variable display mode indicating that the display is being executed is displayed, the display mode of the effect pattern 813 (display mode of "333") to indicate to the player that the gaming state has shifted is displayed as a stop display. be done. As a result, the player can be made to think that the gaming state has shifted from the variable probability state to the probability state due to the stopped display of the performance symbols 813. In addition, in this embodiment, since the same display mode as the display mode of the third symbol is used as the production symbol display mode, the production symbol display mode that is stopped and displayed is a display for showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It can be made to look like a mode.

This embodiment is configured so that a large number of small winning games can be executed by frequently displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner during the period in which the probability state is set. Therefore, at least during the period in which the probability state is set, "Right hit" to indicate the right hit game to the player is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "RUSH enters!! Hit right!" to indicate that the potential state is set as the gaming state is displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol winning the jackpot starts to fluctuate, the performance pattern displayed in the main display area Dm is stopped and displayed without changing the performance mode of the special pattern 1 display area Dm1. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the gaming state has changed in accordance with the lottery result of the performance symbols.

Then, during the potential state in which the right-handed game is continuously being executed (while the first special symbol is fluctuating the jackpot), if a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 7(b). As expected, a performance mode is displayed to indicate that the player has won a small prize. Here, the display contents when the potential state is set will be explained with reference to FIG. 7(b). FIG. 7(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the display screen during the potential state.

According to FIG. 7(b), in the state where the potential state is set (during RUSH), when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery, the first special symbol is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. A fluctuating display mode is displayed to suggest that is fluctuating (big winning fluctuating), and a display mode "341" indicating that a small win has been won is displayed in the special drawing 2 display area Dm2. .

Then, a treasure box 812 displayed as a presentation mode during RUSH is opened, and a "V" for indicating a small win is displayed as a presentation pattern 813 for indicating a game result from inside. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the player will win a small win with the second special symbol during the rush state and that the small win game will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first variable winning device 65, which rotates when a small win is won, is provided in the right side area, and the game can be played in the same gaming method (right-handed hitting) as in the potential state. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even if small winning games are frequently executed during the probability state, the player only has to continue playing the right-handed game, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. can.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts during the probability change state, the probability state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the probability state In the state where is set, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is configured to be drawn efficiently.

Therefore, the system was configured to notify the player of the period during which the probable state will be set (based on the fact that the probable state has been set) at the same time as the probable state is set (Fig. 7 (a). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since it is possible to change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, in a state where the probability change state is set, the first special symbol also changes to the second special symbol. Both special designs may also vary.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the potential state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the potential state is set (see FIG. 7(a)), the second Until the special symbols stop changing, it is not possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the potential state, and a problem arises in which the small winning game is not executed for any length of time even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the conditions for transition to the probability state are satisfied (when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variable state), the fluctuation status of the second special symbol (the presence or absence of fluctuation, The structure is configured such that the timing of notifying that the RUSH state has been set is varied based on the determination result.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 5 and 8, when the conditions for transition to the probability state are satisfied (when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variable state), the second special symbol ( The content of the effect when the special figure 2) is changing will be explained. As shown in Figure 5, if the second special symbol is changing at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts in the state where the probability variation state is set (see (c) in Figure 5), the probability variation state is set. Rather than the "chance zone" for indicating the state, a "super chance zone" is displayed that increases the expectation that the RUSH state will be set.

Here, the display contents of the display screen during the "super chance zone" will be explained with reference to FIG. 8(a). FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing a case where a variation in which a jackpot is won with the first special symbol is executed during the second special symbol variation in a variable probability state. In other words, this "super chance zone" is a state in which a potential state is set as a gaming state, but the variable display of the second special symbol executed before the potential state is set is This is a display mode that indicates a state that has not been completed.

When the "super chance zone" is set, a comment indicating that the "super chance zone" is displayed is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a manner that it is moving at a higher speed than in FIG.

Then, in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, a "variation display mode" is displayed to show that the first special symbol is changing, and in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, a potential state is set. The "fluctuation display mode" that has been fluctuating since the point before is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. The display screen of the "super chance zone" shown in FIG. 8(a) is displayed until the timing when the special drawing 2 variation, which is executed across the timing of transitioning the gaming state from the probability variation state to the probability state, ends. When the special figure 2 variation ends (see FIG. 5(d)), a "RUSH" entering screen is displayed to inform the player that the "RUSH" has entered (see FIG. 8(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 8(b), the contents of the screen when entering the "RUSH" via the "Super Chance Zone" will be explained. FIG. 8(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the screen when entering the "RUSH" via the "Super Chance Zone". As shown in FIG. 8(b), in the main display area Dm, a presentation pattern 813 is displayed from inside the treasure box 812, and a display mode is displayed to notify the player that the game has entered the "RUSH" state. Then, "Right hit" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to guide the game method during the rush game. At this point, the special figure 1 display area Dm1 displays a variation display mode to suggest that the first special symbol is changing (changing the jackpot), and the special figure 2 display area Dm2 shows a loss. The display mode "346" is stopped and displayed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the explanation will be continued. During a rush game (RUSH), that is, while the first special symbol is fluctuating to a jackpot, a game in which a right-handed game is performed to frequently draw a lottery for a second special symbol in which a fluctuating pattern with a short fluctuating time is set. is executed. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won with one special symbol (including during jackpot fluctuations), it is possible to win a jackpot with the lottery of the other special symbol. It is configured so that it does not exist. Therefore, in the second special symbol lottery during the rush game, the lottery result will be either a small hit or a loss. The second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small win with a high probability (approximately 1/2).

Therefore, during the rush game, the player wins a small hit with a probability of 1/2, and the game of winning a prize ball through the small win game continues until the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends. In other words, even if you frequently draw the second special symbol during a rush game, you will not win a jackpot by drawing the second special symbol, so you can make full use of the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol. Rush games can be provided.

Then, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends (see FIG. 5(f)), a screen corresponding to the type of jackpot won this time is displayed (see FIGS. 9(a) and (b)). Here, with reference to FIGS. 9(a) and 9(b), the display screen at the end of the rush game (when the special drawing 1 jackpot fluctuation is stopped) will be explained.

FIG. 9(a) is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when a jackpot (jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a))) that is advantageous to the player is set, and FIG. 9(b) 16 is a diagram schematically showing the display contents when the player wins a jackpot (jackpot D (see FIG. 16(a))) which is disadvantageous to the player.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), at the timing when the third symbol ("777") to indicate winning the jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a)) is displayed in the special drawing 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol "346" indicating a miss is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a production pattern 813 (``Super V'') indicating that the player has won a jackpot advantageous to the player is displayed from the treasure box 812, and a comment of ``Congratulations'' is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. In this case, the words "right-handed play", which is the same gaming method as in the potential state, are displayed in the guide display area Dm3.

On the other hand, in FIG. 9(b), at the timing when the third symbol ("666") to indicate winning the jackpot D (see FIG. 16(a)) is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1, In the special figure 2 display area Dm2, the third symbol "346" indicating a miss is forcibly stopped and displayed. Then, a production pattern 813 ("End?") is displayed from the treasure box 812 indicating that the player has won a disadvantageous jackpot, and a comment "Please return to left-handed hitting" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. be done. In this case, in order to indicate to the player that the rush game has ended, the words "left-handed hit", which is the same game method as in the normal state, are displayed in the guide display area Dm3.

Although FIG. 9(b) shows the display screen when jackpot D (see FIG. 16(a)) is won, if jackpot C (see FIG. 16(a)) is won, that is, jackpot D A similar jackpot game is executed, but if the player wins a jackpot in which the game state set after the jackpot ends is more advantageous to the player than jackpot D, the same display screen will be displayed, and when the jackpot game ends, the game will be revived. It is configured to execute a performance that causes a right-handed game to be played as a performance. Thereby, it is possible to provide a surprising performance to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a description will be given of the card forgetting warning screen displayed to the player. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is necessary to insert a card (valued medium) into a card unit installed in association with the pachinko machine 10 in order to borrow balls used in the game. In such a pachinko machine 10, when a player wins a large number of prize balls through a game, a situation occurs in which the player forgets that he has inserted a card into the card unit and forgets to take the card out at the end of the game. I had something to do.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the card forgetting reminder screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is configured to be displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, during a jackpot game in which a prize ball can be won). This can prevent the player from forgetting to take out the card. Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is possible to set a jackpot game in which it is easy to obtain a prize ball and a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball, and furthermore, it is possible to set a game state in which small winning games can be executed frequently in a short period of time. The timing for displaying the card-forgetting warning screen can be set according to the game result (accumulation of the number of prize balls in a predetermined period).

Here, with reference to FIG. 10(a), the display contents of the card forgetting reminder screen will be explained. FIG. 10(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the card forgetting reminder screen. In this way, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is used to display the operation when taking out a card from the card unit, and the comment "Please be careful not to forget to take out the card" is displayed. .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 10(b) to 10(d), the display timing of the card forgetting reminder screen will be explained. FIG. 10(b) shows the case where the first jackpot is "Jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a))", that is, the player wins a jackpot that can award many prize balls in one jackpot game. FIGS. 10(c) and 10(d) are timing charts showing the display timing of the card display (card forgetting warning display), and FIGS. 10(c) and 10(d) show that the first jackpot is "Jackpot A (see FIG. 16(a))" In other words, this is a timing chart showing the display timing of a card display (a card forgetting warning display) in the case of winning a jackpot that can award a large number of prize balls to a player in one jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 10(b), if the first jackpot (a jackpot won when the normal gaming state is set) is jackpot A, a sufficient number of prize balls can be won during the jackpot. Since the card will be awarded, the card display will be executed during the ending period (ED) of the jackpot.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10(c) and (d), if the first jackpot is jackpot C, a sufficient number of prize balls cannot be awarded during the jackpot, and the player Since there is a possibility that a ball may be borrowed by using a card subsequently, the card display is not displayed on the end screen of the first jackpot (jackpot C).

In such a state, in this embodiment, the period from the first jackpot until the normal state is set again is set as the advantageous continuation period, the number of prize balls acquired during the advantageous continuation period is accumulated, and the cumulative result is The card display is executed when a predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) is reached as a card display execution condition.

In other words, if a small winning game occurs continuously after the jackpot C ends and the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuous period exceeds a predetermined amount, the card is displayed on the ending screen of the small winning game. (See FIG. 10(c)), If the number of prize balls during the advantageous continuous period exceeds a predetermined amount due to repeated execution of jackpot C, a card is displayed on the ending screen of the jackpot game. (See Figure 10(d)).

<About transition of gaming state in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of transitioning from one game state to another of the four types of game states set in the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment.

First, a method of changing the gaming state when staying in the normal state will be explained. As described above, in the normal state, playing the game with the left hand tends to increase the lottery frequency of special symbols than playing the game with the right hand, so it is more advantageous for the player to play with the left hand. This is because when the ball is hit to the left, the ball enters the upper first ball entry port 64b1 more easily. As mentioned above, in the lottery of the first special symbol, which is executed based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, a small hit is not drawn, so unless a jackpot is achieved, the number of balls held is endless. It becomes a disadvantageous condition that continues to decrease. In this normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state only when a jackpot is achieved. There are four types of jackpots A to D that can be won in the lottery of the first special symbol. Details of these jackpot types will be described later with reference to FIG. 16(a).

As shown on the left side of FIG. 11, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, when jackpots A and C are determined at a total rate of 65%, after the jackpot ends, the center of FIG. The state shifts to the variable probability state ST2 shown in FIG. In addition, when a jackpot D is determined at a rate of 10% when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in the normal state ST1, after the jackpot ends, the process shifts to the time saving state ST3 shown on the right side of FIG. 11. . On the other hand, when a jackpot B is determined at a rate of 25% in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery, the normal state is set again as the gaming state after the jackpot ends (the normal state is looped). do).

Note that in a normal state, the game is normally played by hitting left-handed and aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1, but if the player intentionally hits right and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. Or, some of the balls hit left may enter the second ball entrance 640, resulting in a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpots (jackpot E to G) that are set when a jackpot is won with the second special symbol. When jackpots E and F are determined at a total rate of 65%, the state shifts to variable state ST2 after the jackpot ends, and when jackpot G is determined at a ratio of 35%, the gaming state is the normal state after the jackpot ends. is set again (loop through normal state).

In this way, if a jackpot is achieved by drawing the first special symbol in the normal state, there is a possibility of shifting to a time-saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state at a rate of 10% (jackpot D). If a jackpot is achieved by drawing the second special symbol in the normal state, the possibility of shifting to the time saving state becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantages when playing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by performing a right hit in the normal state, so that it is possible to suppress irregular games. In addition, in the second special symbol lottery executed in the normal state, a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (10 minutes) is set, so if the gaming efficiency is a left-handed game. Since it is significantly lower than , it is possible to further increase the disadvantages when playing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by performing a right hit in the normal state.

Next, a method of changing the gaming state when the player is staying in the variable probability state will be explained. As mentioned above, in the variable probability state, playing the game with the left hand tends to result in a higher lottery frequency of special symbols than playing the game with the right hand as in the normal state, so it is more advantageous for the player to play with the left hand. becomes. In addition, in the variable probability state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol increases compared to the normal state, so it is advantageous compared to the normal state, but it is disadvantageous compared to the probability state. When the probability variable state ST2 is set, the state shifts to the probability state SP1 upon winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (the special symbol 1 jackpot variation starts).

In addition, in the variable probability state, as in the normal state, the player plays the game by hitting the ball left to the left and aiming at the upper first ball entry port 64b1, while aiming at the lower first ball entry port 64b2 provided below the upper first ball entry port 64b1. I will do it. In other words, during the probability variable state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry opening 64b2 is easily opened. Therefore, the game state becomes such that it is easier to execute the lottery of the first special symbol than in the normal state.

In the variable probability state configured in this way, normally a left-handed game is played and the first special symbol is drawn, but when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the second special symbol is drawn. There is also the possibility of winning the lottery. In this case, when jackpots E and F are determined at a rate of 65% in total when winning the jackpot of the second special symbol, the probability variable state ST2 is set again after the jackpot ends, and the probability is determined at a rate of 35%. When the jackpot G is reached, a time saving state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

In other words, if the lottery for the first special symbol is executed in a variable probability state, it is possible to shift to the probability state that is most advantageous to the player, whereas the lottery for the second special symbol is executed. In this case, the possibility of transitioning to the potential state becomes 0. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantages when playing an irregular game method in which the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by performing a right hit in a variable probability state, so that it is possible to suppress irregular games.

Next, a method of changing the gaming state when the player is staying in the potential state will be explained. As mentioned above, in the probability state, unlike the normal state and the variable probability state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is shortened, so by playing the game with the right hand, it is possible to efficiently draw the second special symbol. . Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to play right-handed than to play left-handed.

In this embodiment, when winning the jackpot of the first special symbol with variable probability state set (first transition condition), and when winning jackpot C with variable probability state and time saving state set It has two transition conditions (second transition condition), and when the first transition condition is satisfied, a potential state is established before the jackpot game starts, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the special symbol. When the second transition condition is established and the second transition condition is established, the potential state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

With this configuration, the most advantageous gaming state (potential state) for the player can be set before or after the jackpot game, allowing the player to play a variety of games. can provide sex.

Furthermore, if the first transition condition is met, the period in which the potential state is set becomes the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, so the period in which the potential state is set can be determined in advance. Therefore, it is possible to easily create an effect to be performed during the potential state in advance (when the potential state is set) in accordance with the period in which the potential state is set.

In addition, if a jackpot C is won by drawing the first special symbol in a state where a variable probability state is set, a probability state can be set both before and after the jackpot game, so the player It is possible to provide unexpected gameplay.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65f of the variable winning device 65. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing to the right side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected as a shaft, and the MPU 201 issues various commands and commands to these via the input/output port 205. Send control signals.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) provided in the power supply device 115. is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like. Further, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but not to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, 630.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply section 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply section 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and generates a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are used to supply necessary voltages to each control device 110 to 114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21. First, details of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 12) provided in the pachinko machine 10 will be explained.

The main control device 110 performs the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device (not shown). Execute. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 13) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display setting of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device, etc. used.

To set the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, select the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small win) lottery and the jackpot type (jackpot symbol). A first win type counter C2 used for the selection of the variation pattern, a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first win random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbols (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Further, a small winning type counter C5 is used to select the small winning type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see Figure 52). The updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a in which counter values are stored for balls entering the first ball entry port 64, and counter values for balls entering the second ball entry port 640. A second special symbol execution area 203b in which values are stored is provided. In this embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 is provided with up to four reserved balls. Therefore, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 during a period when a special symbol can be drawn, such as when a special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner or when a special symbol jackpot game is not in progress, each counter value is When the ball is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a and enters the second ball entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is displayed in a dynamic manner. various settings and control processes for displaying the image (display) are executed. Further, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is used as it is for various settings and control processing for variably displaying the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 during a period in which the first special symbol cannot be drawn during a variable display of the first special symbol or during a jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first ball entrance 64 is less than the upper limit value (four in this embodiment), each counter value is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. be done. Furthermore, if the number of balls reserved for the first ball entrance 64 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (four in this embodiment), each counter value etc. is not acquired and the prize balls (four in this embodiment) are reserved. (a prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball that is paid out to the player. In addition, the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 during a period in which the second special symbol cannot be drawn during a fluctuating display of the second special symbol or during a jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In this case, each counter value etc. is not acquired and only the prize balls (in this embodiment, two prize balls) are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is four for the first ball entrance 64, but it is not limited to this, and may be less than four (for example, three), There may be more than four (for example, eight). Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which no upper limit is provided. In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration was such that the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 (fluctuating display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) is not held, but similarly to the first ball entry port 64, it is possible to store the ball into the second ball entry port 640. may be configured.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 13. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 479), and becomes 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 479 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 479). It is configured to return to . In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 479, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that can take a value from 0 to 479. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 52).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is updated when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. It is stored in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b of the RAM 203 at the appropriate timing. The random number value for the special symbol jackpot is defined in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 15(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and is specified in the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 15(a)). If the value matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. Moreover, the value of the random number that becomes the small win of the special symbol is defined in the small win random number table 202b (see FIG. 15(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be explained with reference to FIG. 15(a). The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set that are determined to be a win in each gaming state in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(a), when the game state is a low probability state of special symbols (normal state, time saving state), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is either "7 or 8", and if it is either "7 or 8", it is determined that it is a jackpot.

In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability state (variable probability state, potential state) of a special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 5", and if it is within the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that it is a jackpot. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, out of the total number of 480 random number counters, two values are defined as values for determining a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol. The probability of hitting the jackpot at that time is 1/240. On the other hand, when the special symbol is in a high probability state, the jackpot probability is 1/80.

Next, the small hit random number table 202b will be explained with reference to FIG. 15(b). The small hit random number table 202b is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win in a special symbol lottery is set. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15(b), in the lottery of the first special symbol, the random number value that results in a small win is not specified. That is, the first special symbol lottery does not result in a small win. On the other hand, in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C1 is within the range of "212 to 432", regardless of the gaming state, and If it is within the range, it is determined that it is a small hit.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that results in a small hit, the first symbol The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a small hit.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol execution area 203b is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the The display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the 1-symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is a jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is the display mode indicated by the value of the first win type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 479. As mentioned above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there are two values of the first winning random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot of the special symbol, and the random numbers "7, 8" are the first winning random number counter C1 as described above. It is stored in the random number table 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 2 among the total number of random numbers that are 480, the probability that the special symbol will become a jackpot is "1/240". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first winning random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot of the special symbol, and the random numbers "0 to 5" are as described above in the first winning random number table. 202a. In this way, the total number of random numbers is 480, and the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 6, so the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is "1/80".

Furthermore, as mentioned above, there are 221 values of the first winning random number counter C1 that are small wins in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the random values "212 to 432" are stored in the small winning random number table 202b. ing. In this way, the total number of random numbers is 480, and the total number of random numbers that result in a small win is 221, so the probability of a small win with the special symbol is "221/480" (approximately 46%).

Returning to FIG. 13, the explanation will be continued. The value of the first winning type counter C2 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first win type counter C2 and the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)). becomes. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16(a).

The small hit type counter C5 is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the small win type (small win A to C) will be selected. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG. 16(b).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured such that it is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table 202f. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the main process. Incidentally, the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIGS. 17 to 19) that stores a random value for determining one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It is located inside.

The variation pattern selection table 202f defines a plurality of data tables for selecting variation patterns (see FIGS. 17 to 19). In this variable pattern selection table 202f, a plurality of variable pattern selection tables are set according to the gaming state, and a variable pattern selection table is set for each of the success/failure determination results. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 232, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 232). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal starting port (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the time of execution and stored in the second symbol holding ball execution area of the RAM 203.

The random number value for a normal symbol win is defined in the second win random number table 202c (see FIG. 15(c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second win random number counter C4. If it matches the random number value defined in the second winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) has won. The details of this second winning random number table 202c will be explained with reference to FIG. 15(c).

FIG. 15(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second winning random number table 202c. In this second winning random number table 202c, there are 11 random numbers for winning normal symbols in the low probability state (normal state, potential state) of normal symbols as the gaming state, and the range is "0 to 10". ”. The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, and the total number of random numbers that become a win is 11, so the probability of a normal symbol winning is "11/233".

On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (variable probability state, time saving state), there are 232 random numbers that will be a hit for the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, and the total number of random numbers that become a win is 232, so the probability of a normal symbol winning is "232/233". In this way, in this embodiment, the random number value for winning a normal symbol is configured to have a difference of about 20 times between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol. There is. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 in the case of a hit with the normal symbol are also different from the low probability state of the normal symbol. The configuration is such that the probability state is more advantageous (the ball is easier to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2).

When the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and a variable display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds on the second symbol display device. Then, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "0 to 10", it is determined to be a win, and the variable display on the second symbol display device is ended. Afterwards, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) by lighting up, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "twice for one second". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that it is a win, and the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends. Afterwards, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) by lighting up, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is opened only "twice for one second". In addition, in this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the normal electric accessories, and the number of openings may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not impair the gameplay.

The common figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A normal symbol fluctuation pattern table 202g (see FIG. 20) is used to select a normal symbol fluctuation pattern based on the value of the regular symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 when a ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67. ) is defined in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. The details of this common pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described later with reference to FIG. 20.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 198), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 52).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters, etc., and the main controller 110 controls the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters, etc. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device can be executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 14 to 20. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this embodiment. The ROM 202 includes, in addition to the above-mentioned first random number table 202a, small winning random number table 202b, and second winning random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection table 202d, a small winning type selection table 202e, and a fluctuation pattern selection table. At least a table 202f and a regular figure fluctuation pattern table 202g are provided.

First, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d will be explained with reference to FIG. 16(a). The jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is , are defined in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202d, and the first winning The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), "jackpot A" is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 24". It is stipulated that This "jackpot A" has 15 rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that will be "Jackpot A", so if the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "Jackpot A" will be determined. The proportion of these cases is 25% (25/100).

If "Jackpot A" is selected, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, a variable probability state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variable flag 203g is set to on), and the number of time savings of 10,000 times is set. is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). In other words, after "Jackpot A" ends, a variable probability state will be set until the next jackpot is won.

“Jackpot A” is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. Furthermore, since the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning of normal symbols are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state becomes a game state in which more advantageous games can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the potential state than in the variable probability state, and among the plurality of gaming states, the next one after the potential state is It becomes an advantageous gaming state.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "25 to 49", and "Jackpot B" is defined in association with it. This "jackpot B" is a jackpot game in which the same jackpot game as the above-mentioned "jackpot A" is executed, the number of rounds is 15, and a jackpot that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). The game is set. After the end of "Jackpot B", the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to be set to a different value depending on the gaming state at the time of winning.

If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f, and if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time saving state or the variable probability state, the value of "0" is set in the time saving counter 203f. A value of "100" is set. In other words, if you win "Jackpot B" while the normal state is set, the normal state will be set after the jackpot ends, whereas if you win "Jackpot B" during the time saving state, , a time saving state (100 times) is set after the jackpot ends. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 25 counter values that become "Jackpot B", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot B" is determined. The proportion of these cases is 25% (25/100).

"Jackpot B" is one of the jackpot types that has the most rounds like "Jackpot A", so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot ends. , it is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "jackpot A".

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "50 to 89", and "Jackpot C" is defined in association with it. This "jackpot C" has two rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened even in a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in the second special symbol lottery. The game is configured so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between winning the "big win C" and winning the "small win."

With this configuration, when a winning game in which the first attacker is released is executed, it is difficult for the player to understand whether a big winning game or a small winning game has been executed. As mentioned above, this embodiment is configured so that during the jackpot fluctuation period of the first special symbol, the player is in a potential state (RUSH state) in which small winning games can be executed frequently. The player plays the game while expecting that the winning game in which one attacker is released will be a small winning game. In other words, by providing a game period in which the player does not desire a situation in which the jackpot game that the player most desires would normally be executed, it is possible to provide novel gameplay.

After the end of "Jackpot C", the probability change flag 203g is set to ON, and the time saving counter 203f is configured to have a different value set depending on the gaming state at the time of winning. If the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, a value of "10000" is set in the time-saving counter 203f, and if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving state or the variable probability state, the value of "10000" is set in the time-saving counter 203f. A value of "0" is set. In other words, if you win "Jackpot C" while the normal state is set, the variable probability state will be set after the jackpot ends, whereas if you win "Jackpot C" during the variable probability state or the time saving state. In this case, a potential state is set after the jackpot ends.

In this way, by configuring the gaming state when a jackpot is won so that the gaming state that is set after the jackpot is different even if the jackpot is of the same type, the player can simply aim to win a jackpot. Not only this, but also the set game state can be watched, which can improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the probability state is set as the gaming state, the game state is the most advantageous to the player. There are two setting conditions: the first setting condition where the special symbol jackpot fluctuation starts when is set, and the second setting condition where jackpot C is won when the probability change state and time saving state are set. are doing. In other words, the expectation level (probability) at which the potential state is set is configured to vary depending on the gaming state when winning the jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to gradually increase the level of expectation for the player that a gaming state advantageous to the player will be set as the game progresses (according to the gaming state that is set). This makes it possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 40 counter values that will be "jackpot C", so if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "jackpot C" will be determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). "Jackpot C" is one of the jackpot types with fewer rounds and a shorter opening period than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. However, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, this is the only jackpot type that can set the most advantageous potential state for the player as the gaming state that is set after the jackpot ends, so it is set after the jackpot is won. In terms of gaming status, this type of jackpot is more advantageous than "jackpot A" and "jackpot B".

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 99", and "Jackpot D" is defined in association with it. This "Jackpot D" has two rounds, and a jackpot game (same as "Jackpot C") that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set.

After the end of "Jackpot D", the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF, and the time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "0". In other words, if the jackpot C is won, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends. Since this "Jackpot D" has the same jackpot game content as the above-mentioned "Jackpot C", the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is configured to operate in the same opening operation as the small win game. ing.

After the end of "Jackpot D", the normal state is set as described above, so the fluctuation display of winning "Jackpot D" (jackpot fluctuation) in the state where the variable probability state is set is When executed, after small winning games are frequently played during jackpot fluctuations, the jackpot game is executed, and then a normal state is set.

In other words, in the potential state (RUSH state) when "Jackpot D" is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the normal state occurs after "Jackpot D" in which the same opening action as the small winning game is completed. Since this is set, it is possible to make the player think that the potential state in which the jackpot game will be executed has ended.

Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 counter values that become "Jackpot D", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, "Jackpot D" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). "Jackpot D" is one of the jackpot types that has fewer rounds and a shorter opening period than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B", so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. becomes. Regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state is set after the jackpot ends, which is disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state that is set after the jackpot. In other words, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment has four jackpot types (“jackpot A” to “jackpot D”) as the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). There is. Among them, in two jackpot types (“jackpot A” and “jackpot B”), a jackpot game is executed in which the second attacker (second variable prize winning device 650), which is opened only during the jackpot game, is the opening target, In the other two jackpot types (“Jackpot C” and “Jackpot D”), a jackpot game is executed in which the same first attacker (first variable winning device 65) as the small win game is opened.

That is, in the first embodiment, the main jackpot games ("jackpot A", "jackpot B") whose purpose is to make the player win a prize ball as a special symbol jackpot, and the game state are varied. A secondary jackpot game (“Jackpot C”, "Jackpot D") is configured to be executable.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the gameplay allows the player to obtain prize balls through a small winning game rather than a jackpot game, it is set to make it difficult to obtain a large amount of prize balls during a jackpot game. (Even if a jackpot game in which only a small amount of prize balls can be won depending on the type of jackpot is executed), a jackpot game whose purpose is to vary the game state while suppressing discomfort to the player. Can be set.

On the other hand, as the type of jackpot based on the lottery of the second special symbol, "jackpot E" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". This "jackpot E" has 15 rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is opened. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 5 counter values that become "Jackpot E", so when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, "Jackpot E" is determined. The proportion of these cases is 5% (5/100).

If "Jackpot E" is selected, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, a variable probability state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variable flag 203g is set to on), and the 10,000 time saving number is set. is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). In other words, after "Jackpot E" ends, a variable probability state will be set until the next jackpot is won.

"Jackpot E" is one of the jackpot types with the largest number of rounds, so it is advantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. Furthermore, since the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning of normal symbols are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state becomes a game state in which more advantageous games can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the potential state than in the variable probability state, and among the plurality of gaming states, the next one after the potential state is It becomes an advantageous gaming state.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "5 to 64", and "Jackpot F" is defined in association with it. This "jackpot F" has two rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 60 counter values that become "Jackpot F", so when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol, "Jackpot F" is determined. The ratio is 60% (60/100).

If "Jackpot F" is selected, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, a variable probability state is set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variable flag 203g is set to on), and the 10,000 time saving number is set. is set (a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f). In other words, after "Jackpot F" ends, a variable probability state will be set until the next jackpot is won.

“Jackpot F” is one of the jackpot types with the least number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. Furthermore, since the jackpot probability of special symbols and the probability of winning of normal symbols are set to be higher than in the normal state, the game state becomes a game state in which more advantageous games can be played than in the normal state. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is configured so that it is easier to give advantageous benefits to the player in the potential state than in the variable probability state, and among the plurality of gaming states, the next one after the potential state is It becomes an advantageous gaming state.

“Jackpot G” is associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of “65 to 99”. This "Jackpot G" has two rounds, and a jackpot game is set in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is opened. Out of the 100 counter values that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 35 counter values that become "Jackpot G", so when the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, "Jackpot G" is determined. The proportion of people with disabilities is 35% (35/100).

If "Jackpot G" is selected, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the normal state will be set at the end of the jackpot (the probability variable flag 203g will be set to off), and the number of time savings will be 0. is set (a value of 0 is set in the time saving counter 203f).

“Jackpot G” is one of the jackpot types with the least number of rounds, so it is disadvantageous in terms of the number of prize balls that can be won. Furthermore, since the gaming state that is set after the jackpot ends is the normal state, it is also disadvantageous in terms of the gaming state that is set after the jackpot. In other words, it is the most disadvantageous jackpot type.

As explained above, in the first embodiment, there is a case where a jackpot is won in the lottery using the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and a case where a jackpot is won in the lottery using the second special symbol (special symbol 2). It is the same that the percentage of setting the variable probability flag 203g on after the jackpot ends is 65% (65/100), but the percentage of setting 15 rounds as a jackpot game (50% for special map 1) , 5% for Special Figure 2), percentage of the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) being selected as the opening target (50% for Special Figure 1, 5% for Special Figure 2), gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot The rate at which a value of 10000 is set in the time saving counter 203f after the end of the jackpot when is in a time saving state and a variable probability state (that is, a high probability state of normal symbols) (25% for special pattern 1, 65% for special pattern 2) are configured differently.

In this way, by varying the contents of the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot ends depending on the type of special symbol that won the jackpot, it becomes possible to provide players with various gameplay features, and improve the game. You can improve your interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned contents are configured to differ depending on the type of special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be configured such that only a part of the above-mentioned contents differs. In addition to the above-mentioned contents, for example, the number of rounds to be set can be changed by setting the number of rounds of the jackpot game to a number of rounds (for example, 7 rounds) that can only be set for the jackpot type corresponding to special drawing 1. , the rate at which the probability change flag 203g is set to on may be changed.

Also, on the condition that the ball passes through a specific area (for example, an area through which the winning ball of the second variable winning device 650 can pass) during the jackpot game, the variable probability flag 203g is set to be turned on after the jackpot ends. In a gaming machine configured as follows, the probability of a ball passing through a specific area may be different between the jackpot type corresponding to special figure 1 and the jackpot type corresponding to special figure 2. Further, the data table for selecting a variation pattern for indicating the lottery result in each gaming state set after the end of the jackpot may be configured to be different depending on the jackpot type.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 16(a), in this embodiment, both the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) can win in one round game. Although the upper limit value is set to "10", the upper limit value may be different between the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device 650). In addition, the upper limit of the opening operation in the round game may be configured to vary depending on the type of jackpot won (or the type of special symbol that won the jackpot).

Next, details of the small winning type selection table 202e will be explained with reference to FIG. 16(b). This small winning type selection table 202e is a data table that is referred to in order to determine the type of small winning when a small winning occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2). In this small win type selection table 202e, a corresponding small win type is defined for each value range of the small win type counter C5.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), "small win A" is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "0 to 93". This "small win A" is a small win type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state only once for 1.5 seconds during the small win game.

Out of the 100 random numbers that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 94 random numbers that result in a "small win A", so when a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is a "small win A". The rate at which this is determined is 94% (94/100).

In addition, "small win B" is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "94 to 98". This "small win B" is a small win type that sets an open state for 0.2 seconds x 6 times during a small win game. Out of the 100 random numbers that the small hit type counter C5 can take, there are 5 random numbers that will be "small win B", so if the second special symbol lottery results in a small win, it will be "small win B". The rate at which this is determined is 5% (5/100).

Furthermore, the value "99" of the small win type counter C5 is defined in association with "small win C". This "small win C" is a small win type that sets an open state of 0.06 seconds x 8 times during the small win game. Out of the 100 random numbers that the small win type counter C5 can take, there is only one random number that will be a "small win C", so if a small win occurs in the special symbol lottery, it will be a "small win C". The ratio is 1% (1/100).

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 19. As described above, in this variation pattern selection table 202f, a random number value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display is defined from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 17, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f includes a normal table 202f1 for determining a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) in a normal state, and a time saving/probable variable table for determining a fluctuation pattern in a time saving state and a definite variable state. It includes at least a table 202f2 and a potential table 202f3 for determining a fluctuation pattern in a potential state. The specific contents of these tables will be explained with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. Note that in each of the tables shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the fluctuation time is expressed in milliseconds, but in the following explanation, the fluctuation time is expressed in seconds for easy understanding.

First, the normal table 202f1 will be explained with reference to FIG. This normal table 202f1 is a table that is referred to when the gaming state is in the normal state. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table 202f1. As shown in FIG. 18, the normal table 202f1 includes a random value (variation type (counter value of counter CS1) is defined.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determined when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol is that the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 50" and is associated with normal reach (20 seconds), Super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the range "51-100", super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the range "101-150", and super reach is associated with the range "151-198". C (30 seconds) is associated.

On the other hand, if the first special symbol is out of the lottery and this normal table 202f1 is referred to, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) The correspondence relationship between the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the selected variation pattern varies depending on the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is within the range of 0 or 1, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to a value in the range of "0 to 70". A variation pattern of a miss (12 seconds) is associated, and a range of "71 to 150" is associated with a miss normal reach (20 seconds). Additionally, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the value in the range of "151 to 170", and super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the value in the range of "171 to 198". It is being

On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls in the first special symbol is 2 or 3, a variation pattern of short (8 seconds) corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS1 in the range of "0 to 70". As the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, a variation pattern with a long reach (12 seconds) is associated with a range of "71 to 130", and a variation pattern with a deviation from a long reach (20 seconds) is associated with a range of "131 to 170". ing. In addition, as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, super reach A (30 seconds) is associated with the value in the range of "171 to 185", and super reach B (30 seconds) is associated with the value in the range of "186 to 198". It is being

Note that the process of selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol by referring to the normal table 202f1 (see S505 in FIG. 35) is faster than the process of subtracting the reserved ball of the first special symbol (see S303 in FIG. 33). is also executed later. Therefore, the normal table 202f1 is never referred to when there are four reserved balls.

In this way, when the number of balls on hold is small (0 or 1), a variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be selected than when the number of balls on hold is large (2 or 3). With this configuration, when the number of reserved balls is small, it is possible to secure time to store the reserved balls and make it difficult for the variable display to be interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from getting bored with the game. On the other hand, when there are many balls on hold, the fluctuation time becomes short and it becomes difficult to accumulate balls, so when the number of balls on hold reaches the upper limit (4 balls), balls are sent to the first ball entrance 64. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he has lost money.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the normal table 202f1 is referred to, 600 seconds (10 minutes) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the long winning variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, If the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small win, a small win long variation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, When the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss, the long fluctuation A (600 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, when the player plays right-handed in the normal state and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, a variable time of 600 seconds is set each time, so the gaming efficiency is much worse than when the game is played left-handed. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player normally plays right-handed.

Next, details of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19(a). This time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a high probability state of normal symbols (that is, a time saving state or a probability variable state) is set as the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), this time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is used to determine the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and stop type of special symbol (properness/failure determination result). A random value (counter value of the variation type counter CS1) is defined. Note that, unlike the normal table 202f1 described above with reference to FIG. 18, the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is configured so that a different variation pattern is not selected depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. are doing.

In other words, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is difficult to always secure the reserved ball of the first special symbol because the game is played aiming at the upper first ball entrance 64b1 while playing the left-handed game. There is a possibility that a period may occur in which the lottery of the first special symbol is not executed (the first special symbol is not changing). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, the normal table 202f1 is configured so that a variation pattern with a long variation time is likely to be selected. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the problem that in the normal state, a state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is not executed continues for a long time, and the player becomes bored with the game.

On the other hand, the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 shown in FIG. This is the referenced data table. During this time saving state and variable probability state, the electric accessory 64a is frequently released, so that the game state is such that the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily stored.

In this way, when a game state is set in which the reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily accumulated, the change occurs when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small, similar to the normal table 202f1 described above. If a configuration is added that makes it easier for long-time variation patterns to be selected, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) variation, which is executed when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol decreases after a break in the game, is added. The fluctuation time becomes long, making it difficult to play games efficiently during the time-saving state or the probability-variable state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the variable pattern table (time saving, variable probability state) that is referred to in the gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which reserved balls of the first special symbol can be easily accumulated, that is, the high probability state of the normal symbol. The probability variation table 202f2) is changed so that the variation pattern selected does not differ depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (so that a variation pattern with a long variation time is not selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is small). ) is configured. Thereby, it is possible to efficiently execute games in a time-saving state and a variable probability state.

Further, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, if a jackpot is won in a state where a variable probability state is set, the variable probability state changes to a potential state at the timing when the jackpot variation starts. It is configured to move to Specifically, when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is drawn in a state where the probability variable state is set and the lottery result (win/fail determination result) is a jackpot, the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 is used. When the winning special variation (600 seconds) is selected, the gaming state becomes a potential state while the winning special variation (600 seconds) is being executed, and when the winning special variation ends, special figure 1 The special drawing 1 is stopped and displayed in a combination showing that the lottery result is a jackpot, and the jackpot game is started.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to be able to perform lottery and variable display at the same time, while the potential state is set (the winning special symbol of special symbol 1 (while the second special symbol is being executed), the second special symbol can be drawn. In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display period (fluctuating time) for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol is set to a short period (1 second) only in the potential state, and only in the second special symbol. It is configured so that you can win a small prize. With this configuration, while the potential state is set (while the winning special variation of special symbol 1 is being executed), the lottery of the second special symbol is frequently held, and the player can win many prize balls.

As described above in FIG. 19(a), in this embodiment, if a jackpot is won on the special drawing 1 with the variable probability state set, the time will vary from 60 seconds to 600 seconds depending on the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1. The configuration is such that a fluctuation time of seconds is set, and this fluctuation time directly becomes the duration of the potential state. Therefore, as a special symbol lottery result, it is possible to draw the attention of the player not only to the result of whether or not he won the jackpot (judgment result) but also to the selected variation pattern (variation time). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the second special symbol lottery is executed and the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 is referred to, 60 seconds (1 minute) is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the long winning variation (60 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and 2. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the small win long variation (60 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take, and the second If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a long loss fluctuation (60 seconds) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. As a result, if you play right-handed in the time saving state or variable probability state and the second special symbol lottery is executed, a variable time of 60 seconds will be set each time, so the gaming efficiency will be much more efficient than playing left-handed. Getting worse. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed in a time-saving state or a probability-variable state.

Next, details of the potential confirmation table 202f3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19(b). This potential probability table 202f3 is a table that is referred to when selecting a variation pattern when a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), this potential confirmation table 202f3 is used to determine the type of variation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and stop type (appropriateness determination result) of the special symbol. A numerical value (counter value of the variation type counter CS1) is defined. In addition, the potential probability table 202f3 is configured so that a different variation pattern is not selected depending on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, similar to the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 described above.

This potential probability table 202f3 is used when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the period when the jackpot variation of special symbol 1 is being executed during the probability variation state, or when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the time saving state or during the probability variation state. When you win a jackpot that is the jackpot type of "jackpot C" and select the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and second special symbol (special symbol 2) that will be executed after the jackpot game ends. Referenced.

This potential probability table 202f3 is selected when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol with respect to the contents stipulated in the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 described above with reference to FIG. 19(a). The difference is that the value of the variation type counter CS1 defined for each variation pattern is different, and the variation time of each variation pattern selected in the lottery of the second special symbol is different, Other than that, they are the same. Detailed explanation of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 19(b), the fluctuation pattern determined when the first special symbol lottery results in a jackpot is normal fluctuation (60 seconds), the range "40 to 119" is associated with a super variation (180 seconds), and the range "120 to 198" is associated with a special variation (600 seconds).

On the other hand, if the first special symbol is out of the lottery and this potential confirmation table 202f3 is referenced, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (the value set in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d) ) and the out-middle fluctuation (30 seconds) are associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When the second special symbol lottery is executed and the probability table 202f3 is referred to, 1 second is set as the variable time regardless of the lottery result. That is, when the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the short hit fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and 2. If the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the small win short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second If the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the loss short fluctuation (1 second) is associated with the entire range (0 to 198) of the possible values of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Thereby, it is possible to perform a large number of drawings (variations) of the second special symbol during the potential state.

Next, details of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. 20. As described above, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern table 202g is a table that is referred to in order to select a normal symbol fluctuation pattern when a normal symbol lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 20, the ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern table 202g includes the value range of the ordinary symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation pattern (variation time) for each gaming state at the time when the lottery of ordinary symbols is executed. are defined in association with each other.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, when the gaming state is the normal state or the probability state, that is, the low probability state of normal symbols, the full range of possible values of the common symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 ( 0 to 198) is associated with a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds. Similarly, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, a variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds is associated with the entire range of values (0 to 198) that the normal pattern variation type counter CS2 can take.

On the other hand, when the gaming state is a short time state or a variable probability state, that is, a high probability state with normal symbols, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is within the range of "0 to 198" and the variation time is a 3 second variation. Patterns are associated.

Note that in the first embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation pattern variations are provided only in the case of the potential state, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even in the normal state and the variable probability state, variations may be made in the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and when the normal symbol lottery is executed in the probability state, the variation time is 1 second or 3 seconds. The configuration may be such that one of the types is set, and the number of variation times is not limited to two types, and more variation times may be selectable. The more variation there is in the variation time, the more difficult it becomes for the player to predict the variation time, so it is possible to have the player perform consecutive right-handed hits more reliably during the probability state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the gaming state and the value of the acquired common symbol variation type counter CS2, but in addition to that, the variation time of the normal symbol is set based on the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is also possible to use a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of drawings of the special symbol, a configuration in which the fluctuation time is changed based on the number of drawings of the special symbol, or a configuration in which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set by a method that combines the various configurations described above. Specifically, from the time the gaming state shifts to the potential state until the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), 1 second is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time, and after that (for example, , 51 to 100 times) may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time.

In this way, by measuring the number of special symbol variations (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the end of the previous jackpot, and configuring the variation time corresponding to the measurement result to be selected and executed. , During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to make the player play the game while creating a sense of expectation so that more advantageous fluctuation times (for example, short fluctuation times) are executed more frequently. can.

In addition, while the even-numbered special symbol lottery is being executed after the gaming state shifts to the potential state, 1 second is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time, and otherwise (odd-numbered times), It may be configured such that 3 seconds is set as the normal symbol variation time. In this way, by configuring the fluctuation time of the normal symbol to be changed based on the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the fluctuation time, so that You can make him hit right-handed consecutively. In addition, in this case, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol may be longer when the special symbol lottery is not being executed (longer than when the special symbol lottery is being executed), or the variation time of the special symbol may be longer. It is preferable to configure the system so that the smaller the number of stored drawings, the longer the fluctuation time of the normal symbols becomes.

Further, when setting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol based on the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol, it is preferable to configure such that the larger the number of reserved balls of the regular symbol, the easier it is to select a long fluctuation time. By configuring in this way, the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to make it difficult to accumulate the number of reserved balls for normal symbols and the pachinko machine 10 that is adjusted to make it easier to accumulate the number of reserved balls for normal symbols, It is possible to equalize the number of normal symbol drawings.

Next, details of the RAM 203 will be explained with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 21, the RAM 203 includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol execution area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, and a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Number counter 203e, time saving counter 203f, probability variable flag 203g, special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h, special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i, winning state storage area 203j, small winning flag 203k, special figure 1 variable time counter 203m, special figure 2 variable It has at least a time counter 203n, a medium jackpot flag 203o, a medium small hit flag 203p, a special pattern 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, a medium pattern short fluctuation flag 203t, a winning counter 203u, a special pattern 1 temporary stop flag 203v, and other memory areas 203z. ing.

The first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area (first special symbol execution area) and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). The areas respectively store values of a first winning random number counter C1, a first winning type counter C2, a small winning type counter C5, and a fluctuation type counter CS1.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the value of each counter is acquired, and the acquired data is distributed to four holding areas (first holding area to Among the vacant areas of the fourth reserved area, the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when a special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is changed to the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol execution area 203b stores a determination value (counter value) for executing the special symbol lottery, similar to the first special symbol execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. In this second special symbol execution area 203b, each counter value acquired at the timing when the starting winning to the second ball entrance 640 is detected is stored.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, like the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, has one execution area (normal symbol holding ball execution area) and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). ). A second winning random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is distributed to four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). ) are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas. That is, similar to the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data corresponding to the winnings are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a winning lottery of normal symbols is performed, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the first pending area of the normal symbol pending ball storage area 203c is set in the execution area. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery of winning of the normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first holding area to the execution area, the first holding area becomes vacant, so as in the case of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, the data is stored in other holding areas. Shift processing is performed to shift the winning data to a holding area with an area number one smaller. Further, data shifting is also performed only for the reservation area in which winning data is stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d displays a variable display of special symbols (first symbol display device 37, This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, the maximum value is 4. is incremented by 1 (see S1704 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new special symbol variable display is executed (see S303 in FIG. 33).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of pending balls N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S304 in FIG. 33, S304 in FIG. 47). (See S1705). The reserved ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the first special symbol held ball counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of reserved pitches itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of pending balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol pending ball counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual number of pending balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if there is a deviation from the pitch count, the deviation can be corrected by the next received held pitch count command.

The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of balls on hold based on the number of balls on hold command, and displays the number of balls on display for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of balls on hold each time the number of balls on hold changes. Send pitch count command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved pitches notified by this display number of reserved pitches command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e sets the number of reserved balls (the number of times of standby) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 up to four times. This is a counter that counts up to The value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of reserved balls in the variable display in the normal symbol) is initially set to zero, and as the ball passes through the through gate 67, the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Each time, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S1904 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed in a variable manner.

When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired. , the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see S1905 in FIG. 49). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 4, nothing new is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1903 in FIG. 49: No reference).

The time saving counter 203f is a counter for counting the number of variations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving state. After the jackpot ends, the time saving counter 203f is set with a value corresponding to the winning jackpot type. Then, the time saving counter 203f is decremented by 1 in the game state update process that is executed immediately after setting the start of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (see S308 in FIG. 36). When drawing a normal symbol, if the value of this time saving counter 203f is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a time saving state, and the validity of the normal symbol is determined by referring to the table for high probability times. . On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0, it is determined that the normal state is a normal symbol, and the validity determination of the normal symbol is executed with reference to the table for low probability times.

The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not a high probability state of the special symbol is set, and when set to on, indicates that the special symbol is in a high probability state. In other words, when the variable probability flag 203g is set to on, the gaming state is a variable probability state (special symbol: high probability state, normal symbol: high probability state) or a potential state (special symbol: high probability state, Normal symbol: Low probability state) is set.

This probability change flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot when the won jackpot type is a jackpot that sets a probability variable state or a probability state after the jackpot ends (S2402 in FIG. 54: Yes). 54, S2403). Then, when the symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, it is set to off (see S806 in FIG. 38).

In this embodiment, as described above, the high probability state of the special symbol is set based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next jackpot is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, the special symbol after the high probability state of the special symbol (special symbol high probability state) is set as the special symbol high probability ending condition for ending the special symbol's high probability state. When the number of fluctuations (the number of special figure fluctuations) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), the probability change flag 203g may be set to OFF. In this case, in order to determine the timing for setting the probability change flag 203g to OFF, a storage means is provided that stores in advance the number of special pattern fluctuations as the special pattern high accuracy end condition, and a A measuring means for measuring the number of special pattern fluctuations, and an end determination for determining whether the number of special pattern fluctuations measured by the measuring means satisfies the number of special pattern fluctuations (special pattern high accuracy termination condition) stored in the storage means. All you have to do is provide the means.

Furthermore, multiple special pattern high-accuracy ending conditions are prepared, such as the special pattern 1 high-accuracy ending condition that can be established based only on the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol in the special pattern high-accuracy state, and the variation of the second special symbol. There are various types of lottery ending conditions, such as the special pattern 2 high-accuracy ending condition that can be established based only on the number of times, and the lottery ending condition that can be established when the special symbol lottery result is a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result that wins a small win). It may be configured such that the special figure high accuracy end condition is made easy and the probability change flag 203g is set to OFF when any of the special figure high accuracy end conditions is satisfied.

The special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 matches the jackpot judgment value at the start of fluctuation. (See S407 in FIG. 34). This special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S806 in FIG. 38).

When the variable time of the variable display of the first special symbol ends while the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is on, a process for forcibly stopping the second special symbol at a missed symbol is executed (see S804 in FIG. 38). . As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is executing a big hit.

The special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the jackpot judgment value at the start of fluctuation. This flag is set to (see S1007 in FIG. 40). This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (S1506 in FIG. 45).

When the variable time of the variable display of the second special symbol ends while the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203i is on, a process is executed to forcibly stop the first special symbol at a missed symbol (see S1004 in FIG. 40). . As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem in which one of the first special symbols and the second special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit while the other is executing a big hit.

The winning state storage area 203j is a storage area for storing information indicating the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is off), the normal state is stored in this winning state storage area 203j. "00H" is stored as information indicating. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable probability state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 1 or more and the probability variable flag 203g is on), the variable probability state is indicated in the winning state storage area 203j. "01H" is stored as information. Furthermore, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability state (if the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 and the probability change flag 203g is on), the probability state is stored in this winning state storage area 203j. "02H" is stored as the information indicating.

The information stored in this winning state storage area 203j is held until the end of the jackpot, and is referenced when setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends (see S2404 in FIG. 54).

The small hit flag 203k is turned on when it is determined that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 matches the small hit determination value at the start of fluctuation. This is a flag to be set (see S1102 in FIG. 41). This small hit flag 203k is set to OFF when setting the display of the stop symbol corresponding to the small win (see S1605 in FIG. 46). When the fluctuation time of the second special symbol's fluctuation display ends while this small hit flag 203k is on, the fluctuation of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (the counter that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is subtracted). 46) is executed (see S1603 in FIG. 46). As a result, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the occurrence of a problem in which a jackpot occurs in the lottery of the first special symbol while a small prize of the second special symbol is being executed, and the jackpot starts during the minor prize. can.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 203m and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n are counters for measuring the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. When a symbol variation pattern is selected, a variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set. It is determined whether or not the variation time of each special symbol has ended based on the timing results of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m and the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n.

The jackpot flag 203o is a flag indicating whether or not it is a jackpot. If this jackpot flag 203o is on, it shows that the pachinko machine 10 is hitting a jackpot, and if it is off, it shows that it is not hitting a jackpot. This jackpot flag 203o is set to ON when the start of a jackpot is set. On the other hand, it is set to OFF during the jackpot end process executed at the end of the jackpot.

The small hit flag 203p is a flag indicating whether or not there is a small win. If this small winning flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is making a small winning, and if it is off, it indicates that the small winning is not occurring. This flag 203p during small winning is set to ON when the start of small winning is set (see S1606 in FIG. 46). On the other hand, it is set to off at the end of the small win (see S2512 in FIG. 55).

The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol wins the small hit, and when the small win is won (when the small hit medium flag 203p is set to on), the second special symbol wins the small hit. 1. It is configured to interrupt the fluctuating display of special symbols. In other words, out of multiple types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), a small hit is won in the lottery of one special symbol (second special symbol), and the medium small win flag 203p is set to on. In this state, since the variable display of the other special symbol (first special symbol) never ends, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the small winning game and play the game. Further, during a small winning game, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the other special symbol from ending and the jackpot game starting.

The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is a flag indicating that the period is from when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped (determined display) with the jackpot stop symbol until the jackpot starts. When this special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to on, even if a new ball enters the second ball entrance 640, execution of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is avoided. (See S901: Yes in FIG. 39). This special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON when the second special symbol is forcibly stopped at a missed symbol (see S802 in FIG. 38), and avoids the process for executing the variable display of the second special symbol. If so, it is set to off (S902 in FIG. 39).

The normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is a flag to indicate that the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a short fluctuation (variation for 3 seconds). This indicates that a short variation of the pattern) has been executed. This normal pattern short fluctuation flag 203t determines that the timing to set the normal symbol fluctuation time in the normal symbol fluctuation process (see S106 in FIG. 48) is in the time saving state (during time saving) (S1811 in FIG. 48: Yes). ), is set to ON when a 3 second fluctuation time (short fluctuation) is set (S1814 in FIG. 48), and it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) has elapsed (S1816 in FIG. 48: Yes), when it is determined that the lottery result of the current normal symbol (second symbol) is a win (S1818 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is referred to (S1819 in FIG. 48).

Here, if it is determined that the regular map/short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819 in FIG. 48: Yes), it is determined whether the current time is in a time saving state (time saving) (S1821 in FIG. 48). ), if it is determined that the game is in the time saving state (time saving) (S1821: Yes in FIG. 48), an opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a (FIG. 48). 48 S1822). In addition, the normal symbol short variation flag 203t is set to OFF after it is determined that it is set to ON in the normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48) (S1820 in FIG. 48).

In this way, the gaming state when the normal symbol (second symbol) starts to fluctuate (when the fluctuating time is set) and when the electric accessory 64a opening operation is set after the fluctuating time of the regular symbol (second symbol) has elapsed. Since the configuration is configured such that the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a only when both the gaming state and are in the time saving state, It is possible to reliably prevent the electric accessory 64a from opening long by changing the normal symbols (lottery) that is executed across the long opening state (and the time saving state). It is possible to prevent players from being provided with an excessive number of openings.

The winning counter 203u is a counter that counts the number of balls that have won (balls entered) into the first specific winning hole 65a in a round of the small winning game. When the value of this winning counter 203u reaches the upper limit value of 10, it is determined that the round ending condition is satisfied and the round ends (see S2706 in FIG. 57). In each round of the jackpot, even if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than 10, the round ends if the round period set for the round is reached. This winning counter 203u has a value incremented by 1 every time a ball entering the first specific winning hole 65a is detected during the validity period of a small winning round. The value is also reset to 0 at the end of each round.

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the above-mentioned winning counter 203u is used not only for small winning games but also for counting the number of balls that have won into the second specific winning opening 650a in each round during a jackpot game. It is also used for

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the period for opening the first specific prize opening 65a as the game content of the small winning game is set to be 1.5 seconds, and the round ending condition established by the number of prizes is set to 10. are doing. In other words, the validity period (1.5 seconds) of the round game has elapsed by the time 10 balls enter the first specific prize opening 65a during the small winning game (before the round end condition for the number of prizes is satisfied). It turns out. Therefore, since the period of the small winning game can be kept constant, the performance that spans the small winning game (the period from the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol to the end of the fluctuation of other special symbols via the small winning game) It is possible to predetermine the presentation period for a series of presentations (a series of presentations to be performed). Therefore, the variation timing of the special symbol and the performance execution timing can be easily synchronized, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is a flag indicating a period for stopping the update (subtraction) of the variable time of the special figure 1, and when set to on, stops the update (subtraction) of the variable time, When the setting is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the stopped updating (subtraction) of the variable time is restarted.

This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when stopping the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) whose lottery result is a small win (S1602 in FIG. 46), and the special symbol fluctuation processing (figure 32) (S202 in FIG. 32). As a result of the reference, if it is set to on, the process of updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the special figure 1 in the same way as during fluctuation is executed (S203 in FIG. 32). In other words, while the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON, the update (subtraction) of the variation time is stopped, but the first symbol display device 37 is in a state where the variation display continues to be executed. becomes. Thereby, by setting the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v to ON, it is possible to notify that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 has not been forcibly stopped. Then, when it is determined in the first special symbol variation execution process (see FIG. 37) that it is set to ON (S701 in FIG. 37: Yes), it is set to OFF (S703 in FIG. 37).

In addition, in this embodiment, since it is configured such that only the second special symbol lottery can win the small hit, the special symbol whose variable display is temporarily stopped based on winning the small win is the first special symbol. However, if the first special symbol lottery is configured so that a small hit can be won, a special symbol 2 temporary stop flag may be provided to temporarily stop the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. good.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot, it is determined based on the fact that one of the special symbols stops in a combination indicating a jackpot (based on the execution of a jackpot game). ), a process that forcibly stops the fluctuating display of the other special symbol when it misses, and if the lottery result of one special symbol is a small win, one special symbol stops with a combination that indicates a small win. Based on this, the variable display of the other special symbol is temporarily stopped (stopped until the small winning game ends).

That is, the structure is such that, depending on the lottery result of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol can be processed in various ways. With this configuration, the lottery result of one special symbol becomes the most advantageous game result for the player (for example, a jackpot), and while the fluctuating display to show the game result is being executed, the lottery result of the special symbol on the other side is It is possible to prevent the special symbol (the lottery result is a small win) from being displayed in a stopped state and the large win from being erased by the small win.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is provided with various flags, counters, and the like. Based on various tables provided in the ROM 202 and flags, counters, etc. provided in the RAM 203, the basic functions of the pachinko machine 10 and the novel state transition shown in FIG. 11 can be realized.

Next, details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. 22A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 provided in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 22(a), the ROM 222 includes at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a stop display mode selection table 222b, and an additional effect selection table 222c.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the audio lamp control device 113 selects, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, the rough fluctuation contents (fluctuation time, fluctuation type (reach, miss, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command). ) is used to determine the details of the variable display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This makes it possible to determine even more diverse variations. Here, one variation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by the main controller 110.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 19(a), if you win a jackpot with the first special symbol when the probability variable state is set, the variation time is 60 seconds, the winning normal variation, the variation. The main controller 110 outputs a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to either a winning super fluctuation with a time of 180 seconds or a winning special fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 600 seconds, and the audio lamp control device 113 outputs the received fluctuation pattern command (variation time This means setting a variable effect corresponding to the information (information indicating the

Here, as a variation effect corresponding to the special variation (600 seconds), the first stage effect (for example, the effect of defeating the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and the second stage effect is executed for the period from 60 seconds to 180 seconds. A variable performance is set in which the stage performance (for example, a performance that defeats the second enemy) is executed, and the third stage performance (such as a performance that defeats the third enemy) is executed for a period of 180 seconds to 600 seconds. As a variable production corresponding to the variation (180 seconds), the first stage production mode (for example, a production that defeats the first enemy) is executed for the first 60 seconds, and the second stage production mode is executed for the period from 60 seconds to 180 seconds. (For example, the effect of being defeated by the second enemy) is set, and as a variable effect corresponding to the normal variation (60 seconds), the first 60 seconds are the first stage effect (for example, the effect of being defeated by the first enemy). A variable effect is set to execute the effect of being defeated.

In this way, by setting the performance mode so as to put a break in the variable performance to be executed in accordance with the stage of the variable time that can be set as the lottery result of the special symbol, the currently set variable pattern for the player can be set. It is possible to enjoy the fluctuating performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while predicting which type it is, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, when executing the above-mentioned variable performance, the remaining time display mode (for example, the timing at which the performance mode can shift to the next stage) allows the player to grasp the remaining time for the performance period set as each stage. It may also be configured to display a display mode in which the remaining time is displayed in a countdown manner. As a result, it is possible for the player to at least know in advance the period during which the variable effect will be continuously executed (the period during which the potential state will continue to be set), so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. can.

In addition, we have set up multiple types of enemies that appear during the fluctuating performance, and depending on the type of enemy that appears, we have set the expectation level for the fluctuating performance to move to the next stage (the rate at which a performance mode that defeats the enemy is selected). It is preferable to make it possible to suggest the contents of the jackpot game to be executed after the end of the current variable display and the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this case, for example, if enemy A is displayed as the enemy type, if the fluctuation pattern set this time is super winning fluctuation (180 seconds), the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player is If the variation pattern is a winning special variation (600 seconds), it may be configured to indicate that a jackpot type other than the most advantageous jackpot type for the player has been selected. With this configuration, the performance mode (type of enemy) of the variable performance can be determined by combining multiple factors that determine whether or not to give advantageous benefits to the player. The effect can be further enhanced.

The stop display mode selection table 222b indicates that a potential state is set as the gaming state, and a period (hereinafter referred to as rush period) in which small winning games can be executed frequently by drawing the second special symbol is set. This is a data table that is referred to when selecting a stop display mode of performance symbols (see FIGS. 7(a) and 8(b)) to notify the user. This stop display mode selection table 222b is configured so that different stop display modes are selected depending on the jackpot type won in the lottery of the first special symbol and the length of the rush period to be executed.

Here, the contents of the stop display mode selection table 222b will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 23(a). FIG. 23(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the stop display mode selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 23(a), the stop display mode selection table 222b allows the player to predict the degree of advantage of each jackpot type (the number of rounds, the gaming state set after the jackpot game) and the length of the rush period. It is stipulated that the stop display mode of the effect design is set so as to be possible.

Specifically, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), "Jackpot A", which is the jackpot type most advantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (the length of the rush period) is won. If the information stored in the area (area for storing information shown) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39". , the stop display mode "111" is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99". .

Also, if you win "Jackpot A" and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area that stores information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. ~300 seconds, the value of the obtained performance counter 223h is defined as a stop display mode "111" in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "40 to 79". ” is defined, the stop display mode “333” is defined in the range of “80 to 99”, and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "301 seconds onwards", that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "777" is defined, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", A stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and a stop display mode "VVV" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Then, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), "Jackpot B", which is a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player, is won, and the remaining time storage area 223p (stores information indicating the length of the rush period). If the information stored in the area (area) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", and the stop display mode is "222" is defined, a stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and a stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Also, if you win "Jackpot B" and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area that stores information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", that is, the rush period is 61 seconds. ~300 seconds, the value of the acquired performance counter 223h is defined as "444" in the range of "0 to 39", and the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is defined as "666" in the range of "40 to 79". " is defined, the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is “301 seconds onwards”, that is, when the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of “0 to 39”, the stop display mode “111” is defined, and the stop display mode is “40 to 79”. A stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and a stop display mode "333" is defined in the range of "80 to 99".

Finally, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol (special pattern 1), you win "Jackpot C" which is the second most advantageous jackpot type, or "Jackpot D" which is the most disadvantageous jackpot type, and the remaining If the information stored in the time storage area 223p (area for storing information indicating the length of the rush period) is "0 to 60 seconds", that is, the rush period is within 60 seconds, the acquired effect counter 223h The stop display mode "444" is defined in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined in the range of "40 to 79", and the value is in the range of "80 to 99". A stop display mode "444" is defined.

Also, if you win "Jackpot C" or "Jackpot D", the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area that stores information indicating the length of the rush period) is "61 seconds to 300 seconds", i.e. , when the rush period is within 61 to 300 seconds, the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39", the stop display mode "666" is defined, and the value in the range of "40 to 79" is defined. The stop display mode "111" is defined, and the stop display mode "111" is defined in the range of "80 to 99", and is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (area that stores information indicating the length of the rush period). If the information being displayed is "301 seconds~", that is, the rush period is 301 seconds or more, the stop display mode "333" is defined when the value of the obtained effect counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 39". , a stop display mode "777" is defined in the range of "40 to 99".

As described above, in this embodiment, the length of the rush period and the period after the end of the rush period are determined by the stop display mode of the effect symbols displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the rush period starts. The game is configured to suggest to the player the contents of the jackpot to be executed (jackpot type). This allows the player to predict future game content by understanding how the performance symbols are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is specified that the stop display mode of the production symbols has a predetermined rule, and specifically, the stop display mode of the production symbols is "even number symbols", "odd number symbols", It is stipulated that more benefits will be given to the player in the order of "777" and "VVV" (the rush period will be longer, and the type of jackpot will be more advantageous). In this way, by giving a predetermined regularity to the stop display mode of the performance symbols, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, since the stop display mode of the performance symbol is selected by combining the jackpot type and the length of the rush period, for example, the stop display mode of the performance symbol “111” is the most advantageous for the player. Only when the jackpot type "Jackpot A" is set, it is specified that it will be selected even if the rush period is within 60 seconds, so if "111" is displayed, the player An innovative game feature where the player wants the rush period to end in 60 seconds, in other words, a game feature where the user would normally want a longer rush period, but the combination of the type of jackpot and the length of the rush period. By displaying the stop display mode, it is possible to add a gaming experience in which a game result (a short rush period) opposite to the normal one is desired.

In addition, when "VVV" is displayed as the stop display mode of the performance symbol, it indicates that the jackpot type and the length of the rush period have been selected that are most advantageous to the player. This allows players to play games with peace of mind.

In this embodiment, the timing for selecting the stop display mode of the production symbols (the timing for stopping display of the production symbols on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) is determined by referring to the stop display mode selection table 222b according to the gaming state. It is configured to be different. Specifically, at the time when the probability state is set (at the time when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts when the probability variable state is set), whether or not the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined that the second special symbol is not changing, that is, if the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the probability state is set, the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is determined. The production pattern is configured to be stopped and displayed based on the start.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the second special symbol is changing at the time when the probability state is set (when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts when the probability variable state is set), That is, unless the fluctuating display of the second special symbol currently being executed is completed, if the lottery of the second special symbol cannot be executed with the probability state set, the fluctuating display of the second special symbol currently being executed The display is configured to stop displaying the production symbols based on the timing at which the display is completed.

With this configuration, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed with the probability state set immediately after the performance symbols are stopped and displayed and the rush period starts, so that the player does not feel any discomfort. It is possible to have the player play a game in a potential state without giving any money.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the probability state is set (when the probability change state is set and the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts), the second special symbol is changing. If it is determined, the length of the rush period from the timing when the fluctuating display of the second special symbol being executed ends is determined, and if the determination result is within a predetermined time, the production symbol is stopped and displayed. (The effect indicating that the rush period has started) is configured not to be executed. As a result, even though the production symbols are stopped and displayed to notify that the rush period has started (the rush game has started), if the small winning game is executed, the rush period will end. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the start of the rush period (rush game) is configured to be displayed using a production pattern similar to the third pattern, it is as if the third pattern corresponding to the special pattern is displayed. It is possible to make it seem as if a rush game is being executed based on the symbols being stopped and displayed. Moreover, even if the length of the rush period is within a predetermined time and the performance symbols are not stopped and displayed, it is possible to suppress giving a large sense of discomfort to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the timing for stopping and displaying the performance symbols is the timing when the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is started, or the timing when the second special symbol is being executed at the timing when the probability state is set. Although the timing at which the fluctuating display of the symbols stops is used, the production symbols may be configured to be stopped and displayed at other timings, for example, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is stored. If the winning information command indicating winning information is analyzed and it is determined in advance that a jackpot variation will be executed in the next variation, immediately before the jackpot variation is executed (in the variation before the jackpot variation, the 3rd symbol The production pattern may be configured to be stopped and displayed at the timing when the is stopped and displayed. With this configuration, the second special symbol lottery can be executed immediately after the potential state is set.

In this way, when using a configuration in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed before the jackpot fluctuation is executed to notify that the rush game has started, the second input is performed from the timing when the effect symbols are stopped and displayed. When playing a game aiming at the ball opening 640 (right-handed game), it is preferable to configure the system so that the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed before the next jackpot variation is started. As a result, as a result of playing a right-handed game based on the stopped display of the performance symbols, the second game occurs before the probability state is set (before the jackpot fluctuation starts), that is, during the probability variation state. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a special symbol lottery is executed and the period during which a rush game is executed is shortened.

The additional performance selection table 222c is used when selecting the performance mode (additional performance mode) when restarting the variable display of the first special symbol that has been temporarily stopped due to winning a small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol. This is a referenced data table, and is configured such that a different additional performance mode (treasure box (see FIG. 7(b))) is selected depending on the remaining variation time of the first special symbol after restart. Here, the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c will be explained with reference to FIG. 23(b).

FIG. 23(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the additional effect selection table 222c. As shown in FIG. 23(b), the additional performance selection table 222c selects different additional performance types based on the period information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 223o and the additional performance counter 223i. The data content is defined as follows, and by executing the additional performance mode corresponding to the selected additional performance type, the player can predict the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (the remaining period of the rush period). It is configured to obtain.

Specifically, when the residual variation time (period information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 223o) is period A (less than 5 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". ”, the additional effect type “None” is defined, and in the range “100 to 198”, “Additional effect A” is defined. Furthermore, if the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is period B (5 seconds to 60 seconds), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is "0 to 99". The additional performance type "additional performance A" is defined in the range of , and the "additional performance B" is defined in the range of "100 to 198". If the remaining variation time (period information stored in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o) is period C (60 seconds or more), the value of the acquired additional effect counter 223i is in the range of "0 to 99". , an additional performance type “additional performance B” is defined, and an “additional performance C” is defined in a range of “100 to 198”.

Here, if "additional effect A" is set, the display mode of the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7(b)) displayed during the rush period is changed to a tattered display mode. By understanding the tattered display mode, the player can predict that there is only a short time left in the rush period. In addition, when "additional effect B" is set, the treasure box 812 (see FIG. 7(b)) is displayed in the normal display mode, and when "additional effect C" is set, the treasure box 812 is displayed in the normal display mode. A luxurious display mode is also set. Furthermore, if "none" is selected, an effect is set in which the treasure box 812 is not displayed during the remaining rush period.

In addition, in the additional performance selection table 222c (FIG. 23(b)) shown in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the remaining fluctuation time of the rush period and the additional performance type are completely correlated, but this is not limited to this. For example, if it is period B, "additional effect C" is set, or if it is period C, "additional effect A" or "none" is set, with a small probability. Also good. Thereby, it is possible to perform a surprising performance for the player.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the composite game information that combines the rush period and the jackpot type is displayed in the stop display mode of the performance symbols that are displayed at the timing when the rush game is started in the potential state. The game information is provided to the player, and game information indicating the remaining period of the rush period is provided to the player by additional performance during the rush period. This enables the player to predict more detailed game content by comprehensively determining the stop display mode of performance symbols executed as composite game information and the performance mode of additional performance.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22(b), the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c, a special symbol 1 variation start flag 223d, a special symbol 2 variation start flag 223e, and a special symbol 1 stop flag. Type selection flag 223f, special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g, production counter 223h, additional production counter 223i, status setting area 223j, remaining time short number area 223k, special figure 1 variable time counter 223m, special figure 2 variable time counter 223n, remaining variable time information storage area 223o, remaining time storage area 223p, card notification flag 223q, card notification possible flag 223s, rush display flag 223t, prize ball number counter 223u, power supply At least a shutdown flag 223y and other memory area 223z are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area where various commands output from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. Specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a, and the command is read out by the command determination process. , the command is analyzed, and processing is performed according to the command.

The winning information storage area 223b has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. In this pachinko machine 10, when a starting winning for the first ball entrance 64 is detected in the main control device 110, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, which are acquired according to the starting winning, From each value of the small hit type counter C5 and the fluctuation type counter CS1, various information (win or failure, jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a special symbol lottery corresponding to the starting prize is drawn is obtained. It is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts various information notified by the winning information command (win/fail, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, fluctuation pattern) as winning information, and extracts the winning information. is stored in the winning information storage area 223b. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the four vacant areas (1st to 4th areas) in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th). be done. In other words, the area with the smaller area number stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning in time.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is a variable presentation (variable display) of the first special symbol performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and third symbol display device 81), and is reserved in the main controller 110. This is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (number of times of standby) of the variable performance of the first special symbol being played up to a maximum of four times for each type of special symbol.

As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c calculates the number of reserved balls as a special symbol. They are managed by type.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of pending balls in the variable display is added due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, or when the main control device 110 executes the variable display in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a number of reserved balls command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it acquires the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 from the held ball number command. , is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S4212 in FIG. 60). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the first special symbol of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the reserved pitch counter 203d.

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in response to receiving the number of reserved balls command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, and also stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved number counter 223c. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the pitch number counter 223c, a command for the number of reserved pitches for display is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this command for the number of reserved balls for display, the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is reserved. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the ball count pattern is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c is changed in synchronization with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. can. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of pending balls whose variable display is pending.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e are set respectively when the first special symbol variation pattern command and the second special symbol variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. It is turned on (see S4206 and S4209 in FIG. 60), and turned off when the variable display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is made (see S5102 and S5108 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d and the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e are turned on, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221. The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f and the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g are set when the first special symbol stop type command and the second special symbol stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 are received. (see S4301 in FIG. 61), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 69). When the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type). It is determined.

The effect counter 223h is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This performance counter 223h is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and for example, the value is incremented by 1 and updated each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. be done.

The additional effect counter 223i is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. This additional effect counter 223i is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198. For example, the value is incremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 59) is executed. Updated.

The status setting area 223j is a storage area in which information corresponding to the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is stored. Each time a status command output from the main controller 110 is received, information corresponding to the status of the pachinko machine 10 indicated by the status command is stored in the status setting area 223j (see S4405 in FIG. 62). . More specifically, a 2-bit storage area is allocated to the state setting area 223j, and in order from the most significant bit, whether or not the state is a high probability state of a special symbol, and whether it is a high probability state of a normal symbol is determined. A value indicating whether the For example, if the value of the state setting area 223j is "11B", it means that it is in a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols and high probability state for normal symbols), and if it is "10B", it means that it is a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols and high probability state for normal symbols). It means that it is in a certain state (high probability state for special symbols and low probability state for normal symbols). On the other hand, "00H" means the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and low probability state of normal symbols).

By updating the status setting area 223j according to status commands output from the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113 can accurately grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10.

The remaining time short number area 223k is a storage area that stores the remaining number of times of the high probability state of the normal symbol. This remaining time reduction number area 223k is updated to the number of times notified by the remaining time reduction number command output every time the value of the time saving counter 203f is updated in the main controller 110 (see S4802 in FIG. 66). As a result, the value stored in the remaining time saving number area 223k can be updated in synchronization with the value of the time saving counter 203f of the main control device 110, so the remaining time saving number grasped by the audio lamp control device 113 can be This can be made to match the actual number of time savings updated by the main controller 110.

The special figure 1 variation time counter 223m and the special figure 2 variation time counter 223n indicate the corresponding variation time when each variation display is set (executed) in the variation display setting process (see S4113 in FIG. 69). Each time a value is set and various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed, each value is subtracted by 1 (see S5402 and S5404 in FIG. 72). Note that the period from receiving the special map 1 temporary stop command from the main controller 110 until receiving the special map 1 restart command is when various counter update processes (see S4111 in FIG. 72) are executed. Also, the configuration is such that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 223m is not subtracted by 1.

Then, in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67) that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see S4112 in FIG. 60) that a temporary stop related command has been received, when calculating the remaining variation time, (See S4903 in FIG. 67).

The remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o is a storage area for storing information indicating the remaining period of the rush period, that is, the remaining time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this remaining variation time information storage area 223o, remaining period information (period A to period C) for indicating the remaining variation time of the temporarily stopped first special symbol variation display is set, and The stored remaining period information is referred to when setting an additional effect when restarting the variable display of symbols.

The card notification flag 223q is a flag to indicate whether or not the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10(a)) has been displayed (notified), and is turned on when the card forgetting alert screen is displayed. Set.

The card notification possible flag 223s is a flag for indicating whether or not it is possible to display (notify) the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10(a)), and it is possible to display the card forgetting alert screen. It is set to on when the following conditions are met.

The rush display completed flag 223t is a flag for indicating whether or not a rush game has been started in a state where the potential state is set, and is a flag for indicating whether or not a rush game has been started, and is a flag for indicating that a rush game has been started (see FIG. 7). (a), see FIG. 8(b)) is displayed, it is set to on.

The prize ball number counter 223u is a counter for continuously counting the number of prize balls after the start of the jackpot game, and is a counter for continuously counting the number of prize balls during a period in which a gaming state advantageous to the player is continuously set. It is configured so that the numbers are cumulative. Specifically, in the winning related process (S4216 in FIG. 63), when it is determined that a prize ball command has been received (S4505 in FIG. 63: Yes), a value corresponding to the received prize ball command is added ( S4506 in FIG. 63).

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that a large amount of prize balls can be won not only in the jackpot game but also in the small win game. It is configured so that a card forgetting warning display can be executed after a winning game or a jackpot game in which a small number of rounds is set.

The power outage flag 223y is a flag used to determine whether there has been a momentary power outage. The power-off flag 223y receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 and is set to on before the power-off process is executed (see S4117 in FIG. 59). After that, since the RAM 223 is a volatile memory, all information in the RAM 223 disappears after a certain period of time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed. Therefore, in the start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 58), if the power-off flag 223y is on (see 4008: Yes in FIG. 58), the power-off flag 223y is set to on and then remains constant. This is the case when the audio lamp control device 113 starts up before the time (100 milliseconds) has elapsed, that is, when there is a momentary power outage. In this case, all the information in the RAM 223 has not been deleted, and unnecessary information (or information that is incomplete because only a part of the information has been deleted) remains in the work area of the RAM 223. In some cases, the information in the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared (see S4009 in FIG. 58). This prevents processes from being executed based on unnecessary (or incomplete) information, so each process of the audio lamp control device 113 can operate normally.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the data mentioned above, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via a bus line 240. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since there are models with exactly the same configuration and specifications, the display control device 114 is made into a common component and costs are reduced.

Below, the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be explained first, and then the work RAM 233 will be explained.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured so that a system reset can be applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power restoration from a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer specified by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. Instead of being stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND flash memory 234a that can achieve a large capacity with a small area. This makes it possible to sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs and the like. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memories generally have a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data that is consecutively arranged in multiple pages, it is possible to read the data from the second page onward at high speed, but when reading the data from the first page, an address is specified. It takes a long time until the data is output. Furthermore, when reading data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As described above, since the read speed of the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it will take time to read the instructions that make up the control program. Such a case may occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. and store it. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and data is read and written at high speed, so the MPU 231 can read instructions forming the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is canceled via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (described later) of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

This character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a nonvolatile memory provided as the main storage part in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing data, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the player's interest, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a lot of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the third symbol display device 81 is provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without having to provide a dedicated program ROM to store control programs and fixed value data as in conventional gaming machines. Since the number of parts can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data is written) occur when data is written, and defective data blocks in which data cannot be written occur. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and performs known error correction so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Perform data address translation.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read out from the NAND flash memory 234a that includes error bits, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the It is possible to suppress the MPU 231 from performing processing or the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the defective data block, so the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can store different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. The ROM controller 234b then performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can, for example, output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while setting data in one bank, or output the data in the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside as specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading data from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a nonvolatile memory provided as a sub-storage section in the character ROM 234, and is designed to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, this NOR type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided that stores a part of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. Thereby, the display control device 114 can be brought into a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the boot program, which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes)) are stored. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and can be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 uses hardware to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. is set, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects one of the programs previously set from the NOR ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. , reads the instruction code of the corresponding address from the buffer RAM 234c, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing it in is as follows. That is, as mentioned above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from specifying the address to outputting the data when reading data from the first page. There's a problem.

When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then issues an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is canceled, the character ROM 234 immediately transfers the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d to the buffer RAM 234c. can be set to output the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 made up of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) used in the control program is stored in a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the program storage area of the work RAM 233. 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after canceling the system reset. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c currently used.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again, so the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stores the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a. The first predetermined location is programmed to be set to a first predetermined location. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a moves to the first predetermined position in the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various types of processing can be executed. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the rest of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is included in the control program that is transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a.

Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a. Execute the remaining boot programs contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. to be described later) are stored in the second program storage area. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from area 234a1 to program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b is executed. Furthermore, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined location within the program storage area 233a. Specifically, this second predetermined location is the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) that is executed after the boot process (see S6001 in FIG. 73) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined location, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. This allows the MPU 231 to read control programs from the work RAM 233, which is constituted by a DRAM with a high read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

Furthermore, as described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, and which is sent from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the image in either a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by developing the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame that was previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame within the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third symbol display device 81. Parallel processing within.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes the V-interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the process of drawing the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed by drawing first.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs the drawing processing and display of the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Note that image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Generally, while NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). In response, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer some of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. is configured to do so. As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so that it remains resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on is completed, the image controller 237 can draw the image while using the image data that resides in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. The time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the main controller 110 or display controller 114 decides to display them. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with a NAND flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 transfers necessary data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing; There is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the character ROM 234, and the time required for reading out can be omitted, so it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Furthermore, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of a 132 kilobyte SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The final address (the final address of the storage source), the information on the transfer destination (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 in accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the memory is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeated until all the image data stored from the storage source first address to the storage source final address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the image data transfer. be able to. Therefore, as the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing, and as a result, it is not possible to draw the image by the required time. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

Also, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. It is possible to easily determine the period that is not used for display processing on the device 81, and it is possible to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is used as the power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. Further, the power-on variation image area 235b is displayed when the player starts a game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the upper first ball entrance 64b1 or the lower first ball entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the ball entrance 64b2 is detected.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see S6003 and S6004 in FIG. 73).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 shows the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While this remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image area 235a as shown in FIG. 25(a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, upon receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 executes the command as shown in FIG. 25(b). As shown in FIG. 25(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, there is a power-on fluctuation image with a "○" symbol at the lower right position facing the screen, and as shown in FIG. 25(c), a "○" A power-on variation image of an "x" symbol is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the symbol during the variation period. Then, based on the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 is determined. The result is judged, and if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the image shown in Figure 25(b) is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops, and if it is a "special symbol miss", the image shown in Figure 25(c) is displayed. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect stops.

The MPU 231 causes the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on until all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. In addition, since the player or the like can recognize that some kind of processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the image that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. I can do it.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the ball entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is detected. 25B, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 25(b) and 25(c) are drawn. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to alternately display the images on the third symbol display device 81. With this, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at power-on, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

In addition, at the time when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b. If a ball entering the upper first ball entry port 64b1 or the lower first ball entry port 64b2 is detected while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variable effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. It can be immediately displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 24, the explanation will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram illustrating four types of back images and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 26(b) shows back surfaces B to D corresponding to "forest stage," "river stage," and "sky stage," respectively, with respect to back surface A corresponding to "city stage." . Further, FIG. 27 shows the back surface E corresponding to the "island stage".

As shown in FIG. 26, the back images corresponding to the back faces A to D are all images that are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and are prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each of the back surfaces A to D (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at position a and position c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is composed of images corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction. is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then when the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, the third symbol display device 81 displays a smooth image. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a connected manner.

When it is decided to change the back type based on the back type selection table (not shown) and the stage is changed to "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", or "sky stage", the MPU 231 , First, a position between position a and position a' of the corresponding back image is set as the initial position of the display area, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at that initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Then, as time passes, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scrolling image, and the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When the area reaches an image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can display the images from position a to position c while being scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27, the back image on the back surface E changes to the third pattern in the order of (a)→(b)→(c)→(a)→... in FIG. 27 over time. It is displayed on the display device 81. Specifically, the back E is a third pattern in which an image of the mountain towering over the island, an image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and an image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in fixed positions. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of an image of the sky above a mountain changes over time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage", the back image shown in FIG. 27(a) is displayed as the initial back image of the back surface E. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(a), an orange sky indicating morning glow is displayed. Then, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 27(b) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(b), a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, as time passes, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black, and after a predetermined period of time, the back image shown in FIG. 27(c) is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 27(c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, as time passes, the color of the sky gradually changes from black to white and then to orange. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the back image shown in FIG. 27(a) is returned to, and the back images shown in FIGS. 27(a) to 27(c) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be explained. As shown in FIG. 26(a), the back surface A corresponding to the town stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to positions a to d are stored in the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage with the initial stage "Town Stage" displayed, so the image data of the back A corresponding to the "Town Stage" that is frequently displayed is By making all the data reside permanently in the back image area 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced. Therefore, the processing load placed on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, the back surface B corresponding to the "forest stage", the back surface C corresponding to the "river stage", and the back surface D corresponding to the "sky stage" are a partial area of the back surface, as shown in FIG. 26(b). That is, only the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In addition, the image data corresponding to the back surface images between FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b) including FIG. 27(a) and excluding FIG. During the start-up process, the image data is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and becomes resident.

Here, in order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to have the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235; Therefore, it is necessary to use a RAM with a very large capacity, which may lead to an increase in cost.

In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, when the stage is changed, the initial position of the back image that is first displayed is set in the range from position a to position a' (or in the range shown in FIGS. 27(a) to 27(b)). ), and the image data corresponding to the image between position a and position b including the initial position (or the image between FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b)) is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Since the character ROM 234 is configured to be stored in the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, when a stage change is determined by the lottery at the start of the fluctuation, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 By using the image data resident in the image area 235c, the initial positions of the back surfaces B to D can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or color tone can be changed as time passes. It can be displayed while Furthermore, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of images is stored for the rear surfaces B to D, an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

In addition, for rear surfaces B to D, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from position a to position b is directed from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The range from position a to position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from position b' to position d can be completely transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 while scrolling. As a result, while scrolling the range from position a to position b, image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, after the image at the initial position is displayed on the back surface E, the images shown in FIGS. 27(a) so that the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 27(b) to 27(c) and 27(c) to 27(a) can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. ) to (b) are set. As a result, while the images in FIGS. 27(a) to (b) are being displayed, the image data corresponding to the images in FIGS. 27(b) to (c) and 27(c) to (a) can be Since the images can be transferred to the video RAM 236, the images shown in FIGS. 27(a) and 27(b) can be displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. 27(b) to 27(c) to 27(c) to 27(a) are sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time using the image data corresponding to the back image be able to.

Note that on the back faces B to E, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub-area dedicated to back images provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 24) of the normal video RAM 236. Thereby, the back image data stored in the subarea dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so the back image can be displayed reliably.

In addition, on rear surfaces B to D, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 correspond to images between position b' and position b. Duplicate image data is stored. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video By displaying the image from position b' on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image can be scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with a smooth connection. ing.

Furthermore, when the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 using the image data of the normal video RAM 236 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, then, The MPU 231 uses the image data of the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display images between positions a to c that are scrolled repeatedly in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 24, the explanation will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area where the third symbol used in the variable production displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is permanently resident. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 kinds of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9" as the third symbol is resident. As a result, when performing a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, there is no need to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Variable effects can be started quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640, even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable production, the third symbol display device It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the variable performance is not started immediately in step 81.

In addition, the third symbol area 235d includes main symbols that are not numbered from "0" to "9" and include a main symbol consisting of a backward symbol such as a wooden box, a backward symbol and a character such as a plane, a wrapping cloth, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main pattern consisting of an auxiliary pattern imitating the image is also resident. These image data are used for a demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with a winning start does not start even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the first variable effect stopped. It will be done. As a result, when the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demonstration performance. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbols to which numbers are not attached from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character pattern area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character patterns used in various effects displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a "boy", "old man", and "girl" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but uses the resident image data. By reading the image data resident in advance in the character pattern area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. Thereby, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back side of the game board 13, the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error along with the error type using an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to, upon receiving an error command, cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of an error, from the viewpoint of preventing players from cheating and protecting players from errors. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is stored in advance in the error message image area 235f, so the display control device 114 displays error messages in the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so even if the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is not read out after receiving the error command. It can be displayed instantly.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data can be overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in the subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

The MPU 231 transfers image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing subsequent images from the character ROM 234 to a subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of image data to a predetermined subarea where it is to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

Note that the image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list, which will be described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. Thereby, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame's worth of image drawn according to instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame's worth of image into that frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame developed earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third symbol display device 81 along with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, a process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop one frame's worth of images drawn in one frame buffer. , it is possible to read out one frame's worth of image developed earlier from the other frame buffer and display the read out one frame's worth of image on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that develops one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read out in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for rendering processing of one frame's worth of images. Every 20 milliseconds, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's image and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform display processing for one frame of images in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for one frame of images.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. configured. This work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and a stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a back image change flag 233w, a back image discrimination flag 233x, a demo display flag 233y, and a final display flag 233z.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Using this, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complex performances.

The data table storage area 233b stores a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area where transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and a transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one performance displayed by the table is stored.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are stored in accordance with the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily perform diversified and complicated performances.

Here, details of various data tables will be explained. First, one display data table is prepared for each presentation mode of each presentation displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110, such as variable presentation, opening presentation, etc. Display data tables corresponding to , round performance, ending performance, and demo performance are prepared.

The fluctuation performance is a performance that is started on the third symbol display device 81 when a display fluctuation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113. Note that when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when a fluctuating performance is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating performance is a miss, the stop symbol indicating the miss is finally displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating performance is jackpot A or jackpot B. In either case, the stop symbols indicating each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the type of jackpot by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable performance, and can easily determine the gaming value given according to the type of jackpot.

The opening performance is a performance to inform the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and the large opening that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened.The round performance will start from now on. This is an effect to notify the player of the number of rounds to be played. The ending performance is a performance for notifying the player of the end of the special game state.

In addition, as mentioned above, the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable performance associated with the starting winning is not started even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the first variable performance stopped. This is an effect in which the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without numbers "0" to "9" is displayed in a stopped state, and only the back image changes. If the demonstration performance is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no game is being played on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to an opening performance, a round performance, an ending performance, and a demo performance. Further, as for the variable display data table which is a display data table for variable effects, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

Here, details of the display data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) for one frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This specifies the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame in detail.

The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that makes up one frame of image, and also specifies display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency depending on the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification rate is information for specifying the magnification rate for a standard display size set in advance for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnification rate. Note that if the magnification rate is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification rate is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. be done.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying a sprite. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more transparent the image displayed on the back side of the sprite will be. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient that is used when performing overlapping processing with other sprites. The color information is information for specifying the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to a specified sprite when the specified sprite is drawn.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address include one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2,...), and the light Drawing information for each sprite is defined for each address, such as effects for expressing the insertion of images, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, etc. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined depending on the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are changed over time. Since it is assumed to be constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is defined in the variable display data table. This back type is the back side A to E that corresponds to the stage selected by the player (one of the "city stage", "forest stage", "river stage", "sky stage", and "island stage"). Information specifying whether to display any one of the images or to display a back image different from the back images A to E is described. Further, in the case of specifying that a back image different from back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back surface type also includes information specifying which back image is to be displayed.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed based on the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage determined by lottery among the back surfaces A to E as the drawing target, Furthermore, the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame is specified over time. On the other hand, if it is specified that a back image different from the back surfaces A to E is to be displayed, the back image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type It may also be possible to specify location information indicating whether the information should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Moreover, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the display database at the stage when image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) started, which is indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information includes, depending on the back surface type, information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 Display) may indicate any information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) may be displayed along with the back type and position information. The information indicates the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or the information indicates the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. (information indicating whether the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating elapsed time but may be information indicating an address where the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

For the third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ), symbol type offset information is written as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Rather than directly specifying the type of the 3rd symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the 3rd symbol in the fluctuating performance is based on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance and the current fluctuating performance. This is because it changes depending on the stopped symbol, and the symbol offset information from the start of variation until a predetermined time has elapsed describes the offset information from the stopped symbol of the previous variation performance. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol is set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp controller 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variable performance can be stopped with a stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be used as the third symbol. By managing the offset information by the numbers attached to each third symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

In addition, in the symbol offset information, during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current fluctuating performance, the third symbol changes rapidly. It is set to match the displayed time. While the third symbol is being displayed in a high-speed fluctuating manner, the third symbol is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the current variable performance, even if the continuity of the numbers in the third symbol is interrupted, the player will not be made aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is written in "0000H" which is the first address of the display data table, and "02F0H" in the last address of the display data table (in the example of FIG. 29) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the process is written. Then, each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is written and the address "02F0H" where the "End" information is written is made to correspond to the presentation mode that should be specified in the display data table. The contents of the drawing are described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and based on the drawing content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image contents to be drawn are specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw the image is given. Thereby, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to commands (for example, display variation pattern commands) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. .

Here, if a conventional pachinko machine is configured to start a program executed by the MPU 231 every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, as the effect images become more diverse, Since the processing of starting and executing programs that are becoming increasingly complex and enormous in size places a heavy burden on the processing, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 becomes limited, and there is a risk that there will be a limit to the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode in this way, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of a lottery performed based on the starting winnings. On the other hand, with game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on user operations, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore the various It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created one frame at a time according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of a lottery performed based on a starting prize.

Next, details of the transfer data table will be explained with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as mentioned above, the transfer data table is the one that is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance. Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data that is not resident in the normal video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

Note that if all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") that is to be transferred at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. are written (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 29). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined in association with an address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, it means that there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data meaning ``0002H'' in FIG. 29 is defined.

The transfer data information includes the first address (storage source first address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the first address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

Note that "0000H", which is the first address of the transfer data table, contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, similar to the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 29, "02F0H") contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" where the "Start" information is described and the address where the "End" information is described, transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is provided. is listed.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the MPU 231 selects the display data table to be used. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to , the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 29, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, if the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the generated The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, if transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the present pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 transmits display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When a table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so the sprite image data used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers the image data to be transferred that should be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, it is ensured that the image data of a predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before it is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Since the transfer start timing can be instructed as shown in FIG. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIGS. 25(a) to 25(c) on the third symbol display device 81. This is a flag to indicate. This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image at power-on area 235a or the variable image at power-on area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON during the main processing (see FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 (see S6005 in FIG. 73). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image, It is set to off (see S7605 in FIG. 85(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S6301 in FIG. 75(b)), and the simple image display flag 233c is When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b) S6309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command judgment is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc. Processing (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S7501 in FIG. 85(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 86) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to a performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the production mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the commands etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the production mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 233 to the image controller 233 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated that describes instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1 and writes an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, is generated that describes drawing instruction contents. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command etc. transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command etc. from the main control device 110. This is a buffer for storing. In addition to storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. Note that if all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing null data indicating that there is no image data to be transferred.

Then, while adding the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. If so (that is, if Null data is not written), the transfer data information is added to the drawing list (see FIG. 30), which will be described later, which describes the contents of the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 that are generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, if transfer data information is written in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of image data to be transferred is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite is transferred. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f indicates an address at which to obtain the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is for specifying. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt processing (FIG. 75(b ), pointer update processing (see S7205 in FIG. 84) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by 1.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and creates a drawing list to be described later. (see FIG. 30), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that point from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and acquires the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

Furthermore, if a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the sprite is Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw one frame worth of images generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list to be instructed to 237.

Here, details of the drawing list will be explained with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Pattern 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Pending ball number pattern 1, Pending ball number pattern 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as pattern 1), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of that sprite is described. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (displayed object) is stored, and its The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and made translucent according to the translucency value. , performs compositing processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, performs tone correction processing according to the color information, and performs filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to the filter specification information. After that, various processes are applied to the display position indicated by the display position coordinates, and the resulting image is drawn. The drawn image is then developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a pending image that displays a pending pitch number pattern). image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image, and also generates detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (displayed object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 stores the image data of that sprite depending on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

The MPU 231 also specifies other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite as specified in the display data table. Copy the information as is.

In addition, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 sorts the sprites that should be placed closest to the back to the sprites that should be placed closest to the front among the images for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third design (design 1, design 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), and the character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , pending ball number symbol 1, pending pitch number symbol 2, . . . , error symbol 1).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing for each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites by overwriting them in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 controls the transfer data information (the character in which the image data to be transferred is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 transfers an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source first address and the storage source final address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read out and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined subarea (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the performance time of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. At the same time as storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the performance time of the performance to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the production time by the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the V interrupt process (FIG. 75(b ) Each time the display setting process (see ) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S7207 in FIG. 82). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the operation in accordance with the end of the effect. Execute various processing that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i indicates that for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. This is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the storage status of all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction for transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) executed by the MPU 231. be exposed. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Furthermore, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in an unstored state when the image data of that one sprite is stored. Therefore, set the storage status corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Furthermore, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and selects the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S7713 in FIG. 86). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for that image data is set (see S7714 in FIG. 86). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j indicates a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") that develops the image drawn by the image controller 237 from among the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the rendering target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the rendering target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is designated. Information on the specified drawing target buffer is then transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S7802 in FIG. 87).

Thereby, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process to expand the image drawn based on the drawing list onto the specified drawing target buffer. Further, in parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and sends the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, if the value is "0", it is set to "1", and if it is "1", it is set to "0". carried out by. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted. Furthermore, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process (see S6306 in FIG. 75(b)) is executed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame's worth of images is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image can be developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By alternating the designations, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

The back image change flag 233w is a flag for determining whether or not to change the type of the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When this back image change flag 233w is on, it means that the type of the back image is changed, and when it is off, it means that no change is made. The back image change flag 233w is set to ON when a back image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received (see S7001 in FIG. 81(a)). The back image change flag 233w is referenced in the normal image transfer setting process (see S7709 in FIG. 86), and is set to off when the back image change process is executed (see S7710 in FIG. 86). Thereby, it is possible to display a back image corresponding to the back image change command or production mode change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

The back image discrimination flag 233x is a flag indicating the set back image type. This flag is composed of, for example, one byte, and each bit is associated with each back surface type. If any bit of this back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface type corresponding to the turned on bit is set as the current back surface type. For example, if the 0th bit of the back image discrimination flag 233x is on, it means that the back surface A is set. In this rear image discrimination flag 233x, when a rear image change command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 is received, the bit corresponding to the rear image notified by the command is set to ON (FIG. 81(a) ), see S7002). At this time, all other bits are set to OFF. This back image discrimination flag 233x allows the currently set back type to be easily specified.

The demonstration display flag 233y is a flag indicating whether or not a demonstration performance is in progress. If the demonstration display flag 233y is on, it means that a demonstration is being performed, and if it is off, it means that a demonstration is not being performed. This demonstration display flag 233y is set to ON when the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (see S7221 in FIG. 82), and the demonstration display data table When a display data table other than the above is set for the display data table buffer 233d, it is set to off (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b) , see S6905 in FIG. 79). This demo display flag 233y makes it easy to determine whether or not a demonstration is currently being performed.

The confirmed display flag 233z is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmed display effect is being executed. Here, the final display performance refers to a performance in which the stopped symbols are stopped and displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the fluctuation pattern (determined display). If this final display flag 233z is on, it means that a final display performance is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a final display performance is not in progress. The fixed display flag 233z is set to ON when the fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the display setting process (see FIG. 82) (S7214 in FIG. 82), and when the fixed display data table is It is set to off when another display data table is set for the display data table buffer 233d (S6505 in FIG. 77(a), S6705 in FIG. 78(a), S6805 in FIG. 78(b), 79, S6905). With this confirmed display flag 233z, it can be easily determined whether or not a confirmed display performance is currently being performed.

<About the control processing of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 31 to 57. The processing of the MPU 201 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this embodiment). There are two types of interrupt processing: interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is started by inputting the power outage signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing, and then explain the startup processing. and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process for reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the second winning random number counter C4, and the small winning type counter C5 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, 479, 99, 232, and 99), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, C4, and C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, a special symbol variation process is executed which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and also sets a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 (S104). Thereafter, a starting winning process is executed in conjunction with winning a winning ball into the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 32 to 47.

After executing the starting winning process (S105), a process for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and a process accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 are performed. A symbol variation process is executed (S106). The details of the normal symbol variation process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. After executing the normal symbol variation process, a firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that the firing control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is the process of determining whether or not to fire. The main controller 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

First, with reference to FIG. 32, the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special symbol variation process (S104). When the special symbol variation process (S104) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current jackpot or small win is in progress (S201), and if it is determined that the current jackpot or small win is in progress (S201: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S202). In the process of S202, it is determined whether the subtraction of the fluctuating time of the other special symbol is interrupted because one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit. In the process of S202, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S202: Yes), the display on the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the temporarily stopped special figure is updated. (S203), that is, a process is executed to continue the variable display of the first symbol display device 37 for the special symbol whose variable time subtraction has been interrupted, and this process ends. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player that the special symbol variation has not been forcibly stopped.

On the other hand, in the process of S201, if it is determined that the current jackpot or small win is in progress (S201: No), the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is greater than 0 (i.e., the special figure 1 fluctuates). (S204), and if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S204: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and then the process moves to S209 where variation processing regarding the special figure 2 is executed. Details of the first special symbol variation start process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In the process of S204, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is larger than 0 (S204: Yes), the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed. This first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is to execute the process during special symbol 1 variation, and a detailed explanation thereof will be given later with reference to FIG. 37.

When the first special symbol variation execution processing (S205) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the variation time (whether the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206), and the end timing of the variation time is determined (S206). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S206: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) is executed, and then the process moves to S209. On the other hand, in the process of S206, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S206: No), the process of S207 is skipped and the process moves to S209.

In the process of S209 to S213, the same process as S204 to S207 executed for the special figure 1 is executed. When the process of S209 is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (that is, whether the special figure 2 is changing) (S209), and the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is determined. If it is determined that the value of the time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (it is 0) (S209: No), a second special symbol variation start process (S210) is executed, and then this process is ended. Details of this second special symbol variation start process (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n is larger than 0 (S209: Yes), the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is executed. This second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is to execute the process during special symbol 2 variation, and will be described later with reference to FIG. 44.

When the second special symbol fluctuation execution process (S211) is finished, it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation time (whether the special symbol 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is 0) (S212), and the end timing of the fluctuation time is determined (S212). If it is determined that it is the end timing (S212: Yes), a second special symbol fluctuation stop process (S213) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S212, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the variable time (S212: No), the process of S213 is skipped and the present process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first special symbol variation start process (S208), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation start process (S208).

In the first special symbol fluctuation start process (S208), first, the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S301), and the value (N1) of the acquired first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is obtained (S301). ) is a value greater than 0 (S302). In the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S302: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is determined. 1 is subtracted (S303), and a held ball number command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the held ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d after the subtraction (S304). .

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c. In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, so the first special symbol of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while being synchronized with the value of the reserved pitch counter 203d.

When the process of S304 is completed, next, the data in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is shifted to the previous data (S305). More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reservation area 1 → execution area, reservation area 2 → reservation area 1, reservation area 3 → reservation area 2, reservation area 4 → reservation area 3.

When the process of S305 is completed, the first special symbol jackpot determination process is then executed (S306). This first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 34, but the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on the set gaming state.

When the process of S306 is completed, next, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process is executed (see FIG. 35). Although the details will be described later, this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307) is based on the validity determination result of the first special symbol and the fluctuation type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of CS1.

When the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307) is completed, a game state update process is then executed (S308). This game state update process (S308 in FIG. 36) will be described in detail later, but the state of the pachinko machine 10 is updated by updating the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f, which indicate the state of the pachinko machine 10. This is the process for updating. When the process of S308 ends, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S302: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, regarding the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) which is a process of the first special symbol fluctuation start process (FIG. 33, S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, during a period in which a variable display (jackpot variation) in which a jackpot has been won in one of the special symbols is being executed, whether or not a jackpot has been won in the other special symbol lottery is displayed. It is configured so that no discrimination is performed.

In other words, in a state where it is certain that a jackpot game will be executed after a predetermined period of time (after the elapse of a variable time) by one special symbol lottery, a jackpot game will be won by the other special symbol lottery, and the game will be played multiple times in a short period of time. The system is configured to prevent excessive benefits from being awarded due to winning a jackpot.

In this way, by performing the process of acquiring various counter values in the same way as a normal special symbol lottery, skipping the judgment based on the various counter values acquired in that process, and setting the missing symbols, the other It is possible to quickly respond to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), first, each counter value stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to on (S402). That is, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in a high probability state (variable probability state, potential state). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on (that is, the special symbol is in a probability variation state) (S402: Yes), a random value that results in a jackpot as defined in the first random number table 202a for high probability It is determined whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer matches, and the determination result (lottery result) is acquired (S403). On the other hand, in the process of S402, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is off (that is, the special symbol is in a low probability state) (S402: No), the first winning random number table 202a for low probability It is determined whether or not the prescribed random number value for a jackpot matches the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired from the counter buffer, and the lottery result is acquired (S404).

Then, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 202i is on (S405). If it is determined that it is not on (that is, it is off) (S405: No), it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in S403 or S404 is a jackpot (S406), and if the lottery result is a jackpot ( S406: Yes), the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set on for the first special symbol (S407), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a jackpot (S408). Then, based on the value of the acquired winning type counter, a jackpot symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S409), and a value corresponding to the current gaming state is set in the winning state storage area. 203j (S410), sets 1 to the time saving counter 203f (S411), and ends this process.

Here, by setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34) is performed in the first special symbol fluctuation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33). In the game state update process (S308) which is executed at a later stage, the high probability state of the normal symbols can be transferred to the low probability state. Thereby, when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol, it is possible to set the low probability state of the normal symbol at the timing when the jackpot fluctuation is started. Therefore, by winning the jackpot of the first special symbol in a state where the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state can be transferred to the probability state.

In addition, by performing the process of setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 1 in the process of S411, the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on the condition that the jackpot has been won, and the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, and the special symbol Both the process of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state on the condition that the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number of times can be executed using the game state update process (S308). This can prevent the processing of the main controller 110 from becoming complicated even if a plurality of conditions for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol are provided.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S405 that the special drawing 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S405: Yes), or if it is determined that the lottery result is a loss in the process of S406 (S406: No), a missed symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S412), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33), will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation pattern selection process (S307).

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (S307 in FIG. 35), first, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306 in FIG. 34), it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a jackpot or not. 1. It is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is set (S501). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on. This special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON in the process of S407 in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above.

In the process of S501, if it is determined that the jackpot of the first special symbol is set (S501: Yes), the first special symbol jackpot that was acquired in the process of S401 in the above-mentioned first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) Based on the value of the 1-win type counter C2, the jackpot type is determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) (S502), and the process moves to S503.

On the other hand, in the process of S501, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss (that is, the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is off) (S501: No), the process of S502 is skipped. Then, the process moves to S503.

In the process of S503, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S503). Next, the variable pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the gaming state is read out (S504), and the process moves to S505. Note that the gaming state is determined based on the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f. In the process of S505, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S505), and then a special figure 1 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern ( S506).

When the process of S506 is finished, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S507), and then a fluctuation start of the first special symbol is set on the first symbol display device 37 (S508), and the process of S505 is set. A value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in is set in the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m (S509), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the game state update process (S308), which is one process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this gaming state update process (S308). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, of the state of the probability change flag 203g, which is a condition for setting the gaming state, and the value of the time-saving counter 203f, only the value of the time-saving counter 203f is updated when the special symbol starts changing. In addition, in the game state update process (see FIG. 36), which is a process of the first special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 33), the system is configured to execute a process to update the value of the time saving counter 203f.

Although the details will be described later, the probability variation flag 203g that is set to on is set to off when the jackpot variation ends and the special symbol indicating the jackpot is stopped and displayed (when the jackpot game is executed). It is configured as follows.

In other words, among the two conditional elements (the state of the probability change flag 203g and the value of the time saving counter 203f) that are referenced when setting the gaming state, one conditional element is updated when the special symbol starts changing, and the other conditional elements are By making it possible to update when the special symbols stop changing, it is possible to easily diversify the gaming state that is set by combining two conditional elements. In addition, it is possible to set a specific gaming state (for example, potential state) only during the period from the start to the end of the special symbol fluctuation, so it is possible to set an advantageous state for the player only during the predetermined period. It becomes possible to set the gaming state.

When the game state update process (see FIG. 36) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601). If it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S601: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is greater than 0 (S601: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S602), and a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving counter 203f is set. (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S604), and when it is determined that it is 0 (S604: Yes), it is then determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to on (S605). ). Here, if it is determined that the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON (S605: Yes), the probability variable state is not given the time-saving game (that is, the probability state), so the probability state is indicated. A status command is set (S606), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S605, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not set to ON (S605: No), the status is normal, so a status command indicating the normal status is set (S607), and this process end.

On the other hand, in the process of S604, if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is not 0 (S604: No), this process is directly ended.

In addition, in this embodiment, the high probability state of the special symbol is set continuously until the next special symbol wins the jackpot (until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot). However, in addition to this, for example, a probability variation counter is provided in place of the probability variation flag 203g, and the value of the probability variation counter is subtracted every time a variation of a special symbol is executed, so that the value of the probability variation counter becomes 0. In some cases, the high probability state of the special symbol may be changed to a low probability state.

When using such a configuration, the game state update process (S308) shown with reference to FIG. By providing a game state update process when special symbol variation stops that updates the value of the probability variation counter, it is possible to determine whether or not to end the high probability state of special symbols and whether to end the high probability state of normal symbols. It is possible to perform the process of determining whether the

Next, with reference to FIG. 37, regarding the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) executed in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Give an explanation. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation execution process (S205). In this first special symbol variation execution process (S205), a process for restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol 1 when it has been interrupted, and a process for subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S701). Here, a case where this process is executed in a state where the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on will be briefly described. As mentioned above, the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed as a symbol indicating a win (small win) while the special figure 1 is changing. Then, when the special drawing 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on, the jackpot flag 203o is set to on in the process, so a timer interrupt executed every 2 milliseconds in the main controller 110 When the process loops and the special symbol variation process (Fig. 32) is executed next time (2 milliseconds after the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on), the jackpot has been hit in the process of S201. Therefore, the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is not executed. Then, when the jackpot game (or small win game) ends and it is determined in the process of S201 that there is no jackpot (or small win), the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed. It turns out. With this configuration, the state where the first special symbol variation execution process (S205) is executed while the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON is the state where the jackpot (or small win) game is It is configured such that it is the timing to restart the subtraction of the variation time of the special figure variation which has ended and the subtraction of the variation time has been interrupted.

Returning to FIG. 37, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S701, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S701: Yes), then a special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is set (S702), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S701: Yes). The stop flag 203v is set to OFF (S703), and the process moves to S704. On the other hand, in the process of S701, if it is determined that the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S701: No), the processes of S702 and S703 are skipped and S704 Shift to processing.

In the process of S704, the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is updated by subtracting 1 (S704), the display on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S705), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), which is one process of the special symbol variation process (S104 in FIG. 32), will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this first special symbol variation stop processing (S207).

In the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S801). If it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set on for the first special symbol (S801: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set on (S802), and the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set on (S802). A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command indicating that the 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S803). Next, the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S804).

After completing the process of S804, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S805), and the special map 1 jackpot flag 203h, probability change flag 203g, and time saving counter 203f are reset (S806). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and the process moves to S808.

On the other hand, in the process of S801, if the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to OFF for the first special symbol (S801: No), the process of S802 to S807 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S808.

In the process of S808, a special symbol 1 confirmation command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped (S808). Thereafter, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37 (S809), and this process ends.

As described above, in the first special symbol stop processing (S207), the processing (S802 to S809) of stopping the variable display with the symbol indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is executed. Further, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot (S801: Yes), a process (S803, S804) for forcibly stopping the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is executed.

In addition, in the present first embodiment, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is forcibly stopped and displayed as a winning symbol. It is not limited to. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol may be interrupted (temporarily stopped) at the time when the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, after the jackpot of the first special symbol ends, the variable display of the second special symbol may be resumed. As a result, it is possible to create a more natural performance compared to the case where a forced stop is made due to a miss. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a jackpot scenario is set in the process of S805 based on the gaming state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). For example, a jackpot scenario is set in the process of S805 based on the game state stored in the winning state storage area 203j in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) using the opening period of the jackpot game. You may also do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210) executed in the special symbol variation process (FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process (S210). In this second special symbol variation start process (S210), a process for starting variation of the special symbol 2 is executed. In addition, with respect to the process related to the variation of the first special symbol described above with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46, the subject of variation is only changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. A detailed explanation of the elements will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process (S210), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to ON (S901: Yes), the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to OFF (S902), and this process is ended. As mentioned above, the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203s is a flag that is set to ON when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends, while stopping and displaying the second special symbol at the stop symbol corresponding to the loss. . That is, if the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on, it means that a jackpot is started, so the fluctuation start of the second special symbol should not be set. Therefore, if the special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is on in the process of S901, the present process is ended without executing the processes of S902 to S907 for setting the start of fluctuation.

On the other hand, in the process of S901, if it is determined that the special symbol 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set to off (that is, not set to on) (S901: No), the second special symbol execution area 203b data (various counter values) is acquired (S903). Next, based on the data acquired in the process of S903, it is determined whether there is any acquired data (S904). That is, if it is determined that there is no data in the second special symbol execution area 203b (S904: No), this process is ended as is. On the other hand, in the process of S903, if it is determined that there is data (S904: Yes), a second special symbol jackpot determination process is performed to execute a jackpot determination of the second special symbol based on each stored counter value. Execute (S905). Details of this second special symbol jackpot determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

When the process of S905 is completed, a second special symbol variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol and the data acquired in the process of S903 (S906). . Details of this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S906 is completed, the above-mentioned game state update process (see FIG. 36) is executed (S907), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), which is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. explain. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905).

In this second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905), the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) described above is executed, so the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is performed. We will mainly explain the differences between the two.

When the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) is executed, each counter value stored in the second special symbol execution area 203b is acquired (S1001). Then, the process of S1002 to S1004 is executed to obtain a lottery result as to whether or not it is a jackpot based on each obtained counter value and the state of the probability change flag 203g. Each of these processes differs only in that the counter value used for lottery (judgment) is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b, and is otherwise the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34). Control is executed.

When the process of S1003 or S1004 is completed, it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S1005). If it is determined that the special map 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to on (S1005: No), it is determined whether the obtained lottery result is a jackpot (S1006), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot. (S1006: Yes), the process of S1007 to S1010 for setting the lottery result of the second special symbol as a jackpot is executed, and this process ends. In each process of S1007 to S1010, the same process as each process of S407 to S410 for setting the lottery result of the first special symbol as a jackpot in the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) is executed. be done.

On the other hand, in the process of S1005, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1005: Yes), or in the process of S1006, if the lottery result of the acquired second special symbol is not a jackpot. If it is determined (S1006: No), a special symbol 2 missing variation process is executed to set a stop symbol corresponding to a small hit or a small hit of the second special symbol (S1011), and this process is ended. The details of this special figure 2 off variation process (S1011) will be explained with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 off variation processing (S1011).

In the special figure 2 out-of-print variation process (S1011), first, it is determined whether the lottery result obtained in the process of S1003 or S1004 in FIG. 40 is a small hit of the second special symbol (S1101), If it is determined that it is (S1101: Yes), the small hit flag 203k is set on (S1102), and the lottery result of the second special symbol is set as a small hit (S1103). Then, the small winning symbol indicating the small winning type corresponding to the value of the acquired small winning type counter C5 is set as a stop symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S1104), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery result is a loser in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), a loser symbol of the second special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1105), and then, This process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906) is a process of the second special symbol variation start process (S210 in FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. I will explain about it. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906).

In the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (S906 in FIG. 42), first, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1201). Next, in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905 in FIG. 40), it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a jackpot, that is, whether or not the jackpot of the second special symbol is set. (S1202). Here, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203i is on for the second special symbol. This special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON in the process of S1007 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40) described above.

In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is set (S1202: Yes), the variable pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 and 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out. (S1203). Then, based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S1001 in the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40), the jackpot is selected from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)). The type is determined (S1204).

When the process of S1204 is completed, a variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected from the read variation pattern selection table (S1205), and then, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected variation pattern. (S1206). Then, the process moves to step S1208.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if it is determined that the jackpot of the second special symbol is not set (S1202: No), the special symbol 2 out-of-balance variation pattern selection process (S1207) is executed, and the process proceeds to S1208. Transition.

In the process of S1208, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating a stop symbol is set (S1208). Next, set the start of variation of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S1209), and set the value indicating the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the process of S1205 in the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n ( S1210), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, this special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (S1207) will be explained. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 off variation pattern selection process (S1207).

In the special figure 2 out-of-flight variation pattern selection process (S1207 in FIG. 43), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S1301). Here, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to on (S1301). If it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired from the second special symbol execution area 203b (S1302). Then, based on the acquired value of the small winning type counter C5 and the small winning type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)), the small winning type is selected (S1303).

Next, the fluctuation pattern selection table (see FIGS. 17 to 19) corresponding to the current gaming state is read out (S1304), and the small winning fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is selected from the read fluctuation pattern selection table. is selected (S1305). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command indicating the selected small hit variation pattern is set (S1306), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1301, if it is determined that the lottery result of the second special symbol is not a small win (that is, a loss) (S1301: No), the fluctuation pattern selection table corresponding to the current gaming state (Fig. 17 and FIG. 19) (S1307), and selects an outlier variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the read variation pattern selection table (S1308). Thereafter, a special figure 2 variation pattern command is set based on the selected deviation variation pattern (S1309), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the second special symbol variation execution process (S211), which is one process in the special symbol variation process (see S104 in FIG. 32) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Explain the content. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation execution process (S211). In this second special symbol variation execution process (S211), the process of restarting the subtraction of the variation time of the special symbol 2 when it has been interrupted, and the process of subtracting the variation time are executed.

When the second special symbol variation execution process (S211) is executed, first, the special symbol 2 variation time counter 203n is updated by subtracting 1 (S1401), and the second special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. is updated (S1402), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213). This second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) is to execute the processing when stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol 2.

When the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special pattern 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on (S1501), and the special pattern 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to on. When it is determined that (S1501: Yes), a special figure 1 variation stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 1 variation is set (S1503). Next, when the process of S1503 is finished, the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol (S1504). Next, a jackpot scenario corresponding to the selected jackpot type is set (S1505), and the special map 2 jackpot flag 203i, probability change flag 203g, and time saving counter 203f are reset (S1506). Next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S1507), and the process moves to S1509.

In the process of S1509, a special symbol 2 confirmation command is set to notify the audio lamp control device 113 that the second special symbol is confirmed and stopped (S1509). Thereafter, a process is executed to stop the variable display of the second special symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner on the first symbol display device 37 (S1510), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1501, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to ON (S1501: No), the special figure 2 out-of-win stop process is executed (S1508), and the above-mentioned S1509 and S1510 Execute the process and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the special symbol 2 off-stopping process (S1508), which is one process of the second special symbol variation stopping process (S213 in FIG. 45), will be explained. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 out-of-place stop processing (S1508). In this special figure 2 losing stop processing (S1508), when the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is other than a jackpot (small hit, miss), the special figure 2 indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. This is a process to be executed when the special figure 2 lottery result is a small hit, a process for temporarily stopping the special figure 1 variation being executed is executed.

In the special figure 2 missing stop processing (S1508), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203k is set to on (S1601). When it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is set on (S1601: Yes), the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set on (S1602). Next, a special figure 1 temporary stop command indicating that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is turned on is set (S1603).

After completing the process of S1603, a small win scenario based on the selected small win type is set (S1604). Thereafter, the small hit flag 203k is set to OFF (S1605), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON (S1606).

When the process of S1606 is completed, a special figure 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to confirm and stop the second special symbol (S1607). Thereafter, the second special symbol that is being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped variably at the small winning symbol (S1608), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S1601, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203k is off (that is, the lottery result of the second special symbol is a loss) (S1601: No), the second special symbol is fixed and stopped. A special map 2 confirmation command is set to instruct the audio lamp control device 113 to do so (S1609). Thereafter, the second special symbol being variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is removed and the variation is stopped at the symbol (S1610), and this process is ended.

As described above, since the control of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed independently and in parallel, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be varied simultaneously. It can be displayed. Therefore, more special symbol lottery games can be executed within a predetermined time, and the probability that a jackpot will be awarded to a player within a predetermined time can be increased. Therefore, the player can play the game efficiently.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the special symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed on either one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the other special symbol may be temporarily stopped or fluctuatingly displayed while measurement of the fluctuating time is interrupted. In such a case, the temporarily stopped special symbols are stopped in a display mode or notification mode that allows the player to know that they are temporarily stopped, so the player can see that the lottery game that was in the middle of a variable display disappears. It is possible to know that the player is not playing a jackpot game with peace of mind.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the starting winning process (S105), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process (S105). In the starting prize winning process (S105 in FIG. 47), it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first ball entrance (first starting opening) 64 (winning), and if the ball has entered (winning), the game ball is put on hold. This is a process of storing each acquired counter value in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a up to the upper limit number (maximum 4 in the first ball entrance 64). In addition, when each counter value acquired based on the reserved balls is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, based on each counter value stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, , a process of predicting the validity determination result, the selected variation pattern, etc. is executed in advance. The starting winning process (S105) will be described below.

In the starting winning process (S105), first, it is determined whether the ball has entered the first ball entry opening 64 (starting winning) which is the first starting opening (S1701). Here, the determination is made using the detection result of a first ball entry switch (not shown) that detects the entry of a ball into the first ball entry port 64. When it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (there is a starting prize) (S1701: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired (S1702 ). It is determined whether the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703). It is determined whether this is less than four, which is the upper limit of the number of balls held for the first entrance 64 (that is, whether the number of balls held is not stored up to the upper limit). If it is determined that the acquired value (N1) is less than 4 (S1703: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (S1704). A command for the number of held balls to notify the audio lamp control device 113 of the number of held balls is set (S1705). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1, which are various counter values, is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer, and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is read out (obtained) from the counter buffer. (S1706).

Next, based on each stored counter value, the result of the judgment of the first special symbol, the determined winning type, and the fluctuation pattern are predicted (S1707). Then, a winning information command including the predicted success/failure determination result of the first special symbol, the winning type, and the variation pattern is set (S1708), and this process is ended.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole (first ball entry hole) 64 and is newly held and stored, the judgment result is determined based on the held and stored information. is determined before the start of the fluctuation and is notified to the audio lamp control device 113. This allows you to change the display mode of the held ball (for example, change the color of the held ball to a different color than usual) based on the stored validity judgment results, or display the held ball in a different color than normal. It is possible to display a preview symbol or the like to perform an effect that suggests the result of the judgment to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol fluctuation processing (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and is performed during the fluctuation display of the second symbol and the fluctuation time performed on the second symbol display device 83, and the lower first ball entrance 64b2. This is a process for controlling the opening operation and opening time of the electric accessory 64a accompanying this.

In this normal symbol variation process (S106 in FIG. 48), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S1801). When a normal symbol (second symbol) hits, there is a time when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win, and when the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is performed. This includes while the work is being done. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S1801: Yes), it is in a state where it is not possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery). This process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hitting (S1801: No), then it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (normal symbol changing). (S1802), and when it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is not changing (normal symbol fluctuation) (S1802: No), that is, even if the current normal symbol is a hit, the normal symbol is changing. If it is determined that there is no state among them, that is, a state in which it is possible to start (execute) a new normal symbol variation (lottery), data (second winning random number It is determined whether or not the data (value of counter C4) is stored (S1804), and if the data is not stored (S1804: No), it is not possible to execute the normal symbol lottery, so this process is immediately terminated. .

On the other hand, in the process of S1804, if it is determined that data is stored in the execution area (S1804: Yes), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S1807). Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S1807 and the normal symbol (second) winning random number table 202c, a lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S1808). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table 202c. As mentioned above, when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, if the value of the second winning type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 10", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and the normal symbol is won. When the high probability state is set, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 231", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "232", It is determined that the pattern is outside the normal pattern.

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S1808 is a normal symbol win (S1809), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S1809: Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol is a win or not. The display mode is set (S1810), and the process moves to S1811. In the process of S1810, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S1809, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S1809: No), the display mode when the pattern is out is set (S1812), and the process proceeds to S1811. In the process of S1812, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S1811.

When the process of S1810 or S1812 is completed, in the process of S1811, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S1811), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols. state) (S1811: Yes), sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the second symbol display device to 3 seconds (S1813), and then sets the short fluctuation flag 203t on. (S1814), this process ends. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 determines that it is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (it is in the low probability state of normal symbols) (S1811: No), the fluctuation time of the normal symbols on the second symbol display device is set to 10 seconds (S1815), and this process ends.

In addition, the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t set to ON in the process of S1814 is a configuration for temporarily storing the gaming state at the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed, and the fluctuation of the normal symbol stops. This is displayed and referred to when setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a. Thereby, the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a can be varied depending on which game state the normal symbol variation (lottery) start timing and the opening operation timing of the electric accessory 64a are.

In this embodiment, the gaming state at the start (execution) timing of normal symbol variation (lottery) is configured to be temporarily stored using a dedicated flag, but other configurations may also be used. For example, when it is determined that the drawing result of a normal symbol is a win, the gaming state at the time when the drawing of the normal symbol was executed is stored in the gaming state storage means that can always store the currently set gaming state. It may be configured to provide a storage area for temporary storage. Furthermore, a means is provided to always remember the period in which the normal state is set, and the period stored in that means (the period in which the normal state is set) is compared with the timing when the drawing of the normal symbol is carried out. By doing so, it may be configured such that the gaming state at the timing when the normal symbol lottery is performed can be determined. In other words, it is sufficient to have a configuration that includes a storage device that can store the currently set gaming state and a storage device that can store at least the gaming state that was set at a predetermined timing in the past.

On the other hand, in the process of S1802, if it is determined that the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S1802: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been done (S1816). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S1810 or the process of S1812 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S1813, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S1816: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1816, if it is determined that the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S1816: Yes), then the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S1817). In the process of S1817, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S1810, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S1812, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. In addition, the period during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed is longer than the period during which one part of the blinking display (alternating display of "○" and "x") indicating that the second symbol is changing is lit. (confirmed display). Thereby, the player can easily understand that the second symbol has been stopped and displayed.

When the stop display is set by the process of S1817, when the second symbol display update process (S2208 of FIG. 52) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S1810 or S1812.

When the process of S1817 is finished, next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variation process (S106) It is determined whether it is a normal symbol hit (S1818). If it is determined that the current lottery result is an outlier of the normal symbols (S1818: No), the present process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a normal symbol win (S1818: Yes), then it is determined whether the short fluctuation flag 203t is set to ON (S1819).

In the process of S1819, if it is determined that the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, the gaming state at the timing when the current regular symbol lottery (fluctuation) was started is If it is determined that the state is normal (S1819: No), the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of openings is set to 1 (S1824), and the process moves to S1823. do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1819, if it is determined that the normal symbol short fluctuation flag 203t is set to on, that is, it is determined that the gaming state at the timing when the current regular symbol lottery (variation) is started is the time short state. If so (S1819: Yes), the normal figure short fluctuation flag 203t is set to OFF (S1820), and then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a time saving state (time saving) (S1821).

In the process of S1821, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a time saving state (S1821: No), the gaming state at the timing when the current normal symbol lottery (variation) was started is the normal state, and the current gaming state ( Since the timing for setting the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is in the normal state, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened is set to 0.2 seconds. It is set to once (S1824), and the process moves to S1823.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a time-saving state (S1821: Yes), the timing at which the current normal symbol lottery (variation) was started and the current gaming state (opening operation of the electric accessory 64a) Since the timing for setting the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, the opening period of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is set to 2 seconds, and the number of times the electric accessory 64a is opened is set to two times ( 64a) (S1822), and the process moves to S1823.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the timing at which the normal symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set, which is executed based on the winning of the normal symbol, Only when both are in the time saving state, the opening operation (long opening) advantageous to the player is set as the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a.

With this configuration, it is possible to strictly set the conditions for setting the opening action that is advantageous to the player, so for example, if the normal symbol lottery ( Even if the time-saving state is set before the normal symbol's variation time (10 seconds) ends after the variation) is executed and the winning occurs, the long open is set as the operation of the electric accessory 64a. Nothing happens. Similarly, if a player wins in a normal symbol variation (lottery) executed while the time saving state is set, and the normal state is set as the gaming state until the normal symbol variation stops. Even in this case, the long opening of the electric accessory 64a is never set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous benefit (long opening of the electric accessory 64a) from being provided to the player.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the electric accessory 64a from being opened long when the normal state is set as the gaming state, it is easy to draw a special symbol (second special symbol) advantageous to the player. The period can be limited to a time saving state. In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state is determined at the timing at which the lottery (variation) of the normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set, and the gaming state set at each timing is determined. Although the above-mentioned configuration is used as the configuration for setting the content of the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a based on this, other configurations may be used.

For example, the opening operation that is disadvantageous to the player only when the timing at which the drawing (variation) of normal symbols is started and the timing at which the opening operation of the electric accessory 64a is set are both in the normal state (S1824 in FIG. 48 It may be configured such that the opening operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48 is set (opening operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48) is set (short opening is set), and long opening (opening operation set in S1822 of FIG. 48) is set in other states. With this configuration, a benefit (long release) advantageous to the player is provided even for normal symbol fluctuations executed before and after the time saving state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set. Therefore, the time saving state can be made more advantageous to the player.

In this way, while the time saving state is set as the gaming state, compared to the case where the normal state is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is very short from "10 seconds → 3 seconds", and furthermore. , since the open period of the lower first ball entry port 64b2 becomes extremely long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", it is easy for the ball to enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2. Become. In addition, in this embodiment, since the time saving state is configured to end when a jackpot game is executed, a normal state is entered during the jackpot game. On the other hand, when a small win game is executed, the time saving state is configured to be set continuously unless the time saving end condition is satisfied, so the small winning game is executed while the time saving state is set. During the winning game, there is a period in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened in the small winning game, and the electric accessory 64a is long open, and a plurality of winning holes (first specific winning hole 65a, lower first ball opening) are opened. 64b2) becomes a specific period in which it is easy to hit the ball.

By using such a configuration, for example, instead of the configuration of the game board 13 shown in FIG. , It is preferable to configure the ball so that it enters two winning holes (specific winning hole 65a, lower first ball entrance hole 64b2) during the small winning game, thereby increasing the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the small winning game. This makes it possible to provide more advantageous benefits to players.

Returning to FIG. 48, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S1820, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entry opening 64b2 is set (S1823), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S1823, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S2206) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the opening/closing of the electric accessory 64a is set. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S1824 or the process of S1822 are completed.

Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passage process (S107) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 if there is a winning random number counter C4.

In the through gate passage process (S107 in FIG. 49), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901). Here, passage of a game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the normal entry ball opening (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S1902). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1903).

Whether the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: No), or even if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter If the value (M) of 203e is not less than 4 (S1903: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S1901: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S1903: Yes), the normal The value (M) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S1904).

When the process of S1904 is finished, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) is stored in the empty holding area (holding first The data is stored in the first area (from area to fourth reserved area) (S1905), and the process ends. In addition, in the process of S1905, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the lottery based on the second special symbol is set to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the first special symbol. Therefore, the state in which the ball can enter the lower first ball entry port 64b2, which is provided when the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a win, is a more advantageous gaming state than the normal gaming state. .

By indicating the timing at which such a gaming state is provided based on the preliminary determination result of the normal pattern, the player can play the game without missing a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In addition, when performing an effect using such a preliminary determination result of a general figure, not only is the effect based on the result of the judgment of the correctness of the ordinary figure, but also the electric accessory 64a is released when the general figure is determined to be a hit. It is a good idea to create a performance that suggests the timing. By doing this, in a normal game state, a game is played aiming at the left side game area of the game board 13, and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 (the ball entry port to which the electric accessory 64a is attached) is located on the game board 13. Even if the electric accessory 64a is placed on the right side of the game board 13, it is possible to switch to a game in which the player aims at the right side of the game board 13 (so-called right-handed play) before the electric accessory 64a performs the opening operation. Even if the ball enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2, the possibility of the ball entering the lower first ball entry port 64b2 can be increased.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. As shown in FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Through this NMI interrupt processing, information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S2001), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

Note that the above NMI interrupt process is similarly executed by the payout control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this startup process.

This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process (FIG. 51), first, initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S2101). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, wait processing (1 second in this embodiment) is executed to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operational. (S2102). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S2103).

Thereafter, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S2104), and if it is turned on (S2104: Yes), the process moves to S2110. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch (see FIG. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), it is further determined whether power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105), and if it is not stored ( S2105: No), since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process also moves to S2110 in this case.

If power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2105: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S2106), and if the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S2107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process also moves to S2110 in such a case. Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S2110, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S2110). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S2111, S2112).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12). Therefore, if the RAM erase switch (FIG. 12) is pressed when the startup process is executed, the RAM 203 initialization process (S2111, S2112) is executed.

In addition, in the case where power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization processing (S2111, S2112) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S2111, S2112), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S2111), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S2112). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process moves to S2113.

On the other hand, the RAM erase switch (Fig. 12) is not turned on (S2104: No), the power-off occurrence information is stored (S2105: Yes), and the RAM judgment values (checksum value, etc.) are normal. If there is (S2107: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S2108). Next, a payout return command upon power restoration is transmitted to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff (S2109), and the process proceeds to S2113. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes ready to start payout control of game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

Next, an effect permission command is output to the audio lamp control device 113 to permit execution of various effects (S2113). Thereafter, the state of the variable probability flag 203g and each value of the time saving counter 203f are read out (S2114), and a state command is set based on the read counter value (S2115). When the process of S2115 ends, interrupts are permitted (S2116), and the process moves to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above startup processing will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this main processing. This main processing is roughly divided into counter update processing and power-off processing.

In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see Figure 31), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device). ) (S2201).

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S2202). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S2203). Jackpot control processing is executed (S2204). Regarding this jackpot control process (S2204), details will be described later with reference to FIG. 53, but a process for setting the operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 in the jackpot game is executed.

After the jackpot control process (S2204) is executed, the small hit control process (S2205) is executed. This small hit control process (S2205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 55. After that, electric accessory opening/closing processing is executed (S2206). In this electric accessory opening/closing process (S2206), opening/closing processing of the electric accessory 64a is executed. After that, display update processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S2207).

Next, a process of updating the display of the second symbol (for example, a "○" or "x" symbol) by the second symbol display device is executed (S2208). Briefly, on the condition that the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of passing, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained on the second symbol display device. A variable display of the second symbol (normal symbol) is performed. Then, a second symbol (normal symbol) is drawn based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol (normal symbol) becomes a winning state, the electric accessory 64a is opened for a predetermined time.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: No), a power outage signal is sent from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous main process (S2210). If the predetermined time (4 ms) has already elapsed (S2210: Yes), the process moves to S2201, and each process from S2201 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the current main process (S2210: No), the The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S2211, S2212).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S2211). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (479, 232 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process in S2202 (S2212).

Here, since the execution time of each process from S2201 to S2208 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e. , the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, in the process of S2209, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S2209: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power is turned off, and the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 50 has been executed, so the processing at power-off after S2213 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S2213), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). and transmits it (S2214). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is saved (S2215), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S2216), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

Note that the process in S2209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in S2201 to S2208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in S2211 and S2212 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of a power outage is checked at the timing when each setting is completed, so when recovering from a power off state, the processing must be performed after the startup processing is completed. It can start from the process of S2201. That is, the process can be started from the process of S2201, as in the case where it is initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved during power-off processing, the stack pointer is saved during the initial setting process (S2101). By setting it to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S2201. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 53, the jackpot control process (S2204) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S2204). This jackpot control process (S2204) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it executes various performances according to the jackpot, and controls the execution of the first specific prize. This is a process for opening or closing the opening (large opening opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a.

In the jackpot control process (S2204), first, it is determined whether a jackpot scenario is set (S2301). If it is determined that the jackpot scenario has not been set (S2301: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2301, if it is determined that a jackpot scenario has been set (S2301: Yes), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303). . More specifically, in the process of S2302, 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2303, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter (not shown) is set to the opening start of the jackpot scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to .

In the process of S2303, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (start of jackpot) (S2303: Yes), a jackpot opening command is set (S2304), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the opening of the jackpot scenario (S2303: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305).

In the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed to set the opening/closing operation of the specific prize opening 650a during the jackpot ( S2306), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round of the jackpot scenario (S2305: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied ( S2307). Here, in this embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) win in total while the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a is opened, or when the first specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a is opened, When the opening period of the specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 650a has elapsed for a predetermined time (30 seconds), it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied (S2307: Yes), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a that is currently open is set to be closed in the process of S2308, This process ends. Note that the above-described determination processing from S2305 to S2307 is repeatedly executed for the number of jackpot rounds set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the process of S2307, if it is determined that the round end condition of the currently executed round is not satisfied (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S2309), and the ending effect is If it is the start timing (S2309: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S2310), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2309, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S2309: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the case where the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. In the process of S2311, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: Yes), a jackpot end process is executed to set the gaming state after the jackpot ends (S2312), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot ending process (S2312) will be described later with reference to FIG. 54. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the jackpot (S2311: No), this process is ended as is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the jackpot end process (S2312), which is one process in the jackpot control process (S2204 in FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. This jackpot end process (S2312) is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot ends, as described above. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the contents of this jackpot ending process (S2312).

In the jackpot end process (S2312), first, the gaming state at the time of winning is specified based on the state at the time of winning storage area 203j (S2401). Next, it is determined whether the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot (a jackpot type in which the probability variable flag 203g is set to ON after the jackpot game ends) (S2402). Here, in the process of S2402, determination is made based on the jackpot type set this time. In the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is a probability-variable jackpot (S2402: Yes), the probability-variable flag 203g is set to ON (S2403), and the process proceeds to S2404. On the other hand, in the process of S2402, if it is determined that the current jackpot is not a probability-variable jackpot (S2402: No), the process of S2403 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2404. As a result, the low probability state of the special symbol is set as the game state after the jackpot.

Next, a value corresponding to the gaming state at the time of winning and the jackpot type read in the process of S2401 is set in the time saving counter 203f (S2404). Specifically, when "Jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to "10000" in order to continue the high probability state of normal symbols until the next jackpot, and "Jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type. ” is set, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to “100” in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches 100.

When the process of S2404 is finished, next, the jackpot flag 203o is set to OFF, and the winning status storage area 203j is cleared (S2405). Thereafter, a status command corresponding to the set gaming status is set (S2406), and the present process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot type of the jackpot won this time and the gaming state at the time of winning are determined, and two conditional elements are used to set the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. It is configured to set the contents of (probability change flag 203g, time saving counter 203f). Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to both the jackpot type of the won jackpot and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the small hit control process (S2205), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small hit control process (S2205).

In the small win control process (S2205), first, it is determined whether a small win scenario is set (S2501). Specifically, the process of S1604 of the special figure 2 out-of-game stop process (see FIG. 46) is executed, and it is determined whether a small winning scenario is set. In the process of S2501, if a small winning scenario is not set (S2501: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S2501, if a small winning scenario is set (S2501: Yes), the small winning scenario is updated (S2502), and it is determined whether it is the timing to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503). More specifically, in the process of S2502, 1 is added to the counter value of the small win scenario counter (not shown), and in the process of S2503, the counter value of the small win scenario counter (not shown) is set to the small win scenario. Determine whether the value corresponds to the opening start of .

In the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the opening of the small win scenario (S2503: Yes), a small win opening command is set (S2504), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the opening of the small winning scenario (S2503: No), then it is determined whether it is the timing to start the round of the small winning scenario (S2505).

In the process of S2505, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the round of the small win scenario (S2505: Yes), the small win operation setting process is executed (S2506), and this process ends. The details of the small winning operation setting process (S2506) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the round of the small win scenario (S2505: No), then it is determined whether the round end condition of the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507). Here, in this embodiment, when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 5 balls) win in total while the specific winning hole 65a is open, or when the opening period of the specific winning hole 65a has elapsed for a predetermined time. If so, it is determined that the round end condition has been met.

In the process of S2507, if it is determined that the round end condition for the currently executed round is satisfied (S2507: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is set to be closed in the process of S2508, and the main process is continued. end. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round end condition of the specific winning hole 65a is not satisfied (S2507: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509).

In the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S2509: Yes), an ending command for a small win is set (S2510), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control during external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The information is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending performance (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small win (S2511). Here, the end timing of the small hit indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has elapsed.

In the process of S2511, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win (S2511: Yes), the small win medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S2512), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not the end timing of the small win (S2511: No), the second winning process is executed (S2513) and the present process ends. Details of this second winning process (S2513) will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, a small winning operation setting process (S2506) which is one process in the small winning control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the contents of this small winning operation setting process (S2506).

In the small winning operation setting process (S2506), first, an opening scenario in which an opening operation corresponding to the number of small winning rounds to be started is set is read (S2601). The opening operation of the specific winning hole 65a is set based on the data read in the process of S2601 (S2602), and this process is ended.

In this way, each operation of the variable prize winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, so even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a jackpot game, the jackpot game will not end prematurely. Problems can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, details of the second winning process (S2513), which is one process in the small win control process (S2506 in FIG. 56) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this second winning process (S2513). This second winning process (S2513) is executed in the small winning control process (see FIG. 55), and as described above, is a process for performing control according to the winning to the specific winning opening 65a.

In this second winning process (S2513), first, it is determined whether the current round validity period is in effect (S2701). Here, the round valid period is the period during which the round game is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning hole 65a is set to the open state until the end of the interval period (5 seconds). In the process of S2701, if it is not the round validity period (S2701: No), the winning counter 203u is reset (S2702), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2701, if it is determined that the current round validity period is reached (S2701: Yes), then it is determined whether a winning in the specific winning hole 65a has been detected (S2703), and the process goes to the specific winning hole 65a. If no winning has been detected (S2703: No), the process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S2703, if a winning for the specific winning opening 65a is detected (S2703: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning counter 203u and updated (S2704). Then, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter 203u is greater than or equal to the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) (S2705), and if the value of the winning counter 203u is less than or equal to the upper limit value (5 in this embodiment) ( S2705: No), this process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the value of the winning counter 203u is the upper limit (5 in this embodiment) or more (S2705: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a (the accompanying opening/closing plate 65f1) is set to close (S2706). Next, the small win scenario is updated to the end of the round (S2707), and the process ends.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 72. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly divided into startup processing that is started upon power-on, and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, with reference to FIG. 58, the startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this startup process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

When startup processing is executed, first, initialization processing associated with power-on is executed (S4001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off processing flag is on or not, the current startup process may be interrupted by an instantaneous voltage drop (instantaneous power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage"), resulting in the power-off processing in S4117 (see Figure 59). ) is started during execution (S4002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 59, upon receiving power-off occurrence information from the main control device 110 (see S4114 in FIG. 59), the audio lamp control device 113 executes power-off processing in S4117. Before executing the power-off processing, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing in S4117 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S4002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing in S4117 was started. The process was started after the execution of the process was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003).

Confirmation of data destruction in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword "55AAh" has been written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S4006. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed. If data destruction in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S4003: Yes), the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S4003: No), the process moves to S4008.

Note that if the current startup process is started after the power is completely shut off, the keyword "55AAh" will not be stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 will be lost due to the power shutoff). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S4003: Yes), and the process moves to S4004. On the other hand, the current start-up process was started after a momentary power outage occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4116 was completed, or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset only due to noise or the like. When the process is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S4003: No), and the process moves to S4008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S4002: Yes), the current startup process is performed after a momentary power outage occurs, and during the execution of the power-off process in S4117, the audio lamp control device 113 The process was started when the MPU 221 of the computer was reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is in the middle of execution, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S4004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S4004, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S4004). The checking method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This write and check for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of the RAM 223 clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S4005: Yes), a keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S4006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S4005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S4007), and an endless loop is performed until the power is cut off. An abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the audio output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message. You can also do this.

In the process of S4008, it is determined whether the power-off flag 223y is turned on (S4008). The power-off flag 223y is turned on when the power-off process in S4117 is executed (see S4116 in FIG. 59). In other words, since the power-off flag 223y is turned on before the power-off process in S4117 is executed, the reason why the process in S4008 is reached with the power-off flag 223y on is because the current startup process is instantaneous. This is a case where the process is started after a major power outage has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4117 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the audio lamp control device 113 (S4009), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010), the state The status setting area 223j is updated based on the command (S4011). Next, interrupt permission is set (S4012), and the process moves to main processing. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S4008 is reached with the power-off flag 223y turned off is because the current startup process was started after the power was completely shut off, so the process of S4008 is reached via the processes of S4004 to S4006. This is a case where only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) and the process is started. Therefore, in such a case (S4008: No), the process skips S4009, which is a process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, moves to S4010, and sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S4010).

Note that the reason why the clearing process in S4009 is skipped is because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S4004 when the process reaches S4008 from S4004 through the process in S4006. If only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and startup processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because it is possible to continue controlling the

Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether 1 millisecond or more has passed since the main processing was started or since the processing in S4101 was previously executed (S4101), and 1 millisecond If the above period has not elapsed (S4101: No), the process proceeds to S4112 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111. In the process of S4101, determining whether 1 millisecond has elapsed is the process of S4102 to S4111 related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in short cycles (within 1 millisecond). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process in S4112 and the variable display setting process in S4113 in a short cycle. By executing the process in S4112 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent failure to receive commands sent from the main controller 110, and by executing the process in S4113 in a short cycle, commands received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, settings regarding the variable display effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S4101 (S4101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set in the processes of S4103 to S4113 are sent to the display control device 114 ( S4102). Next, the output of each lamp is set to match the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4108, which will be described later (S4103), and then a power-on notification process is executed (S4104). The power-on notification process is to notify that the power has been turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on. be exposed. Further, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S4105 without providing notification through the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4105, a customer waiting effect is executed, and then a pending number display update process is executed (S4106). In the customer waiting performance, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device. 114.

Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is executed (S4107). In this frame button input monitoring/production process, in order to enhance the production effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed is monitored, and when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed, a corresponding response is performed. This is a process of setting to perform a performance. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

When the frame button input monitoring/presentation processing is completed, lamp editing processing is then executed (S4108), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S4109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S4109, liquid crystal presentation execution management process is executed (S4110). After this, the process moves to S4111. In the liquid crystal presentation execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S4108 is executed based on the time set in this liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing/output processing in S4109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81.

After the process of S4110, various counter update processes are executed (S4111), and the process moves to S4112. Details of this various counter updating processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 72.

Thereafter, command determination processing (S4112) is executed to perform processing according to the command received from the main controller 110, and the process moves to S4113. Details of this command determination process (S4112) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4113, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. A variable display setting process, which is a process for setting for transmission to the destination, is executed (S4113). Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69.

When the process of S4113 is completed, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S4114). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S4113 (S4114: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4116), and the power-off process is executed (S4117). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S4118), and the process is then looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off, and output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information.

On the other hand, if power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4114 (S4114: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4115), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4115: No), the process returns to S4101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4115: Yes), the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM has been destroyed and the process loops endlessly, the main process will not be executed, so the display by the third symbol display device 81 will not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the command determination process (S4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S4112). This command determination process (S4112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. . The details of the command determination process (S4112) will be described below.

In the command determination process (S4112), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the special command is sent from the main controller 110. It is determined whether a 1 stop type command or a special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201). If it is determined that either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: Yes), the stop type command reception process is executed (S4202) and this process is ended. Details of this stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

On the other hand, in the process of S4201, if it is determined that neither the special figure 1 stop type command nor the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S4201: No), whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 is determined. (S4203). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S4203: Yes), status command processing is executed (S4204), and this processing ends. The details of this status command processing (S4204) will be described later with reference to FIG. A process of setting the status) in the status setting area 223j is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S4203: No), it is determined whether or not the special map 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205). Here, the special figure 1 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol.

In the process of S4205, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has been received (S4205: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4206), and the command is received. The variation pattern type is extracted from the special figure 1 variation pattern command (S4207), and this processing is ended. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows it to be identified as the variation pattern type of the first special symbol, and is stored in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , when notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the first special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the first special symbol (setting a variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol) used in cases where

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S4205: No), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4208). The special figure 2 variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol.

In the process of S4208, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has been received (S4208: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4209), and the received special figure 2 variation pattern command is set to ON (S4209). The variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command in FIG. 2 (S4210), and this process ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 in a format that allows it to be identified as the variation pattern type of the second special symbol, and is used in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 69) described later. , when notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the second special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the second special symbol (setting a variable pattern command for display of the second special symbol) used in cases where

In the process of S4208, if it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S4208: No), it is determined whether the reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4211). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S4211: Yes), the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 included in the received held ball number command (i.e., the first The value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is updated according to the extracted counter value (the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display of the special symbol). S4212), this process ends. In addition, since this embodiment does not have a configuration to hold and store the drawing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), in the process of S4212, the value of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) reserved ball number counter 223c is Only update processing is executed.

Here, the held ball count command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), so it is sent by the process of S4212 every time there is a starting winning. , the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise, the start When the number of reserved balls command is notified based on winning a prize, the value of the first special symbol reserved number of balls counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 is corrected, and the value of the first special symbol reserved number of balls of the main controller 110 is changed. It can be adjusted to the value of the counter 203d.

Further, in the process of S4211, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S4211: No), it is determined whether the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4213). In the process of S4213, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4213: Yes), the information of the received winning information command (the success or failure of the special symbol lottery, the winning type, and the fluctuation pattern) is converted into the corresponding winning information. It is set in the storage area 223b (S4214), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4213, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4213: No), it is determined whether a winning related command has been received from the main control device (S4215). In the process of S4215, if it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S4215: Yes), the win-related process is executed (S4216), and this process ends. The details of the win-related process (S4216) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but the performance corresponding to the jackpot game or small win game that is executed when a jackpot or small jackpot is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. It performs processing for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute the display.

On the other hand, in the process of S4215, if it is determined that a winning related command has not been received (S4215: No), it is determined whether a short remaining time command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4217). In the process of S4217, if it is determined that the short remaining time count command has been received (S4217: Yes), the remaining count update process (S4218) is executed. The details of this remaining number update process (S4218) will be explained with reference to FIG. 66, but based on the remaining time shortening number command output from the main controller 110, Processing for setting the content of the effect display is executed.

In the process of S4217, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number of times command has not been received (S4217: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop related command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4219). In the process of S4219, if it is determined that a temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), the temporary stop related process is executed (S4220), and this process ends. Details of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be described later with reference to FIG. 67, but the process determines the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command or the special figure 2 temporary stop command is received. When the special figure 1 variation restart command or the special figure 2 variation restart command is received, a process is executed to set the production (additional production) to be executed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S4219, if it is determined that a temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S4221), and this process ends. In the process of S4221, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, that command is executed. This command is used to set a command so as to send the command to the display control device 114.

As explained above, the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) executed by the audio lamp control device 113 of this embodiment includes the process to determine whether a status command has been received (see S4203 in FIG. 60). , is configured before the process of determining whether a variation pattern command for each special symbol has been received (see S4205 and S4208 in FIG. 60).

With this configuration, when the fluctuation pattern command and the status command are output from the main controller 110 at the same time, that is, during the first special symbol fluctuation start process of the main controller 110 (see S208 in FIG. 33). Then, the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see S307 in FIG. 33) is executed, the special symbol 1 variation pattern command is set, and in the game state update process (see S308 in FIG. 33) that is executed thereafter, the game Even if a state command indicating that the state has changed is set, the currently set gaming state on the audio lamp control device 113 side can be determined before the special figure 1 variation pattern command.

Therefore, in the case where a jackpot of special drawing 1 is won in a state where a variable probability state is set, and a probability state is set during the jackpot variation, the audio lamp control device 113 side will not be able to determine whether the probability state has been set. It is possible to easily set a variation performance (see FIG. 7(a)) corresponding to a variation pattern command that results in a jackpot variation in the determined state.

Note that, unlike the configuration of this embodiment, if the configuration is configured to execute processing according to the fluctuation pattern command before the state command determination processing, from the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the above-mentioned jackpot fluctuation, the probability fluctuation Only the information indicating that the jackpot has been won by the first special symbol lottery during the state is received first, and a variable display is set according to the received content. Therefore, it becomes difficult to execute a variable display indicating that the probability state is set at the same time as the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is started. As the variable display indicating that the potential state has been set is delayed in this way, the timing of notifying the player that he/she will be allowed to play the right-handed game is delayed, causing discomfort to the player. The problem arises.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main controller 110 side performs a process of varying the gaming state after determining whether or not the jackpot has occurred (see S306 in FIG. 33) and setting a variation pattern (S307 in FIG. 33). (Game state update processing (S308 in FIG. 33)), the audio lamp control device 113 side first executes a process to determine the current gaming state (S4204 in FIG. 60), and then It is configured to set a fluctuation display corresponding to a fluctuation pattern. Therefore, even though a potential state is set, it is possible to reliably prevent a variable display corresponding to a previous gaming state from being set and executed.

In addition, by configuring the audio lamp control device 113 side to specify the order in which various commands are output from the main control device 110, it is necessary to specify the output order of various commands on the main control device 110 side. This makes it possible to reduce the Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the stop type command reception process (S4202) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this stop type command reception process (S4202). This stop type command reception process (S4202) is executed during the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the stop type command reception process (S4202) will be described below.

In the stop type command reception process (S4202), first, in response to the received command, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is set to ON, and the special figure 2 stop type command is set to ON. When the stop type command is received, the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to ON (S4301). Next, the stop type (big hit A to jackpot G, small hit A to small hit C, off, out of reach, etc.) is extracted from the received special chart 1 stop type command or special chart 2 stop type command (S4302), and the main Finish the process.

The stop type extracted in S4302 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the stop type extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command can be identified as the stop type of the first special symbol, and the stop type extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command is the stop type of the second special symbol. Each is stored in a way that allows identification of the stop type. As a result, even if the first special symbol (Special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (Special symbol 2) start varying at the same time, it is possible to manage the stop type respectively, and to execute appropriate variation display. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the status command processing (S4204) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this status command processing (S4204). This state command processing (S4204) is executed during the command determination processing (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The details of the status command processing (S4204) will be explained below.

In this status command processing (S4204), a process is executed to set the current gaming status in the status setting area 223j based on the status command output from the main controller 110, and when the gaming status shifts to the probable status, , a process for setting an effect (chance zone effect (see FIG. 6(b))) to notify the player that the potential state has been set, and a process for setting the effect when the gaming state has transitioned to the normal state. In this case, processing for clearing various flags and counters used for displaying the card forgetting alert screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is executed.

In the state command processing (S4204), first, the gaming state before receiving the state command is determined from the value of the state setting area 223j provided in the RAM 223 (S4401). That is, it is determined in which gaming state the state command was received. Next, it is determined whether the gaming state before receiving the state command is a definite state (S4402). If it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the state command is not the probable state (S4402: No), it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating a transition to the probable state (S4403). In the process of S4403, if the received command is a state command indicating transition to a potential state (S4403: Yes), a potential notification effect is set to notify entry into a potential state (S4404). Then, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the received state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process moves to S4406.

On the other hand, in the process of 4402, if it is determined that the gaming state before receiving the status command is a definite state (S4402: Yes), each process of S4403 and S4404 is skipped, and the process of S4405 is executed, The process moves to S4406. Further, in the process of S4403, if the received command is not a state command indicating transition to the probable state (S4403: No), the process of S4404 and S4405 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S4406.

Next, it is determined whether the received command is a state command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406). If it is determined that the received command is not a state command indicating a transition to the normal state (S4406: No), the process of S4407 to S4410 is skipped, the process of S4411 described later is executed, and this process ends. . On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a status command indicating transition to the normal state (S4406: Yes), it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4407). If it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is set to on (S4407: Yes), the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared to 0 (S4408), and the card notification completed flag 223q and card notification possible flag are set. 223s, the rush display flag 223t is set to off (S4409). Next, the contents of the remaining variable time information storage area 223o and the remaining time storage area 223p are cleared (S4410), and the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the other state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4411), This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4407, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to OFF (S4407: No), the process of S4408 and S4409 is skipped, the process of S4410 and S4411 is executed, and the main Finish the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the hit-related process (S4216), which is one process in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the win-related process (S4216). In this win-related process, a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game or a small win game that is executed when a jackpot or small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. When a jackpot or small jackpot is won, processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 are executed.

In addition, when receiving a prize ball number command to indicate the number of prize balls acquired during a winning game (big hit game, small winning game), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball number command is accumulated, and Based on the result, a process for displaying a forget card reminder screen (see FIG. 10(a)) is executed.

In the winning related process (S4216), first, it is determined whether the command received by the command determination process (see FIG. 60) is a jackpot related command (S4501). If it is determined that the received command is a jackpot-related command (S4501: Yes), jackpot-related processing is executed (S4502), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 64, the jackpot related process (S4502), which is one process in the win related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot related process (S4502). The jackpot-related process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won, and when a jackpot is won, the main control device Processing corresponding to various commands sent from 110 is executed.

In the jackpot related process (S4502), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start command is received in the win related command received in the win related process (S4216) (S4601). When a jackpot start command is received (S4601: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S4602), and this process is ended. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 during the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). The information is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect that suggests the start of a jackpot.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), it is determined whether the round number command has been received (S4603). If the number of rounds command is received (S4603: Yes), a number of rounds command for display is set based on the number of rounds (S4604), and this process ends. Note that in this embodiment, since information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data transmitted from the control device 110, if the main control device 110 transmits information indicating that a new round has started as a round update command, the voice lamp control device When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the 113, a round number accumulation counter is provided that accumulates the number of received round update commands. The configuration may be such that the number of rounds is calculated and a display round number command is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S4603, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S4603: No), it is determined whether the ending command has been received (S4605). If it is determined that the ending command has not been received (S4605: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that an ending command has been received (S4605: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S4606), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607). If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4607: Yes), a display ending command that does not include card notification is set (S4608). That is, a process for not displaying the display mode of FIG. 10(a) on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4607, if it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S4607: No), the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B. It is determined whether it is (S4609). If it is determined that the current jackpot type is jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: Yes), a display ending command including card notification is set (S4610), and the card notification flag 223q is set to ON. (S4611). That is, a process for displaying the display mode of FIG. 10(a) on the third symbol display device 81 is executed, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current jackpot type is not jackpot A or jackpot B (S4609: No), it is determined whether the card notification flag 223s is set to ON (S4612). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to ON (S4612: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to OFF (S4613), the processes of S4610 to S4611 described above are executed, and the main Finish the process. On the other hand, in the process of S4612, if it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4612: No), the process of S4608 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the jackpot related process (S4502 in FIG. 64), game information (opening, In addition to the process of setting display contents (ending, number of rounds), the configuration is configured to execute a process of determining whether to display a forgetting card warning screen (see FIG. 10(a)).

This card forgetting warning screen is displayed when a player obtains a predetermined amount (for example, 250 balls) of prize balls in a winning game (big win game, small win game). This is a notification mode to remind people not to forget the valuable media used in the event. In this embodiment, the above-mentioned card is used when the number of prize balls obtained during the period (continuous advantageous period) after winning a jackpot from the normal state and shifting to the normal state again satisfies the predetermined amount. It is configured to display a reminder screen for forgetting.

Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 64, a jackpot (jackpot A, If you win jackpot B), a card notification will be executed to display a screen reminding you to forget your card at the end of the jackpot game, and if you win any other jackpot (jackpot C, jackpot D), a card notification will be executed. It is configured so that it does not.

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where a warning screen for forgetting a card is displayed for a player who has not acquired a predetermined amount of prize balls, and to continue playing the game while borrowing balls. It is possible to prevent players from feeling uncomfortable while playing the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the jackpot game, a gaming state (potential state) in which it is easy to frequently execute small winning games can be set, so that by repeating small winning games, the player can A predetermined amount (for example, 250 shots) of prize balls may be obtained. Therefore, the number of prize balls acquired by the player during the advantageous period (the number of prize balls paid out during the advantageous period) is accumulated, and if the cumulative result exceeds a predetermined amount (250 shots), the execution is executed at that point. The system is configured so that a warning screen for forgetting a card is displayed on the ending screen of the middle jackpot game or small win game. Thereby, it is possible to display a warning screen for forgetting the card to the player at an appropriate timing.

Further, in this embodiment, the card forgetting warning screen is notified only once during one advantageous period. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the card forgetting warning screen from being frequently displayed and causing discomfort to the player. Note that the method of displaying the card forgetting reminder screen is not limited to the content of this embodiment, and for example, a measuring means for measuring the advantageous duration is provided, and the elapsed period since the last card forgetting reminder screen was displayed. If the time exceeds a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes), the card forgetting reminder screen may be displayed again. In this case, since the card forgetting alert screen has been displayed once (because the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting alert screen have already been met), during the special symbol fluctuation period (for example, during the advantageous continuation period) If a variation pattern with a variation time of 5 seconds or more is selected), it is preferable to display a card forgetting warning screen.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current gaming situation by utilizing the player's fixed concept that the forget card warning screen is displayed after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, as a method to achieve the same effect, a screen may be displayed for reminding the player to forget the card during the opening period of the jackpot game and the small win game.

Returning to FIG. 63, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4501, if it is determined that the received command is not a jackpot related command (S4501), it is determined whether the received command is a small win related command (S4503). If it is determined that the received command is a small win related command (S4503: Yes), small win related processing (S4504) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the small win related process (S4504) which is one process in the win related process (S4216 in FIG. 63) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the contents of the small hit related process (S4504). The small hit related process is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to the small win game that is executed when the small win is won. , processes corresponding to various commands sent from the main controller 110 are executed.

In the small winning related process (S4504), first, it is determined whether the winning related command received in the winning related process (S4216) is a small winning start command (S4701). When the small winning start command is received (S4701: Yes), a small winning start command for display is set (S4702), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the received command is not a small hit start command (S4701: No), it is determined whether an ending command has been received (S4703). If it is determined that the received command is not an ending command (S4703: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is an ending command (S4703: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S4704), and it is determined whether the card notification flag 223q is set to on (S4705). . If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4705: Yes), a display ending command that does not include card notification is set (S4706), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4705, if it is determined that the card notification completed flag 223q is not set to ON (S4705: No), it is determined whether the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4707). If it is determined that the card notification enable flag 223s is set to on (S4707: Yes), the card notification enable flag 223s is set to off (S4708), and a display ending command including card notification is set ( S4709), the card notification completed flag 223q is set to ON (S4710), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4707, the card notification enable flag 223s is not set to ON (S4707: No), the process of S4706 described above is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this embodiment, even in a small winning game where the display conditions for displaying the card forgetting warning screen are not satisfied in one game, after winning the jackpot in the normal state, If the cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired during the gaming period (advantageous continuation period) until the normal state is set again satisfies the display conditions (for example, the number of prize balls acquired reaches 250 shots), a small win will be awarded. The system is configured so that a warning screen for forgetting a card is displayed even after the game is over. Thereby, it is possible to display a warning screen for forgetting a card to the player at an appropriate timing.

Returning to FIG. 63, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4503, if it is determined that the received command is not a small hit related command (S4503: No), it is determined whether a prize ball command has been received (S4505). If it is determined that the received command is not a prize ball command (S4505: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the received command is a prize ball command (S4505: Yes), the value corresponding to the received command is added to the value of the prize ball number counter 223u (S4506), and then the card It is determined whether the notification flag 223q is set to on (S4507). If it is determined that the card notification flag 223q is not set to on (S4507: No), it is determined whether the value of the prize ball counter 223u added in the process of S4506 is 250 or more (S4508). If it is determined that the value of the prize ball number counter 223u after the addition is 250 or more (S4508: Yes), the card notification possible flag 223s is set to ON (S4509), and the prize ball number command for display is set. (S4510), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4507 that the card notification flag 223q is set to ON (S4507: Yes), or if the prize ball number counter 223u after addition is less than 250 in the process of S4508. If it is determined (S4508: No), the process of S4509 described above is skipped, the process of S4510 is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is determined through the status command processing (see S4204 in FIG. 62) that the normal status is set, and the value of the prize ball counter 223u is cleared. The prize ball number counter 223u is configured to accumulate the number of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls commands received during the period (advantageous continuation period). The system is configured to display a card forgetting warning screen according to the value of the prize ball counter 223u at the end of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) (at the ending screen display timing).

As a result, for example, if the jackpot (first hit) that triggers the setting of the advantageous continuation period is jackpot C (a jackpot in which it is difficult to obtain a predetermined amount (250 shots) of prize balls in one jackpot game) In this case, a card-forgetting warning screen can be displayed when the player wins a small winning game during the advantageous continuation period, or when he wins the jackpot C again.

Next, the remaining number of times updating process (S4218) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of this remaining number update process (S4218). This remaining number update process (S4218) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is Based on the reception of this, a process is executed to update the contents set in the remaining time shortening number area 223k, the remaining variable time information storage area 223o, and the remaining time storage area 223p.

In the remaining number update process (S4218), first, it is determined whether a short remaining time number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the remaining time shortening number of times command has not been received (S4801: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4801, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number command has been received (S4801: Yes), a display time reduction number command corresponding to the received command is set (S4802), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220) will be explained. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the temporary stop related process (S4220). In this temporary stop related process (S4220), the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 temporary stop command is received, and the process of determining the remaining time of the special figure fluctuation time when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received, the third symbol display device Processing for setting the effect (additional effect) to be executed in step 81 is executed.

When the temporary stop related process (S4220) is executed, first, it is determined whether the special map 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901), and if it is determined that it has not been received (S4901: No), the fluctuation restart process is executed. (S4902) is executed. Details of the fluctuation restart processing (S4902) will be described later with reference to FIG. 68. On the other hand, in the process of S4901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4901: Yes), the remaining fluctuation time of the currently set fluctuation pattern is calculated (S4903). Then, it is determined whether the residual fluctuation time calculated in the process of S4903 is less than 2 seconds (S4904), and if it is determined that it is less than 2 seconds (S4904: Yes), the residual fluctuation time is stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o. A period A indicating a short time is set (S4905), and the process moves to S4902.

On the other hand, in the process of S4904, if it is determined that the remaining fluctuation time is not less than 2 seconds (2 seconds or more) (S4904: No), then the remaining fluctuation period is 2 seconds or more and is less than 15 seconds. If it is determined that it is 2 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds (S4906: Yes), period B indicating that it is a normal residual fluctuation time is stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o. is set (S4907), and the process moves to S4902.

On the other hand, in the process of S4906, if it is determined that the residual fluctuation time is not less than 15 seconds (exceeds 15 seconds) (S4906: No), the residual fluctuation time is indicated in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o. A period C is set (S4908), and the process moves to S4902. In this way, the variation time (remaining variation period) that will be executed when the special pattern variation restarts is calculated at the timing when the special pattern variation is interrupted (the subtraction of the special pattern variation time is interrupted), and the corresponding period is calculated. By setting the information to do so, it is possible to perform a performance (additional performance) suitable for the remaining fluctuation time without delay at the timing of restarting the special symbol fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the period information (period A to period C) set in the remaining fluctuation time information storage area 223o corresponding to the fluctuation time (remaining fluctuation period) to be executed when the special figure fluctuation is restarted is different. For example, the shorter the remaining time, the easier it is to select period A, and the longer the remaining time, the easier it is to select period C. The ratio may be configured to vary depending on the remaining time, or the remaining period may be divided into predetermined intervals (for example, 30 seconds), and periods A to C may be distributed in order for each division. It may be configured.

With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the relationship between the additional performance executed based on the period information set in the remaining variation time information storage area 223o and the remaining variation time. It is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting fluctuation time.

Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the contents of the fluctuation restart process (S4902) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation restart process (S4902). This fluctuation restart process (S4902) is to execute a process of setting an additional effect to be executed when the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command is received.

When the fluctuation restart process (S4902) is executed, it is first determined whether the special map 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001), and if it is determined that it has not been received (S5001: No), this process is ended. . On the other hand, in the process of S5001, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), then the residual fluctuation time information stored in the residual fluctuation time information storage area 223o is read (S5002 ), the additional performance type is determined from the additional performance selection table 222c based on the read remaining variation time information and the additional performance counter 223i (S5003). Next, an additional effect command for display corresponding to the read additional effect type is set (S5004), information set in the residual variation time information storage area 223o is cleared (S5005), and this processing is ended.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when the special figure variation is interrupted, the special figure variation is resumed after the normal effect (the effect display that is executed when the special figure variation is started) ends. A shaking effect is performed in which the third symbol is displayed in a oscillating manner until the special figure change is restarted, and an additional effect corresponding to the special figure change period (remaining change period) after restarting is executed. However, other configurations may be used.

For example, a performance period determining means for determining a normal performance period during which a normal performance is performed is provided, and when the performance period determination means determines that the normal performance period has ended, an additional performance may be executed. Good too. By configuring in this way, the normal performance and the additional performance can be executed continuously, so that it is possible to provide a more suitable performance display to the player. In addition, in this case, there may be an error between the end timing of the additional production period during which the additional production is executed and the special symbol fluctuation period after restarting, but the additional production will continue to be executed during the error period. Alternatively, a swinging effect may be performed in which the third symbol is displayed swinging. Furthermore, an error period determining means for determining the length of the error period is provided, and when the error period determining means determines that the error period is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), an additional effect is performed again. It may be configured as follows.

Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S4113). This variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69) is based on the first or special pattern 2 variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Based on this, a process of setting a display variation pattern command for the first special symbol or the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Also, based on the extracted stop type (Jackpot A to Jackpot G), a process is executed to set a display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type.

In the fluctuation display setting process (S4112), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is off (S5101: No), it means that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process proceeds to S5107. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a definite state (S5103). When it is determined that the current gaming state is a potential state (S5103: Yes), a variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 70, details of the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be explained. do. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process (S5104). In this special symbol 1 variation display setting (S5104), when the current gaming state is a potential state, the first special symbol display setting is performed based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. A process of setting a probability fluctuation pattern command and transmitting it to the display control device 114 is executed.

In the special figure 1 variation display setting process (S5104), first, the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read out (S5201), and the value corresponding to the variation time read in the process of S5201 is set as the sub-special figure 1. The variable time counter 223m is set (S5202). Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is a value greater than 0 (S5203). If it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is 0 (S5203: No), a display rush entry command is set (S5204), and a rush display flag 223t is set on (S5205). ). On the other hand, in the process of S5203, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is larger than 0 (S5203: Yes), the process of S5204 and S5205 mentioned above is skipped, and the process moves to the process of S5206. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a potential variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5206), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S5103, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a potential state (S5103: No), in the process of S4205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the command extracted from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command The variation pattern in the variation display performance of the first special symbol is acquired from the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is generated (S5105). The variable pattern command for display of the first special symbol is configured to be able to identify whether it is a variable pattern command for display corresponding to the first special symbol or a variable pattern command for the second special symbol. Specifically, if the upper two bits of the upper byte of the 2-byte display variation pattern command are "10", it indicates that it corresponds to the first special symbol, and if it is "01", it indicates that it corresponds to the second special symbol. It is configured to indicate that it is compatible with .

The first special symbol display variation pattern command set in S5104 or S5105 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then executed in the command output process (see FIG. 59) of the main process (see FIG. 59). S4102) is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the first special symbol display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the corresponding special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the first special symbol variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable display effect is started so that the symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

With the setting of the display variation pattern command of the first special symbol, the reserved balls of the special symbol corresponding to the set display variation pattern command are consumed (i.e., the variation corresponding to the reserved balls of the first special symbol). The data corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted in accordance with the display setting (S5106).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S5107). If it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S5107: No), the special figure 2 variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Therefore, the process of S5111 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S5108). Next, the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 71, the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109), which is one process in the variable display setting process (S4113 in FIG. 69), will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (S5109).

In the special figure 2 variation display setting process (S5109), first, in the process of S4210 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the variation time corresponding to the extracted variation pattern is read out (S5301), and the read variation A value corresponding to the time is set in the sub-special figure 2 variable time counter 223n (S5302). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a potential state (S5303). If it is determined that it is in the potential state (S5303: Yes), it is determined whether the rush display flag 223t is on (S5304). If it is determined that the rush display flag 223t is not on (S5304: No), the remaining time stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is read out (S5305). Next, it is determined whether the remaining time read in the process of S5305 is less than 1 second (S5306). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 1 second (S5306: Yes), the process of S5307 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5308.

On the other hand, in the process of S5306, if it is determined that the read remaining time is 1 second or more (S5306: No), a rush entry command for display is set (S5307), and the rush display flag 223t is set to ON. (S5308). Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a potential variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is set (S5309), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is not a potential state (S5303: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5304 that the rush display flag 223t is set to on. (S5304: Yes), the above-described processes of S5305 to S5308 are skipped, the process of S5309 is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in this embodiment, when setting the fluctuating display of the first special symbol in a state where the potential state is set in the state setting area 223j, that is, during the jackpot fluctuation period, the potential state is set. When setting a fluctuation display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is fluctuating, and when it is determined that special symbol 2 is not fluctuating, is configured so that a rush entry command is set as the effect mode of the variable display. In other words, the configuration is such that a screen (see FIG. 7(a)) that notifies the player that a rush has entered is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing when the target special figure 1 variation is executed. are doing.

On the other hand, when setting a fluctuating display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation that is likely to occur during the jackpot fluctuation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is fluctuating, and the special symbol 2 is determined to be in a variable state, the display mode is to display a screen indicating that the state is in a potential state (see FIG. 6(b)) without setting a rush entry command for display. configured to display.

As a result, if the display rush entry command is set and a right-handed game is performed at the time when the screen notifying the player that the rush has entered is displayed (see Figure 7 (a)), the The lottery of the second special symbol can be executed during the probability state, and a game that does not give a sense of discomfort to the player can be provided.

In addition, when setting a fluctuating display corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation that is in a potential state during the jackpot fluctuation period, it is determined whether the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is fluctuating, and the special symbol 2 If it is determined that is in the process of changing, the special figure 2 variation in progress may be forcibly terminated, and a new special figure 2 variation may be executed.

In addition, the setting timing of the display rush entry command when the game state shifts to the potential state during the special figure 2 fluctuation is not limited to the contents of this embodiment, and it is necessary to provide a game that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. It would be good if it had a configuration that can do this. For example, if it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation that is fluctuating at the timing when the potential state is set, a display rush entry command may be set, or the fluctuating at the timing when the potential state is set. It may be configured such that the remaining time until the middle special figure 2 fluctuation ends is determined, and when the determination result is a predetermined time (1 second), a display rush entry command is set. In this case, the predetermined time to be set is the time required from the time when the player operates the operation handle 51 and starts the right-handed game until the ball launched in the right-handed game enters the second ball entrance 640. It is sufficient if the time is shorter than the period, and may be set as appropriate depending on the configuration of the game board 13.

Returning to FIG. 69, the explanation will be continued. The variable pattern command for displaying the second special symbol set in the process of S5109 is temporarily stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed by the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 59). It is transmitted to the control device 114. By receiving this second special symbol display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the corresponding special symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the second special symbol variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the fluctuating display performance is started so that the fluctuating display of symbols is performed. Then, data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110).

Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is set to on (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is not set to on (that is, it is off) (S5111: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on (S5111: Yes), if the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f is on, sets the special figure 1 stop type selection flag 223f to OFF, and when the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g is on, sets the special figure 2 stop type selection flag 223g to OFF (S5112).

In the process of S4201 of the command determination process (see FIG. 60), the stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 stop type command is set (S5113), and this process is ended. When the extracted stop type is the stop type of the first special symbol, a display special figure 1 stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the stop type. In addition, when the extracted stop type is the stop type of the second special symbol, based on the stop type, a display special figure 2 stop type command is set for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type. . In addition, the special map 1 or special map 2 stop type command notified from the main controller 110 is for notifying the jackpot type in the event of a jackpot, and will be notified even if the judgment result is a loss. be done. If the determination result is a loss, the stop type is not referred to and a loss symbol is set.

Next, various counter updating processes (S4111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing this various counter updating processing (S4111). This various counter updating process (S4111 in FIG. 72) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and updates the values of various counters provided in the RAM 223. This is a process that executes an update.

In the various counter update processing (S4111), first, it is determined whether the value of the sub special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5401: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5402). On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is not larger than 0 (that is, 0) (S5401: No), the process of S5402 is skipped, and the process of S5403 Shift to processing. Next, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is greater than 0 (S5403). When it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S5403: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is subtracted by 1 (S5404).

Next, read out the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m and the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n (S5405), and read out the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m from the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n. The remaining time is calculated by subtracting the value of (S5406). The remaining time calculated in the process of S5406 is stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (S5407), the values of other various counters are subtracted by 1 (S5408), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5403, if it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 1 variation time counter 223m is not larger than 0 (that is, it is 0) (S5403: No), the above-mentioned S5404 to S5407 are skipped. , S5408 is executed, and this processing ends.

<About the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 to 87. The processing of the MPU 231 can be roughly divided into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing that is executed for one frame from the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is executed with priority. Thereby, the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 73, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main process is to execute initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, this main processing is started according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is canceled, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" depending on its hardware configuration. , specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 starts the main processing by fetching the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starting execution of processing according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs that are first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 will not know that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read it and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, a problem arises in that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, so that the NOR ROM 234d can operate at high speed. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S6001), and the display control device 114 executes various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Start.

Here, the boot process (S6001) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S6001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81, instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing data of images to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a that can have a large capacity with a small area, so it can sufficiently store not only image data but also control programs, etc. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, manufacturing costs can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access, so if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 Even if a high-performance processor is used, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing the data to the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, the first program is read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled. A predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S6101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a (S6102). Thereby, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a through the process of S6101.

Furthermore, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a in the process of S6102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching instructions, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetching the instructions. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S6102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs currently in use are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or data table storage area 233b (S6103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and among the fixed value data, the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S6104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined location of the program storage area 233a, that is, the instruction pointer 231a is By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S6002 in FIG. 73) (S6105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the main boot process is ended.

As described above, by executing the boot process (S6001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM. The data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined location, and from then on, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. It is used to perform various processes.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read control programs and fixed value data from a work RAM configured with a DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated performances can be easily executed using the auxiliary performance section.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. Even if the control program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that an increase in the cost of the character ROM 234 due to the reduction in time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 74, all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 are included in the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a in the process of S6101. The predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S6101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S6102. It may be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further points the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer. 231a. Then, the processes of S6103 to S6105 may be executed using all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing in S6101 further transfers a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then transfers a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a. Further, some of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a through this process are further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, a part of the remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It may also execute a process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a. Then, in step S6101, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a. After repeating the process of S6102 and S6102 multiple times, the process of S6103 to S6105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount of the boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a using the boot program.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S6103 to S6105 without performing the processes of S6101 and S6102. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to either the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. Therefore, it is possible to start controlling the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 more quickly, which becomes possible after the boot process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 73. When the boot process is completed, an initial setting process is executed in accordance with the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S6002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I/O device, etc. are performed. Further, processing for clearing the memories in the work RAM 233, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. Note that the initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. and instructs execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected to see whether an image of a color corresponding to the machine type is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S6003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, resident video RAM 235), and information on the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image in the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the image area 235a.

When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can understand that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating the end of the transfer in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. You may also write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237 to determine that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction has been completed. You can do it like this.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6003, the power-on variation image is then transferred. A transfer instruction is sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S6004). This transfer instruction includes the start address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235). , and the start address of the power-on variation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination.According to this transfer instruction, the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The image is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 in the process of S6004, the simple image display flag 233c is then set. is turned on (S6005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 85(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image (see S7502 in FIG. 85(a)).

In addition, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is terminated. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)), a simple Command determination processing (see S6308 in FIG. 75(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S6309 in FIG. 75(b)) are executed.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a lot of time to transfer the data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying the image data on the third symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can display the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. be able to. On the other hand, the player etc. can recognize that some initialization process is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. Until the desired image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the user can wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

In addition, when checking the operation at a factory or the like during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the third symbol display device 81 can start operating without problems when the power is turned on. By using the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

In addition, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on variation image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts playing the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable production is issued. If a display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation is displayed. Can perform. Therefore, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player can reliably confirm that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variation effect.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is constituted by a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow readout speed, and since it takes time to transfer the data, the time during which the main image continues to be displayed after the power is turned on becomes long. However, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. To allow a player to play a game with peace of mind even while the main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on.

After the process in S6005, interrupt permission is set (S6006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process in S6006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 75(a). FIG. 75(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, upon receiving a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

This command interrupt processing extracts the received command data, sequentially stores the extracted command data in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S6201), and ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing according to the commands is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75(b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 75(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing for the image.

As described above, execution of this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231 . Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed, so it cannot start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in the frame buffer in which image information being displayed is stored in response to a new drawing instruction.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be explained, and then details of each processing will be explained with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 75(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301), and if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S6301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is used as the third symbol instead of the power-on image. In order to display the command on the display device 81, a command determination process (S6302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S6303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S6302), the content of the command from the audio lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. If a display variation pattern command is stored, a demonstration display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination processing, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processing is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a display stop type command, etc. are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode and stop type of the variable effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113, and create the effect image according to the mode. Drawing of the image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Note that details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81.

In the display setting process (S6303), one frame of image to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S6302) etc. Specifically specify the content. Further, depending on the processing situation, etc., the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and a display data table corresponding to the determined performance mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Note that details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S6304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S6303) or the simple display setting process (S6309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (displayed object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S6305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is sent to the image controller 237 from the character ROM 234 for normal use based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, when a continuous preview command or rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview images used in the preview effect and the image data of the changed rear image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S6306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, determined in the task process (S6304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S6305) are used. , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. 29, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list (S6306). Note that details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 87.

Next, updating processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S6307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. The counter updated by the process of S6307 includes, for example, a stopped symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stopped symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and updated every time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type (jackpot A, jackpot B, front/back off reach, front/back off reach, complete miss) indicated by the display stop type command is detected. The corresponding stop type table and stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S6301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, a simple command determination process (S6308) is executed, then a simple display setting process (S6309) is executed, and the process moves to S6304.

Next, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S6302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. First, FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 76, it is first determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S6401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S6401: No), The command determination process ends and returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes), a new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S6303) that a new command has been processed is set to ON (S6402), and then the command The type of all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S6403).

Then, it is determined whether there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S6404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S6404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S6405), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the variable pattern command processing (S6405) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(a). FIG. 77(a) is a flowchart showing the variable pattern command processing (S6405). This variation pattern command processing (S6405) is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of a fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is not performed. When executing the command, it is unlikely that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly used for display. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variable pattern command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6501, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variable display data table corresponding to a variable pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a variable effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table will actually be displayed by the main controller. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying a variation effect according to the set variation display data table. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, as in this embodiment, by setting a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is possible to actually display fluctuations that are longer than the set display data table. Even if a fluctuating performance with time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating performance according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 will issue a command for the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed. You can keep watching the changes in the 3 symbols.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S6501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6502). Then, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S6501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S6503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6504). Then, both the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are set to OFF (S6505), the variable pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S6505, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S6501 is updated. , extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. At the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is extracted, and at the same time, the content is transferred to the transfer data table buffer 233e by the process of S6502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h whose time data has been set in the process of S6503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table is finished. If it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main controller 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S6404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S6406), If there is a display stop type command (S6406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S6407), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the stop type command processing (S6407) will be described with reference to FIG. 77(b). FIG. 77(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing (S6407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (one of jackpot A to G, small hit A to C, out of reach, or completely out) indicated by the display stop type command is created. (S6601), compares the stop type table with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed, and displays the stop type in the third symbol display device. The stop symbol after the variable effect displayed at 81 is finally set (S6602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S6602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop symbols are turned on. It is set to on (S6603) and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation based on the data table, type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used as type information. , offset information from the stopped symbol (symbol offset information) set by the process of S6602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S6304), after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of variation, the stopped symbol set in the process of S6602 is specified from the stopped symbol discrimination flag set in S6603, and the identified stopped symbol is The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Note that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at intervals of several seconds or more, it will not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore executes the command determination process. Although it is unlikely that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, some of the commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be mistakenly displayed as a display stop type command. There is also a possibility that it will be interpreted as a type command. In preparation for such a case, in the process of S6601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is changed assuming that the stop type is completely off. Decide on the table. As a result, a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss is set by the process of S6602.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will display the "special symbol" even if it is actually a "miss of the special symbol". A stop pattern corresponding to a "jackpot of a special symbol" is displayed, causing a player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has won a "jackpot of a special symbol", and there is a risk of lowering the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss, in reality, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol corresponding to a complete miss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 receives a "special symbol jackpot", so the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S6406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S6408), and the display If there is an opening command for use (S6408: Yes), opening command processing is executed (S6409), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the opening command processing (S6409) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(a). FIG. 78(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, an opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6701). Thereafter, a transfer data table corresponding to the opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6702), and time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set opening display data table (S6703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6704). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6705), the opening command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S6408: No), then it is determined whether there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S6410), and the display If there is a round number command for use (S6410: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S6411), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the round number command processing (S6411) will be described with reference to FIG. 78(b). FIG. 78(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S6801). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6801, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6804). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6805), the round number command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6410, if it is determined that there is no round number command for display (S6410: No), then it is determined whether there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S6412), and the display command is If there is an ending command (S6412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S6413), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the ending command process (S6413) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. It is set in the buffer 233d (S6901). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6901, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6903). S6904). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6905), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S6412: No), then it is determined whether there is a display rush entry command among the unprocessed commands (S6414), and the display If there is a rush entry command (S6414: Yes), rush entry command processing is executed (S6415), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rush entry command processing (S6415) will be described with reference to FIG. 80(a). FIG. 80(a) is a flowchart showing rush entry command processing. This rush entry command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the rush entry command processing, first, a rush entry display data table corresponding to the display mode of the rush entry effect indicated by the display rush entry command is determined, and the determined rush entry display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S6931). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6932).

Next, based on the rush entry display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6931, time data representing the performance time is set in the time counter 233h (S6933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6934). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the final display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6935), the rush entry command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6412, if it is determined that there is no rush entry command for display (S6414: No), then it is determined whether there is an additional effect command among the unprocessed commands (S6416), and the additional effect is executed. If there is a command (S6416: Yes), additional effect command processing is executed (S6417), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the additional effect command processing (S6417) will be explained with reference to FIG. 80(b). FIG. 80(b) is a flowchart showing additional effect command processing. This additional effect command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the additional effect command for display received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the additional performance command processing, first, an additional performance display data table corresponding to the display mode of the additional performance indicated by the additional performance command for display is determined, and the determined additional performance display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6951). Next, by writing Null data into the transfer data table buffer 233e, its contents are cleared (S6952).

Next, based on the additional effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S6951, time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S6953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S6954). Then, the demo display flag 233y and the confirmed display flag 233z are both set to OFF (S6955), the additional effect command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 76, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no additional display command (S6416: No), then it is determined whether there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S6418), If there is an image change command (S6418: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S6419), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the rear image change command processing (S6419) will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. This back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag 233w is set to on (S7001), which notifies the normal image transfer setting process (S7503) of the change in the back image caused by receiving the back image change command in the on state. ). Then, among the bits of the back image discrimination flag 233x provided for each back image type (back side A, B), the bit corresponding to the back side image type indicated by the back side image change command is set to ON, and the other bits are set to ON. The bit corresponding to the back image type is set to OFF (S7002), this back image change command processing is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag 233w set in the process of S7001 is turned on, the changed back image type is determined from the back image discrimination flag 233x set in the process of S7002. Identify.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that either the back surface A or B should be displayed according to the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, based on the back surface image discrimination flag 233x set in S7002, The type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified over time, and the RAM type ( (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously for less than 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no case where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some of the commands change due to the influence of noise etc., and another command may accidentally change the rear image. There is a possibility that it may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S7002, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image determination flag 233x corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag 233x corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the Pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the Pachinko machine 10.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6418, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S6418: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S6420), and if there is an error command, it is determined that there is no command. If (S6420: Yes), error command processing is executed (S6421), and the process returns to S6401.

Here, details of the error command processing (S6421) will be described with reference to FIG. 81(b). FIG. 81(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to an error command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S7101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S7102). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set in the process of S7101, the type of error that has occurred is determined based on the error determination flag set in the process of S7102, and a response is taken according to the error type. Processing is executed so that a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S7102, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that players and hall personnel can accurately grasp the error occurrence situation.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 76. In the process of S6416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S6420: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S6422), and the process returns to S6401.

In the process of S6401, which is executed again after each command process is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S6401: Yes). ), the processes of S6402 to S6422 are executed again. Then, the processes of S6401 to S6422 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S6401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command is determined. Finish the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S6308) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)) is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are selected from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 77(b)), which are the processing corresponding to each command. Performs processing to discard the command without executing the processing corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 77(a)) that is executed in this case, in the process of S6501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is transferred to the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S6502, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and the contents thereof are cleared.

Next, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S6303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 82, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S7201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S7201: No ), it is determined that no new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process skips steps S7202 to S7204, and proceeds to the process S7205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S7201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S7202), S7203 to S7204 The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

In the process of S7203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S7203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S7203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S7204).

Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to on are Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S7301).

In task processing (S6304), based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (displayed object) that makes up the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, the display coordinate position, magnification rate, rotation angle, etc. Determine various parameters necessary for drawing.

In the warning image setting process, after the process in S7301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S7302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 82. After the warning image setting process (S7204) or in the process of S7203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S7203: No), then the process moves to S7205.

In S7205, pointer update processing is executed (S7205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update process acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the target address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S7401). That is, the pointer 233f is updated in such a way that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. In addition, as mentioned above, in the various data tables, the Start information is written at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 when it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, that value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so each Substantive data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S7401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is ". As a result, if it is End information (S7402: Yes), the pointer 233f is updated past the address where the actual data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. It means something.

Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S7403), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S7403: Yes), the display data table is The time data corresponding to the performance time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S7404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S7405), and this processing ends. and returns to display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the beginning of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S7403, if it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demonstration display data table (S7403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( S7406), this process ends and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is written is Since the drawing content of is always developed, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S7402, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S7402: No), this process is ended and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 82, the explanation will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7206). In task processing (S6304), the types of sprites (displayed objects) that make up the image are specified based on the drawing content developed in the process of S7206, as well as the warning image developed earlier, and , determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as display coordinate position, magnification ratio, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the time counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S7207), and it is determined whether the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S7208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S7208: No), the display setting process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S7208: Yes), it means that the performance time of the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and stop display, so check whether the fixed display flag 233z is on. (S7209).

As a result, if the final display flag 233z is off (S7209: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. (S7210), and then writes Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S7211). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7212), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7213). Then, after setting the confirmed display flag 233z, which indicates that a confirmed display performance is in progress in the on state, to ON (S7214), the contents of the stopped symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stopped symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S7215), and returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, in a case where a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of that effect. You can set the drawing contents as follows. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And, compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, there is no heavy load on the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set by the process of S7215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable performance. In other words, as mentioned above, the display of the third symbol in a fluctuating performance changes depending on the stop symbol of the previous fluctuating performance, and in the fluctuating display data table, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating performance changes based on the data table. Until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the previous variable performance is written. In task processing (S6304), until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S7215, and the stop symbol of the previous variation performance is identified. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S7209, if the confirmed display flag 233z is on (S7209: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag 233y is on (S7216). If the demo display flag 233y is off (S7216: No), it means that the value of the time counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmed display effect, so a certain period of time has elapsed since the end of the confirmed display effect. After the elapse of time, processing for displaying a demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

First, the demo display data table is acquired and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S7217), and the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S7218). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S7219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S7220), and the demo display flag 233y, which indicates that a demonstration is being produced in the on state, is set to on (S7221), this process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. .

As a result, if a display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable production is not received after the confirmed display production is finished, the demonstration production will be automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can set the content of the drawing.

In the process of S7216, if the demo display flag 233y is on (S7216: Yes), it means that the demo effect will be performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect has ended, so continue with the display setting process. The process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, the pointer update process executed in the next V-interrupt process makes various settings so that the demonstration effect is started again as described above, so the audio lamp control device 113 The demonstration performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

Note that the same process as the display setting process is also performed in the simple display setting process (S6309) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 75(b)). However, in the simple display setting process, after the production time of the fluctuation effect using the power-on fluctuation image ends, one of the power-on fluctuation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is displayed for a predetermined period of time. A process is performed in which a display data table specifying that the image of is to be displayed in a stopped state is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S6305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. First, FIG. 85(a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S7501: Yes), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is set. The process is executed (S7502), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Note that details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 85(b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S7501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, off (S7501: No), all the image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S7503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Note that details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 86.

Next, with reference to FIG. 85(b), the resident image transfer setting process (S7502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 85(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S7502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer untransferred image data (S7601), and if the transfer instruction has been sent (S7601: Yes). ), and further determines whether the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7602). In the process of S7602, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7602 that the transfer process has not finished (S7602: No), the image transfer process is continuing in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting process is finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7602: Yes), the process moves to S7603. Also, as a result of the process in S7601, if no transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S7601: No), the process proceeds to S7603.

In the process of S7603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S7603), and if there is any resident target image data that has not been transferred (S7603: No), the untransferred resident target image data is transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S7604), and this process ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (the image data to be transferred here). The start address of the area (provided in the resident video RAM 235) in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. Then, it is transferred to the designated address in the resident video RAM 235. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

As a result of the process in S7603, if all the resident target image data has been transferred (S7603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S7605), and this process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 75(b)), the command Since the determination process (see FIGS. 76 to 81) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 82 to 84) are executed, the normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 The normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 86) (see S7501: No in FIG. 85(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images that should reside in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred during the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is made to reside in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfers the image data to the image controller 237. Image drawing processing can be performed with . As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image. Therefore, the time required for reading the image can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately, and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third symbols, character symbols, and error messages, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by the above method, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it will not be affected by various operations performed by the player at any timing. , it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the normal image transfer setting process (S7503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S6305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S7503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S7205) of the previously executed display setting process (S6303) is used. The information written in the indicated address is acquired (S7701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S7702), and if it is transfer data information (S7702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored is determined based on the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S7703), the transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data whose transfer should be started in the ON state, is set to ON (S7704), and the process proceeds to S7705.

Further, in the process of S7702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S7702: No), the process of S7703 and S7704 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S7705. In the process of S7705, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has been completed (S7705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S7705: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S7706).

In the process of S7706, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined in the process of S7706 that the transfer process has not finished (S7706: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting process is not completed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S7706: Yes), the process moves to S7707. Further, as a result of the process in S7705, if the image data transfer instruction has not been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process was completed (S7705: No), the process proceeds to S7707.

In the process of S7707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S7707). If the transfer start flag is on (S7707: Yes), there is image data to start transferring, so the transfer start flag is set. is turned off (S7708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S7703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the process moves to the process of S7713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S7707: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709). Then, if the back image change flag 233w is not on but off (S7709: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag 233w is on (S7709: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed, so after setting the back image change flag 233w to off (S7710), the Among the back image discrimination flags 233x, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S7711). Furthermore, the start address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag 233x in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination ( The start address of the normal video RAM 236) is acquired (S7712), and the process moves to S7713.

In the process of S7713, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713). The determination in the process of S7713 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is normal video data. If it is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "off," it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

As a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , and then ends the normal image transfer setting process. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be achieved.

On the other hand, as a result of the process in S7713, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S7713: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S7714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, information on the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and information on the transfer destination (in this case, the transfer destination). This includes the start address of a subarea (provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers the image data to the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forwarded to the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

After the process of S7714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S7715), and this normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, the storage image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on", and by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, the display stop type command When it is determined that the displayed stop type information is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare performance can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, if the back image is changed based on the reception of a back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, among the image data used for that back image, the back side of the resident video RAM 235 is Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this embodiment, the display data table is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc. At the same time that the display data table is set, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends the image to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. I can do it.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and necessary for drawing that sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow readout speed, images necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the display While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while making the processing easier. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load required for transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 87, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S6306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S6305), a drawing list (see FIG. 30) is generated (S7801). That is, in the process of S7801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S6304), for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address where the image data of that sprite is stored are identified. Then, parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, after sorting the sprites in the order of the sprite that should be placed at the backmost side of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed at the front side, the details for each sprite are A drawing list is generated by describing, as drawing information (detailed information), the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. In addition, when a transfer instruction is set in the transfer setting process (S6305), the start address of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored (the storage source start address) is added as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As mentioned above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of that sprite is stored is fixed, so the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Once the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S7802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1. includes information instructing to develop the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. do. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite can be placed furthest to the back, and the last sprite drawn can be placed furthest to the front.

In addition, if the drawing list includes transfer data information, from the transfer data information, the first address (storage source first address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored are determined. ) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and sequentially reads the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 at a time when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is then used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231, and images are drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. This allows the third symbol display device 81 to display the image developed in the frame buffer. Further, while the image drawn in one frame buffer is being developed, the image developed from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

In the drawing process, after the process in S7802, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S7803). Then, the drawing process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". It will be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of images are completed. This process is performed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 75(b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and the image 20 milliseconds after the drawing process and display process for the image for one frame are completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for 20 minutes is read. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as a frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as a frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, the frame buffer for developing one frame's worth of images and the frame buffer for reading one frame's worth of image information are changed every 20 milliseconds to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c. By specifying alternately, it is possible to perform the display processing of one frame of images continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of one frame of images.

In addition, in this 1st Embodiment, although the variable display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol can be performed simultaneously in parallel, it is not limited to this. For example, regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in a state where one variable display is being executed, other variable displays may not be executed. When there are held balls, a configuration may be adopted in which the variable display is performed in order from the held balls with the oldest starting winnings in terms of time. With this configuration, control can be simplified and processing load can be reduced.

As explained above, in the first embodiment, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols and the normal state of normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, and high probability state of normal symbols) There are four game states: short-time state (low probability state for special symbols and high probability state for normal symbols), and potential state (high probability state for special symbols and normal state for normal symbols). There is. The system is configured such that the potential state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

In other words, when the probability state is set, the variable time for indicating the lottery of the second special symbol, which is more likely to result in a lottery result more advantageous to the player than the lottery of the first special symbol, is set in another game state. By specifying the time period to be shorter than when the time period is set, it is possible to most efficiently carry out a lottery that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience in which the player is made to expect the potential state to be set.

Specifically, in the lottery of the second special symbol, the first specific prize opening 65a is opened not only in the case of a jackpot but also in the case of a small win, thereby increasing the probability that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short. In this state, the number of prize balls can continue to increase. Therefore, the game can be played in anticipation of a potential state. In a general gaming machine, the variable probability state is the most advantageous gaming state, but in this embodiment, the probability state is more advantageous than the variable probability state, so it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol and the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol are configured to be executable at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous ). As a result, even if the variable display of one special symbol is in progress, the variable display of the other special symbol can be executed without waiting for the end of the variable display, so that the special symbol lottery can be executed more efficiently. can. In addition, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuating at the same time, if one of them stops fluctuating due to a stop symbol of a jackpot or small win, the other fluctuation display will show the remaining fluctuation time and lottery. Regardless of the result, a missed stop symbol will be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent a problem in which the other variable display is confirmed to be a win or a small win while a jackpot or a small win is being executed, and the jackpot or small win is started overlappingly.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when the variable display corresponding to the jackpot of the first special symbol is executed in a state where the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, , the high probability state of the normal symbols shifts to the low probability state, and the gaming state shifts from the variable probability state to the probability state. While this potential state is set, the fluctuating display (dynamic display) period for showing the lottery results of the second special symbol is set short, so it is not possible to perform many lottery draws of the second special symbol. This is the period when it is possible (special map 2 fluctuation advantageous period).

In this embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small hit with a probability of about 1/2, so during the period when the potential state is set as the gaming state, the small win A game state (special figure 2 advantageous state) that is advantageous to a player who frequently executes a small winning game that is executed when a player wins a prize and can win a large number of prize balls.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the period in which the probability state is set (special symbol 2 variable advantageous period) is during the variable display period (dynamic display period) of the first special symbol that won the jackpot in the probability variable state. (Special figure 1 jackpot is changing), so when the special figure 2 advantageous state ends, the jackpot game will be executed. In this way, since a plurality of states that are advantageous to the player (special figure 2 advantageous state, jackpot game state) are set consecutively, it is possible to continuously provide various benefits to the player. I can do it.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a small hit is won with one special symbol (special symbol 2) and a small winning game is executed, the fluctuation of the other special symbol (special symbol 1) is interrupted (variation display period When the small winning game ends, the suspended measurement of the variable display period is restarted. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 variable advantageous period from being subtracted during the small winning game, so regardless of the number of small winning games executed during the special figure 2 variable advantageous period. It is possible to provide the player with a fixed special figure 2 fluctuating advantageous period.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of one special symbol (special symbol 1), the other special symbol (special symbol 2) which is changing is displayed in a stop display mode indicating a loss. It is configured to force a stop. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation where a small winning game is executed during a big winning game.

As described above, in this embodiment, the content of control over the fluctuation of the other special symbol is varied depending on the lottery result of one special symbol. Specifically, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a jackpot (a lottery result that can give the first benefit to the player), the fluctuation of the other special symbol is used to indicate that the lottery result is a loss. If the lottery result of one special symbol is a small win (a lottery result that can give the player a second benefit different from the first benefit), the other special symbol changes. is stopped until the provision of the second benefit ends (until the small winning game ends), and restarted after the provision of the second benefit ends. In addition, if the lottery result of one special symbol is a loss, the variation of the other special symbol is configured to be executed as is.

With this configuration, based on the lottery result of one special symbol, the lottery contents (the lottery result and the period until the lottery result is displayed) of the other special symbol can be varied, and the player's It is possible to provide a variety of gameplay features.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of one special symbol is a lottery result that can provide a benefit to the player, the control content for the other special symbol variation is changed depending on the content of the benefit. Therefore, for example, in the case of a lottery result that grants the player the most advantageous benefit (jackpot game), the lottery result that corresponds to the change in the other special symbol during execution may not be the lottery result that grants the benefit. Even if there is a lottery result, we will forcibly stop the fluctuations so that the lottery results are out of order, and suppress excessive benefits from being given to players. In this case, in order to prevent the award of benefits based on the lottery of the other special symbol during the small winning game without changing the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation of the other special symbol that is being executed, the variable display is displayed. It becomes possible to interrupt only period measurement.

Therefore, in a state where multiple special symbols (Special Figure 1, Special Figure 2) are changing at the same time, the least advantageous benefit for the player is awarded, and the most advantageous benefit that will be awarded later is awarded. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which players are no longer played, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which players are uncomfortable from occurring.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the potential state is set as the gaming state, a short period (0.5 seconds) of variable display period is set as the variable display period of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), The game is configured so that small winning games can be executed frequently. Then, the condition for setting the probability state as the gaming state is the case where a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol while the probability variable state is set, and the condition for the probability state to end is set as the first special symbol. is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed, so the jackpot game is executed after the first advantageous period that is advantageous to players who frequently execute small winning games. A second gaming period will be set. Therefore, since the first advantageous period and the second advantageous period that are advantageous to the player can be set consecutively, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first advantageous period is set.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol starts during the probability change state, the probability state is set from the start of the jackpot variation, and the probability state In the state where is set, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is configured to be drawn efficiently.

Therefore, the system was configured to notify the player of the period during which the probable state will be set (based on the fact that the probable state has been set) at the same time as the probable state is set (Fig. 7 (a). ))reference.

However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since it is possible to change the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the same time, in a state where the probability change state is set, the first special symbol also changes to the second special symbol. Both special designs may also vary.

In such a case, even if the display mode indicating that the potential state (RUSH) is set at the timing when the potential state is set (see FIG. 7(a)), the second Until the special symbols stop changing, it is not possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol in the potential state, and a problem arises in which the small winning game is not executed for any length of time even in the RUSH state. There was a risk.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the conditions for transition to the probability state are satisfied (when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the probability variable state), the fluctuation status of the second special symbol (the presence or absence of fluctuation, The structure is configured such that the timing of notifying that the RUSH state has been set is varied based on the determination result.

Specifically, when the conditions for transition to the potential state are met, it will be notified that the RUSH state has been set if it is determined that the change of the new second special symbol is in an executable state. It consists of Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a new change in the second special symbol is not started and a small winning game is not executed despite the notification that the RUSH state has been set.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the conditions for transition to the potential state are satisfied, the period from when a new second special symbol change becomes executable until the end of the potential state is determined. If the determined period is less than a predetermined period, it is configured not to notify that the RUSH state has been set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being started without the small win game being executed even though it has been reported that the RUSH state has been set.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to a low probability state at the time when the jackpot variation starts, and the game state is changed to a low probability state. It is configured to set a probability state, and if a jackpot is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol does not shift to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. , is configured so that the probability change state continues even during the jackpot fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to provide different gaming properties depending on the type of special symbol.

Note that, without being limited to the configuration of this embodiment, even if a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery in a variable probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol changes to a low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured such that a potential state is set as the gaming state by transitioning to the game state, or only when a specific jackpot type is set among multiple jackpot types, the normal state is set at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. It may be configured such that a probability state is set as a gaming state by shifting a symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Furthermore, the number of jackpots won during the advantageous continuation period is measured, and when the measurement result reaches a predetermined number of times, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the time when the jackpot fluctuation starts. The configuration may be such that a potential state is set as the gaming state.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, a probability state is set for a period from the time when the jackpot variation starts until the jackpot variation ends. However, without being limited to this, for example, based on predicting that a jackpot will be won in the starting winning process (see FIG. 47), the period until the jackpot fluctuation corresponding to the predicted winning information ends ( (multiple fluctuation periods) may be configured to set a potential state.

In this embodiment, when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the state where the potential state is set, a constant variation pattern table is always set regardless of the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol during the setting of the potential state. (See FIG. 19(b)), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol after the potential state is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). It is also possible to provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether or not it has occurred, and to change the data table for selecting a variation pattern based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means.

Specifically, if the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol has not reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is When the number of times has reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), it is preferable to refer to a data table in which the average variation time is about 1 second. Thereby, when a variation pattern in which a long variation time is set as a jackpot variation of the first special symbol is selected, more small winning games can be provided to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability state is set during the jackpot fluctuation in the probability variation state, but in addition to this, the lottery result of the special symbol is a specific miss or a small win. It may be configured such that a probability state is set during the variable display of the case, or when the number of times the lottery result of the special symbol is a certain miss or a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times during the variable probability state. The configuration may also be such that the potential state is set when this occurs.

<Second embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 111. In the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where variable probability states (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) are set. In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is made into a potential state, and the small winning game is more likely to be executed when the potential state is set. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the gaming state can be changed during the symbol confirmation period (period in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) during which the lottery results of special symbols are displayed. It is configured to allow In other words, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where the variable probability state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol indicating the jackpot) is configured to set the potential state as the gaming state at the timing when the game is stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a different symbol confirmation period is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the length of the period in which a potential state advantageous to the player is set depending on the length of the symbol confirmation period that is set. In addition, compared to the configuration in which the potential state is set corresponding to the variation time of the special symbol (the period in which the special symbol is being varied) as in the first embodiment described above, the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (the period in which the special symbol is being varied) is Since a configuration is used in which the potential state is set in accordance with the period during which the symbol is stopped, the display mode corresponding to the special symbol in the state where the potential state is set can be simplified. , control of the pachinko machine 10 can be simplified.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, once the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, but in the second embodiment, when the special symbol jackpot is set, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won. Even if you have not won, the variable probability state will end when a predetermined ending condition (the number of special symbol variations after the variable probability state is set reaches a predetermined number (50 times)) is met. They are different in that they are structured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game in order to shift to the probable state during the period in which the variable probability state is set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 88, the flow of the game in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 88 is a timing chart showing an example of the flow of the game when a specific jackpot (jackpot C) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where the variable probability state is set. . As shown in FIG. 88, in the second embodiment, when a jackpot is won in a state where the variable probability state is set, the jackpot game starts from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation stops (see FIG. 88(c)). The potential state is set during the period until execution (design confirmation period).

Then, in the state where the probability state is set, a game for drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, similarly to the first embodiment described above. In addition, if a small hit of special pattern 2 is won during the pattern confirmation period of special pattern 1, the measurement (subtraction) of the pattern confirmation period of special pattern 1 is interrupted during the period when the small winning game is being executed. ing. In addition, in the second embodiment, even if the special symbol lottery result is a loss or a small hit, different symbol confirmation periods are set depending on the lottery result. As a result, the player desires that a long period be set as the symbol confirmation period for the lottery result of special drawing 1 (the lottery result that won the jackpot) corresponding to the period in which the probability state is set, In the state where the probability state is set, it is desired that a short period be set as the pattern confirmation period in order to execute more lottery of the special figure 2.

In other words, in the second embodiment in which the symbol confirmation period varies depending on the lottery result, there are cases where a long symbol confirmation period is desired and cases where a short symbol confirmation period is desired depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol. and can be provided to the player. Further, in the second embodiment, different symbol determination periods are set for the same variation pattern in which the same variation display can be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent players from predicting the symbol confirmation period in advance based on the fluctuation display contents of the special symbol, and which symbol confirmation period is set for this special symbol lottery. It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the special symbol is displayed until the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed. In addition, since it has the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to adjust the variation effect (effect mode executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81) executed in response to one variation time (variation pattern). Since it is configured to set multiple types of symbol confirmation periods, the time required for one special symbol lottery (after a special symbol is drawn, the next special symbol can be drawn) Even if the time period until the end of the event) is set in a complicated manner, it is possible to unify the variation effects.

The example explained with reference to FIG. 88 shows the flow of the game in the case where the probability variable state is set, that is, when the remaining time shortening number is 47, and the jackpot of special drawing 1 is won. The system is configured such that the probability state is set from the moment the jackpot fluctuation stops. In addition to this, if you win the jackpot of special chart 1 at the timing when the variable probability state ends (the value of the variable probability counter 203aa becomes 0) (for example, the 50th special drawing lottery after the variable probability state is set) The probability state is set from the timing when the jackpot fluctuation starts.

By configuring in this way, advantageous periods of different lengths are set based on the timing of winning the jackpot of special drawing 1 in a state where the probability variable state is set. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while hoping to win the jackpot at the timing when a long advantageous period is set, and thus the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the game state set for the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) executed when the variable probability state is set will be explained with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing the relationship between the content of the special figure 1 game and the awarded points after the variable probability state is set.

As shown in FIG. 89, in the second embodiment, the gaming state is variably set based on the lottery result of the special symbol lottery executed in a state where the probability variable state is set, and the number of drawings (the number of special symbol fluctuations). It is configured to do so. Specifically, in the second embodiment, the variable probability state is set continuously until the number of drawings (variable number) of special symbols reaches a predetermined number (50 times) without winning a jackpot. If you win a jackpot between 1 and 49 times when the number of drawings (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is 1 to 49, the symbol will be in a state of probability change and the special symbol indicating the jackpot will be stopped and displayed during the fluctuation of the jackpot. During the definite period, a potential state is set. As a result, the player is given a bonus game (RUSH game) during the pattern determination period and a jackpot game after the finalization period ends.

Next, when a jackpot is won for the 50th time when the special symbol lottery number (variation frequency) is won, a potential state is set during the jackpot variation and during the symbol confirmation period. As a result, the player is given a bonus of a potential state game (RUSH game) from jackpot fluctuation to the end of the symbol confirmation period, and a jackpot game after the potential state ends. In other words, in the second embodiment, in a state where the variable probability state is set, the condition for transition to the probability state (jackpot winning) is established when a specific condition (specific number of drawings (50th)) is satisfied. If the specific condition is satisfied, the player is provided with a more advantageous benefit than if the condition for transition to the probable state was satisfied without the specific condition being satisfied.

When the number of times the special symbol is drawn exceeds 50 times, the predetermined number of probability variations is reached and the normal state is set as the gaming state. If a jackpot is won during this normal state, the normal state continues during the special symbol fluctuation and during the symbol confirmation period, and the jackpot game is executed.

On the other hand, if the number of draws (number of fluctuations) of the special symbol is a loss from the 1st to 49th time after the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state will remain unchanged during the variation of the special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. If it continues and it is a miss on the 50th time, the probability state will be set during the special symbol fluctuation and the symbol confirmation period, so the probability state will be from the special symbol variation to the end of the symbol confirmation period. The game (RUSH game) becomes executable.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation time of the special symbol in the variable probability state and the symbol confirmation period, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, it is determined that the lottery result other than the jackpot (missing) is a jackpot. For example, when the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot, the variable time is set to 60 seconds to 180 seconds. ” is selected, and a symbol confirmation period of “5 seconds to 150 seconds” is selected as the symbol confirmation period, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is other than a jackpot (for example, a loss), the The configuration is such that a variable time of "0.5 seconds to 150 seconds" is selected as the variable time, and a symbol confirmation period of "0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds" is selected as the symbol confirmation period.

By configuring in this way, the potential state game (RUSH game) can be played for up to 330 seconds (if you win the jackpot on the 50th special symbol variation number) and at the minimum depending on the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of lottery numbers. It is possible to provide the player with a range of 5 seconds (if the jackpot is won on the 1st to 49th number of special symbol fluctuations). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting how long the current potential state will continue.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, regardless of the special symbol lottery result, if the special symbol lottery number (variation number) after the probability change state is set is the 50th, during the variation of the special symbol, , Since the configuration is such that the potential state is set during the pattern confirmation period, even if the player does not win the jackpot during the pattern confirmation period, the player is not allowed to play the potential state game (RUSH game). can be provided. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the potential state game (RUSH game), compared to the configuration of the first embodiment in which the potential state game (RUSH game) is provided only when a jackpot is won. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is unable to experience the rush game (RUSH game) and becomes bored with the game despite having played the game for a long time.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a longer potential state is set when the potential state is set based on winning a jackpot during a variable probability state than when a potential state is set without winning a jackpot. It is designed to be easy. As a result, the longer the period in which the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed, the more likely it is that the jackpot game will be executed after the end of the potential state game (RUSH game). Therefore, it is possible to make a player who is playing a potential state game (RUSH game) play the game while expecting that a jackpot game will be executed.

Note that, unlike the configuration of this embodiment described above, in some cases where the potential state is set without winning the jackpot, it is equivalent to the case where the potential state is set based on winning the jackpot. , or set a fluctuation time or symbol confirmation period corresponding to the special symbol lottery result other than a jackpot (missing, small win) so that a potential state game (RUSH game) with a longer length is executed. Also good. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a situation in which it would be advantageous not to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, and it is possible to provide a game with surprises.

In this embodiment, as described above, if a jackpot is won during a variable probability state, a long probability state is likely to be set. It may be configured such that when a state is set, a long potential state is set. In this case, for example, if the number of probability variations (the number of drawings (number of variations) of special symbols in which the probability variation state is continuously set) is 50, the jackpot probability in the probability variation state, that is, the high probability state of the special symbol, is 1/20. It is preferable to configure the system so that a long potential state is set when the special symbol lottery result is a loss 50 times in a row (about 7%).

Next, among the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, display contents that are different from those in the first embodiment described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 90. In the second embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, since the potential state is set during the symbol confirmation period, the special symbol 1 for the production content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The display mode of the display area Dm1 or the special figure 2 display area Dm2 is different from the first embodiment described above. FIG. 90(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents in a potential state. As shown in FIG. 90(a), in the second embodiment, the potential state is set during the period when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display), so the potential state is set. The production mode (super chance zone display) indicating the state in which the second special symbol is fluctuating over the timing is displayed, and the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8(a)) in that it is executed during a period in which the second symbol for display is stopped and displayed (determined display). Since other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIG. 90(a), the display mode of the third symbol ("777") to indicate that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) has won the jackpot is displayed in a stopped state, and this time This indicates that the probability state is set based on the winning of the jackpot with the first special symbol during the probability variable state. In the example shown in FIG. 90(a), since the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is formed in which the third symbol is displayed in a display mode that is visible to the player, the player cannot see the special figure 1 display area Dm1. By understanding the display mode of the third symbol displayed on Dm1 and the performance mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 indicating that the potential state has been set, it is possible to determine the future flow of the game. It is possible to play a game in a state in which information (information as to whether a jackpot game will be executed after the completion of a potential state game) is obtained in advance.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when a potential state is set based on the jackpot winning of the first special symbol, when a special symbol lottery is performed during the potential state, a falling lottery (special symbol The system is configured so that a lottery (for transitioning from a high probability state to a low probability state) is not performed. Therefore, by identifying the display mode of the third symbol displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1, it is possible to understand whether the current potential state is an advantageous potential state that is advantageous for the player. You can play games with peace of mind.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a configuration is used in which the third symbol is displayed so that the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the player can easily identify the lottery result of the special symbol. In order to make it difficult for players to identify, the display area may be reduced or a display screen other than the third symbol display device 81 (for example, a light emitting body attached to the game board 13 or a display other than the third symbol display device 81) may be used. A configuration may also be used in which display is performed using a liquid crystal display device (such as a liquid crystal display device). By configuring this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand why the potential state was set, so that the jackpot game is executed after the end of the potential state game (RUSH game). The game can be played while predicting whether or not the game will be held, or whether or not a falling lottery will be executed during the potential state game (RUSH game).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the third symbol is changed from the time when the third symbol is stopped displayed (confirmed display) in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 until the final display period (symbol confirmation period) elapses. Although it is configured to completely stop without changing it, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be used, for example, as long as it notifies the player that the special symbol is currently in the fixed display period (symbol fixed period). Although the variable display of the third symbol is stopped during the fixed display period, the display mode (color) of the third symbol may be gradually changed, or the third symbol may be changed to such an extent that the player cannot identify it. The design may be configured to swing.

In addition, players may be asked whether they are currently in the fixed display period (symbol fixed period) or because they have not yet acquired the right to a new special symbol drawing (fluctuation). ) may be configured to set a display mode for the player to identify whether or not it is in a state where it is not being executed. ” command, or the display mode (color, design) of the third symbol may be changed between “confirmed display” and “standby”. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress erroneous recognition that a new lottery will not be started during the final display period, despite the state having a pending memory.

Next, using FIG. 90(b), the display contents when entering the potential state game (RUSH game) in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 90(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when entering the potential state game (RUSH game). As shown in FIG. 90(b), in this embodiment, the potential state is set during the period in which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so the potential state game (RUSH game) The performance mode indicating the entry is executed during the period when the second symbol for indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display) in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1. This is different from the display screen of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 8(b)). Since other display elements are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 91 to 96. In the second embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the first embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. They differ in that they are Other points are the same as those in the first embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 91, in the ROM 202 of the second embodiment, instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d, there is a jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa, and instead of the small hit type selection table 202e, a small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is used. This embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that a variable pattern selection 2 table 202ac is provided in place of the variable pattern selection table 202f, and a deviation type selection table 202ad is further provided.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa differs from the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment in that the type of jackpot type has been changed, and various counters (time saving counter 203f, probability change counter 203aa) that are set after the jackpot ends. , confirmed time counters 203ad, 203ae) and the value of the first winning type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is different. Here, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 92 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 92, the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa specifies the same jackpot operation contents as the jackpot types specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) of the first embodiment described above. The values of the time saving counter 203f, probability change counter 203aa, special figure 1 confirmed time counter 203ad, and special figure 2 confirmed time counter 203ae are defined for each jackpot type.

Specifically, for jackpot types (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) in which the same jackpot operation content as jackpot A in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is selected, The time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "100" when the gaming state (when the game is played) is a normal state or a probability state, and a value of "50" when it is a time saving state or a variable probability state. Therefore, it is specified that the probability change counter 203aa is set to a value of "50".

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is specified that "5 seconds" is set for jackpot A1, "60 seconds" for jackpot A2, and "150 seconds" for jackpot A3, and the first winning type obtained Jackpot A1 is defined in the range of "0 to 19" for the value of counter C2 (0 to 99), jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and jackpot A3 is defined in "24". In other words, in the second embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and in 80% of them (20/ 25) is a jackpot D, 16% (4/25) is a jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) is a jackpot A3.

In other words, in this embodiment, even if the player wins a jackpot in which the most advantageous jackpot game is executed, a short pattern confirmation period is used as the period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the lottery result to the player. If selected, the period during which the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, in the lottery of special symbols, the player can pay attention not only to whether or not there is a big hit, but also to the length of the symbol confirmation period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, in the second embodiment, a configuration is used in which the symbol confirmation period is defined in association with the jackpot type, but the invention is not limited to this, and the lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type), The lottery for selecting the symbol confirmation period may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol confirmation periods can be combined for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide a gaming experience that is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similar to the jackpots A1 to A3 described above, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

Specifically, for the jackpot types (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the same jackpot operation content as jackpot B in the jackpot type selection table 202d of the first embodiment described above is selected, The time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "0" when the gaming state (when the game is played) is a normal state or a probability state, and a value of "100" when it is a time saving state or a variable probability state. Therefore, it is specified that the probability change counter 203aa is set to a value of "0". Further, as the symbol determination period of the special symbol, "5 seconds" is set for jackpot B1, "60 seconds" is set for jackpot B2, and "150 seconds" is set for jackpot B3.

Next, the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab will be explained with reference to FIG. 93(a). FIG. 93(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 2 table 202ab in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 93(a), the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that the winnings A to small winnings C) are further subdivided and defined. Other than that, it is the same as the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

Specifically, as the small win type in which the small win operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small win A of the first embodiment is executed, the value of the small win type counter C5 is in the range of "0 to 9". , "Small win A1" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "10 to 89", and "Small win A2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is in the range of "90 to 93". ``Small win A3'' with a symbol confirmation time of ``1.5 seconds'' is defined in the range of ``.''.

Then, as the small winning type in which the small winning operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small winning B of the first embodiment is executed, the symbol is confirmed when the value of the small winning type counter C5 is in the range of "94 to 95". "Small win B1" with a time of "0.2 seconds" is in the range of "96-97", "Small win B2" with a symbol confirmation time of "0.5 seconds" is a symbol with a value of "98" "Small win B3" with a confirmed time of "1.5 seconds" is defined. Furthermore, as a small winning type in which the small winning operation (opening operation) corresponding to the small winning C of the first embodiment is executed, the value of the small winning type counter C5 is "99" and the symbol confirmation time is "1". A small winning operation (opening operation) of 5 seconds is specified.

Next, the contents of the deviation type selection table 202ad will be explained with reference to FIG. 93(b). This loss type selection table 202ad is referred to in order to select the loss type when the lottery result of a special symbol is a loss. A fixed time is specified.

In this embodiment, the same counter value (the value of the small hit type counter C5 ) to select the type. Thereby, the number of counters that main control device 110 has can be reduced. Note that the configuration is not limited to the above-described configuration, and a configuration may be adopted in which different counters are used depending on whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit or a loss.

FIG. 93(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the deviation type selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 93(b), the symbol type (missing type) with a symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds to 1.5 seconds corresponds to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is defined in correspondence with the value of the type counter C5.

As explained above, in the second embodiment, it is possible to set lottery results of jackpot, small win, and loss as special symbol lottery results, and it is also possible to set different symbol confirmation times for each lottery result. It is composed of Thereby, even if the special symbol lottery results are the same, different symbol determination times can be set.

Here, for example, if the lottery result of a special symbol is a jackpot and the probability state is set during the symbol confirmation period, the longer the time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as the symbol confirmation time, the longer the symbol confirmation period will be. , it is possible to lengthen the period during which the potential state is set, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a loss, the longer the symbol determination time is selected, the fewer the number of games per unit time (the number of special symbol lottery numbers) becomes, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the second special symbol (special symbol 2) when the potential state is set during the period in which the special symbol indicating that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a jackpot is stopped and displayed. During a potential state game (RUSH game) in which a lottery is executed, if the lottery result of special drawing 2 is a small hit or a loss, a long symbol confirmation time is selected, and a predetermined potential state is selected. This is disadvantageous to the player because the number of special drawing 2 drawings that can be executed during the period (design determination period of special drawing 1) is reduced.

In this way, it is possible to vary the degree of advantage of the set symbol confirmation period depending on the special symbol lottery result, so it is possible to provide the player with novel gameplay.

In addition, in this embodiment, by varying the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, the period during which a potential state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is set is varied, and the period during which the potential state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is set is varied, and the period during which the potential state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, is set is changed. Although the configuration is such that the degree of advantage provided to the player is varied by varying the number of special symbol drawings, other configurations may also be used. Only when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol indicating winning is longer than a predetermined period, the player may be provided with the privilege of displaying a desirable image, or the player may be provided with the privilege of displaying the music played during the jackpot game. The selection operation may be configured to be executable during the symbol confirmation period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94, the contents of the time saving/probability variable table 202ac2 will be explained. FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time saving/probability variable 2 table 202ac2 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 94, the time saving/probability variation table 202ac2 is different from the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 19(a)) in that the variation pattern corresponding to the special figure 1 is They differ in that they have different lengths. Other than that, it is the same as the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 (see FIG. 19(a)). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

In other words, in this embodiment, the probability state is set during the special symbol stop display period (design confirmation period) when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) during the probability variable state. Therefore, the variable display period of the special figure 1 during the variable probability state is configured to be shorter than that of the first embodiment.

Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 95, the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a probability change counter 203aa is provided in place of the probability change flag 203g, and a special figure 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab and a special figure 2 The difference is that a symbol confirmed flag 203ac, a special figure 1 confirmed time counter 203ad, and a special figure 2 confirmed time counter 203ae are added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and their explanations will be omitted.

The variable probability counter 203aa is a counter for continuing the number of special symbol drawings performed in a high probability state (potential state, variable probability state) of the special symbol, and is a counter for a period in which the special symbol drawing is executed with high probability. This is to show that.

This probability change counter 203aa is set to a value defined corresponding to the won jackpot type (see figure 54) at the timing when the probability change flag 203g is set to ON in the jackpot end process (see S2312 in Fig. 54) of the first embodiment described above. 92) is set, and its value is referred to in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) (S451 in FIG. 98), and a jackpot lottery is drawn according to the value set in the probability variation counter 203aa. It is executed (see S403 and S404 in FIG. 98). Similarly, it is also referred to when executing the second special symbol lottery (see S953 in FIG. 102).

Then, the value is subtracted by 1 when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbols (Special symbol 1, Special symbol 2) has elapsed, and is reset to 0 when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol that won the jackpot has passed. .

The special figure 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the first special symbol (special figure 1) is stopped and displayed, and when set to on, the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. This indicates that it is during the period (during the design confirmation period). This special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to ON in the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) (see S2802 in FIG. 100), and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (see S852 in FIG. 100) (see S257). Then, when it is determined that the symbol confirmation period has passed (S853 in FIG. 99: Yes), it is set to OFF.

The special figure 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac is a flag for indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed, and when set to on, the flag 203ac indicates that the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. This indicates that it is during the period (during the design confirmation period). This special pattern 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac changes the type of target special symbol from the first special symbol (special symbol 1) to the second special symbol (special symbol The only difference is the change to 2), and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol 1 confirmation time counter 203ad and the special symbol 2 confirmation time counter 203ae are counters for measuring the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol (special symbol 2). , the first special symbol (special symbol 1), or the second special symbol (special symbol 2) 1 is stopped and displayed, a value indicating the current symbol confirmation period is set in the corresponding counter. Then, in the process during the fixed time that is periodically executed (see S860 in FIG. 101), the value of the counter is subtracted, and the values of the special figure 1 confirmed time counter 203ad and the special figure 2 confirmed time counter 203ae become 0. In this case, a process is executed to end the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol.

The second embodiment is configured such that different symbol confirmation periods are set depending on the type for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (see FIGS. 92 and 93). And, it is configured so that the potential state is set as the gaming state during this symbol determination period.

Next, information stored in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in addition to the electrical configuration of the first embodiment described above, the RAM 223 of the second embodiment includes a special symbol 1 confirmation counter 223aa, a special symbol 2 confirmation counter 223ab, and a remaining confirmation time information storage area. 223ac and 223ad are different in that a confirmed flag 223ad is added.

The special pattern 1 confirmation counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the period during which the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period), and is a counter for measuring the period in which the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is stopped and displayed. When a confirmation command including information to indicate is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of special drawing 1 is set.

The value set in this special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa is periodically subtracted by various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) executed every 1 millisecond. In the second embodiment, since the potential state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (first special symbol), this special symbol By managing the value of the 1-determined counter 223aa, it is possible to set remaining period information indicating the remaining period in which the potential state continues to be set.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if a small hit of the second special symbol is won during the symbol confirmation period of special figure 1 (during potential state game), the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa during the small win game. The configuration is such that the subtraction process is interrupted. Therefore, since the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol 1 is not subtracted while the small winning game is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol can be appropriately executed during the symbol confirmation period.

In addition to the configuration of the second embodiment described above, a process may be provided to accumulate the period during which the subtraction process of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is suspended. Specifically, a small winning game counter is provided to measure the period during which the small winning game is being executed, and the small winning game counter is used to determine the period during the small winning game during the continuously set probability state. It may be configured to calculate the cumulative period of It may be configured to use a medium counter to calculate the cumulative period during a small winning game in a probability state that is continuously set.

In this way, the result of the current potential state game (RUSH game) is notified to the player by calculating the cumulative interruption information that is the cumulative period during which the subtraction process of the symbol confirmation period of special drawing 1 is interrupted. I can do it. Furthermore, as detailed game results of the potential state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of balls acquired during the potential state game (RUSH game), the cumulative number of small wins won, and the above-mentioned interruption cumulative number. Based on the information, the game results that indicate whether or not there are more benefits earned than the design value (or than the past history), and whether or not the number of balls acquired is greater than the number of small wins won. It may be configured to notify the player of the game result indicating whether or not the cumulative interruption information is longer than the number of small wins won. Alternatively, the system may be configured to simply notify the cumulative number of pitches acquired, the cumulative number of small hits, or the cumulative interruption information.

The special pattern 2 confirmation counter 223ab is a counter for measuring the period during which the second special symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol confirmation period), and is a counter for measuring the period in which the second special symbol (special pattern 2) is stopped and displayed. When a confirmation command including information to indicate is received, a value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period of special figure 2 is set. The specific content is the same as the above-mentioned special pattern 1 confirmed counter 223aa except that the measurement target is changed to the special pattern 2 pattern confirmation period instead of the special pattern 1 pattern confirmation period, and the details are as follows. The explanation will be omitted.

The remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac stores the remaining time of the symbol confirmed period (remaining confirmed time) at the time when the subtraction process of the symbol confirmed period of the first special symbol (special pattern 1) is interrupted (temporary stop of special pattern 1). This is a data area for storing remaining confirmed time information. In the second embodiment, the performance mode when restarting the symbol confirmation period subtraction process is set based on the remaining confirmation time information stored in the remaining confirmation time information storage area 223ac. This makes it possible to predict the period until the end of the probability state by understanding the performance mode to be executed when the subtraction process of the symbol confirmation period is restarted after the small winning game ends.

This remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac is stored when it is determined that a temporary stop related command has been received in the command determination process 2 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4162 in FIG. 106) (S4219 in FIG. 106: Yes). The remaining confirmed time information (period A to period C) set in the temporary stop related process 2 to be executed (see S4253 in FIG. 108) is stored (see S4956, S4958, and S4959 in FIG. 108). Then, in the restart process (see S4952 in FIG. 109) executed in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), read when setting the performance mode when restarting the subtraction process of the symbol confirmation period. (see S5002 and S5052 in FIG. 109), and is referred to when determining the additional performance type (see S5003 and S5053 in FIG. 109).

Since the system is configured so that information indicating the remaining period of the potential state game is notified when various notification conditions are satisfied, the remaining period of the symbol confirmation period, that is, the potential state game is Information indicating the remaining period of time that can be executed can be obtained by understanding the production mode of various productions to be executed during the potential state. Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the performance, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the remaining period of the symbol confirmation period, that is, the remaining period during which the potential state game can be executed, is divided into predetermined ranges, and the remaining period information for indicating the divided ranges is transmitted to the player. By configuring the system to notify the player of the current period, the system allows the player to roughly understand the remaining period of the potential game and provides the player with the pleasure of predicting the specific remaining period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, it may be configured to notify the player of the specific remaining period in seconds.

The confirmed flag 223ad is a flag to indicate that the special symbol is in the stop display period (design confirmation period), and is set to ON when the special symbol is in the stop display period (design confirmation period). Ru. This confirmed flag 223ad is configured to be set to ON even if any of the special symbols, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2), is during the symbol definite period. There is.

The flag 223ad during confirmation is a symbol confirmation that is executed when it is determined that a symbol confirmation related command has been received (S4254: Yes in FIG. 106) in the command determination process 2 of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). It is set to on in the related process (see S4255 in FIG. 110) (see S5077 in FIG. 110). Then, in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in FIG. 108), if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop command has been received (see S4951 in FIG. 108), the fluctuation state of special pattern 1 is within the symbol confirmation period. 108 (see S4953 in FIG. 108). Also, when it is determined that the special map 1 restart command has been received in the restart process (S4952 in Figure 109) executed in the temporary stop related process 2 (see S4253 in Figure 108) (S5001 in Figure 109: Yes) , is referred to in order to determine whether the fluctuation state of special figure 1 is in the symbol confirmation period (see S5051 in FIG. 109).

As described above, in the second embodiment, at the time when the small winning game is won by drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (when the small winning game is executed), or at the time when the small winning game is finished. It is determined whether the fluctuating state of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is in the fluctuating display period or in the symbol confirmation period, and based on the determination result, the special symbol 1 is temporarily stopped (fluctuating display period, It is configured to set the processing when subtracting the symbol confirmation period) and the performance mode when restarting the special drawing 1 (resuming the subtraction of the variable display period and symbol confirmation period).

By configuring in this way, the process is executed appropriately no matter what fluctuation state the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is in at the timing when a small hit is won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2). can do.

<About the control processing of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 97 to 105. The control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above, except for the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 32). (See FIG. 97), 1st special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) instead of the 1st special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), and 1st special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) In place of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 99), the second special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 40), the second special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see FIG. 102), the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing (See Fig. 45) 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (See Fig. 103) Execute special symbol 2 off stop processing 2 (See Fig. 105) Instead of special symbol 2 off stop processing (See Fig. 46) The difference is that a first special symbol fixed period setting process (see FIG. 100) and a second special symbol fixed period setting process (see FIG. 104) are newly added. Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, in the content of the control processing executed by the main control device 110 in the second embodiment, points that are significantly different from the above-described first embodiment will be briefly explained. In the first embodiment described above, the potential state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is configured to be set during the variable display period of one special symbol (special symbol 1). More specifically, in a state where a variable probability state is set, a potential state is set during the variable display period of the special symbol that won the jackpot, and a potential state game (RUSH game) is played until the variable display period ends. The jackpot game is executed immediately after the variable display period ends. As a result, it is possible to have the player perform two different bonus games (a game that frequently generates small wins during a potential state, and a jackpot game) in succession, and the player can receive a large number of bonus games in a short period of time. It was possible to grant the following benefits.

Furthermore, since the potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed in a state before the jackpot game is executed, the potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed with peace of mind. In other words, the jackpot game, which generally provides a larger benefit to the player than the small win game, is set in the latter half of two consecutive bonus games, even if the game results in the first half are not good. , it was possible to motivate players to acquire benefits in games (jackpot games) executed in the latter half of the game.

In addition, since the potential state game (RUSH game) is configured to be performed during the execution of jackpot fluctuations, it is possible to set in advance the period during which the potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed. can. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed for an unexpectedly long time and excessive benefits are given to the player.

Furthermore, the period in which the potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed varies depending on the variation pattern selected when a jackpot is won. In other words, since the configuration is such that whether or not a jackpot game will be executed and the length of the game period of a potential state game (RUSH game) are determined by one lottery of special symbols. The processing load on the main controller 110 can be reduced compared to the case where a dedicated selection table is used to preset the length of the game period for the RUSH game.

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment described above, since the game period of the potential state game (RUSH game) is determined only by the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, the potential state game In order to prepare a plurality of game periods for the (RUSH game), it is necessary to prepare a plurality of variation patterns (variation times) in advance, which may overwhelm the data area for storing the variation patterns.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, in addition to the configuration of the first embodiment described above, the period in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed (design confirmation period) is also a period in which the potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed. In addition, the length of the symbol confirmation period is configured to vary depending on the symbol type based on the lottery result of the special symbol.

With this configuration, the game period of the potential state game (RUSH game) can be set by adding up (combining) the special symbol fluctuation time and the symbol confirmation period. A plurality of patterns can be set for the game period of the game (RUSH game) with a small amount of data.

Furthermore, even in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the potential state game (RUSH game), different symbol confirmation periods are set depending on the lottery result, so Depending on the symbol confirmation period, the number of times the special drawing 2 is drawn during a predetermined potential state game (RUSH game) period (variable display time of the special drawing 1) can be varied.

In other words, in the lottery of the first special symbol that sets the game period of the potential state game (RUSH game), it is desired that a longer symbol confirmation period is set, and the potential state game (RUSH game) In the lottery of the second special symbol that is repeatedly executed during the drawing, it is a novelty that a shorter symbol confirmation period is desired to be set, and different lottery results are desired depending on the type of special symbol to be drawn. It is possible to provide players with a certain level of gameplay.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the process for transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (subtraction process of the time saving counter 203f) is executed at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is The process for transitioning to a low probability state (subtraction process of the probability variation counter 203aa) is configured to be executed at the end of the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, and the high probability state of the special symbol is set. When the number of fluctuations (number of drawings) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (50 times), the high probability state of the special symbol will be transferred to the low probability state, and the special symbol will be activated when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. It is configured such that the high probability state of the normal symbol can be shifted to the low probability state when the number of fluctuations of the symbol (number of drawings) reaches a predetermined number (50 times).

In other words, in a state where the probability change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, when the number of variations (number of drawings) of the special symbol reaches 50, that variation (the 50th variation) ) starts, the gaming state shifts to a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), and the timing at which the fluctuation (50th fluctuation) ends (symbol determination period ends) It is configured such that the gaming state can shift to the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) at the time of the game.

With this configuration, even if you have not won a jackpot, you can set the potential state only for a predetermined specific period (50th fluctuation period (including symbol confirmation period)) , it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the potential state game (RUSH game).

First, with reference to FIG. 97, special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 2 (S154). Special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) adds the processing of S251 and S252 to the special symbol variation processing (S104) in the first embodiment described above, and replaces the first special symbol variation stop processing (S207). The difference is that the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is executed instead of the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) and the second special symbol variation stop process (S213).

In special symbol variation processing 2 (S154), if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is 0 in the processing of S204 (S204: No), the special symbol 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is turned on. It is determined whether it has been set (S251). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to ON (S251: Yes), the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) is executed, and the process moves to S209. Details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) will be described later with reference to FIG. 99. On the other hand, in the process of S251, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is set to OFF (S251: No), the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, and the first special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed. Move to processing.

If it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is not 0 (greater than 0) in the process of S206 mentioned above (S206: No), or if the process of S208 and S257 is executed, then the special It is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203n in FIG. 2 is greater than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation time counter 203n is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S209: No), then it is determined whether the special figure 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac is set to on. (S252).

In the process of S252, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac is not set to ON (S252: No), that is, the current second special pattern (special pattern 2) is determined by the processes of S209 and S252. If it is determined that the symbol is not in the fluctuation display or in the symbol confirmation period, a second special symbol fluctuation start process is executed to newly start the fluctuation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S210), and then the main Finish the process. In addition, since the processing contents of the second special symbol variation start processing (S210) are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S252, if it is determined that the special pattern 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac is set to on (S252: Yes), that is, the current period is the symbol confirmation period of the second special symbol (special pattern 2). If it is determined that this is the case, the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is executed, and this process is ended. Details of the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S263) will be described later with reference to FIG. 103.

Next, with reference to FIG. 98, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) is performed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above, in place of the process in S402, in which the value of the probability variable counter 203aa is greater than 0. The difference is that a process (S451) for determining whether

In other words, in the first embodiment described above, when the high probability state of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol continues until the special symbol wins the jackpot, so the current state of the special symbol is The variable probability flag 203g was used to indicate the high probability state, but in the second embodiment, the special symbol jackpot winning (first ending condition) is used as the condition for ending the high probability state of the special symbol. In addition, there is a second end condition that is satisfied when the number of variations of the special symbol (the number of lottery draws) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). Therefore, the probability variation counter 203aa is used to measure the number of fluctuations (number of drawings) of the special symbol during a period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set. This probability change counter 203aa is for measuring the number of times the special symbol changes (the number of drawings) until the above-mentioned second ending condition is satisfied, and the value is updated based on the execution of the special symbol drawing. is configured to be

Note that any configuration other than this embodiment may be used as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the second termination condition described above is met. For example, the probability variation flag 203g used in the first embodiment and the second A configuration using the probability variation counter 203aa used in the embodiment may be used, or a variation number counter that always measures the number of variations of the special symbol (number of drawings) regardless of the gaming state is provided, and the setting status of the probability variation flag 203g, The number of changes of the special symbol during the probability change state may be determined based on the number of updates of the number of changes counter.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the number of variations of the special symbol, that is, the total number of variations of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the number of variations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) Although the end condition (second end condition) is set to end the probability change state, the present invention is not limited to this. Figure 1 A variation counter and a special pattern 2 variation counter that only measures the number of variations (number of drawings) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are provided, and the number of variations (number of drawings) of each special symbol is It may be configured such that a termination condition (termination condition for terminating the variable probability state) is set for each of the two.

In addition, in the second embodiment, as an end condition for ending the high probability state (for example, variable probability state) of the special symbol, in addition to the first end condition based on the jackpot winning of the special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol Although the second ending condition is set based on the number of drawings, other ending conditions may be set. For example, if the drawing result of a special symbol is a specific drawing result other than a jackpot (for example, a small win). A third end condition may be provided that is satisfied when the number of times that the number of times has reached a predetermined number of times. Furthermore, this third end condition may be set for the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol, respectively.

In addition, a timing counter is provided to measure the time during which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and a fourth ending condition that is satisfied when the counter clocks a predetermined time and the high probability state of the special symbol are set. A fifth end condition may be provided that can be satisfied based on the lottery result of the normal symbol executed in the state where the lottery is performed or the number of lottery lots.

In addition, when any of the plurality of ending conditions described above is satisfied, the timing for transitioning the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state may be set to a timing other than the timing used in the second embodiment. For example, immediately before the special symbol lottery starts, immediately after the special symbol lottery is executed, the timing to start changing the special symbol, or a predetermined time after the special symbol fluctuation starts (for example, 5 seconds) have elapsed, the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol has stopped, the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, and the period when the special symbol has stopped displaying (the symbol has been confirmed). The configuration may be such that the transition occurs at any timing of the end of the period).

In this way, by providing a plurality of ending conditions for ending the high probability state of the special symbol and timing for ending the high probability state of the special symbol when the ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to provide the player with a special It is possible to make it difficult to understand how long the high probability state of the symbols will last and when it will end (when the special symbol starts changing, when the fluctuation stops, when the symbol confirmation period ends), making the player nervous. It is possible to have the player play the game while giving the player a sense of feeling.

The other processes of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S356) are the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257) is one of the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. I will explain about it. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257). The first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257) is a process executed during the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol (S851 to S858), in contrast to the first special symbol variation stop process (S207) in the first embodiment described above. , S860) is added, and the contents of the reset process when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) winning the jackpot is stopped and displayed are different. Other processes are the same as the first special symbol variation stop process (S207), so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Here, returning to FIG. 97, the conditions under which the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) is executed will be explained. This first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) includes a process for stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, a process for setting a period (symbol confirmation period) for stopping and displaying the special symbol, and a process for setting the set symbol confirmation. It is configured so that a period measuring process and various execution processes corresponding to the special symbol lottery results after the symbol determination period has elapsed are executed.

Therefore, in the process of S206 in FIG. 97, that is, the process of determining whether it is the timing to end the variation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the timing to stop the variation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is determined. (the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m is 0) (S206 in FIG. 97: Yes), and the process of S251, that is, the current is the first special symbol (special figure 1) In the process of determining whether the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being displayed in a stopped state, it is determined that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being displayed in a halted manner (the special symbol 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is set to on). (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes).

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. In the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on (S851). Here, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 has elapsed and the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) is executed to stop and display the special symbol 1, that is, in the processing of S206 in FIG. 97, When executing the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S257) because the value of the special symbol 1 variation time counter 203m is determined to be 0, the special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on. Therefore, in the process of S851, it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is not set to on (set to off) (S851: No), and the first special symbol confirmation period setting process is executed. (S852).

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), a process is executed to set a period (symbol confirmation period) in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Here, with reference to FIG. 100, the first special symbol determination period setting process is one of the processes in the first special symbol fluctuation stop process 2 (S257) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. (S852) will be explained. FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol determination period setting process (S852). The first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852) includes a process of setting a confirmation time (symbol confirmation period), a process of setting a command to be sent to the first symbol display device 37, and a process of setting the first special symbol (special symbol) of this time. When the lottery result of 1) is a jackpot, a process for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state is executed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the conditions for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (time saving end condition) are the case where the special symbol wins the jackpot (first time saving end condition), and the condition for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (time saving end condition). When the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of drawings) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times) in a state where the high probability state of is continuously set (second time-saving end condition), there are two time-saving end conditions. If the above-mentioned first time saving end condition is met, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (the start timing of the symbol confirmation period), and the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. When the 2-time shortening end condition is met, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol starts (the timing when the special symbol lottery is executed). .

In this way, we provide multiple conditions (time-saving end conditions) that trigger the transition from the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state, and change the timing of transition to the low-probability state depending on the established time-saving end condition. By configuring this, at what timing the low probability state of the normal symbol is set for a player who is playing a game in a gaming state (time saving state, variable probability state) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. Since it is made difficult to predict whether the game will shift to a game state (normal state, potential state), it is possible to keep the user's attention on the game content at all times, and it is possible to provide a game that never gets boring.

In the second embodiment, the state of the normal symbol is changed according to the above-mentioned content, but other configurations may also be used. Immediately after the lottery is executed, the timing at which the special symbol fluctuations are started, the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the special symbol fluctuations have started, the timing at which the special symbol fluctuations have stopped, or the timing when the special symbol fluctuations have stopped. , the transition is made either at the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was stopped and displayed, or at the end of the special symbol's stop display period (design confirmation period). It's okay.

In the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (S852), first, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) corresponding to the stopped symbol is set in the special symbol 1 confirmation time counter 203ad (S2801). In the second embodiment, the fixed time is determined according to each type selected in the various tables used in the special symbol lottery (big hit type selection 2 table 202aa, small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, loss type selection table 202ad). Since the (symbol confirmation period) is defined, a value indicating the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period) corresponding to the type that is stopped and displayed this time is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad. Specifically, for example, if the lottery result of the first special symbol this time is a jackpot, and the jackpot type selected using the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (see FIG. 92) is jackpot A3, the confirmation Since 150 seconds is defined as the time (symbol confirmation period), a value indicating 150 seconds is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

Next, the special figure 1 symbol confirmation flag 203ab is set to on (S2802), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S2803). If it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S2803: Yes), that is, it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol for which the confirmation time (symbol confirmation time) is set this time is a jackpot. If so, the value of the time saving counter 203f is reset in order to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (S2804). On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is not set to ON (S2803: No), the process of S2804 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2805. Thereby, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the low probability state of the normal symbol can be set at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, for example, when the special symbol wins a jackpot (first time-saving end condition), and when the high probability state of the normal symbol is continuously set, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of drawings) is the predetermined number of times ( For example, if the two time-saving ending conditions (50 times) are reached (second time-saving ending condition) and are established based on the same special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the first time-saving ending condition is satisfied. Because the configuration is configured to give priority to execution of the process of determining whether the second time-saving end condition is met, rather than the process of determining whether the second time-saving end condition is satisfied, when setting the symbol confirmation period for the special symbol, it is possible to win the jackpot of the special symbol. Even in this case, the process of S2804 will be skipped.

After executing the process of S2803 or S2804, in the process of S2805, it is determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S2805). If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S2805: Yes), a state command indicating a probability state is set (S2806), and the process moves to S2808. On the other hand, in the process of S2805, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0 (S2805: No), a status command indicating the normal state is set (S2807), and the process moves to S2808. After executing the process of S2806 or S2807, a special figure 1 confirmation command is set (S2808). Next, the variation of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S2809), and this process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 99, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S851 that the special pattern 1 symbol is confirmed flag 203ab is set to ON (S851: Yes), that is, the current period is the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special pattern 1). If it is determined that there is, the process of S852 is skipped and the process moves to S853. In addition, in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97), it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is set to ON (S251 in FIG. 97: Yes), and the first special symbol variation stop process 2 When (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed, it is determined in the process of S851 that the special symbol 1 symbol is being determined flag 203ab is set to ON.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is 0 (S853). That is, it is determined whether the current timing has passed the symbol confirmation period of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). Here, if it is determined that the value of the special pattern 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is not 0 (it is 1 or more), that is, it is determined that the current period is in the pattern confirmation period of the first special pattern (special pattern 1). If so (S853: No), the process during the fixed time (S860) is executed, and this process ends. This confirmation time processing (S860) executes processing to update the elapsed time of the symbol confirmation period, or updates the elapsed time of the symbol confirmation period that has been temporarily stopped based on the execution of the small winning game. It executes processing for restarting processing, and its detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 101.

On the other hand, in the process of S853, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is 0 (S853: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the confirmation time (symbol confirmation period), , the special figure 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is set to OFF (S854). Next, it is determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855). If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S855: Yes), the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S856). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is 0 (S855: No), the process of S856 is skipped and the process proceeds to S857. In the process of S857, a status command is set according to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa (S857).

By executing the process of S856 described above, in this embodiment, after the special symbol stop display period has elapsed (after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed), the process of subtracting the value of the probability change counter 203aa is executed, and the subtraction is performed. It is configured such that when the value of the subsequent probability change counter 203aa becomes 0, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. As a result, the probability change end condition (condition for transitioning the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state) is established when the number of fluctuations (number of drawings) of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times). In this case, the low probability state of the special symbol will be set after the special symbol's stop display period has passed, so the special symbol's high probability will be set during the fluctuating display period of the target special symbol and the symbol confirmation period. It can be a stochastic state. Therefore, for example, even if the above-mentioned variable probability end condition is satisfied due to the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol, the high probability state of the special symbol will not be maintained during the variable display period of the first special symbol and during the symbol confirmation period. It is possible to execute the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol in a state where is set.

To specifically explain the contents of the state command set in the process of S857 described above, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is larger than 0 (when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set), the probability change counter When the value of 203aa is greater than 0, a state command is set that indicates that the gaming state is a variable probability state, and when the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is 0, it indicates that the gaming state is a time saving state. A state command is set. In addition, when the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (when the low probability state of normal symbols is set), if the value of the probability change counter 203aa is greater than 0, it means that the gaming state is a probability state. A state command indicating that the probability change counter 203aa is 0 is set, a state command indicating that the gaming state is the normal state is set.

Further, in the process of S857, if the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is larger than 0 (1 or more), a remaining probability variation number command is set as the value of the probability variation counter 203aa, that is, information indicating the remaining probability variation number. The state command and the remaining probability variation count command set in the process of S857 are output to the audio lamp control device 113 by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). be done. The audio lamp control device 113 receives various commands output from the main control device 110, and executes processing corresponding to the received command in command determination processing 2 (see S4162 in FIG. 106). This allows the audio lamp control device 113 to appropriately determine the current gaming situation.

As described above, in the second embodiment, when the first time-saving end condition (a condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state at the stop display timing of the special symbol. state, and if the second time-saving end condition (a condition that is satisfied depending on the number of fluctuations (number of drawings) of the special symbol) is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal symbol is reduced at the timing of the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol. When the probability variable ending condition is satisfied (the first probability variable ending condition that is satisfied when a jackpot is won, the second probability variable ending condition that is satisfied depending on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (number of drawings)) at the same time as the transition to the probability state. The special symbol is configured to shift from a high probability state to a low probability state at the end timing of the special symbol stop display period (design confirmation period).

By configuring in this way, the period during which a potential gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set can be varied depending on the time-saving termination condition that is satisfied, so that it is possible for the player to This not only makes the player expect a jackpot as a result of the special symbol lottery, but also makes the player expect that the length of the period in which an advantageous gaming state is set will be longer.

Next, a special figure 1 confirmation period end command is set (S858), and the same process as the process of S801 to S805 in the first embodiment described above is executed. Next, the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h and probability change counter 203aa are reset (S859), the jackpot flag 203o is set to ON (S807), and this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, the fixed time processing ( S860) will be explained. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fixed time processing (S860).

In the process during the confirmed time (S860), first, it is determined whether the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to on (S2901). This special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON when a small hit is won in the second special symbol lottery and the lottery result is stopped and displayed (see S1602 in FIG. 46). And, during the period when the small winning game is being executed, the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 is not executed in the process of S201 of the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97). In other words, in the processing of S2901 of the confirmation time processing (see S860 in FIG. 101), it is determined that the special symbol 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON only after the small winning game ends. This occurs only when variation processing 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) is executed.

Therefore, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), a special figure 1 restart command is set (S2902), and the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON. 203v is set to off (S2903), and the process moves to S2904. In other words, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v is set to ON (S2901: Yes), the small winning game is finished, so the small winning game is executed. The processes of S2902 and S2903 are executed in order to restart the symbol confirmation period update process which has been temporarily stopped due to this.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901, if it is determined that the special map 1 temporary stop flag 203v is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S2901: No), the process of S2902 and S2903 is skipped and S2904 Shift to processing.

In the process of S2904, the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is decremented by 1 and updated (S2904), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S2905), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953). In the second special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (S953), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is The difference is that a process (S1051) for determining whether the value is greater than 0 is executed. The other processes are the same as the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S903), so detailed explanation will be omitted. In addition, the content of the process executed in S1051 described above is the same as the content executed in S451 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98), so the detailed The explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 103, the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263) is one of the processes in the special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (S154) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. I will explain about it. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S263). The second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263) is the addition of the processes of S1551 to S1563 to the second special symbol variation stop process (see S213 in FIG. 45) in the first embodiment described above, and S1506 The difference is that the process of S1560 is provided instead of the process of , and the processes of S1509 and S1510 are deleted. The other processes are the same as the second special symbol variation stop process (S213 in FIG. 45), so detailed explanation will be omitted.

This second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S263) is similar to the above-mentioned first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99), in which the symbol confirmation period elapses after the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed. The difference is that the control target is changed from the first special symbol (special symbol 1) to the second special symbol (special symbol 2). Note that among the various processes executed in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (S263), the control target is simply A detailed explanation of the process that only differs in the symbol type will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation stop processing 2 (S263), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac is set to on (S1551). If it is determined that the flag 203ac during special drawing 2 symbol determination is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the process of S1552 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1553. On the other hand, in the process of S1551, when it is determined that the special symbol 2 symbol confirmation flag 203ac is set to OFF (S1551: No), the second special symbol confirmation period setting process (S1552) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 104, the second special symbol is one of the processes in the second special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S263 in FIG. 103) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment. The fixed period setting process (S1552) will be explained. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol determination period setting process (S1552). This second special symbol confirmation period setting process (S1552) sets the target symbol type to the first special symbol for the process executed in the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100). to the second special symbol, the command to be set is the special symbol 2 confirmation command corresponding to the second special symbol, and the symbol type to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set to the second special symbol. The only difference is that the other processing contents are the same. Therefore, the detailed explanation of this process will be omitted with reference to the content of the first special symbol confirmation period setting process (see S852 in FIG. 100) described above.

Returning to FIG. 103, the explanation will be continued. After executing the process of S1551 or S1552, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 confirmation time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553), and the value of the special figure 2 confirmation time counter 203ae is not 0 (i.e., (greater than 0) (S1553: No), the value of the special symbol 2 confirmation time counter 203ae is updated (S1562), and the display of the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1563). ), this process ends.

The process of S1563 is to update the display of the second special symbol that has already been stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 displays the special symbol by lighting it up to show that the symbol is stopped (including a display that blinks at a high speed enough for the player to recognize that the symbol is lit). Therefore, in the process of S1563, an instruction for lighting up the second special symbol is output to the first symbol display device 37.

In addition, when using a configuration in which the special symbol is simply lit continuously during the symbol confirmation period as in this embodiment, for example, the second special symbol confirmation period setting process (see S1552 in FIG. 104) In the process of S3009, the configuration is configured to output an instruction to stop changing the second special symbol (stop display), and also output information indicating a period (symbol confirmation period) in which the second special symbol is to be stopped and displayed. period), the second special symbol may be configured to be lit and displayed in advance. With this configuration, there is no need to execute the process for updating the display content of the first symbol display device 37 each time in the process executed in a short cycle, so the processing load on the main controller 110 is reduced. can be reduced.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure 2 confirmed time counter 203ae is 0 (S1553: Yes), the special figure 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac is set to OFF (S1554). Next, it is determined whether the special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to on (S1555), and if it is determined that the special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to off (S1555: No), the probability change counter 203aa It is determined whether the value of is greater than 0 (S1556).

If it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is greater than 0 (S1556: Yes), the value of the probability variation counter 203aa is subtracted by 1 (S1557), and the process proceeds to S1558. On the other hand, in the process of S1555, if it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S1555: Yes), or if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203aa is 0 in the process of S1556 (S1556: No), the process of S1557 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1558.

In the process of S1558, a status command is set according to the values of the time saving counter 203f and the probability change counter 203aa (S1558), and then a special map 2 confirmation period end command is set (S1559), and then the first embodiment described above The same processes as in S1501 to S1505 are executed. Here, in the process of S1501, if it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is not set to on (set to off) (S1501: No), special figure 2 missing stop processing 2 (S1561 ) and end this process.

Moreover, when the process of S1505 is finished, next, the special drawing 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to OFF, the value of the probability change counter 203aa is reset (S1560), and the process of S1507, which is the same as the first embodiment described above, is executed. Then, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 105, special symbol 2 off stop processing 2 ( S1561) will be explained. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 out-of-place stop processing 2 (S1561). The special figure 2 missing stop process 2 (S1561) in the second embodiment is different from the special figure 2 missing stop process (S1508) in the first embodiment in that the processes of S1607 to S1610 are not executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the second embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment is the command determination process 2 in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 59) in contrast to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 106), the difference is that various counter update processing 2 (see FIG. 111) is executed instead of the various counter update processing (see FIG. 72), and otherwise the same processing is executed. Specifically, the processes executed when various commands outputted by changing the control content executed by the main controller 110 from the first embodiment are received, and the various processes added from the second embodiment. A process to update the counter value has been added.

First, with reference to FIG. 106, command determination processing 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 2 (S4162). Command determination process 2 (S4162) differs from the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S4251 to S4255 are added. Other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, so detailed description will be omitted.

When the command determination process 2 (S4162) is executed, first, the same processes of S4201 to S4216 as the command determination process (S4112 in FIG. 60) in the first embodiment described above are executed. In the process of S4215, if it is determined that a winning-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4215: No), then it is determined whether a remaining number-related command has been received (S4251). ).

Here, as a command related to the remaining number of times, a short remaining time number command (set by the process of S603 in FIG. 36 command) and a remaining probability variable number command (command set by the process of S857 in FIG. 99) indicating the remaining number of times the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set (the remaining number of fluctuations of the special symbol). If it is determined that a command related to the remaining number of times has been received (S4251: Yes), the remaining number of times update process 2 (S4252) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 107, the remaining number update process 2 (S4252), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the contents of the remaining number update process 2 (S4252). The remaining number of times update process 2 (S4252) differs from the remaining number of times update process (S4218) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S4851 to S4852 are added. Specifically, the difference is that processing for transmitting a command for displaying the number of remaining probability variations to the display control device 114 is added.

In the remaining number of times update processing 2 (S4252), first, it is determined whether a remaining time shortening number of times command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4801). If it is determined that the short remaining time count command has been received (S4801: Yes), a short remaining time count command for display corresponding to the command is set (S4802). On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction number of times command has not been received (S4801: No), the process of S4802 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S4851. Next, it is determined whether the remaining probability variable number command has been received (S4851). If it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has been received (S4851: Yes), a display remaining probability variation number command corresponding to the command is set (S4852), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining probability variation number command has not been received (S4851: No), this process is immediately ended.

Returning to FIG. 106, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4251, if it is determined that the remaining number-related command has not been received (S4251: No), it is determined whether a temporary stop-related command has been received (S4219). Here, the temporary stop related command includes a special figure 1 temporary stop command that is set when the special figure 1 temporary stop flag 203v for temporarily stopping the first special symbol is set to on (see S1603 in FIG. 46). and a special figure 1 restart command (see S2902 in FIG. 101) that is set when restarting the variable display of the temporarily stopped first special symbol or the stopped display. If it is determined that a temporary stop related command has been received (S4219: Yes), temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 108, the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the contents of temporary stop related processing 2 (S4253). The temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) is different from the temporary stop related process (S4203) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for calculating the remaining confirmed time is added.

In this temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), when the elapsed time of the fluctuating display of the first special symbol or the stop display is temporarily interrupted (temporarily stopped), the temporarily stopped first special symbol is Processing is performed for the third symbol display device 81 to execute a performance mode corresponding to the variable display mode or the stop display mode. In the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253), first, it is determined whether the special map 1 temporary stop command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4951). If it is determined that the special figure 1 temporary stop command has not been received (S4951: No), the restart process (S4952) is executed and this process ends. Details of the restart process (S4952) will be described later with reference to FIG. 109. On the other hand, in the process of S4951, if it is determined that the special pattern 1 temporary stop command has been received (S4951: Yes), that is, the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is displayed in a fluctuating manner with the execution of the small winning game, or If it is determined that it is time to temporarily stop the stop display, then it is determined whether the finalizing flag 223ad is set to on (S4953). Here, if it is determined that the confirmed flag 223ad is set to on (S4953: Yes), the first special symbol is being stopped and displayed (during the symbol confirmation period), so the set symbol confirmation time The remaining time (design confirmation time of the first special symbol) is calculated (S4954), and the process moves to S4955.

In the process of S4954, the remaining time of the set symbol confirmation time is calculated by reading the value of the special symbol 1 confirmation counter 223aa, that is, the value indicating the remaining time of the symbol confirmation time of the first special symbol. Next, it is determined whether the remaining time of the symbol confirmation time calculated in the process of S4954 is less than 2 seconds (S4955). If it is determined that the remaining time is less than 2 seconds (S4955: Yes), a period A indicating that the remaining confirmed time is short is set in the remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac (S4956), and the process of S4952 is executed. Then, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4955, if it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 2 seconds (it is 2 seconds or more) (S4955: No), then the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds. It is determined whether it is (S4957). In the process of S4957, if it is determined that the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds (S4957: Yes), a normal confirmed remaining time is stored in the remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac. A period B is set (S4958), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process ends.

In the process of S4957, if it is determined that the remaining time is not less than 60 seconds (it is 60 seconds or more) (S4957: No), the remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac indicates that the remaining confirmed time is long. A period C is set (S4959), the process of S4952 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4953, if it is determined that the confirmed flag 223ad is set to OFF (S4953: No), that is, if it is determined that the current period is the variable display period of the first special symbol, The process for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) executed in the temporary stop related process (see S4220 in FIG. 67) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and the process in S4952 Move to. Note that the process for calculating the remaining fluctuation time of the first special symbol (see S4903 to S4908) is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, the restart process (S4952), which is one process in the temporary stop related process 2 (S4253) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the contents of the restart process (S4952).

In the second embodiment, in addition to the variable display of the first special symbol (during the variable display period), the variation (lottery) of the second special symbol can be executed while the first special symbol is stopped (during the symbol confirmation period). Because of the configuration, when a small winning game is executed based on the lottery result of the second special symbol, the stop display of the first special symbol is temporarily stopped (subtraction of the symbol confirmation period is temporarily suspended). It is configured as follows. Furthermore, the system is configured to restart the stop display of the first special symbol (restart the subtraction of the symbol confirmation period) at the timing when the small winning game ends. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the situation of the first special symbol when restarting the variable display or the stopped display of the first special symbol is determined, and based on the determination result, the performance mode after restart is set. It is configured to do so.

In the restart process (S4952), first, it is determined whether a special figure 1 restart command has been received (S5001). If it is determined that the special figure 1 restart command has not been received (S5001: No), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special map 1 restart command has been received (S5001: Yes), it is determined whether the confirmed flag 223ad is set to on (S5051). If it is determined that the confirmed flag 223ad is set to on (S5051: Yes), that is, if the timing at which the special symbol 1 restart command is received is while the first special symbol is being displayed in a stopped state, the remainder is confirmed. Reads the remaining confirmed time information stored in the time information storage area 223ac (S5052), and determines the additional effect type from the additional effect selection 2 table 222aa based on the read remaining confirmed time information and the additional effect counter 223i ( S5053), an additional effect command for display corresponding to the additional effect type determined in the process of S5053 is set (S5054), and information set in the remaining confirmed time information storage area 223ac is cleared (S5055). Then, the determining flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5056), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5051, if it is determined that the confirmed flag 223ad is set to OFF (S5051: No), that is, the timing at which the special symbol 1 restart command is received is during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. If there is, the same processing as S5002 to S5005 as the variation restart processing (S4902 in FIG. 68) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and the present processing ends.

Returning to FIG. 106, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S4219, if it is determined that a temporary stop related command has not been received (S4219: No), it is determined whether a symbol confirmation related command has been received (S4254). If it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has been received (S4254: Yes), the symbol confirmation related process (S4255) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol confirmation related command has not been received (S4254: No), processing corresponding to other commands is executed (S4221), and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 110, the symbol confirmation related process (S4255), which is one process in the command determination process 2 (S4162) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the contents of the symbol confirmation related process (S4255).

In the symbol confirmation related process (S4255), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 1 confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S5071). If it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S5071: Yes), a display special figure 1 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5072). Next, the value corresponding to the received command is set in the special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa (S5073), and the process moves to S5074. On the other hand, in the process of S5071, if it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S5071: No), the processes of S5072 and S5073 are skipped, and the process moves to the process of S5074.

In the process of S5074, it is determined whether the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074). If it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S5074: Yes), the display special figure 2 confirmation command corresponding to the received command is set (S5075), and the value corresponding to the received command is set as the special figure. 2 is set in the confirmed counter 223ab (S5076), the confirmed flag 223ad is set on (S5077), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5074, if it is determined that the special map 2 confirmation command has not been received (S5074: No), the process of S5075 and S5076 is skipped, the process of S5077 is executed, and this process ends. do.

Next, various counter update processing 2 (S4161) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of various counter update processing 2 (S4161).

In the various counter update processing 2 (S4161), first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is greater than 0 (S5451). When it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa is larger than 0 (S5451: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa is subtracted by 1 (S5452). On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 confirmation counter 223aa is 0 (S5451: No), the process of S5452 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5453. In the process of S5453, it is determined whether the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is greater than 0 (S5453). If it is determined that the value of the sub-special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is larger than 0 (S5453: Yes), the value of the sub-special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is subtracted by 1 (S5454), and the value of the special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa is Then, the value of the sub-special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is read out (S5455). Next, the value of the sub-special figure 2 variable time counter 223n is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 confirmed counter 223aa read in the process of S5455, and the remaining time is calculated (S5456). Next, the processing in S5407 and S5408 is executed, and the present processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S5453, if it is determined that the value of the sub special figure 2 variation time counter 223n is 0 (S5453: No), the processes of S5454 to S5456 and S5407 are skipped, and the process of S5408 is executed. , this process ends.

<Third embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 135. The second embodiment described above, like the first embodiment described above, is configured such that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) change simultaneously (so-called , simultaneous fluctuation type), by executing the special drawing 2 lottery (fluctuation) during the period when the potential state is set as the gaming state, it will be possible to perform many small winning games (RUSH games). It was composed of

Furthermore, as a condition for the probability state to be set (a condition for which the RUSH game can be executed), the first probability variation end that is established when the probability variation state is set and the jackpot is won in the lottery of special drawing 1. conditions and a second probability variation ending condition that is satisfied when the number of variations of the special symbol (number of drawings) reaches a predetermined number (50 times), and if the first probability variation ending condition is met, you win the jackpot. The period in which the special symbol (special symbol 1) indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed becomes a potential state (design confirmation period), and if the second probability variation end condition is met, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It is configured to be in a potential state during the period (fluctuating display period) and the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, the length of the symbol confirmation period is configured to differ depending on the lottery result of the special symbol, and the pattern confirmation period is set longer if you win a jackpot than if you do not win a jackpot. It was configured like this.

In addition, if a jackpot is won in the lottery for one special symbol (special symbol 1), an invalid lottery will be executed in which the jackpot will not be won in the lottery for the other symbol (special symbol 2). The system was configured such that the invalid lottery does not update the values related to the conditions for changing the gaming state. Specifically, during the period when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special drawing 1 (during the variable display period of the special symbol winning the jackpot and during the symbol confirmation period), the lottery of special symbol 2 is executed. Even if this happens, the configuration is such that the value of the variable probability counter 203aa is not updated (subtracted).

In the second embodiment configured in this way, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special drawing 1 in a state in which a variable probability state is set, a period during which a jackpot game is executed for that jackpot win (variable display Until the end of the period, symbol confirmation period), no matter how many times you execute the variation (lottery) of the special drawing 2, the value of the probability variation counter 203aa will not be updated (subtracted), so you can feel safe playing the special drawing 2. It was possible to carry out variations in

In contrast, in the third embodiment, the number of types of variable termination conditions is increased compared to the second embodiment described above, and the period during which the potential state is set is longer than in the second embodiment described above. are doing. Specifically, the variable probability ending condition is configured such that the variable probability ending condition (third variable ending condition) is satisfied when a small hit is won in special drawing 1 in a state where the variable probability state is set. When the variable probability termination condition is satisfied, the game state is configured to shift from the variable probability state to the potential state at the time when the small winning game is started.

Furthermore, the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set (the value of the probability change counter 203aa) and the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (the value of the time saving counter 203f) are made the same (for example, "4 ''), if a jackpot is not won when a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, the gaming state will shift from variable probability state to normal state. It is composed of

In other words, in the third embodiment, while the variable probability state (both special symbols and normal symbols are high probability states), a small win is won in the lottery of special symbol 1, and the normal symbol is changed to a low probability state. By making the transition, the period from the start timing of the small winning game until the low probability state of the special symbol is set can be made into a potential state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the period during which a potential state that is an advantageous gaming state for the player is continuously set, depending on the timing of winning a small hit in the lottery of special drawing 1. . Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interested in the lottery result of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide a game machine that the player will never get tired of.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the final variation at which the probability variation state ends, a variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be selected. As a result, even if the final variation of the variable probability state is reached without winning a small hit, it is possible to set a probability state for a long time, allowing the player to maintain expectations until the end of the game. can be set.

Here, with reference to FIG. 112, the types of benefits provided based on the game content of the special drawing 1 during the variable probability state in the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 112 is a schematic diagram summarizing the relationship between the game contents of the special figure 1 game and the granted benefits after the probability change state is set. As shown in FIG. 112, in this embodiment, the variable probability state is set during a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot (4 variations of the special symbol), and the number of variations during the variable probability state (after the jackpot) is set. The contents of the benefits given to the player are made to differ depending on the number of variations in the number of special drawings) and the lottery results of the special drawings.

Specifically, in the first and second special pattern 1 fluctuations (special pattern 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, if the lottery result (special pattern 1 lottery result) is a jackpot, there will be many players. In addition to the jackpot game in which you can win prize balls, there is also a period during which the special pattern 1 is stopped and displayed in a display mode that indicates that it is a jackpot (symbol confirmation period). ) is set. In addition, if the lottery result (lottery result of special figure 1) is a small hit, the small hit game will be executed based on the lottery result of special figure 1 as a period in which a potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed. It is stipulated that a period (symbol confirmation period) is set from when the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot reaches four.

In other words, if you win a small hit in the first special drawing 1 lottery after the jackpot ends, the timing when the small winning game starts (the timing when the first special symbol fluctuation stops and the small winning game is executed) ), a potential state game (RUSH game) is set during the period until the end of the fourth special symbol fluctuation after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, the longest period in which the RUSH state is set is the "very long" period. In addition, if the lottery result (special diagram 1 lottery result) is a failure in the first or second special diagram 1 variation (special diagram 1 lottery) after the probability change state is set, no benefits will be given to the player. is not given.

In the third special chart 1 variation (special chart 1 lottery) after the probability variable state is set, the probability state is set under the same conditions as the first and second times after the probability variable state is set, as described above. It consists of Here, if you win a small hit, in addition to the period during the small win game, the period until the end of the fourth special symbol change is set as a potential state, so after the above-mentioned probability change state is set. Compared to the case where a small hit is won in the first and second special pattern 1 variations (special pattern 1 lottery), the period in which the probability state is set is shorter.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as the number of special figure 1 variations (special figure 1 lottery) after the probability variable state is set during the probability variable state increases, the variation having a longer variation time when winning a jackpot The pattern is configured to be easily selected. Therefore, compared to the case where a jackpot is won in the first or second special chart 1 variation (special chart 1 lottery) after the above-mentioned probability variable state is set, it is easier to lengthen the period in which the probability state is set. be able to.

Next, in the fourth special pattern variation (special pattern lottery) after the probability variation state is set, that is, in the final variation in the probability variation state, the special pattern variation is started regardless of the result of the special pattern lottery. The period from to the end (until after the pattern confirmation period has elapsed) is set as the potential state. In addition, in the present third embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the final variation of the special pattern in the variable probability state (the fourth special pattern variation after the variable probability state is set), the configuration is such that it is easy to set a long variation time. Therefore, the length of the period during which the potential state is set is "long".

If the jackpot is not won in the final variation of the special symbol in the variable probability state, the normal state is set after the symbol confirmation period has passed, and the fifth and subsequent special symbol drawings are executed.

<About the effect display contents in the third embodiment>
In the third embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 112, the period during which the potential state, which is the gaming state advantageous to the player, is set varies depending on the transition condition (probability variable ending condition) that is satisfied. The system is configured such that, during a variable probability state, a suggestion effect (a bingo game) is executed to suggest to the player the possibility that a probability state will be set and the timing at which a probability state will be set. It consists of

Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115, the display contents of the suggestion effect (bingo game) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be explained. In addition, among the elements displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as in each embodiment described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 113(a), the display contents of the end screen (ending screen) of the jackpot game in which the variable probability state is set will be explained. FIG. 113(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display screen at the end of the jackpot. As shown in FIG. 113(a), on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the main display area Dm includes a special figure 1 display area Dm1 and a special figure 2 display area which are the same as in the second embodiment described above. Dm2, a guidance display area Dm3 are formed, and in addition, a special figure 1 reserved number display area Dm4 that shows the number of reserved balls of special figure 1, and a special figure 2 reserved number display area Dm5 that shows the number of reserved balls of special figure 2. , is formed.

FIG. 113(a) shows the end screen of the jackpot game executed based on the special drawing 1 jackpot, and the special drawing 1 display area Dm1 shows that the lottery result of the special drawing 1 is a jackpot. The stop display mode "777" of the third symbol is displayed, and "-" indicating that the special figure 2 variation is not executed is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2. Further, in the guide display area Dm3, characters "left-handed hit" are displayed to indicate that the jackpot game was played as a left-handed game.

In the third embodiment, similar to the second embodiment described above, the game content (right-handed or left-handed) displayed in the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game is the same as the game content at the time of winning the jackpot. It is configured so that In other words, the state shown in FIG. 113(a) is a jackpot won during a left-handed game.

Further, in the center of the main display area Dm, a bingo card 820 is displayed that is used in a variable probability state that is set after the end of the jackpot game. Here, the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed in the third embodiment will be explained. In the third embodiment, bingo is used as a suggestion effect to suggest to the player whether or not the probability state will be set during the period when the probability variable state is set, or whether or not he will win the jackpot. Configuring the game to run.

In this bingo game, a bingo card 820 (see Fig. 113(a)) with arbitrary numbers arranged in nine squares (3 vertically x 3 horizontally) is displayed on the jackpot end screen (ending screen). , numbers are announced based on the lottery of special drawing 1 that is executed in a state where the variable probability state is set, and the numbers are announced to the player based on the announced numbers and the arrangement of numbers written on the bingo card 820. An effect suggesting the game result (lottery result of special drawing 1) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 113(b) to 115, the display contents (performance contents) displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the bingo game will be explained. When the bingo game starts (when the special symbol 1 variation in the probability variation state starts), the display shown in FIG. 113(b) is executed. FIG. 113(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents displayed when the special symbol 1 variation (first time) is executed after the end of the jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 113(b), when the special figure 1 variation (first time) is executed, a display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is changing is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. . Then, "3" is displayed in the special drawing 1 reservation number display area Dm4, indicating that it has been subtracted (updated) from the value ("4") shown in FIG. 113(a) due to the change in special drawing 1. It shows.

In addition, in the lower left area of the main display area Dm, the number "1" is displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game based on the lottery result of this time (special drawing 1 variation (1st time)), and the lower right area , a remaining number display 822 indicating the remaining number of bingo games "last 3" is displayed. Here, for example, an example of the production in the case where the special symbol 1 variation (fourth time) in the probability variation state is a jackpot will be explained with reference to FIG. 114.

FIG. 114(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of the bingo game during the variation of the special symbol 1 variation (third time) in the case where the special symbol 1 variation (fourth time) in the probability variable state is a jackpot. , FIG. 114(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents during the variation of the special figure 1 variation (4th time). In this embodiment, as explained with reference to FIG. 112, in the final variation of the probability variable state (special figure 1 variation (fourth time)), the potential probability state is set at the timing when the variation display of special figure 1 starts. During the potential state, a potential state game (RUSH game) in which the lottery of the special symbol 2 is executed by a right-handed game is executed.

Therefore, in order to make the player immediately perform a right-handed game immediately after the final variation of the probability variation state is executed (after the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol 1 variation (3rd time) has elapsed), the probability state is changed. The performance result (bingo double row display) to inform you that the potential state is set is before the special chart 1 variation (4th time) where the potential state is set (during the special chart 1 variation (3rd time)). configured to run. With this configuration, it is possible to set the probable state with the player fully understanding that the probable state will be set.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the third embodiment, if a jackpot or small win is not won in the lottery of special drawing 1 in the final change of the probability variable state (if it is a loss), a short The system is configured so that the performance result (bingo double row display) to notify that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time (1 second) is selected and the potential state is set in the bingo game is not displayed. . This eliminates the need to inform the player that the potential state is actually set for a short period of time, and it is possible to perform a bingo game failure effect. Furthermore, when a short-term potential state is set, since the guide display area Dm3 does not display that the player is required to play a right-handed game, it is possible to suppress the annoyance of the game.

Returning to FIG. 114(a), the explanation will be continued. In Figure 114(a), the variation display of the special pattern 1 variation (3rd time) is performed, and the lottery result of the special pattern 1 variation (1st time) is "1", and the lottery result of the special pattern 2 variation (2nd time) is displayed. “8” is displayed on the left side of the main display area Dm as the past history 823, and “5” is displayed as the current lottery result 821. Then, on the bingo card 820, the squares corresponding to "1", "8", and "5" displayed in the current bingo game are changed to "cross marks", and two lines are formed and displayed. .

Further, "Double Bingo" is displayed as a status display mode 824 indicating the current situation, and a comment "Super Lucky" is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this way, by notifying the player that he succeeded in the bingo game during the fluctuation before the special drawing 1 fluctuation (4th time) that actually leads to winning the jackpot, we can improve the performance for the player. It is possible to provide a period for enjoying the satisfaction of success, and to notify in advance that it is necessary to play a right-handed game from the next swing.

In addition, in this embodiment, a comment informing that a right-handed game will be played from the next fluctuation (a comment informing that a right-handed game condition has been established (a condition for setting a potential state has been established)) Although the sub-display area Ds displays "It's almost a right-handed game," the player is informed in advance of the timing at which the probability state will be set, that is, the timing at which the player will be forced to play the right-handed game. For example, calculate the remaining period until the special pattern 1 variation (3rd time) ends (remaining period that is the sum of the remaining variation display period and symbol confirmation period of the special pattern 1 variation (3rd time)). A calculation unit may be provided and information based on the calculation result of the calculation unit (information for indicating the remaining fluctuation period of the special symbol 1 fluctuation (third time)) may be configured to be notified to the player.

In the third embodiment, when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state (when the starting condition of the special figure 2 is satisfied), The structure is such that a short variation pattern (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result. As a result, if you play a right-handed game and execute the fluctuation (lottery) of special drawing 2 in a state where the variable probability state is set, the period in which the variable probability state can be set will be changed to the period during which the variable probability state is set. Since it is extremely short compared to the case where a left-handed game is performed in a certain state and a variation (lottery) is executed on special drawing 2, a right-handed game in a certain variable state can be treated as a disadvantageous game that is disadvantageous to the player. . Therefore, during the variable probability state in which "left-handed play" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 of the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to suppress the act of intentionally playing an irregular game that differs from the displayed content.

As described above, in this embodiment, when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state (when the starting condition of special map 2 is satisfied) ) is configured so that a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set regardless of the lottery result, but this is not limited to special drawing 2 fluctuation during a probability fluctuation state. The time may be configured to be an extremely longer variation time (for example, 120 seconds) than the special figure 1 variation time.

With this configuration, for example, if a right-handed game is performed in a state where a variable probability state is set, ignoring the progress of the suggestion effect (bingo game) executed on the third symbol display device 81. Because the special pattern 2 variation is executed for a long time (for example, 120 seconds), even if a probability state is set after that (for example, the variation of the special pattern 1 variation (4th time) that won a jackpot) Even if the display has started), since the special figure 2 variation is being executed, a new potential state game (a game that executes the special figure 2 variation with the potential state set) It can be made difficult to execute.

In this embodiment, since the potential state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is set based on the fluctuation period of the special symbol (special symbol 1) and the symbol confirmation period, the potential state is The longer the period from when is set (the start of a predetermined special figure 1 variation) to the end of the running special figure 2 variation, the longer the period during which the special figure 2 variation in the potential state can be executed (the potential (state game period) becomes shorter. In addition, in order to reliably prevent the special figure 2 variation from being executed in a state where the probability variation state is set, the time when a sufficient time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed after the probability variation state is set. If a right-handed game is started from , the potential state game period will be similarly shortened, so the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to the player in order to grasp the timing to execute the right-handed game. It is possible to make the user pay close attention to the content displayed on the screen.

Then, when a right-handed game is performed during the potential state and the special symbol 2 variation is executed, the performance display during the RUSH game (potential state game) shown in FIG. 114(b) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. displayed on the display screen. FIG. 114(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 when the fourth special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot (after setting the probability variation state) is a jackpot. In this embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment described above, when the potential state is set, a potential state game (RUSH game) is performed in which the variation (lottery) of the special figure 2 is executed by the right-handed game. In other words, during the potential state, a right-handed game becomes an advantageous game, and a left-handed game becomes a disadvantageous game.

In the display screen shown in FIG. 114(b), in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, "right hit" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3, and special figure 1 variation (4) is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1. The display mode indicating that the special figure 2 variation is in progress is displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2, and the display mode indicating that the special figure 2 variation is in progress is displayed in the special figure 1 reservation number display area Dm4. "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 1 is displayed in the special figure 2 reserved ball number display area Dm5, and "0" indicating that there is no reserved number of special figure 2.

During the period when this RUSH game is being executed, a character 811 imitating a rabbit runs from left to right and opens a treasure chest 812 discovered on the way (same performance as in the first embodiment). is displayed in the main display area Dm, and in the sub-display area Ds, characters ``RUSH in progress'' indicating that a potential state game (RUSH game) is in progress are displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the current game is in a potential state game (RUSH game).

In FIGS. 113 and 114 described above, when the second probability variation ending condition that is established based on the number of variations of the special symbol is satisfied as the probability variation ending condition for ending the probability variation state, that is, the final variation (4) of the probability variation state is satisfied. An example of the display screen when the potential state is set in the special figure change) has been explained. In the third embodiment, the first variable-probability ending condition (condition for transferring the high-probability state of the normal symbol to the low-probability state) for ending the variable-probability state (transferring the variable probability state to the potential state) is Probable variable ending condition (probable variable ending condition that is established based on a jackpot win), 2nd variable variable ending condition (probable variable ending condition that is established based on the number of changes in the special symbol), 3rd variable variable ending condition (probable variable ending condition that is established based on a small hit win) The game is configured such that when any of the ending conditions is satisfied, the gaming state is changed from the probable state to the probable state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115(a), a display displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the first variable probability ending condition is satisfied before the second variable ending condition described above is satisfied. Explain the content. FIG. 115(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display content executed during the third special symbol fluctuation after the jackpot (after setting the probability variable state) when the third special symbol fluctuation is a jackpot. It is a diagram.

In the third embodiment, when the first variable ending condition (winning the special symbol jackpot) is met, the special symbol to indicate that the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot is stopped and displayed, and then It is configured such that the potential state is set during a period (symbol confirmation period) until the stop display ends. Therefore, during the variable display period of the special figure 1 (during the special figure fluctuation), the variable probability state is continuously set, so in the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 115(a), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 is A display mode indicating that FIG. 1 is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and "left-handed hitting" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. Then, "4" is displayed in the lottery result 821, and the bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode indicating that one line has been established.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the third embodiment, if the above-mentioned first probability change end condition is satisfied and the potential state is set during the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, the target It is configured so that different numbers can be displayed multiple times as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the variable display period of the special symbol, and information indicating the final result of the current bingo game is informed to the player in stages. It is configured to do so.

In other words, the example shown in FIG. 115(a) shows a state in which one line is established while special drawing 1 is being displayed in a variable manner. For example, if the type of jackpot won this time is a long symbol If it is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot C) for which a period (for example, 300 seconds) is set, a different number will be displayed as the lottery result 821 of the bingo game during the remaining period until the variable display of special drawing 1 ends. (for example, "5") is newly displayed, and an effect is executed in which the final result of the bingo game is "two lines established."

In this way, the result of the bingo game (the number of established lines) is configured to vary multiple times during the variable display of the special symbols. This allows the player to grasp the details of the benefits (RUSH game, jackpot game) that will be given at the end of the current special symbol fluctuation as the special symbol fluctuation display period progresses. The user can continuously watch the performance content displayed on the display screen of the 3-symbol display device 81.

In addition, if the type of jackpot won this time is a jackpot type (for example, jackpot A) in which a short symbol confirmation period (for example, 5 seconds) is set, the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) will not change. The configuration may be such that a number (for example, "3") is displayed and the result of the bingo game is "one line established."

By configuring in this way, the number of lottery results 821 displayed by the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified, while the result of the bingo game (number of established lines) and the special symbol It is possible to associate the content of the benefit (the amount of the benefit) that will be given after the end of the variable display of. Therefore, it is possible to make the players pay close attention to the contents and results of the bingo game, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823) is unified regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol, and the result of the bingo game is Although we have shown effects that make players excited as to whether the number of established lines will increase or not, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include, for example, the content (amount of benefits) of the benefits that will be given after the fluctuating display of special symbols. , and the number of lottery results 821 displayed during the bingo game (the number of numbers displayed in the past history 823). Thereby, the more numbers displayed as the lottery result 821 during the bingo game, the more advantageous benefits can be given to the player, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 115(b), the display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the third variable probability ending condition is satisfied will be explained. FIG. 115(b) schematically shows an example of the display contents executed during the second special pattern fluctuation after the jackpot (after setting the probability variable state) when the second special pattern fluctuation is a small win. It is a schematic diagram.

The third embodiment is configured such that the timing at which the potential state is set differs depending on the type of probability variable ending condition that has been satisfied. Specifically, if the first probability ending condition is met, the period from the time when the stop display of the corresponding special symbol starts until the stop display ends (until the jackpot game starts) (the target symbol If the symbol confirmation period) is set as a potential state and the second probability variation end condition is met, the period from the time when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol starts until the stop display of the corresponding special symbol ends. The period (variable display period and pattern confirmation period of the target symbol) is set as a potential state. That is, even if either of the above-mentioned first probability variation ending condition and second probability variation ending condition is satisfied, the potential state is set within the period of special symbol 1 variation.

On the other hand, if the third variable probability ending condition is met, if a small hit is won in any of the multiple (4) special symbol 1 variations that can be executed within the period in which the variable probability state is set. In this case, a probability state is set for a period from the time when the special symbol stop display indicating that the lottery result is a small win starts until the special symbol stop display, which is the final change of the probability change state, ends. . In other words, if a small hit is won in the special drawing (first special drawing) that is executed immediately after the variable probability state is set, the special symbol indicating the result of the first special drawing (small win) will stop. The period from when it is displayed until the stop display of the special symbol indicating the result of the 4th special symbol lottery ends after passing through the 2nd to 4th special symbol lottery period (fluctuating display period and symbol confirmation period) (multiple times) Special figure fluctuation period), the probability state will be set.

As shown in FIG. 115(b), if the third variable ending condition is met, "ALL" is displayed in the lottery result 821, which applies to all numbers, indicating that 8 lines (all lines) have been met. The bingo card 820 is displayed in a display mode showing. Then, "341" is displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 to indicate that the small hit has been won, and "341" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3 to indicate that the potential state game (RUSH game) has started. "Uchi" is displayed.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the third embodiment, whether or not the first variable probability ending condition or the second variable probability ending condition is satisfied is determined based on the special pattern variation (special drawing lottery) in which each variable probability ending condition is satisfied. ) is configured to determine whether or not it holds true (pre-determination) before it is executed, whereas the third variable probability ending condition is configured so that no prior determination is performed.

By configuring in this way, the progress of the suggestion effect (bingo game) that is displayed across multiple changes of special symbols executed during the period in which the probability variation state is set can be changed to the end of the first probability variation state. Since it can be set in accordance with whether the condition or the second variable ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to perform a suggestive performance that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and when the third ending condition is satisfied. Since the suggestive effect shown in FIG. 115(b) is executed, a surprising effect can be provided.

Note that the third embodiment is configured to determine in advance whether or not the first variable-probability termination condition and the second variable-probability termination condition are satisfied, but does not determine in advance whether or not the third variable-probability termination condition is satisfied. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and, for example, it may be configured such that only the second probability variation ending condition that is satisfied based on the number of variations of the special symbol is determined in advance.

In addition, as the above-mentioned preliminary determination, at the end of the jackpot (during the ending period of the jackpot game), a preliminary determination is performed on the special drawing 1 that is held and stored, and a jackpot is won among the special drawings 1 that are held and stored. It is configured to determine whether or not information corresponding to the lottery result is included, and to vary the combination of numbers displayed on the bingo card 820 based on the determination result.

By configuring it in this way, the number of special symbol fluctuations executed before winning the jackpot and the amount of benefits given to the player by winning the jackpot can be adjusted to create a suggestive effect (bingo) that does not feel strange. games) can be run. In addition, by allowing the player to understand the numbers displayed on the bingo card 820, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting future game results in advance.

<About the electrical configuration in the third embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 116 to 124. In the third embodiment, the contents of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed from the second embodiment described above, and the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. They differ in that they are Other points are the same as those in the second embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the first winning random number table 202ba is replaced with the first winning random number table 202a, the small winning random number table 202bb is replaced with the small winning random number table 202b, and the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is replaced with the small winning random number table 202bb. The above-mentioned feature is that the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc is replaced by the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd instead of the small hit type selection 2 table 202ab, and the variable pattern selection 3 table 202be is provided instead of the variable pattern selection 2 table 202ac. This is different from the second embodiment.

The first random number 3 table 202ba is different from the first random number table 202a of the second embodiment described above (same as the first embodiment, see FIG. 15(a)) to win a jackpot in a low probability state of special symbols. The difference is that the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot and the range of the value of the first random number counter C1 that is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol are changed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 117(a), the contents defined in the first random number 3 table 202ba will be explained. FIG. 117(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number 3 table 202ba. As shown in FIG. 117(a), when the game state is a special symbol low probability state (normal state, time saving state), the first special symbol obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol It is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 is one of "0 to 9", and if it is one of "0 to 9", it is determined that it is a jackpot.

In addition, when the gaming state is a high probability state (variable probability state, potential state) of a special symbol, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is It is determined whether it is within the range of "0 to 99", and if it is within the range of "0 to 99", it is determined that it is a jackpot. In other words, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, out of a total of 480 random number counters, 10 values are defined as values for determining a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol. The jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/48. On the other hand, the jackpot probability when the special symbol is in a high probability state is 1/4.8.

The small hit random number 3 table 202bb is different from the small hit random number table 202b of the second embodiment described above (same as the first embodiment, see FIG. 15(b)) for the first special symbol (special symbol 1). The difference is that the lottery has also been changed so that small wins can be won. Here, with reference to FIG. 117(b), the contents specified in the small winning random number 3 table 202bb will be explained. FIG. 117(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning random number 3 table 202bb. As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is one of "10 to 14", If the number is between "10 and 14", it is determined that it is a small hit.

In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the same contents as the above-mentioned small hit random number table 202b (see FIG. 15(b)) are prescribed, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. That is, the third embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in that it is configured so that a small win can be won even in the first special symbol lottery. In the third embodiment, when a small win is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a state where the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) is set, the normal It is configured to execute a process of shifting a symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state, that is, a process of shifting the gaming state from a variable probability state to a probability state.

With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunity to shift the gaming state to the probable state during the variable probability state, so that the players who are playing games in the variable probability state are motivated to play the game. can be made to do so.

As shown in FIG. 117(b), in the third embodiment, in the high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol (1/48 (see FIG. 117(a))) is higher than the probability of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol. , the probability of winning the small hit of the first special symbol (1/32 (see Figure 117 (b))) is higher.As a result, the probability of winning the small hit of the special symbol 1 during the probability change state is higher. Since the probability state will be set based on a small win with a higher probability than when the probability state is set based on winning, players who are playing games in a variable probability state On the other hand, there is a game in which both a potential state game (RUSH game) and a jackpot game are executed, but the game aims to win a jackpot, which is difficult to win, and a game in which only a potential state game (RUSH game) is executed, and it is better than winning a jackpot. It is possible to have the player play both a game aiming at winning a small win that is easy to win.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the probability of winning the small hit of the special symbol 1 is configured to be higher than the probability of winning the jackpot of the special symbol 1 in the high probability state of the special symbol, but this is not limited to this. It may be configured so that it is lower than the probability of winning the jackpot of special drawing 1 in a high probability state, for example, the probability of winning a small winning of special drawing 1 may be set to a low probability such as 1/480. good. By configuring in this way, in a state where a variable probability state is set, a potential state game (RUSH game) in which a jackpot game is not executed if a small win is won before a jackpot is won. Since the game can be executed, it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player.

The jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc differs from the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above in that the type of jackpot type has been changed, and various counters (time saving counter 203f, probability change counter 203aa, confirmed time counters 203ad, 203ae) and the value of the first winning type counter C2 corresponding to each jackpot type is different. Here, the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 118.

FIG. 118(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(a), the jackpot type selection 3 table 202bc contains jackpot operation details for each jackpot type specified in the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 16(a)) of the first embodiment described above. The contents of the jackpot operation are defined in which only the number of rounds executed is different for each jackpot type, and for each jackpot type, a time saving counter 203f, a probability change counter 203aa, a special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad, a special figure 2 confirmation time The value of counter 203ae is defined.

Specifically, jackpot A whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is when the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99) is "0 to 49". The content of the jackpot operation is that a round game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for 2 rounds (2R), and the value of "4" is set in the time saving counter 203f. It is specified that a value of "4" is set in the probability change counter 203aa, and a value indicating "5 seconds" is set in the special figure 1 fixed time counter 203ad.

For jackpot B whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99) is defined in the range of "50 to 96". The contents of the jackpot operation in which a round game that opens the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is executed for 2 rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variable counter 203aa. 4'' is specified so that a value indicating ``100 seconds'' is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

The jackpot C whose symbol type is set corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is defined by the value of the obtained first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99) being in the range of "97 to 99". The contents of the jackpot operation in which a round game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for 2 rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variable counter 203aa. The value of ``4'' indicates that the value indicating ``300 seconds'' is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

In addition, the jackpot D whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is defined when the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "0 to 64". The contents of the jackpot operation in which a round game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for 2 rounds (2R), and the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, the value of "4" in the probability variable counter 203aa. It is specified that a value of "4" is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad, and a value indicating "0.5 seconds" is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

The jackpot E whose symbol type is set corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is defined by the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 (0 to 99) being in the range of "65 to 99". The contents of the jackpot operation in which a round game that opens the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is executed for 2 rounds (2R), the value of "4" in the time saving counter 203f, and the value of "4" in the probability variable counter 203aa. The value of ``4'' indicates that the value indicating ``1 second'' is set in the special figure 1 confirmation time counter 203ad.

As explained above, in the third embodiment, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is set higher than in the second embodiment described above, making it easier to win a jackpot, and the bonus ( The system is configured so that the number of prize balls (prize balls) is reduced. With this configuration, the amount of benefits given to the player (prize ball Since the number of players can be greatly varied, it is possible to provide players with novel gameplay.

The small winning type selection 3 table 202bd contains the contents of the small winning type that is set when the special drawing 1 is won, in contrast to the small winning type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) of the first embodiment described above. They are different in that they are additionally stipulated. Here, the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd will be explained with reference to FIG. 118(b).

FIG. 118(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small winning type selection 3 table 202bd in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 118(b), the small hit type selection 3 table 202bd is different from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) of the first embodiment described above when the symbol type ``special figure 1 It is different from the small winning type selection table 202e (see FIG. 16(b)) in that small winning type D is added as the small winning type corresponding to ``. 16(b)). Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

The small winning type selection 3 table 202bd selects the first attacker (first variable winning prize) regardless of the value of the acquired small winning type counter C5 when winning a small winning with the first special symbol (special symbol 1). A small winning game is defined in which an opening operation of opening the device 65) for 0.02 seconds is performed once. That is, when a small win is won in the special drawing 1 lottery, a small win game in which it is difficult for the player to obtain a prize ball in the small win game is executed.

In other words, in the third embodiment, the small winning of the special drawing 1 is not used for the purpose of giving benefits (prize balls) to the player through the small winning game, but is used as an opportunity to set the potential state as the gaming state. It is an object. As a result, if you win the small hit of special figure 1 in a state where the variable probability state is set, the right-handed game will be executed immediately after the performance that notifies you of this (see Fig. 115(b)) is executed. Even if it is, the small winning game has already ended (because the period required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the right area is longer than the small winning game period), so the potential state will smoothly change. A game (RUSH game) can be executed.

In addition, when a small winning of the special drawing 1 is won in the normal state, the small winning game can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. In addition, in this embodiment, since the opening time of the first variable prize winning device 65 due to the small winning game is set as short as 0.02 seconds, if the small winning of special drawing 1 is won in the normal state, the winning Even if the game method is changed from a left-handed game to a right-handed game at the moment when the special symbol indicating a small winning win is stopped and displayed, the ball is moved to the first variable winning device 65 during the small winning game. Therefore, if you win a small hit on special drawing 1 in the normal state, there will be an effect or guidance that emphasizes that you have won a small hit on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The display area Dm3 is configured so that the display of "right-handed game" that guides the right-handed game is not executed.

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from performing troublesome game operations. In addition, a notification means may be provided to notify that the small winning of special drawing 1 has been won in the normal state, and the right hit display may also be provided when a small winning game is in progress based on the winning of the special drawing 1 small winning in the normal state. It may be configured to execute.

The variable pattern selection 3 table 202be is a variable pattern selection table 202be1 for the variable pattern selection table 202f of the first embodiment described above, in place of the time saving/probable variable table 202f2 that is referred to when the variable variable state is set. The difference is that a potential 3 table 202be2 is provided instead of the potential probability table 202f3 that is referred to when the potential state is set.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be will be explained with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern selection 3 table 202be. As shown in FIG. 119(a), in the third embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the same normal table 202f1 as in the first embodiment described above is referred to, and the variable probability state is If set, the 3 table for probability variation 202be1 is referred to, and if the probability state is set, the 3 table for probability variation 202be2 is specified to be referenced.

In addition, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118(a), the value of the time saving counter 203f and the value of the probability variation counter 203aa are configured to be the same after the end of the jackpot, so the probability variation counter Since a gaming state (that is, a time-saving state) in which the value of 203aa becomes 0 and the value of the time-saving counter 203f is larger than 0 is never set, the fluctuation that is referenced when the time-saving state is set. It does not have a pattern selection table.

Next, the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 119(b). FIG. 119(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation 3 table 202be1. As described above with reference to FIG. 118(a), the third embodiment is configured such that when a jackpot is won, the probability variation state is always set by four variations of the special symbol. Then, in the state where the probability variation state is set, the variation pattern (variation pattern variable time) is selected.

With this configuration, the potential state can be set as the gaming state depending on the timing (number of special pattern fluctuations) when the condition (big hit winning or small winning of special drawing 1) is established. It becomes possible to vary the period during which the is set (special figure fluctuation time). Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the lottery result of the special symbol but also to the number of changes in the special symbol, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Specifically, if the symbol type of the special symbol is special symbol 1 and the lottery result is a "jackpot", if the number of special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 2 times", then , the "probable variable A table 202bea (probable variable A)" is referred to, in the case of "3 times", the "probable variable B table 202beb (probable variable B)" is referred to, and in the case of "4 times", the "probable variable C table 202bec (probability variation C)" is specified to be referred to. In addition, if the lottery result is "small hit or miss", and if the number of special symbol changes after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 3 times", the "probable variable A table 202bea (probable variable A)" is referred to. In the case of "four times", the "probability variation C table 202bec (probability variation C)" is specified to be referred to.

Furthermore, if the symbol type of the special symbol is special symbol 2, the "probable variable D table 202bed (probable variable D)" will be referenced regardless of the lottery result or the number of changes in the special symbol after the end of the jackpot. It is stipulated in

Next, the contents stipulated in the various probability variation tables (probability variation A table 202bea to probability variation D table 202bed) referred to in the probability variation 3 table 202be1 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 119(c) to 120. . FIG. 119(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the probability variable A table 202bea, and FIG. 120(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the probability variable B table 202beb. FIG. 120(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the variable probability C table 202bec, and FIG. 120(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents specified in the variable probability D table 202bed. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents.

As shown in FIG. 119(c), in the probability variation A table 202bea, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as a variation pattern determined when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes a jackpot in the lottery. Jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "~99", jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "100~197", and jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds) is associated with the value of "198". ) are associated. In addition, if you win a small hit or a loss in the special drawing 1 lottery, the small win fluctuation 1 (1 second) or the loss fluctuation 1 (1 second) will be associated regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is being

As shown in FIG. 120(a), in the probability variation B table 202beb, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as a variation pattern determined when the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) results in a jackpot. Jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated with the range of "100 to 149", jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "150 to 198", and jackpot variation 3 (2 seconds) is associated with the range of "150 to 198". 300 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 120(b), in the probability variation C table 202bec, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0" as a variation pattern determined when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) becomes a jackpot in the lottery. ” is associated with jackpot variation 1 (1 second), the value of “1” is associated with jackpot variation 2 (2 seconds), and the range of “2 to 198” is jackpot variation 3 (300 seconds). are associated. In addition, if you win a small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery, small win variation 2 (240 seconds) is associated with it regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, and if you win a loss, the variation type counter Outlier variation 1 (1 second) is associated regardless of the value of CS1.

As shown in FIG. 120(c), in the probability variation D table 202bed, the variation pattern determined when the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) results in a jackpot is determined regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. Jackpot variation 1 (1 second) is associated, and if a small win is won, small win variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of variation type counter CS1, and in the case of a loss, small win variation 4 (0.5 seconds) is associated. , is associated with outlier variation 4 (0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the contents defined in the third potential confirmation table 202be2 will be explained. FIG. 121 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the third table for potential confirmation 202be2. As shown in FIG. 121, in the third embodiment, when the lottery of special drawing 1 is executed in a state where the probability state is set, a fluctuation pattern in which a long fluctuation time is set is selected. It is configured so that

Here, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in a state where the variable probability state is set, the probability state is set, so the probability state is set. In order for the variable pattern to be selected with reference to the 3 table 202be2, it is necessary to win a small hit in the lottery of the special drawing 1 during the variable probability state.

As explained above, in the third embodiment, a variation pattern (variation time) is selected by referring to a different table depending on the number of special symbol variations in a state where a probability variation state is set. Therefore, the player can be made to pay attention to both the lottery result of the special symbol and the number of special symbol fluctuations (the number of fluctuations after the probability change state is set) resulting in the lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 122, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 122 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 122, the RAM 203 of the third embodiment has a special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba and a special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb added to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. They differ in some respects. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is a flag to indicate that a small hit has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and by being set to on, the special figure 1 lottery This indicates that you have won a small prize. This special figure 1 small winning flag 203ba is set to be ON for a period from winning the small winning in the special drawing 1 lottery until the small winning game is executed.

The special figure 1 small winning medium flag 203bb is a flag to indicate that a small winning game will be executed based on the small winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and when set to on, , indicates that a small winning game based on the small winning of special drawing 1 is being executed. In the third embodiment, when a small winning game based on the small winning of special symbol 1 is started in a state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is changed to the low probability state. The configuration is configured to execute the process of transitioning to .

This special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba is set to on in the special figure 1 off stop processing (see S871 in Fig. 128) (S3201 in Fig. 128). :Yes), is set to on (S3207 in FIG. 128), and in the small hit control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129), when it is determined that it is the timing to start the small win (see S2503 in FIG. 129), refer to (S2551 in FIG. 129).

Next, in the process of S2551 in FIG. 129, if it is determined that it is set to ON (S2551 in FIG. 129: Yes), that is, the current small winning game has won a small winning in the special drawing 1 lottery. When it is determined that it is a small win executed based on this, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0. Then, when it is determined in the small win control process 3 (see S2255 in FIG. 129) that it is the end timing of the small win (S2511 in FIG. 129: Yes), it is set to OFF.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 123(a). FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM 222 of No. 113. As shown in FIG. 123(a), the ROM 222 of the third embodiment has a variable performance selection table 222ba instead of the additional performance selection table 222c, with respect to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment (first embodiment) described above. The difference is that The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the probability variation effect selection table 222ba will be explained with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probability variation effect selection table 222ba. This variable probability performance selection table 222ba is a data table for selecting the final mode of the suggestion performance (bingo game) explained with reference to FIGS. The final form is defined based on the number of fluctuations (the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot) and the type of jackpot that can be won.

Specifically, if the number of jackpot winning variations is "2", that is, if you win the jackpot again with the second special symbol variation after the jackpot ends, the jackpot type to be won is "jackpot A", "jackpot B". ”, a performance mode is set in which one row (line) is established in bingo, and a performance mode in which three rows (lines) are established in bingo is set in case of “Jackpot C”.

If the number of jackpot winning variations is "3", that is, if you win the jackpot on the third special symbol variation after the jackpot ends, if the winning jackpot type is "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", then , a performance mode in which two rows (lines) are established in bingo is set, and if it is a "jackpot C", a performance mode in which three rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

Finally, if the number of jackpot winning variations is "4", that is, if you win a jackpot on the fourth special symbol variation after the end of the jackpot (the final variation in which a probability change state is set), the jackpot type to be won. If it is "Jackpot A", a performance mode is set in which 2 rows (lines) are established in Bingo, and if it is "Jackpot B", a performance mode is set in which 3 rows (lines) are established in Bingo, and "Jackpot C" is set. If so, it is stipulated that a production mode in which all rows (lines) are established in bingo is set.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the third embodiment, if you win the jackpot in the first special symbol change after the jackpot ends, the display screen at the end of the jackpot (ordinarily, the bingo card 820 (see FIG. 113)) is configured so that a special display screen is displayed to inform that a probability state will be set after the end of the jackpot.

In this special display screen, an image congratulating the player is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "Right hit" for guiding the right hit game is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3. As a result, at the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to perform a game (right-handed game) that is suitable for the gaming state (potential state) after the jackpot game ends, so the period in which the potential state is set can be played to the full. By utilizing this, it is possible to execute a lottery game using the second special symbol (special symbol 2).

In the third embodiment, the display screen at the end of the jackpot is configured to display a special display screen when winning the jackpot in the first special symbol change after the jackpot ends. The timing for displaying the special display screen may be any timing during the jackpot game, the timing when the jackpot game is started, or the timing when a predetermined round game in the jackpot game is executed. In this case, when a jackpot is won in the normal state, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b corresponds to the special symbol change to be executed next before the round game of the jackpot game starts. A preliminary determination means is provided to determine in advance whether the winning information (winning information corresponding to the first special symbol change after the end of the jackpot) that indicates winning a jackpot is included, and the preliminary determination means performs preliminary determination. As a result, if information indicating that the jackpot will be won is included, "Right-handed game" is displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 in order to make the jackpot game be performed as a right-handed game, and the system also performs the right-handed game. The main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform the performance mode for winning the jackpot, and if the information indicating that the jackpot is won is not included, the guidance display area Dm3 displays "Left It would be better to configure it so that it displays "Uchi".

With this configuration, when a jackpot is won in the normal state (a gaming state in which a left-handed game is played), the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 that guides the playing method during the jackpot game allows the player to win the jackpot game. It is possible to predict the content of the game after the game ends. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the same configuration of the game board 13 as in the first embodiment is used, when a jackpot game that opens the second variable winning device 650 is executed, a left-handed game is performed. The configuration is such that the rate at which balls win in the second variable winning device 650 does not change between when the player plays the right-handed game and when playing the right-handed game. Therefore, even if a configuration is used that changes the playing method (right-handed, left-handed) during a jackpot game based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b, the player may be disadvantaged during the jackpot game. There is no situation that can be provided.

In this embodiment, the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) that is executed when it is determined that the ending command has been received in the jackpot related process 3 (see S4552 in FIG. 132) (S4605 in FIG. 132: Yes) During the jackpot game, it is determined whether there is winning information for winning a jackpot in the winning information (winning information of special drawing 1) stored in the winning information storage area 223b (see S5605 in FIG. 133). Winning information that has newly occurred is also subject to discrimination, and the configuration is configured so that more winning information can be determined. Timing other than this embodiment may be set as the timing for determining whether there is winning information for winning a jackpot, such as the timing when a jackpot game starts, or a specific number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds). The timing at which the determination is made may be the timing at which the round game is reached or the timing at which a specific round game (the first round game) ends.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 123(b). 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a RAM 223 of No. 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 123(b), the RAM 223 of the third embodiment is provided with a residual probability variation number area 223ba, a look-ahead hit flag 223bb, and a residual variation number counter 223bc compared to the ROM 222 of the second embodiment described above. They differ in some respects. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The remaining probability variation number area 223ba is a storage area for storing the number of variations for which new winning information can be set as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. This residual probability variation number area 223ba is set with a value obtained by subtracting the number of winning information already stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the process at the end of jackpot (see S4651 in FIG. 133) (S5604 in FIG. 133). . Then, in the winning information related process (see S4271 in FIG. 131), the set value is referenced (see S5504 in FIG. 131), and if the set value is greater than 0, that is, during the probability change state, When the winning information corresponding to the executable special symbol variation is newly receivable (S5504 in FIG. 131; Yes), a pre-reading process is performed as the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state. 131 (S5505 in FIG. 131), and then subtracts 1 from the set value (S5507 in FIG. 131).

In this way, the probability variation state is set by using the remaining probability variation number area 223ba to determine whether or not it is possible to set new winning information as a special symbol variation that can be executed during the probability variation state. It becomes possible to determine whether the winning information newly received in the state corresponds to the special symbol variation executed during the probability change state. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced because the probability variation performance executed during the probability variation state can be set based only on the winning information corresponding to the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state.

The pre-read winning flag 223bb is a flag to indicate that there is winning information that has won a special symbol jackpot, and when set to on, the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is displayed. This indicates that the winning information corresponding to the jackpot is included.

This look-ahead winning flag 223bb determines in the jackpot end process (see S4651 in FIG. 133) that there is winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won in the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223b. If so (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), it is set to on (S5606 in FIG. 133). In addition, in the winning information related process (see S4271 in FIG. 131), it is determined that the winning information received this time corresponds to the special symbol variation executed during the probability variation state (S5504 in FIG. 131: Yes), and It is also set to ON when it is determined that there is winning information indicating winning a jackpot in the winning information (S5505 in FIG. 131: Yes) (see S5506 in FIG. 131).

Then, it is referred to in the probability change variation display setting process (see S5151 in FIG. 135), and when the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is not set to on (S5702: No in FIG. 135), and when it is set to on ( Processing is executed so that different presentation modes can be set in S5702: Yes in FIG. 135.

The remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is for counting the number of residual symbol fluctuations until winning the jackpot, and is stored in the winning information storage area 223b in the jackpot completion process (see S4651 in FIG. 133). If the winning information includes winning information for winning a jackpot (S5605 in FIG. 133: Yes), a value corresponding to the number of times the special symbol changes until the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning a jackpot changes. is set (see S5607 in FIG. 133). Then, when it is determined in the variable display setting process 3 (see S4173 in FIG. 134) that the variable display in the variable probability state is to be set (see S5103 in FIG. 134), the variable display setting process for variable probability (S5151 in FIG. 135) is executed. (see), when it is determined that the special symbol for which the current variation display is set is the previous variation of the special symbol corresponding to the winning information for winning the jackpot (the next time will be the jackpot variation) (S5703 in Figure 135: Yes ), the performance mode using the probability-variable performance selection table 222ba is set.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 125 to 129. The control process of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment is the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above, in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98). 1 special symbol jackpot determination processing 3 (see S376 in FIG. 125), 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (see S277 in FIG. 127) in place of the 1st special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see FIG. 99), small hit control The difference is that a small hit control process 3 (see FIG. 129) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 55). Otherwise, the same processing is performed. In addition, in the second embodiment described above, since the same processing as in the first embodiment is executed, detailed explanations are omitted, and the parts will be explained with reference to the figures used in the explanation of the first embodiment. In this embodiment, parts where the same processing as in the second embodiment described above is executed are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 125, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376). Since the third embodiment is configured to win a small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is similar to the first special symbol jackpot in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the content of the process to be executed when it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is not a jackpot is different from symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). are doing. Other than that, they are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the first special symbol jackpot determination process 3 (S376) is executed, the same process as the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see FIG. 98) described above is executed, and in the process of S406, the current fluctuation is a jackpot. If it is determined that this is not the case (S406: No), the special figure 1 off variation process (S471) is executed, and this process ends. This special drawing 1 winning variation process (S471) is executed when it is determined that the lottery result of special drawing 1 is other than a jackpot. It executes processing corresponding to the results.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, special symbol 1 off fluctuation processing (S471 ) will be explained. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 off variation process (S471). This special figure 1 loss variation process (S471) is to execute a process for displaying a small winning symbol and a losing symbol on the first symbol display device 37, and targets the second special symbol (special symbol 2). The difference is that the target special symbol is changed from special symbol 2 to special symbol 1 with respect to the processing content of the executed special symbol 2 deviation variation process (S1011 in FIG. 41).

In the special figure 1 off variation process (S471), first, it is determined whether the execution data acquired from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a small hit (S3101). If it is determined that the execution data is a small win (S3101: Yes), the special symbol 1 small win flag 203ba is set to ON (S3102), and the lottery result of the first special symbol is set to a small win (S3103). ). Next, the small winning symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set (S3104), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3101, if it is determined that the execution data is not a small hit (a miss) (S3101: No), a miss symbol of the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is set. (S3105), this process ends immediately.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the first special symbol variation stop process 3 (S277) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 3 (S277). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 3 (S277) is different from the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (S257 in FIG. 99) in the second embodiment described above, when the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a jackpot. That is, in the process of S801, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is off (S801: No), the difference is that the special figure 1 off stop process (S871) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 128, the process is executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The special symbol 1 off-stopping process (S871), which is one process in the first special symbol variation stopping process 3 (S277), will be explained. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 off-setting stop processing (S871). In the special figure 1 losing stop process (S871), when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is a small win, a process for starting a small win game is executed.

In the special figure 1 missing stop process (see S871 in FIG. 128), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 small winning flag 203ba is set to on (S3201). If it is determined that the special figure 1 small winning flag 203ba is set to on (S3201: Yes), in order to forcibly stop and display the special figure 2 variation that is in progress with the lottery result indicating a loss, The special figure 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s is set on (S3202).

Then, a special figure 2 variation stop command indicating that the special figure 2 variation stop flag 203s is turned on is set (S3203), and the second special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped and displayed as a removed symbol (S3204). Next, set a small hit scenario based on the selected small win type (S3205), set the special figure 1 small hit flag 203ba to off (S3206), and turn on the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb. settings (S3207), and ends this process.

On the other hand, in the process of S3201, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 small hit flag 203ba is not set to on (that is, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss), the book will be booked as is (S3201: No). Finish the process.

By configuring in this way, when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), it is possible to forcibly stop the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 which is in progress, so that the small prize game can be stopped. It is possible to easily execute a new special figure 2 variation during the potential state set at the start timing. In addition, in the third embodiment, a process is used in which, when a small winning of special drawing 1 is won, the running special drawing 2 variation is forcibly stopped in a display mode that shows that the lottery result is a loss. Without being limited to this, for example, the measurement of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation that is being executed is configured to be interrupted so that the variation time of the special figure 2 variation that is being executed does not progress during the period when the small winning game is being executed. You may do so.

Next, referring to FIG. 129, the process is executed by MPU 201 of main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The small hit control process 3 (S2255) will be explained. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit control processing 3 (S2255). The small hit control process 3 (S2255) is different from the small hit control process (S2205) in the first embodiment described above in that the processes of S2551 and S2552 are added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the small win control process 3 (S2255), in the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the small win (S2503: Yes), that is, the small win scenario updated by the process of S2502 starts the small win. If the content indicates , an opening command is set (S2504), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set on (S2551). When it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is set to ON (S2551: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is set to 0 (S2552) and this process is ended.

The third embodiment is configured so that a small hit can be won with both the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2). The configuration is such that the value of the time saving counter 203f is set (cleared) to 0 only when the winning number is won.

In other words, as a condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol (the state where the value of the time-saving counter 203f is greater than 0), the small winning of special drawing 1 is required (the start of the small winning game based on the small winning of special drawing 1). is set. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to end the high probability state of the normal symbol under conditions other than when changing the special symbol a predetermined number of times. Therefore, in a state where a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, a potential state (that is, a gaming state that is advantageous to the player) at any timing (any special symbol lottery) is set. Since it is possible to make the transition to a high probability state with special symbols and a low probability state with normal symbols, the player can always be motivated to play the game.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol is continuously set is configured to be until the lottery (variation) of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (four times). Therefore, the shorter the period from when the variable probability state is set until winning a small hit in the special drawing 1 lottery, the greater the number of special symbol drawings that can be executed during the probability state. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the third embodiment, when a small hit is won in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) lottery, the high probability state of the normal symbol does not end. As a result, even if the probability of winning a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery is set higher than the probability of winning a small winning in the special drawing 1 drawing, the special drawing 2 It is possible to suppress a situation in which a right-handed game is played in order to execute the lottery.

On the other hand, in the process of S2551, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit medium flag 203bb is not set to ON (S2551: No), this process is directly ended.

As explained above, in the third embodiment, if a jackpot is won by drawing a special symbol, the probability change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game. is configured so that it is set for a predetermined period (four special symbol fluctuations), and various transition conditions (potential state transition state) to transition from a high probability state of a normal symbol to a low probability state during that state of probability change. By establishing the following, a potential state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player is set.

In the third embodiment, the potential state transition conditions include a first potential transition condition that is established when a jackpot is won during the variable probability state, and a predetermined period during which the variable probability state is set (special symbol variation 4 The second potential transition condition that is satisfied when the final variation of (times) is executed, and the condition when a small hit is won in the lottery of a specific special symbol (first special symbol (special symbol 1)) during the probability variation state. and a third potential transition condition that is satisfied. In this way, by configuring the potential state to be set under various conditions, it is possible to provide players with a never-ending gaming experience.

Furthermore, the plurality of potential transition conditions described above are configured such that the period during which the potential state is set after being established is different, and when the first potential transition condition is satisfied, a jackpot is indicated. If the potential state is set during the symbol confirmation period in which the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second potential transition condition is met, the potential state is set during the symbol confirmation period when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite state is set and the third potential transition condition is satisfied, the probability change state is changed from the timing when the target small winning game is executed (the timing when the first variable winning device 65 opens as a small winning game). It is configured to be set until the timing when the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol corresponding to the final variation of is ended.

By configuring this way, in order to play a game to set a potential state during a variable probability state, instead of simply aiming for a potential state, the game is also played in response to an opportunity for a potential state to be set. Since the player can be made to look at the player, the player can be made to play the game more enthusiastically.

Further, in the third embodiment, the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol is configured to vary depending on the lottery result of the special symbol. Further, the variation display period (variation time) for showing the special symbol lottery result is configured to vary depending on the number of special symbol variations after the probability variation state is set.

Specifically, if the first potential transition condition is satisfied, in the case of a special symbol lottery result, that is, if a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, the symbol confirmation period will be from 5 seconds to 300 seconds, depending on the lottery result. It is configured so that it is set within the range of . With this configuration, even if the player determines that the first potential transition condition has been met (even if the special symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed), the symbol confirmation period that is set thereafter Since it is not possible to easily determine the length of , it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that a long period is set as the period in which the potential state is continuously set.

In addition, when the above-mentioned second potential transition condition is satisfied, the potential state is set based on the lottery result of the special symbol variation (final variation in the probability variable state) corresponding to the establishment of the second potential transition condition. For example, in the final change in the probability variable state, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the length of the period set as the probability state is It is configured so that the variation time is less than (including the same as) the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed during the potential state. With this configuration, if the final variation of the probability variation state is off, the probability state is temporarily set internally, but the special figure 2 variation is executed during the probability state, and a small It is possible to set a disadvantageous potential state that is disadvantageous to a player that makes it impossible (difficult) to win a winning game.

In addition, when the above-mentioned unfavorable potential state is set, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed so as not to execute the performance mode that informs that the potential state game (RUSH game) will be executed. It is preferable not to notify the player that the potential state is set.

In this embodiment, as described above, if the special symbol lottery result is a loss in the final change of the probability variable state, an unfavorable potential state is set. In some cases where the lottery result is a miss, a long symbol confirmation period (for example, 100 seconds that can be set when the lottery result is a jackpot) is set, or when the lottery result of a special symbol is a miss. The variation pattern (variation time) selected may be set to 300 seconds, which can be set when the lottery result is a jackpot.

With this configuration, even if the player does not win a jackpot or a small win during a variable probability state, it is possible to set a probability state that is advantageous to the player, so that the player can maintain expectations until the end of the variable probability state. You can play games while playing the game. In addition, by making the set symbol confirmation period and fluctuation pattern the same as the period (time) that can be set when winning a jackpot, it creates expectations that a jackpot game will be executed after the potential state ends. be able to.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, if the length of the symbol confirmation period is set to the same length as when winning the jackpot to perform a potential state game (RUSH game), the lottery result of the special symbol is It is preferable to stop and display the special symbol (third symbol) in a display mode that is difficult for the player to grasp. Thereby, the lottery result of the current special symbol is determined at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress the desire to play during the potential state game from decreasing.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the length of the period during which the potential state is set is configured to vary depending on the timing at which the first potential transition condition is satisfied. Specifically, it is configured such that the longer the probability state is set, the more the number of special symbol variations in the probability variation state increases. As a result, the more the number of special symbol variations in the variable probability state increases, that is, the fewer the number of special symbol variations that can be executed during the variable probability state, the easier it becomes to set a potential state that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player want to win the jackpot as soon as possible (to satisfy the first potential transition condition), or to win the jackpot just before the end of the variable probability state, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be done. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the final change of the probability change state, that is, if the first potential transition condition and the second potential transition condition are both satisfied in one special symbol change (lottery). Since the probability state is set from the period when the jackpot fluctuation starts, it is possible to provide the probability state for a longer period.

In addition, in this embodiment, the longer the establishment of the first potential transition condition is delayed, the more likely the potential state is to be set for a long period of time. It may be configured such that the longest potential state period is set when the number of fluctuations is an even number or when a jackpot is won in the 3rd time, or the sooner the first potential transition condition is satisfied, the faster it is. It may be configured such that the longer the potential state is set, the more likely it is that the potential state will be set for a long period of time.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the third embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 130 to 135. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment is a command determination process in place of the command determination process 2 (see FIG. 106) with respect to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment described above. 3 (see FIG. 130), jackpot-related processing 3 (see FIG. 132) instead of jackpot-related processing (see FIG. 64), and variable display setting processing 3 (see FIG. 134) instead of variable display setting processing (see FIG. 69). The difference is that the winning information related process (see Figure 131), the jackpot end process (see Figure 133), and the probability variation display process (see Figure 135) are added; other than that, the process is the same. executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 130, command determination processing 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 3 (S4172). Command determination process 3 (S4172) differs from command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment described above in that the process of S4271 is executed instead of the process of S4214. The other processes are the same as the command determination process 2 (S4162) in the second embodiment, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the winning information related process (S4271), which is one process in the command determination process 3 (S4172) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the content of winning information related processing (S4271).

In the winning information related process (S4271), first, the information indicating the gaming status stored in the status setting area 223j is read out (S5501). Next, in the process of S5501, it is determined whether the read gaming state (ie, the current gaming state) is changing in probability (S5502). If it is determined that the read gaming state is in the process of probability variation (S5502: Yes), the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is read out (S5503). Next, in the process of S5503, it is determined whether the read value of the residual probability variation number area 223ba is greater than 0 (S5504). If it is determined that the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is greater than 0 (S5504: Yes), it is determined whether there is winning information in the winning information received this time (S5505). If it is determined that there is winning information in the winning information (S5505: Yes), the pre-read winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5506). On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no winning information in the winning information (S5505: No), the process of S5506 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5507.

Next, the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is subtracted by 1 (S5507), the information of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223b (S5508), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5502 that the read gaming state is not in a probability variation state (S5502: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5504 that the value of the remaining probability variation number area 223ba is 0, (S5504: No), sets a display winning command corresponding to the received winning information (S5509), executes the process of S5508 described above, and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 132, jackpot related processing 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot related processing 3 (S4552). Jackpot related processing 3 (S4552) executes the jackpot end processing (S4651) after executing the processing of S4608 or S4611 described above for the jackpot related processing (S4502) in the first embodiment described above. They differ in some respects. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the jackpot end process (S4651), which is one process in the jackpot related process 3 (S4552) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot end process (S4651).

In the jackpot end process (S4651), first, all information stored in the winning information storage area 223b is read out (S5601). Next, it is determined whether there is winning information (S5602). If it is determined that there is no winning information (S5602: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is winning information (S5602: Yes), the number of winning information determined in the process of S5602 is subtracted from the probability variation setting number (n=4) (S5603). Next, in the process of S5603, the subtracted value is set in the residual probability variation number area 223ba (S5604).

Next, it is determined whether there is any hit information in the read information (S5605). If it is determined that there is winning information in the read information (S5605: Yes), check whether winning information is included in the winning information corresponding to the next variation (that is, the first variation executed after the end of the jackpot game). (S5606). In the process of S5606, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the next change includes winning information (S5606: Yes), the player is notified that the probability state will be set immediately after the jackpot ends. A special presentation mode is set for the purpose (S5607), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that winning information corresponding to the next change does not include winning information (S5606: No), the pre-read winning flag 223bb is set to ON (S5608), and the winning information including winning information changes. The number of special symbol fluctuations until then is set in the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc (S5609), an ending command for display including the bingo game display mode is set (S5611), and this processing is ended.

In addition, in the process of S5605, if it is determined that there is no hit information in the read state (S5605: No), the probability variation setting number (n=4) is set in the remaining variation number counter 223bc (S5610), and the above-mentioned S5611 Execute the process and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the variable display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 3 (S4173). Fluctuation display setting processing 3 (S4173) is different from the fluctuation display setting processing (S4113) in the first embodiment described above, when it is determined in the processing of S5103 that the current gaming state is not a definite state (S5103). :No), the difference is that the probability change variation display setting process (S5151) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 135, regarding the variable display setting process for probability variation (S5151) which is one process in the variable display setting process 3 (S4173) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment. explain. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probability variation display setting process (S5151). In the probability variation variation display setting process (S5151), when the current gaming state is the probability variation state, the variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the special symbol 1 variation pattern command received from the main controller 110. , and executes the process of transmitting it to the display control device 114.

In the probability change variation display setting process (S5151), first, it is determined whether the current variation is a small hit or not (S5701). If it is determined that the current variation is a small win (S5701: Yes), a performance mode that will result in all bingo, that is, a performance mode as shown in FIG. 114(b) is set (S5709), and in S5710 Move to processing. On the other hand, in the process of S5701, if it is determined that the current variation is not a small win (S5701: No), it is determined whether the pre-read hit flag 223bb is set on (S5702). If it is determined that the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to on (S5702: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 2, that is, whether the remaining fluctuation number is 2 ( S5703). If it is determined that the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is 2 (S5703: Yes), winning information corresponding to the next fluctuation is read out from the winning information storage area 223b (S5704).

Next, based on the winning information read in the process of S5704 and the number of fluctuations, the performance mode is set from the variable probability performance selection table 222ba (S5705). Next, the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is set to OFF (S5706), the remaining probability variation number area 223ba and the remaining variation number counter 223bc are reset (S5707), and the process moves to S5710. On the other hand, in the process of S5702, if it is determined that the look-ahead hit flag 223bb is not set to on (S5702: No), or if it is determined in the process of S5703 that the value of the residual variation counter 223bc is not 2 (S5703: No), a performance mode in which bingo cannot be achieved is set (S5708), the value of the remaining fluctuation number counter 223bc is subtracted by 1 (S5711), and the process moves to S5710.

Next, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the extracted variation pattern command and the presentation mode set in any one of S5705, S5708, and S5709 is set (S5710), and this processing is ended.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 to 160. Each of the embodiments described above is configured so that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) fluctuate at the same time (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type), and the potential is determined as a game state. A large number of small winning games (RUSH games) are executed by executing the special drawing 2 lottery (variation) during the period when the state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set. It was configured to be possible.

The probability state once set is based on the first probability ending condition that is established based on the start of the jackpot game, or the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. The process is configured to end when any of the second probable end conditions that are satisfied based on the above are satisfied.

In the above-described first to third embodiments configured in this way, for example, when the first potential end condition is satisfied, the potential game state ( RUSH game) is executed until just before the jackpot game, which is the second advantageous game, starts, so it is possible to have the player perform a plurality of different advantageous games in succession, and the player It was something that could give them a sense of satisfaction.

However, in each of the embodiments described above, after the variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set, the potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. Although multiple types of variable ending conditions for transitioning to a certain state can be set, only the two mentioned above are used for ending conditions for ending a certain state. There is a problem in that it is easy to predict the period during which a certain state will continue.

To solve this problem, in the fourth embodiment, a lottery is performed to shift (fall) from a high probability state of a special symbol to a low probability state every time a special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) is executed. (hereinafter referred to as a falling lottery) is executed, and when this falling lottery is won, a low probability state of the special symbol is set.

With this configuration, it is possible to solve the problem of the player easily predicting the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol will continue to be set, and it is an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the player play the game while making them expect that the potential state game (RUSH game) will continue for a long time.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, during a period in which a variable display (special pattern variation display) for displaying that one special symbol has won a jackpot is being executed (special symbol variation display period), the other special symbol is Even if a special symbol lottery is executed, the lottery result of the falling lottery is configured to be invalid.

As a result, if a potential state is set because the first variable ending condition (a variable ending condition that is established based on a jackpot win) is established, a potential state game (RUSH In the game), since the falling lottery can be invalidated, a potential game (RUSH game) can be made into an advantageous potential game (super RUSH game) that can be executed for a long period of time.

On the other hand, if a potential state is set due to the second probability variation ending condition (a probability variation ending condition that is established based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) being satisfied, a falling lottery will be executed during that probability state. Therefore, there is a risk that the potential state will end early based on winning the falling lottery, so the period in which the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed will be longer than the above-mentioned advantageous potential state. It can be a normal potential state game that is likely to be shorter than a state game.

Here, with reference to FIG. 136, a description will be given of the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 during the variable probability state in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 136 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a method of transitioning between four types of gaming states set in the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the game state transition method in the pachinko machine 10 used in the first embodiment, the content of the game state transition in the case of winning the falling lottery is added, and each transition The difference is that the elements until the condition (predetermined condition) is satisfied are changed, and the transition ratio that changes when winning a jackpot is changed, but other than that, they are the same. Detailed description of the same elements will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 136, in the fourth embodiment, a falling lottery is executed to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state, and the falling lottery is executed during the probability variable state. If the player wins, the state shifts to the time saving state, and if the player wins the falling lottery while in the potential state, the player shifts to the normal state.

With this configuration, in order to set a potential state which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. In the state, the condition for moving from the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state (for example, reducing the number of times shortened) is higher than the condition for shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state (winning the falling lottery). It needs to be established first.

Therefore, whether or not the potential state is set is determined depending on the timing of the establishment of the transition condition for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol), so the player can be made to pay close attention to the game content, and the game can improve the interest of Furthermore, although the details will be described later, in the fourth embodiment, the game method executed is the same (left-handed game) in the variable probability state and the time saving state, and the performance content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are configured in the same way. Therefore, even if the player wins the falling lottery before the transition condition for the normal symbol (the condition for transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state) is satisfied, it will be difficult for the player to understand that fact. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, the flow of setting the potential state and the flow of the game during the potential state in the fourth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 137(a) is a timing chart schematically showing the flow in the case where the special lottery jackpot is won during the probability variable state (when the first probability variable end condition is satisfied), and FIG. 137(b) is , is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when the number of time reductions becomes 0 during the variable probability state (when the second variable probability termination condition is satisfied).

As shown in FIG. 137(a), in the fourth embodiment, when the high probability state (variable probability state or potential state) of the special symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is changed to the low probability state. It is configured so that the lottery (falling lottery) for transitioning to the above state is carried out every time a special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, and if a jackpot is won during the probability variation state (the first probability variation ending condition) It is configured such that the period during which the potential state is set in the case where the falling lottery is not executed is set as the falling lottery invalid period in which the falling lottery is not executed.

On the other hand, if the potential state is set based on the fulfillment of the second probability variable ending condition, the falling lottery is valid even during the potential state game (RUSH game), as shown in FIG. 137(b). Since this is executed, the potential state is shifted to the normal state based on the winning of the falling lottery before the special drawing 1 fluctuation ends. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first variable probability ending condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a potential state game (RUSH game) that is more advantageous than when the second variable probability ending condition is satisfied.

<About the effect display contents in the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment, in addition to the performance contents executed in the first embodiment described above as the performance contents executed during the variable probability state, an opportunity for setting the probability state is suggested (notified) to the player. The difference is that an effect for suggesting (notifying) that a person has won a falling lottery during a potential state game (RUSH game) is added.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 138 to 140, the contents of the effects added to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 138(a) is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating the contents of a performance to suggest that a potential state game (RUSH game) is set when the second probability variable ending condition (time reduction number reached) is established. , and FIG. 138(b) schematically shows the production content to suggest that a potential state game (RUSH game) is set due to the establishment of the first variable ending condition (jackpot winning). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIGS. 138(a) and 138(b), in this embodiment, the opportunity for setting the potential state is determined by the display mode of the effect pattern 813 that is displayed when the treasure box 812 is opened. It is configured to notify (suggest) that when the display mode of "444" is displayed as the production pattern 813, it is notified that the second probability variable end condition (time reduction number reached) is satisfied, and " When the display mode of ``SUPER RUSH'' is displayed, it is configured to notify that the first variable ending condition (jackpot winning) has been satisfied.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the player is informed of the opportunity to set the probability state by the display mode of the production pattern 813 displayed as the production result during the probability change state. Other configurations may be used, for example, a plurality of display modes may be provided in which selection ratios are varied depending on the type of probability variable ending condition established as the display mode of the effect pattern 813 to be displayed. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which probability variable ending condition has been met.

Here, with reference to FIG. 139(a), a description will be given of the display contents when winning the falling lottery during the potential state game (RUSH game). FIG. 139(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the display contents when winning the falling lottery during the potential state game (RUSH game). In the fourth embodiment, the falling lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery start condition for executing the special symbol lottery (jackpot lottery) is satisfied, and the falling lottery is executed every time the special symbol lottery start condition is satisfied. The falling lottery is configured to be executed during the period from when the jackpot lottery is executed until the jackpot lottery is executed, that is, before the jackpot lottery is executed.

Therefore, if you win the falling lottery, as shown in FIG. 139(a), you can play the potential state game (RUSH game) while the special symbol (special symbol 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is displayed in a fluctuating manner. A notification is given to indicate that the lottery has ended, and a new special symbol 2 variation is suppressed from being executed after the winning of the falling lottery (after the game state shifts from the potential state to the normal state). In addition, by variably displaying the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 from "right-handed hit" to "left-handed hit" while the special symbol (special symbol 1) corresponding to the winning of the falling lottery is being displayed in a variable manner, After winning the falling lottery (after the gaming state shifts from the potential state to the normal state), a new special symbol 2 variation is suppressed from being executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 139(b), the content of the effect executed when a jackpot is won during the potential state game (RUSH game) will be explained. FIG. 139(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the performance contents executed when a jackpot is won during the potential state game (RUSH game).

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, description will be given of performance contents during an advantageous potential state game (super RUSH game) which is advantageous to the player among the potential state games (RUSH game). As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when a potential state is set based on the satisfaction of the first probability variation ending condition, a fall lottery is set to invalidate the fall lottery during the setting period of the potential state. It is configured such that a lottery invalidation period is set, and the treasure box 812 displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 indicates that the game is in an advantageous potential state game (super RUSH game). The number of displays is increased, and a comment "Super RUSH in progress" indicating that an advantageous potential state game is in progress is displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

<About the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 141 to 146. First, with reference to FIG. 141, the counter etc. provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be explained. These counters and the like are operated by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, etc. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in that a fall lottery counter C6 is added, which is used when determining the lottery result of the fall lottery.

The fall lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239", and is updated at, for example, 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and Some of the counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 52), and the updated values are stored in a counter buffer (fall lottery counter buffer) set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203.

The value of this fall lottery counter C6 is referred to in the fall lottery that is executed when the high probability state of the special symbol is set (when the probability change flag 203g is set to on), and is acquired. When it is determined that the value of the falling lottery counter C6 is a determination value predefined in the falling lottery table 202cb, the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to a low probability state (falls).

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 142, the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment in that a jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202d, and a falling lottery The difference is that a table 202cb is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca will be explained with reference to FIG. 143. FIG. 143 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 4 table 202ca. As shown in FIG. 143, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won and a jackpot game is executed, the operation content (operation scenario) is such that the second attacker (second variable winning device 650) is always opened. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is set. Further, it is different from the first embodiment described above in that the operation content (operation scenario) is set so that the number of rounds of the jackpot game to be executed when a jackpot is won is at least 5 rounds or more. are different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment described above, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the special symbol has won a jackpot or a small win, the operation details performed during the small win game are A jackpot game is defined in which the same action content (a concept that includes differences that are difficult for the player to distinguish) from the action scenario is executed, and a potential state is set, which is a gaming state in which the player has an advantage. In contrast, the fourth embodiment makes it difficult to understand the timing and end timing of a jackpot game, but the fourth embodiment makes it easy for the player to determine whether he or she has won a jackpot or a small win. By making the operation contents different from the operation contents of the small winning game, the player can easily distinguish between the operation contents and the small winning game operation contents.

In this way, by allowing the player to easily determine whether a jackpot game or a small win game has been executed, it is possible to easily determine the number of small win games executed during a potential state game (RUSH game). can be made to understand.

Next, the falling lottery table 202cb will be explained with reference to FIG. 146(a). FIG. 146(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the fall lottery table 202cb. The fall lottery table 202cb is a data table in which the determination value of the fall lottery counter C6 mentioned above is stored. The value of the falling lottery counter C6 acquired when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (at the time of starting winning) is one of those specified in the falling lottery table 202cb. When it matches the judgment value of , it is set so that it moves to a low probability state of a special symbol (falls down).

More specifically, four determination values "43, 107, 195, and 222" are defined as determination values for determining a fall in the high probability state of the special symbol. Here, the falling lottery counter C6 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 239". Among the 240 values that the falling lottery counter C6 can take, there are 4 judgment values that are determined as falling, so the probability of falling (shifting to the low probability state of the special symbol) in the variable probability state of the special symbol. becomes 1/60 (4/240).

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol is set to 6/480 (see FIG. 15(a)), and winning the small jack in the lottery of special symbol 2. The probability is set to 221/480 (see FIG. 15(b)). In other words, the configuration is such that the probability of winning the lottery is slightly higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. That is, in the fourth embodiment, when the probability state is set, it is configured so that winnings are more likely to be won in the order of small win, fall, and jackpot.

Note that the winning rates for jackpot, small hit, and fall in the high probability state of special symbols are not limited to those shown in this embodiment, and the ease of winning may be varied. For example, the fall probability (probability of winning a fall lottery) is set to be lower than the jackpot probability, and the configuration is configured so that the player can repeatedly enjoy jackpot games and small win games while in a potential state until falling and winning. Alternatively, you can set the small win probability and fall probability to be almost the same (for example, small win probability 1/3, fall probability 1/4), and draw a special symbol during the probability state. The gameplay may be such that the player is excited every time the game is played. Alternatively, the fall probability may be set high (for example, 1/2), and the special symbol lottery may be executed with the probability state set only if the person does not fall in the first fall lottery. good.

In addition, in the fall lottery table 202cb in this embodiment, only the determination value for determining whether or not a fall occurs in the high probability state of the special symbol is defined, and the determination value for the low probability state of the special symbol is defined. It has not been. This is because it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the special symbol low probability state when the special symbol is already in the low probability state.

In the fourth embodiment, this falling lottery table 202cb is compared with a regularly updated falling lottery counter C6, and the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol (the falling lottery table 202cb is ) is determined. In other words, the timing of transition from the potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) to the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) can be made random. . Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the potential state ends during the potential state game (RUSH game) that is performed during the period in which the potential state is set.

In this embodiment, it is determined by lottery (determination) whether or not to transition (fall) from the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state of the special symbol, but it is determined by lottery (determination) whether to transition to another state. ) may be done. For example, whether or not to transition from a high probability state of normal symbols to a low probability state of normal symbols may be determined by a lottery (special symbol lottery) executed every time a special symbol changes. As a result, how long the high probability state of the normal symbol lasts can be made random, so the variable state (the high probability state of the special symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol) can be changed to the potential state (the high probability state of the special symbol). , low probability state of normal symbols) can be made difficult for the player to understand. Therefore, during the period when the variable probability state is set, the player can always play the game while expecting that the probability state will be set. Further, for example, it may be configured such that it can be determined by lottery whether or not to transition from a low probability state of special symbols to a high probability state of special symbols.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 144. FIG. 144 shows the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown typically. As shown in FIG. 144, the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that a state update restriction flag 203ca is provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The state update restriction flag 203ca is a flag to indicate that the update of various parameters corresponding to various conditions for transitioning the gaming state is restricted, and when set to on, various parameters are restricted. This indicates that updating of parameters is restricted. In the fourth embodiment, when the status update restriction flag 203ca is set to on, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f is skipped.

This status update restriction flag 203ca is set when it is determined in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S386 in FIG. 147) that a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) (S406 in FIG. 147). :Yes), or if it is determined in the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see S975 in FIG. 150) that a jackpot has been won in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S1006 in FIG. 150: Yes) ) is set to on (S487 in FIG. 147, S1077 in FIG. 150).

Furthermore, it is referenced in the game state update process 4 (see S388 in FIG. 149) (see S651 in FIG. 149), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S651 in FIG. 149: Yes), the time saving counter 203f is The process of updating (subtracting) the value, that is, the process of updating the parameter (time saving number) corresponding to the condition for transitioning the gaming state is skipped. Then, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S287 in FIG. 148), if it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801 in FIG. 148: Yes), it is set to OFF. (See S871 in FIG. 148). Similarly, in the second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see S293 in FIG. 151), when it is determined that the special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203i is set to ON (S1501 in FIG. 151: Yes), it is also turned off. is set (S1571 in FIG. 151).

That is, in the fourth embodiment, when a jackpot is won with any of the plurality of special symbols (special symbol 1, special symbol 2), the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, and the special symbol that won the jackpot is set to ON. During the period in which the variable display is being executed, the gaming state is configured not to change.

Next, the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 145(a). FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a ROM 222 of an MPU 221 of No. 113. As shown in FIG. 145(a), the ROM 222 of the fourth embodiment is different from the ROM 222 of the first embodiment described above in that a potential mode selection table 222ca and a fall notification selection table 222cb are provided. are doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The probability mode selection table 222ca is a data table that is referred to when selecting the production mode (probability mode) of the production (probability production) for notifying the player that the probability state has been set. . This probability mode selection table 222ca includes a plurality of production modes ( A performance mode) is defined, and an opportunity to set a potential state can be suggested to the player depending on the performance mode of the selected potential performance.

Next, detailed contents defined in the probable mode selection table 222ca will be explained with reference to FIG. 146(b). FIG. 146(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the probable mode selection table 222ca. As shown in FIG. 146(b), if the information included in the status command received from the main controller 110 indicates that the current potential state is a jackpot probability state, the value of the acquired mode setting production counter 223ca "Invincible mode" is defined in the range of "0 to 49", "Normal mode B" is defined in the range of "50 to 89", and "Normal mode A" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". ing.

Then, if the information included in the status command received from the main control device 110 indicates that the current potential state is a time-saving potential state, the value of the acquired mode setting performance counter 223ca is "0 to 49". "Normal mode A" is defined in the range, "normal mode B" is defined in the range "50-89", and "normal mode B" is defined in the range "90-99".

The fall notification selection table 222cb is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) the player that he or she has won the fall lottery, and is a data table for selecting a notification mode for notifying (suggesting) the player that he or she has won the fall lottery. The notification mode is selected based on the value of the remaining time shortening number area 223k indicating the remaining period set by the user and the value of the fall notification performance counter 223cf.

In the fourth embodiment, the game method (left-handed game) and the method executed by the third symbol display device 81 are explained in the case where the variable probability state is set as the game state and the case where the time saving state is set as the game state. The various display modes are configured to be the same. This configuration prevents the player from easily determining whether the current state is a variable probability state or a time saving state. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, since the falling lottery is executed, the time is saved at random timing in the state where the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. It is configured so that states (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) are set.

Then, when the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state while the variable probability state is set, the gaming state shifts from the variable probability state to the potential state, which gives the player an advantageous potential. While a RUSH game is executed, when the time saving state is set and the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state, the game state changes from the time saving state to the normal state. transition to the state.

Here, the specific contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb will be explained with reference to FIG. 146(c). FIG. 146(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the fall notification selection table 222cb. As shown in FIG. 146(c), this fall notification selection table 222cb is associated with the remaining number of time reductions at the time of winning the fall (information in the remaining time reduction number area 223k) and the value of the fall notification performance counter 223cf. The notification mode is defined.

Specifically, if the falling winning timing is when the remaining time shortening number is 0 (when the information stored in the remaining time shortening number area 223k indicates the remaining time shortening number is 0), that is, the high probability of a normal symbol. If the fall lottery is won due to a change in which the state ends, "confirmed notification" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired fall notification performance counter 223cf. Then, when the falling winning timing is such that the remaining time shortening count is 1 to 49, that is, when more than half of the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set has passed, the obtained falling notification performance counter 223cf. "Suggestion notification" is defined in the range of "0 to 49" or "90 to 99", and "confirmation notification" is defined in the range of "50 to 89". Then, if the remaining time shortening count is 50 to 98, that is, if more than half of the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set remains, the value of the acquired fall notification performance counter 223cf is "0 to 89". "Suggestive notification" is defined in the range of , and "determined notification" is defined in the range of "90 to 99."

Here, when "confirmed notification" is selected as the notification mode, the notification mode is such that the player can easily understand that the player has won the fall lottery, for example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 A notification mode is set in which a display indicating the fact (for example, a display of "Unfortunate") or a sound or a luminous color of a decorative member to notify that the user has won the fall lottery.

In addition, when "suggestive notification" is selected as the notification mode, a notification mode (for example, display of "pinch") is set to notify the player that he may have won the falling lottery. . Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, this "suggestive notification" is configured to be set when the notification condition is satisfied even if the player has not won the falling lottery. With this configuration, the "suggestion notification" is executed both when the player actually wins the fall lottery and when the player does not actually win the fall lottery.

As explained above, in the fourth embodiment, the mode of notification (suggestion) of whether or not you have won the falling lottery is changed to the remaining period (remaining time short) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set continuously. The configuration is such that the setting is based on the period), and the longer the remaining time period is, the more difficult it is to set the "confirmed notification". Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player realizes that he has won a lottery with a long remaining time and his desire to play during the short remaining time decreases.

In addition, the setting frequency of the "suggestion notification" that is set when a person has not won the fall lottery may be configured to be variable based on the length of the short period of remaining time.For example, the longer the short period of remaining time, the more likely the person will fall. It is preferable to configure the system so that "suggestion notification" is easily set even when the player has not won the lottery. This makes it possible to vary the possibility of actually winning the falling lottery when the "suggestive notification" is executed, based on the length of the short period remaining, so the "suggestive notification" is executed. It is possible to make the player play the game during the short remaining time while predicting whether or not he or she will win the falling lottery by distinguishing the frequency (number of times) of winnings and the number of times the remaining time is short, thereby improving the interest of the game. can.

Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 145(b). 113 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of No. 113. FIG. As shown in FIG. 145(b), the RAM 223 of the fourth embodiment has a mode setting performance counter 223ca, a probability mode storage area 223cb, and the number of small hits, in contrast to the RAM 223 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that a counter 223cc, a fall flag 223cd, a short-time notification flag 223ce, and a fall notification effect counter 223cf are provided. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The mode setting production counter 223ca is a counter used when selecting a probability mode using the probability mode selection table 222ca. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

The potential mode storage area 223cb is a storage area for storing the currently set potential mode, and the potential mode determined in the potential mode setting process (see S4451 in FIG. 154) is stored (set). (See S5804 in FIG. 154). Then, it is referred to in the special figure 1 variation display setting process 4 (see S5171 in FIG. 159) (see S5251 in FIG. 159), and a display variation pattern command is set (see S5252 in FIG. 159). Similarly, it is referred to in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (see S5175 in FIG. 160) (S5351 in FIG. 160), and a display variable pattern command is set (S5352 in FIG. 160). The information (potential mode information) stored (set) in this probability mode storage area 223cb is stored when it is determined in the state command processing 4 (see S4281 in FIG. 153) that the gaming state has shifted to the normal state. (See S4454 in FIG. 153).

The small winning number counter 223cc is a counter for measuring the number of small winnings won during the probability state, and is a counter for counting the number of small winnings won during the probability state. When received, the value is incremented by 1 (see S4752 in FIG. 156). Then, it is referred to when determining the number of small wins won during the probability state (S4753 in FIG. 156). In this embodiment, a small hit number display 825 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of the small hit number counter 223cc, and a small hit is made during the period in which the probability state is set. When the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number (a multiple of 10), the remaining time in the probability state is displayed.

The fall flag 223cd is a flag for indicating that the player has won the fall lottery during the probability change state, and is set to ON to indicate that the player has won the fall lottery.

The time-saving notification flag 223ce indicates that someone wins the falling lottery during a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), and enters a time-saving state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). A flag for indicating that a fall notification effect (a effect executed when the confirmed notification is selected in the fall notification selection table 222cb) for notifying the player that the transition has been made has been executed, When set to on, a fall notification effect is set.

The fall notification performance counter 223cf is a counter used when selecting the notification mode of the fall lottery using the fall notification selection table 222cb. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 147 to 151. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), which is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. Special symbol jackpot determination processing 4 (see FIG. 147), first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (see FIG. 148) in place of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 38), and game state update processing (see FIG. 36) Instead of the game state update process 4 (see FIG. 149), the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40), the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (see FIG. 150), and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process. The difference is that the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (see FIG. 151) is executed instead of (see FIG. 45). Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 147, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386). The first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) is different from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S306) in the first embodiment described above, in which the special symbol shifts from a variable probability state to a special symbol low probability state ( The difference is that a process for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to cause a person to fall is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386), first, data of the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is acquired (S401). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481). If it is determined that the special figure 2 jackpot flag 203i is on (S481: Yes), the jackpot of the second special symbol is being executed, so this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special drawing 2 jackpot flag 203i is off (S481: No), it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on, that is, whether the probability is changing (S482). If it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is off, that is, the probability variation is not in progress (S482: No), the process moves to S404.

On the other hand, in the process of S482, if it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is on, that is, if it is determined that the probability variation is in progress (S482: Yes), the lottery result is obtained based on the fall lottery table 202cb. (S483). Then, it is determined whether the value of the fall lottery counter C6 matches any judgment value (random value) defined in the fall lottery table 202cb (that is, it is a value corresponding to a fall) (S484 ), if it is determined that the value does not correspond to a fall (S484: No), the process moves to S403.

On the other hand, in the process of S484, if it is determined that the value of the fall lottery counter C6 matches any judgment value (random value) specified in the fall lottery table 202cb (a value corresponding to a fall), ( S484: Yes), by setting the probability variation flag 203g to OFF, the special symbol probability variation state is transitioned (falls) to the special symbol low probability state (S485). Then, a fall command is set for the audio lamp control device 113 to notify that the special symbol has transitioned from the variable probability state to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall) (S486), and the process proceeds to S404. Transition. In addition, in this embodiment, in the process of S406, if it is determined that the data in the current execution area is a jackpot (S406: Yes), after executing the processes of S407 to S411, the status update restriction flag 203ca is set to on (S487), and this process ends.

By executing the special symbol variation start process 4 (S386), it is possible to easily perform a lottery to determine whether the special symbol should be shifted to a low probability state (fall) and a lottery to determine whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot. be able to. In addition, in this embodiment, as the order of processing in the probability variable state of the special symbol, a lottery is first performed to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol (fall lottery), and then a jackpot lottery of the special symbol is performed. Although the configuration is such that a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the result will be the case, the processing order is not limited to this. The jackpot lottery may be performed first, and then the fall lottery may be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the first special symbol variation stop process 4 (S287) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S287). The first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S287) executes the processing of S801 to S805 in contrast to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S207) in the first embodiment described above, and then sets the state update restriction flag 203ca. The difference is that processing for setting off (S871) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 149, gaming state update processing 4 (S388) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the contents of gaming state update processing 4 (S388). The game state update process 4 (S388) is different from the game state update process (S308) in the first embodiment described above in that it adds a process (S651) for determining whether the state update restriction flag 203ca is on. differ. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the game state update process 4 (S388), first, it is determined whether the state update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651). If it is determined that the status update restriction flag 203ca is on (S651: Yes), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S651, if it is determined that the status update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S651: No), the process moves to S601.

After executing the processes of S601 to S604, in the process of S605, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on (that is, whether probability is changing) (S605). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S605: Yes), it is determined whether the special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652). If it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag 203h is on (S652: Yes), a status command indicating a jackpot probability state is set (S653), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S652, if it is determined that the special map 1 jackpot flag 203h is not on (S652: No), a status command indicating a time-saving potential state is set (S654), and this process ends. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 150, the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975). The second special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S975) is different from the second special symbol jackpot determination process (S905) in the first embodiment described above, in which the special symbol shifts from a variable probability state to a special symbol low probability state ( The difference is that a process for executing a lottery to determine whether or not to cause a person to fall is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Also, with reference to FIG. 147, for the first special symbol jackpot determination process 4 (S386) described above, a process is performed in which the target of variation is changed from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. The detailed explanation will be omitted since it is only executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the second special symbol variation stop process 4 (S293) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation stop processing 4 (S293). The second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 4 (S293) executes S1501, S1503 to S1506 in contrast to the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing (S213) in the first embodiment described above, and then sets the state update restriction flag 203ca. The difference is that processing for setting off (S1571) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fourth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 152 to 160. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is a command determination process 4 in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 60) in contrast to the control process of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first embodiment described above. (See FIG. 152), the difference is that variable display setting process 4 (see FIG. 157) is executed instead of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69), and otherwise the same process is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 152, command determination processing 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 4 (S4182). Command determination processing 4 (S4182) is different from command determination processing (S4112) in the first embodiment described above, when it is determined that a status command has been received from the main controller 110 in the processing of S4203 (S4203: No), the difference is that status command processing 4 (S4281) is executed instead of status command processing (S4204). Other processes are the same as the command determination process (S4112) in the first embodiment, so detailed description will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 153, state command processing 4 (S4281), which is one process in command determination processing 4 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the contents of status command processing 4 (S4281). Status command processing 4 (S4281) includes a probability mode setting process (S4451) added to the status command processing (S4204) in the first embodiment described above, and determines whether a command related to a fall has been received. The difference is that processing is added. Other processing is the same as the status command processing (S4204) in the first embodiment, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

In state command processing 4 (S4281), if it is determined that the command received this time is a state command indicating transition to the probable state (S4403: Yes), probable mode setting processing (S4451) is executed. Details of the probable mode setting process (S4451) will be described later with reference to FIG. 154. Next, the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S4405), and the process moves to S4452. On the other hand, in the process of S4403, if it is determined that the command received from the main controller 110 this time is not a status command indicating transition to the potential state (S4403: No), the main controller 110 issues a fall command. It is determined whether the message has been received (S4452). If it is determined that a falling command has been received (S4452: Yes), a falling effect setting process is executed (S4453). Details of the falling effect setting process (S4453) will be described later with reference to FIG. 155. On the other hand, in the process of S4452, if it is determined that the fall command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4452: No), the process of S4453 is skipped and the process of S4406 is executed. Next, after executing the processing of S4406 to S4411, the probability mode storage area 223cb, the small hit number counter 223cc, the fall flag 223cd, and the short-time notification flag 223ce are cleared (S4454), and this processing is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 154, the probable mode setting process (S4451), which is one process in the status command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. . FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the contents of the probable mode setting process (S4451).

In the definite mode setting process (S4451), first, the type of status command received from the main controller 110 this time is read out (S5801). Next, based on the received state command and the value of the mode setting performance counter 223ca, a probable mode is determined using the probable mode selection table 222ca (see FIG. 146(b)) (S5802). Next, in the process of S5802, a display potential mode command corresponding to the determined potential mode is set (S5803), and the determined potential mode is set in the potential mode storage area 223cb (S5804). Next, a potential notification effect is set to notify the entry of a potential state (S5805), a value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5806), and this processing ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the falling effect setting process (S4453), which is one process in the state command process 4 (S4281) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the contents of the falling effect setting process (S4453).

In the falling effect setting process (S4453), first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a potential state (S5901). If it is determined that the current gaming state is a potential state (S5901: Yes), a potential notification effect is set to notify the end of the potential state (S5902), and the status command received from the main controller 110 is The value corresponding to the gaming state notified by is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5903), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5901, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a potential state (S5901: No), then check whether the remaining time reduction number is 99 or more, that is, the remaining time reduction number area 223k It is determined whether the value stored in is 99 or more (S5904). If it is determined that the remaining time reduction count is 99 or more (S5904: Yes), a time reduction notification effect is set to notify the entry of the time reduction state (S5905), and the time reduction notification completed flag 223ce is set to ON (S5906). . On the other hand, in the process of S5904, if it is determined that the remaining time reduction count is not 99 or more (S5904: No), the processes of S5905 and S5906 are skipped, and the process moves to the process of S5907. Next, the fall flag 223cd is set to ON (S5907), the value corresponding to the gaming state notified by the state command received from the main controller 110 is stored in the state setting area 223j (S5908), and this processing is ended. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the small win related process 4 (S4574) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit related processing 4 (S4574). The small win related process 4 (S4574) is different from the small win related process (S4504) in the first embodiment described above in that a process for displaying remaining time information is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the small win related process 4 (S4574), first, if it is determined that the small win start command has been received from the main control device 110 (S4701: Yes), it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the potential state. (S4751). If it is determined that the current gaming state is a potential state (S4751: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the small win counter 223cc (S4752). Next, it is determined whether the value of the small winning number counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753). If it is determined that the value of the small win counter 223cc is a multiple of 10 (S4753: Yes), the information stored in the residual variation time information storage area 223o is read out (S4754). A display time information command indicating remaining time information is set (S4755), then a display small win start command is set (S4702), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4751 that the game is not in a potential state (S4751: No), or if it is determined in the process of S4753 that the value of the small win counter 223cc is not a multiple of 10 ( S4753: No), executes the process of S4702, and ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable display setting process 4 (S4183). The variable display setting process 4 (S4183) is a variable display setting process for special figure 1 in place of the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) in contrast to the variable display setting process (S4113) in the first embodiment described above. 4 (S5171), the difference is that a variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175) is executed instead of the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109), and that a fall notification process (S5173) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the variation display setting process 4 (S4183), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S5101). When it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is set to off (S5102). Next, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a probable state (S5103). If it is determined that the current gaming state is a potential state (S5103: Yes), the special symbol 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) is executed, and the first special symbol is displayed in the winning information storage area 223b. The corresponding data is shifted (S5106). Details of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171) will be described later with reference to FIG. 159.

On the other hand, in the process of S5103, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a potential state (S5103: No), it is determined whether the falling flag 223cd is on (S5172). If it is determined that the fall flag 223cd is on (S5172: Yes), fall notification processing (S5173) is executed. Details of the fall notification process (S5173) will be described later with reference to FIG. 158. Next, based on the extracted variation pattern, a variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set (S5105), and the process proceeds to S5106 described above. Next, the process executed for special figure 1 in S5171 to S5173 is executed by changing the target to special figure 2.

Here, with reference to FIG. 158, the fall notification process (S5173), which is one process in the variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall notification process (S5173).

In the fall notification process (S5173), first, it is determined whether the time-saving notification completed flag 223ce is on (S8001). If it is determined that the short-time notification flag 223ce is on (S8001: Yes), a potential variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the extracted variation pattern (S8009), and this process end. On the other hand, if it is determined that the short-time notification flag 223ce is off (S8001: No), the information in the remaining short-time count area 223k is read out (S8002). Next, a fall notification mode is determined using the fall notification selection table 222cb based on the number of remaining time reductions read in the process of S8002 and the value of the fall notification performance counter 223cf (S8003). Next, in the process of S8003, it is determined whether the determined notification mode is a confirmed notification mode (S8004). When it is determined that the mode is the confirmed notification mode (S8004: Yes), the short-time notification flag 223ce is set to OFF (S8005), and the fall flag 223cd is set to OFF (S8006). Next, a time-saving notification effect is set to notify that the time-saving state has entered (S8007), the process of S8009 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S8004, if it is determined that the determined notification mode is not a confirmed notification mode (S8004: No), a fall notification command for display corresponding to the fall notification mode determined in the process of S8003 is set ( S8008), the process of S8009 described above is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by MPU 221 of audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment S5171) will be explained. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 1 variable display setting process 4 (S5171). The variable display setting process 4 for special figure 1 (S5171) executes the processes of S5201 to S5205 in contrast to the variable display setting process for special figure 1 (S5104) in the first embodiment described above, and then proceeds to the process of S5206. Instead, the probability mode stored in the probability mode storage area 223cb is read out (S5251), and based on the extracted variation pattern and probability mode, the probability variation pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is executed. The difference is that a process for setting (S5252) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 160, special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment is one process. S5175) will be explained. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175). Variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175) executes the processes of S5301 to S5308 in contrast to the variable display setting process for special figure 2 (S5109) in the first embodiment described above, and then proceeds to the process of S5309. Instead, readout of the probability mode stored in the probability mode storage area 223cb is executed (S5351), and based on the extracted variation pattern and probability mode, the probability variation pattern command for displaying the second special symbol is executed. The difference is that a process for setting (S5352) is executed. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

As explained above, in the fourth embodiment, in contrast to each of the first embodiments described above, the fourth embodiment has a configuration in which a fall lottery is performed in which the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state based on the lottery result. Therefore, when the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, at what timing is the time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) This can make it difficult for the player to predict whether the transition will occur.

In addition, if you win the falling lottery during the variable probability state and move to the time saving state, you will enter the probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Because it is difficult to transition (more difficult to transition than the variable probability state), once the variable probability state is set, it is more difficult to transition than the probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). It is possible to make the player play the game with excitement so as not to win the lottery.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the same gaming method (left-handed game) is performed when the variable probability state is set and when the time saving state is set, so the current It is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether the gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state.

Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, if the falling lottery is won immediately after the variable probability state is set (for example, the first special symbol variation), the player is notified that the variable probability state has been set. Since it is configured to execute a production mode (time saving notification production) that makes it appear as if the time saving state has been set from the beginning (after the end of the jackpot), there is a possibility that the potential state will be set. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because the probability change state, which is higher than the gaming state, ends in a short period of time.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, there is an effect (suggestive notification) that suggests to the player the possibility of winning the falling lottery during the probability change state, and an effect (confirmation notification) that notifies the player that he has won the falling lottery. ), and the selection ratio of the suggestion notification and the confirmation notification is configured to be different based on the number of remaining changes of the special symbol that can be set by continuing the probability change state. Specifically, the configuration is such that the larger the number of remaining fluctuations in the probability variable state, the more difficult it is to execute the final notification. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play from decreasing due to recognizing that the state has shifted from the variable probability state to the time saving state with a large number of remaining fluctuations remaining. Furthermore, the effect of giving a suggestion notification is configured to be executed even when the player has not won the falling lottery.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion notification or confirmation notification is configured to allow the player to determine whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state or a time saving state. Other configurations may be used, for example, a special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that can only be selected during a variable probability state, or a special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) that can only be selected during a time saving state. It may be configured so that the player can predict the current gaming state based on the variation pattern of the special symbols provided and executed. In this case, the variation pattern exclusively for the variable probability state and the variation pattern exclusively for the time-saving state should not be greatly different in content, but may be provided with an error of about 1 second in variation time, for example. As a result, the current game state can be informed to the player by an error in the variable display time that causes a slight sense of discomfort, so that the player can be made to pay close attention to the variable display of the special symbols to be executed. Furthermore, in this case, the error of 1 second may be used, for example, as the period until the third symbol starts to fluctuate on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This allows the third symbol to start fluctuating. It is possible to notify the player of the current gaming state by giving a slight sense of discomfort that the game is slower or faster than usual, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In the fourth embodiment, during a period when a jackpot variation is being executed in one special symbol, the lottery result of the falling lottery accompanying the other special symbol variation (lottery) is invalidated. . As a result, for example, because the first potential transfer condition that is established based on the jackpot winning of special drawing 1 is satisfied, during the period when the potential state is set, you will not be able to win the falling lottery and will be transferred to the second special. It becomes possible to continue receiving the lottery of the design (special pattern 2). Therefore, it is possible to set a potential state that is more advantageous (easier to continue for a long time) than a potential state set by satisfying other potential transition conditions.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the special symbol variation (lottery) is executed, the falling lottery is also executed. In other words, the falling lottery is configured to be executed when the execution conditions for the special symbol variation (lottery) are satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a specific ball entrance (for example, the first entrance The ball enters the ball opening 64, the second ball entry opening 640, the general prize winning opening 63), the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the execution conditions for normal symbol variation (lottery) are met. , the timing when the special symbol or the normal symbol stops displaying, or the timing when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed may be used as the trigger for executing the falling lottery, or the falling lottery may be executed when the execution conditions for the special symbol variation (lottery) are met. It may be configured such that it is determined whether or not to execute the lottery and the fall lottery is executed based on the determination result. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the falling lottery will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily detecting the timing of winning the falling lottery.

In the fourth embodiment, the presence or absence of a fall is determined with the same probability each time a fall lottery is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured to provide a high probability state (easy to win) and a low probability state in which it is difficult to fall (hard to win). In this case, for example, based on the jackpot type, a high probability variable state and a low probability variable state are set as probability variable states that are set after the jackpot ends, and in the high probability variable state, a low probability state of the falling lottery is set, and a low probability variable state is set. The state may be configured such that a state with a high probability of falling lottery is set. Furthermore, the state of the falling lottery (high probability state, low probability state) may be configured to be varied based on the number of special symbol variations (lotteries) performed after the probability variation state is set. The predetermined number of times of fluctuation (for example, 10 times) after the state is set is configured such that a high probability state of the falling lottery in which it is easy to win the falling lottery is set, and then a low probability state of the falling lottery is set. It's okay.

With this configuration, it is possible to set a period in which it is easy to fall from a variable probability state and a period in which it is difficult to fall, so that it is possible to provide the player with a varied gaming experience. In addition, in this embodiment, when winning the falling lottery, the process of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executed, but in addition to this, for example, the process of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state is executed. Processing for transitioning a high probability state to a low probability state may also be executed. Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, when winning the falling lottery, the high probability state of the special symbol is transferred to the low probability state. It may be configured so that the probability state is lower than the probability state and higher than the low probability state), and it may be configured such that the probability state is not shifted to the medium probability state unless the winning lottery is won.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, the contents of the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179. In the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, the falling lottery is executed in order to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state (to cause the special symbol to fall). With this configuration, the period during which the high probability state of the special symbol continues can be varied depending on the lottery result of the falling lottery, so it is possible for the player to know that the high probability state of the special symbol will remain for a long period of time. It was possible to make the player play the game while making them expect the player to continue playing the game.

However, in the configuration of the fourth embodiment described above, since the falling lottery is configured to be executed every time the special symbol lottery (variation) is executed, the player can decide whether or not to execute the falling lottery with his own intention. It was not possible to make a selection, which could lead to a decrease in the desire to play. Therefore, in the present fifth embodiment, a winning device (variable winning prize for small winning A device) 2650 is provided, and when it is detected that a ball has passed through an area (channel) through which a winning ball can pass, the small winning variable winning device 2650 changes the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state. The configuration is such that a fall gate 2650e3 (see FIG. 164) is provided to allow the transition.

By configuring in this way, similar to each of the above-described embodiments, a high probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) in which small winning games are frequently executed based on the special symbol 2 lottery. It is possible to select whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol will cause the special symbol to fall depending on whether or not the player fires during the small winning game.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the operation content (opening operation pattern) of the small winning game to be executed is configured to differ depending on the type of small winning (small winning type). The rate at which the balls won by the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game pass through the falling gate 2650e3 is configured to vary depending on the opening operation pattern.

With this configuration, the content of the small winning game to be executed can be predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to play a game that aims to win benefits (prize balls) through the small winning game. The player can select a game while playing the game.

In addition, similar to the fourth embodiment described above, in the probability state that is set during the period when one special symbol is performing a jackpot variation, the other special symbol variation (lottery) may win a small hit. Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured not to shift to the low probability state.

As a result, the state in which the potential state is set is divided into an advantageous potential state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (it is difficult), and a high probability state of the special symbol that is more likely to fall than that advantageous potential state. An unfavorable potential state can be set.

<About the configuration of the game board in the fifth embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 161 to 164. In the fifth embodiment, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above (see FIG. 2), and the first variable prize winning device 65 is replaced with the first variable winning device 65. A variable winning device 2650 for small winnings is provided, and a winning device (variable winning device 2650 for small winnings) which is opened during the small winning game is provided upstream of the second ball entrance 640. There is a difference.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 161. A variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings is provided in the right side area of the game board 13. This variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings has a plurality of channels through which winning balls flow (channels for changing the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state, and the channel for changing the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state. It is configured so that winning balls flow down different channels depending on the timing at which the ball enters the small winning variable winning device 2650.

The internal structure of this small winning variable winning device 2650 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 162 to 164. Next, the structure of the small winning variable winning device 2650 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 162. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of this small winning variable winning device 2650.

As shown in FIG. 162, the small winning variable winning device 2650 is assembled with an opening forming member 2650b that is arranged to protrude from the front side of the game board 13, and the back side of the opening forming member 2650b to generate a small winning. A base member 2650c for fixing the variable winning device 2650 to the game board 13 with screws, and an LED arranged on the back side of the base member 2650c to light up the front side of the pachinko machine 10 from the back side of the base member 2650c. an LED board 2650d on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged for winning, a back cover body 2650e that holds the LED board 2650d with a base member 2650c, and a small winning opening (small winning opening) formed in the opening forming member 2650b. An opening/closing unit 2650f having an opening/closing door 2650f1 for opening/closing the winning opening) 2650a, a channel cover body 2650g that is combined with the back side of the back cover body 2650e to form a channel, and a channel cover body 2650e and the channel. A switching member 2650h that protrudes into the flow path formed by the cover body 2650g and switches the flow path of the game ball, a link member 2650i that is locked with the switching member 2650h, and a link member 2650i that is arranged on the back side of the flow path cover body 2650g. a flow path solenoid 2650k that is fixed to the back side of the back cover body 2650j and operates the link member 2650i; It is composed of a fixing cover body 2650m for fixing.

FIG. 163 is a cross-sectional view of the small winning variable winning device 2650. FIG. 163(c) is a top view of the variable winning device 2650 for small winnings, and FIG. 163(b) is a Lb-Lb sectional view of the variable winning device 2650 for small winnings. As shown in FIG. 163(b), the small winning variable winning device 2650 is formed with a small winning opening (small winning opening) 2650a, which is an opening into which a game ball can enter. The small winning opening (small winning opening) 2650a is a substantially rectangular opening formed above the pachinko machine 10, and the game ball passing through the opening is guided to the left in FIG. 163(b). A bottom surface is formed that slopes downward to the left. At the left end of the bottom surface, a detection port 2650a1 composed of a magnetic sensor (ball detection switch) 2650c1 for detecting winning of a game ball is arranged. The game balls that have passed through this detection port 2650a1 are guided to the distribution channel formed on the back side of the back cover body 2650e shown in FIG. 163(b).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 163(b), the opening of the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a allows balls to enter through an opening/closing door 2650f1 configured with a shutter mechanism that can be taken out and removed from the game board 13 side. It is variable between an open state where the ball can enter the ball and a closed state where the ball cannot enter (difficult to enter the ball). In the closed state, the opening is completely covered by the opening/closing door 2650f1, and the ball is configured to be able to roll on the top of the opening/closing door. In addition, in the open state, the opening/closing door 2650f1 is configured to be evacuated inside the base member 2650c (inside the game board 13) and thereby evacuated from the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a. ing.

With this configuration, when the opening of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is closed, the ball rolls on the top surface of the opening/closing door 2650f1 of the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the second ball enters. The ball is configured to be guided toward the opening 640 side, and it is possible to cause the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 while playing the right-handed game during a right-handed game (during a potential state). This makes it possible to reduce the effort required to change the game method to a left-handed game during a potential state where small winning games are frequently executed. Therefore, the player can play the game more easily.

In addition, in the open state, the surface perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls flow can be configured as the opening of the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings, so that more game balls can be efficiently inserted into the winning opening for small winnings (small winning opening). You can win a prize in the winning prize opening) 2650a. Therefore, during the small winning game, the ball can be reliably won in the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

FIG. 163(a) is a sectional view taken along the line La-La shown in FIG. 163(b). As shown in FIG. 163(a), a magnetic sensor 2650c1 having a detection port 2650a1 is fixed to a base member 2650c such that the detection port 2650a1 is inclined toward the distribution channel side of the back cover body 2650e.

Next, with reference to FIG. 164, a configuration in which balls guided to the distribution channels of the back cover body 2650e are distributed to a normal discharge channel 2650e1 and a special discharge channel 2650e2, which will be described later, will be described.

FIG. 164(a) is a rear view of the back cover body 2650e showing a state in which the switching member 2650h is activated so that the balls are distributed to the special drainage channel 2650e2. As shown in FIG. 164(a), the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guide piece 2650h2 that guides the ball, and the switching member 2650h has a locking hole 2650h1 into which the protrusion of the link member 2650i is inserted and a guiding piece 2650h2 that guides the ball. It is pivotably supported from the back side. Here, the channel cover body 2650g is provided with an opening through which the guide piece 2650h2 can be inserted, and the guide piece 2650h is rotated into the distributed channel from the back side of the channel cover body 2650g. It is configured so that it can be placed anywhere.

As shown in FIG. 164(a), the ball guided into the distribution channel from the detection port 2650a1 is guided to the upper surface of the guide piece 2650h2 arranged diagonally downward to the left and guided to the special discharge channel 2650e2. . The special discharge channel 2650e2 has a fall route through which the incoming ball passes through a fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and a second normal discharge channel 2650e5 branched from the special discharge channel 2650e2. 2 normal switch) 2650e6, and a falling switch 2650e3 that can detect the passage of the ball that has entered the special discharge channel 2650e2, or a second normal switch 2650e6. The ball is detected and then discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 as an out ball.

Here, although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the above-described falling switch 2650e3 detects a ball during a small winning game, that is, when the ball passes through the falling route, the special symbol The high-probability state of is configured to transition (fall) to a low-probability state. That is, the falling gate (falling switch) 2650e3 is configured as a trigger for shifting the special symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state. In addition, the switching member 2650h serves as a flow path for the ball won in the small hit variable winning device 2650 during a small hit, as a flow path (special discharge flow path 2650e2) that can pass through the fall gate (fall switch) 2650e3, or as a flow path for the ball that has won the small hit variable winning device 2650 This is to set one of the flow paths (normal discharge flow path 2650e1) that cannot (difficult) pass through the gate (fall switch) 2650e3, and by turning on the flow path solenoid 2650k. The variable winning device 2650 for small winnings is configured to switch the flow path so that the winning ball flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (see FIG. 164(a)).

In the pachinko machine 10 used in this embodiment, the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to OFF during normal gaming, and the winning ball of the small winning variable winning device 2650 enters the special discharge flow path 2650e2. It is configured to flow downward. Therefore, even though a small winning game is not in progress, if a fraudulent state is detected in which the opening/closing door 2650f1 of the small winning variable winning device 2650 is opened and a ball is won, the illegally winning ball will fall into the switch. 2650e3.

In this way, the state in which the flow path solenoid 2650k is set to OFF is a state that is maintained for a long period of time in the pachinko machine 10, and the flow path configuration that is disadvantageous to the player (variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings) By creating a channel configuration in which winning balls can pass through the falling switch 2650e3, the power consumption of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced, and a penalty can be imposed on illegal games.

In this way, it is determined whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends depending on the falling route of the winning ball in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game, so the game can be played even during the small winning game. It can improve people's interest. In addition, when passing through the entrance of the special discharge flow path 2650e2 (the opening surface closed by the guiding piece 2650h2 of the switching member 2650h) from the small winning opening (small winning opening) 2650a of the small winning variable winning device 2650, The required time is at least 1 second.

Furthermore, a discharge confirmation switch (normal switch) 2650e4 configured with a magnetic sensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is provided at the end of the normal discharge flow path 2650e1. Thereby, it can be determined whether all winning balls have been ejected into the small winning variable winning device 2650 based on the total number of balls detected by the normal switch 2650e4, the second falling switch 2650e6, and the falling switch 2650e3. That is, the number of balls detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1 (the number of winning balls in the small winning variable winning device 2650) and the various switches provided in the three discharge areas (normal switch 2650e4, second fall switch 2650e6, fall switch 2650e3) detected by each of the balls (the number of balls ejected from the variable winning device 2650 for small winnings), it is determined whether or not there are balls remaining in the variable winning device 2650 for small winnings. can do.

In addition, the end timing of the small winning game (the ending condition of the small winning game (when there is a predetermined number of wins (10) in the small winning variable winning device 2650, or the opening scenario of the small winning variable winning device 2650 If all the game balls that entered the small winning variable winning device 2650 have not been ejected at the timing when the small winning ending period that is executed after the completion of the small winning winning device 2650 is completed, the small winning variable It is preferable to configure the system so that it is determined that there is an abnormality inside the winning device 2650, and the abnormality is notified to the outside or the game is stopped so that the jackpot game or the normal game is not started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with an abnormality occurring in a part of the pachinko machine 10, thereby preventing a secondary abnormality from occurring.

In this way, the winning ball of the small winning prize opening (small winning prize opening) 2650a of the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 is detected by the ball winning switch 2650c1, and based on this, the prize ball (winner) is given to the player as a bonus. In the embodiment, 10 winning balls (10 winning balls) are paid out for each winning ball, and the detected ball (passing the ball winning switch 2650c1) is used to determine whether the ball passes through the fall switch 2650e3. By making it possible to allocate whether or not to play, it is possible to determine whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol ends during the small winning game. Therefore, there is no need to provide a dedicated area for shifting the special symbol from a high probability state to a low probability state separately from the small winning variable winning device 2650, and the space on the game board 13 can be used effectively.

Next, the flow of the game in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. First, referring to FIG. 165, a description will be given of the flow of the game when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) wins a jackpot in a state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state. FIG. 165 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the special drawing 1 jackpot is won during the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 165, in the fifth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of special drawing 1 in a state where the variable probability state is set as in the fourth embodiment described above, the probability is The configuration is such that the state is set (see FIG. 165(a)). Then, by performing a right-handed game to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the period in which the probability state is set (while the special symbol 1 jackpot is fluctuating), the small winning game can be achieved. It is configured so that a frequently executed latent state game (RUSH game) is executed.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result). period) is configured so that there is no possibility of winning a jackpot in the lottery using the other special symbol (for example, special symbol 2). As a result, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1), a jackpot is won in the lottery of the other special symbol (for example, special symbol 2), and based on the jackpot winning of the other special symbol. By starting the jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the period during which the potential state is set from becoming shorter. In other words, in the fifth embodiment, the potential state game (RUSH game ) can be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a state where the high probability state of the special symbol is set, during the jackpot fluctuation period of one special symbol (for example, special symbol 1) (after winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery) , the period until the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result), even if the ball passes through the falling switch 2650e3 in the variable winning device 2650 for small winnings, the high probability state of the special symbol changes to the low probability state. The configuration is such that there is a period in which no transition occurs (fall invalid period).

Therefore, if a potential state is set during the special pattern 1 variation where a jackpot has been won, the special pattern 1 variation period will become the falling invalid period, so the high probability state of the special symbol will end. It is possible to execute a potential state game (RUSH game) without worrying about this. Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the potential state is set based on the jackpot winning of special drawing 1 (the potential state is set based on the establishment of the first potential transition condition). It is configured to determine whether or not to execute an invincibility effect (see FIG. 169) that informs the player that the player has been defeated (see FIG. 169).

By configuring to execute this invincibility effect (see Figure 169), it is possible to easily make the player understand that a fall invalidation period is set for the currently set potential state. This allows the user to play a potential state game (RUSH game) with peace of mind. Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, even in a potential state where a fall invalidation period is set, the above-mentioned invincibility effect is not executed in some cases. With this configuration, in a potential state game in which the invincibility effect (see FIG. 169) is not executed, a falling invalid period may actually be set, so it is possible to make the ball smaller during a small winning game. When the winning variable winning device 2650 wins a prize, the rate of falling can be reduced.

Then, when the variation time of the special symbol 1 jackpot variation has elapsed (see FIG. 165(b)), the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state. If the small winning game is not being executed at this timing, the jackpot game is started. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, if a small winning game is being executed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure 1 jackpot variation has elapsed, the start of the jackpot game is postponed until the small winning game ends. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with a game that is difficult to understand due to the jackpot game being started during the execution of the small win game.

During the interruption period from the elapse of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation shown in FIG. 165 until the start of the jackpot game, the same gaming state (normal state) as during the jackpot game is set. In addition, in the present fifth embodiment, if a small winning game is being executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation has passed, the start of the jackpot game is suspended (postponed) until the small winning game ends. ), but it is only necessary to control the small winning game and the jackpot game so that they are not executed at the same time.For example, the small winning game is executed at the timing when the fluctuation time of the special drawing 1 jackpot fluctuation has elapsed. In such a case, the small winning game in progress may be forcibly terminated.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted from illustration, in this embodiment as well as in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, a small hit is won with one special symbol (special symbol 2), and a small winning game is executed. During this period, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the other special symbol (special symbol 1) is suspended.

As explained above, in this embodiment, the potential state (advantageous potential state) set based on the jackpot winning of special symbol 1 is set as the falling invalid period, so the special symbol is not displayed to the player. It is possible to enjoy a potential state game (RUSH game) without worrying about the high probability state ending. Furthermore, a small winning game started during a potential state game (RUSH game) can be executed to the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 166, a description will be given of the flow of the game when the preset time saving number is used up in a state where the variable probability state is set as the game state. FIG. 166 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when all the time saving times are used up during the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 166, in the fifth embodiment, the number of time-savings is subtracted at the start of the change of the special symbol, so the value of the counter (time-saving counter 203f) for continuously setting the time-saving state is When it becomes 0, a potential state is set from the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed (see FIG. 166(a)). As shown in FIG. 166, the potential state that is set by completing the predetermined number of time reductions is configured such that a fall lottery during the potential state period is effectively determined. Therefore, in the small winning game executed during the potential state game (RUSH), there is a possibility that the high probability state of the special symbol will end due to the winning ball in the variable winning device (small winning variable winning device 2650). This results in a certain unfavorable potential state.

<About the content of the performance executed in the fifth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 167 to 169, the characteristic presentation contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fifth embodiment will be explained. Note that the effects that are executed during the variable probability state to indicate whether or not a probability state, which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, will be set are the same as those described in each of the above embodiments. Since it is the same as the embodiment, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 167(a), the contents of the effect displayed when a small win is won in a state where the probability state is set will be explained. FIG. 167(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents when a small win is won in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 167(a), a display mode indicating that the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1, and in the special symbol 2 display area Dm2. , a display mode ("341") indicating that the second special symbol (special symbol 2) has won a small hit is displayed. In the guidance display area Dm3, "Right hit" is displayed to guide the gaming method in the potential state.

Then, in the main display area Dm, the character 811 is displayed in a display mode to notify that the player has won a small prize, and the characters "GET" are also displayed. Further, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "The small winning game begins" indicating that the small winning game is to be started is displayed.

When the small winning game is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 167(b) is displayed. FIG. 167(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents during a small winning game. According to the diagram shown in FIG. 167(b), the special figure 1 display area Dm1 has the same display mode as in FIG. 167(a) described above, that is, a display indicating that the special figure 1 is displayed in a variable manner. Although the mode is displayed, in reality, during the small winning game, the subtraction of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is interrupted. Note that, unlike the display mode shown in FIG. 167(b), there are two states in which special drawing 1 is being displayed in a proper fluctuating manner (a state in which the fluctuation time is being subtracted) and a state in which the fluctuating display of special drawing 1 is interrupted. The display mode displayed in the special figure 1 display area Dm1 may be configured to be different between the state in which the subtraction of the fluctuation time is performed (the state in which the fluctuation time is not subtracted) and the state in which the variation time is not subtracted.

In the main display area Dm, a performance mode in which the character 811 runs from left to right and a treasure box 812 appears from the direction of movement is displayed. In this embodiment, an effect of opening a treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during a small winning game is executed, and depending on the display mode of the effect pattern 813 that appears from inside the treasure box 812, the current small winning It is configured to notify the player of the result of the winning game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168(a) and 168(b), display contents for showing the game results of the small winning game in the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 168(a) shows the display contents when the falling switch 2650e3 detects the ball and the high probability state of the special symbol ends as a result of winning a ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650 during a small winning game. FIG. 168(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example, and FIG. 168(b) is a display content when the falling switch 2650e3 does not detect a ball as a result of winning a ball in the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winning during a small winning game. It is a schematic diagram showing an example.

In FIG. 168(a), a production pattern 813 indicating a "cross mark" is displayed from inside the treasure box 812, and the character 811 indicates that the high probability state of the special symbol has transitioned to a low probability state during the small winning game. It is displayed in the failure display mode shown below. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment indicating that the potential state game (RUSH game) has ended and the gaming method returns to the left-handed game is displayed. In other words, by shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state during the potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) in which the RUSH game is played, the game state becomes probable. In order to transition from the state to the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), a comment for executing the left-handed game is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

On the other hand, FIG. 168(b) shows a display mode in which a performance symbol 813 indicating "V" is displayed from inside the treasure box 812 to notify the player that the RUSH game will continue to be played (i.e., the left The character 811 is displayed in a display mode in which the character 811 runs from the top to the right.

As explained above, in this embodiment, since the performance corresponding to the game result during the small winning game executed during the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed on the third symbol display device 81, The player can easily understand the progress of the potential state game (RUSH game) simply by understanding the content of the performance executed on the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in this embodiment, depending on the type of the small winning game executed during the potential state game (RUSH game), the ball that has won the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game is activated by the probability changing switch 2650e3. The rate (possibility) of flowing down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 provided with is made different.

Therefore, for example, on the display screen when a small win is won as shown in FIG. It is configured to display comments (for example, ``If you win a small hit and are unlucky, the RUSH ends'', ``If you are unsure, please stop launching''), and also a character that is displayed when you win a small hit. It is preferable to configure the display mode of 811 to be changed depending on whether the type of small win won this time is a small win that makes it easy to end the potential state game (RUSH game).

With this configuration, the player can select whether or not to make the variable winning device 2650 win a ball during the small winning game. In addition, in the fifth embodiment in which the potential state is set only for a predetermined period (special symbol 1 variation time), the number of small winning games that can be executed during the potential state is also limited, so the player On the other hand, it is possible to make the player play the game while thinking about whether to win a bonus (prize ball) or avoid the end of the potential state game (RUSH game) during the small winning game, which is a novel game. can provide sex.

Further, the type of the small winning game being executed may be notified to the player by the display mode of the treasure box 812 displayed on the display screen during the small winning game shown using FIG. 167(b). For example, it is better to configure the system so that the type of small win being executed is such that it is easy to end the potential state game (RUSH game), so that the old and tattered treasure box 812 is displayed. It is preferable to display comments according to the display mode of the treasure box 812. Furthermore, the display format displayed during a small win game is more specific than the content that indicates to the player the type of small win (RUSH game continuation expectation) when winning a small win. It is preferable to configure the system so that the player is informed of the content (with high reliability).

With this configuration, a player who has selected whether or not to award a ball to the variable prize winning device 2650 for a small winning in the current small winning game based on the display screen displayed when winning a small winning Since it is possible to show a more specific RUSH continuation expectation level, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the game content selected by the player is correct.

In this case, especially for the players who have chosen not to enter the ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650, it is emphasized that the RUSH game is of a small winning type that is difficult to end even if the ball is entered into the prize. It is best to configure the system so that it can be notified. Specifically, there is a small winning type determining means for determining the type of the current small winning game, and whether or not a ball has won a prize in the small winning variable prize winning device 2650 during a predetermined period after the small winning game is started. (or a means for determining that a right-handed game has been executed after winning a small win), and the determination result by the small win type determining means is a small win type that makes it difficult for the RUSH game to end. In this case, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings within a predetermined period after the start of the small winning game, it is better to fire the ball in the current small winning game to receive a benefit. It is preferable to provide a display means for displaying an inciting comment (for example, "You should have fired the ball" or "You weakling") indicating that you have obtained the ball.

As a result, it is possible to clearly inform the player that he/she has lost money by not placing a ball in the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings, so that the player can actively receive small winnings during the small winning game. It is possible to prompt the variable winning device 2650 to win a ball. In other words, if the RUSH game ends due to winning a ball in the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings, the game results indicate that the current selection was a failure, even if the RUSH game is not stimulated by the production. However, a player who chooses not to enter a ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650 cannot be aware of whether or not the current selection result was advantageous, so the display means does not display the selection result. By displaying the evaluation, it is possible for the player to easily understand whether the current selection was successful or not.

Furthermore, a display mode is provided to notify the player who has chosen not to enter a ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650 that the current small winning type is a small winning type that makes it easy to finish the RUSH game. (For example, "Stop firing and get it right" or "You have a good hunch"), or even if the current small win type is a small win type that makes it easy for the RUSH game to end, In this small winning game, an inciting comment (for example, ``You should have fired the ball'' or ``You weakling'') indicating that you would have been able to obtain a bonus by firing the ball may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 169, a description will be given of the display contents of an effect that notifies the user of a potential state (advantageous potential state) in which a falling invalid period is set. FIG. 169 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed at the end of a small win in an advantageous potential state. As shown in FIG. 169, when the currently set potential state is an advantageous potential state in which a falling invalid period is set, the same potential mode setting process as in the fourth embodiment described above (see FIG. 154) When the invincible mode is set as the current potential mode (refer to S4451), an effect mode ("invincible mode") indicating that the current potential state set for the player is an advantageous potential state is set. ) is displayed.

When entering the invincible mode, the display mode of the character 811 becomes a display mode exclusively for the invincible mode (a display mode surrounded by an aura). Then, the number of balls that passed through the falling gate 2650e3 during the invincible mode is displayed in the cumulative display mode 819 as "lucky points x 0". This cumulative display mode 819 corresponds to a command indicating the number of balls detected by the falling switch 2650e3 output from the main control device 110 (if a falling invalid period is not set, a command indicating the number of falls). A number will be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the situation in which the invincible mode has worked advantageously for the player.

Although not shown in the diagram of FIG. 169, the small hit count display 825 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment described above may be displayed. and the cumulative display mode 819 may be displayed together. In addition, a non-game count measuring means for measuring the number of small winning games in which the player did not win a ball into the small winning variable winning device 2650, and a display means displaying the number of times measured by the non-game counting means. It may be configured to do so.

With this configuration, for example, for all the small winning games executed during the potential game (RUSH game), the number of small winning games played by the player and the number of small winning games played by the player are displayed. Since the number of small winning games that were not executed can be easily grasped, this can be used as a reference for future RUSH games.

<About the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 170 to 173. First, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be explained with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 170, the ROM 202 of the fifth embodiment is different from the ROM 202 of the first embodiment described above in that a small winning type selection table 5 table 202da is provided in place of the small winning type selection table 202e. The difference is that an operation scenario storage area 202db is added. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of the small winning type selection 5 table 202da will be explained with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning type selection 5 table 202da. This fifth embodiment is configured so that only the second special symbol (special symbol 2) wins the small hit, and when the small prize is won in the lottery of the special symbol 2, the small winning type selection 5 table The small winning type is selected with reference to 202da.

In the small win type selection 5 table 202da, the corresponding small win type is defined for each value range of the small win type counter C5, and as shown in FIG. 171(a), the value of the small win type counter C5 is In the range of "0 to 14", "small win A" is defined in association. This "small win A" is a small win type in which the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set in the open state for 1.5 seconds after the opening period of 1.5 seconds has elapsed during the small win game. Note that after the 1.5 second open state has elapsed, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but this ending period is the same for all small winning types, so in Fig. 171 (a) Omitted.

Furthermore, "small win B" is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of "15 to 59". This "small win B" is made after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.1 seconds after the opening period of 0.5 seconds has elapsed during the small win game. This is a small winning type that sets an open state for 1.4 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. Note that after the second opening is set, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small winning types, it is omitted in FIG. 171(a).

A "small win C" is defined in association with a range in which the value of the small win type counter C5 is "60 to 79". This "small win C" is generated after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small win game. This is a small winning type that sets an open state for 0.1 seconds (second open setting) after an interval period of 1 second. Note that after the second opening is set, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small winning types, it is omitted in FIG. 171(a).

“Small win D” is defined in association with the value of the small win type counter C5 in the range of “80 to 99”. This "small win D" is achieved after the first attacker (first variable winning device 65) is set to the open state (first open setting) for 0.5 seconds after the opening period of 0.1 seconds has elapsed during the small win game. This is a small winning type that sets an open state for 1 second (second open setting) after an interval period of 0.3 seconds. Note that after the second opening is set, an ending period of 0.5 seconds is set, but since this ending period is the same for all small winning types, it is omitted in FIG. 171(a).

The operation scenario storage area 202db is a data area in which an operation scenario of the flow path solenoid 2650h during a small winning game is stored in advance, and the flow path solenoid 2650h performs the same operation regardless of the type of small win to be executed. One operational scenario is set to run.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 202db will be explained with reference to FIG. 171(b). FIG. 171(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the operation scenario defined in the operation scenario storage area 202db. As shown in FIG. 171(b), the operation scenario storage area 202db defines an operation scenario that is set in accordance with the start timing of the small winning game.

Specifically, it is stipulated that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to OFF until 1.4 seconds have passed from the start timing of the small hit, and from 1.4 seconds after the start of the small hit to the end of the small hit. It is specified that the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to be on during the period of . The operation scenario in which the operation content of the flow path solenoid 2650h is defined is a scenario in which a loop counter is incremented by 1 every time the main processing of the main controller 110 is executed every 4 milliseconds. It is managed by a counter (not shown).

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment, whether or not the winning ball flows down the special discharge flow path 2650e2 in the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings is determined based on the selected small winning type and the flow path solenoid. It is configured to be set variably depending on the operation scenario of 2650h. Furthermore, the internal structure of the small winning variable winning device 2650 branches the balls flowing down the special discharge channel 2650e2 into balls that pass through the falling gate 2650e3 and balls that do not pass through the fall gate 2650e3 (second normal switch 2650e6). It is composed of

Specifically, in a small win game where "small win A" is set as the small win type, the opening period (1.5 seconds) is the period in which the flow path solenoid 2650h is set to OFF (1 minute from the start of the small win). .4 seconds), the ball does not pass through the falling route, and a small winning game is executed which is most advantageous to the player for whom the opening period is set long.

In a small winning game in which "small winning B" to "small winning D" are set as the small winning type, the first open period is the timing at which the winning ball can pass through the falling route. Furthermore, "Small win C" and "Small win D" have a short opening period of 0.1 seconds (shorter than "Small win B"). Since the first release period is as long as 0.5 seconds (longer than "small win B"), it becomes a small win game in which the ball easily passes through the falling route.

In addition, "Small win C" has the shortest period of 0.6 seconds during which the first attacker (first variable prize winning device) 65 is released in one opening operation, so it is the most disadvantageous small win for the player. It becomes a winning game. In addition, in the present fifth embodiment, it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball fired in the right-handed game to enter the small winning variable winning device 2650 and reach the distribution channel where it is distributed by the channel solenoid 2650h. The system is configured such that the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol at the time of winning a small hit is 0.5 seconds.

Therefore, by stopping the right-handed game immediately after the third symbol indicating that the special symbol lottery result is a small win is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 167(a)), the small win game is started. At this point, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a ball fired before stopping the right-handed game wins a prize in the small winning variable prize winning device 2650.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be explained with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 172, the RAM 203 of the fifth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the fourth embodiment described above in that a small hit winning counter 203da, a fall passing counter 203db, and a passing flag 203dc are added. are doing. The other elements are the same, and the same elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The small hit winning counter 203da is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have won in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game, and is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have won in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game. If it is determined that the timing at which the sensor (ball detection switch 2650c1) is on is during the opening period of the small winning prize opening 2650a (S3302 in FIG. 174: Yes), the value is added by 1, and after the addition A winning number command corresponding to the information indicating the value of is set (S3305 in FIG. 174). Then, in the small win control process 5 (see S2271 in FIG. 176), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win game (S2511 in FIG. 176: Yes), the value of the counter is cleared (see S2271 in FIG. 176). S2571).

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in the fifth embodiment, the potential state continues on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the number of winnings command set corresponding to the value of the small winning winning counter 203da. It is configured to accumulate the number of winning balls in the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the set period. Thereby, the number of winning balls in one potential state game (RUSH game) can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, the player has a game feature in which he or she selects whether or not to place a ball into the variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings during a small winning game. Depending on the player's selections, even if the number of small winning games is the same, the cumulative value of the number of balls won by the small winning variable winning device 2650 may vary greatly. Therefore, detailed game results can be provided by displaying the number of winning balls on the small winning variable winning device 2650 instead of the number of times the small winning game has been executed.

It should be noted that both the number of winning balls and the number of times the small winning game has been executed are displayed on the variable winning device 2650 for small winning mentioned above on the third symbol display device 81, or the number of balls won during one small winning game is displayed. The average value of the number of balls may be displayed, or the number of winnings may be displayed as a winning history for each small winning type of the small winning game executed.

The falling pass counter 203db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the falling gate 2650e3 during the small winning game, and the falling switch 2650e3 detects the ball in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175). If so (S3402: Yes in FIG. 175), the value is incremented by 1 (S3403 in FIG. 175), and the number of passes command is set with information corresponding to the value after the addition (S3404 in FIG. 175). Then, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small winning game (S2511 in FIG. 176: Yes), the value of the counter is cleared (S2571 in FIG. 176).

In this embodiment, when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to ON, that is, when an advantageous potential state is set, the number of balls that have passed through the fall route is always counted. . As a result, when the "invincible mode" is set as the probability mode, if the probability state of the special symbol is not in an advantageous probability state, the high probability state of the special symbol will pass through the route (fall route) that will transition to the low probability state. The number of balls played can be notified to the player (see cumulative display mode 819 in FIG. 169).

The passage flag 203dc is used to indicate that the fall switch 2650e3 has detected a ball when the detection of the ball by the fall switch 2650e3 is effectively processed (when the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF). This flag is set to ON to indicate that the falling switch 2650e3 has detected a ball.

This passing flag 203dc is set when it is determined in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) that the ball passes through the falling gate 2650e3 and the state update restriction flag 203ca is set to OFF (S3405 in FIG. 175). :No), it is set to on (see S3408 in FIG. 175). When the passing flag 203dc is set to ON, the process of determining whether a new ball has passed through the falling gate 2650e3 in the falling gate passing process (see S172 in FIG. 175) is skipped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the process for causing the high probability state of the special symbol to fall is executed multiple times during one small winning game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 173 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 173, the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment has a winning number counter 223da and a passage number counter 223db, in contrast to the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. The difference is that , and are added, and the rest are the same. Identical elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The winning number counter 223da is a counter for measuring the number of balls won by the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game, and is used by the main control device 110 in the ball passing related process (see S4582 in FIG. 179). When it is determined that the number of winnings command has been received from (S8101 in FIG. 179: Yes), the value is added by 1, and the winning number for display is displayed in order to display the information corresponding to the value after the addition on the third symbol display device 81. Set a number command (see S8106 in FIG. 179).

Then, when the gaming state shifts from the probable state to the normal state, the value of the counter is cleared. In other words, once a potential state is set, the number of winnings counter 223da is calculated based on the number of balls that have won in the small winning variable winning device 2650 in a plurality of small winning games that are executed until the potential state ends. It is configured so that the number can be measured cumulatively.

The passing number counter 223db is a counter for measuring the number of balls that have passed through the falling gate 2650e3, and determines that a passing number command has been received from the main controller 110 in the ball passing related processing (see S4582 in FIG. 179). In this case (S8107 in FIG. 179: Yes), the value is added by 1 if the current potential state is an advantageous potential state (see S8110 in FIG. 179).

<About the control process of the main controller in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 174 to 176. The control process of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment is replaced with the small win control process (see FIG. 55) with respect to the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. 176), small winning entrance passage processing (see Fig. 174), and falling gate passage processing (see Fig. 175). Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 174, the small winning entrance passage process (S171) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the details of the small winning entrance passage process (S171).

In the small winning entrance passage process (S171), first, it is determined whether the ball passage sensor is on (S3301). If it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S3301: No), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined whether the small winning opening is in the open period (S3302). If it is determined that the small winning opening is open during the opening period (S3302: Yes), a small winning entrance passage command is set (S3303). The small winning entrance passing command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the audio lamp control device 113 during the external output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 201. Sent. 1 is added to the value of the small winning prize counter 203da (S3304). Next, in the processing of S3304, a winning number command is set based on the value of the small winning winning counter 203da after addition (S3305), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if it is determined that the opening period for the small winning opening is not in progress (S3302: No), an error command is set (S3306), and the flow path solenoid is set to OFF (S3307). , this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the fall gate passing process (S172) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fall gate passing process (S172).

In the fall gate passage process (S172), first, it is determined whether the passage flag 203dc is on (S3401). If it is determined that the pass flag 203dc is on (S3401: Yes), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passing flag 203dc is not on (S3401: No), it is determined whether or not the fall gate is passed (S3402). If it is determined that there is no passage through the fall gate (S3402: No), this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a pass through the fall gate (S3402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the fall pass counter 203db (S3403), and the number of passes is calculated based on the value of the fall pass counter 203db after the addition. A command is set (S3404). Next, it is determined whether the status update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405). If it is determined that the status update restriction flag 203ca is on (S3405: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the status update restriction flag 203ca is not on (S3405: No), it is determined whether or not the falling gate passing period is valid (S3406). If it is determined that the falling gate passage is valid (S3406: Yes), the probability variation flag 203g is set to OFF (S3407), and the passing flag 203dc is set to ON (S3408). Next, a fall command is set (S3409), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that the fall gate passage is not valid (S3406: No), an error command is set (S3410) and the process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176, small hit control processing 5 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit control processing 5 (S2271). Small hit control processing 5 (S2271) is different from the small winning control processing (S2205) in the first embodiment described above, when it is determined in the processing of S2511 that it is the timing to end the small winning (S2511: No ) The difference is that processing is added to clear the values of the small winning prize counter 203da and the fall passage counter 203db (S2571) and set the passage flag 203dc to OFF (S2572). Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the fifth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 177 to 179. The control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment is a state command processing instead of the state command processing (see FIG. 62) in contrast to the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. 5 (see FIG. 177), the difference is that hit-related processing 5 (see FIG. 178) is executed instead of hit-related processing (see FIG. 63), and ball passage-related processing (see FIG. 179), but otherwise the same processing. is executed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 177, state command processing 5 (S4291) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the contents of status command processing 5 (S4291). In the status command processing 5 (S4291), after executing the process of S4411 in contrast to the status command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment described above, in place of the process of S4454, the probable mode storage area 223cb, small The difference is that a process (S4471) for clearing the number of wins counter 223cc, the number of winnings counter 223da, the number of passes counter 223db, the fall flag 223cd, and the short-time notification flag 223ce is added. Other processes are the same as the status command process 4 (S4281) in the fourth embodiment, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, hit-related processing 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the contents of win-related processing 5 (S4292). The hit-related process 5 (S4292) is different from the hit-related process (S4216) in the fourth embodiment described above in that a process related to ball passage is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the winning related process 5 (S4292), if it is determined in the process of S4505 that a prize ball command has not been received from the main controller 110 (S4505: No), it is determined whether a ball passing related command has been received. (S4581). If it is determined that a ball passage-related command has been received (S4581: Yes), a ball passage-related process (S4582) is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ball passage-related command has not been received (S4581: No), the process is immediately terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, a description will be given of the ball passage related process (S4582) which is one process in the hit related process 5 (S4292) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ball passage related process (S4582).

In the ball passing related process (S4582), first, it is determined whether or not a winning number command has been received from the main controller 110 this time (S8101). If it is determined that the winning number command has been received (S8101: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 223da (S8102), and the probability mode stored in the probability mode storage area 223cb is read out. Execute (S8103). Next, it is determined whether the potential mode read in the process of S8103 is an invincible mode (S8104). If it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8104: No), a suggestive effect indicating the end of the potential state is set (S8105), a winning number command for display is set (S8106), and this process ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S8104, if it is determined that the read potential mode is the invincible mode (S8104: Yes), the process of S8105 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S8106.

On the other hand, in the process of S8101, if it is determined that the winning number command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S8101: No), it is determined whether or not the passing number command has been received (S8107). If it is determined that the number of passes command has been received (S8107: Yes), the value stored in the status setting area 223j is read out (S8108). Next, in the process of S8108, it is determined whether the read value is a value indicating the probability of time saving omission (S8109). If it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the time-saving omission probability (S8109: No), 1 is added to the value of the passage number counter 223db (S8110). On the other hand, in the process of S8109, if it is determined that the read value is not a value indicating the time-saving omission probability (S8109: Yes), the process of S8110 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S8111.

Next, reading of the probable mode stored in the probable mode storage area 223cb is executed (S8111). Next, it is determined whether the potential mode read in the process of S8111 is the invincible mode (S8112). If it is determined that the mode is not invincible (S8112: No), a suggestive effect suggesting the end of the potential state is set (S8113), a passing number command for display is set (S8114), and this processing ends. . On the other hand, in the process of S8112, if it is determined that the read potential mode is the invincible mode (S8112: Yes), the process of S8113 is skipped, the process of S8114 is executed, and this process ends.

As explained above, in the fifth embodiment, the operation contents (opening operation pattern) of the small winning game to be executed are configured to differ depending on the type of small winning (small winning type). The rate at which the balls won by the small winning variable winning device 2650 during the small winning game pass through the falling gate 2650e3 is configured to vary depending on the opening operation pattern to be executed.

With this configuration, the content of the small winning game to be executed can be predicted in order to prevent the high probability state of the special symbol from falling and to play a game that aims to win benefits (prize balls) through the small winning game. The player can select a game while playing the game.

In addition, similar to the fourth embodiment described above, in the probability state that is set during the period when one special symbol is performing a jackpot variation, the other special symbol variation (lottery) may win a small hit. Even if the ball passes through the fall gate 2650e3, the high probability state of the special symbol is configured not to shift to the low probability state.

As a result, the state in which the potential state is set is divided into an advantageous potential state in which the high probability state of the special symbol does not fall (it is difficult), and a high probability state of the special symbol that is more likely to fall than that advantageous potential state. An unfavorable potential state can be set.

In each of the above embodiments, the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f (the process of subtracting the number of time saving times) is performed at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol variation start process (see S208 in FIG. 33)). ), the first special symbol variation (lottery) and the second special symbol variation (lottery) can be executed at the same time for a predetermined number of times in a gaming machine. , it is configured to execute a time saving game (a game in which a high probability state of normal symbols is set), but for example, when setting the value of the time saving counter 203f to 100 (when setting the number of time saving times to 100 times). ), there was a problem that the period from the start of the 100th special symbol variation to the start of the 101st special symbol variation was in a non-time saving state (normal symbol low probability state).

During the period when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, it is a period in which it is possible to execute a lottery (variation) that is advantageous to the player even in the lottery (variation) of the regular symbol that is different from the special symbol. The period from the start of the 100th special symbol variation until the start of the 101st special symbol variation, that is, the period until the special symbol variation is executed for the number of times that exceeds the predetermined time saving number. There was a problem in that the setting of a non-time-saving state caused discomfort to the player.

However, if the process of updating the value of the time saving counter 203f (processing of subtracting the number of time saving times) is configured to be updated at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends (timing when the symbol confirmation period ends), In a gaming machine that can simultaneously execute a first special symbol variation (lottery) and a second special symbol variation (lottery), a time-saving state is set to cause the special symbol variation (lottery) to occur more than a predetermined time-saving number of times. There was a problem that it could be executed in a state where the

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, a time-saving end condition is set for the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) corresponding to the special symbol lottery (100th time-saving) that is executed when the value of the time-saving counter 203f becomes 0. (first time-saving end condition), set a time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) for the other special symbol (for example, second special symbol), and set the time-saving end condition for the two set time-saving end conditions. Of these, the time saving state may be terminated based on the time saving termination condition that is satisfied first.

Specifically, when a predetermined period (for example, 100 times of time saving) is set as the period in which the time saving state is set, the special symbol variation corresponding to the final change of the time saving state (for example, 100th time saving) ends. A first time-saving ending condition that is satisfied by this, and a second time-saving ending condition that is satisfied when a condition for starting a new special symbol variation (for example, the 101st special symbol variation) after a predetermined period of time has passed. If the first time saving end condition is established first, that is, the 100th special symbol variation period (or symbol confirmation period) ends before the 101st special symbol variation starts. If so, the time saving state is ended at that point.

On the other hand, if the second time-saving end condition is satisfied before the first time-saving end condition is satisfied, that is, before the 100th special symbol fluctuation period (or symbol confirmation period) ends (the special During symbol variation), if the start condition for the 101st special symbol variation is satisfied, the time saving state may be configured to end before the 101st special symbol lottery is executed.

By configuring in this way, when the time-saving state is set as the gaming state, while preventing special symbol fluctuations (lotteries) from being executed more than a predetermined number of times, the maximum period of time can be maximized. It can be set as a time saving state. Therefore, a state advantageous to the player can be set as long as possible as a normal symbol lottery (variation).

In addition, each of the above embodiments includes a probability change counter 203aa for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the special symbol is set, and a time saving counter 203f for measuring the period in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. However, in each of the above embodiments, instead of the process of interrupting the subtraction of the variable probability counter 203aa (the process of interrupting (skipping) the measurement), a time saving counter is used. It is also possible to apply the process of interrupting the subtraction of 203f, or to perform the opposite process.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. In the second embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 10 is of a so-called simultaneous variation type that can simultaneously execute the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and further includes: The gaming state is configured to be varied during a symbol confirmation period (period in which the first symbol is stopped and displayed) during which the special symbol lottery results are displayed. In other words, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where the variable probability state is set, the start timing of the symbol confirmation period in which the lottery result is displayed (the first symbol indicating the jackpot) The gaming state is configured to shift from a variable probability state to a potential state at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

By configuring in this way, during the symbol confirmation period of special symbol 1 (the period from when the first symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed), the second special symbol in the potential state is (Special figure 2) It was possible to execute the game and improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, in order to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the jackpot game and the special symbol lottery game are played at the same time and the player cannot concentrate on the jackpot game, the jackpot game While the game is being executed (from the time when the opening period of the jackpot game is set until the end of the ending period of the jackpot game), the special symbol variation (lottery) is configured not to be executed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the special symbol lottery (variation) is not executed during the jackpot game, so that the player can concentrate on the jackpot game. However, since the special symbol lottery (fluctuation) is not performed during all periods during the jackpot game, the period in which the special symbol lottery is executed is limited and the gaming efficiency (number of special symbol lottery executions per unit time) decreases. There was a problem with this.

On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, even during the period from the execution of the jackpot game until the start of the round game (opening period of the jackpot game), special symbol fluctuations on the side that has not won the jackpot are configured to run. Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during that opening period. The lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed at the same time.

In other words, even during a jackpot game, a round game in which a ball can enter due to a jackpot game (a period in which the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state where it is easy to enter a ball) During periods other than the game (for example, opening period, interval period, and ending period), the special symbol lottery is configured to be able to be executed. With this configuration, players can be made to pay attention to the jackpot game during the round game in the jackpot game, and pay attention to special symbol fluctuations during other periods, so that it is possible to provide the player with an efficient game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the player is configured so that there is no chance of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent players from being provided with excessive jackpot games. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (other than a jackpot), the player can win a small win that can give a small amount of privilege (prize ball) to the player. ing. Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different probabilities of winning a small hit. Therefore, the degree of advantage can be made different between the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol.

<About the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 180 to 182. FIG. 180 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 180, the ROM 202 of the sixth embodiment differs from the ROM 202 of the second embodiment described above in that an open scenario table 202ea is added, and other elements are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The open scenario table 202ea is a data table in which game contents during a jackpot game or a small win game (hereinafter referred to as a win game) are stored, and the scenario of the win game to be executed is determined according to the win type. remembered. Specifically, the length of the period from the start of the winning game until the start of the first round game (opening period), the length of the round game period, and the variable winnings that are open in the round game. The type of device, the number of times a round game is executed, the length of an inter-round game (interval period), and the length of an ending period set after all round games are completed are stored.

Note that the information (winning game content) that is read out in order to execute the winning game corresponding to the winning jackpot or small winning only needs to be predetermined, and can be read using the open scenario table 202ea as in this embodiment. The information may be stored, or the techniques used in each of the embodiments described above may be employed.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 181. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the main controller 110 RAM 203 in the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 181, the RAM 203 of the sixth embodiment has a jackpot state flag 203ea, a small win state flag 203eb, a special symbol variable flag 203ec, and a jackpot interruption flag 203ed, in contrast to the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above. , is different in that a special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is added.

The jackpot status flag 203ea is for indicating the status during the jackpot game, and includes the type of special symbol winning the jackpot and the current jackpot play status (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, during the ending period). This is a flag that is referenced when determining which one of the following. Here, the contents of the jackpot status flag 203ea will be explained with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the jackpot status flag 203ea. As shown in FIG. 182(a), the jackpot status flag 203ea is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured such that the gaming status can be specified by the status of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the special symbol that won the jackpot this time is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0001" (Fig. 182 (a) ), the lower 4 bits are "0010" (written as "02" in Figure 182(a)), and during the round game (interval), the lower 4 bits are The 4 bits are "0011" (written as "03" in Figure 182(a)), and during the ending period (ED), the lower 4 bits are "0100" (written as "04" in Figure 182(a)). Become.

The special symbol that won the jackpot this time is the second special symbol (special symbol 2), and during the opening period (OP) of the jackpot game, the lower 4 bits are "0101" (in Fig. 182(a), " During the round game (round), the lower 4 bits are "0110" (written as "06" in Figure 182(a)), and during the round game (interval), the lower 4 bits are "0111" (described as "07" in FIG. 182(a)), and during the ending period (ED), the lower 4 bits become "1000" (described as "08" in FIG. 182(a)).

Further, when a jackpot game is not being executed (when the jackpot flag 203o is set to OFF), the lower 4 bits are "0000" as an initial state. The jackpot state flag 203ea is configured so that its value is updated according to the jackpot scenario that is updated in the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188) executed during the jackpot game, and the jackpot state flag 203ea is set to the state at the time of winning. The jackpot status flag 203ea is updated based on the information stored in the storage area 203j, that is, the type of special symbol winning the jackpot and the contents (jackpot game state) indicated by the updated jackpot scenario.

As described above, since the value of the jackpot status flag 203ea is configured to be updated based on the jackpot scenario, for example, there is a means for storing the updated content of the jackpot status flag 203ea and the stored content. A configuration may also be used in which a means for determining (past history) is provided and the presence or absence of an abnormality with respect to the jackpot game is determined based on the determination result of the past history of the jackpot status flag 203ea. Specifically, for example, from the values that can be set if a jackpot is won by the lottery of special drawing 1 (values from "01" to "04" shown in FIG. 182(a)), if a jackpot is won by the drawing of special drawing 2. If it is determined that the value has been updated to the value that can be set when the player wins (values from "05" to "08" shown in FIG. 182(a)), it is determined that the jackpot game is in an abnormal state, and It is preferable to configure it so that an abnormality notification is performed. This makes it possible to accurately determine whether the player has played an illegal game during the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the value of the jackpot status flag 203ea is configured to be varied depending on the execution content of the jackpot control process 6 (see S2272 in FIG. 188), but it is possible to determine the current jackpot gaming situation. For example, a means for determining whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring, a means for detecting the open state of the variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), may be provided, and the value of the jackpot status flag 203ea may be set based on the determination (detection) result of each means, or the content of the image displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 may be determined. It may be configured such that a means is provided to determine the current jackpot game situation based on the determination result of the means.

When the value set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is updated, a status command to indicate this is set and output to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 determines the current jackpot gaming situation by receiving a status command indicating that the value set in the jackpot status flag 203ea has been updated, and performs various performance modes according to the jackpot gaming situation. is set.

In the sixth embodiment, the special symbol type winning the jackpot is also determined as the jackpot game situation, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol type may be configured not to be discriminated. With this configuration, the number of types for classifying jackpot game situations can be reduced.

The small win status flag 203eb is used to indicate the status of the small win game, and indicates the current small win game status (during the opening period, during the round game, during the interval period, during the ending period). This is a flag that is referenced when determining. Here, the contents of the small hit status flag 203eb will be explained with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit state flag 203eb. As shown in FIG. 182(b), the small win status flag 203eb is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured such that the gaming status can be specified by the status of the lower two bits.

Specifically, during the opening period (OP) of a small winning game, the lower two bits are "01" (described as "01" in FIG. 182(b)), and during the round game (round), the lower two bits are becomes "10" (described as "02" in FIG. 182(b)), and during the ending period (ED), the lower two bits become "11" (described as "03" in FIG. 182(b)). Then, when a small winning game is not being executed (when the medium winning flag 203p is set to OFF), the lower two bits are "00" (described as "00" in FIG. 182(b)). .

In this embodiment, since the round game is configured to be executed only once as a small winning game, the value indicating the interval period is deleted from the above-mentioned jackpot status flag 203ea, and the round game is executed only once as a small winning game. Since the configuration is such that there is no possibility of winning a small hit in the lottery of one special symbol, the value for determining the type of special symbol winning a small win is also deleted. The value of this small win status flag 203eb is configured to be set according to the update contents of the small win scenario that is updated in the small win control process 6 (see S2273 in FIG. 193). When the value of 203eb is updated, a status command is set to indicate the value of the updated small hit status flag 203eb, and is output to the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 grasps the current small winning game situation by receiving the status command that includes information indicating the value of the small winning status flag 203eb, and determines the performance mode according to the current situation. Set.

The special symbol variation possible flag 203ec is a flag for indicating whether the current situation is a state in which a new special symbol variation can be executed, and is turned on when a new special symbol variation can be executed. It is set.

The jackpot interruption flag 203ed is a flag for interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario during the jackpot game, and is set to ON when the update of the jackpot scenario is interrupted. This jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to ON, for example, when the lottery result of a special symbol executed during the opening period of a jackpot game becomes a small win and the small win game is executed.

In the sixth embodiment, a new special symbol lottery (variation) is executed in a part of the state during the jackpot game (state where the round game is not being executed), and the special symbol lottery When winning a small win, the small win game is executed. During this small winning game, the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to ON, and the jackpot scenario is configured not to be updated.

With this configuration, even if a small win is won during the opening period of the jackpot game, for example, the small win game can be reliably executed without starting the jackpot round game. In addition, even if a small win is won within a predetermined period such as the opening period of a jackpot, the opening period of the jackpot is not subtracted (updating the jackpot scenario), so many small winning games are executed. The player can be made to play the game with great enthusiasm.

In addition, in the present sixth embodiment, when a small winning game is executed during a jackpot game, updating of the jackpot scenario is interrupted to ensure that the small winning game is executed, but this is not limited to this. For example, without interrupting the update of the jackpot scenario, you can forcibly end the small winning game based on the timing when the jackpot round game is executed, or the small winning game can be stopped until the jackpot round game ends. It may be configured to temporarily interrupt the process.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to ON based on the timing when the small win game is executed, so the jackpot scenario is updated during the fluctuation time of the special symbol winning the small win. be done. As a result, in addition to winning a small win during a jackpot game, it is possible for the player to play the game with the expectation that a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is set as short as possible will be set. On the other hand, the content of the special symbol lottery (variation) can be made to pay close attention.

In this case, it is preferable that the variation time suggestion notification indicating the set variation time is executed at the timing when the variation of the special symbol is started, regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol variation executed this time. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player whether or not a short variable time has been set, thereby increasing the performance effect. Further, even if the special symbol lottery result is a loss, the next special symbol lottery can be executed immediately by setting a short variable time. In other words, the variable time suggestion notification does not indicate whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit or miss (win/fail determination result), but is a notification that indicates whether or not the lottery result is advantageous to the player.

In addition to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, the jackpot interruption flag 203ed may be set on, for example, based on the timing at which the special symbol variation that wins the small jackpot is executed. Thereby, it is possible to solve the problem that a jackpot round game is executed while a special symbol variation winning a small win is being executed, and a game that is difficult to understand for the player is provided.

In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, we have provided a means for determining the remaining period of the opening period of the jackpot game and a means for determining the variation time of the special symbol, so that this special symbol lottery (variation) will be performed during the opening period. If it is determined that the special symbol lottery will end within the opening period, the performance mode will be set based on the lottery results (results of judgment) of the special symbol lottery, and if it is determined that the current special symbol lottery (variation) will not end within the opening period. , it may be configured to set a performance mode corresponding to a case where the lottery result (accuracy determination result) of the special symbol lottery is a failure. With this configuration, even if the lottery result of a special symbol variation that is forcibly terminated due to the execution of a jackpot round game is a small win, the special symbol variation can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. can be stopped.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the sixth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 183 to 194. The control process of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment is a special symbol variation stop process 2 (see FIG. 97) in place of the control process of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment described above. Process 6 (see Fig. 183), first special symbol variation start processing (see Fig. 33) is replaced by first special symbol variation start processing 6 (see Fig. 185), second special symbol variation start processing (see Fig. 39). In place of the second special symbol variation start process 6 (see Figure 186), in place of the jackpot control process (see Figure 53), jackpot control process 6 (see Figure 188), and in place of the jackpot end process (see Figure 54), the jackpot ends Process 6 (see FIG. 192), execution of small hit control process 6 (see FIG. 193) instead of small hit control process (see FIG. 55), variation condition determination process (see FIG. 184), round execution process (see FIG. 189) and the addition of a small winning end process (see FIG. 194). Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, special symbol variation processing 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing the contents of special symbol variation processing 6 (S181). In the special symbol variation process 6 (S181), a variation condition determination process (S291) is added to the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) of the second embodiment described above, and the first special symbol variation start process First special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 185) instead of (see FIG. 33), and second special symbol variation start processing 6 (see FIG. 186) instead of second special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 39) They differ in that they execute. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the special symbol variation process 6 (S181), first, a variation condition determination process (S291) is executed. Details of the variation condition determination process (S291) will be described later with reference to FIG. 184. Next, it is determined whether the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292). If it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is not on (S292: No), the process moves to S202. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure variable flag 203ec is on (S292: Yes), the process moves to S204.

Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the variation condition determination process (S291), which is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation condition determination process (S291).

In the variation condition determination process (S291), first, it is determined whether the special symbol variation prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501). When it is determined that the special figure variation prohibition flag 203ee is on (S3501: Yes), the special figure variation possible flag 203ec is set to off (S3506), and the process moves to S3507. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is not on (S3501: No), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 203o is on (S3502). If it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is on (S3502: Yes), the information set in the jackpot state flag 203ea is read out (S3503). Next, in the process of S3503, it is determined whether the information of the read jackpot status flag 203ea is "01" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period for a jackpot (S3504). If it is determined that the read information is "01" or "05" (S3504: Yes), the special symbol variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3505), and the process moves to S3507. On the other hand, in the process of S3504, if it is determined that the read information is not "01" or "05" (S3504: No), the special symbol variable flag 203ec is set to OFF (S3506), and the process of S3507 to move to.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the medium jackpot flag 203o is not on (S3502: No), it is determined whether the medium small win flag 203p is on (S3507). When it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is off (S3507: No), the special figure variation flag 203ec is set on (S3512), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3507, if it is determined that the small hit flag 203p is on (S3507: Yes), the information set in the small hit state flag 203eb is read out (S3508). Next, it is determined whether the information of the small hit status flag 203eb read in the process of S3508 is "01" (S3509). When it is determined that the information is "01" (S3509: Yes), the special symbol variable flag 203ec is set to ON (S3510), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read information is not "01" (S3509: No), the special symbol variable flag 203ec is set to OFF (S3511), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293) is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. I will explain about it. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293). The first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293) is different from the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) in the second embodiment in that information on the jackpot status flag 203ea is read out. . Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol variation start process 6 (S293), first, reading of the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is executed (S391). Next, it is determined whether the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is "00" or "05". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the second special symbol jackpot or outside the jackpot execution period (S392). If it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is "00" or "05" (S392: Yes), the process moves to S301. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is neither "00" nor "05" (S392: No), this process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294) is one process in the special symbol variation process 6 (S181) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth embodiment. I will explain about it. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294). The second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294) reads out the information of the jackpot status flag 203ea, and the jackpot of the first special symbol Add processing to determine whether it is the opening period or the round period. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the second special symbol variation start process 6 (S294), first, reading of the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is executed (S971). Next, it is determined whether the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is "00" or "01". That is, it is determined whether it is the opening period of the first special symbol jackpot or outside the jackpot execution period (S972). If it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is "00" or "01" (S972: Yes), the process moves to S901. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information set in the jackpot status flag 203ea is not "00" or "01" (S972: No), the process of S902 is executed and the process ends.

Next, electric accessory opening/closing processing 6 (S2271) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 187. FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the contents of electric accessory opening/closing process 6 (S2271).

In the electric accessory opening/closing process 6 (S2271), first, it is determined whether there is an opening setting (S3601). If it is determined that there is an opening setting (S3601: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to ON (S3602), the jackpot status flag 203ea is set to the corresponding value (S3606), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, in the process of S3601, if it is determined that there is no open setting (S3601: No), it is determined whether there is a closed setting (S3603). If it is determined that there is a closing setting (S3603: Yes), the solenoid of the corresponding attacker is set to OFF (S3604), the process of S3606 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3603, if it is determined that there is no closure setting (S3603: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the closure scenario (S3605). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the closure scenario (S3605: Yes), the process of S3606 is executed and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S3605, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the closure scenario (S3605: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 188, jackpot control processing 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot control processing 6 (S2272).

In jackpot control processing 6 (S2272), first, in the processing of S2301, if it is determined that a jackpot scenario is set (S2301: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351) . If it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2351: Yes), this process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2351: No), the jackpot scenario is updated (S2302).

Next, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a jackpot (S2302). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot (S2303: Yes), an opening command is set (S2304), a value corresponding to the jackpot status flag 203ea is set (S2352), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2303, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start a jackpot (S2303: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to start a new round (S2305). If it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S2305: Yes), round execution processing (S2353) is executed, and this processing ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 189, the round execution process (S2353) which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 189 is a flowchart showing the contents of the round execution process (S2353).

In the round execution process (S2353), first, it is determined whether the current time is the start timing of the first round (S3701). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the first round (S3701: Yes), a jackpot interruption process is executed (S3702), and the process moves to S3703. Details of the jackpot interruption process (S3702) will be described later with reference to FIG. 190. On the other hand, in the process of S3701, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the first round (S3701: No), a value corresponding to the jackpot status flag 203ea is set (S3703), and a process corresponding to the jackpot scenario is set. (S3704), and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, the jackpot interruption process (S3702), which is one process in the round execution process (S2353) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot interruption process (S3702).

In the jackpot interruption process (S3702), first, it is determined whether the small hit flag 203p is on (S3801). If it is determined that the small hit medium flag 203p is on (S3801: Yes), the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set on (S3802), the jackpot interruption command is set (S3803), and the process moves to S3805. . On the other hand, in the process of S3801, if it is determined that the small win flag 203p is not on (S3801: No), an opening command indicating the start of a small win is set (S3804), and the process moves to S3805.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 variation time counter 203m or the special figure 2 variation time counter 203n is greater than 0, that is, whether the special symbol is being varied (S3805). If it is determined that the special symbol is changing (S3805: Yes), the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed as a missing symbol (S3806), the special symbol fluctuation prohibition flag 203ee is set to ON (S3807), and the book is displayed. Finish the process. On the other hand, in the process of S3805, if it is determined that the special symbol is not changing (S3805: No), this process is directly ended.

Returning to FIG. 188, the explanation will be continued. On the other hand, in the process of S2305, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S2305: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the round (S2307). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the round (S2307: Yes), the specific winning hole is set to be closed (S2308), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2307, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the round (S2307: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the special electric power operation (S2354). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the operation of the special electric power (S2354: Yes), an ending execution process (S2355) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 191, the ending execution process (S2355) which is one process in the jackpot control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the contents of the ending execution process (S2355).

In the ending execution process (S2355), first, a value corresponding to the jackpot status flag 203ea is set (S3901), an ending command is set (S3902), and this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 188, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S2354, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the operation of the special electric power (S2354: No), it is determined whether it is the timing to end the operation of the role-linked operating device (S2356). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the operation of the role-linked operating device (S2356: Yes), jackpot end processing 6 (S2357) is executed and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2356, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the operation of the role-linked operating device (S2356: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 192, jackpot end processing 6 (S2357) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot end processing 6 (S2357). In the jackpot end process 6 (S2357), after setting the status command (S2406) for the jackpot end process (S2312 in FIG. 54) of the second embodiment described above, "00" is set in the jackpot status flag 203ea. The difference is that processing (S2451) is added. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 193, small hit control processing 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit control processing 6 (S2272). In the small win control process 6 (S2272), a process for setting a value corresponding to the small win status flag 203eb is added to the small win control process (S2205 in FIG. 55) of the second embodiment described above, The difference is that a small winning end process (S2584) is executed instead of the process of S2512. Since other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the small hit control process 6 (S2272), in the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the small hit (S2503: Yes), an opening command is set (S2504), and it corresponds to the small hit status flag 203eb. A value to be used is set (S2581), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2503, if it is determined that it is not the small winning start timing (S2503: No), it is determined whether it is the starting timing of the small winning round (S2505). If it is determined that it is the start timing of the small winning round (S2505: Yes), a small winning operation setting process (S2506) is executed, a value corresponding to the small winning state flag 203eb is set (S2582), and the main processing end.

In this embodiment, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is the ending timing (S2509: Yes), an ending command is set (S2510) and a value corresponding to the small hit status flag 203eb is set ( S2583), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2509, if it is determined that it is not the ending timing (S2509: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the small win (S2511). If it is determined that it is the timing to end the small win (S2511: Yes), a small win end process (S2584) is executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 194, the small hit end process (S2584) which is one process in the small hit control process 6 (S2272) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing the details of the small winning ending process (S2584).

In the small winning ending process (S2584), first, it is determined whether the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591). When it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is on (S2591: Yes), the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is set to OFF (S2592), and the special symbol variation prohibition flag 203ee is set to ON (S2593). Next, the updated value of the jackpot scenario is subtracted by 1 (S2594), the small win medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S2595), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S2591, if it is determined that the jackpot interruption flag 203ed is not on (S2591: No), the process of S2592 to S2594 is skipped, the process of S2595 is executed, and this process is ended.

As explained above, in the sixth embodiment, even during the period from the execution of the jackpot game until the start of the round game (opening period of the jackpot game), special symbol fluctuations on the side that has not won the jackpot is configured to run. Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery and a jackpot game corresponding to the won jackpot is started (when the opening period of the jackpot game is set), during that opening period. The lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is executed at the same time.

In other words, even during a jackpot game, a round game in which a ball can enter due to a jackpot game (a period in which the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 is in an open state where it is easy to enter a ball) During periods other than the game (for example, opening period, interval period, and ending period), the special symbol lottery is configured to be able to be executed. With this configuration, players can be made to pay attention to the jackpot game during the round game in the jackpot game, and pay attention to special symbol fluctuations during other periods, so that it is possible to provide the player with an efficient game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the player is configured so that there is no chance of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent players from being provided with excessive jackpot games. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (other than a jackpot), the player can win a small win that can give a small amount of privilege (prize ball) to the player. ing. Therefore, the player can be made to pay close attention to the lottery results of the special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured to have different probabilities of winning a small hit. Therefore, the degree of advantage can be made different between the second special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the first special symbol and the first special symbol lottery executed during the jackpot game of the second special symbol.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 233. In each of the embodiments described above, the jackpot game is executed only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game. The configuration is such that a jackpot (so-called 2-type win) game is executed.

In addition, although the details will be described later, as a path for the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, a first flow path that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through a specific area 650V is provided. It is configured to provide a passage ta (see FIG. 196) and a second passage tb (see FIG. 196) through which the ball can easily pass through the specific region 650V. As a result, the player pays close attention to which channel the ball is flowing down during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the balls are distributed to the above-described first flow path ta or second flow path tb by the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, so the operation of the electric accessory 3640a It is also possible to make the player interested in the game. Furthermore, when the ball flows down the second channel tb that easily passes through the specific area 650V, the ease with which the ball enters the V winning device 650 is configured to vary depending on the variation time of the special symbol. ing.

Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbols to be set is configured to vary depending on the set gaming state and the type of small winning won. With this configuration, when winning a small win corresponding to a jackpot in which a time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot game, a game state (advantageous time-saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V and a jackpot end It is possible to set a gaming state (disadvantageous time saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when a small win corresponding to a jackpot to which a time saving state is later given is won.

In this embodiment, by using the above-mentioned advantageous time saving and disadvantageous time saving configurations, once a jackpot is won (first hit), at least three jackpots are executed including the first hit. It is configured so that a gaming state advantageous to the player continues. By making it possible to set a gaming state in which it is guaranteed that a plurality of jackpot games will be executed in this way, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, although the detailed configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198, in the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that a small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entry port 3640, which is the trigger for executing the lottery. Then, based on the fact that the ball that has flown down on the electric accessory 3640a enters the second ball entry port 3640, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state, and at that time, the ball that has flown down on the electric accessory 3640a enters the second ball entry port 3640. The ball is distributed into the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb depending on the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball is flowing down.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the balls located on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a are distributed to the second flow path tb that is advantageous to the player. The configuration is such that when the ball is launched, the ball easily flows into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, in order to cause the balls to flow into the second channel tb while the second special symbol lottery is being executed, it is necessary to continuously fire the balls toward the game area of the game board 13. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of trying to obtain an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 195. FIG. 195 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 195, the seventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is greatly different.

Specifically, a channel unit 660 is provided in the right side area of the game board 13, a second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is provided below the channel unit 660, and a second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 is provided below the channel unit 660. In the winning device (V winning device) 650, a specific area 650v that can provide a jackpot game based on the passage of a ball is provided, and the second variable winning device is provided at the lower center of the game board 13. 650, the second ball entry port 640, and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 to which the electric accessory 64a is attached are removed. The other configurations are the same as the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the configuration of the flow path unit 660 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 196 to 198. FIG. 196 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the flow path unit 660, and FIG. 197(a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state). FIG. 197(b) is a perspective view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state). FIG. 198(a) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 198(b) is a plan view schematically showing the ball flow when the electric accessory 3640a is FIG. 2 is a perspective view schematically showing a ball flow in an open state (protruding state).

In addition, to explain the terminology indicating the variable state of the electric accessory 3640a used in the seventh embodiment, the closed state of the electric accessory 3640a refers to the flow path for letting the ball enter the second ball entry port 3640. This is a term used to indicate a state in which (the flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) is closed, that is, a state in which the electric accessory 3640a is buried in the game board 13, and is a functional expression. In some cases, the term "restriction state" (a state in which entry of the ball into the second ball entry port 3640 is restricted) is sometimes used.

In addition, the open state of the electric accessory 3640a means a state in which the flow path (flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a) for allowing the ball to enter the second ball entry port 3640 is open, that is, the electric This is a term used to indicate the state in which the accessory 3640a protrudes from the game board 13, and as a functional expression, the term is called a permissible state (a state in which the ball is allowed to enter the second ball entrance 3640). may also be used.

As shown in FIG. 196, the flow path unit 660 forms a first flow path 660a forming a first flow path ta and a second flow path tb as ball paths through which the balls flow down toward the V winning device 650. A second passage 660b, and a first inlet 661 into which the balls that have flowed down approximately in the center of the right side area flow, and a first inlet 661 through which the balls that have flowed down from the first inlet 661 flow down toward the electric accessory 3640a. a first guiding path 661a (see FIG. 197(b)), a second inlet 662 into which the balls flowing down the left side of the right side region flow; A third passage 660c that allows the balls to flow down toward the lower area of the game board 13, a third inlet 663 into which the balls that have flown down the right side of the right side area flow, and a third inlet 663 that allows the balls that flowed from the third inlet 663 to flow down the game board 13. It is composed of an outlet 66 for discharging to the outside.

The balls flowing down the right side area are moved through the flow path unit while changing the flow path by a plurality of nails (for example, nails 660k (see FIG. 195) that are flow path variable members) disposed above the flow path unit 660. 660, about 55% of the balls flowing down the right side area flow into the first inlet 661, about 40% flow into the second inlet 662, and about 5% flow into the third inlet. It is configured to flow into the inflow port 663. Note that the above-mentioned distribution ratio shows the average value when a right-handed game is played. In this case, the proportion of balls flowing into the second inlet 662 increases. In this way, by allowing the player to control the firing intensity in the right-handed game, the inflow rate to each inflow port provided in the flow path unit 660 can be varied, thereby giving the player the ability to It is possible to provide the fun of varying the firing intensity so that an advantageous game can be executed.

In addition, the balls flowing down the second inlet 662 are configured to be distributed into two channels formed in the depth direction of the pachinko machine 10, and the balls distributed to the channel on the near side (approximately 90 %) flows down the third passage 660c provided with the through gate 67, and the balls (approximately 10%) distributed to the back passage (not shown) flow into the out port 66 and are sent to the pachinko machine 10. It is configured so that it is discharged to the outside. In this way, in the seventh embodiment, the position close to both ends of the electric accessory 3640a that is opened when the lottery result of the normal symbol is a win (the position that is formed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state) An out port 66 is provided (a partition wall is provided to separate the space from the out port 66) at a position close to each of the upstream end and downstream end of the spherical flow path.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily understand the movable range of the electric accessory 3640a that is operated when a winning game with normal symbols is executed. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the opening operation.

In the schematic diagram shown using FIG. 196, the partition wall for partitioning the space between the outlet 66 and the movable area of the electric accessory 3640a is in contact with the electric accessory 3640a, but in reality , so that a gap of less than half a sphere is created. Thereby, even if the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a is performed multiple times, it is possible to suppress damage to the electric accessory 3640a or the partition wall due to friction. Furthermore, since the size of the gap is less than the size of half a ball, it is possible to prevent the balls from spilling downward through the gap.

Next, the ball flow in a right-handed game when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. As shown in FIG. 196, the ball flowing in from the first inlet 661 flows down toward the electric accessory 3640a, but when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state), the ball flows over the electric accessory 3640a. The liquid flows down to the first passage 660a provided below the first guide passage 661a (see FIG. 197(b)) without flowing down. This first passage 660a is a passage in which a first flow passage ta is formed. The first flow path ta is configured so that the time required for the ball to pass is approximately 0.5 seconds, and the ball can be placed in the V prize in a shorter time than the ball flowing down the second flow path tb, which will be described later. Device 650 can be reached.

In addition, most of the balls that have flowed into the second inlet 662 (approximately 90%) pass through the through gate 67 without being concerned with the state of the electric accessory 3640a, and are closer to the front side than the second passage 660b, which will be described later. It flows down the third passage 660c formed on the front side from the player's viewpoint when viewing the pachinko machine 10 from the front, and is discharged to the lower area of the game board 13. Further, a portion (approximately 10%) of the balls that have flowed into the second inlet 662 pass through a fourth passage (not shown) provided on the back side of the third passage 660c and flow into the out port 66.

In this way, by configuring a plurality of ball passages using the space in the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to form a flow path through which the balls flow three-dimensionally. It is possible to configure more ball paths within this limited range, and to provide a gaming machine that can realize a ball flow that will keep players entertained.

Similar to the second inlet 662 described above, the ball that enters the third inlet also passes through the outlet 66 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 without being concerned with the state of the electric accessory 3640a. . Here, with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197(a), the structure of the upper surface (lower surface of the ball flow) of the electric accessory 3640a will be described. As shown in FIG. 196, the electric accessory 3640a is configured to form a downward slope from the upper right direction to the lower left direction when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a The ball is configured so that it flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a from the upstream side (upper right side) to the downstream side (lower left side) due to its own weight.

A delay member is provided on the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a to delay the speed at which the ball flows down the upper surface. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 197(a), a first delay member 3641 and a second delay member 3642 are provided, and the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is caused by the first delay member 3641, the second delay member 3642, The ball enters the second ball entry port 640 provided on the downstream end side of the electric accessory 3640a while contacting the second delay member 3642. In addition, in this embodiment, the installation member 3643 is provided as a delay member for delaying the speed of the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a.

This installation member 3643 is not attached to the electric accessory 3640a but directly attached to the flow path unit 660. Therefore, it is always arranged at a fixed position without being involved in the operation of the electric accessory 3640a. In this way, a delay member for slowing down the speed of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 3640a is attached to the first delay member 3641, the second delay member 3642, and the flow path unit 660 attached to the electric accessory 3640a. By constructing the attached installation member 3643, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state) (see FIG. 198(a)), the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a can be meandering. When the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state (buried state) (see FIG. 197(a)), it is impossible for the ball to flow down on the electric accessory 3640a. (difficult) to function as a means for suppressing flow down.

Here, to specifically explain the above-mentioned flow-down suppressing means, when the electric accessory 3640a is in a closed state (see FIG. 197(a)), that is, in a state where it is difficult to enter the ball into the second ball entry port. As shown in FIG. 197(a), since the electric accessory 3640a is buried in the back side of the game board 13, the first delay member 3641 on the electric accessory 3640a is buried in the back side of the game board 13. It will be located in As a result, the distance tc between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643 becomes narrower (approximately 5 mm) such that a ball cannot pass between the first delay member 3641 and the installation member 3643. Become). Similarly, the distance td between the second delay member 3642 and the installation member 3643 is such a distance (approximately 7 mm) that the ball cannot pass through.

As a result, even if a ball is illegally placed on the electric accessory 3640a while the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball will still enter the second ball entrance 3640. This can be suppressed. Furthermore, when the electric accessory 3640a is placed in the open state (protruding state), it is no longer necessary to bury each delay member on the electric accessory 3640a inside the game board 13. The opening of the game board 13 provided can be narrowed, and it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering the inside of the pachinko machine 10 through the opening of the game board 13.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, even when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the electric accessory 3640a is not completely buried in the game board 13, but only a portion (the first delay member 3641, the first delay member 3641, the The electric accessory 3640a is configured to be in a closed state when the second delay member 3642) is exposed. Thereby, even if the electric accessory 3640a is located in the closed state, the player can easily understand where the electric accessory 3640a is placed. In addition, since each delay member provided on the electric accessory 3640a is exposed, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (projected state), how does the ball flow down on the electric accessory 3640a? It is possible to make the player understand whether or not the game will be played.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, the movement of the ball (ball flow on the electric accessory 3640a) that can be executed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state is changed from the movement of the ball that can be performed when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. Since the player can be made aware of this in advance, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the state in which the electric accessory 3640a is actually in the open state and the ball is flowing down over the electric accessory 3640a.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), as shown in FIG. reach. Then, it flows down toward the second ball entrance 3640 while meandering along the top surface of the electric accessory 3640a and along the shape of each delay member.

Here, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the open state (protruding state), the spherical flow path formed on the electric accessory 3640a will be explained with reference to FIG. 198(a). A meandering ball flow path is formed in which the ball discharged from the first guide path 661a reaches the second ball entry port 3640. It takes about 2 seconds for the ball to pass through this meandering ball flow path, and the ball passes through the flow path from the outlet of the first guiding path 661a to the back side of the first delay member 3641 (upstream part ZA on the flow path). The time required for the ball to pass through the flow path from the back side of the first delay member 3641 to the second ball entry port 3640 (flow path downstream part ZB) is approximately 1.2 seconds. It is configured to be seconds.

In this embodiment, the operation termination conditions for the electric accessory 3640a include a first general power termination condition that is satisfied when 3 seconds elapse after the electric accessory 3640a operates to the open state (protrusion state), and a second A second normal power termination condition that is satisfied when one ball enters the ball entrance 3640 is set, and when any of the normal power termination conditions are satisfied, the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state. (buried state).

The ball staying on the electric accessory 3640a when the electric accessory 3640a moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) is a first passage 660a that is visible below the electric accessory 3640a, Alternatively, it is configured to fall into any of the second passages 660b. That is, the moving distance (moving distance in the depth direction) when the electric accessory 3640a moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) is at least the length of one ball (11 mm). In this embodiment, the moving distance of the electric accessory 3640a is 15 mm, which is larger than one ball (11 mm) and smaller than two balls (22 mm).

With this configuration, when the electric accessory 3640a is in the closed state, the ball located on the electric accessory 3640a can be reliably dropped downward, and the two balls can be Since the balls do not continue to fall in the depth direction of the machine 10, it is possible to prevent balls from clogging inside the first passage 660a and the second passage 660b.

The spheres staying in the upstream part ZA of the meandering ball channel (see FIG. 198(a)) stay in the first passage 660a and in the downstream part ZB of the channel (see FIG. 198(a)). The ball is configured to fall into the second passage 660b. In this embodiment, due to the inertia acting on the ball flowing down over the electric accessory 3640a, the ball moves from the open state (protruding state) to the closed state (buried state) at a speed such that it falls directly below. It is configured as follows.

In the seventh embodiment, the electric accessory 3640a is in an open state (protruding state) and the ball is located between the second delay member 3642 and the second ball entry opening 3640. When the ball moves to the closed state (buried state), the ball collides with the second delay member 3642 that moves toward the second ball entry port 3640, and the ball enters the second ball entry port 3640. It consists of In this way, depending on the position of the ball on the electric accessory 3640a, the operation of moving the electric accessory 3640a from the open state to the closed state is a guiding operation for guiding the ball to the second ball entrance. be able to.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to fire 100 balls per minute, and if you fire 100 balls per minute in a right-handed game, one out of every two balls will be fired. A ball flows into the first inlet 661 . In other words, since one out of every two balls fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds flows into the first inlet 661, the interval at which the balls flow into the first inlet 661 is approximately 1.2 seconds on average. seconds.

As described above, since the downstream part ZB of the flow path is configured such that it takes 1.2 seconds for the ball to pass, if the above-mentioned second normal power termination condition is satisfied, that is, the second ball entry port In the case where the electric accessory 3640a moves to the closed state (buried state) due to the ball entering the ball into the second ball entry port 3640, if the ball is continuously fired into the right-handed hitting area, the second ball entry port 3640 Since the electric accessory 3640a operates to the closed state with the ball that entered the first inlet 661 next to the ball that entered the flow path downstream part ZB, the ball enters the second path 660b. It can make it easier to fall.

On the other hand, if a game is played by intentionally timing the ball to be launched, it is difficult for other balls to fall into the second path 660b while the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640. can do. Therefore, in order to cause the balls to enter the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 that is advantageous to the player, it is possible to encourage the player to shoot the balls continuously.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, 3 seconds is set as the first normal power end condition for the electric accessory 3640a as described above, but when the gaming state is the normal state, In this case, the first normal power termination condition is configured to be set to 0.2 seconds. This 0.2 seconds is set to be shorter than the time (0.8 seconds) required for the flow to flow down the upstream part of the meandering ball channel formed on the electric accessory 3640a. Even if a right-handed game is played during the normal state, the ball will not be allowed to enter the second ball entry port 3640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent advantageous benefits from being given to a player who plays an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game during the normal state.

In addition, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down into the second passage 660b, so by letting the ball flow down into the second passage 660b while the V winning device 650 is opened by some method, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down into the specific area 650V. It is possible to suppress illegal acts of passing the ball.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball passes through the second passage 660b, which is advantageous to the player, for a player who is not playing a right-handed game during the normal state or who has not played the right-handed game continuously during the time-saving state. Although the second passage 660b is provided on the downstream side of the electric accessory 3640a in order to make it difficult for the electric accessory 3640a to be moved, the second passage 660b may be provided on the upstream side of the electric accessory 3640a. In addition, there may be three or more passages for receiving balls that have fallen from above the electric accessory 3640a, or a plurality of receiving ports for receiving balls that have fallen from above the electric accessory 3640a may be provided, and each receiving port can be used to receive the balls that have fallen from the top of the electric accessory 3640a. The configuration may be such that the probability of passing through the specific region 650V is varied. Furthermore, a plurality of paths are provided through which the ball falling from the top of the electric accessory 3640a can pass through the specific area 650V, and the time required for each path to reach the specific area 650V (time required for the ball to win in the V winning device 650) It may be configured to have different values.

Returning to FIG. 195, the explanation will be continued. A first variable winning device 65 is provided below the channel unit 660. This first variable winning device 65 is opened when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, as in the first embodiment described above. In addition, 90% of the balls fired in the right-handed game during the jackpot game (balls that flowed into the first inlet 661 (50%) and balls that flowed into the second inlet 662 (40%)) are Since both of them are configured to win in the first variable winning device 65, even if the channel unit 660 is provided upstream (above) the first variable winning device 65, the jackpot game can be executed smoothly. I can do it. In addition, since the balls that have flowed into the first inlet 661 and the balls that have flowed into the second inlet 662 flow down different flow paths and reach the first variable prize winning device 65, a plurality of balls can be simultaneously 1 It is possible to make it easier to win a prize with the variable winning device 65.

<About the production content in the seventh embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, before explaining the characteristic effects executed in the seventh embodiment, the gameplay of the seventh embodiment will be briefly explained. In the seventh embodiment, when a player wins a jackpot by drawing a special symbol, or wins a small hit by drawing a special symbol, the ball passes through a specific area (specific area 650V) during the small winning game. In this case, a jackpot game is executed (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type).

In addition, it is configured such that a small win is not won in the lottery using the first special symbol, and a small win is won only in the lottery using the second special symbol. The second ball entrance 3640, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol lottery, is configured so that a ball can be entered only when the time saving state is set as the gaming state. When a jackpot game is executed, the time saving state is set at a predetermined rate after the jackpot ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the V winning device 650 (see FIG. 195) is configured to be opened in the small winning game, and the ball is passed through a specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650. To have a first channel (first channel 660a) that is difficult to pass through and a second channel (second channel 660b) that is easy to pass through, and to vary which channel the ball flows down depending on the game content. It is configured so that it can be done.

Furthermore, the present seventh embodiment has an advantageous small win in which a time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game that is set correspondingly, and a disadvantageous small win in which a time-saving state is not set, and the type of the small win is The configuration is such that the variable time set is varied accordingly. In addition, there is an advantageous time-saving state in which it becomes easier to enter the ball into a specific area 650V if you win an advantageous small win as a time-saving state, and a disadvantageous state in which it becomes easier to enter the ball into a specific area 650V if you win an unfavorable small win. It is configured to be able to set the time saving state.

In this embodiment, the second flow path (second passage 660b) that allows the ball to flow down toward the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 based on the start of variation of the second special symbol. It is configured to set a state in which the ball can flow down, and is configured to vary the variation time of a special symbol set at the time of winning a small hit between an advantageous time-saving state and a disadvantageous time-saving state. In the state where the advantageous time saving state is set, the ball flowing down the second flow path enters the V winning device 650 when winning the advantageous small hit, and the ball flowing down the second flow path when winning the disadvantageous small hit. The variation time of the special symbol corresponding to each small winning type is configured so that the ball that flows down does not win a prize in the V winning device 650.

With this configuration, when the advantageous time saving state is set, the ball will not pass through the specific area 650V even if an unfavorable small win is won, so the time saving state is set across the jackpot game. be able to. That is, if a jackpot (first win) in which an advantageous time-saving state is set after the jackpot is won in the first special symbol drawing, at least two more jackpot games (three if the first win is included) are executed. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 199(a), a description will be given of the effect executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won during the time saving state. FIG. 199(a) is a display screen showing an example of an effect executed when a normal symbol (second symbol) is won during the time saving state. As shown in FIG. 199(a), while the time saving state is set, the words "Right-handed" are displayed in the guidance display area Dm3 to prompt the player to play the right-handed game. A symbol for indicating the lottery result of the normal symbol is displayed in the variable area Dm5.

The symbols displayed in this ordinary symbol fluctuation area Dm5 are displayed in a variable manner in response to the lottery (variation) of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) that is executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 (see FIG. 195). It is stopped and displayed in a display mode to show the current lottery result in synchronization with the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) stops. FIG. 199(a) shows a display mode "display mode imitating two circles" indicating that the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a win. In addition, in the embodiment, when the lottery result of the normal symbol (second symbol) is a loss, the "display mode imitating two cross marks" is stopped and displayed in the ordinary symbol variation area Dm5, and the normal symbol (second symbol) ), a "display mode in which circles and crosses are alternately and variably displayed" is displayed in the general figure variation area Dm5.

Then, as shown in FIG. 199(a), if a winning result is won in the general drawing lottery, an effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit crosses a bridge 851 and heads toward a race venue 852. This effect causes the ball to flow down onto the electric accessory 3640a that is operated to the closed state (protruding state) based on winning the lottery, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640. This shows a game, and the operation status of the electric accessory 3640a is expressed using the construction state of the bridge 851 displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and when the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640. The display contents are set so that whether or not the ball will be pitched is expressed by whether or not the character 811 reaches the race venue 852.

In this way, by using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to perform performances that are reminiscent of actual gameplay, it is possible to notify the player of complex gameplay in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the state of FIG. 199(a), neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol has started to change, and neither the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 nor the special symbol 2 display area Dm2 has started to change. A display mode indicating that no special symbol variation is being performed is displayed. The words "Race Preparation" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds, indicating the content of the future performance.

Here, to briefly explain the flow of the performance contents executed during the time saving state in this embodiment, the performance is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 while the time saving state is set. If you win in the normal symbol lottery (common symbol lottery), as shown in FIG. 199(a), the ball flows down onto the electric accessory 3640a that is in the open state (projecting state) and enters the second ball entrance 3640. A performance corresponding to a game in which the ball enters the ball (direction to the race venue) is executed.

Then, when the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 and the second special symbol starts to change, the character 811 reaches the race venue and the race effect shown in FIG. 199(b), which will be described later, is executed. Ru. The content of this race performance depends on the lottery results of the second special symbol being executed (results of judgment, variable time), and the state of the ball flowing into the second passage 660b, which makes it easier for the ball to enter the specific area 650V. is set.

Thereafter, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the small winning game, an effect is executed in which the character 811 comes in first place as a race result (see FIG. 201(b)). In this way, each game executed during the time saving state, that is, a game in which a normal symbol wins a winning game, a game in which a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640, a game in which a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640, and a small winning in a second special symbol lottery. It becomes possible to notify the player of the game results of the game to cause the ball to pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game and the game to cause the ball to pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game, using a series of performances. Therefore, the player can understand the game result by looking at the performance (race performance) executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, so it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. .

Here, we will return to FIG. 199(b) to continue the description of the display screen during race performance. In the state where the display shown in FIG. 199(a) is executed, that is, in the time saving state, the normal symbol (second symbol) is won and the electric accessory 3640a is variably operated to the open state (allowed state). In this state, when the ball flows down over the electric accessory 3640a and enters the second ball entrance 3640, the race start screen shown in FIG. 199(b) is displayed.

The race start screen displays a display mode in which a character 811 modeled after a rabbit runs a race against a rival 860 modeled after a turtle. The state shown in FIG. 199(b) is a state in which the second special symbol variation is executed for the first time after the time saving state is set, and the second special symbol (special symbol) is in the special symbol 2 variation area Dm2. A display mode (dynamic display mode) indicating that Fig. 2) is being displayed in a variable manner is displayed, and the words "9 race entries remaining" are displayed as the remaining number of time reductions in the remaining time reduction number notification area Dm6. . Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Finish in first place" are displayed to guide the performance result of the race performance corresponding to the game result that is advantageous to the player.

Next, when the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed during the time saving state and the lottery result is a loss, the screen shown in FIG. 200(a) is displayed. In FIG. 200(a), a stop display mode of "3, 4, 6" indicating that the lottery result of special chart 2 is a loss is displayed in the special chart 2 fluctuation area Dm2, and at the same time, in the main display area Dm , a presentation mode indicating that the race presentation has ended (a display mode in which the character 811 falls into the river and cannot finish) is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, the words "Look forward to next time" are displayed to indicate that the current special figure 2 fluctuation was not an advantageous gaming result for the player and to indicate that the time-saving state will continue. .

On the other hand, if the lottery of special drawing 2 is a win, the screen shown in FIG. 200(b) or FIG. 201(a) is displayed. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in this embodiment, the ball passage is configured so that two channels are formed for the ball to flow down toward the V winning device 650, which is opened when a small hit is won. The time required for the ball to reach the V winning device 650, which is opened during the small winning game, is changed depending on which channel the ball passes through. Furthermore, the ease with which the ball passes through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is configured to vary depending on the channel through which the ball passes.

Therefore, during the special symbol fluctuation when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is won in the lottery, the channel in which the ball is flowing down toward the V winning device 650 is detected, and the detection result is The presentation mode is configured to differ based on the following. Specifically, when the ball flows down the second path (delay path) 660b that is advantageous to the player during the small winning variation of special drawing 2, the production mode shown in FIG. 200(b) is displayed, and the special In the case where the ball flows down the first passage (normal passage) 660a which is disadvantageous to the player during the small win fluctuation in FIG. 2 (when the ball does not flow down the second passage 660b), the situation is shown in FIG. 201(a). The performance mode is displayed.

In FIG. 200(b), in order to show that the ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V in the small winning game that is executed after the special figure 2 variation in execution is stopped and displayed, the main display is used as a race effect. An effect in which the character 811 runs ahead of the rival 860 is executed in the area Dm. Then, the display mode of the character 811 is changed to a display mode different from normal (display mode wrapped in an aura), and the player is informed that there is a high possibility that the character 811 will come in first place in the current race production. To do this, the words "Speed UP" will be displayed. Further, the words "Great Chance" are also displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a comment to indicate that there is a high possibility that the character 811 will come in first place in the current race performance.

On the other hand, in FIG. 201(a), as a race performance, a performance mode in which a character 811 and a rival 860 aim for the goal while engaging in a dead heat is displayed. In this way, even if the lottery results of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are of the same small winning type, the result of the lottery will be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 due to the difference in the channel through which the ball flows down. By differentiating the presentation mode, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the game result will be advantageous to the player. It is possible to make players interested in the contents of a series of performances (race performances).

Then, when the ball passes through the specific area 650V during the small winning game, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game will be executed after the small winning game ends, the performance mode shown in FIG. 201(b) is displayed. be done.

On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game, the performance mode shown in FIG. The presentation mode will be displayed.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, there is a first time saving state (time saving state A) which is advantageous to the player as a time saving state, and a second time saving state which is disadvantageous to the player than the first time saving state. state (time saving state B) can be set, and when time saving state A (first time saving state) is set, a small win of the small winning type corresponding to the jackpot game to which the time saving state is given. It is configured such that the ball passes through a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 only when the player wins.

In other words, in a state where time-saving state A is set, when a jackpot game is executed based on a small winning win, the configuration is such that a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player is reliably set after the jackpot game ends. are doing.

Therefore, in the seventh embodiment, in order to suggest (notify) the player that the time saving state A has been set, the performance mode shown in FIG. 202(b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. configured to be displayed. FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the time saving state A is set.

As shown in FIG. 202(b), when the time saving state A is set, an effect mode is set in which an undersea race is executed in which a background showing the seabed is set. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment indicating that the time-saving state will be set again after the end of the jackpot game is displayed: ``If you win the race, you will get a gorgeous prize!?''. By suggesting that the time-saving state A is set by varying the background when the race is executed in this way, it is possible to set a performance mode that is easy for players to understand, and also to Since effects can be shared, the amount of image data used to set effects can be reduced.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in this embodiment, in addition to the normal background and the underwater background described above, multiple background images can be set as the background for the performance during the race. For example, a desert You can set a background that imitates a forest, a sea of trees, a city, etc. Each background is set at a different rate depending on the currently set time saving state (time saving state A, time saving state B). Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which time-saving state is currently set based on the background type set as the background of the performance during the race.

Furthermore, a measuring means is provided to measure the number of times that the time-saving state A is set in succession, and a special function that can be set only when the number of times that the time-saving state A is continuously set reaches a predetermined number (for example, three times) is provided. A background may also be provided. This provides a sense of security that a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player has been set, and also provides a sense of superiority by letting other players know that the game results are special. .

Although the characteristic presentation mode executed in the seventh embodiment has been described above, the content described above is merely an example, and other presentation modes may be displayed. For example, in the performance examples explained with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202, performance examples are shown in which a performance mode corresponding to the game result is set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance mode is likely to be set depending on the game result. It may be configured to have different values.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a state in which the production mode shown in FIG. 199(b) is displayed, that is, in a state in which a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 during the time saving state (the special figure 2 variation has started). , the display mode of the rival 860 may be variably set based on the lottery result of the current special drawing 2 drawing. Rival 860 is displayed in the case of winning, the case of winning an unfavorable small win (small win C) which is disadvantageous to the player rather than the advantageous small win, and the case of not winning the small win (winning in the losing case). The configuration may be such that the types of characters set as modes are different.

By configuring this way, when the special chart 2 variation starts, the player is provided with information that allows him to predict the future game content, that is, the lottery result of the special chart 2 lottery, and the type of small winning won. can be provided.

In addition, when the special figure 2 variation is started, if a production mode (display mode) suggesting the lottery result of the current special figure 2 variation is displayed (set), the contents of the displayed production mode can be grasped. However, a problem arises in that the game is continued only when the lottery result is advantageous to the player. However, in this embodiment, when entering the ball into the second ball entrance 3640, The ball is configured so that it is difficult to pass the ball to the specific area 650V during a small winning game unless the ball is shot.

As a result, even if you display (set) a performance mode (display mode) that suggests the lottery result of the current special figure 2 variation when the special figure 2 variation starts, after confirming the display mode, Since it is possible to prevent the player from deciding whether or not to enter the ball into the V winning device 650 during the small winning game, the above-mentioned problem can be solved.

In addition, since the race shown in FIG. 199(b) can be started from the timing when the special figure 2 variation is started, the period during which the race is executed (the production execution period during the race) can be lengthened. The performance effect can be enhanced. Specifically, since the period of fluctuation of the special symbol can be included in the performance execution period during the race, for example, it will be longer if the special symbol is won (big hit, small win) by lottery than if it is a miss. By configuring the variable period so that it is easier to set, the longer the performance execution period during the race is, the more it is possible to make the player think that he has won, and the longer the period during which the performance is executed. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance suggesting that the player has won a prize (win suggesting performance).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the determination by the determining means (special figure 2) is performed during the period from the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation until the end of the small winning game, and the determination result is the predetermined determination result. The system is configured to execute an effect in which the character 811 runs a race (see FIGS. 199(b) to 202(a)) using a specific game (small winning game) that is executed when there is a small winning (small winning). , the value (information) for indicating the remaining time shortening number (remaining number excluding the currently running special chart fluctuation) displayed in the remaining time shortening number notification area Dm6 at the start of the race (see FIG. 199(b)). It is configured to continue to be displayed until the end (FIG. 202(a)), that is, until the small winning game executed after the end of the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) ends.

In this way, even if the special figure fluctuation ends and the small winning game is executed, the display mode of the remaining time short number notification area Dm6 is configured not to be changed, so that the player can understand the performance during the race. It can be easily notified.

In addition, in this embodiment, as mentioned above, a race is performed using one special figure fluctuation (lottery) and the period until the end of the small winning game when a small winning is won in that special drawing lottery. Since the system is configured to perform a mid-race performance, there is a problem in that the period during which the mid-race performance is executed varies greatly based on the special drawing lottery result. In other words, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, the small winning game will not be executed, so the period in which the small winning game is executed cannot be included in the in-race performance execution period, and the in-race performance will be executed. The problem was that the period was shortened.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as elements for branching the performance mode of the in-race performance, there are at least the lottery results of special symbols and the game results of the small hit game, so unless the small win is won, the in-race performance 200(b) and 201(a)), which is set at the final stage of the game (for example, see FIGS. 200(b) and 201(a)), players may become bored with the game before they can enjoy the various effects. There was a risk that the problem would occur.

In order to solve this problem, for example, in some cases where the special symbol lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation time is longer than when the special symbol lottery result is a small win, specifically, , A loss fluctuation pattern (fake production fluctuation pattern) in which a fluctuation time similar (same) to the sum of the fluctuation time set when winning a small hit and the small win playing time is set. When this false effect variation pattern is set, it is possible to set it as an in-race effect, as if a small hit was won with a special symbol variation, and the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V during the small win game. It is preferable to set a presentation mode (see FIG. 202(a)) that indicates the situation. Thereby, even if the player does not win a small hit in the special drawing lottery, the player can experience the performance mode set at the final stage of the performance during the race.

In addition, if you win a jackpot in the special lottery, we will set the same variable time as the one that would be set if you won a small win, and the first round of the jackpot game and the small win It is good to set the opening operation of the jackpot game so that the game and the opening operation mode are the same. As a result, even if you win a jackpot in a special symbol lottery, the in-race performance can be executed, providing the player with a performance mode in which the performance result of the in-race performance is advantageous to the player. It can be made easier.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the in-race performance is executed using a period set based on one special symbol lottery (special symbol fluctuation period, small winning execution period). The present invention is not limited to this, and the race performance may be performed using a period set based on a plurality of special symbol drawings. By configuring in this way, for example, when the lottery results of special symbols are consecutively unsuccessful, it becomes possible to perform an in-race performance using the continuous special symbol fluctuation period.

Therefore, even if the variable time set when the special symbol lottery result is a loss is configured to be shorter than when the special symbol lottery result is a win, it will be set at the final stage of the performance during the race. A presentation mode can be provided to the player. In addition, in order to set one performance mode using a plurality of winning fluctuations, the performance mode for indicating to the player that the special symbol lottery was a miss is made to correspond to each special symbol lottery. Compared to the case where this is set, it is possible to reduce the number of times that the performance that notifies the player that the special drawing lottery is a loss is executed.

Above, we have explained the content of the performance when the time saving state is set, but in addition to that, for example, if you win a jackpot type where the time saving state A is set after the jackpot game ends by drawing the first special symbol. For example, instead of the display mode of the third symbol that is normally stopped and displayed, the third symbol may be displayed in a special display mode of "VVV". The three symbols may be displayed in a stopped state. As a result, it is possible to promptly notify the player that a gaming state advantageous to the player will be set, and therefore the player can play the game with peace of mind for a long period of time.

<About the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment>
Here, the electrical configuration in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 203 to 213. FIG. 203(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203(a), the ROM 202 of the seventh embodiment includes a first winning random number seven table 202fa, a first winning type selection seven table 202fb, a second winning random number seven table 202fc, a fluctuation pattern seven table 202fd, It has a small winning type selection 7 table 202fe and an opening scenario 7 table 202ff. Note that the configuration (table) with the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (the same name except for "7" added to make it possible to identify that it is used in the seventh embodiment) ) is the same as in each of the embodiments described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The first random number 7 table 202fa is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each embodiment described above, and is such that the value of the first random number counter C1 is If it matches the value of the random number that is a jackpot set by the random number 7 table 202fa, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. In addition, this first random number 7 table 202fa is provided with two types: a special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 for the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol. The number of random numbers is the same, but only the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 for the second special symbol has a random number value set for a small hit (see FIG. 204). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in small wins (setting only one), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol can provide benefits to the player (big or small wins). ) Expectations for granting can be varied.

Here, the contents of the first random number 7 table 202fa will be explained with reference to FIG. 204. FIG. 204(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents stipulated in the first random number 7 table 202fa, and FIG. 204(b) is the contents stipulated in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1. FIG. 204(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2. This first random number 7 table 202fa is set with a random number (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot and a random number (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is a table.

Specifically, when executing the lottery of the first special symbol, the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204(b), in the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1, among the values of the first winning random number counter C1, "0 to 4" are defined as jackpot determination values, and other values are other than jackpot. (In other words, it is defined as a judgment value for deviance). Then, in the lottery of the first special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is one of "0 to 4", it is determined that it is a jackpot.

When executing the second special symbol lottery, the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 is referred to. As shown in FIG. 204(c), in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2, among the values of the first random number counter C1, "0 to 4" are defined as jackpot determination values, and "5 to 504" are small win determination values. It is defined as a hit determination value, and "505 to 999" is defined as a determination value for other than that (that is, a miss). Then, in the drawing of the second special symbol, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is determined, and if the value is any one of "0 to 4", it is determined that it is a jackpot, and if the value is any one of "5 to 504", it is determined that it is a jackpot. In some cases, it is determined as a small hit.

The first winning type selection 7 table 202fb is a data table used for the same purpose as the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 14) used in each embodiment described above, and is a data table used for the same purpose as the jackpot type selection table 202d used in each embodiment described above. is used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won by referring to the first winning type selection 7 table 202fb. Here, the contents of the first winning type selection 7 table 202fb will be explained with reference to FIG. 205.

FIG. 205(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection 7 table 202fb. As shown in FIG. 205(a), in this embodiment, the special symbol 1 jackpot type used when determining the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 when drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1) It has a selection table 202fb1 and a special pattern 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 that is used when determining the value of the acquired first winning type counter C2 when drawing the second special symbol (special pattern 2). . As a result, the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery is made different from the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, or each of multiple types of jackpot is selected. Since the ratio of the special symbols used can be made different, the game using the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the game using the second special symbol (special symbol 2) provide different gameplay to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 used when drawing the first special symbol (special figure 1) will be explained with reference to FIG. 205(b). FIG. 205(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1. As shown in FIG. 205(b), in the first winning type counter C2, when the random value is any one of "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot A", and any of "10 to 49" is the jackpot type. If the number is between 50 and 99, the jackpot type will be ``Jackpot B,'' and if the number is between 50 and 99, the jackpot type will be ``Jackpot C.''

"Jackpot A" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 15 (R) and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (substantially the number of time saving times is 10). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot, "time saving A" which is advantageous to the player is set. This "Jackpot A" has a large number of rounds in the jackpot game, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to "Time Saving A" which is even more advantageous among the time saving states that are advantageous for the player, so "Jackpot A" is , is the most advantageous jackpot type for players. Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random values for which "Jackpot A" is selected, so it is a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). In this case, the rate at which "Jackpot A" is selected is 10%.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 lottery) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery) is triggered. The ball is configured to easily enter the second ball entrance 3640, and in the time saving state, the number of drawings (variable number of times) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 1) are changed. 2) If the total number of drawings (number of fluctuations) and the number of drawings (total number of times) reaches 100, or the number of drawings (number of fluctuations) of the second special symbol (special pattern 2) reaches 10. The configuration is such that the time saving state ends when this occurs.

With this configuration, even if the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1) that is disadvantageous to the player is executed immediately after the time saving state is set, the lottery for the special symbol 2 will be held the specified number of times ( 10 times), the player can play the game with peace of mind. As a result, for example, if the time saving state is configured to end when the total number of fluctuations of special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 during the time saving state reaches the specified number of times (10 times). In order to prevent special drawing 1 variation (lottery) from being executed when the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot, games that do not ensure the holding of special drawing 1 (games that do not shoot balls continuously) (so-called stop-hitting game)) can be prevented from being executed, and the operation of the game can be improved.

"Jackpot B" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (time saving number of times is 10). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot, "time saving B" which is disadvantageous to the player is set. This "Jackpot B" has a smaller number of rounds of the jackpot game than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A", but since the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, it is a jackpot that is advantageous to the player. However, "time saving B" is set which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state "time saving A" which is set when "jackpot A" is won.

In other words, jackpot B is an advantageous jackpot in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends, but the number of rounds of the jackpot game and the type of time-saving state that is set after the jackpot is higher than the above-mentioned "jackpot A". be disadvantageous to the person. That is, "Jackpot B" is a jackpot type that is less favorable than the above-mentioned "Jackpot A". Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 40 random values for which "Jackpot B" is selected, so it is possible to win the jackpot by drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1). 40% of the time, "Jackpot B" is selected.

"Jackpot C" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 5 rounds (R) and the game state after the jackpot is set to the normal state (non-time saving state). Since the number of rounds is small and the normal state is set after the jackpot, "Jackpot C" is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous for the player. Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 50 random values for which "Jackpot C" is selected, so the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is a lottery. In this case, the rate at which "Jackpot C" is selected is 50%.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a 15 round (R) jackpot game (jackpot After the end, time saving A) is selected, and at a rate of 40%, a 5 round (R) jackpot game (time saving B after the jackpot ends) is selected. That is, a jackpot is selected in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game shifts to the time saving state at a rate of 50%.

In addition, in this embodiment, as the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is the largest (15 rounds (R)), and the time saving state (time saving A) which is advantageous after the jackpot ends. ) is set as "Jackpot A", then the number of rounds executed during the jackpot (5 rounds (R)) as a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player, and the type of time saving state that is set after the jackpot ends. There is a jackpot type "Jackpot B" which is more disadvantageous to the player than "Jackpot A" in both cases, and a jackpot type "Jackpot C" which is the most disadvantageous to the player because the time saving state is not set after the jackpot ends. However, other jackpot types may be configured to be settable. For example, if the jackpot game has the highest number of rounds (15 rounds (R)), "Time-saving B" is set as the time-saving type. Although the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds of jackpot games are small (5 rounds (R)), the jackpot type where "time saving A" is set as the time saving type and the number of rounds of jackpot games are the largest (15 rounds (R)). )), it may be possible to set a jackpot type for which the time saving state is not set.

In addition, the concept of whether or not the set jackpot type is advantageous to the player is based on the overall number of rounds of the jackpot game and the gaming state set after the jackpot ends, as in this embodiment. The concept of advantage and disadvantage may be defined based on the concept of advantage and disadvantage, or the concept of advantage and disadvantage may be defined based only on the number of rounds of the jackpot game, or the concept of advantage and disadvantage may be defined based only on the gaming state set after the jackpot ends. A concept may be defined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205(c), the special pattern 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2 used when drawing the second special symbol (special pattern 2) will be explained. FIG. 205(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. As shown in FIG. 205(c), in the first winning type counter C2, when the random number is one of "0 to 89", the jackpot type is "jackpot D", and the random number is "90 to 99". ”, the jackpot type is defined as “Jackpot E”.

“Jackpot D” is a jackpot type in which the number of rounds is 15 rounds (R) as a jackpot game, and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (substantially the number of time saving times is 10). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot, "time saving A" which is advantageous to the player is set. That is, this "jackpot D" is a jackpot type having the same contents as the above-mentioned "jackpot A", and is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player. Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 90 random values for which "Jackpot D" is selected. 90% of the time, "Jackpot D" is selected.

"Jackpot E" is a jackpot game in which the number of rounds is 15 (R) and the game state after the jackpot is set to a time saving state (substantially the number of time saving times is 10). Then, as the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot, "time saving B" which is more disadvantageous to the player than "time saving A" is set. That is, this "jackpot E" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than the above-mentioned "jackpot D". Out of the 100 counter values (random values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random values for which "Jackpot E" is selected, so it is possible to win the jackpot by drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2). In this case, the percentage of "Jackpot E" being selected is 10%.

That is, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the second special symbol lottery, a jackpot game of 15 rounds (R) is executed, and furthermore, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot ends. ing. As a result, winning the jackpot in the special pattern 2 drawing will provide a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than winning the jackpot in the special pattern 1 drawing, so 2. The lottery with special symbols is more advantageous to the player.

In this embodiment, there are five types of jackpots, but the number is not limited to this, and the number may be four or less, or six or more types may be provided. Further, even if the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same value of the first winning type counter C2, different jackpot types may be selected. With this configuration, for example, by setting a jackpot type in which more rounds are executed when a jackpot is achieved with the second special symbol, it is possible for the player to win more easily with the second special symbol. It can make you look forward to it. Therefore, it is possible to make winning in the high-probability gaming state more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the high-probability gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player strongly want to shift to the high probability state, and it is possible to make the player play the game for a longer period of time.

In addition, the type of the jackpot type selected by the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the selection rate (distribution rate) of each jackpot type are made the same, and the first win type counter C2 is set to correspond to each jackpot type. It may be configured such that only the range is different. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 with the aim of a specific counter value from being carried out using both the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The second winning random number 7 table 202fc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and is a data table that is used for the same purpose as the second winning random number table 202fc, which is the value of the second winning random number counter C4. Using this, it is determined whether there is a winning result or not by referring to the second winning random number 7 table 202fc.

In this embodiment, similarly to each of the above-described embodiments, there are two periods when the probability of a normal symbol is low (the period in which the normal symbol is in its normal state) and a time when the probability of winning the normal symbol is higher than when the probability is low (a period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state). The number of values corresponding to a win is set differently depending on the time period of the symbol. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a win, the probability of a win is changed between when the probability of a normal symbol is low and when the probability of a normal symbol is high.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of operation patterns (opening operation patterns) of the electric accessory 3640a that are executed when the normal symbol (second symbol) is won can be set. As a result, the timing at which the electric accessory 3640a is opened can be varied based on the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol), so the timing at which the electric accessory 3640a is released (the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640) can be changed. It is possible to suppress a game in which the ball is fired at a timing when the ball can be fired.

Here, the contents of the second winning random number 7 table 202fc will be explained with reference to FIG. 206(a). FIG. 206(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number 7 table 202fc. As shown in FIG. 206(a), the second random number 7 table 202fc is configured such that “normal pattern winning A”, “normal pattern winning B”, and “missing” can be set as the second winning type. The second winning type is defined based on the gaming state (normal symbol high probability state or low probability state) and the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4.

Specifically, when the gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is defined as "0", "A per normal symbol", and "1". "B" is defined as "ordinary hit", and "missing" is defined in the range of "2 to 99". When the gaming state is a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols, the value of the second random number counter C4 is defined as "A per normal symbol" in the range of "0 to 79", and "80 A "normal hit B" is defined in the range of "-98", and a "miss" is defined in the range "99".

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when the low probability state of normal symbols is set as the gaming state, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols (second symbol) is 2% (2/100). The configuration is such that when a winning ticket is won, ``Price A'' and ``B'' are selected at a rate of 50%.

When the gaming state is a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols, the probability of winning in the lottery of normal symbols (second symbol) is 99% (99/100), and winning is the winning state. In this case, the configuration is configured such that "A per normal map" is selected approximately 80% (80/99) of the time, and "B per common map" is selected approximately 20% (20/99) of the time. are doing.

That is, in the seventh embodiment, the probability of winning is higher in the high probability state of the normal symbol than in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and at the time of winning the "normal symbol" It is configured so that "win A" is more likely to be selected. In this way, by varying the winning probability and winning type of the normal symbol (second symbol) depending on the gaming state, the player can play the game in the hope that a more advantageous gaming state will be set. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a at the time of winning the second symbol is different depending on the gaming state and the winning type, and the second symbol is selected in the low probability state of the normal symbol. A movement pattern in which it is more advantageous for the player to win the second symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol than to win the second symbol, that is, enter the ball into the second ball entrance 3640. The configuration is such that an easy-to-use motion pattern is set. As a result, winning during the high probability state of the normal symbol is set as a condition for granting benefits advantageous to the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 206(a), the contents of the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a executed during the high probability state of the normal symbol will be explained. The seventh embodiment is configured so that different operation patterns are set depending on the type of winning won, and when a "normal pattern win A" is set during a high probability state, the opening period is 0. An operation pattern of 1 second (S), opening period of 2 seconds (S), and ending period of 3.5 seconds (S) is executed, and when "B" is set, the opening period is 0.1 seconds (S). An operation pattern is executed in which the opening period is 2.5 seconds (S), and the ending period is 3 seconds (S).

No matter which operation pattern is executed, if one ball enters the second ball entry port 3640 while the electric accessory 3640a is in the opening operation (during the opening period setting), the closing condition is met. Established, the closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a is executed. In other words, in the seventh embodiment, the conditions for ending the open state of the electric accessory 3640a are a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined opening period is reached, and a condition that is satisfied when a predetermined number of objects is reached at the second ball entry port. Conditions that are satisfied when the ball enters 3640 are set. As a result, when the second symbol (normal symbol) is won in the lottery, a large number of balls will enter the second ball entrance 3640, and the player will be given an excessive amount of benefits (prize balls). It is possible to prevent this from happening.

Further, no matter which operation pattern is executed, the ending period is set to be longer than the period (3 seconds) during which the ball flows down the second path (delay path) 660b. Therefore, even if you have won a regular winning number consecutively, if you win a small winning in the special drawing 2 lottery that is executed based on the previous regular winning, the next one will be won during that small winning game. It is possible to reliably prevent a ball flowing down the second path 660b based on a winning pattern from winning a prize in the V winning device 650.

In addition, in this embodiment, by using the above-mentioned configuration, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the specific area 650V during a small winning game at an unintended timing based on a plurality of consecutive game results (general lottery results). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, if a ball is won in a row in a row, a ball passes through a specific area 650V during a small winning game. It may be configured so that it is easy to do so. In this case, for example, as the winning type of the second winning (normal pattern), the opening period (0.1 seconds), the opening period (2 seconds), and the ending period (0.1 seconds) are set. C) can be set, and if the player wins again in the next normal pattern change after winning the normal pattern C, the amount of money flowing into the second passage 660b during the winning game corresponding to the next normal pattern change. The ball may be configured to pass through the specific area 650V during a small winning game in which the player wins in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the winning C of the regular drawing.

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In addition, when adopting this kind of gameplay, a performance during the race (Fig. 200 (b)) is executed in response to the normal pattern winning C, and then a performance in which the race is lost (Fig. 202 (a)) is performed. After executing (see), if the delayed passage entry switch 660e1 detects that the ball has entered the second passage 660b based on the next normal hit, the revival effect after losing the race is executed. It is best to configure it like this. Thereby, it is possible to perform a surprising performance corresponding to a surprising game for the player.

Further, a preliminary determination means for determining the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained when passing through the through gate 67 is provided, and as a preliminary determination result corresponding to the reserved winning information, If it is determined that the information on the winning number C for winning the winning number per winning number and the winning information for winning the winning number on the winning number for winning the number of winning numbers per the number of winning numbers are consecutively held and stored, it is possible to correspond to the winning number of consecutive number of winning numbers for the number of winning numbers of the number of winning numbers. It may be configured to perform a performance (continuous performance). In this way, by executing the pre-reading process of the winning information on the Fuzu drawing, it is possible to set the performance with the lottery result of the Fuzu drawing (second symbol lottery) determined in advance, so it is possible to set the production with a high production effect. can be executed.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as a winning game executed when a winning symbol is won, the electric accessory 3640a is kept open for a period during which a ball can enter the second ball entrance 3640. Although the configuration is such that only a winning game is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to allow a ball to flow into the second passage 660b although the ball cannot enter the second ball entry port 3640. The electric accessory 3640a may be configured to be open for a period of time (for example, 1 second) during which the electric accessory 3640a can be opened.

The variation pattern 7 table 202fd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the embodiments described above. A variation pattern in which different variation times are set is defined in correspondence with the lottery result and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd will be explained with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208. FIG. 207 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202fd, and FIG. FIG. 208(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second time saving variable pattern table 202fd3 specified by the variable pattern 7 table 202fd. It is a diagram.

Next, the contents of the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 208(a). This first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set as the gaming state, and is a second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 (time-saving When the player wins a small win (for example, small win C) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when state B (time saving B) is set, the The variation time is defined so that it is easy to set a variation time that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific region 650V.

Here, to specifically explain the contents stipulated in the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2, if the type of special symbol is special symbol 1 and the lottery result is a loss, the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless of the value of the fluctuation pattern, if the lottery result is a jackpot, "very short loss" (fluctuation time 0.5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. "Ultra short hit" (fluctuation time 0.5 seconds) is defined. In other words, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, that is, when the first special symbol lottery is executed in a state where it is easy to execute the second special symbol lottery, the time saving period of 0.5 seconds is guaranteed. It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern is set.

If the type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 and the lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern is "super short loss" (variation time 0.5 seconds) regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. ) is stipulated, and if the lottery result is small win A or small win B, "long and small win" (variation time 3 seconds) is stipulated as the fluctuation pattern, and in case of small win C, "short and small win" is stipulated as the fluctuation pattern. (variation time 0.5 seconds)" is specified. In addition, when the lottery result is a jackpot, if the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 149", "short jackpot (variation time 1 second)" is defined as the variation pattern, When the number is in the range of "150 to 198", "medium jackpot (variation time 30 seconds)" is defined as the variation pattern.

With this configuration, when the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to, that is, in a state where time saving A is set as the gaming state, the small time saving variation pattern in which the variation time is 3 seconds is set. The ball is configured to easily pass through a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 when winning A or small winning B. On the other hand, if you win a small win C in which a variation pattern with a variation time of 0.5 seconds is set, the lottery for the second special symbol is executed immediately after the ball enters the second ball entry port 3640. Since the small winning game is executed immediately after the ball is released from the second flow path tb, the opening operation of the V winning device 650 ends before the ball flowing down the second flow path tb is discharged from the second flow path tb. can be made difficult to pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, after the jackpot game that is executed based on the ball passing through the specific area 650V during the small win game corresponding to the small win C, the game state is displayed to the player. It is configured so that a normal state that is disadvantageous is set, and after the end of the jackpot game that is executed based on winning other small wins (small win A, small win B), the game state is set. The configuration is such that a time saving state (time saving A or time saving B) that is advantageous to the player is set.

In this way, when time saving A is set as the gaming state, a variable pattern is set with reference to the first time saving variable pattern table 202fd2, and a small win that is advantageous to the player is created by the set variable pattern. When winning a type, it becomes easier to execute a jackpot game via a small win game, so that an advantageous gaming state is likely to be set continuously even after the next jackpot game ends, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. I can do it.

Next, the contents of the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 will be explained with reference to FIG. 208(b). FIG. 208(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3. This second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is a variation pattern table that is referred to when time saving B is set as the gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 208(b), this second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is set when a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery with respect to the first time-saving variation pattern table 202fd2 described above. The difference is that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) is different; other elements are the same.

Specifically, when the lottery result is a small win A, a "long and small win" (variation time 3 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and when the lottery result is a small win B, a "short and small win" (variation time) is specified as a fluctuation pattern. 0.5 seconds), and in the case of a small win C, if the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 169", a "long/small win" (variation time 3 seconds) is specified as the variation pattern. ) is defined, and when it is in the range of "170 to 198", "short and small win" (variation time 0.5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern.

In other words, when the second time-saving variable pattern table 202fd3 is referenced, that is, when time-saving B is set as the gaming state, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, but the small winning If C is won, a variation pattern with a variation time of 3 seconds is set, so it is a gaming state in which the normal state is more likely to be set as the gaming state after the next jackpot game ends than the state where the time saving A described above is set. Become.

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, when the normal state is set as the gaming state for the lottery of the second special symbol in which the jackpot game is more likely to be executed based on the lottery result than the first special symbol. It is possible to set a time-saving state that is easier to execute than the next time-saving state, and furthermore, as a time-saving state, a gaming state (time-saving A) in which a gaming state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is likely to be set again after the next jackpot ends, and a gaming state (time-saving A) that is easier to execute after the next jackpot ends. A gaming state (time saving state) which will later be advantageous to the player is configured to be settable, and a gaming state (time saving B) which is more difficult to set than time saving A.

With this configuration, when the most advantageous gaming state for the player (time saving A) is set, the gaming state will shift to the normal state after just one jackpot game is executed. Since this can be suppressed, the player can play the game with peace of mind. In addition, even if Time Saving B is set which is more disadvantageous to the player than Time Saving A, the probability that Time Saving A will be set after the jackpot game is set is higher than when the normal state is set. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game with the aim of setting the time saving A voluntarily.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 208(b), in the seventh embodiment, even if the ball wins the small win C in which the normal state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, the ball does not reach the V winning device 655. Since it is configured so that it is possible to select a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to pass through a specific area of 650V (a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 0.5 seconds), it is possible to select not only the winning result of a small hit but also the flow of the ball. can also make players interested. In this case, for example, it is preferable to notify the player that the small win C has been won, and then perform an effect to encourage whether or not the ball will pass through the specific area 650V. With this configuration, even though the player wins a disadvantageous small win, the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V, so a disadvantageous gaming state is set for the player. It is possible to make the player aware that he/she was able to avoid the problem, and to provide a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, a means is provided to measure the number of times the player wins a small win that is disadvantageous to the player (the number of times the player wins the small win C), and the number of times the player avoids executing a jackpot game based on the small win C (the small win C). It may be configured to display the number of times the ball did not pass through the specific area 650V during the game. This makes it possible for the player to understand more specifically that the situation where a disadvantageous gaming state was set for the player has been avoided, as well as whether the currently set gaming state is Time Saving A. It is possible to make it easier for the player to predict whether it is time saving B or not.

In the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 208(a) and 208(b) and described above, the data table (variation pattern By changing the tables), when winning a small hit that is advantageous to the player, a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V (time saving A) and a game state in which it is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V (time saving B) are created. It is configured to be configurable. In other words, when a player wins a small win that is disadvantageous to the player, a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V (Time Saving B) and a gaming state in which it is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V (Time Saving A) can be set. ing.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, depending on the type of the set time saving state (time saving A, time saving B), there is a game state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area 650V when winning a small hit, and a game state in which it is difficult to pass through the specific area 650V. The state is configured to be configurable. To explain specifically, when time saving A is set as the gaming state, the first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2 is referred to when selecting a special symbol variation pattern. When selecting a special symbol variation pattern with reference to this first time saving variation pattern table 202fd2, 90% of the variation pattern when winning the small hit (100% when winning the small winning A and 100% when winning the small winning B) %), the variable time during which the ball can pass through the specific area 650V is set.

On the other hand, when time saving B is set as the gaming state, the second time saving variation pattern table 202fd3 is referred to when selecting a special symbol variation pattern. When selecting a special symbol variation pattern with reference to this second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3, approximately 28.5% of the variation pattern when winning the small hit (100% when winning the small winning A, and 100% when winning the small winning C) The configuration is such that a variable time period during which the ball can pass through the specific area 650V at approximately 85% of the time is set.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) that is set when winning a small hit is configured to be different depending on the type of time saving state that is set, and The area 650V is configured so that the rate at which the variation patterns that allow the ball to pass through are selected is varied. Therefore, depending on the type of time-saving state that is set, the probability of executing a jackpot game based on a small winning win during the time-saving state can be varied.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the transition condition (time saving end condition) for transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state is that the number of changes of the special symbol reaches 10 times. When time saving B is set than when time saving A is set as the type of state, the transition condition can be more easily satisfied since it is difficult to execute a jackpot game when a small winning is won.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, as described above, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning a small hit, which is advantageous to the player, and to save time by making it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning a small hit. Time saving A, which is a state, and Time saving B, which is a time saving state that makes it easier for the ball to pass through a specific area 650V when winning a small hit, which is disadvantageous to the player, and makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when winning a small hit. , is configured to be set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the small winning type may be set to one, and a fluctuation pattern that allows a ball to pass through a specific area of 650 V when winning a small winning is simply set. The variation pattern table to be referred to may be configured to be different depending on the type of time saving state that is set so that only the ratio is different.

Furthermore, depending on the type of time-saving state that is set, transition conditions (time-saving end conditions) for transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state may be set differently.For example, a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player may be set. (For example, time saving A) is set, the time saving end condition is more likely to be satisfied than the time saving state which is disadvantageous to the player (e.g. time saving B). may be set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will be executed during the period in which the time-saving state is set to vary greatly depending on the type of time-saving state that is set. Even if this is set, the player can be motivated to play the game aiming for a jackpot game.

Furthermore, since the game content expected during the time period can be changed depending on the type of time saving state that is set, specifically, the time saving end condition is likely to be met, and the specific area 650V when winning a small hit. If a time-saving state is set in which it is easy for the ball to pass through, it will make people expect to win a small hit during the time-saving state, and it will be difficult for the time-saving end condition to be met, and if the ball hits a specific area of 650V when winning a small hit, If a time-saving state is set in which it is difficult for the ball to pass through, players can be made to expect that the ball will pass through a specific area of 650V in a small win won during the time-saving state, so that the player may get tired of the game early. It is possible to prevent it from being put away.

The small winning type selection 7 table 202fe is a data table used for the same purpose as the small winning type selection table 202e (see FIG. 14) used in each embodiment described above, and when a small winning is won, This is referred to when selecting the type of small win, and the configuration is such that a different small win type is selected depending on the value of the obtained small win type counter C5.

Here, the contents of the small winning type selection 7 table 202fe will be explained with reference to FIG. 206(b). FIG. 206(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the small winning type selection 7 table 202fe. As shown in FIG. 206(b), in the small win type selection 7 table 202fe, three types of small win A to small win C are selected as the small win type of the second special symbol according to the value of the small win type counter C5. It is stipulated as follows. Specifically, when the value of the obtained small win type counter C5 is one of "0 to 19", the small win type is "Small win A (10R real time saving 10 times jackpot when passing V)" Therefore, if the number is between 20 and 89, the type of small hit will be "Small win B (10R real time saving 10 times jackpot when passing V)", and if it is between 90 and 99 The small win type is "Small win C (10R time saving jackpot when passing V)".

When the jackpot based on the winning of "Small win A" ends, "Time saving A" is set as the gaming state, and when the jackpot based on the winning of "Small win B" ends, "Time saving B" is set as the gaming state. When the jackpot based on the winning of "small win C" ends, the "normal state" is set as the gaming state.

Here, each small winning type (small winning A to small winning C) is executed after the small winning game ends when a ball passes through the V switch 650e3 in the V winning device 650 in the respective small winning game. The type of jackpot game is set. In the case of "Small win A", a 10-time jackpot with a 10R real time reduction is set, and after the execution of the small win A, a jackpot is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the open state for 10 rounds (R), After that, 10 time-saving games are set as a time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes a total of 100 times or the second special symbol changes 10 times).

In addition, in the case of "Small win B", 10 rounds (R) are set to be 10 time-saving jackpots, and after the small win B is executed, the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state. A jackpot is executed, and then 10 time-saving games are set as a time-saving state (a period until the special symbol changes a total of 100 times or the second special symbol changes 10 times). It is composed of In the case of "Small win C", a 10R time saving no jackpot is set, and after the execution of the small win C, a jackpot is executed in which the variable prize winning device 65 is set to the 10 round (R) open state. After the jackpot game, the time saving state is not set and the normal state is set.

In this way, depending on the selected small winning type, the contents of the jackpot game to be executed after the small winning game ends and the game state set after the jackpot game can be varied.

Specifically, "Small win A" is because the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is large (10R), and the time saving state (time saving A) that is most advantageous to the player is set after the jackpot game ends. , is set as the most advantageous small win for the player, and small win B has a large number of rounds executed in the jackpot game (10R), and is set the same as the small win A mentioned above. Since the time saving state that is set later is "time saving B" which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving A, the small win is set as a small win which is more disadvantageous than the small win A. "Small win C" is set as the most disadvantageous small win for the player, since the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is large (10R), but the time saving state is not set after the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, regardless of the type of small winning won, the jackpot game executed when the ball passes through a specific area 650V during the small winning game is configured to be a round game of 10 rounds (R). By this, the player can easily understand the type of small win that was won this time by understanding the number of round games (number of rounds) executed as the jackpot game during a jackpot game that is executed due to a small win opportunity. Although this is suppressed, the present invention is not limited to this, and jackpot games with different numbers of rounds may be set for each small win type. As a result, the degree of advantage for each small win type can be greatly different, so that the player can play the game while expecting to win the most advantageous small win type.

In addition, in this embodiment, as an end condition for the time saving state, the number of changes of the second special symbol is 10 times (first end condition), or the number of times of change of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) is 10 times (first end condition). A total of 100 times (second termination condition) is set. By configuring this way, if a jackpot is won with the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being 1 or more, and a time saving state is set after the jackpot ends, the first special symbol (special symbol 1 ) even if the change is executed, the time saving state does not end. In addition, when the variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, the above-mentioned second ending condition is satisfied and the time saving state can be ended. special symbols) can be reliably changed a predetermined number of times.

Next, the types of winnings won during the time saving state (during the high probability state of normal symbols) and the ball flow to the second ball entrance 3640 will be explained with reference to FIG. 196. As described above with reference to FIG. 196, in the seventh embodiment, when the regular symbol is won and the electric accessory 3640a changes to the protruding state (see FIG. 198), the ball moves on the electric accessory 3640a. By flowing down, a state is established in which the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 3640.

Then, when the closing condition of the electric accessory 3640a is satisfied, the electric accessory 3640a executes the closing operation, and the ball that was flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a at that time is moved to the ball installed directly below the electric accessory 3640a. It flows into the first flow path ta or the second flow path tb. Here, the ball flowing down the first flow path ta reaches the V winning device 650 provided below the flow path unit 660 after a flow period of 0.5 seconds, and the ball flowing down the second flow path tb reaches the V winning device 650 provided below the flow path unit 660. reaches the V winning prize device 650 after a 3 second flow period.

Next, a case where a ball enters the second ball entry port 3640 will be described as a condition for closing the electric accessory 3640a. When the closing condition for the electric accessory 3640a is satisfied due to the ball entering the second ball entrance 3640, the closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a is executed and a second special symbol lottery is executed. . Then, a variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol is determined according to the lottery result of the second special symbol. In the present embodiment, it is possible to set an advantageous time saving state that is advantageous to the player (time saving A) and a disadvantageous time saving state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous time saving state (time saving B), and the set time saving state It is configured so that different fluctuation patterns are set depending on the state.

The opening scenario 7 table 202ff shows that the game content (opening scenario) of the winning game (big winning game, small winning game) that is executed when a winning (big hit, small winning) is won in the special symbol lottery is the type of winning that was won. The data table is defined in correspondence with the winning type, and when a winning is won, an opening scenario corresponding to the set winning type is read out and a winning game is executed.

Here, the contents of the open scenario 7 table 202ff will be explained with reference to FIG. 209. FIG. 209 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the open scenario 7 table 202ff. This opening scenario 7 table 202ff is a winning device (variable winning device) that allows a ball to enter in a bonus game (big win game, small win game) that is executed when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot or small win. 65, operation data (opening scenario) for varying the opening operation of the V prize winning device 650 depending on the winning type (big winning type, small winning type) is defined.

In this way, the winning devices (variable winning device 65, V winning device 650) and opening operation contents (opening scenario ), it is possible to set multiple levels of advantageousness of bonus games, so even after winning a jackpot or small win, it is possible to let the player enjoy what type of win he won. can.

In the opening scenario 7 table 202ff, the start interval period during the winning game (the period from the start of the winning game until the first opening operation of the winning device) corresponding to the winning type (big winning type, small winning type) ), the opening operation mode of the winning device (type of winning device to be opened, number of seconds for one opening operation (round game), total number of opening operations (number of rounds)), and the interval period between rounds (the number of rounds) The period during which the winning device set for the game is closed) and the end interval period (the period from the end of all round games until the end of the winning game (the period until the start of a new special symbol change) period)) are stipulated respectively.

Specifically, the winning type corresponds to "Jackpot A, D, E", "2 seconds" is set as the start interval period, and "variable winning device 65" is set to "15 rounds" as the opening operation mode of the winning device. '', the opening operation mode in which the game is opened continuously for 29 seconds as one round game is defined as ``1 second'' as the interval period between rounds, and ``4 seconds'' as the end interval period. Therefore, when a jackpot of jackpot type A, D, or E is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 15 rounds, and a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player. It becomes a jackpot game. Furthermore, when the jackpot type is jackpot A or D, the jackpot A or D is the most advantageous for the player because it is a jackpot in which a time-saving state, which is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, is set after the jackpot game ends. It will be a jackpot with special benefits.

Next, the winning type corresponds to jackpot B and C, the start interval period is "2 seconds", the opening operation mode of the winning device is "variable winning device 65", "5 rounds", and one round game. In the opening operation mode in which the opening is continued for 29 seconds, an inter-round interval period of 1 second and an end interval period of 4 seconds are specified. Therefore, if the jackpot type is jackpot B or C, a jackpot game will be executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for 5 rounds, and the player will receive jackpots A, D, or E. This becomes a jackpot game in which about 1/3 of the prize balls of the corresponding jackpot game are paid out.

Next, corresponding to the winning types A to C, "0.1 seconds" is set as the start interval period, and the "V winning device 650" is opened in the "first round" as the opening operation mode of the winning device. , If the ball passes through a specific area of 650V (V passing) during the opening operation of the first round (including 0.5 seconds set as the ball handling time after the opening operation is completed), the "Variable The prize winning device 65 is opened in the 2nd to 11th rounds, and in the 1st round, it is opened continuously for 1.5 seconds, and in the 2nd to 11th rounds, it is opened continuously for 29 seconds. Regarding the opening operation mode, the inter-round interval period is defined as "5 seconds" after the end of the first round, "1 second" otherwise, and "4 seconds" as the end interval period. In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when a ball passes through the specific area 650V during a small winning game, 10 rounds of the jackpot game are subsequently executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened from the first round, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, A jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) may be provided in which an opening scenario similar to wins A to C is set. With this configuration, when a jackpot Z is set, the V winning device 650 is operated in the same opening operation mode as a small jackpot in the first round, so that the player is not informed of this special prize. It is possible to make it difficult to tell whether you have won a jackpot or a small jackpot based on the design.

In this case, since the jackpot game has already been executed, even if the ball does not pass through the specific area 650V while the V winning device 650 is being opened in the first round of jackpot Z. , the second round and subsequent round games will be executed. Therefore, when a jackpot game in which the same opening operation mode as the small jackpot game is set, the effect shown in FIG. 201(b) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is good to configure. Thereby, the player can be made to think that the result of the current game is that the jackpot game was executed because the ball passed through the specific area 650V during the small win game.

In addition, since the effect shown in FIG. 201(b) can be executed when the specific area 650V is actually passed during the small winning game and when the jackpot Z is won, the effect of the effect during the race can be executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the rate at which performance results that are advantageous to the player (see FIG. 201(b)) are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the performance during the race.

In addition, the third symbol display device 81 will display the following information depending on whether you win a jackpot type (for example, jackpot Z) in which the opening operation mode similar to the small jackpot game is set, or when you win a variety of small jackpots. In order to ensure that the same performance mode is executed as a variable display (variable performance), and to make it difficult for the player to identify the lottery result by the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 that shows the lottery result of the special symbol, The stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be made different, or the stop display timing of the special symbol and the stop display timing of the third symbol may be synchronized. In order to make the display of the third symbol more difficult for the player to identify than during the stop display timing or the period before and after it, the display mode and display area may be varied, and at the stop display timing of the special symbol, It is preferable to switch the design for performance displayed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 from the third symbol to a normal symbol for performance that corresponds to the variable display of the normal symbol. Thereby, it is possible to suppress whether the current lottery result is a small win or a big win from being easily understood by the static display mode of the third symbol.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 203(b). FIG. 203(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203(b), the RAM 203 of the seventh embodiment includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d, a time saving total counter 203fa, a jackpot start flag 203fb, It has a medium jackpot flag 203o, a small winning start flag 203fc, a medium small winning flag 203p, a V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd, a V flag 203fe, a time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff, a V passing flag 203fg, and other memory areas 203z. . It should be noted that the configuration (flag , counter, and area), their uses are the same as in each of the above-described embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

The time saving total counter 203fa is a counter for adding up the number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol executed during the time saving state and counting up to 100 times. This time saving medium total counter 203fa is set to an initial value of 0 when winning a jackpot (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 100 when the jackpot ends (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, each time the variation of the special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S10202 in FIG. 217). The value of this time-saving medium summation counter 203fa is referred to when determining whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been decremented to 0 (S10207 in FIG. 217). :Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

As described above, in this embodiment, if the total number of changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time saving state reaches 100 (first end condition), or when the second special symbol during the time saving state The time saving state is configured to end when one of the conditions that the number of symbol fluctuations reaches 10 (second end condition) is met, and whether or not the first end condition is met. In order to determine this, the time saving medium total counter 203fa is used. Note that the value of the time saving total counter 203fa is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number of times command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the time reduction/interval summation counter 203fa is changed.

The audio lamp control device 113 calculates the number of remaining fluctuations until the first end condition of the time saving state is satisfied, according to the remaining time shortening number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the time saving total counter 203fa is changed. can be obtained. As a result, the remaining time reduction number managed by the game state storage area 223fe of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual remaining time variation number counted by the time reduction totaling counter 203fa of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. Even if this occurs, the deviation can be corrected by the next received short remaining time count command.

Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned time reduction total counter 203fa, that is, the first time reduction state The display control device 114 is configured not to transmit information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the end condition is met to the display control device 114. This is because when playing a normal game, the time saving state is configured to transition to the normal state when the second ending condition for the time saving state is met, and the first ending condition is This suppresses a situation in which the second end condition is satisfied and the time-saving state ends with the third symbol display device 81 displaying the number of remaining fluctuations until the condition is satisfied.

The jackpot start flag 203fb is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the jackpot game. When the variation of the special symbol whose lottery result is determined to be a jackpot stops, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to ON (S10017 in FIG. 215). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203fb is on and it is identified that it is the jackpot start timing, it is set to off (S10603 in FIG. 222). In addition, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to off in the initial state, and when a power outage or the like occurs, it is configured to be backed up and the state immediately before the power outage is maintained.

The jackpot flag 203o is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a jackpot is stopped (S10017 in FIG. 215). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of rounds of games corresponding to the set jackpot type has been completed), it is set to OFF (S10617 in FIG. 222). This jackpot flag 203o is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when RAM is cleared, and when a power outage or the like occurs, it is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage or the like. It is configured to The jackpot flag 203o has the same function as the jackpot flag 203o used in the first embodiment described above.

The small winning start flag 203fc is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (S10304 in FIG. 218). When it is determined that the small winning start flag 203fc is on and it is identified that it is the start timing of the small winning game, it is set to OFF (S10703 in FIG. 223). This small hit start flag 203fc is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the power outage etc. is configured to be

The small winning medium flag 203p is a flag indicating that a small winning game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped (see S10304 in FIG. 218). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small win (when it is determined that the game for the set number of rounds of the small win has ended), it is set to OFF (see S10717 in FIG. 223). This small hit medium flag 203p is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power outage etc. is configured to be

The V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd when a winning ball passes through a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 when a small winning game is being executed (a detection switch ( This is a storage area in which data for determining the type of jackpot that is set when a jackpot (not shown) is detected is stored. The V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd stores data values corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the small win type that has been determined when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small win stops (Fig. 218 (See S10302). When a ball flows down a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 and is detected by the detection switch, a V flag 203fe corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is set. is configured to be set to on. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is configured to be cleared. This V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power outage etc. occurs, the state immediately before the occurrence of the power outage etc. is backed up. It is configured to be held by

When a ball flows down a specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during a small winning game and the ball is detected by the detection switch, the V flag 203fe indicates a jackpot type corresponding to the type of small winning game being executed. The corresponding flag is set to on. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether this V flag 203fe is on (see S10712 in FIG. 223), and when it is determined that the V flag 203fe is on (S10712 in FIG. 223: Yes), it is turned on. The type of jackpot to be executed is determined based on the set flag, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game (opening scenario based on the jackpot type) is set (S10713 in FIG. 223). This V flag 203fe is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clearing, and when a power outage etc. occurs, it is maintained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of the power outage etc. It is configured as follows.

The time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is a counter for counting the number of variations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state up to 10 times. This time-saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is set to an initial value of 0 when winning a jackpot (see S10018 in FIG. 215), and is set to 10 when the jackpot ends (see S10614 in FIG. 222). Then, when the variation of the second special symbol ends during the time saving state, 1 is subtracted (see S10204 in FIG. 217). The value of this time-saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is referred to when determining whether the end condition of the time-saving state is satisfied, and when it is determined that the counter value has been subtracted to 0 (see FIG. 217). S10206: Yes), the normal state is set as the gaming state (S10208 in FIG. 217).

As described above, in this embodiment, if the total number of changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the time saving state reaches 100 (first end condition), or when the second special symbol during the time saving state The time saving state is configured to end when any of the conditions such as the number of variations of the symbol reaches 10 (second end condition) is met, and whether or not the second end condition is met is determined. In order to determine this, the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is used. Note that the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the remaining time saving number of times command (see S10205 in FIG. 217). The remaining time reduction number of times command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 every time the value of the time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the remaining time reduction number based on the remaining time reduction number command, but the remaining time reduction number command corresponding to the value of the above-mentioned time reduction medium special 2 counter 203ff, that is, the number of remaining time reduction times in the time reduction state. The display controller 114 is configured to transmit information indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the second termination condition is met to the display control device 114. This is because when playing a normal game, the time saving state is configured to transition to the normal state when the second end condition for the time saving state is satisfied, and the player This is to provide an easy-to-understand game by displaying the remaining number of fluctuations until the end of the time saving state on the third symbol display device 81.

The V passing flag 203fg is a flag used to determine whether the V flag 203fe is set to on during a small winning game, and is set to on when the V flag 203fe is set to on. be done. In this embodiment, it is set to ON in the V passing process (see FIG. 221) corresponding to the ball that first passed through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game (S10507 in FIG. 221).

Then, in the V passing process (see FIG. 221), it is determined whether the V passing flag 203fg is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S10501 in FIG. 221: Yes). ), the process of S10502 to S10508 of the V passing process (see FIG. 221) is skipped. As a result, if multiple balls pass through the specific area 650V during one small winning game (if a detection switch (not shown) that can detect balls passing through the specific area 650V detects multiple balls) ), only the V passing process corresponding to the first detected ball is executed. Therefore, the process executed during the small winning game can be simplified, and the V passage command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 multiple times, making V passage management on the voice lamp control device 113 side complicated. can be prevented from becoming.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 210 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of subsequent gaming states based on the lottery results of special symbols, and FIG. 211 is a transition diagram schematically showing the flow of operations of various devices executed during a small winning game. FIG.

In the seventh embodiment, a normal state in which a left-handed game is performed in which a ball is fired aiming at the left side area of the game board 13 (see FIG. 195) and a lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is executed, and a game board A time-saving state in which a right-handed game in which a ball is fired aiming at the right side area of 13 and a lottery of a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed can be set, and the game is configured so that a time saving state in which a lottery of a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed is set, and the lottery of a second special symbol (special symbol 2) is performed. 2. The special symbol lottery is configured to make it easier to execute a jackpot game.

Further, as the time saving state, either a time saving state A (time saving A) which is advantageous to the player or a time saving state B (time saving B) which is more disadvantageous to the player than the time saving state A is configured to be set. ing. Here, in this embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed in a state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the normal state is not (hardly) set after the jackpot game ends. There is. With this configuration, once the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set, the normal state will not be set as the gaming state unless at least two jackpot games are executed, so the time-saving state that is advantageous for the player can be set. Can be built.

As shown in FIG. 210, when the normal state is set, the game is executed by drawing the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and if a jackpot is won in the special symbol 1 lottery, the jackpot is If the time-saving jackpot is "Jackpot A" (10% of the jackpot), the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and it is "Jackpot B" (40% of the jackpot). In this case, the time saving state B (time saving B) is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and in the case of "jackpot C" (50% of the jackpot), the normal state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game ends. Ru.

In addition, if the special drawing 2 lottery is executed during the normal state and a jackpot is won, or a jackpot game is executed based on a small win win, the normal state will be set after the jackpot game ends. It consists of Thereby, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the normal state.

In the state where the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, the special drawing 2 lottery is mainly executed. In this special drawing 2 lottery, as explained with reference to FIG. 205(c), if you win a jackpot, the time saving state is always set after the end of the jackpot game, so the time saving state A (time saving A) If you win a jackpot during the game, the normal state will not be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, even if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery, the fluctuation pattern specified in the first time-saving fluctuation pattern table 202fd2 that is referred to during the time-saving state A (time-saving A) is set. When winning the small win type "Small win C" in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, the ball will not pass through the specific area 650V in the V prize winning device 650. Therefore, when the time saving state A (time saving A) is set, a plurality of jackpot games can be executed before the gaming state is set to the normal state again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the advantageous gaming state ends immediately even though an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set, and it is possible to allow the player to play games with peace of mind. can.

In addition, in the state where this time-saving state A is set, if the time-saving end condition is satisfied (when the special figure 2 variation is executed 10 times), the time-saving state ends and the normal state is set. However, in the time saving state, there is a probability of winning a small win with a probability of about 1/2, and a small winning game in which the ball can pass through a specific area of 650V is executed in 80% of the cases, so it is difficult to continue. As long as the user plays a normal game in which he or she plays a right-handed game, the jackpot game can be executed before the time-saving termination condition is satisfied. On the other hand, in order to make the ball pass through the specific area 650V when winning a specific small winning type, if you play a game that does not continue to be a right-handed game, the number of changes in special figure 2 will be 10 times. Once reached, the state can be returned to normal. Thereby, a penalty can be imposed on a player who plays an inappropriate game during the time saving state.

If you win a small win A (20%) while time saving state A (time saving A) is set, after the jackpot game based on the small winning winning is executed, time saving state A (time saving A) is set again. is set and if a small win B (70%) is won, a time saving state B (time saving B) is set after a jackpot game based on the small win is executed. In addition, if you win small win C (10%), as shown in Fig. 208(a), a short fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) is set, so you cannot apply a specific area of 650V during the small win game. The ball never passes through.

In addition, if you win a jackpot while time saving state B (time saving B) is set, jackpot D (90%) and jackpot E (10%) will be awarded in the same way as time saving state A (time saving A) described above. is set. In addition, when winning a small hit, the second time-saving variation pattern table 202fd3 (see FIG. 208(b)) is referred to, and the ball is configured so that it passes through the specific area 650V in the small win A or the small win C. ing.

Therefore, if you win small win A (20%), time saving state A (time saver A) is set after the jackpot game based on the small win win is executed, and if you win small win C, After a jackpot game based on a small win is executed, a normal state is set. Also, similar to time saving state A (time saving A), when the time saving end condition is met (when special figure 2 variation is executed 10 times), the time saving state ends and the normal state is set. It consists of

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the flow of operations of various devices during a small winning game will be explained. FIGS. 211(a) to 211(f) are diagrams schematically showing the flow of various configurations during the small winning game. As shown in FIGS. 211(a) to 211(f), when the control process of the main control device 110 executes the special symbol fluctuation display of winning a small hit, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the A race effect (see FIG. 199(b) to FIG. 202(a)) is executed on the screen. Then, when t1 (0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the small winning game, the V winning opening solenoid (not shown) is driven for 1.5 seconds according to a predetermined scenario (see FIG. 209).

The ball flowing down the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and is detected for 4 seconds (V valid period t5) from 1 second after the start of the small winning game. When the switch detects the ball, the jackpot game is executed after the small win game ends, and when the opening period t6 (2 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the jackpot game, the first round game starts and the specific winning hole is opened. 65a is opened.

As explained above, in the seventh embodiment, the normal state, time saving state A, and time saving state B can be set as the gaming state, and when the time saving state A is set, the time saving state B is set. The data table to be referred to when setting the variation pattern of the special symbol is configured to be different depending on the case where the variation pattern of the special symbol is set.

When the time saving state A is set, when a small win (small win C) that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the ball will not pass through the specific area 650V during the small win game. It is configured so that a fluctuation pattern is set. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 196, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is drawn during the time saving state, the flow path (second flow) that can pass through the specific area 650V is The variable time (0.5 seconds) set when the small win C is won is longer than the period (3 seconds) required for the ball to flow down the second flow path tb). ) and the time (1.6 seconds) from the start of the small winning game to the end of the opening period of the V winning device 650 is configured to be shorter.

In addition, when time saving state B is set, when a small win (small win C) that is disadvantageous to the player is won, the ball changes so that it can pass through a specific area 650V during the small win game. It is configured so that a pattern is set. With this configuration, even if the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the degree of advantage to the player can be greatly changed by simply changing the data table that is referred to when setting the fluctuation pattern. can be set.

<About the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 and 213. FIG. 212 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 212, the RAM 223 of the seventh embodiment includes a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223fa, a stop type selection flag 223fb, a production counter 223h, and a SW valid time. It has a storage area 223fd, a fluctuation time counter 223fd, a game state storage area 223fe, a delay path state flag 223ff, a long fluctuation flag 223fg, a second ball entry flag 223fh, a medium hit flag 223fi, and other memory areas 223z. Note that configurations with the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (flags, counters, areas) have their uses the same as in the above-mentioned embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted. .

The variation start flag 223fa is a flag to indicate that information (variation pattern command) indicating that the variation of the special symbol is started is received, and is set to on when the variation of the special symbol is started. It is something that This fluctuation start flag 223fa determines whether the current special symbol fluctuation is a fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the second special symbol based on the information included in the fluctuation pattern command received by the voice lamp control device 113. (Special Figure 2) is configured to be able to determine whether it is a fluctuation.

Specifically, the variation start flag 223fa includes the special figure 1 variation start flag 223fa1, which is set to ON when a variation pattern command indicating a special figure 1 variation is received, and the variation pattern command indicating a special figure 2 variation. It is formed from a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223fa2 that is set to on when

Then, when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (S12001: Yes in FIG. 226), the variation start flag 223fa corresponding to the symbol type information included in the received variation pattern command is set to on. (See S12002 in FIG. 226), and is set to off when the variable display setting in the third symbol display device 81 is made (See S5102 or S5108 in FIG. 231). When any of the variation start flags 223fa is set to ON, a display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is used in the command output process (S4102 in FIG. 225) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221. Among them, the information is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223fb is a flag for indicating that a command (stop type command) including information for indicating the stop type of the current special symbol variation has been received from the main controller 110. It is set on when a stop type command transmitted from is received (see S12005 in FIG. 226), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S5112 in FIG. 231). . When the stop type selection flag 223fb is set to ON, the stop type is set as is based on the stop type (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type) extracted from the received stop type command.

The gaming state storage area 223fe is an area for storing a gaming state corresponding to a state command when a state command regarding the gaming state is received from the main control device 110. By referring to the information (gaming status) stored in this gaming status storage area 223fe, the current gaming status can be identified on the audio lamp control device 113 side. In this embodiment, data in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is erased when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, so when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the data is stored in the game state storage area 223fe. Information indicating the current gaming status will also be deleted. However, in this embodiment, since the status command is set in the start-up process of the main control device (see FIG. 51) executed after the power is turned on (S2115 in FIG. 51), the game status storage area 223fe is immediately set after the power is restored. Information indicating the gaming state that was set before the power was shut off will be stored in the . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the audio lamp control device 113 can always identify the gaming state.

Note that the status command output from the main control device 110 is judged whether or not it has been received in the command judgment process 7 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see S4182 in FIG. 226). Although the configuration is such that a process is executed in which the gaming status included in the status command is stored in the gaming status storage area 223fe, in FIG. (Reference)), and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The delay passage state flag 223ff is a flag for determining the state of the ball flowing down the second passage (delay passage) tb in the passage unit 660. The contents of the delay path state flag 223ff will now be explained with reference to FIG. 213. FIG. 213 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the delay path state flag 223ff. As shown in FIG. 213, the delay passage state flag 223ff is composed of a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the ball flow state of the delay passage according to the state of the lower 4 bits.

Specifically, the delay passage entry switch 660e1, which detects the ball that has flowed into the second passage (delay passage) 660b, is set to OFF, and the delay passage discharge switch, which detects the ball that has flowed out from the second passage (delay passage) 660b, is set to OFF. When the switch 660e2 is set to OFF, that is, when the ball does not pass through the second path (delay path) 660b, the lower 4 bits are "0001" (written as "00" in FIG. 213), When the delay path entry ball switch 660e1 is set to ON and the delay path exit switch 660e2 is set to OFF, that is, when the ball is passing through the second path (delay path) 660b, the lower 4 bits becomes "0010" (indicated as "01" in FIG. 213), the delay passage entry switch 660e1 is set to OFF, and the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, the second passage (delay passage ) 660b, the lower 4 bits become "0011" (written as "02" in FIG. 213).

Here, the delay path entry ball switch 660e1 and the delay path exit switch 660e2 are both configured with proximity sensors that can detect the ball flowing down the second flow path tb formed in the second path 660b. It is configured to be turned on when an object is detected continuously for a predetermined period of time. The device is configured to be turned off when the object is not detected for a predetermined period of time.

Here, if the setting status of the lower 4 bits of the delay path status flag 223ff is "0001", "0010", or "0011" as described above, the ball normally flows down the second path (delay path) 660b. Since this is a state that can be set to , it is determined that the ball is in a normal falling state.

On the other hand, there is a state in which the delay passage ball entry switch 660e1 is set to ON and a delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is also set to ON, that is, a state in which the ball flows into the second passage (delay passage) 660b, and a state in which the ball is discharged. In the state where the state is detected at the same time, the lower 4 bits become "0011" (described as "03" in FIG. 213), and the delay path entry switch 660e1 becomes in an abnormal state (described as "-" in FIG. 213). , when the delay passage discharge switch 660e2 is set to ON, that is, when the sensor that detects the falling ball state in the second passage (delay passage) 660b is malfunctioning, the lower 4 bits are "0100" (Fig. 213 is written as "04"), and it is determined that the ball is in an abnormal downward flow state.

<About the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 214 to 224.

FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment. This timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is executed every 2 milliseconds, for example, instead of the timer interrupt process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31).

Of the timer interrupt processing in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 214), each processing in S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 is different from the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 31). The same processes as those in S101 to S103, S105, S107, S110, and S111 are executed.

In addition, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), when the process of S103 is completed, next is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and a third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A special symbol variation process 7 is executed to set a variation pattern, etc. (S191), and then the process moves to S105. The details of the special symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218.

After executing the process of S105, the normal symbol variation process 7, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S192), and then the process moves to S107. The details of the normal symbol variation process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 219. After executing the process of S107, the V entrance passage process accompanying the ball entering the V winning device 650 is executed (S193). Thereafter, the V passing process that is executed when the winning ball passes through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 is executed (S194), and then the process moves to S110. Note that details of the V entrance passing process and the V passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, when a ball passes through a specific area 650V provided in the V winning device 650 during a small winning game, the process (2) for executing the jackpot game after the small winning game ends. The V entrance passing process (S193 in FIG. 214) and the V passing process (S194 in FIG. 214) are provided as per-seed execution processing), the process related to the fluctuation of the first symbol (special symbol), and the second symbol ( This embodiment differs from the above-described first embodiment in that the detailed contents of the processing regarding the fluctuation of the normal symbols are different.

Next, special symbol variation processing 7 (S191) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 215. FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 7 (S191). This special symbol variation processing 7 (S191) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment, and is performed to perform variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37 and , is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol, etc. performed in the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 7 in the seventh embodiment (see S191 in FIG. 215), there are also places where the same process as the special symbol variation process in the first embodiment described above (see S104 in FIG. 32) is executed. However, for convenience of explanation, different codes are given to processes with the same content in the explanation. It should be noted that, of course, each modification described in each of the above-described embodiments can be applied to elements having the same processing content.

In the special symbol variation process 7 (S191 in FIG. 215) in the seventh embodiment, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting the jackpot (S10001). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S10001: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

If the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S10001: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If it is determined that it is not (S10002: No), it is determined whether the ball has entered the second ball entry port 3640 (S10003).

If it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entry port 3640 (S10003: Yes), a second ball entry command is set (S10004), the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and stop. The values of the type selection counter C3 and the small winning type counter C5 are stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area (S10005). Next, special symbol variation start processing 7 for starting variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10011). The special symbol variation start process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 216.

On the other hand, in the process of S10003, if it is determined that the ball has not entered the second ball entry port 3640 (S10003: No), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is acquired. (S10006). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S10007). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (not greater than 0) (S10007: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (not 0) (S10007: Yes), the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is determined to be larger than 0 (not 0) (S10007: Yes). ) is subtracted by 1 (S10008), and a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10009). Here, the set number of reserved balls command is configured to include information indicating that it is a command for indicating the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and is The held pitch count command set by the external output process (see S2201 in FIG. 52) executed in the main process of the device 110 (see FIG. 52) is output to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 side can grasp the current number of reserved balls for each type of special symbol.

After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command through the process of S10009, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S10010). After that, the process of S10011 is executed.

In addition, in the process of S10002, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10002: Yes), the variation time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (S10012). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If it is determined that the period has not elapsed (S10012: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10012, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S10012: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10013). The display mode of the stopped symbols is set in advance by special symbol variation start processing 7 (S10011), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. When this special symbol variation start process 7 is executed, a special symbol is drawn based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. More specifically, it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot or a miss according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a jackpot, the first win type counter The jackpot type (jackpot A to C) is determined according to the value of C2.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. Further, if it is a small win, a red LED is turned on, and if it is a loss, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Note that the display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuating display starts, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

After the process of S10013 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 7 is displayed. , it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot (S10014). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10014: Yes), a scenario for opening a specific winning hole is set based on the jackpot type (S10015), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S10016). Next, the jackpot start flag 203fb and jackpot flag 203o are set to ON (S10017), and the value of the time saving medium total counter 203fa and the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10018), and in S10019. Move to processing. In the process of S10019, a stop command is set (S10019), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10014, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S10014: No), the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed and it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win or not. (S10021). Note that details of this time saving number update process (S10020) will be described later with reference to FIG. 217.

In the process of S10021, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win (S10021: Yes), a small win start setting process is executed (S10022). Next, the process of S10019 is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S10021, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S10021: No), the small win start setting process (see S10022) is skipped, the process of S10019 is executed, and this process ends. do.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed and it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot, the time saving number update process (S10020) is executed, and then the current lottery result is Although the configuration is configured to determine whether it is a small hit, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, after executing the small hit start setting process (S10022), the time saving number update process (S10020) is configured to be executed. You may do so. Furthermore, for example, when the time saving number update process is executed and it is determined that the time saving number ends due to the current special symbol variation process, if the lottery result of the current special symbol is a loss, the execution timing of the time saving number updating process (The time saving state is ended at the symbol stop timing of the special symbol), and if the lottery result of the special symbol this time is a small hit, the time saving state may be configured to end at the timing when the small winning game ends. . Thereby, the time saving state can be set until just before the next special symbol variation starts. Further, even if a small win is won in the final variation of the time saving state, the small winning game can be executed in the state where the time saving state is set.

Next, special symbol variation start processing 7 (S10011) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 216. FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 7 (S10011). This special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and is performed in the first special symbol holding ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot," "special symbol small win," or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment of success or failure), and the first symbol This is a process executed when setting information required when determining a performance pattern (variable performance pattern) of a variable performance performed on the display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process 7 (S10011), first, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, which are stored in the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, And each value of the small hit type counter C5 is acquired (S10101). Next, a lottery result is acquired based on the first random number 7 table 202fd corresponding to the type of the acquired special symbol (S10102). Specifically, if the first special symbol is drawn based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202fa1 (see FIG. 204(b)) It is determined whether it is a jackpot by comparing the random numbers stored in A big hit or a small hit is determined by comparing the random number value stored in the special symbol 2 random number table 202fa2 (see FIG. 204(c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S10103). When it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S10103: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first win type selection 7 table 202fa corresponding to the type of the acquired special symbol (S10104). More specifically, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random value stored in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202fb1 or the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202fb2. , it is determined what type of jackpot is among the five types of special symbol jackpots (jackpots A to E) (see FIG. 205(b) or (c)).

Note that in the seventh embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same determination value for determining a jackpot, but are not limited to this, and may be different random numbers. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be a loss in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and it is possible to suppress the bias of jackpots.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the number of jackpot random values is not limited to that, and the number of jackpot random values is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of random values to be determined may be set differently. With this configuration, the probability of jackpot can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when a lottery is executed using the special symbol with a higher jackpot probability, the player This can create expectations for a big hit.

Then, the display mode at the time of normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol type and jackpot type is set (S10105). In the process of S10105, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37A) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to E). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A to E) are set as stop types in order to stop display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

Thereafter, a jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S10106), and the process moves to S10113. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S10106, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation performance on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the type of special symbol obtained, the lottery result, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the current game among each fluctuation pattern table included in the fluctuation pattern 7 table 202fd. The fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined by comparing the values defined in the data table corresponding to the state (see FIG. 207).

In the process of S10113, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S10106 (S10113). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in S10105 (S10114). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are used in the external output processing (S2201) executed in the main processing of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52). Therein, it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, it is possible to set the variable display mode (performance mode) of the third symbol in correspondence with the variation pattern (variation time) and stop type of the special symbol on the audio lamp control device 113 side. When the process of S10114 is finished, the process returns to special symbol variation process 7 (S191).

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a jackpot (S10103: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small win (S10107). If it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S10107: Yes), the small win type is acquired based on the small win type selection 7 table 202fe (S10108). More specifically, the value of the small hit type counter C5 acquired in the process of S10101 is compared with the random value specified in the small hit type selection 7 table 202fe, and the small win (small win) of the three types of special symbols is compared. Among the wins A to C), it is determined what type of small win is (see FIG. 206(b)).

In addition, in this seventh embodiment, since it is configured so that there is no possibility of winning a small hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if a small win is won in the lottery of the special symbol, Since it is confirmed that the current special symbol lottery is the second special symbol lottery, the process to determine the type of the special symbol that won the small hit is not executed, but for example, the first special symbol, If the configuration is such that a small hit can be won with any of the second special symbols, after determining that a small hit has been won, a process is performed to determine the type of special symbol corresponding to the current lottery, and the determination is made. It is preferable to perform a process of selecting a small winning type depending on the result. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set different types of small winnings depending on the case where a small winning is won with the first special symbol and the case where a small winning is won with the second special symbol, which improves the gameplay. can have a wide range. In addition, the selection ratio of each small winning type may be configured to be different without changing the type of small winning that can be set when a small winning is won with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

Next, a display mode at the time of a small win corresponding to the small win type is set (S10109), and a small win fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S10110). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the small winning symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Note that the process executed in S10110 is different from the process in S10106 described above in that the lottery result of the target special symbol is a small win instead of a jackpot, but the set variation Since the subsequent processing performed on the pattern (for example, the processing of outputting to the audio lamp control device 113) is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a small win in the process of S10107 (S10107: No), a display mode at the time of a win corresponding to the special symbol is set (S10111). Thereafter, a variation pattern when missing is determined based on the number of reserved pitches (S10112). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. Next, the processes of S10113 and S10114 described above are executed, and the process returns to the special symbol variation process 7.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the special symbol lottery results are configured to be determined in the order of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that "missing" is prioritized in the determination. Such a configuration is an effective configuration for reducing the number of determinations that are repeatedly executed in various processes of the main controller 110, since the lottery result that is most likely to appear as a lottery result for a special symbol is a "lost" lottery result. becomes.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, in the special symbol variation start process 7 (see S10011 in FIG. 216), the variation pattern command and the stop type command are configured to be set within the same process. The pattern command and the stop type command may be configured to be set at different timings. In addition, even if the settings are made within the same process, the stop type command is configured to be output after a predetermined period of time after the fluctuation pattern command is output so that the timing of output to the audio lamp control device 113 is not the same. You may do so.

Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the time saving number update process (S10020) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing the time saving number update process (S10020). This time saving number update process (S10020) is executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), updates the time saving number, and sets the gaming state to the normal state. This is a process for

In the time saving number update process (S10020), first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving total counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201). If it is determined that the value of the time saving total counter 203fa is not larger than 0 (0) (S10201: No), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state, the number of time savings is updated. Since it is not necessary, this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium total counter 203fa is larger than 0 (S10201: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the time saving state, the number of time saving times is updated (subtracted). The process for executing the process (S10202 to S10209) is executed.

In the process of S10202, the value of the time-saving total counter 203fa is subtracted by 1 (S10202), and then it is determined whether the current special symbol variation is a variation of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S10203). If it is determined that the current variation is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) (S10203: Yes), the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is subtracted by 1 (S10204), and the process moves to S10205. On the other hand, in the process of S10203, if it is determined that the current variation is not the second special symbol (it is the first special symbol) (S10203: No), the process of S10204 is skipped and the process proceeds to S10205.

In the process of S10205, a remaining time saving number command indicating the value of the time saving medium counter (time saving medium total counter 203fa and time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff) that has been changed by the calculation is set (S10205). The remaining time shortening number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is not 0 (S10206: No), then It is determined whether the value of the summation counter 203fa is 0 (S10207). In the process of S10207, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving total counter 203fa is not 0 (S10207: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S10206 that the value of the time-saving medium special 2 counter 203ff is 0 (S10206: Yes), or if it is determined that the value of the time-saving medium total counter 203fa is 0 in the process of S10207. In the case (S10207: Yes), the gaming state is set to the normal state (S10208), the values of the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff and the time saving medium total counter 203fa are both set to 0 (S10209), and this processing is ended. .

As explained above, in this embodiment, a plurality of time saving termination conditions are set for terminating the time saving state, and when any of the time saving termination conditions is met, the process of terminating the time saving state (normal state The configuration is configured to execute the process for setting the Specifically, when the number of special symbol variations (total number of variations), which is the sum of the number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol during the time saving state, reaches a predetermined number, that is, the time is reduced. A time saving end condition that is satisfied when the value (for example, 100) set in the time saving medium total counter 203fa when the state is set is subtracted every time a special symbol variation is executed and the value becomes 0. When the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number, that is, the value (for example, 10) set in the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff when the time saving state is set becomes the second special symbol. 2 Special symbols (special 2) are subtracted every time a variation is executed, and the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the value becomes 0, and the time-saving state ends when any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied. It is configured to do so.

With this configuration, the lottery for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous for the player than the lottery for the first special symbol, is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) while the time saving state is set. ) can be executed reliably. In addition, although this embodiment has a configuration having the above-mentioned two time-saving termination conditions, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which three or more time-saving termination conditions can be set. Further, in the jackpot winning of the special symbol that triggers the setting of the time saving state, the value for the time saving end condition to be satisfied may be varied depending on the type of the won jackpot. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is configured to end when any one of the plurality of time saving ending conditions is satisfied; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, three time saving ending conditions End conditions may be set in advance, and the time saving state may be ended when two of the time saving end conditions are satisfied. By setting the conditions for ending the time-saving state in a complicated manner in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time-saving state (advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player) will continue. The game can be played with a sense of tension.

In addition, as described above, when setting multiple time-saving end conditions, the value corresponding to the time-saving end condition that is most likely to be met is set as an effect to notify the player of the period until the end of the time-saving state. All you have to do is execute the performance that will notify you. In this embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the drawing of the second special symbol (variation) is executed by the right-handed game, so the number of remaining time saving times to be executed during the time saving state is notified. is configured to notify the value until the time-saving end condition is satisfied, which is established based on the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), among the plurality of time-saving end conditions (Fig. 199(b) (See the remaining time short number notification area Dm6).

Next, with reference to FIG. 218, the small hit start setting process (S10022) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing the small hit start setting process (S10022). This small hit start setting process (S10022) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214), and it ), this is a process for setting the start of the small winning game (the game content (operation scenario) of the small winning game to be executed this time).

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment, when a small winning game is started, the V winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which a ball can win (easily), and the winning ball in the V winning device 650 is By passing through the specific area 650V, the jackpot game is executed after the small win game ends.

That is, the gaming state in which the small winning game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won in the V winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and a jackpot game is executed compared to the normal gaming state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state with a higher possibility.

In the small win start setting process (S10022), first, an opening scenario (operation scenario) corresponding to the small win type is set (S10301). This operation scenario is set based on the small win type set with reference to the small win type selection 7 table 202fe when winning the small win, and with reference to the open scenario 7 table 202ff.

Thereafter, a jackpot type corresponding to the small win type is set in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd (S10302). More specifically, based on the small winning type and the small winning type selection 7 table 202fe, the jackpot type (big winning D to E) when passing V is determined. As described above with reference to FIG. 206(b), if the small win type is small win A, it is determined that the jackpot type when passing V is "10 round time saving 10 time jackpot, time saving A", and the small win If the type of small win is B, it is determined that it is a "10 round time saving 10 time jackpot, time saving B", and if the small win type is C, it is determined that it is a "10 round time saving no jackpot" (Figure 206 (see (b)).

Next, the start of a small hit is set based on the small win type (S10303), and the small hit start flag 203fc and the small hit medium flag 203p are set to ON (S10304). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192). This normal symbol variation processing 7 (S192) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 214), and is performed during the variable display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device and associated with the second ball entrance 3640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 3640a.

In addition, in the present seventh embodiment, a plurality of winning types can be set as the winning type of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern (opening scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a is set according to the set winning type. are configured to differ. As a result, when a normal symbol is won, the electric accessory 3640a can be opened and closed in multiple operation patterns, making it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the electric accessory 3640a is operating. be able to.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, it is easier for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640 when the electric accessory 3640a is operating (it is easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640 than when the electric accessory 3640a is not operating). ) state, and at the timing when the operation of the electric accessory 3640a ends, the ball flowing down on the electric accessory 3640a is placed in a different flow path (first flow path ta, second flow path ta) depending on its flowing position. tb) (see FIGS. 195 to 198).

The ball flowing down the second flow path tb is configured to more easily pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650 during the small winning game than the ball flowing down the first flow path ta. . As described above, in this embodiment, by varying the opening operation details of the electric accessory 3640a, it is possible to vary the ease with which the ball enters the second ball entry port 3640 (second ball entry port 3640). A first open state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the opening 3640, and a second open state in which it is more difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entry port 3640 than in the easy ball entry state), and a The ease with which the ball passes can be varied (a first guidance state in which it is easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V, and a second guidance state in which it is more difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V than in the first guidance state). ).

In other words, in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of winning types can be set as the winning type of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the operation pattern (opening scenario) of the electric accessory 3640a is determined according to the set winning type. By making the variables different, it is possible to vary the ease with which each condition is satisfied for each of the multiple conditions for the player to receive benefits. It is possible to make the player more interested in the operation details of the electric accessory 3640a).

Note that as a configuration for varying the ease with which a plurality of game conditions are established in this way, a configuration other than the configuration of the seventh embodiment may be used. For example, the variable means for setting a plurality of operation patterns may be Instead of the accessory 3640a, a winning device (for example, variable winning device 65) may be used in which an operation pattern is set when winning a jackpot.

In this normal symbol variation process 7 (S192), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S801). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is being performed. This includes the middle of the day. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S801: Yes), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S801: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802), and the second symbol display device is changed. If the display mode is not changing (S802: No), then it is determined whether data (value of the second winning random number counter C4) is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area (S803).

In the process of S803, if it is determined that no data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area, that is, the conditions for newly starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) are not satisfied (S803: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball possible area, that is, if it is determined that the conditions for newly starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (second symbol) are satisfied (S803 :Yes), then the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the normal symbol holding ball execution area is acquired (S804).

Then, based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S804 and the second winning random number 7 table 202fc, a lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is acquired (S805). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number 7 table 202fc. As mentioned above, if the current gaming state is the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 79", you will receive an A per normal symbol. If it is in the range of "80 to 98", it is determined that the score is B, and if the value is "99", it is determined that it is a miss. In addition, when the current gaming state is a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is "0", it is determined that the winning is A, If the value is "1", it is determined that the score is B, and if it is "2 to 99", it is determined that it is a miss (see FIG. 206(a)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S805 is a normal symbol hit (ordinary symbol hit A or common symbol hit B) (S806), and it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit. If it is determined (S806: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S807), and the process moves to S809. In the process of S807, after the fluctuating display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "○" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol (stop display mode) of the second symbol so that the winning type can be identified. Set it as follows.

On the other hand, in the process of S806, if it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S806: No), a display mode when the symbol is out is set (S808). In the process of S808, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the "x" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of failure is completed, the process moves to S809.

When the process of S807 or S808 is completed, in the process of S809, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S809), and the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols. If the time saving state) (S809: Yes), the variable time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S810), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S809: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S811), and this process is performed. finish.

In the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, a shorter fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the second symbol than when the time saving state is not set (when the normal state is set). It is configured as follows. As a result, the number of drawings of the second symbol per unit time can be increased in the time-saving state more than in the normal state, so that the time-saving game can be executed efficiently.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, when the time saving state is set, the winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is made higher than that in the normal state, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased. By shortening the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a and making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 3640, it is easier to draw the second special symbol (special symbol 2) than in the normal state. However, it is only necessary that the drawing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed more easily in the time-saving state than in the normal state; for example, in the time-saving state than in the normal state. It is better to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (second symbol), and the other things may be the same, or the short time state has a higher probability of hitting the normal symbol (second symbol) than the normal state, and the other things are the same. They may be the same, or the operation pattern of the electric accessory 3640a may be set to make it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 3640 in the time-saving state than in the normal state, and the rest may be the same.

On the other hand, in the process of S802, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S802: Yes), it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S812). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S810 or the process of S811 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

In the process of S812, if the variable time has not elapsed (S812: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S812, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S812: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S813). In the process of S813, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S807, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. ). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S808, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device. It is set as follows. When the stop display is set by the process of S813, when the second symbol display update process (see S2208) of the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed, the second symbol display is set. The variable display in the device is finished, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S807 or the process of S808.

Next, when the ongoing variable display is started on the second symbol display device, it is determined whether the current lottery result for the normal symbol (current lottery result) is a hit for the regular symbol (S814). If the current lottery result is out of the normal symbols (S814: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a hit with a normal symbol (S814: Yes), it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) with a normal symbol (S815).

In the process of S815, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S815: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is set to 0.2 seconds. , and the number of openings is set to 1 (S816), and the process moves to S818. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (time saving state) with normal symbols (S815: Yes), it sets a normal symbol winning command (S851), and sets the winning type set this time and the current gaming state. The operation pattern of the corresponding electric accessory 3640a is set (S817), and the process moves to S818.

In the process of S818, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is set (S818), and this process ends. When the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a is set by the process of S818, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S2206) of the main process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 52) is executed, the electric accessory The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S816 or S817 are completed.

Next, the V entrance passage process (S193) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing this V entrance passage process (S193). This V entrance passage process (S193) is a flowchart showing the V entrance passage process (S193) executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214).

In the V entrance passage process (S193), it is first determined whether a ball passage sensor (not shown) that detects that a ball has won a prize in the V winning device 650 is on (S10401). This ball passing sensor is a detection means that turns on when a ball passes. Specifically, it is composed of a proximity sensor arranged close to the ball flow path so that the period required for the ball to flow down the detection area of the ball passage sensor is a predetermined period (for example, 30 milliseconds). The proximity sensor is configured to turn on (output an on signal) when it continuously detects an object for 30 milliseconds. As a result, for example, even if a state in which a ball is detected at an interval of less than 30 milliseconds occurs due to noise generated within the pachinko machine 10, a problem in which that state is determined to be a state in which a ball has passed can be suppressed. can do.

In the process of S10401, if it is determined that the ball passage sensor is not on (S10401: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S10401, if it is determined that the ball passing sensor is on (S10401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the V prize winning device 650 is in the open period (S10402).

In the process of S10402, if it is determined that the V winning device 650 is in the open period (S10402: Yes), a V entrance passage command is set (S10403), and this process ends. The V entrance passage command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used as an audio The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the V-entrance passing command, it counts the balls that have passed through the V-entrance and transmits a command to the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V-entrance passing. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect during a small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 650.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the V winning device 650 is not in the open period (S10402: No), this is a case where a ball enters the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set. (S10404), then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the V passing process (S194) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing the V passing process (S194). This V passing process (S194) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 214) in the seventh embodiment.

In the V passing process, first, it is determined whether the V passing flag 203fg is on (S10501). In the process of S10501, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203fg is on (S10501: Yes), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S10501, if it is determined that the V passing flag 203fg is not on (S10501: No), it is determined whether or not V passing is present (S10502). That is, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the V winning switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650. In the process of S10502, if it is determined that V does not pass (S10502: No), this process is directly ended.

In the process of S10502, if it is determined that there is a V passage (S10502: Yes), it is determined whether the V passage is valid (S10503). If it is determined that the V passing valid period is in effect (S10503: Yes), the V passing jackpot type value stored in the V passing jackpot type storage area 203fd is obtained (S10504), and the obtained V passing jackpot is executed. The V flag 203fe corresponding to the type is set on (S10505). Then, a V passing command is set (S10506).

Next, the V passing flag 203fg is set to ON (S10507), and then the time-saving medium total counter 203fa and the time-saving medium special 2 counter 203ff are set to 0 (S10508), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10503, if it is determined that the V passing valid period is not in effect (S10503: No), an error command is set (S10509), and this process ends. If the ball passes through the V winning switch 650e3 when the V is not valid, it is considered that the ball has been illegally won to the V winning switch 650e3. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S10505, an error is output and fraudulent activity can be discovered.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 222, jackpot control processing 7 (S2282) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process 7 (S2282). This jackpot control process 7 (S2282) is executed in place of the jackpot control process (S2204) in the main process (see FIG. 52), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol, it responds to the jackpot. This is a process for executing various performances and opening or closing the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the first variable winning apparatus 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning apparatus 650).

In the jackpot control process 7 (see FIG. 222, S2282), first, it is determined whether a special symbol jackpot is started (S10601). Specifically, if the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to ON by the process of S10017 of the special symbol variation process 7 (see FIG. 215), it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10601, if a special symbol jackpot is to be started (S10601: Yes), an opening command is set (S10602). Then, the jackpot start flag 203fb is set to OFF (S10603), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10601, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S10601: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S10604). During a special symbol jackpot, a special symbol jackpot is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and a special symbol jackpot is being displayed. This includes during a predetermined period of time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S10604, if the special symbol is not hitting the jackpot (S10604: No), the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S10604, if it is determined that the special symbol is hitting the jackpot (S10604: Yes), the process of S10605 is executed. In the process of S10605, it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S10605). In the process of S10605, if it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S10605: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or The V winning opening 650a) of the V winning device 650 is opened (S10606), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S10607). After setting the round number command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used in the external output processing (S2201) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. Therein, it is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command corresponding to the number of rounds to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

Although details will be described later, in the seventh embodiment, when a continuous jackpot is executed, a display round number command corresponding to the cumulative number of rounds is transmitted in the voice lamp control device 113. Become. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in continuous jackpots will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, thereby increasing the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the process of S10605, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S10605: No), the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) It is determined whether the closing condition is satisfied (S10608). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650), or , when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 in total) have been won in the first variable winning device 65 or the V winning device 650, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S10608, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10608: Yes), the corresponding winning hole is closed. The opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed (S10609), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing conditions for the corresponding winning opening (specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650) are not satisfied (S10608: No), the ending effect starts. It is determined whether the timing is right (S10610). The start timing of the ending effect is when the opening/closing door 65f1 is closed after the 15th round and the waiting time (in this embodiment, 3 seconds), which is the time for ball removal, has elapsed. It is determined as

In the process of S10610, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10610: Yes), an ending command is set (S10611), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used during the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S10610, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S10610: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10612). In the process of S10612, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10612: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10612, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending performance (S10612: Yes), it is determined whether the special game being executed was jackpot C (S10613). In the process of S10613, if it is determined that it is not jackpot C (5R time saving no jackpot) (S10613: No), set 100 to the time saving medium total counter 203fa and 10 to the time saving medium special 2 counter 203ff (S10614), The process moves to S10615. On the other hand, in the process of S10613, if it is determined that it was a jackpot C (5R time saving jackpot) (S10613: Yes), the process of S10614 is skipped and the process moves to the process of S10615.

In the process of S10615, a state command corresponding to the state after the jackpot is set (S10615). Then, the end of the jackpot is set (S10616), the jackpot flag 203o is set to OFF (S10617), and then this process is ended.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 223, the small hit control process 7 (S2283) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process 7 (S2283). This small win control process 7 (S2283) is executed in place of the small win control process (S2205) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment, and the pachinko machine 10 is in a small win state with a special symbol. In this case, it is possible to perform various effects according to the small win, or to open or close the corresponding winning hole (specific winning hole 65a of the first variable winning device 65 or V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650). It is processing.

In the small hit control process 7 (S2283 in FIG. 223), first, it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203fc is set to ON, it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S10701, when a small hit of the special symbol is started (S10701: Yes), an opening command is set (S10702). Then, the small hit start flag 203fc is set to OFF (S10703), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S10701, if the small winning of the special symbol is not started (S10701: No), it is determined whether the small winning of the special symbol is in progress (S10704). During a small hit with a special symbol, a small win with a special symbol is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (including during a small win game with a special symbol); This includes during the predetermined time after the end of the special symbol winning game. In the process of S10704, if the special symbol is not hit (S10704: No), this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S10704, if it is determined that the special symbol is in a small hit (S10704: Yes), the process of S10705 is executed. In the process of S10705, it is determined whether it is V winning opening opening timing (S10705). In the process of S10705, if it is determined that it is the V winning hole opening timing (S10705: Yes), the corresponding V winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is opened based on the opening scenario 7 table 202ff. (S10706), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10705, if it is not the V winning hole opening timing (S10705: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the corresponding V winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707) . Specifically, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening scenario set corresponding to the small winning game ends, or when a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls in total) enter the V winning device 650. It is determined that

In the process of S10707, if it is determined that the closing condition of the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is satisfied (S10707: Yes), the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is closed. The port 650a) is closed (S10708), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition of the corresponding winning hole (V winning hole 650a of the V winning device 650) is not satisfied (S10707: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10709). In the process of S10709, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S10709: Yes), an ending command is set (S10710), and this process ends. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used during the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201 in the first embodiment. and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an ending effect.

On the other hand, in the S10709 process, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S10709: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10711). In the process of S10711, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the ending effect (S10711: No), this process ends.

In the process of S10711, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the ending effect (S10711: Yes), it is determined whether the V flag 203fe is set to on (S10712), and if the V flag 203fe is not set to on. If it is determined that (S10712: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203fe is set to on (S10712: Yes), an opening scenario based on the jackpot type corresponding to the contents of the V flag 203fe is set (S10713), and the jackpot start flag 203fb and the jackpot are set. The medium flag 203o is set to ON (S10714), the V flag 203fe is set to OFF (S10715), the V passing flag 203fg is set to OFF (S10716), and the small hit medium flag 203p is set to OFF (S10717). , this process ends.

Next, electric accessory opening/closing processing 7 (S2281) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 224. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing this electric accessory opening/closing process 7 (S2281). This electric accessory opening/closing process 7 (S2281) is a process executed in place of the electric accessory opening/closing process (S2207) in the main process (see FIG. 52) in the first embodiment.

In the electric accessory opening/closing process 7 (S2281), first, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is being set (S10801). If it is determined that the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is not being set (S10801: No), the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is being set (S10801: Yes), the opening timing of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is set. It is determined whether there is one (S10802). If it is determined that it is time to open the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10802: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is opened (S10803), An accessory release command is set (S10804), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10802, if it is determined that it is not the timing to release the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10802: No), next, the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is opened. It is determined whether it is time to close the object 3640a (S10805). If it is determined that it is time to close the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10805: Yes), the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is closed (S10806), The accessory closing command is set (S10807), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing to close the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10805: No), then the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 is performed. It is determined whether it is the end timing of (S10809). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10809: Yes), a common pattern hit end command is set (S10810), and then this process ends. do. Further, in the process of S10809, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 3640a attached to the second ball entrance 3640 (S10809: No), this process is ended.

<Control processing executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 to 233. First, the main processing in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 225. This main process is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. 59) in the sixth embodiment (and first embodiment), and is a process executed in place of the main process (see FIG. This is a process for performing the same process as 59).

Of the main processing in the seventh embodiment (see FIG. 225), each processing in S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 is different from the main processing in the sixth embodiment (and first embodiment) (see FIG. 59). The same processes as S4101 to S4111 and S4114 to S4118 are executed. In the main process (see FIG. 225) in the seventh embodiment, after the process of S4111 is executed, the effect update process is executed (S4181). This effect update process (S4181) is for performing processing for changing the content of the currently executed effect (already set variable display) during execution of the effect.

After executing the effect update process (S4181), command determination process 7 is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S4182). Details of this command determination process 7 will be described later with reference to FIG. 226.

Next, the process moves to S4183. In the process of S4183, variable display setting process 7 is executed (S4183). In the variable display setting process 7 (S4183), a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81. . As a result, the command is sent to display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process 7 (S4183) will be described later with reference to FIG. 231.

After executing the variable display setting process 7 (S4183), the ball passage monitoring process is executed (S4184). Details of this ball passage monitoring process (S4184) will be described later with reference to FIG. 233.

Also, it is determined whether 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S4101 was executed (S4101), and if 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S4101: No). ), the process proceeds to S4182 without performing the processes of S4102 to S4111 and S4181.

Next, with reference to FIG. 226, command determination processing 7 (S4182) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 7 (S4182). This command determination process 7 (S4182) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. do. In addition, in this process, when a winning information command is received from the main control device 110, a decision is also made to start a continuous preview performance by the third symbol display device 81.

In command determination processing 7 (S4182), first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the first command received from the main controller 110 is changed. It is determined whether a pattern command has been received (S12001). When a variation pattern command is received (S12001: Yes), the variation start flag 223fa of the symbol type corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set to ON (S12002), and the variation pattern type is set from the received variation pattern command. (S12003) and returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S12001: No), then it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12004). If the stop type command is received (S12004: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12005), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12006), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S12004: No), then it is determined whether the held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12007). Then, when the held ball number command is received (S12007: Yes), the value included in the received held ball number command, that is, the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 ( The number N1) of holding the variable display in the special symbol is extracted and stored in the first special symbol holding ball counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 (S12008). In addition, in the process of S12008, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is set. After completing the process in S12008, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) or when a special symbol lottery is held. Therefore, each time a starting prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the main controller 110 by the process of S12008. It can be adjusted to the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d. Therefore, even if the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise etc., the starting prize will not be activated. At the time of detection or special symbol lottery, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223d of the audio lamp control device 113 can be corrected to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d of the main controller 110. can. Incidentally, when the process of S12008 is executed, a display pending ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 223d is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S12007, if the number of reserved pitches command has not been received (S12007: No), then it is determined whether the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S12009). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S12009: Yes), winning information based on the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010), and then the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, in the process of S12009, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12009: No), then it is determined whether a winning-related command has been received (S12011), and the winning-related command is received. If it is determined that the game has done so (S12011: Yes), the winning related process 7 is executed (S12012), and this process ends. This win-related process 7 (S12012) causes the third symbol display device 81 to execute an effect display corresponding to a jackpot game or a small win game that is executed when a jackpot or small win is won as a result of the special symbol lottery. When a jackpot or small jackpot is won, processing corresponding to various commands sent from the main control device 110 is executed.

Here, the contents of the winning related process 7 (S12012) will be explained with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the contents of win-related processing 7 in the seventh embodiment. When this win-related process (S12012) is executed, first, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S12101). If it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S12101: Yes), a jackpot start command for display is set (S12102), and this process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the command output process (S4102) of the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the seventh embodiment. ) is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, it displays on the third symbol display device 81 an effect that suggests the start of a jackpot.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S12101: No), then it is determined whether or not a round number command has been received (S12103). In the process of S12103, if it is determined that the number of rounds command has been received (S12103: Yes), the number of rounds command for display is set based on the number of rounds (S12104), and this process ends. Note that in the seventh embodiment, since information indicating the number of rounds is transmitted from the main controller 110 as a round number command, the display round number command is set based on the received round number command. In order to reduce the amount of command data sent from the main control device 110, if the main control device 110 sends information indicating that a new round has started as a round update command, the voice When a round update command is received in the RAM 223 of the lamp control device 113, a round number accumulation counter is provided that accumulates the number of received round update commands, and based on the value of the round number accumulation counter, the audio ramp control device 113 side The current number of rounds may be calculated and a display round number command may be set.

In the process of S12103, if it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S12103: No), then it is determined whether or not a jackpot end command has been received (S12105). In the process of S12105, if it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S12105: Yes), a jackpot end command for display is set (S12106), and this process is ended.

In the process of S12105, if it is determined that the jackpot end command has not been received (S12105: No), it is determined whether the small win start command has been received (S12107).

In the process of S12107, if it is determined that the small hit start command has been received (S12107: Yes), the small hit start process is executed (S12108) and this process ends. Further, details of this small winning start process (S12108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 228.

Here, the contents of the small winning start process (S12108) will be explained with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing the details of the small hit start process in the seventh embodiment. When this small winning start process (S12108) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation flag 223fg provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12201), and it is determined that the long fluctuation flag 223fg is on. If so (S12201: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12202). Next, it is determined whether the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203). In the process of S12203, if it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" (S12203: Yes), a small win start command for display indicating a small win with high V expectation is set (S12204). , and then returns to the win-related process 7.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12201 that the long variation flag 223fg is not on (S12201: No), the process moves to S12205. Also, in the process of S12203, if it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12203: No), the process proceeds to S12205.

In the process of S12205, a display small win start command indicating a normal small win is set (S12205), and then the process returns to win related processing 7.

Returning to FIG. 227, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S12107, if it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S12107: No), it is determined whether or not the small hit end command has been received (S12109). In the process of S12109, if it is determined that the small winning end command has been received (S12109: Yes), a small winning ending command for display is set in order to execute a production suggesting the end of the small winning game (S12110), This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12109, if it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S12109: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S12111). In the process of S12111, if it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S12111: Yes), a V entrance passage command for display is set (S12112), and this process ends. Further, in the process of S12111, if it is determined that the V entrance passing command has not been received (S12111: No), it is then determined whether the V passing command has been received (S12113).

In the process of S12113, if it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S12113: Yes), a display V effect command is set to indicate the effect based on the ball entering the V switch 650e3 of the V winning device 650 ( S12114), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S12113, if it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (S12113: No), this process is directly ended.

Returning to FIG. 226, the explanation will be continued. In the process of S12011, if it is determined that a winning-related command has not been received (S12011: No), then it is determined whether a stop command has been received (S12013). If it is determined that the stop command has been received (S12013: Yes), the third symbol is set to stop display (S12014), and then it is determined whether the length variation flag 223fg is on (S12015). If it is determined that the long variation flag 223fg is on (S12015: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to OFF (S12016), and then the process returns to the main process. In the process of S12015, if it is determined that the length variation flag 223fg is not on (S12015: No), the process of S12016 is not executed and the process returns to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12013 that the stop command has not been received (S12013: No), then it is determined whether or not a time-saving production related command has been received (S12017). If it is determined that the time-saving performance-related command has been received (S12017: Yes), the time-saving performance-related process is executed (S12018), and then the process returns to the main process. Details of this time-saving effect related processing (S12018) will be described later with reference to FIG. 229. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S12017 that the time-saving effect-related command has not been received (S12017: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S12019), and then the process returns to the main process.

Next, the contents of the time-saving effect related processing (S12018) will be explained with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time-saving effect related processing (S12018). The time saving effect related process (S12018) is a process executed in the command determination process 7 (see FIG. 226) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the time-saving effect related process (S12018) is executed, first, the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 223fe is read out (S12301), and then it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state (S12302). ). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state (S12302: No), this process is ended and the process returns to command determination process 7 (S4182 in FIG. 226).

On the other hand, in the process of S12302, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state for normal symbols (S12302: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a command for winning a common symbol has been received (S12303), If it is determined that a winning command has been received (S12303: Yes), the current winning type is analyzed based on the received winning command (S12304), and a time-saving effect corresponding to the winning type is executed. A time-saving effect start command for display is set (S12305), a normal figure hit medium flag 223fi is set on (S12306), and then the process returns to command determination processing 7.

On the other hand, in the process of S12303, if it is determined that the command to hit the normal pattern has not been received (S12303: No), then it is determined whether or not the second ball entry command has been received (S12307). If it is determined that the second ball entering command has been received (S12307: Yes), the second ball entering flag 223fh is set to ON (S12308), and a display effect command that updates the time saving effect is set (S12309); Thereafter, the process returns to command determination processing 7.

On the other hand, in the process of S12307, if it is determined that the second ball entry command has not been received (S12307: No), then it is determined whether or not a normal pattern hit end command has been received (S12310). If it is determined that the command to end the winning of a normal figure has been received (S12310: Yes), the processing at the time of ending a winning of a normal figure is executed (S12311), and then the process returns to the command determination process 7. If it is determined in the process of S12310 that the normal pattern winning end command has not been received (S12310: No), the process directly returns to the command determination process 7. Further, details of the process at the end of winning a common symbol (S12311) will be described later with reference to FIG. 230.

Next, the contents of the process at the end of winning a normal figure (S12311) will be explained with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing the contents of the process (S12311) at the end of winning a normal figure. The ordinary figure winning end process (S12311) is a process executed in the time saving effect related process (see FIG. 229) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment.

When the process at the end of hitting a common symbol (S12311) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the second ball entering flag 223fh is on (S12401). If it is determined that the second ball entering flag 223fh is on (S12401: Yes), the second ball entering flag 223fh is set to off (S12402), and the process proceeds to S12404. If it is determined that the second ball entry flag 223fh is not on (S12401: No), a display performance command for ending the time-saving performance is set (S12403), and the process proceeds to S12404.

In the process of S12404, the medium hit flag 223fi is set to OFF (S12404), and then this process is ended and the process returns to the time-saving production related process (S12018 in FIG. 229).

Next, with reference to FIG. 231, the variable display setting process 7 (S4183) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process 7 (S4183). This variable display setting process 7 (S4183) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and is performed in the third symbol display device 81 to produce a variable display. In order to execute this, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the fluctuation display setting process 7 (S4183), first, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223fa1 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5101). If it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag fa1 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5101: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so step S5107 Move to processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 is on (S5101: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 is set to off (S5102), and then the A display variation pattern command is generated based on the obtained variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5181). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the third symbol display device 81 using the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. Display control of the variable effect is started. When the process of S5181 is finished, the data in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5182), and the process moves to S5107.

In the process of S5107, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5107). If it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, it is off) (S5107: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so S5111 Move to processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 is on (S5107: Yes), the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 is set to off (S5108), and then the special figure 2 variation display setting process 7 (S5183). Details of this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183) will be described later with reference to FIG. 232. When the process of S5183 is finished, data corresponding to the second special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is shifted (S5110), and the process moves to S5111.

In the process of S5111, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop type selection flag fb1 or the special figure 2 stop type selection flag fb2 provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5111). If it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 is not on (that is, off) (S5111: No), a variation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110. Since this is not the case, this process ends immediately. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 is on (S5111: Yes), the special figure 1 variation start flag fa1 or the special figure 2 variation start flag fa2 is set to off. (S5112), and then sets the display special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop type command based on the stop type extracted from the command (S5113), and then ends this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing this special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183). This special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 7 (see FIG. 231) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. be.

In the special figure 2 variable display setting process 7 (S5183), first, the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 223fe provided in the RAM 223 is read out (S12501), and then the pachinko machine 10 is set to the time-saving state with normal symbols. It is determined whether or not (S12502). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal symbol time saving state (S12502: No), a corresponding display variation pattern command is set (S12510), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12502, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time saving state with normal symbols (S12502: Yes), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S12503). If it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S12503: Yes), a display variation pattern command corresponding to the jackpot is set (S12504), and then this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S12503, if it is determined that the lottery result is not a jackpot (S12503: No), then it is determined whether or not the lottery result is a small win (S12505). If it is determined that the lottery result is not a small win (S12505: No), a variable pattern command indicating the end of the time-saving effect is set (S12506), and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S12505, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S12505: Yes), then it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern of the small win is a long fluctuation (S12507). If it is determined that the small winning variation pattern is a long variation (S12507: Yes), the long variation flag 223fg is set to ON (S12508), and the process moves to S12509. On the other hand, in the process of S12507, if it is determined that the small winning variation pattern is not a long variation (S12507: No), the process of S12508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S12509.

In the process of S12509, a display variation pattern command corresponding to the small win is set (S12509), and then this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 233, a description will be given of the ball passage monitoring process (S4184) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing this ball passage monitoring process (S4184). This ball passage monitoring process (S4184) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 225) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh embodiment, and is performed to display a variable effect on the third symbol display device 81. In order to execute the command, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110.

In the ball passage monitoring process (S4184), first, it is determined whether a delay passage ball entry switch (not shown) is on (S12601). If it is determined that the delay path entry switch is on (S12601: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the medium hit flag 223fi provided in the RAM 223 is on (S12602). If it is determined that the medium hit flag 223fi is not on (that is, off) (S12602: No), the process moves to S12611.

In the process of S12602, if it is determined that the medium hit flag 223fi is on (S12602: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12603), and then the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to " 00'' (S12604). If it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "00" (S12604: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to "01" (S12605), and the process proceeds to S12610. In the process of S12604, if it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not 00 (S12604: No), the process of S12605 is skipped and the process proceeds to S12610.

On the other hand, in the process of S12601, if it is determined that the delay passage entry switch is not on (that is, it is off) (S12601: No), then whether or not the delay passage discharge switch (not shown) is on is determined. (S12606). If it is determined that the delay passage discharge switch is not on (that is, off) (S12606: No), the process is immediately terminated. If it is determined that the delay path discharge switch is on (S12606: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is read (S12607), and then, whether the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" or not is determined. (S12608). If it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is "01" (S12608: Yes), the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is set to "02" (S12609), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12608, if it is determined that the value of the delay path state flag 223ff is not "01" (S12608: No), the process moves to S12610. In the process of S12610, a value corresponding to the delay path state flag 223ff is set (S12610), an error command is set (S12611), and then this process ends.

As explained above, in this embodiment, a specific area 650V is provided in the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, and the ball moves within the specific area 650V during the small winning game. The configuration is such that a jackpot (so-called 2-type win) game is executed by passing the gate.

In addition, as a path for the ball to flow down toward the second variable winning device (V winning device) 650 that is opened during the small winning game, a first flow path ta (see FIG. 196 ) and a second flow path tb (see FIG. 196) through which the ball can easily pass through the specific region 650V. As a result, the player pays close attention to which channel the ball is flowing down during the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the movement of the ball flowing down on the game board 13, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the balls are distributed to the above-described first flow path ta or second flow path tb by the opening/closing operation of the electric accessory 3640a, so the operation of the electric accessory 3640a It is also possible to make the player interested in the game. Furthermore, when the ball flows down the second channel tb that easily passes through the specific area 650V, the ease with which the ball enters the V winning device 650 is configured to vary depending on the variation time of the special symbol. ing.

Furthermore, the variation time of the special symbols to be set is configured to vary depending on the set gaming state and the type of small winning won. With this configuration, when winning a small win corresponding to a jackpot in which a time-saving state is given after the end of the jackpot game, a game state (advantageous time-saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V and a jackpot end It is possible to set a gaming state (disadvantageous time saving) that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the specific area 650V when a small win corresponding to a jackpot to which a time saving state is later given is won.

In this embodiment, by using the above-mentioned advantageous time saving and disadvantageous time saving configurations, once a jackpot is won (first hit), at least three jackpots are executed including the first hit. It is configured so that a gaming state advantageous to the player continues. By making it possible to set a gaming state in which it is guaranteed that a plurality of jackpot games will be executed in this way, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the second special symbol is drawn to win a small win, and when the ball enters the second ball entry port 3640, which is the trigger for executing the second special symbol lottery. The electric accessory 3640a is configured to operate so as to make it easier to let the ball enter the ball. Then, based on the fact that the ball that has flown down on the electric accessory 3640a enters the second ball entry port 3640, the electric accessory 3640a shifts to the closed state, and at that time, the ball that has flown down on the electric accessory 3640a enters the second ball entry port 3640. The ball is distributed into the first flow path ta and the second flow path tb depending on the position (upstream side, downstream side) where the ball is flowing down.

Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, the configuration is such that the balls located on the downstream side of the ball flow path on the electric accessory 3640a are distributed to the second flow path tb that is advantageous to the player. The configuration is such that when the ball is launched, the ball easily flows into the second flow path tb.

Therefore, in order to cause the balls to flow into the second channel tb while the second special symbol lottery is being executed, it is necessary to continuously fire the balls toward the game area of the game board 13. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of trying to obtain an advantageous result by firing the ball at a predetermined timing.

In the seventh embodiment, the balls that have flowed down the second flow path tb, that is, the balls that have been sorted into the flow path that is advantageous to the player by the opening operation of the electric accessory 3640a, are directed toward the V winning device 650. Although the configuration is such that the ball flows downward, it may be configured such that the ball that flows down the channel that is advantageous to the player can enter the general ball entry port 63. As a result, a large number of prize balls can be provided to the player.

Furthermore, a valve member is provided in the V winning device 650 that can be changed between a first state in which the ball can pass through the specific area 650V and a second state in which it is difficult to pass through, and when the valve member is in the first state, the V winning prize is won. The variable time for winning a prize in the device 650 and the variable time for winning in the V winning device 650 in the second state may be configured to be varied according to the set time saving state.

In addition, instead of the V winning device 650, a V attacker that is opened during a jackpot game is provided, and when a ball passes through a specific area within the V attacker, a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols) is provided. The invention may also be applied to a pachinko machine 10.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 234 to 259. In the first embodiment described above, the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol are configured to be able to be executed simultaneously (in parallel), and as a gaming state. When a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, it is easier to execute the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, and based on the lottery result of the second special symbol. The system was configured so that small winning games occur frequently.

In this way, when the probability state is set as the game state, that is, in order to make small winning games occur frequently in the second special symbol lottery in the low probability state of the normal symbol, similarly, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. It was necessary to use a configuration that can easily perform the lottery of the second special symbol even in the normal state in which the second special symbol is set (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols). In addition, in order to prevent the second special symbol from being drawn frequently in the normal state, the variation pattern of the second special symbol set during the normal state should have a long variation time (for example, 10 minutes). It was necessary to set a fluctuation pattern.

In this way, if the second special symbol that is easily drawn is configured to have a long variable time, if the player accidentally draws the second special symbol, , until the variation pattern ends, the next special symbol lottery will not be executed, which will hinder the game, so in the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol lottery (variation) and the 2. It was configured so that the lottery (variation) of special symbols can be executed at the same time (in parallel).

On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, during a jackpot game or during a small win game executed in a low probability state (normal state, potential state) of normal symbols, the execution trigger of the second special symbol is The structure is such that a ball can (easily) enter the second ball entry opening 640. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drawing of the second special symbol from being executed unless a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is executed, so as in the first embodiment described above, the drawing of the first special symbol (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) are executed simultaneously (in parallel), a small winning game based on the second special symbol lottery only during the potential state. can occur frequently. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Furthermore, it is configured so that it is possible to set a winning type in which the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640 and a winning type in which it is difficult to enter the ball, depending on the type of winning (big win, small win). , When winning a win (big win, small win), it is not just the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained during the winning game, but also the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 during the winning game. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not this is the case.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the case where the first special symbol is won in the lottery and in the case where the second special symbol is won in the lottery. The configuration is such that the percentage of easy winning types to be set is varied. Specifically, the winning type that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set more easily when the second special symbol wins than when the first special symbol wins. It consists of

By configuring in this way, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is transitioned to an executable state, it is possible to continue and facilitate the lottery of the special symbol 2, Even though an advantageous game mode that is advantageous to the player (a mode in which the special drawing 2 lottery can be executed) is set, the advantageous game mode ends immediately, causing discomfort to the player. can be suppressed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery with the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning (big win, small win) than the lottery with the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol lottery, there is no small win, only a jackpot (1/400 at low probability), whereas in the second special symbol lottery, there is no small win. The probability of (1/400 when the probability is low) is the same as the first special symbol described above, but it is set so that a small win can also be won (300/400). In this way, in the eighth embodiment, by setting the second special symbol lottery to have a higher probability of winning a small win than the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery It is configured so that it is easier to win (big hit, small hit) in the second special symbol lottery.

As a result, when the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, it is possible to win a winning (big hit, small hit) with a high probability. A winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed frequently in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the winning game is configured such that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 with a higher probability when winning a small winning than when winning a jackpot. are doing. Thereby, when a small win is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to easily cause the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed again after the end of the winning game.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reservation) is configured to be able to store (reserve memory) a plurality of pieces (4 pieces), depending on the winning type won. The opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number of items that can be held and stored during one winning game is different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player actively play the game in order to secure more reserved memory through one winning game. Here, in the present eighth embodiment, the second opening/closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the winning game is in the open state (the state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path through which a part of the balls that have fallen from above the second opening/closing door 3650f can enter the second ball entry port 640 when the state is changed to the closed state (a state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning port 3650a). is configured to pass through. In this way, by configuring the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650 which is released during the winning game to be able to enter the second ball entrance 640, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 during the winning game. The player can be made to watch the movement of the ball entering the second specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball entering the second ball entry opening 640.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 234. FIG. 234 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 234, the eighth embodiment differs from the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above in that the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 is greatly different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 234, a first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right side area of the game board 13, and a second attacker 3650 is provided approximately in the center of the right side area. A guiding passage 3660 is provided at a position below the second attacker 3650, and a second ball entry opening 640 with an electric accessory 640a is provided at a position facing the outlet of the guiding passage 3660. , are very different. The other configurations are the same as the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 234, a brief explanation will be given of the ball flow during a right-handed game in the gaming machine of this embodiment. In normal times (other than during a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball fired toward the right side area of the game board 13 in a right-handed game hits the opening/closing door 3650f which is in the closed state (buried state). The ball passes through the game area on the right side of the guide path 3660 and flows down to enter the general ball entrance 63.

In addition, this general ball entrance 63 (general ball entrance 63 located on the right side of the second ball entrance 640) is set with one prize ball as a privilege given when a ball enters the ball. There is. Therefore, even if a right-handed game is played in the normal state, the number of balls will not increase.

On the other hand, during a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened, the opening/closing door 3650f is in an open state (protruding state), that is, a state in which the ball can flow down on the opening/closing door 3650f toward the second specific winning opening 3650a. In this case, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down on the opening/closing door 3650f and enters the second specific winning opening 3650a. Then, the closing condition of the second attacker 3650 (the elapse of a predetermined opening period, or the number of balls won into the second specific winning opening 3650a reaches a predetermined upper limit number of winnings) is satisfied, and the opening/closing door 3650f is closed. It is configured such that when the ball changes to the closed state (buried state), the balls flowing down the downstream side of the opening/closing door 365Of flow into the guide passage 3660.

In other words, in the eighth embodiment, even if a right-handed game is performed in normal times (other than the winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened), the ball flow path allows the ball to enter the second ball entry opening 640. The ball is configured to prevent the ball from flowing down inside the guide passage 3660 where the ball is formed. With this configuration, unless the second attacker 3650 is opened in a winning game, the ball that has flown down the guide path 3660 will not enter the second ball entry port 640, so that the lottery of the second special symbol will not occur. It is possible to limit the period during which the

Further, a through gate 67 is disposed between the opening/closing door 365Of and the inlet of the guiding passage 3660, so that the balls flowing into the guiding passage 3660 pass through the through gate 67 before flowing into the guiding passage 3660. It is composed of The guide passage 3660 is configured such that the period required for the ball to flow down the guide channel is approximately 2.5 seconds. In this way, the configuration is such that the ball flowing down the channel that can enter the second ball entry port 640 always passes through the through gate 67, and reaches the second ball entry port 640 from the through gate 67. By configuring the system so that the time until the end is constant (approximately 2.5 seconds), it is possible to determine whether the ball passing through the guide path 3660 will enter the second ball entry port 640 depending on the set variation time of the normal symbol. This can be easily changed.

Here, in the eighth embodiment, the variation time of the set normal symbols is varied depending on the set gaming state. Specifically, the fluctuation time is set to 2 seconds in the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state, potential state), and the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds in the high probability state of normal symbols (time saving state, variable probability state). is configured so that it is set. As a result, when a ball passes through the guidance path 3660 when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640, and the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. If the ball is set and passes through the guide path 3660, it can be made difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235, the configuration of the opening/closing door 365Of of the second attacker 3650 of the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 235(a) is a plan view schematically showing the opening/closing door 3650f in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 235(b) is a plan view schematically showing the opening/closing door 3650f in the closed state (buried state). It is a top view which schematically showed door 365Of. As shown in FIG. 235(a), the opening/closing door 365Of of this embodiment is arranged so that the opening/closing door 3650f passes from the right upper surface 3650y1 of the opening/closing door 3650f to the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening/closing door 3650f along the slope of the opening/closing door 3650f (see FIG. 234). It is configured to flow out toward the second specific winning opening 3650a.

A first delay member 3650fa, a second delay member 3650fb, and a third delay member 3650fc are provided so that the ball meanders on the upper surface 3650f1 of the door 3650f, and the period during which the ball flows down the door 3650f is 1. .2 seconds. This falling period (1.2 seconds) is shorter than the period (1.5 seconds) during which the second attacker 3650 maintains the open state when the opening operation is performed by the winning games (big win B, jackpot C, small win). It is configured to be. With this configuration, in a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened, a ball can be won into the second specific winning opening 3650a.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened is executed, a scenario of the opening action is set so that the ball can enter the second specific winning hole 3650a in all winning games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as an opening operation scenario set during a winning game, there is an opening operation scenario in which the ball easily enters the second specific winning opening 3650a, and an opening operation scenario in which the ball easily enters the guidance passage 3660. The configuration may be such that an easy opening operation scenario is set.

In this case, for example, as an opening operation scenario of the second attacker 3650, a ball flowing down the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening/closing door 3650f flows down to a position facing the guide passage 3660 (downstream position ZD of the upper surface 3650f1) (for example, 0. It is preferable to define the opening operation scenario so that 5 seconds) is the period during which the opening/closing door 365Of is maintained in the open state when the opening operation is performed. When the opening operation scenario stipulated in this way is set, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the second specific prize opening 3650a during the winning game, and the ball that has flown down the upper surface 3650f1 of the opening/closing door 3650f flows into the guide path 3660. It becomes easier to do.

As a result, for example, when the upper limit number of balls that enter the second specific winning hole 3650a and the upper limit opening period of the opening/closing door 3650f are set as the end conditions for the winning game, the second specific winning hole 3650a Since the opening operation in which it is difficult for the ball to win is executed, the winning game can be continued for a long period of time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of balls flowing into the guide path 3660 during one winning game, and it is possible to acquire more special figure 2 pending memories.

Next, when the closing condition for the opening/closing door 365Of is satisfied, the state shown in FIG. 235(a) changes to the closed state (embedded state) shown in FIG. 235(b). In this state, the ball located at the downstream position ZD passes through the through gate 67, and the ball located at the upstream position ZC also passes through the right side area of the guide passage 3660.

As explained above, in the eighth embodiment, the time for the upper sphere of the opening/closing door 3650f to flow down is 1.2 seconds (0.5 seconds at the upstream position ZC and 0.7 seconds at the downstream position ZD). The opening/closing door 3650f is configured to open for 1.5 seconds in one small winning game. Thereby, when the ball that has flown down first enters the second attacker 3650 and is detected by the detection switch 3650Z, it becomes possible to position the next ball at the downstream position ZD. Therefore, when a small winning game is executed, the ball can be reliably passed through the guide path 3660.

Note that the following configuration may be used instead of the configuration of this embodiment. That is, the position of the detection switch 3650Z that detects the winning ball of the second attacker 3650 is located on the back side of the second attacker 3650 (the position of the modified example in FIG. 235), and the position from the opening of the second attacker 3650 to the detection switch 3650Z is It is preferable to configure the distance ZE so that it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass. With this configuration, even if the distance between the opening/closing door 365Of is shortened, the next ball flowing down can be reliably positioned at the downstream position ZD.

Furthermore, by preparing a plurality of opening patterns of the opening/closing door 3650f that are effective in the small winning game, it is possible to execute the small winning game in which the second attacker 3650 does not win but an opening period is set during which the ball can pass through the through gate 67. It may be configured as follows. In other words, by using the small winning game, it is possible to execute a game for making the second attacker 3650 win a ball and a game for making the second attacker 3650 acquire the reserved memory of the special drawing 2.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, the flow of balls in the right area of the game board 13 in the eighth embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 236 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the second attacker 3650 is in the open state (protruding state), and FIG. 237 is a schematic diagram showing the ball flow when the second attacker 3650 is in the closed state (buried state). It is a schematic diagram showing a flow.

As shown in FIG. 236, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the open state (protruding state), all the balls fired in the right-handed game are received by the opening/closing door 3650f (right side area of the game board 13). An opening/closing door 3650f is provided so as to shield the With this configuration, when a winning game in which the second attacker 3650 is opened is executed, it is possible to easily win a ball into the second specific winning opening 3650a by simply playing a right-handed game.

Furthermore, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the open state (protruding state), the inlet of the guiding passage 3660 is blocked by the opening/closing door 3650f, making it impossible (difficult) for balls to flow into the guiding passage 3660. It is composed of In other words, in the eighth embodiment, the opening/closing door 3650f that is opened by the winning game has a function of making it easier to win a ball into the second specific winning opening 3650a, and regulating the flow of the ball into the guide path 3660. It is used as a means to have the function of

Next, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), the ball fired into the right-handed area in the right-handed game flows down the right area of the guide path 3660 (see the arrow in FIG. 237). . Here, in the eighth embodiment, the ball that has flown down the right-handed area due to the right-handed game executed when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state) is prevented from flowing into the guide path 3660 (difficult). ).

Specifically, in the right side area of the game board 13, the nail K1 planted above the opening/closing door 365Of is planted below the opening/closing door 365Of, and is planted so as to form the inlet of the guide passage 3660. The nail K2 is located on the right side (right side as viewed in FIG. 237) by a distance Kz (approximately 10 mm) from the nail K2. The distance between the nails K1 and K2 in the height direction is one ball (approximately 15 mm). With this configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball flowing down the right side of the nail K1 due to the right-handed game from flowing into the inlet of the guide passage 3660 formed on the left side of the nail K2.

Furthermore, regarding the arrangement position of the second specific winning opening 3650a where the ball that has flown down to the downstream end of the opening/closing door 3650f can win, the distance between it and the nail K1 in the height direction is set to be shorter than the distance in the width direction. Since the opening/closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 3650a. In this embodiment, the opening operation of the door 3650f is configured to change between a state in which a ball can enter the second specific winning opening 3650a and a state in which it is impossible (difficult) to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a. For example, a variable member that can be changed between an open position to open the opening of the second specific winning opening 3650a and a closed position to close it may be used to connect the second specific winning opening 3650a and the opening/closing door 3650f. The variable member may be variably controlled so as to be variable in synchronization with the opening operation of the opening/closing door 365Of.

In this case, for example, when the opening/closing door 3650f is in the closed state (buried state), that is, when the ball does not enter the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable member is variable so that it is located in the closed position. When the opening/closing door 3650f is in an open state (protruding state), that is, in a state that allows a ball to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a, the variable part is positioned at the open position. It is better to have variable control. Thereby, it is possible to more reliably prevent a situation in which a ball enters the second specific winning hole 3650a at an unintended timing.

Furthermore, when using the configuration of the example described above, it is preferable to configure the variable member and the opening/closing door 365Of to be driven using one drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.). Thereby, the two members can be easily driven with regularity. Further, it is preferable that the variable member is configured to change the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing door 3650f by delaying the opening/closing timing of the opening/closing door 3650f by a grace period that takes into account the falling time of the ball. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball that has flowed further down to the downstream end of the opening/closing door 365Of becomes unable to enter the second specific winning opening 3650a due to the variable operation of the variable member.

Next, referring to FIG. 237, we will explain the ball flow when the door 3650f changes to the closed state (buried state) while the ball is flowing down the top surface 3650f1 (see FIG. 235(a)) of the door 3650f. do. As shown in FIG. 237, a nail K2 is planted below the opening/closing door 3650f and near the downstream 1/3 position of the opening/closing door 3650f, and the right and left sides of the nail K2 have different flow rates. A road is formed. Therefore, the ball flowing down the upstream two-thirds of the opening/closing door 365Of flows down the right side area of the guide passage 3660 when the opening/closing door 365Of changes to the closed state (buried state). On the other hand, when the door 3650f changes to the closed state (buried state), the ball flowing down the downstream 1/3 of the door 3650f passes through the through gate 67 and enters the guide passage 3660. flows into.

The guiding passage 3660 used in the eighth embodiment is formed in a meandering shape in order to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to reach the second ball entry port 640 (flowing time). The configuration is such that the time required for the ball to flow down the flow path ty from the position 3661a to the discharge position 3661b is about 2.5 seconds.

Then, if the electric accessory 640a is open when the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 and flowed down the flow path ty reaches the second ball entrance 640, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the electric If the accessory 640a is closed, the ball will not enter the second ball entry port 640 and will flow down toward the out port 66.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a is provided above the right side area, but it is not limited to this, and may be provided below the guide path 3660. Thereby, the balls flowing down the plurality of channels can be caused to enter the first attacker (variable winning device) 650a at the same timing.

Further, a delay member may be provided on the lower surface of the ball flow of the guide passage 3660 used in this embodiment to delay the speed of the ball flowing down.

<About the production content in the eighth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 238 to 241, characteristic effects performed in the eighth embodiment will be explained. The eighth embodiment is configured so that it is easy to acquire the lottery right for the second special symbol (special symbol 2 pending memory) during the period in which a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is being executed. The second special symbol lottery is configured so that it is easier to win a small hit than the first special symbol lottery. In other words, when the normal state is set, the lottery of the first special symbol is executed in a left-handed game, a jackpot is won, and when the jackpot game starts, a right-handed game is executed, and in that jackpot game, the lottery is executed and the first special symbol is drawn. A game in which the right to draw the second special symbol (special symbol 2 pending memory) is acquired while winning the prize ball (privilege) by making the activated attacker (first attacker 650a, second attacker 3650) win a prize. will be held.

If you acquire special pattern 2 pending memory during a winning game, a lottery for the second special pattern (special pattern 2) will be executed after the winning game ends, and the lottery result for special pattern 2 will be a jackpot or a small win. If so, the winning game is executed again. In the eighth embodiment, since the second special symbol lottery is configured to win a small hit with a high probability, once the special symbol 2 lottery is executed, the special symbol 2 lottery is repeatedly executed. It becomes a gaming state where it is easy to play.

Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, an effect is performed to suggest to the player whether or not the lottery for special drawing 2 will be executed (or not) (whether or not the lottery for special drawing 2 has been moved to an executable state). It is configured so that Thereby, the player can play the game while checking the content of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

As described above, in this embodiment, by executing a winning game (a winning operation in which the second attacker 3650 is released), the special figure 2 pending memory can be acquired. As shown in (a), during the execution of the winning game (the winning action in which the second attacker 3650 is released), an effect is performed that urges the player to acquire the special figure 2 pending memory. FIG. 238(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed during a jackpot game when the second attacker 3650 wins jackpot C, which is a jackpot in which the second attacker 3650 is released.

As shown in FIG. 238(a), when the jackpot game corresponding to jackpot C is started, in order to guide the player to perform a right-handed game during the jackpot game, a message is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. "Right hit" is displayed. Then, in the main display area Dm, an effect is performed in which the character 811 collects the keys 871. This key 871 has a performance mode set so that the number corresponding to the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is collected, and as the character 811 collects many keys 871, the special This is to suggest (notify) the player that the number of pending memories in FIG. 2 is large.

Then, in the main display area Dm, a comment "Collect the treasure keys" for explaining the game nature of the performance is displayed. Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired during the jackpot game (collecting the key 871), and the lottery result of the special figure 2 to be executed after the jackpot game is acquired using the collected key. 871 is used to open a treasure box 873 (see FIG. 239), and an effect is executed in which the player is informed of the contents of the treasure box 873.

Further, below the main display area Dm, there are formed an acquisition display area Dm12a where a value related to the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game is added and displayed, and a round number display area Dm12b which shows the current number of round games. . In the example shown in FIG. 238(a), since the jackpot game has just started, "00000" is displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a, indicating that no prize balls have been won during the jackpot game. It shows. "Round 1" is displayed in the round number display area Dm12b.

Further, in the production during the jackpot game, acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d for notifying the player of the number of collected keys 871 are formed at the right position of the main display area Dm. In the performance executed in this embodiment, one key 871 is collected each time one reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired, so the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d have a maximum of 1 key 871. It is configured so that four keys 871 are displayed. Note that the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d are also display areas for indicating the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2.

Furthermore, a comment "Continue hitting right" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate the game content to the player, and a second guide display area formed below the guide display area Dm3 A diagram schematically showing the configuration near the second ball entry port 640 is displayed on Dm11. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, since the structure is such that it is easier to acquire the reserved memory of special figure 2 by continuously firing the ball, other effects are not provided so as not to provide a disadvantageous game to the player. A comment for indicating the game content is displayed in a display mode that is more emphasized than the display mode used for (display mode with larger font size). In this way, by using the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds to explain in detail the game content aimed at during the jackpot game, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Then, after the display in FIG. 238(a) is executed, if the jackpot game is executed and the reserved memory of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is acquired, the production content shown in FIG. 238(b) is is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. 238(b) is a schematic diagram showing part of the performance content displayed when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 during a jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 238(b), when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 during a jackpot game, the main display area Dm displays a message indicating that the ball has entered the second ball entry port 640 (specially). As an effect to notify the player that the key 871 has been acquired (as shown in FIG. 2), an effect indicating that the key 871 has been collected is executed, and a comment of "Congratulations" is displayed.

Furthermore, a key 871 is displayed in the acquired display area Dm10a to indicate that one key 871 has been acquired. Further, in the second guidance display area Dm11, a specific effect is displayed at a position imitating the second ball entry opening 640 in order to visually notify the player that a ball has entered the ball. In the acquisition display area Dm12a, "00085" is displayed as the number of prize balls acquired during the jackpot game, and in the round number display area Dm12b, "2" is displayed to indicate that the current is the second round. There is.

When the jackpot game ends, the screen shown in FIG. 239(a) is displayed. FIG. 239(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed during the ending period of the jackpot game. During this ending period, the notification mode (display mode 872 indicating that two keys have been collected) for notifying the player of the total number of reserved memories of special drawings 2 acquired during this jackpot game is the main display. In addition to being displayed in the area Dm, a comment "Continue right-handed game" to indicate that the right-handed game is to be continued even after the end of the jackpot game is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

Furthermore, in order to allow the player to continue playing the right-handed game even after the jackpot game ends, the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 during the jackpot game (FIG. 238 (a) )) is set to a more emphasized display mode. Thereby, it is possible to reliably notify the player that he or she must continue playing the right-handed game even after the end of the jackpot game.

After that, when the jackpot game ends and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is executed, the key 871 collected during the jackpot game is used as shown in FIG. 239(b). An effect that causes the treasure box 873 to be opened is executed. FIG. 239(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect executed when the special figure 2 variation is executed after the end of the jackpot game.

In FIG. 239(b), since the special figure 2 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 display area Dm2 displays a variation display indicating that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is being displayed in a variable manner. The aspect is displayed. Then, an effect using one of the two keys 871 (special figure 2 pending) collected during the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, the number of keys 871 displayed in the acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d is reduced from two at the end of the jackpot to one.

In addition, while the performance continued from the jackpot game is being executed, the acquisition display area Dm12a is always displayed, and when a small hit is won in the special drawing 2 lottery, the second attacker 3650 can win the ball. Information regarding the number of prize balls awarded is also displayed in addition. Thereby, the number of balls acquired during the executable period (advantageous period) for drawing the second special symbol (special symbol 2) can be informed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, the round number display area Dm12b is also continuously displayed in the same way as the above-mentioned acquisition display area Dm12a, and the words "Round Extra" are displayed while the game based on the special figure 2 variation is being played. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the advantageous state is extended even after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the characters "Round Extra" are displayed for the game period in which the special figure 2 variation can be executed, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, the special figure 2 variation can be executed. A summing means is provided to add up the number of prize balls acquired during the executable game period, and the number of prize balls added up by the summing means is the prize ball that can be obtained in one round game executed during the jackpot game. When it is determined that the number of rounds has been reached, the number of rounds displayed during the jackpot game may be incremented by 1, or the number of small winnings won during the playing period in which the special figure 2 variation can be executed. A small win count measuring means for counting the number of small wins is provided, and when the number of small wins measured by the small win count measurement means reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the number of rounds displayed during the jackpot game. It may be configured such that 1 is added.

With this configuration, it is possible to make the player think that the jackpot game is being executed for an extended period of time. Further, in this case, it is preferable to configure the system to perform an effect of opening the treasure box 873 using the key 871 (see FIG. 239(b)) even while the jackpot game is being executed. This makes it difficult to determine whether or not a jackpot game is currently being played based on the performance being executed, so it is possible to prevent the player from easily predicting the next game.

If a small win is won while the effect shown in FIG. 239(b) is being executed, the effect in which the treasure box 873 opens and the contents of the treasure box 873 are exposed is executed as shown in FIG. 240. FIG. 240(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the performance content displayed when a small win is won when the normal state is set as the gaming state.

In this embodiment, when a low probability state of a normal symbol (normal state, potential state) is set as a gaming state, rather than a case where a high probability state of a normal symbol (variable probability state, time saving state) is set. This is configured so that it is easier to acquire the special figure 2 pending memory during the small winning game. In the example shown in FIG. 240(a), since the small win is won in the state where the normal state is set, the small win game in which the special figure 2 pending memory can be obtained is executed. “V” is displayed as the display mode of the contents of the treasure box 873.

In addition, there are multiple display modes other than "V" to indicate the contents of the treasure box 873. For example, if the lottery result of special map 2 is a loss, "x" is displayed, and if the lottery result of special map 2 is a reservation result of special map 2, If it is a small win that is difficult to remember, a display format that resembles a "?" is set. In addition, a pre-determination process is executed to determine in advance the winning information of the second special symbol that is stored on hold. If the determination result indicates that there is a small win that is advantageous to Using the display mode showing the lottery result of special drawing 2, a display mode is set that suggests that a jackpot or a small win that is advantageous to the player is included in the pending information stored in the pending memory. It may be configured.

Here, as a result of the special figure 2 variation, if the player wins a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player, that is, a jackpot in which a high probability state (for example, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. As shown in (b), a display mode imitating a "skull" is set as a display mode for indicating the contents of the treasure box 873.

Furthermore, the display mode of the key 871 and the display mode of the treasure box 873 may be configured to be changed based on the lottery result of the special drawing 2 currently being executed or the preliminary determination result for the pending information that has been stored. For example, as shown in FIG. 241(a), it may be configured to display a display mode (a rusty key and a tattered treasure box) that suggests that the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss. This allows the player to predict the lottery result of the current special symbol before opening the treasure box 873, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

After repeatedly executing each of the effects shown in FIGS. 238(a) to 241(a), the advantageous period advantageous to the player ends when the key 871 runs out (when the reserved memory of special drawing 2 runs out). Therefore, the ending screen shown in FIG. 241(b) is displayed. This ending screen displays a value (value displayed in the acquisition display area Dm12a) indicating the number of prize balls acquired during this advantageous period (a period that combines the jackpot game period and the special figure 2 variable period) and the small hit. The number of times you won and the number of times you won will be displayed. Then, the display mode of the guidance display area Dm3 for guiding the player to return the playing method to left-handed playing is variably displayed as "left-handed playing", and the sub-display area Ds displays "Please return to left-handed playing". ” Show comments.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the guide display area Dm3 is changed so that the gaming method is switched from the right-handed game to the left-handed game not at the transition timing of the gaming state but at the timing when the reserved memory of the special figure 2 is exhausted. ing. In other words, in a state where the time saving state is set as the gaming state, if there is a special figure 2 hold, a right-handed game is guided, and if there is no special figure 2 pending, a left-handed game is guided. ing. This allows the player to play an appropriate game without having to play a disadvantageous game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the flow of transition between each gaming state in the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 242 is a transition diagram showing the flow of transition of each gaming state in the seventh embodiment. In the seventh embodiment, as described later with reference to FIG. 244, there are five jackpot types (jackpot A to E) that are set when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and the second There are three jackpot types (jackpot F to H) that are set when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery.

The game state set after the end of the jackpot game is configured to be different depending on the jackpot type set at the time of winning the jackpot and the gaming state set at the time of winning the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to make complex transitions between each game state in the game played on the pachinko machine 10, so it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early.

In addition, by providing a gaming state (semi-advantageous gaming state) in which it is easy to transition to an advantageous gaming state (potential state) that is most advantageous to the player, and a gaming state in which it is difficult to transition, a semi-advantageous gaming state is set. In this case, the player can be allowed to continue playing the game, thereby increasing the performance of the game.

As shown in FIG. 242, when a game is started in the pachinko machine 10, a game is executed in which a first special symbol (special symbol 1) is drawn by lottery with the normal state set as the gaming state. Then, if you win the jackpot on special map 1, a variable probability state will be set with a 65% probability (jackpot A, B winning), a time saving state will be set with a 25% probability (jackpot E winning), and a 10% probability. A normal state is set (jackpots C and D won).

Among them, if you win jackpot C (5%), the second attacker 3650 will open during a part of the jackpot game, so it will be possible to acquire the reserved memory of special drawing 2 during that jackpot game. .

Therefore, in the case of winning a jackpot in which the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game, for jackpot D (5%), a game in which special drawing 1 is drawn again is executed, and for jackpot C (5%), A game in which a special drawing 2 is drawn is executed. Special figure 2 will win a small hit with a probability of about 75%, and in a small winning game that is executed in a low probability state (normal state) with normal symbols, the reserved memory of special figure 2 will be held during that small winning game. Since it is configured to be obtainable, when the special drawing 2 lottery is executed in the normal state, as long as the reserved memory of the special drawing 2 does not disappear, there is a gaming period in which the special drawing 2 game can be played continuously. Become.

If the normal state is set as the gaming state and you win a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, a variable probability state will be set with a 30% probability (Jackpot F win) and a 35% probability. A probability state is set (Jackpot G winning), and a time saving state is set with a probability of 35% (Jackpot H winning).

Next, when the variable probability state is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the reserved memory of the special drawing 2. Also, it is configured so that it is impossible (difficult) to acquire a new reserved memory of special symbol 2 during the small winning game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the variable probability state is a more advantageous gaming state than the time saving state because the special symbol has a higher probability of winning a jackpot, but in the state with the reserved memory of special symbol 2, Even if the player wins a small win in the lottery shown in FIG. 2, he or she cannot acquire a new reserved memory of the special symbol 2, resulting in a disadvantageous gaming state for the player.

If you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery while the variable probability state is set, the variable probability state will be set again with a 35% probability (Jackpot A win), and the probability state will be set with a 30% probability ( A normal state is set with a probability of 10% (winning jackpot B), a normal state is set with a probability of 25% (winning jackpot E). Then, if you win the jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, a variable probability state will be set again with a 30% probability (Jackpot F winning), a potential state will be set with a 35% probability (Jackpot G winning), and a 35% probability will be set again. A time-saving state is set based on the probability (Jackpot H win).

Next, if the probability state is set, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, so if you win a small hit in the lottery of special pattern 2, which is executed based on the reserved memory of special pattern 2. In this case, the system is configured so that a new reserved special figure 2 can be acquired during the small winning game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, the potential state is a state in which the special symbol has a high probability of winning the jackpot, and has the reserved memory of the special symbol 2, and when a small win is won in the special symbol 2 lottery. , it is possible to obtain a new reserved memory of the special figure 2, resulting in the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

If you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery when the potential state is set, there is a 65% probability that the potential state will be set again (jackpot A, B winning), and there is a 10% probability that the normal state will be set. is set (jackpot C, D winning), and a time saving state is set with a probability of 25% (jackpot E winning). Then, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, a variable probability state will be set with a 65% probability (jackpot F, G winning), a potential state will be set with a 35% probability (jackpot G winning), 35% A time saving state is set with a probability of (Jackpot H winning).

Finally, when the time saving state is set, the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, so if you win a small hit in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the reserved memory of the special drawing 2. Also, it is configured so that it is impossible (difficult) to acquire a new reserved memory of special symbol 2 during the small winning game. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, in the time saving state, the probability of winning the jackpot for the special symbol is low, and in the state with the reserved memory of the special symbol 2, even if you win the small prize in the special symbol 2 lottery, you will not be able to win a new jackpot. Since it is not possible to obtain the reserved memory of the special figure 2, the player is in the most disadvantageous gaming state.

When the time-saving state is set, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, the variable probability state will be set with a 65% probability (jackpot A, B winning), and the normal state will be set with a 10% probability ( Jackpots C and D are won), and the time-saving state is set again with a 25% probability (Jackpot E is won). Then, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, a variable state will be set with a 30% probability (jackpot F win), a potential state will be set with a 35% probability (jackpot G win), and a 35% probability. The time saving state is set again (Jackpot H win).

As explained above, in this embodiment, a ball is not allowed to newly enter the second ball entry port 640 regardless of the gaming state when there is no pending memory of the special figure 2. ing. Furthermore, the variation time of the first special symbol is configured so that it does not change between the high probability state and the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in a state where there is no pending memory of the special figure 2, even if the state of the normal symbols changes, the advantage to the player does not change.

In other words, in the state where the variation (lottery) of special symbol 1 is being executed, the low probability state of the special symbol (normal state, time saving state) has the same advantageous degree, and the high probability state of the special symbol (probability variable state, latent state) The probability state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the low probability state of the special symbol because the probability of jackpot of the special symbol is higher.

In addition, in the state where there is a reserved memory for special symbol 2, it is not possible to acquire a new reserved memory for special symbol 2 in the high probability state of the normal symbol, so the high probability state of the regular symbol (variable probability state, time saving state) A low probability state (normal state, potential state) with a normal symbol is a more advantageous gaming state for the player. Therefore, the most advantageous gaming state for the player is the potential state, and the most disadvantageous gaming state is the time saving state.

Furthermore, to explain the rate of transition to the most advantageous potential state when winning a jackpot, the rate at which the potential state is set based on the lottery of special drawing 1 is that the probability variable state is the most High (30%). Therefore, the variable probability state becomes a semi-advantageous gaming state in which it is easy to shift to the most advantageous advantageous gaming state (potential state).

<About the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 243 to 250. FIG. 243(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243(a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment includes 8 first random number tables 202ga, 8 first random number selection tables 202gb, 8 second random number tables 202gc, and 8 variation pattern selection tables 202gd. , and has an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. Note that the configuration (table) with the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (the same name except for "8" added to make it possible to identify that it is used in the eighth embodiment) ) is the same as in each of the embodiments described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

FIG. 243 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 243(a), the ROM 202 of the eighth embodiment includes 8 first random number tables 202ga, 8 first random number selection tables 202gb, 8 second random number tables 202gc, and 8 variation pattern selection tables 202gd. , and has an operation scenario 8 table 202ge. Note that the configuration (table) with the same name as the electrical configuration used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (the same name except for "8" added to make it possible to identify that it is used in the eighth embodiment) ) is the same as in each of the embodiments described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The first random number 8 table 202ga is a data table used for the same purpose as the first random number table 202a used in each of the embodiments described above, in which the value of the first random number counter C1 is If it matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the random number 8 table 202ga, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot.

In addition, the first random number 8 table 202ga stipulates that the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but the random number that results in a small win only in the lottery for the second special symbol. (See FIG. 243(b)). In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a small win (setting only for one special symbol), the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol provide benefits to the player ( Expectations for the award (big win or small win) can be varied.

Here, the contents of the first random number 8 table 202ga will be explained with reference to FIG. 243(b). FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first random number 8 table 202ga. The first random number 8 table 202ga defines the random number (judgment value) that is determined to be a jackpot and the random number (judgment value) that is determined to be a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. This data table is referred to when acquiring the lottery result in special symbol variation start processing 8 (see FIG. 252) (see S11003 and S11004 in FIG. 252).

The first winning random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243(b)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 1" is defined as the range of judgment values that are determined to be a jackpot (see 202ga1 in FIG. 243(b)), and the first special symbol is determined to be a miss. "2 to 399" is defined as the range of the determination value (see 202ga2 in FIG. 243(b)).

In addition, "2 to 99" is defined as the range of the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a miss (see 202ga2 in Fig. 243(b)), and the judgment value for determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. “100 to 399” is defined as the range (see 202ga3 in FIG. 243(b)). In addition, in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol, "0 to 19" is defined as the range of judgment values that are determined to be a jackpot (see 202ga4 in Figure 243(b)), and the first special symbol is a miss. “20 to 399” is defined as the range of the judgment value to be judged (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243(b)). In addition, "20 to 99" is defined as the determination value for determining that the second special symbol is a miss (see 202ga5 in FIG. 243(b)), and "100 to 99" is defined as the determination value for determining that the second special symbol is a small hit. ~399'' (see 202ga6 in FIG. 243(b)).

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained based on the starting prize matches any of the judgment values corresponding to a jackpot specified in the first winning random number 8 table 202ga (see FIG. 243(b)). First, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot, and if it matches any of the determination values corresponding to a small win, it is determined that the special symbol is a small win.

Next, with reference to FIG. 244, the contents of the first winning type selection 8 table 202gb will be explained. FIG. 244 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the first winning type selection 8 table 202gb. In the eighth embodiment, there are five jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot E) that are set when a jackpot is won in the lottery using the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol (special symbol 2). There are three jackpot types (jackpot F to jackpot H) that are set when a jackpot is won in the lottery. , the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game is different.

Specifically, if the symbol type that won the jackpot is the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the acquired judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 34", the jackpot type is "jackpot A". is set. This "Jackpot A" is a 10-round probability-variable jackpot, and Action A is set as the opening action scenario (action scenario). Note that the specific contents stipulated in the operation scenario will be described later using the operation scenario 8 table 202ge shown in FIG. 245.

In addition, in this embodiment, the gaming state that is set after the end of the jackpot game is stipulated to be different depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The gaming state is normal (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or time saving state (low probability state for special symbols) state, high probability state of normal symbols), a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and even if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a probability state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) For example, it is stipulated that the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

When the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "35 to 64", "Jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type. This "jackpot B" is a jackpot game in which the same jackpot game as the above-mentioned "jackpot A" is executed (a jackpot game with a 10-round probability variable jackpot and in which motion A is set as the opening motion scenario (motion scenario)), The game states set after the end of the jackpot game are different.

Specifically, if you win "Jackpot B", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), or a time saving state (low probability state of special symbols). state, high probability state of normal symbols), a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a variable probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or If it is in a probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), it is specified that the probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

In this way, by providing jackpot types in which the game content (operation scenario) of the jackpot game is the same and the gaming state that is set after the jackpot game is different, the player who is playing the jackpot game can receive a jackpot. It is possible to prevent the game state that is set after the game ends from being grasped in advance (before the jackpot game ends). In addition, by making it difficult to predict the gaming state that will be set after the jackpot game ends depending on the game content of the jackpot game, for example, during a jackpot game, a suggestion effect to suggest the gaming state that will be set after the jackpot game is finished to the player. It is preferable to provide a means for executing suggestion effects. With this configuration, the player watches the suggestion performance executed by the suggestion performance execution means, so the performance effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in this case, a suggestion performance setting is provided for setting the performance mode of the suggestion performance executed during the jackpot game based on the game state set after the jackpot game and the game content of the jackpot game. It is best to configure it as follows. Specifically, the game contents of the jackpot game and the game state set after the jackpot game are ranked in the order that is advantageous to the player, and the ranks corresponding to the jackpot type won this time are combined ( It is preferable that one presentation mode is set from among a plurality of presentation modes based on the value (information) of the summation. As a result, as the jackpot game progresses (as the game content of the jackpot game becomes clearer), it becomes easier to predict the game state that will be set after the jackpot game ends based on the performance mode of the suggested performance to be executed. A player can be made to watch a suggestive performance for a long period of time during a jackpot game, and the performance effect can be further enhanced.

When the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "65 to 69", "Jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type. This "Jackpot C" is a 10-round jackpot game similar to the above-mentioned "Jackpot A", but the content of the set operation scenario is different, and the first attacker 650 and the second attacker This is a jackpot in which the scenario of action B is defined, in which the game content is to open both of the 3650 and 3650. Then, it is a normal jackpot in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, if you win "Jackpot C", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, High probability state of normal symbols), short time state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), that is, winning the jackpot Regardless of the current gaming state, the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Next, when the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "70 to 74", "Jackpot D" is set. In this "Jackpot D", the operation scenario of the action A is set so that the game content of the jackpot game is the same as the above-mentioned "Jackpot A". And, like the above-mentioned "Jackpot C", this is a normal jackpot in which a low probability of a special symbol is set as the game state after the jackpot game ends.

Specifically, if you win "Jackpot D", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, High probability state of normal symbols), short time state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), that is, winning the jackpot Regardless of the current gaming state, the normal state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

When the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "jackpot E" is set. This "jackpot E" is a jackpot game in which the same jackpot game as the above-mentioned "jackpot D" is executed (a jackpot game in which there are 10 rounds of normal jackpots and operation A is set as the opening operation scenario (operation scenario)), Only the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is different from "Jackpot D".

Specifically, if you win "Jackpot E", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), variable state (high probability state of special symbols, High probability state of normal symbols), short time state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), or potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), that is, winning the jackpot It is stipulated that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, regardless of the current gaming state.

On the other hand, if the symbol type that won the jackpot is the second special symbol (special symbol 2) and the acquired judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is "0 to 29", "Jackpot F" is set as the jackpot type. Ru. This "Jackpot F" is a jackpot game with the same game content as the above-mentioned "Jackpot A", that is, a 10 round probability variable jackpot, and Action A is set as the opening action scenario (action scenario). The gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), time saving state (special symbol high probability state). (low probability state for normal symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) or probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), that is, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the probability changes after the end of the jackpot game. It specifies that the state is set.

When the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "30 to 64", "Jackpot G" is set. This "jackpot G" is a 2-round probability-variable jackpot in which a 2-round jackpot game is executed, and an operation scenario of operation C is set in which the game content of opening the second attacker 3650 is defined. If you win "Jackpot G", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). (high probability state) or time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), the potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) after the end of the jackpot game. If the game state is set and the game state at the time of winning a jackpot is a probability state, a variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Finally, when the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 is "65 to 99", "Jackpot H" is set. This "jackpot H" is a 10-round normal jackpot in which the operation scenario of action A is set so that a jackpot game with the same game content as the above-mentioned "jackpot D" is executed. If you win "Jackpot H", the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot will be the normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), variable state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols). High probability state), time saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols), that is, the game when winning the jackpot Regardless of the state, it is stipulated that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

Here, in this embodiment, in a state where the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed (a state where the reserved memory of the special symbol 2 is secured), a low probability state of the normal symbol (normal state, potential state) It is configured such that a more advantageous game can be provided to the player when the symbol is set than when a high probability state (variable probability state, time saving state) of the normal symbol is set.

Specifically, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, the system is configured such that there is a probability of about 75% to win a small hit, and when a small win is won, the second attacker 3650 (opening/closing door 3650f ) is configured to be operated in an open manner. Then, by opening the second attacker 3650 due to the small winning game, a state is provided in which the ball easily passes through the through gate 67 and flows into the guide path 3660 (see FIG. 243). When the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time (2 seconds) of the normal symbol is set, which is suitable for the time it takes for the ball to reach the second ball entry port 640 after passing through the through gate 67. Therefore, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is configured to easily enter the second ball entry port 640.

On the other hand, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (0.1 second), in detail, a game per normal figure (electric accessory 640a The variable time is set so short that the opening operation (opening operation) is completed. Therefore, the configuration is such that it becomes difficult for the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 to enter the second ball entry port 640.

By configuring in this way, the number of second special symbols acquired in the reserved memory during the small winning game can be varied depending on the gaming state set when the small winning is won. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the low probability state of the normal symbol will be set during the jackpot game, so regardless of the gaming state set when you win the jackpot, the second special It is possible to easily acquire the reserved memory of the symbol.

The operation scenario 8 table 202ge is a table that defines the operations of the first attacker 650 and the second attacker 3650 when the gaming state is a jackpot or a small win. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines, for each scenario type, the operation contents and whether or not it is possible to obtain the special map 2 reservation during the operation.

Here, the contents of the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be explained with reference to FIG. 245(a). FIG. 245(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge. The operation scenario 8 table 202ge defines a jackpot game in which the first attacker 650 is opened for 10 rounds when the scenario type is A in the jackpot. Therefore, when scenario A is set, the second attacker 3650 is not released, so it is impossible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game. Next, in the case of a jackpot and the scenario type is B, a jackpot game is defined in which the second attacker 3650 is released for 1 to 2 rounds and the first attacker 650 is released for 3 to 10 rounds. There is. Therefore, when the scenario B is set, the second attacker 3650 is operated to open, so that it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game.

Next, when the scenario type is C for a jackpot, a jackpot game is defined in which the second attacker 3650 is allowed to play for 1 to 2 rounds. Therefore, when the scenario C is set, the second attacker 3650 is released, so that it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the jackpot game. In the case of a small hit, the second attacker 3650 is released for one round. Therefore, it is possible to newly acquire the reserved memory of the special figure 2 during the small winning game.

Here, the contents of each scenario defined in the operation scenario 8 table 202ge will be explained with reference to FIG. 245(b). FIG. 245(b) is a diagram showing the contents of each scenario. As shown in FIG. 245(b), when scenario A is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and the first attacker 650 is played for 30 seconds as one round game, or The prize will remain open until the number of winning balls reaches 10. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the tenth round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period passes, the jackpot game ends.

When scenario B is set, 2 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times, or This is set until the number of winning balls reaches 3 balls. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. When the interval period after the second round game has elapsed, the first attacker 650 is released for 30 seconds or until the winning number reaches 10 balls as a third round game. When the 10th round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period elapses, the jackpot game ends.

When scenario C is set, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the jackpot game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds three times. Alternatively, it is set until the number of winning balls reaches 3 balls. When one round game ends, an interval period of 2 seconds is set, and a scenario in which the next round game is executed is set. Then, when the second round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period passes, the jackpot game ends.

In the scenario set during the small winning game, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period (OP period) of the small winning game, and one round game opens the second attacker 3650 for 1.5 seconds once. It is set until it is executed or the number of winning balls reaches one. When one round game ends, 4 seconds is set as an ending period (ED period), and when the ending period passes, the jackpot game ends.

As explained above, the eighth embodiment is configured so that a part of the jackpot game (jackpot B, jackpot C) and a winning game that opens the second attacker 3650 in the small win game are executed. There is. Therefore, the ball can be passed through the through gate 67 during a winning game, and the ball can be entered into the second ball entry port 640. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 245(b), when opening the second attacker 3650 in a jackpot game, the number of times the second attacker 3650 is opened is greater than when opening the second attacker 3650 in a small winning game. Since the number of balls is set to increase, in a single winning game, more balls can enter the second ball entry opening 640 in a jackpot game than in a small winning game.

Furthermore, as described above, in the eighth embodiment, when the high probability state (time saving state, variable probability state) of the normal symbol is set, even if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the guidance path 3660 It is configured so that the ball that has flown down cannot enter the second ball entrance 640 (it becomes difficult), and when a jackpot game is executed, a low probability state of the normal symbol is set, and a small win game is When executed, the small win game is configured to be executed in the gaming state at the time of winning the small win. Therefore, the jackpot game is a winning game in which it is easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640 than the small winning game.

The second random number 8 table 202gc is a data table used for the same purpose as the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 15) used in each of the embodiments described above, and is the value of the second random number counter C4. Using this, it is determined whether there is a winning result or not by referring to the second winning random number 8 table 202gc.

Here, the contents of the second winning random number 8 table 202gc will be explained with reference to FIG. 246. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second winning random number 8 table 202gc. The second winning random number 8 table 202gc (see FIG. 246) is a data table in which winning determination values for normal symbols are defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "0 to 237" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202gc1 in FIG. 246). In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "0 to 238" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be a hit (see 202gc3 in FIG. 246). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the second winning random number 8 table 202gc are referred to. Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

In addition, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "238, 239" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be out of place (see 202gc2 in FIG. 246). In addition, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "239" is defined as the determination value for the normal symbol to be out of place (see 202gc4 in FIG. 246).

The variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is a data table used for the same purpose as the variation pattern selection table 202f (see FIG. 14) used in each of the above-described embodiments, and includes the type of special symbol for which the lottery was executed, A variation pattern in which different variation times are set is defined in correspondence with the lottery result and the obtained value of the variation type counter CS1.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd will be explained with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248. FIG. 247 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and FIG. FIG. 248(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the 8 table 202gd2 for time saving/probability change specified by the 8 table 202gd for variable pattern selection. FIG.

Here, the contents of the normal/potential 8 table 202gd1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 248(a). This normal/potential 8 table 202gd1 is a fluctuation pattern table that is referred to when the normal state/potential state is set as the gaming state, and the time saving/probability variation 8 table 202gd2 (time saving state), which will be described later. , or the variation pattern table that is referred to when the probability variation state is set), it is easier to set a variation time that makes it easier for the ball to pass through the second ball entry port 640 or the second attacker 3650. The fluctuation time is defined as follows.

To specifically explain the contents stipulated in the normal/potential 8 table 202gd1, if the type of special symbol is special symbol 1 and the lottery result is a loss, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, if a "missing fluctuation" (fluctuation time of 30 to 120 seconds) is specified as a fluctuation pattern and the lottery result is a jackpot, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 99". , "Win normal variation" (variation time 30 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. On the other hand, for the range of ``100 to 179,'' a ``super hit variation'' (variation time of 60 seconds) is specified, and for the range of ``180 to 198,'' a ``special winning variation'' (variation time of 60 seconds) is defined as a variation pattern. 120 seconds) is specified.

If the type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 and the lottery result is a loss, a "miss fluctuation" (variation time of 5 seconds) is specified as the fluctuation pattern, regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a small win, regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, "small win fluctuation" (variation time 5 seconds) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and if the lottery result is a win, the acquisition Regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, a "winning variation" (variation time of 5 seconds) is defined as the variation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the normal/potential state, the fluctuation time is set to 5 seconds regardless of the lottery result.

Next, with reference to FIG. 248(b), the contents defined in the time saving/probability variable 8 table 202gd2 will be specifically explained. If the type of the special symbol is special symbol 1 and the lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern will be "missing middle fluctuation" (fluctuation time 30 to 60 milliseconds), regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. If the lottery result is a jackpot, and the value of the obtained variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 39", "win normal variation" (variation time 30 milliseconds) is defined as the variation pattern. . In the case of "40 to 119", a "super hit fluctuation" (fluctuation time of 60 milliseconds) is specified. In the case of "120 to 198", "win special variation" (variation time 120 milliseconds) is defined as the variation pattern.

If the type of the special symbol is special symbol 2 and the lottery result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern will be "missing short fluctuation" (fluctuation time 1 millisecond) regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1. is specified, and if the lottery result is a small win, regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1, "small win short fluctuation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is defined as the fluctuation pattern, and the lottery result is a small win. In this case, regardless of the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1, "win short variation" (variation time 1 millisecond) is defined as the variation pattern. That is, in the special figure 2 game in the time saving state or the probability changing state, the variable time is set to 1 millisecond regardless of the lottery result.

Next, the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 249. FIG. 249 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 249, the RAM 203 of the eighth embodiment includes a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. Number counter 203d, second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, fixed variable flag 203g, variable time counter 203gc, medium jackpot flag 203o, medium small hit flag 203p, round end flag 203gd, other memory areas It has 203z. Note that configurations with the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (flags, counters, areas) have their uses the same as in the above-mentioned embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted. .

The other memory area 203z of this embodiment has a data area in which the currently set gaming state can be stored, such as a high probability state of special symbols, a low probability state, or a high probability state of normal symbols. It is possible to store states and low probability states, and to update the conditions until each state ends (transfers to another state) and the current situation with respect to the conditions. Since the specific contents are the same as the control processing for the probability variation flag, probability variation counter, and time saving counter in each of the embodiments described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga is different from the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the second special symbol. More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding area 640). Among the vacant areas (1 area to 4th reserved area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (1st to 4th area). That is, the area with the smaller area number stores data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time, and the data corresponding to the oldest winning in terms of time is stored in the first pending area. Note that if data is stored in all four reservation areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is changed to the execution area. Based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed.

Note that when data is shifted from the first pending area to the execution area, the first pending area becomes vacant. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other holding areas (holding area 2 to holding area 4) to holding areas (holding area 1 to holding area 3) with one lower area number. It will be done. In this embodiment, in the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for holding areas (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which winning data is stored.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winnings in the second ball entrance 640, and the other configuration is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d. Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The fluctuation time counter 203gc is a counter for counting fluctuation time. A counter value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd is set in the variation time counter 203gc (see S11011 in FIG. 252). In addition, this fluctuation time counter 203gc is subtracted by 1 in the special symbol fluctuation processing 8 (see FIG. 251) (see S10914 in FIG. 251), and the fluctuation time is determined based on the value of this fluctuation time counter 203gc. is determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 250(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250(a), the ROM 222 of the tenth embodiment has the same electrical configuration as the first embodiment described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. FIG. 250(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 250(b), the RAM 223 of the tenth embodiment includes a winning information storage area 223b, a first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga, a fluctuation start flag 223fa, It has a stop type selection flag 223fb, a variable time counter 223fd, a gaming state storage area 223fe, a jackpot effect extension flag 223gb, and other memory areas 223z. Note that configurations with the same names as the electrical configurations used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments (flags, counters, areas) have their uses the same as in the above-mentioned embodiments, so detailed explanations will be omitted. .

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is a counter that counts reserved balls based on winnings in the second ball entrance 640, and the other configuration is the same as the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

The jackpot performance extension flag 223gb is a flag to indicate that the performance during the jackpot game (see FIG. 238(a)) will continue to be executed even after the jackpot game ends. This is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot effect is to be executed (to extend the jackpot effect). This jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on when a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is received from the main controller 110 (S12806 in FIG. 257), and the received command is activated when the number of reserved balls increases. If it is determined that the command is 0, it is turned off (S12906 in FIG. 258). When the jackpot performance extension flag 223gb is turned on, the jackpot extension performance is executed after the jackpot game (see FIG. 239(a)).

<About the control processing of the main controller in the eighth embodiment>
Next, special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be explained with reference to FIG. 251. FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001). This special symbol variation processing 8 (S9001) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), and is used to display the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37, and to display the third symbol. This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

In this special symbol variation process 8, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently hitting a jackpot or a small jackpot (S10901). Specifically, it is determined whether either the medium jackpot flag 203o or the medium small win flag 203p is on. As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the special symbol is hitting the jackpot or hitting the small jackpot (S10901: Yes), the process is immediately terminated.

In the process of S10901, if it is determined that the special symbol is neither a big hit nor a small hit (S10901: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902), When it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S10902: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (number of times N2 of the variable display pending based on the lottery of the second special symbol) (S10903). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is greater than 0 (S10904). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is not 0 (S10904: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is subtracted by 1 (S10905) and changed by calculation. A held ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203gb is set (S10906). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203gb from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. Stored in 223ga.

After setting the number of reserved balls command by the process of S10906, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga is shifted (S10907). In the process of S10907, the data stored in the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. The data is shifted and the process moves to S10913.

On the other hand, in the process of S10904, if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is 0 (S10904: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the first special symbol The number of reservations N1) of the variable display based on the lottery is acquired (S10908), and it is determined whether the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reservation ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S10909).

In the process of S10909, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S10909: No), a new variation is started for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Since this is not possible, this process ends immediately. On the other hand, in the process of S10909, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S10909: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S10910), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S10911). The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the number of reserved balls command by the process of S10911, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S10907 (S10909), and the process goes to S10913. Transition. In the process of S10913 executed after the process of S10907 or S10912, a special symbol variation start process 8 for starting variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S10913), and this process ends. The details of this special symbol variation start processing 8 will be described later with reference to FIG. 252.

In the process of S10902, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S10902: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 203gc is updated by subtracting 1 (S10914), and the updated fluctuation time counter is updated. Based on the value of 203gc, it is determined whether the variable time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S10915). That is, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 203gc updated in the process of S10914 has become 0. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If the period has not elapsed (S10915: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S10916), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S10915, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S10915: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S10917). The display mode of the stopped symbols is set in advance by special symbol variation start processing 8 (S10913), which will be described later with reference to FIG. 252. When this special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and if it is a special symbol jackpot, it is determined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2. Then, one of the jackpots A to H is determined.

After the process of S10916 is completed, when the variable display being executed on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process 8 is , it is determined whether the special symbol is a jackpot (S10918). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S10918: Yes), the probability change flag 203g is set to off (S10919), the start of the special symbol jackpot is set (S10920), and the process moves to S10921. do. When the start of the special symbol jackpot is set by the process of S10919, when the jackpot control process (S1004) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed, the process branches to S1101: Yes and the opening command is set. (S1102). As a result, a jackpot effect is started on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S10918, if the current lottery result is outside the special symbol (S10918: No), the processes of S10919 and S10920 are skipped and the process moves to S10921.

In addition, in the special symbol variation process 8 (see S9001 in FIG. 251) in the eighth embodiment, the technical idea for stopping and displaying the special symbol for a predetermined period and the control content are explained as in the second embodiment described above. It may be configured to be added. Thereby, it is possible to notify the player of the lottery result of the specific symbol in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, with reference to FIG. 252, special symbol variation start processing 8 (S10913) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 8 (S10913). This special symbol variation start process 8 (S10913) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 8 (see FIG. 251) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is performed in the first special symbol holding ball storage area. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of 203a and the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga, a lottery (judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol miss" is performed (judgment of success or failure). This is a process for determining the production pattern (variation pattern) of the variation production performed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start process 8, first, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning type counter stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203ga are Each value of C2 and stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S11001).

Next, the probability variation flag 203g is read out to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state (S11002). In the process of S11002, if the variable probability flag 203g is on, it is determined that the special symbol is in a variable probability state, and if the variable probability flag 203g is off, it is determined that the special symbol is in a low probability state (not in a variable probability state). In the process of S11002, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variable state (S11002: Yes), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S11001 and the first Based on the winning random number 8 table 202ga, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S11003). After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S11005.

On the other hand, in the process of S11002, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a variable probability state (it is in a low probability state of special symbols) (S11002: No), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S11001 is , and the first random number 8 table for low probability times (see FIG. 243(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained (S11004). After acquiring the special symbol lottery results, the process moves to S11005.

Then, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S11003 or S11004 is a special symbol jackpot (S11005), and if it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is a special symbol jackpot (S11005: Yes), Based on the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired in the process of S11001, a display mode at the time of a jackpot is set (S11006).

In the process of S11006, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to H). In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A to H) are set as stop types in order to stop display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined (S11007). When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S11007, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect on the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the third pattern until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd (see FIG. 247), and the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. time).

On the other hand, in the process of S11005, if it is determined that the special symbol is a miss (including a small hit) (S11005: No), a display mode at the time of a miss (small win) is set (S11008). In the process of S11008, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the missed (small hit) symbol, and the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the missed (small hit) symbol, and the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the missed (small hit) symbol. The stop type to be displayed on the 3-symbol display device 81 is set as whether it is a reach that is out of front and back, a reach other than out of front and back, a complete miss, or a small hit.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a special pattern probability state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in the process of S11001 is compared with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability times. and set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete off is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach is set other than front and back out, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability times. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete off is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach is set other than front and back off, and "98 , 99'', the front and back off reach is set.

Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of a miss (small win) is determined (S11009). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at a missed (small hit) symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process in S11007, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern selection 8 table 202gd, and the variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 is compared. (variation time).

When the process of S11007 or S11009 is finished, next, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S11007 or S11009 (S11010). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter 203gc (S11011). Then, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in S11006 or S11008 (S11012). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 52). When the process of S11012 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 8.

In addition, in the special symbol variation start process 8 (see S10913 in FIG. 252) of the eighth embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot (S11005: Yes in FIG. 252) and when it is not a jackpot (missing or Although the configuration is such that the processing content to be executed differs depending on the case (small hit) (S11005: No in FIG. 252), as used in any of the above-mentioned embodiments, it is determined that it is not a big hit. In this case, the control process is executed for a loss, and in the process, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a loss or a small win, and when it is a loss or a small win. The configuration may be such that the processing content to be executed differs between the two. Note that the detailed contents of the control process executed in this case are the same as those in any of the embodiments described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Next, the starting winning process 8 (S9002) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 253. FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing this starting winning process 8 (S9002). This starting winning process 8 (S9002) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640. However, when there is a starting prize, this is a process for suspending the values indicated by various counters.

When the starting winning process 8 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S11101). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S11101: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired ( S11102). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S11103).

Then, whether or not the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 (S11101: No), or even if the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d remains unchanged. If (N1) is not less than 4 (S11103: No), the process moves to S11107. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S11101: Yes) and the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S11103: Yes), the first special The value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S11104). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d that has been changed by the calculation is set (S11105).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol held ball number counter 203d from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the first special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. 223c.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S11105, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) are set. Each value is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S11106), and the process moves to S11107. . In addition, in the process of S11106, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of S11107, it is determined whether the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second ball entrance 640 (S11107). In this process as well, similarly to the process in S11101, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (the number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired ( S11108), it is determined whether the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S11109).

Then, whether there is no winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: No) or even if there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is If it is determined that the number is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S11109: No), the process moves to S11113. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the second ball entrance 640 (S11107: Yes) and the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb is less than 4 (S11109: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb (S11110). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb that has been changed by the calculation is set (S11111).

The held pitch count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is output as an audio signal during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. The signal is sent to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the held ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol held ball number counter 203gb from the held ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the second special symbol held ball number counter of the RAM 223. Stored in 223ga.

After setting the number of reserved pitches command in the process of S11111, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is set. , is stored in the first area among the empty holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga of the RAM 203 (S11112), and proceeds to the process of S11113. In addition, in the process of S11112, similarly to the process of S11106, the value of the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203ga is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

In the process of S11113, a pre-read process is executed to pre-read the win/fail from various counter values acquired based on the starting winnings (S11113), and this process ends. The details of this prefetching process will be explained with reference to FIG. 254.

FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S11113). In this pre-reading process (S11113), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 was detected in the current starting winning process 8 (see FIG. 253). (S11201), and if no new ball has been detected (S11201: No), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S11201, if it is determined that a new entering ball has been detected (S11201: Yes), next, check whether the number of reserved balls corresponding to the detected entering ball is the upper limit (i.e., 4). If it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S11202: Yes), the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S11202, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is less than the upper limit value (S11202: No), it is determined whether the timing to start the variable display based on the entered ball is in the probability change state of the special symbol. (S11203). In the process of S11203, it is determined whether or not the probability is variable depending on the current gaming state and the pre-read result of the reserved balls that were reserved before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the held balls do not include a jackpot, the current gaming state will match the timing at which the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry starts, so the current gaming state will be in a variable state. It is determined that Further, if a jackpot is included in the reserved balls, the game state may be changed depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, if the probability variable jackpot is pending, the state shifts to the probability variable state after the jackpot, and if the normal jackpot is pending, the state shifts to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into account, it is determined whether the start timing of the variable display based on the currently detected ball entry is in a variable probability state.

In the process of S11203, if it is determined that the start of the fluctuation based on the currently detected ball entry is in the special symbol probability change state (S11203: Yes), the type of ball entry opening where the ball entry was detected and the high probability state. The lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained based on the first winning random number 8 table 202ga (S11204), and the process moves to S11206. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start of fluctuation is a special symbol low probability state (S11203: No), the type of ball entrance where the ball was detected and the first random number 8 table 202ga for low probability. Based on this, the lottery result based on the current ball entry is obtained (S11205), and the process moves to S11206.

In the process of S11206 that is executed after the process of S11204 or S11205, a winning information command is set based on the type of the ball entrance where the current ball was detected and the lottery result obtained in the process of S11204 or S11205. (S11206), this process ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 52) to be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it stores the type of ball entrance and the lottery result notified by the winning information command in the winning information storage area 223a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 255 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 8 (S9003). This normal symbol variation process 8 (S9003) is executed during the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is used to display the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entering ball. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the mouth 640.

In this normal symbol variation processing 8 (S9003), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S11301). When a normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning symbol, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. This includes during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit (S11301: Yes), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S11301: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of 83 is not changing (S11302: No), the value of the normal symbol pending ball number counter 203e (the number of pending times M of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S11303). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S11304), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S11304: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S11304: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S11305).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S11306). In the process of S11306, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the areas within each area are as follows: 1st area on hold → execution area, 2nd area on hold → 1st area on hold, 3rd area on hold → 2nd area on hold, 4th area on hold → 3rd area on hold. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S11307).

Next, it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (time saving state) of normal symbols (S11308). In the process of S11308, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in a high probability state based on the information held in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203.

In the process of S11308, if it is determined that the state is a high probability state of normal symbols (S11308: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S11307 and the second random number 8 for high probability are used. Based on the table 202gc (see FIG. 246), the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S11309). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number 8 table 202gc for high probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 238", it is determined that it is a normal symbol win, and if it is in the range of "239", it is a normal symbol miss. (See FIG. 246).

In the process of S11308, if it is determined that the state is not a high probability state of normal symbols (S11308: No), the process moves to S11310. In the process of S11310, since the pachinko machine 10 is playing a special symbol jackpot game or the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (normal state) of normal symbols, the second winning random number counter acquired in the process of S11307 is Based on the value of C4 and the second random number 8 table 202gc for low probability, the lottery result as to whether the normal symbol is a hit or not is obtained (S11310). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number 8 table 202gc for low probability times. As mentioned above, if the value of the second win type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 237", it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit, and if it is in the range of "238, 239", it is determined that the normal symbol is a miss. (See FIG. 246).

Next, it is determined whether the normal symbol lottery result obtained through the process of S11309 or S11310 is a normal symbol win (S11311), and if it is determined that the normal symbol is a win (S11311: Yes), The display mode at the time of winning is set (S11312). In the process of S11312, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the "○" symbol is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314), and if the normal symbol is in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314: Yes), a variable display is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The fluctuation time is set to 0.1 seconds (S11315), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (high probability state) (S11314: No), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is set to 2 seconds (S11316), and this process is performed. finish.

In addition, in the process of S11302, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S11302: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S11317). In addition, the fluctuation time here is the time preset by the process of S11315 or the process of S11316 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

In the process of S11317, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S11317: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S11317, if the variable time of the variable display being executed has elapsed (S11317: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S11318). In the process of S11318, if the normal symbol lottery is a win and the display mode has been set in the process of S11312, the "○" symbol as the second symbol will be stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83. display). On the other hand, if the lottery of the normal symbol is a loss and the display mode has been set by the process of S11313, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is displayed in a stopped state (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S11318, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 will be changed. When the process is finished, the stopped symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S11313 or S11318.

Next, when the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device 83 is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variation process (the current lottery result) is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol. is determined (S11319). If the current lottery result is a hit for the normal symbol (S11319: Yes), then it is determined whether the normal symbol is in a time saving state (high probability state) (S11320), and it is in a time saving state (high probability state). Otherwise (S11320: No), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 are set to "0.9 seconds x 1 time" (S11321), and the process is performed in S11323. transition to. On the other hand, in the process of S11320, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving mode (high probability state) (S11320: Yes), the opening time and opening of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 are determined. The number of times is set to "1 second x 1 time" (S11322), and the process moves to S11323.

In the process of S11323, the opening time determined in the process of S11321 or S11322 and the opening/closing control start of the number of openings are set (S11323), and this process ends. When the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S11323, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 52) is executed next, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set. The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and number of openings set in the process of S11321 or S11322 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S11319, if the current lottery result is outside the normal symbol (S11319: No), each process of S11320 to S11323 is skipped and this process is ended.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eighth embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eighth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 256 to 259. The control process of the audio lamp control device 113 of the eighth embodiment differs from the control process of the seventh embodiment described above in that the content of the command determination process is changed. Since other elements are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Note that for convenience of explanation, different reference numerals may be given to the same processes as in each embodiment described above, but processes with the same name are used for the same purpose.

First, with reference to FIG. 256, command determination processing 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing this command determination process 8 (S4191). This command determination process 8 (S4191) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 59) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is the process to do so.

In the command determination process 8, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern command is sent from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (S12701). In the process of S12701, if it is determined that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S12701: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223fa provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S12702), and the fluctuation pattern type is determined from the received fluctuation pattern command. is extracted (S12703), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when a variation display setting process (see FIG. 52) described later is executed. It is then used to set a display variation pattern command that notifies the display control device 114 of the start of a variation effect and the type of variation pattern.

On the other hand, in the process of S12701, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S12701: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12704). If the stop type command is received (S12704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223fb in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S12705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S12706), and the main Finish the process. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referenced when the variable display setting process is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S12704, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S12704: No), then it is determined whether or not a held pitch count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12707). . If it is determined that the held pitch count command has been received (S12707: Yes), the held pitch count related process is executed (S12708), and this process ends. Details of the pending pitch number related process (S12708) will be described later with reference to FIG. 257.

Here, the number of reserved balls command is sent from the main controller 110 when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning) or when a special symbol lottery is held. Therefore, each time a starting prize is detected or a special symbol lottery is performed, the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223c and the second special symbol of the audio lamp control device 113 are activated by the process of S12708. The value of the symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be matched with the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise etc., the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga of the audio lamp control device 113 may be lower than the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter of the main controller 110. 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the audio lamp control device 113 and the second The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga can be corrected to match the values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203gb of the main controller 110.

In addition, when the process of S12708 is executed, a display holding ball for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223c and the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223ga is displayed. Several commands are set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number of reserved pitches is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S12707, if it is determined that the held pitch count command has not been received (S12707: No), then it is determined whether or not a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S12709). If it is determined that the status command has been received (S12709: Yes), the data in the gaming status storage area 223fe is updated in accordance with the received command (S12710). Thereby, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the audio lamp control device 113 can easily understand the change.

On the other hand, in the process of S12709, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S12709: No), then it is determined whether or not a winning information command has been received (S12711). In the process of S12711, if it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S12711: Yes), information corresponding to the received winning information command is set in the winning information storage area 223b (S12712), and this process ends.

In the process of S12711, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S12711: No), then commands related to wins (big wins, small wins) (opening command, round number command, ending command for each win) ) is received (S12713). If it is determined that a command related to a win has been received (S12713: Yes), a win related process 8 for executing control corresponding to the type of command related to a win is executed (S12714), This process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S12713, if it is determined that a command related to the jackpot has not been received (S12713: No), processes corresponding to other commands are executed (S12715), and this process ends. In the process of S12715, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed and the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the other command is a command used by the display control device 114, that command is executed. This command is used to set a command so as to send the command to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the pending pitch number related process (S12708), which is one process in the command determination process 8 (S4191) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 257 is a flowchart showing this pending pitch count related processing (S12708).

In the reserved ball number related processing (S12708), first, it is determined whether a special figure 2 related command, that is, a command related to the reserved ball number of the second special symbol (special figure 2) has been received (S12801). If it is determined that the special figure 2 related command has been received (S12801: Yes), it is determined whether the received special figure 2 related command is a command indicating an increase in the number of reserved balls of the special figure 2 (S12802). If it is determined that the command indicates an increase (S12802: Yes), the information in the gaming state storage area 223fe is read out (S12803). Next, it is determined whether the read information in the game state storage area 223fe indicates a big win or a small win (S12804). If it is determined that the game is hitting a jackpot or a small winning (S12804: Yes), it is determined whether the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is on (S12805). If it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is off (S12805: No), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to on in order to set the extension of the effect executed during the jackpot (S12806), A jackpot extension performance is set (S12807), and the process moves to S12808. On the other hand, in the process of S12805, if it is determined that the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is on (S12805: Yes), there is no need to set the effect of jackpot extension, so the processes of S12806 to S12807 are skipped and the process of S12808 is Move to processing.

By configuring in this way, if the reserved memory of special figure 2 is acquired while a winning game is being played, the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery) will be executed after the end of the jackpot game. You can set up a jackpot extended performance. In other words, since the performance executed after the winning game ends is not based on the game state set after the winning game ends, but is based on the presence or absence of the reserved memory of the special figure 2, as in the eighth embodiment, a specific Since it is possible to easily set the performance mode corresponding to the lottery (variation) of the special drawing 2 that can be executed only under certain conditions, it is possible to execute a performance that is easy for the player to understand.

In S12808, a key display mode (display mode of acquired display areas Dm10a to Dm10d) corresponding to the command received this time is set (S12808). Next, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12810), and the process moves to S12811. On the other hand, in the process of S12804, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a jackpot or a small win (S12804: No), an error command is set (S12809) and the process moves to S12810. .

On the other hand, in the process of S12802, if it is determined that the special map 2-related command received this time is not a command indicating an increase (S12802: No), a decrease process is executed (S12813), and the process moves to S12811. do.

Here, with reference to FIG. 258, the process at the time of decrease (S12813), which is one process in the process related to the number of reserved pitches (S12708) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 258 is a flowchart showing this process at the time of decrease (S12813).

In the process at the time of decrease (S12813), first, the number of reserved balls is extracted from the command received this time and stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga (S12901). Next, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902). In the process of S12902, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12902: Yes), it is the timing to end the jackpot. A display effect command indicating the end of the extra round is set (S12903). Next, a display instruction command indicating left-handed hitting is set (S12904). Next, the right hit command is set to OFF (S12905), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to OFF (S12906), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S12902, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S12902: No), a key display mode corresponding to the number of reserved balls is set (S12907), This process ends.

Returning to FIG. 257, the explanation will be continued. When any one of S12801, S12810, or S12813 is completed, the process moves to S12811. In the process of S12811, it is determined whether a special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). In the process of S12811, it is determined whether a special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811). If it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has been received (S12811: Yes), the number of reserved balls is extracted from the received command and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (S12812), and this process is ended. do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 related command has not been received (S12811: No), this process is directly ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 259, the contents of win-related processing 8 (S12714) will be explained. FIG. 259 is a flowchart schematically showing the contents of win-related processing 8 (S12714). This win-related process 8 (S12714) is executed when a win-related command (a command related to a big win or a small win) is received.

When win-related processing 8 (S12714) is executed, first, it is determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a jackpot-related command (S12151), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot-related command (S12151: Yes). , sets the corresponding display command (S12152), and ends this process. In addition, the various display commands set in the process of S12152 are set by the same process as the process executed when a jackpot related command is received in the command determination process executed in each embodiment described above. , and its detailed explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the process of S12151, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a jackpot-related command (S12151: No), then it is determined whether the hit-related command received this time is a small hit start command. (S12107) If it is determined that it is a small hit start command (S12107: Yes), small hit start processing 8 is executed (S12158) and this process is ended.

This small hit start process 8 (S12158) changes the contents of the display command set to the process executed in the small hit start process 7 (S12108) of the seventh embodiment described above to the height of the normal symbol. The difference is that the display commands that are executed when the probability state is set and the display commands that are executed when the low probability state of the normal symbol is set are determined and set. Since the other parts are the same, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the process of S12107, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a small hit start command (S12107: No), then it is determined whether a small hit end command has been received (S12109), and the small hit ends. If it is determined that the command has not been received (S12109: No), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S12109, if it is determined that the small hit end command has been received (S12109: Yes), then the small hit flag 203p is set to off (S12153), and then the second special symbol reserved ball is It is determined whether the value of the number counter 223ga is greater than 0 (S12154). That is, in the process of S12154, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is stored on hold at the timing when the small winning game ends.

In the process of S12154, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is larger than 0 (S12154: Yes), the special symbol 2 variation is executed after the small winning game ends, so the main process is continued. end. On the other hand, in the process of S12154, if it is determined that the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is not larger than 0 (0) (S12154: No), then the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is turned on. (S12155), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (S12155: Yes), the jackpot effect extension flag 223gb is set to OFF (S12156), and this process ends.

As a result, if the special figure 2 variation is not executed after the small winning game ends, that is, if the reserved memory of the special drawing 2 cannot be acquired during the small winning game, the jackpot extension effect will be executed after the small winning game ends. You can prevent this from happening. Although a detailed explanation has been omitted, in the hit related process 8, when the small hit end command is received (S12109: Yes), if the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223ga is 0 (S12154: No), the system is configured so that the end screen of the extended jackpot performance (see FIG. 241(b)) is displayed when the small winning game ends. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the extended jackpot performance has ended.

As explained above, in the eighth embodiment, the second special symbol is executed during a jackpot game or during a small win game that is executed in a low probability state (normal state, potential state) of normal symbols. It is configured so that the ball can (easily) enter the second ball entry opening 640 which is the trigger. As a result, it is possible to prevent the drawing of the second special symbol from being executed unless a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) is executed, so as in the first embodiment described above, the drawing of the first special symbol (variation) and the second special symbol lottery (variation) are executed simultaneously (in parallel), a small winning game based on the second special symbol lottery only during the potential state. can occur frequently. Therefore, the control process of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Furthermore, it is configured so that it is possible to set a winning type in which the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640 and a winning type in which it is difficult to enter the ball, depending on the type of winning (big win, small win). , When winning a win (big win, small win), it is not just the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be obtained during the winning game, but also the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 during the winning game. It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not this is the case.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the case where the first special symbol is won in the lottery and in the case where the second special symbol is won in the lottery. The configuration is such that the percentage of easy winning types to be set is varied. Specifically, the winning type that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 is set more easily when the second special symbol wins than when the first special symbol wins. It consists of

By configuring in this way, once the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is transitioned to an executable state, it is possible to continue and facilitate the lottery of the special symbol 2, Even though an advantageous game mode that is advantageous to the player (a mode in which the special drawing 2 lottery can be executed) is set, the advantageous game mode ends immediately, causing discomfort to the player. can be suppressed.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the lottery with the second special symbol is configured to have a higher probability of winning (big win, small win) than the lottery with the first special symbol. Specifically, in the first special symbol lottery, there is no small win, only a jackpot (1/400 at low probability), whereas in the second special symbol lottery, there is no small win. The probability of (1/400 when the probability is low) is the same as the first special symbol described above, but it is set so that a small win can also be won (300/400). In this way, in the eighth embodiment, by setting the second special symbol lottery to have a higher probability of winning a small win than the first special symbol lottery, the first special symbol lottery It is configured so that it is easier to win (big hit, small hit) in the second special symbol lottery.

As a result, when the second special symbol lottery is executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640, it is possible to win a winning (big hit, small hit) with a high probability. A winning game based on the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed frequently in a short period of time.

Furthermore, in the eighth embodiment, the winning game is configured such that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 with a higher probability when winning a small winning than when winning a jackpot. are doing. Thereby, when a small win is won by the lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to easily cause the lottery of the second special symbol to be executed again after the end of the winning game.

In addition, in the eighth embodiment, the right to execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 reservation) is configured to be able to store (reserve memory) a plurality of pieces (4 pieces), depending on the winning type won. The opening operation pattern of the winning game is defined so that the number of items that can be held and stored during one winning game is different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player actively play the game in order to secure more reserved memory through one winning game. Here, in the present eighth embodiment, the second opening/closing door 3650f attached to the second attacker 3650 that is opened in the winning game is in the open state (the state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 3650a). A flow path through which a part of the balls that have fallen from above the second opening/closing door 3650f can enter the second ball entry port 640 when the state is changed to the closed state (a state in which the ball cannot be guided to the second specific winning port 3650a). is configured to pass through. In this way, by configuring the ball that could not enter the second attacker 3650 which is released during the winning game to be able to enter the second ball entrance 640, the ball can enter the second ball entrance 640 during the winning game. The player can be made to watch the movement of the ball entering the second specific winning opening 3650a and the movement of the ball entering the second ball entry opening 640.

In addition, as in the seventh embodiment described above, there is an inflow detection means for detecting that a ball has flown into a channel (guiding passage 3660) in which a ball can flow down when a specific condition is satisfied, and a ball flowing from the channel A discharge detection means for detecting that the liquid is discharged is provided, and a production mode setting means for setting the production mode based on the detection result of each detection means may be provided. It is also possible to provide operation restriction means for restricting gaming operations.

<Ninth embodiment>
Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 260 to 266. In the first embodiment described above, the first special symbol (special symbol 1) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2) are configured to be dynamically displayed at the same time (in parallel) (so-called simultaneous display). variation type). Furthermore, in order to efficiently perform the discrimination of special symbols, it is possible to set a game state (high probability state of normal symbols) in which the electric accessory 64a is easy to release, and a high probability state of the normal symbols (for example, time saving state). is configured to continue for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the number of times (time saving number) of special symbol discrimination (variation) reaches 100 after the end of the jackpot).

In the first embodiment described above, since the special pattern 1 and the special pattern 2 are configured to be able to be discriminated (varied) at the same time (in parallel), the high probability state of the normal pattern is determined by the predetermined state described above. In order to prevent the period from being set longer than the predetermined period, it is used as a reference when determining the period during which the high probability state of the normal symbol will continue, at the timing when the first special symbol or the second special symbol starts to fluctuate. The time saving information (for example, the time saving counter 203f) is updated (see FIG. 36).

As described above, in the first embodiment, the time saving information is updated at the timing when each special symbol starts to fluctuate, so in a simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, the number of times the special symbol is determined (varied) is Even if the number of times of time saving is set based on this, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from being set beyond the predetermined number of time saving times.

However, in the configuration of the first embodiment, in a simultaneous fluctuation type gaming machine, depending on the timing of discrimination (fluctuation) of each special symbol, the period in which the time saving state is set becomes shorter, giving the player a feeling of discomfort. There was a problem.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the special symbol variation of the 100th rotation (the final time of the time saving number) is executed as the discrimination (variation) of the first special symbol, the discrimination (variation) of the second special symbol, i.e. , When the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed, the time saving state can be ended at the timing when the 100th rotation special figure variation is executed (just before the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed). , it does not cause discomfort to the player, but if the special pattern variation of the 101st rotation is not executed while the special pattern variation of the 100th rotation (the final time of the number of time reductions) is executed, for example, the 100th rotation In the case where the 101st rotation special figure variation starts after the 101st rotation special figure variation ends, the time saving state ends at the timing when the 100th rotation special figure variation is executed. There is a problem in that the state of the normal symbols during the special symbol fluctuations gives the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, in the ninth embodiment, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time-saving end condition is satisfied. The end timing of the special figure variation (for example, the special figure variation of the 100th rotation) and the start timing of the special figure variation that is executed first after the time-saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the special figure variation of the 101st rotation) It is configured such that the time saving state is terminated based on the timing that is executed first among the timings.

With this configuration, it is possible to set the high probability state of the normal symbols for a longer period of time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that gives the player a feeling of discomfort.

In addition, in the present ninth embodiment, the timing at which the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed is configured to be able to determine the timing at which the conditions for executing the 101st rotation special figure variation are satisfied. The time saving state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time saving times and the special symbol lottery being executed in the time saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, between the end timing of the special figure variation at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the timing at which the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the time-saving end condition is satisfied first. Although the configuration is such that the time saving state is terminated based on the timing, the time saving state is not limited to this, and for example, the time saving state is terminated based only on the timing at which the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation for which the time saving termination condition is satisfied. It may be configured to terminate the state.

With this configuration, for example, if there is an empty period after the 100th rotation special figure variation ends and before the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed, that is, the 100th rotation special figure variation is completed. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation ends, the time-saving state can continue during the idle period, making the gaming state advantageous to the player (high probability state of normal symbols) more It can be set for a long time.

In this case, when a game is played in which the ball passes through the through gate 67 to start the variation of the normal symbol, the ball fired by that game enters the ball to start the variation of the special symbol. It is preferable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that a ball can enter the mouth. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a game in which only the variation of the normal symbols is started without starting the variation of the special symbols.

Furthermore, when a winning result is won by determining the normal symbol (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is released and the ball is configured to easily enter the ball entering means for starting the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game in which only normal symbol discrimination (lottery) is performed from continuing for a long period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 64a is opened and the ball enters the lower first ball entry opening 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy to enter (see Fig. 2), it is used as a ball entrance that makes it easier for the ball to enter by opening the electric accessory 64a, not as a ball entrance that starts the fluctuation of the special symbol. , a predetermined number of prize balls may be awarded based on the ball entering the ball.

<About the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 260. The ninth embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the contents defined in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 have been changed, and the other electrical configurations are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 included in the main control device 110 of the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 260, the RAM 203 of the ninth embodiment is different from the RAM 203 of the first embodiment described above in that a time saving end standby flag 203ha is added.

The time-saving end standby flag 203ha is a flag for indicating that the time-saving state is in a standby state to end, and is set to ON when the time-saving state is in a standby state to end. In the ninth embodiment, a plurality of timings (time-saving end timings) for ending the time-saving state are set based on the number of changes of the special symbol (number of special symbol fluctuations), and which one of the plurality of time-saving end timings is set. The time saving state is configured to end when one of the timings occurs.

Then, when a state is reached (standby state) in which a plurality of time-saving end timings can be established, the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is set to ON. Specifically, in the main control device 110, the gaming state update process (S308 ) is set to ON when it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0 (S604: Yes) in the game state update process 9 (see S396 in FIG. 263) that is executed in place of (S604: Yes) (see S691). ).

Next, when the special symbol fluctuation stop processing (first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see S297 in FIG. 264), second special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see S298 in FIG. 266)) is executed, or when a new When performing special symbol determination (first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S395 in FIG. 261)), second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see S991 in FIG. 265)), it is referred to and waits for the time-saving end. When the flag 203ha is set to ON, a time saving end process for ending the time saving state (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, and the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404).

With this configuration, when the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is set to ON (that is, the standby state), when any time-saving end timing arrives, it is possible to reliably can perform time-saving termination processing. Furthermore, when the time-saving end process (see S492 in FIG. 262) is executed, the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF, thereby reliably preventing the time-saving end process from being executed redundantly at multiple timings. can do.

<About the control processing of the main control device in the ninth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 261 to 266. The control process of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment is the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), which is different from the control process of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment described above. The symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261), the game state update process 9 (see FIG. 263) instead of the game state update process (see FIG. 36), and the first special symbol fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 38) 1 special symbol fluctuation stop processing 9 (see FIG. 264), 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing 9 (see FIG. 265), 2nd special symbol jackpot determination processing (see FIG. 40), 2nd special symbol fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 40) The difference is that the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 266) is executed instead of the process (see FIG. 45), and the time saving end process (see FIG. 262) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 261, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (S395). The ninth embodiment differs from the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment in that processes of S491 and S492 are added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (S395), after acquiring the data of the execution area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a (S401), check whether the time saving end standby flag 203ha is on or not. It is determined whether the start of the fluctuation is the timing of the end of the time saving (S491). If it is determined that it is time to end the time saving (S491: Yes), the time saving end processing is executed (S492), and the process proceeds to S402. Details of the time saving termination process (S492) will be described later with reference to FIG. 262. On the other hand, in the process of S491, if it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is not on, that is, the current fluctuation start is not the timing of the time-saving end (S491: No), the process moves to S402.

As described above, in this embodiment, before acquiring the special symbol lottery result, it is determined whether it is time to end the time saving. By configuring this before acquiring the lottery results, it is possible to set time saving as the gaming state until the end of the variation, which is the time saving end timing.

Next, the time saving termination process (S492) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 262. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing details of the time saving termination process (S492). In the time saving end process (S492), a process for setting the gaming state after the time saving ends is executed.

In the time saving end process (S492), first, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is on (S11401). If it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is on (S11401: Yes), a state command indicating a probability state is set (S11402), and the process moves to S11404. On the other hand, in the process of S11401, if it is determined that the probability change flag 203g is not on (S11401: No), a status command indicating the normal state is set (S11403), and the process moves to S11404. In the process of S11404, the time saving end standby flag 203ha is set to OFF (S11404), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the game state update process 9 (S396) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing details of gaming state update processing 9 (S396). In the ninth embodiment, in the game state update process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36), after subtracting the value of the time saving counter 203f (S602), it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203f is 0. The difference is that a process (S691) for setting the time-saving end standby flag 203ha to ON is added if (S604: Yes).

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (S297) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 264 is a flowchart showing details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (S297). The ninth embodiment differs from the first special symbol variation stop processing (see S207 in FIG. 38) in the first embodiment in that processing in S891 and S892 is added. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the first special symbol variation stop processing 9 (S297), after stopping the variation of the first special symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S809), whether the time saving end standby flag 203ha is on, that is, the current variation It is determined whether the timing of stopping is the timing of ending the time saving (S891). In the process of S891, if it is determined that the time saving end standby flag 203ha is off (S891: No), this process is directly ended. On the other hand, in the process of S891, if it is determined that the time-saving end standby flag 203ha is on, a time-saving end process for ending the time-saving state is executed (S892), and this process ends. In addition, this time-saving end process (S892) is the same process as the time-saving end process (S492, see FIG. 262) executed in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261) described above. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, regarding the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 265) and the second special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see FIG. 266), the first special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261) and the second special symbol jackpot determination process 9 (see FIG. 261), respectively. 1. Made the same changes as the changes made to the special symbol fluctuation stop process 9 (see Figure 264) (addition of a control process that executes the time saving end process (see Figure 262) when the time saving end standby flag 203ha is on). Since there are only a few, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

As explained above, in the ninth embodiment, when the number of special symbol fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is set as the time-saving end condition for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the time-saving end condition The end timing of the special figure variation that holds true (for example, the special figure variation of the 100th rotation) and the first special figure variation that is executed after the time-saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the special figure variation of the 101st rotation). It is configured such that it is possible to determine the start timing and the time saving state is ended based on the timing that is executed first among the timings.

With this configuration, the high probability state of the normal symbols can be set for a longer period of time, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that gives the player a feeling of discomfort.

In addition, in the present ninth embodiment, the timing at which the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed is configured to be able to determine the timing at which the conditions for executing the 101st rotation special figure variation are satisfied. The time saving state is configured to end before the special symbol is determined. Thereby, it is possible to reliably prevent the time saving state from being set in a range exceeding the predetermined number of time saving times and the special symbol lottery being executed in the time saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, between the end timing of the special figure variation at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the timing at which the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation at which the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the time-saving end condition is satisfied first. Although the configuration is such that the time saving state is terminated based on the timing, the time saving state is not limited to this, and for example, the time saving state is terminated based only on the timing at which the special figure variation is executed next to the special figure variation for which the time saving termination condition is satisfied. It may be configured to terminate the state.

With this configuration, for example, if there is an empty period after the 100th rotation special figure variation ends and before the 101st rotation special figure variation is executed, that is, the 100th rotation special figure variation is completed. When the demo screen (standby screen) is displayed after the fluctuation ends, the time-saving state can continue during the idle period, making the gaming state advantageous to the player (high probability state of normal symbols) more It can be set for a long time.

In this case, when a game is played in which the ball passes through the through gate 67 to start the variation of the normal symbol, the ball fired by that game enters the ball to start the variation of the special symbol. It is preferable to configure the game area of the game board 13 so that a ball can enter the mouth. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a game in which only the variation of the normal symbols is started without starting the variation of the special symbols.

Furthermore, when a winning result is won by determining the normal symbol (lottery), the electric accessory 64a is released and the ball is configured to easily enter the ball entering means for starting the variation of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game in which only normal symbol discrimination (lottery) is performed from continuing for a long period of time.

In addition, in this embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, the electric accessory 64a is opened and the ball enters the lower first ball entry opening 64b2. Although it is configured to be easy to enter (see Fig. 2), it is used as a ball entrance that makes it easier for the ball to enter by opening the electric accessory 64a, not as a ball entrance that starts the fluctuation of the special symbol. , a predetermined number of prize balls may be awarded based on the ball entering the ball.

<Tenth embodiment>
Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 267 to 278. Each of the embodiments described above has two types of special symbols (a first special symbol and a second special symbol), and when the lottery of each special symbol results in a specific lottery result (for example, a big hit or a small win), , the bonus game (big win game, small win game) is executed by operating the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650).

In this way, when performing a bonus game in response to a special symbol lottery, the bonus game is executed when the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result, so the lottery result becomes a specific lottery result. Although it was possible to give players a sense of satisfaction, even if the special symbol lottery was executed multiple times, there was a risk that the lottery result would not be a specific lottery result, and the special symbol lottery It was not possible to provide any benefits to players who executed the above.

In contrast, in the tenth embodiment, when it is determined that a ball has entered the ball, the variable winning device (for example, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) is activated. A ball means (specific ball entry port 4640 (see FIG. 267)) is provided. In this way, by configuring the variable prize winning device to operate only when a ball enters the specific ball entering means, benefits are directly awarded to the player's game content (ball launch results). This makes it possible to prevent players from feeling dissatisfied.

Here, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 267. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is different from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above, with a second ball entrance 640, a first variable winning device 65, , the electric accessory 64a and the lower first ball entrance 64b2 are deleted, a ball entrance 464 is provided in place of the upper first ball entrance 64b1, and a new ball entrance 4640 and its specific ball entrance The difference is that a specific accessory 4640a accompanying 4640 and a small attacker 4650 are provided. The other configurations are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same configurations will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 267, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, of the game area formed on the game board 13, the left side area (the area on the left side of the variable display unit 80 in front view), and the left side area Devices related to the game are concentrated in the lower region (lower region in the front view of the variable display unit 80) where the ball shot down flows down, and the player is forced to shoot the ball in the left region. The configuration is such that a left-handed game is played.

Specifically, a through gate 67 is provided on the upstream side of the left region, and a ball entry port 464, a specific ball entry port 4640, a small attacker 4650, and a second variable winning device 650 are provided in the lower region in order from the top. It is being Here, the flow of the game when playing a left-handed game using the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained.

Most of the balls fired in the left-handed game pass through the through gate 67 and flow down toward the lower region. When a ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol is determined (lottery) based on the fact that the ball passes through the through gate 67 (detected by a detection switch not shown). In this embodiment, when a normal symbol is won, a winning game is executed in which a specific accessory 4640a, which will be described later, is released.

The ball entry port 464 is arranged so that one out of every 20 balls that reaches the lower region enters the ball entry port 464. When it is detected that a ball has entered the ball entrance 464 (detected by a detection switch not shown), a special symbol (first special symbol) is drawn by lottery based on the detection. In addition, four prize balls are awarded to the player for each ball entered. The balls that do not enter the ball entrance 464 flow down toward the specific ball entrance 4640, the small attacker 4650, and the second variable winning device 650 provided below the ball entrance 464.

Here, the specific ball entry opening 4640 has a specific accessory that is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult to enter the ball and an open state that makes it easier to enter the ball than the closed state. 4640a is attached, and the ease with which the ball enters the ball is configured to vary depending on the variable situation of the specific accessory 4640a. This specific accessory 4640a is variably controlled by a variable control means (normal symbol variation process executed by the main controller 110 (see S106 in FIG. 48)) so that the state changes according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. The specific ball entrance 4640 is designed to be in an open state where it is easy for the ball to enter the special ball entry opening 4640 when a winning is won in the normal symbol lottery executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67. Variably controlled.

Although a detailed explanation will be given later, in this embodiment, the game state is a state in which the specific accessory 4640a is more likely to be in an open state (high probability state of a normal symbol), and a state in which the specific accessory 4640a is more likely to be in an open state than the high probability state of the normal symbol. Although it is configured to be able to set a difficult state (low probability state of normal symbols), even if the low probability state of normal symbols is set, the ball will not enter the specific ball entrance 4640. It is configured to obtain.

Returning to FIG. 267, the explanation will be continued. If the specific accessory 4640a is in the open state at the timing when the ball that did not enter the ball entry port 464 reaches the specific ball entry port 4640, the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 and the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640. When the accessory 4640a is in the closed state, it passes over the specific accessory 4640a in the closed state and flows down toward the small attacker 4650.

When a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, a special symbol (first special symbol) lottery is executed, and one prize ball is awarded for each winning ball. In this embodiment, a maximum of four special symbol (first special symbol) lottery rights to be executed when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 can be reserved.

In the tenth embodiment, a plurality of nails are planted on the game board 13, so that the balls flowing down the game area are guided by the plurality of nails to the positions where various devices are arranged in the lower area. flows down to. Further, in the lower region, a device (for example, the second variable prize winning device 650 ) is constructed so that the number of balls guided toward

Specifically, among the balls fired in a left-handed game, about one out of every four balls is guided to a position where the ball can enter the ball entry port 464 (a position above the ball entry port 464); The player is configured so that approximately one ball per 20 balls (that is, approximately one out of every 20 balls fired in a left-handed game) enters the ball entrance 464.

The configuration is such that about one out of every two balls fired in a left-handed game is guided to the specific ball entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650. In this specific ball entrance 4640, even though the ball is guided to a position where it can enter the ball entrance 464 (a position above the entrance 464), the ball does not enter the entrance 464 and flows down. This includes the ball and the ball that could not be guided to the ball entrance 464 while flowing down the left side area. Finally, it is configured such that substantially all of the balls fired in the left-handed game are guided to the second variable winning device 650.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 267, it is possible to play a right-handed game, and the ball fired in a right-handed game is larger than the ball fired in a left-handed game. , the ball entrance 464, the specific ball entrance 4640, and the small attacker 4650, and are configured to be guided to the second variable winning device 650 at the same rate.

In this way, by varying the ease with which the ball enters each ball opening depending on the position at which the player shoots the ball, it is possible to have the players play the game while competing with each other in terms of their skill. This can prevent you from getting bored with it early.

Note that, without being limited to the configuration of the game board 13 provided in the tenth embodiment, for example, it is possible to make it easier for the small attacker 4650 to guide the ball when playing a right-handed game than when playing a left-handed game. It may be configured as follows. This allows the player to play a game in which the playing method (hitting left, hitting right) is varied depending on the game result (whether or not the ball enters the specific ball entry hole 4640). can be made to play games with enthusiasm.

Returning to FIG. 267, the explanation will be continued. The small attacker 4650 is equipped with a small opening/closing door 4650a that is a variable means that can be changed between a closed state that makes it difficult for a ball to enter the ball and an open state that makes it easier for the ball to enter the door. The ease with which the ball enters the ball is configured to vary depending on the variable state of the small opening/closing door 4650a. This small opening/closing door 4650a is controlled by specific variable control means (specific ball entry process executed by the main controller 110 (see S196 in FIG. 278 )). Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640, the value of a counter (first winning type counter C2) that is randomly updated and the set game The opening pattern of the small opening/closing door 4650a is configured to differ based on the state.

Specifically, the period (opening standby time) from when the ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 until the small opening/closing door 4650a opens is configured to be different. As a result, for example, in a gaming state (for example, a normal state) in which the period (opening standby time) from when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 until the small opening/closing door 4650a opens is set to be long, the unit time A game state in which the number of balls that hit the small attacker 4650 in a win can be suppressed, and the period from when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 until the small opening/closing door 4650a opens is easily set to be short (for example, In the potential state), the number of balls hitting the small attacker 4650 per unit time can be increased.

In the tenth embodiment, when a ball enters the small attacker 4650, ten prize balls are awarded for one winning ball. It is configured so that more prize balls are awarded than the ball mouth 4640. Therefore, by varying the number of balls that land on the small attacker 4650 per unit time depending on the gaming state, for example, the number of balls that land on the small attacker 4650 may be greater than the number of balls fired at the player. It becomes possible to award the number of balls as prize balls.

With this configuration, in addition to the game based on the lottery of special symbols, it is possible for the player to play the game based on the entry of the ball into the specific ball entry means (the specific ball entry port 4640). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Finally, the balls that did not win even in the small attacker 4650 flow down toward the second variable winning device 650 provided below the small attacker 4650. This second variable winning device 650 is a variable means that operates when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery (operates during a jackpot game), as in the first embodiment described above. Note that since the detailed contents are the same as those of the first embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Balls that do not win in this second variable winning device 650 flow into an out port 66 formed at the lowermost position of the gaming area of the gaming board 13 and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the ball can be fired to the right side area of the game area (right-handed game is possible), but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game in which the ball is fired to the right handle area of the game area is possible. The right side area may be completely eliminated so that (right-handed game) cannot be executed. In addition, in the tenth embodiment, all games (from the games in the normal state) are configured to be executable only by left-handed games, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, the through gate 67 or the specific ball entrance 4640 may be provided in the right side area, and the game content may be changed depending on the game state.

<About the production content in the 10th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 268, the characteristic effects executed in the tenth embodiment will be explained. In the tenth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment described above, the period (determined period) from when the special symbol to indicate winning the jackpot is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed is the jackpot type. are prescribed differently depending on the

The tenth embodiment is configured such that a gaming state (potential state) in which the small attacker 4650 is likely to be released during the definite period is set. In other words, a game in which the small attacker 4650 is opened continuously (so-called small win RUSH) can be executed using the fixed period of the special symbol to indicate that the player has won the jackpot.

With this configuration, the small win RUSH can be executed before the jackpot game is executed. The technical idea of executing the small win RUSH before the jackpot game is executed is the same as the second embodiment described above, so please refer to the detailed explanation and possible derivations based on this technical idea. The plan and the alternative plan are the same as those in the second embodiment described above, and their explanation will be omitted.

In addition, in the present tenth embodiment, the same special symbol confirmation period as in the second embodiment described above is used as the period for executing the small hit RUSH, but it is not limited to this, and in each of the above embodiments, the small winning RUSH is executed. The period used for frequently executing winning games may be used. For example, as in the sixth embodiment described above, the period from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the round game (opening period) may be used. Furthermore, based on the lottery results of special symbols. It may be configured such that a potential state (a high probability state for special symbols, a low probability state for normal symbols) is set as the gaming state, and a small hit RUSH is executed during the potential state.

Returning to FIG. 268, the explanation will be continued. FIG. 268(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, and FIG. 268(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a diagram showing an example of a presentation screen.

As shown in FIG. 268(a), if the special symbol jackpot is won, "777" is stopped and displayed in the special symbol 1 display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and "left hit" is displayed in the guide display area Dm3. is displayed. In this embodiment, since the configuration is such that a left-handed game is executed in all game states, "left-handed game" is always displayed in the guide display area Dm3. Note that if the configuration is such that the same gaming method (left-handed play) is always executed as in this embodiment, the guide display area Dm3 is not displayed because the player does not need to change the gaming method. It may be configured so that it does not occur.

Then, in the main display area Dm, a character 811 is displayed, and a comment "Aim for RUSH" is displayed to indicate to the player that a game period in which the small attacker 4650 is frequently released is starting. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "entering the chance zone" indicating that a gaming state advantageous to the player has been set is displayed.

In the tenth embodiment, similarly to the second embodiment described above, when a special symbol jackpot is won in a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), the special symbol that wins the jackpot It is configured such that a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set during the symbol determination period. When the game state is set to the potential state, an operation pattern is set in which the period (opening standby time) from when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 until the first attacker 650 is released is short. Since the game is configured to be easy to play, the game (RUSH game) that allows the player to increase the number of winning balls to the small attacker 4650 per unit time ends when the special symbol confirmation period ends. is executed until

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, the period for determining the special symbol is configured to differ depending on the type of jackpot won. Therefore, if the player wins a jackpot type in which the special symbol is decided for a long time, the period during which the RUSH game can be executed can be extended, resulting in a jackpot that is advantageous to the player.

Here, in each of the embodiments described above, the stop display mode of the third symbol to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is changed depending on whether the game content during the jackpot game is advantageous to the player or not. It is configured to be set depending on the size of the privilege (number of prize balls) that can be given to the player during the jackpot game and whether or not the gaming state set after the jackpot game is advantageous to the player. For example, if the player wins a jackpot that is advantageous to the player, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set to the same odd number (for example, "777"), and it is not advantageous to the player (disadvantageous). ) When a jackpot is won, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set to the same even number (for example, "222").

On the other hand, in the present tenth embodiment, as a stop display mode of the third symbol, whether or not the game content during the jackpot game described above is advantageous to the player (which can be given to the player during the jackpot game) is determined. In addition to whether the size of the bonus (number of prize balls) and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is advantageous to the player, it also depends on whether the length of the symbol confirmation period is advantageous to the player. It is configured to be set accordingly.

With this configuration, by understanding the stop display mode of the third symbol, you can control the RUSH game executed before the jackpot game, the jackpot game, the game state set after the jackpot game, and the three game contents. You can play the game while making predictions. In this case, for example, if the period during which the RUSH game is executed (symbol confirmation period), the game content of the jackpot game, and the gaming state set after the jackpot game are all contents that are advantageous to the player. It is preferable to provide a stop display mode (for example, "VVV") of the third symbol that is set only for the third symbol. This allows the player to play the game while giving him or her a sense of satisfaction.

Further, the stop display mode of the third symbol may be configured to be changed at every predetermined timing. For example, when the special symbol stops changing, it indicates that the lottery result of the current special symbol is a jackpot. Among the stop display modes, a stop display mode (for example, "222") that indicates a jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player is set, and then "777" is set during the symbol confirmation period (during a RUSH game), and a "777" is set during a jackpot game. The stop display mode of the third symbol may be changed so as to gradually show "VVV" that the player has won a jackpot advantageous to the player.

With this configuration, it is possible for the player to watch the performance displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 while expecting that the stop display mode of the third symbol will change. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop display mode of the third symbol is set by combining the sizes of multiple benefits given to the player based on the jackpot winning, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each benefit is The sizes may be displayed in different ways.

For example, the type of the stop display symbol (number) of the third symbol is set according to the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, and the size of the third symbol is varied and set according to the game content during the jackpot game. However, the color of the third symbol may be changed and set depending on the length of the symbol determination period. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the details of the game to be executed in the future.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment, when the potential state is set as the gaming state during the symbol confirmation period, an efficient RUSH game is executed, but the normal state is set during the symbol confirmation period. In other words, if the game state is the normal state or the time saving state and a jackpot is won, an inefficient RUSH game is executed. Therefore, when setting the stop display mode of the third symbol based on the length of the symbol confirmation period, the stop display mode of the third symbol that is set based on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is variable. It is best to configure the configuration so that Thereby, it is possible to inform the player of the contents of the game to be executed in the future in a more understandable manner.

After the display shown in FIG. 268(a) is displayed, when the symbol determination period begins, the display screen shown in FIG. 268(b) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 268(b), during the period when the RUSH game is being executed, "in the chance zone" is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the remaining period display mode is displayed to show the remaining period of the symbol confirmation period. ``30 seconds remaining'' is displayed. This remaining period display mode is configured such that the number of seconds displayed is updated according to the elapsed time, and notifies the player of the remaining period of the chance zone (symbol confirmation period). Further, a comment "Aim for the small attacker" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to indicate the game content during the chance zone (during the symbol confirmation period).

The number of seconds displayed in this remaining period display mode may be set to indicate the entire remaining period when entering the chance zone, or a period (in seconds) shorter than the set pattern confirmation period. It is also possible to set the new number of seconds to be added to the number of seconds displayed in the remaining period display mode as time passes. In addition, it is set to indicate a period (seconds) shorter than the set symbol confirmation period, and after the set period has elapsed, the remaining period display mode is set to "? seconds", and the remaining period is displayed to the player. It is okay to make it so that the person does not know.

Further, in the tenth embodiment, the remaining period display mode is set to show the remaining period of the symbol confirmation period in seconds, but it is difficult to make the player understand that the remaining period is decreasing. Any form is acceptable as long as it is possible; for example, the remaining period may be indicated using an animation until the character 811 is captured by the enemy, or the period until a container containing liquid is emptied may be used. It may be configured to indicate the remaining period. In this way, by using an animation that shows the course of the story rather than the number of seconds, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the remaining period.

<About the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the tenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 269 to 273. The tenth embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the contents of the RAM 203 are different. The other electrical configurations are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 269 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 269, in the tenth embodiment, the small hit random number table 202b, small win type selection 2 table 202ab, and loss type selection table 202ad are deleted from the ROM 202 in the second embodiment described above. , a second winning random number table 202ia is provided in place of the second winning random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is provided in place of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa, and a new specific ball entry motion pattern table 202ic is added. There is a difference.

The second winning random number 10 table 202ia is a second winning random number table 202ia that is determined as a winning in a state where the low probability state of the normal symbol is set for the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 15(c)). The difference is that the range of the random number counter C4 is different, and the rest is the same, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Here, the contents specified in the second winning random number 10 table 202ia will be explained with reference to FIG. 270. FIG. 270 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the second winning random number 10 table 202ia. As shown in FIG. 270, in this second winning random number 10 table 202ia, there are 231 random numbers that result in a win for the normal symbol in the low probability state (normal state, potential state) of the normal symbol as the gaming state. , the range is "0 to 230". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, the total number of random numbers that become a win is 231, so the probability of a normal symbol winning is "231/233".

On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol (variable probability state, time saving state), there are 232 random numbers that will be a hit for the normal symbol, and the range is "0 to 231". The total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second winning random number counter C4 is 233, and the total number of random numbers that become a win is 232, so the probability of a normal symbol winning is "232/233". In this way, in the tenth embodiment, the random number value for winning the normal symbol is configured to have a high probability (231/233) even for the low probability state of the normal symbol.

By configuring in this way, even if the game state is set to a low probability state of normal symbols (normal state, potential state), the game state is set to a high probability state of normal symbols (variable probability state, time saving state). state), it is possible to make it easier to win in a normal symbol lottery. In addition, since it is configured so that the probability of winning is slightly higher in the high probability state of normal symbols than in the low probability state of normal symbols, the high probability of normal symbols is higher than the low probability state of normal symbols. It is structured so that the situation is more advantageous. Furthermore, the release pattern of the specific accessory 4640a that is executed in the winning game that is executed when a winning is won is in a high probability state of a normal symbol than when it is won in a low probability state of a normal symbol. Since an opening pattern is set in which the ball is more likely to enter the specific ball entrance 4640 if the player wins, the high probability state of the normal symbol is more advantageous than the low probability state of the normal symbol. There is. In addition, the opening pattern of the specific ball opening 4640 that is executed in a winning game with a normal symbol is not the state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) when winning in a lottery with a normal symbol, but in a winning game. It may be configured to be set according to the state of the normal symbol (high probability state, low probability state) at the time of execution.

The jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib is a data table for selecting the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, and is similar to the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa of the second embodiment described above. A plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the one-win type counter C2.

Here, the contents of the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 271. FIG. 271 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib. In addition, the same elements as those defined in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa used in the second embodiment described above (for example, time saving counter 203f, special figure 1 confirmed time counter 203ad) are given the same reference numerals. The detailed explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 271, in the jackpot type selection 10 table 202ib, a plurality of jackpot types are defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2, and for each jackpot type, a time saving counter 203f is set. The value set in the fixed time counter 203ad, the setting status of the probability change flag 203g, and the value set in the fixed time counter 203ad are defined.

Specifically, for the jackpot type (jackpot A1 to jackpot A3) of jackpot A in which a round game of 15 rounds is executed, the time saving counter 203f is set regardless of the gaming state when it is selected (when the jackpot is won). It is specified that a value of "10000" is set, and it is specified that the probability change flag 203g is set to on. In other words, when jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is selected as the jackpot type, a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) will be set until the next jackpot is won. stipulated. In addition, in the present tenth embodiment, in order to continue the high probability state of the normal symbol until the next jackpot is won, the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to "10000", but this is not limited to this. Instead, for example, a flag that is set on until the next jackpot is won may be used.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is specified that "5 seconds" is set for jackpot A1, "60 seconds" for jackpot A2, and "150 seconds" for jackpot A3, and the first winning type obtained Jackpot A1 is defined in the range of "0 to 19" for the value of counter C2 (0 to 99), jackpot A2 is defined in the range of "20 to 23", and jackpot A3 is defined in "24". In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to jackpot A (jackpot A1 to A3) is executed in 25% of cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and in 80% of them (20/ 25) is defined as jackpot A1, 16% (4/25) as jackpot A2, and 4% (1/25) as jackpot A3.

In other words, in the tenth embodiment, even if the player wins a jackpot in which the most advantageous jackpot game (15 rounds of jackpot game) is executed, the period (symbol If a short symbol determination period is selected as the determination period), the period during which the potential state game (RUSH game) is executed will be shortened. Therefore, in the lottery of special symbols, the player can pay attention not only to whether or not there is a big hit, but also to the length of the symbol confirmation period, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Although the tenth embodiment uses a configuration in which the symbol confirmation period is defined in association with the jackpot type, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lottery for selecting the jackpot operation content (jackpot type) is used. The lottery for selecting the symbol confirmation period may be configured to be executed independently. In this case, since a plurality of symbol confirmation periods can be combined for a plurality of jackpot types, it is possible to provide a gaming experience that is difficult for the player to predict.

Next, similar to the jackpots A1 to A3 described above, jackpots B1 to B3, jackpots C1 to C3, and jackpots D1 to D3 are defined, respectively.

Specifically, for jackpot B (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3) in which the game content of the jackpot game (5 round game) is set that is more disadvantageous to the player than jackpot A, when selected (jackpot B1 to jackpot B3), The time saving counter 203f is set to a value of ``10000'' when the gaming state is a normal state (a low probability state with normal symbols), and a value of ``10'' is set when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state. It is specified that the probability change flag 203g is set to on.

In other words, if jackpot B is won, a jackpot game that is more disadvantageous than jackpot A will be executed, but if the time saving state or variable probability state is set as the gaming state, the player will not be able to play after the jackpot game ends. It is stipulated to be able to provide a state in which an advantageous gaming state can be set (a high probability state of special symbols until the next jackpot, and a gaming state where the high probability state of normal symbols ends after 10 special symbol fluctuations). There is. Therefore, jackpot A and jackpot B are jackpots in which jackpot A is more advantageous in terms of the jackpot game content, but jackpot B may be more advantageous as a game state set after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is specified that "30 seconds" is set for jackpot B1, "90 seconds" for jackpot B2, and "120 seconds" for jackpot B3, and the acquired first winning type Jackpot B1 is defined in the range of "25 to 29" for the value of counter C2 (0 to 99), jackpot B2 is defined in the range of "30 to 44", and jackpot B3 is defined in the range of "45 to 49". There is.

In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to jackpot B (jackpot B1 to B3) is executed in 25% of cases where a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, and in 20% of them (5/ 25) is the jackpot B1, 60% (15/25) is the jackpot B2, and 20% (5/25) is the jackpot B3. Here, to explain the symbol confirmation period that can be set in the case of jackpot A and the symbol confirmation period that can be set in the case of jackpot B, the maximum value of the symbol confirmation period is longer for jackpot A than for jackpot B. However, it is specified that the average value of the symbol confirmation period set for jackpot B is longer than that for jackpot A.

In this way, there is a jackpot type (high risk high return) where the maximum value of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is large but the average value is small, and a jackpot type where the maximum value of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is small but the average value is large. (low-risk low return), and by configuring the symbol confirmation period to be set based on the selected jackpot type, the pattern confirmation period that is set is better than setting the symbol confirmation period completely randomly. This can make the player think that there is some kind of rule. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the tendency of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is different depending on the major type of jackpot (Jackpot A to Jackpot C), but it is not limited to this, and The jackpot A to jackpot C) may be configured to include a high risk high return symbol fixed period selection group and a low risk low return symbol fixed period selection group. In addition, even though the average value (expected value) of the symbol determination period that can be set is the same, from among a plurality of symbol determination period selection groups in which the maximum value and minimum value of the symbol determination period that can be set are different, The player may be configured to be able to select a desired symbol confirmation period selection group, and the symbol confirmation period selection group selected by the player may be used to set the symbol confirmation period.

Returning to FIG. 271, the explanation will be continued. As described above, in this embodiment, the percentage of jackpot types (jackpot A1 to jackpot B3) in which the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON after the end of the jackpot game, the so-called probability variation jackpot, is selected is 50% (50/100) of the total. For the remaining 50%, a jackpot type in which the probability variable flag 203g is set to OFF after the jackpot game ends, a so-called normal jackpot, is selected.

Specifically, for the jackpot C (jackpot C1 to jackpot C3) in which the same jackpot game game content (15 round game) as the jackpot A described above is set, when selected (when the jackpot is won) It is specified that the time saving counter 203f is set to a value of "50" regardless of the gaming state, and the probability change flag 203g is specified to be set to OFF.

In other words, if jackpot C is won, a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is executed like jackpot A, but the high probability state of the special symbol is not set after the jackpot game ends, and the time saving state is set 50 times. is stipulated to be set. Therefore, jackpot C is a jackpot game that is more advantageous to the player than jackpot B described above, but the game state set after the jackpot ends is a jackpot that is more disadvantageous than jackpot A and jackpot B described above. It is a type.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is specified that "5 seconds" is set for jackpot C1, "60 seconds" for jackpot C2, and "150 seconds" for jackpot C3, and the acquired first winning type A jackpot C1 is defined when the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "50 to 54", a jackpot C2 is defined in the range of "55 to 64", and a jackpot C3 is defined in the range of "65 to 74". There is.

In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to jackpot C (jackpot C1 to C3) is executed in 25% of cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and in 20% of them (5/ 25) is the jackpot C1, 40% (10/25) is the jackpot C2, and 40% (10/25) is the jackpot C3. Here, jackpot C is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot A in the types of symbol confirmation periods that can be set (5 seconds, 60 seconds, 150 seconds), but the selection ratio is specified to be different, and the above-mentioned jackpot C is It is stipulated that the average value (expected value) of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is higher than that for jackpot A. As a result, jackpot C is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than jackpot A in terms of the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game ends, but jackpot C is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than jackpot A in terms of the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game ends. This is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than A.

Finally, for the jackpot D (jackpot D1 to jackpot D3) where the same jackpot game game content (5 round game) as the jackpot B described above is set, the game state when selected (when the jackpot is won) It is specified that the time saving counter 203f is set to a value of ``50'' regardless of the value, and the probability change flag 203g is specified to be set to OFF.

In other words, if jackpot D is won, a jackpot game disadvantageous to the player is executed like jackpot B, and after the jackpot game ends, a gaming state disadvantageous to the player is set like jackpot C. has been done. Therefore, jackpot D is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player among the above-mentioned jackpot types.

Furthermore, as the symbol confirmation period of the special symbol, it is specified that "30 seconds" is set for jackpot D1, "90 seconds" for jackpot D2, and "120 seconds" for jackpot D3, and the first winning type obtained A jackpot D1 is defined when the value of the counter C2 (0 to 99) is in the range of "75 to 84", a jackpot D2 is defined in the range of "85 to 94", and a jackpot D3 is defined in the range of "95 to 99". There is.

In other words, in the tenth embodiment, the jackpot operation corresponding to jackpot D (jackpot D1 to D3) is executed in 25% of cases where a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery, and in 40% of them (10/ 25) is defined as a jackpot D1, 40% (10/25) as a jackpot D2, and 20% (8/25) as a jackpot D3. Here, the jackpot D is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot B in the type of symbol confirmation period that can be set (30 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds), but the selection ratio is specified to be different, and the above-mentioned jackpot D is the same as the jackpot B described above. It is stipulated that the average value (expected value) of the symbol confirmation period that can be set is lower than that for jackpot B.

In this way, the jackpot D is the jackpot type that is most disadvantageous to the player in terms of the jackpot game content, the game state set after the jackpot game ends, and the symbol confirmation time in which the RUSH game is executed.

The specific ball entering motion pattern table 202ic is a data table that defines the contents of the opening motion of the small attacker 4650 that is executed when a ball enters the specific ball entering opening 4640, The time until the ball enters the ball (release waiting time) and the content of the release operation of the small attacker 4650 are defined according to the value of the first winning type counter C2 and the gaming state at the time the ball enters the ball.

Here, with reference to FIG. 272, the contents defined in the specific ball entry motion pattern table 202ic will be explained. FIG. 272 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the specific ball entry motion pattern table 202ic. As shown in FIG. 272, in the tenth embodiment, the same operation content of the small attacker 4650 is defined regardless of the gaming state, and it depends on the gaming state and the value of the first winning type counter C2. The opening waiting time is specified to be different depending on the situation.

Specifically, the operation content of the small attacker 4650 is set to an opening operation in which the opening/closing door 4650a of the small attacker 4650 is opened once, and the opening operation is performed until the opening time reaches 1.5 seconds or This continues until the number of winning balls reaches 10. The ending period in which the opening operation ends and the opening/closing door 4650a is in the closed state is set to 0.5 seconds.

Next, the gaming state is the normal state, the first win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 89", "normal 1" with an open waiting time of 20 seconds is defined, and the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "90 to 98". , "Normal 2" with an open standby time of 2 seconds is defined, and "Normal 3" with an open standby time of 0.5 seconds is defined as a value of "99". In addition, when the gaming state is a time saving state or a variable probability state, and the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 39", "time saving 1" with an open waiting time of 10 seconds is defined, and "40 to 89" is defined. "Time saving 2" with an open standby time of 5 seconds is defined in the range "90 to 99", and "Time saving 3" with an open standby time of 2 seconds is defined in the range "90 to 99". Further, when the gaming state is a potential state and the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 89", "potential 1" with an opening waiting time of 0.5 seconds is defined, and "90 to 97" is defined. ``Potential 2'' with an opening waiting time of 0.2 seconds is defined in the range ``Potential 2'' with an opening waiting time of 0.2 seconds, and ``Potential 3'' with an opening waiting time of 2 seconds is defined in the value of ``98 to 99''.

In this way, in the tenth embodiment, the release waiting time is configured to vary greatly depending on the gaming state, and when the normal state is set as the gaming state, the ball hits the small attacker 4650. Even if a ball enters the ball, the number of balls held by the player will not increase. On the other hand, if the game state is set to the potential state, the small attacker 4650 will frequently release the ball, so the number of balls held by the player will not increase. You can increase the number of balls.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 273. FIG. 273 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the RAM 203 in the tenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 273, the RAM 203 of the tenth embodiment has a second special symbol execution area 203b, a special symbol 2 jackpot flag 203i, a small hit Flag 203k, special pattern 2 fluctuation time counter 203n, special pattern 2 fluctuation stop flag 203s, regular pattern short fluctuation flag 203t, winning counter 203u, probability variation counter 203aa, special pattern 2 symbol confirmed flag 203ac, special pattern 2 confirmed time counter 203ae The difference is that a variable probability flag 203g, a specific ball entering flag 203ia, and a specific ball entering invalid flag 203ib are added. Note that other elements are the same as the RAM 203 of the second embodiment described above, so the same reference numerals are given and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted. Moreover, since the probability change flag 203g has the same contents as the RAM 203 (see FIG. 21) of the first embodiment described above, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The specific ball entering flag 203ia is a flag for indicating that a ball has entered the specific ball entry port 4640, and is set to ON when it is determined that a ball has entered the specific ball entry port 4640. It is something. This specific ball entering flag 203ia indicates that a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 in the specific ball entering process (see S196 in FIG. 278) executed in the timer interrupt process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 274). If it is determined that this has been done (S11501 in FIG. 278: Yes), it is set to ON (see S11505 in FIG. 278).

Then, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276), it is determined whether it is set to ON (see S496 in FIG. 276), and if it is determined that it is ON (see S496 in FIG. 276). S496: Yes), a process is executed in which the lottery result of the first special symbol to be executed this time is forcibly set as a loss (see S412 in FIG. 276). Next, it is set to OFF when the specific ball entering motion is completed.

In this way, the tenth embodiment is configured such that the small attacker 4650 is opened when a ball enters the specific ball entry opening 4640, and the specific entering ball is used to open the small attacker 4650. When the operation scenario is set, a process is executed in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is forced to be a loss so that it does not become a jackpot. This eliminates the possibility of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol during the period when the small attacker 4650 is released, so it is possible to prevent the operation of releasing the small attacker 4650 from being executed redundantly. . Furthermore, in order to bring the variable ball entry means (small attacker 4650, second variable winning device 650), which is normally in a state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter (closed state), into a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter (open state). It is possible to prevent these controls from being executed simultaneously (overlappingly).

The specific ball entering invalid flag 203ib is for indicating a period (specific ball entering invalid period) in which the operation of opening the small attacker 4650 is not performed when a ball enters the specific ball entering opening 4640. This is set to ON when a specific pitch invalidation period is set.

This specific entry invalid flag 203ib is set when it is determined in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277) that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is set to ON (S801 in FIG. 277: Yes). ), is set to on (see S892 in FIG. 277). Then, in the specific ball entering process (S196 in FIG. 278), the setting status is determined (S11502 in FIG. 278), and if it is determined that the specific ball entering invalid flag 203ib is set to on (S11502 in FIG. 278: (Yes), the process for setting the specific ball entering motion scenario (S11504 in FIG. 278) is skipped. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the opening operation of the small attacker 4650 based on a ball entering the specific ball entry opening 4640 during the period when the jackpot game is being executed.

<About control processing in the tenth embodiment>
Here, the control processing in the tenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 274 to 278. In the tenth embodiment, the configuration of the second special symbol is deleted and the configuration of the specific ball entrance 4640 is added to the second embodiment described above, so that the content of the control process to be executed also changes. , is different in that the control process related to the lottery (discrimination) of the second special symbol is deleted, and the control process executed when the ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 is added. Further, the control processing is different due to the difference in the control processing described above.

Specifically, instead of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) of the main controller 110 in the second embodiment described above, timer interrupt processing 10 (see FIG. 274) is replaced with special symbol variation processing 2 (see FIG. 97). Special symbol fluctuation processing 10 (see S195 in FIG. 275) is performed instead of S154), and first special symbol jackpot determination processing 10 (S395 in FIG. 276) is performed instead of first special symbol jackpot determination processing 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98). ), the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (see S296 in FIG. 277) is executed instead of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99), and the specific ball entry process (see S296 in FIG. 278) The difference is that S196) is added. Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition to the above-mentioned content, the specific content of the control process (for example, the process content regarding the second special symbol variation) may be changed in accordance with the configuration of the tenth embodiment, but the above-mentioned content may be changed. With respect to the parts other than those mentioned above, the difference is simply that the corresponding process has been deleted, and a person skilled in the art can easily figure it out, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 274, the contents of timer interrupt processing 10 executed by MPU 201 of main control device 110 will be explained. FIG. 274 is a flowchart showing details of the timer interrupt processing 10. In the tenth embodiment, the subroutine of special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) is executed in place of special symbol variation processing 2 (S154) in response to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) in the second embodiment. The difference is that the subroutine of the specific ball entering process (S196) is executed. Since the other processes are the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt process 10 is executed, similar to the timer interrupt process described above, the processes of S101 to S103 are executed, and then the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) is executed. This special symbol variation process 10 (S195) differs from the above-mentioned special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 97) in that the variation process regarding the second special symbol is deleted, and a new special symbol variation can be executed. The difference is that the processing content for determining whether or not it is possible has been changed. The detailed contents of the special symbol variation process 10 (S195) will be described later with reference to FIG. 275.

Returning to FIG. 274, the explanation will be continued. When the special symbol fluctuation processing 10 (S195) is finished in the timer interrupt processing 10, the same processing of S105 to S108 as the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation processing 2 (see FIG. 97) is executed, and then the specific incoming ball After executing the process (S196), other processes (S109) are executed, and this process ends.

Here, the specific ball entry process (S196) is a process that is executed when a ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 (see FIG. 267). Based on this, it is determined whether or not to release the small attacker 4650, or whether or not the current incoming ball is to be treated effectively, and processing is performed to perform settings based on the determination result. Specifically, details of the specific ball entering process (S196) will be described later with reference to FIG. 278.

Next, with reference to FIG. 275, the contents of the special symbol variation process 10 in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 275 is a flow diagram showing the control contents of special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) in the tenth embodiment. When this special symbol variation processing 10 (S195) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a jackpot or a specific ball hitting (S295). In the process of S295, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203o is set to on, it is determined that the current jackpot is in progress, and if it is determined that the specific ball hitting flag 203ia is set to on, It is determined that the current ball is being entered by a specific ball.

In the process of S295, if it is determined that the current gaming state is a jackpot or a specific ball being hit (S295: Yes), the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation process 2 of the second embodiment (see S154 in FIG. 97) The same processes as S202 and S203 are executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S295, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not a jackpot or a specific ball hitting (S295: No), the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation process 2 of the second embodiment (S154 in FIG. 97) The same processes as S204, S205, S206, and S251 are executed.

Then, in the process of S251, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is not set to on (set to off), the first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is executed. , this process ends. This first special symbol variation start process 10 (S297) is the first special symbol variation start process (S208 in FIG. 33) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see S154 in FIG. 97) in the second embodiment described above. The difference is that the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is executed instead of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see S306 in FIG. 34). Since the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (see S395 in FIG. 276) is otherwise the same, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In addition, in the process of S206, if it is determined that the value of the special figure 1 fluctuation time counter 203m is 0 (S206: Yes), or in the process of S251, the special figure 1 symbol confirmed flag 203ab is set to ON. If it is determined that it is (S251: Yes), the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (S296) is executed, and this processing is ended.

Next, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) will be explained with reference to FIG. 276. FIG. 276 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395). In this first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395), in contrast to the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above, the current state is a high probability state of the special symbol. The special symbol 2 The difference is that a specific incoming ball flag 203ia is referred to instead of the jackpot flag 203i. The other elements are the same, and the same reference numerals are omitted for the same elements, and detailed explanations thereof will be given later.

When this first special symbol jackpot determination process 10 (S395) is executed, first, the same process as S401 is performed as the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above. Then, it is determined whether the probability change flag 203g is set to on (S495). If it is determined in the process of S495 that the probability change flag 203g is set to on, the current lottery result is determined based on the first random number table 202a for high probability winnings because the current state is a high probability state of special symbols. (S403).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S495 that the probability change flag 203g is not set to on, the current state is a low probability state of special symbols, so the current winning probability is determined based on the first random number table 202a for low probability times. The lottery result is acquired (S404). Next, when the process of S403 or S404 described above is finished, it is determined whether the specific ball entering flag 203ia is set to on (S496), and if it is determined that it is set to on (S496: Yes), That is, if it is determined that a ball enters the specific ball entry opening 4640 and a specific ball entry action is being executed, the process (S407 to S410) based on the judgment of the special symbol being executed (jackpot judgment) is skipped. However, after executing the process of S412, which is the same as the first special symbol jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) of the second embodiment described above, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S496, if it is determined that the specific ball entering flag 203ia is not set to on (set to off) (S496: No), the first special symbol of the second embodiment described above The same processes of S406 to S410 as the jackpot determination process 2 (see S356 in FIG. 98) are executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 277, the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (S296) will be explained. FIG. 277 is a flowchart showing the contents of the first special symbol variation stop processing 10 (S296). This first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (S296) is different from the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 of the second embodiment (see S257 in FIG. 99) by deleting the update processing regarding the probability change counter 203aa, Addition of control to set a status command according to the settings of the time saving counter 203f and probability change flag 203g, and some changes to the contents of the process executed when the first jackpot flag 203h is set to on. They differ in that they did so.

Specifically, when the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 10 (S296) is executed, first, S851, which is the same as the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above, is executed. - Execute the processing of S854. Also, in the process of S853, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 confirmation time counter 203ad is not 0 (is 1 or more) (S853: No), the first special symbol fluctuation of the second embodiment described above is stopped. The same fixed time processing (S860) as processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) is executed.

When the process of S854 is finished, next, a status command is set according to the setting status of the time saving counter 203f and the setting status of the probability change flag 203g (S891), and then it is indicated that the confirmation period of the first special symbol has ended. A special figure 1 fixed period end command is set for the purpose (S858). After that, it is determined whether the special chart 1 jackpot flag 203h is set on (S801), and if it is determined that it is set on (S801: Yes), the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is set on. (S892), and sets a specific ball entry invalidation command to indicate that the specific ball entry invalidation flag 203ib is set to on (S893). The commands set here are sent to the audio lamp control device by external output processing (S2201) of the main processing of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 52), similar to commands set in other control processing of the main control device 110. 113. By receiving the specific ball entry invalidation command, the audio lamp control device 113 determines a period in which the specific ball entry operation is not executed even if a ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640, and based on the determination result, the third ball entry operation is not performed. The display mode displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 can be variably set.

When the process of S893 is finished, the process of S805 and S807, which is the same as the first special symbol variation stop process 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above, is then executed, and this process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, a process (S894) is provided between the process of S805 and the process of S807 to set the special drawing 1 jackpot flag 203h and the probability variable flag 203g to OFF, but the process of S894 is , Since the target of the process executed on the probability variation counter 203aa in the first special symbol variation stop processing 2 (see S257 in FIG. 99) of the second embodiment described above is simply changed to the probability variation flag 203g, the details thereof Further explanations will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 278, the contents of the specific ball entering process (S196) will be explained. FIG. 278 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific ball entering process (S196). This specific ball entry process (S196) is executed by the timer interrupt process 10 (see FIG. 274) which is repeatedly executed every 2 milliseconds by the main controller 110, and is performed in the specific ball entry port 4640. Various processes are executed when it is determined that the ball has entered the ball.

Specifically, when the specific ball entry process (S196) is executed, first, it is determined whether a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501). In the process of S11501, determination is performed with reference to the detection result of a detection switch (not shown) for detecting that a ball has entered the specific ball entry opening 4640. In the process of S11501, if it is determined that there is no ball hitting the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501: No), this process is directly ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S11501, if it is determined that the ball has won (entered) the specific ball entrance 4640 (S11501: Yes), then it is determined whether the specific ball entry invalid flag 203ib is set to on. (S11502), if it is determined that it is set to on (S11502: No), that is, the current period is a period in which the specific ball entering operation based on the ball hitting the specific ball entering opening 4640 is not executed. If there is, this process ends. In the process of S11502, if it is determined that the specific ball entering invalid flag 203ib is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S11502: No), then based on the specific ball entering movement pattern table 202ic, , determines the current specific ball entering pattern (S11503).

Here, the contents executed in the process of S11503 will be explained. As described above with reference to FIG. 272, the specific ball entering motion pattern table 202ic includes a plurality of specific ball entering patterns (specific entering ball patterns) corresponding to the acquired value of the first winning type counter C2 and the current gaming state. In the process of S11503, the current gaming state is read from the gaming state information stored in the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203, and the value of the first winning type counter C2 is set. By acquiring this, the current specific ball entry pattern is determined.

After completing the process of S11503, next, a specific ball entering motion scenario corresponding to the determined specific ball entering pattern is set (S11504), and the specific ball entering flag 203ia is set on (S11505). Then, a specific ball entering command is set to indicate that it is a period in which a specific ball entering motion scenario is set (S11506), and the process ends.

As explained above, in the tenth embodiment, since the specific ball entry opening 4640 is provided that opens the small attacker 4650 when a ball enters the ball, the This makes it easier to keep an eye on the flow of water.

In addition, the period (waiting period) from when a ball enters the specific ball entry port 4640 until the small attacker 4650 is released is set to the game state set at the time the ball entered the specific ball entry port 4640. Since it is configured to vary depending on the gaming state, it is possible to set a state in which it is easy to open the small attacker 4650 and a state in which it is difficult to open it. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the currently set gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, similar to the second embodiment described above, during the period in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed (design confirmation period), the game It is configured such that an advantageous gaming state (potential state) advantageous to the player is set, and when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 while this advantageous gaming state is set, other The opening operation is configured such that the period (waiting period) from when a ball enters the specific ball entrance 4640 to when the small attacker 4650 is opened is shorter than when the game state is set. There is.

As a result, the period from when the special symbol jackpot is won and the symbol (special symbol, third symbol) to show the lottery result is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game starts, that is, the player receives the jackpot. A special game in which the small attacker 4650 can be opened frequently can be executed during the period from when the winning is announced until the jackpot game actually starts.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, during the period in which the third symbol indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is stopped and displayed (design confirmation period), the small attacker 4650 is in a gaming state where it is easy to release (potential probability). Although the configuration is such that a gaming state (potential state) in which the small attacker 4650 is easy to release may be set at a timing other than this, for example, the above-mentioned As in the first embodiment, the setting may be made while the special symbol is being displayed while changing to indicate that the jackpot has been won, or as in the sixth embodiment, the round game may be set after the jackpot game has started. It may be set in the period until it is executed (the opening period of the jackpot game). Furthermore, it may be set to only any one of the above-mentioned periods, or may be set to a combination of a plurality of periods.

Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, a special game that can frequently release the small attacker 4650 may be executed before notifying the player that the current lottery result is a jackpot. good. With this configuration, since the special game is executed, it is possible for the player to predict that a jackpot game will be executed after the special game ends, so that the interest in the game can be improved. .

In addition, when the special game and the jackpot game are configured to be executed consecutively as in the tenth embodiment, at least a part of the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is It is preferable to configure a series of performances that straddle special games and jackpot games. In this case, for example, information regarding the period during which the special game can be executed, that is, the length of the symbol confirmation period set this time, information regarding the game content (number of rounds) of the jackpot game, and the game to be set after the jackpot game ends. It is preferable to set the presentation mode of the above-mentioned series of presentations based on the information regarding the state. As a result, future execution will be based on the game content (game content of special games, game content of jackpot games) to be executed while the series of performances is being displayed, and the performance content of the series of performances currently being displayed. It becomes possible for the player to predict the content of the game.

In addition, if the configuration is such that the jackpot game is executed continuously after the special game ends as in the tenth embodiment, the special game and the jackpot game are notified to the player as one jackpot game. You may also set a presentation mode. By configuring in this way, the content of the jackpot game in the performance can be a combination of the setting content of the special game and the setting content of the jackpot game, so the game content of one jackpot game can be set in a variety of ways.

In addition, in the present tenth embodiment, a configuration is used in which the jackpot game is executed when the fixed display period of the special symbol indicating a jackpot winning ends (passes); however, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the special symbol is The configuration is such that a jackpot game is executed when the ball passes through a specific area after the fixed display period has passed, and the period from when the fixed display period of the special symbol has passed until the ball passes through the specific area is configured so that the jackpot game is executed. It may be configured to set a gaming state (potential state) in which the small attacker 4650 is likely to open during the period.

<About the modification of the tenth embodiment>
Here, a modification of the tenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. 279. In this modification, in contrast to the tenth embodiment described above, a starting gate 670 is provided at a position through which a ball flowing down the left side area of the game board 13 (the left side area of the variable display unit 80 when viewed from the front) can pass. The difference is that the positions of the specific ball entrance 4640 and the small attacker 4650 are varied. The other configurations are the same as those in the tenth embodiment, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the tenth embodiment described above, when a special symbol wins the jackpot, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period set as a variable display period, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special symbol is displayed in a specified period set as a symbol confirmation period. It was configured so that the jackpot game was executed after a period of stoppage was displayed. On the other hand, in this modification, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed for a specific period set as a symbol confirmation period, and then a jackpot game is executed based on the ball passing through the starting gate 670. It is composed of

Then, during the period from when the special symbol is stopped and displayed until the jackpot game is executed, that is, the period that is the sum of the symbol confirmation period and the starting period until the ball passes through the starting gate 670 after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed. , an advantageous gaming state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player is set.

According to this modified example configured in this way, it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player for a period other than a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the advantageous gaming state will continue for a longer period of time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, the ball fired in order to execute a special game in which the small hit attacker 4650 wins a ball, that is, the ball fired in a left-handed game, can pass through the position. A starting gate 670 is provided at. This makes it possible to prevent the special game from being played without the ball passing through the starting gate 670 during the starting period described above.

Furthermore, in this modification, the time from when the ball passes through the starting gate 670 until the second variable winning device 650 becomes open due to the jackpot game is longer than the time from when the ball passes through the starting gate 670 to when the second variable winning device 650 becomes open. The configuration is such that the time required to reach . As a result, when the ball that has passed through the starting gate 670 reaches the second variable winning device 650, it is possible to open the second variable winning device 650, so that jackpot games can be played efficiently. can.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 279, in this modification, the downward direction of the ball is changed by a plurality of nails installed in the game board 13, and the downward direction of the ball passes through the starting gate 670. Since the ball is configured so that it passes through the starting gate 670 when the ball is varied in the direction, it is difficult for the player to understand how long the starting period will last, and the playing area of the game board 13 is This was able to make players interested in the flow of individual balls flowing down, but since the direction of the ball's flow varied irregularly due to the multiple nails, the starting period continued for a long time. In some cases, it ended immediately.

Therefore, in the game area of the game board 13, in an area where the balls can flow down toward the starting gate 670, the ball can be distributed in a regular manner so that the down direction of the balls can be distributed into the first direction and the second direction. A dividing means is provided, and the balls that flow down the other flow path (flow path in the second direction) are directed toward the starting gate 670 than the one flow path (flow path in the first direction) that is distributed by the distribution means. It may be configured so that it flows down easily.

With this configuration, it is possible to give a predetermined regularity to the flow of balls flowing down the game area of the game board 13, so that the balls immediately pass through the starting gate 670 during the starting period. It is possible to prevent the situation from occurring.

<About the modification of the seventh embodiment>
Next, a modification of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 284. In the seventh embodiment described above, a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 by one winning game of the second symbol (normal symbol), and the V winning device 650 is opened during the small winning game. It is configured such that whether or not the ball passes through a specific area 650V within the area can be set.

On the other hand, in this modification, in addition to the configuration of the seventh embodiment described above, the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 and the small The difference is that it is possible to set whether or not a ball passes through a specific area 650V in a V winning device 650 that is opened during a winning game. Further, the configuration is such that a maximum of four values of the second winning random number counter C4 that can be obtained by passing through the through gate 67 can be stored in abeyance. Note that the detailed configuration and control contents for suspending and storing the second winning random number counter C4 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, so detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 280, the content of the performance unique to this modified example that is executed by using the configuration of this modified example will be explained. FIG. 280 schematically shows an example of a revival effect that is executed when the second symbol (normal symbol) is won consecutively and the ball can pass through the specific area 650V in the V winning device 650. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 280, when the revival effect is executed, the character 811 is revived from the losing effect in the in-race effect described above using FIG. 202(a), and a winning effect is executed. During this revival performance, a performance is performed in the main display area Dm in which the character 811 runs at a high speed, flying away the rival character 860 and the goal of the race performance. Here, the conditions for performing the revival effect will be briefly explained. In this modified example, a predetermined winning game is executed while the time saving state is set, and immediately after that (in the next general drawing lottery executed without any pause), the normal state is set. When a specific winning game is executed, a ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 by the winning game executed earlier, and a small prize is won in the special drawing 2 lottery executed based on the entering ball. During a small winning game, the ball that flows into the second passage 660b (see FIG. 195) due to the next winning game is configured to pass through the specific area 650V, and such a situation does not occur. In other words, the result of the consecutive Fuzu drawing lots (the result of determining the Fuzu winning information included in the Fuzu lottery) is a specific winning result, and each winning result is If the game state when a winning game based on the above is executed satisfies a predetermined condition, and furthermore, a ball flows into the second passage 660b in at least the next (second) winning game among consecutive winning games, the above-mentioned A revival performance will be performed.

In this way, by providing a game result advantageous to the player (a state in which a ball passes through a specific area 650V during a small winning game) based on a plurality of lottery drawings, it is possible to provide a surprise to the player. It is possible to provide a game with a lot of content, and it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game. Further, by making it possible to perform a surprising performance (resurrection performance) in correspondence with the above-mentioned unexpected game, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 281, the electrical configuration provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of this modification will be described. Note that this modification is a modification of the seventh embodiment described above, and the basic electrical configuration is the same as that of the seventh embodiment. Here, only the configuration different from the seventh embodiment described above will be explained, and other explanations will be omitted. FIG. 281(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the second random number 11 table for high probability 202ja, and FIG. 281(b) is the second random number 11 table for low probability. 202jb is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents specified in the standard.

As shown in FIG. 281(a), the high probability second winning random number 11 table 202ja is referred to when determining the validity of the second symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol. In the normal symbol variation process 7 (see S192 in FIG. 219) of the seventh embodiment, in the process for acquiring the lottery result (see S805 in FIG. 219), the currently set gaming state is the high probability state of the normal symbol. Referenced in certain cases.

This high probability second winning random number 11 table 202ja is different from the seventh embodiment described above in that the second winning type (normal pattern winning type) is increased. Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is set to be within the range of "80 to 98". It should be noted that regarding the second winning type of normal pattern per A and normal pattern per B, the only difference is the corresponding range of the value of the second random number counter C4, and the rest is the same as in the seventh embodiment described above. Therefore, detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, the selected second winning type (normal pattern winning type) is set so that the content of the winning movement to be executed differs depending on the gaming state set at the timing when the winning movement is performed. .

The winning operations of A per ordinary symbol and B per ordinary symbol, which are executed in a state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, are the same as those in the seventh embodiment described above, so they will be omitted, but they will be omitted. The winning action is as follows: the opening period is 0.1 seconds, the opening period is 2.5 seconds, and the ending period is 1 second, and one ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 during the opening period. A winning action is performed in which the opening period ends.

In other words, in the seventh embodiment described above, by setting the ending period to be longer than the time (3 seconds) required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b, based on the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 due to one regular symbol, While the ball flowing down to the second passage 660b based on other normal winnings during the executed small winning game does not pass through the specific area 650V, the normal winning of this modification example In the winning game (winning action) corresponding to C, the ending period is set (0.1 seconds) shorter than the time required for the ball to pass through the second passage 660b (3 seconds), and the normal game that is executed immediately after. The ball flowing into the second passage 660b based on the result of the drawing lottery is configured to be able to pass through the specific area 650V during the small winning game.

Specifically, when the special drawing 2 lottery is executed by the winning operation based on the winning of C per common drawing, the next general drawing drawing becomes possible 0.1 seconds after the start of the special drawing 2 drawing, and the next If you win A in the normal drawing lottery, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 3640 in the shortest time (1.3 seconds) during that normal drawing A, you will win the previously executed normal drawing C. The ball will flow into the second passage 660b 1.4 seconds after the start of the special drawing 2 lottery based on .

In such a case, if the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery executed by the winning operation based on the winning of the C winning on the regular symbol is a small win, and the small winning game is executed, during the small winning game, the It is possible to create a state in which the ball that flows into the second passage 660b based on the winning A can pass through the specific area 650V.

As explained above, in this modification, by winning a predetermined winning type (A, B per general pattern) immediately after winning a specific winning type (C per general pattern), multiple winnings can be made. It is possible to provide an advantageous gaming state to the player (ball passage to the specific area 650V during the small winning game) by the special drawing 2 lottery executed across the 2nd lottery and the ball flowing down to the second passage 660b. .

The second random number 11 table for low probability 202jb is referred to when determining the validity of the second symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and is used in the normal symbol variation processing 7 of the seventh embodiment described above. In the process of acquiring the lottery result (see S805 in FIG. 219) (see S192 in FIG. 219), this is referred to when the currently set gaming state is a low probability state of normal symbols.

This low probability second winning random number 11 table 202jb is different from the seventh embodiment described above in that different common power operation patterns are defined according to the second winning type (normal pattern per type). There is. Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is set in the range of "0 to 19". If you win A on this common map and the game state when executing the winning action is a low probability state, you will win a winning game with an opening period of 0.1 seconds, an opening period of 1 second, and an ending period of 0.1 seconds. is specified to be executed.

Moreover, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is defined as "20", which is the average winning number B. If you win this common pattern B and the game state when executing the winning action is a low probability state, a winning game with an opening period of 2 seconds, an opening period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds will be executed. The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is defined as "21", and the average winning number C is defined as "21". If you win this common pattern C and the game state when executing the winning action is a low probability state, a winning game with an opening period of 2 seconds, an opening period of 0.2 seconds, and an ending period of 3 seconds will be executed. It is specified that A "miss" is defined for the value of the second winning random number counter C4 in the range of "22 to 99".

Here, if the low probability state of the normal symbol is set and the normal symbol is won, the winning game will cause the electric power to run only for a period of time during which the ball cannot enter the second ball entrance 3640. Although the accessory 3640a is configured not to be released, the opening period of the electric accessory 3640a is set to be long (1 second) only in the winning game based on A per common figure. When this one-second opening period is set, the ball flows down over the electric accessory 3640a and flows down to a position facing the second passage 660b (see FIG. 198).

Then, when the open period has elapsed for one second, the electric accessory 3640a enters the closed state, and the ball flows into the second passage 660b and flows down toward the outlet 66 as it is. In addition, in the normal state, since a ball does not enter the second ball entry port 3640, the V winning prize device 650 is never opened.

In this way, in a winning game executed in a low probability state of normal symbols, the operation pattern (normal electric operation pattern) of the electric accessory 3640a is varied according to the second winning type (normal symbol winning type) that is set. By varying the paths through which the balls flow down, for example, it becomes possible for the first variable winning device 65, which is opened during a jackpot game, to win a prize with balls that have passed through a plurality of flow paths. , it becomes possible to win multiple balls at once.

Furthermore, in this modification, a winning game based on C per ordinary symbol is executed in a state where the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set, and immediately after that, the low probability state of the ordinary symbol is set and the winning game is set to A per ordinary symbol. When the corresponding winning game is executed, the ball that flows down the second passage 660b due to the winning game corresponding to the winning game A in the low probability state is based on the winning game C executed during the high probability state. It is configured such that the player can pass through a specific area 650V during a small winning game executed.

As a result, it is possible to execute a jackpot game based on a small win game even though the state has once shifted to the low probability state of normal symbols, so it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player. At the same time, it is possible to motivate the players to play the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 282, the details of the control process executed by the main control device 110 in this modification will be described. FIG. 281 is a flowchart showing the through gate passage process 11. This through gate passing process 11 is performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, in contrast to the through gate passing process (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above. The difference is that processing is executed to determine (predict) the game result in advance based on the values of various counters.

When through-gate passage processing 11 (S157) is executed, first, the same processes of S1901 to S1905 as the through-gate passage processing (see S107 in FIG. 49) executed by the seventh embodiment described above are executed, and then, Based on the counter value stored in the process of S1905, the success or failure of the normal symbol lottery and the type of winning of the normal symbol are predicted (S1951). Then, a winning information command for ordinary winnings including information indicating whether the prediction is correct or not and the type of winning for ordinary winnings is set (S1952), and the present process is ended.

In addition, the detailed content of the processing executed in S1951 and S1952 is that the target of processing in S1707 and S1708 of the starting winning process (S105 in FIG. 47) executed for special symbols is replaced with normal symbols. Therefore, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 283 and 284, the content of the control process executed by the audio lamp control device 113 in this modification will be described. FIG. 283 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 11. This command determination process 11 is performed in contrast to the command determination process 7 (see S4182 in FIG. 226) executed by the seventh embodiment described above, in which a command ( The difference is that a process for determining that the Fuzutsu winning information command) has been received (see S12051) and a process to be executed when the Fuzuzu winning information command is received (see S12052) are added, and other than that. are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 283, if it is determined that the winning information related command (winning information command, general drawing winning information command) has been received (S12051: Yes), based on the received winning information command (normal drawing winning information command) The winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223b (S12010). Here, the winning information storage area used in this modification is configured such that the received winning information can be stored in the reserved ball storage area of the normal symbol as well as the reserved ball storage area of the special symbol. Then, when the process of S12010 is finished, a general drawing effect setting process (S12052) is executed, and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 284, the contents of the ordinary drawing effect setting process (S12052) will be explained. The normal symbol performance setting process (S12052) determines each piece of information stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (see FIG. 21) based on the received common symbol winning information command, and determines whether a specific condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied, processing for specifying that the special effect can be performed is executed.

When the Fuzu presentation setting process (S12052) is executed, first, it is determined whether the winning-related information received this time is the Fuzu winning information command (S13001), and if it is the Fuzu winning information command, the command is It is determined whether information indicating a high-accuracy/normal map hit C is included (S13002). In the process of S13002, if it is determined that the information indicating a high-certain common map winning C is included (S13002: Yes), the common map C winning flag is set on (S13003), and this process ends.

This popular map C winning flag is set to ON when information (command) indicating a high-accuracy popular map winning C is received, and is set to OFF when the next popular map winning information command is received. It is something that Thereby, it is possible to determine the common symbol winning information command received next to the common symbol winning indicating a high sure common symbol winning C.

On the other hand, in the process of S13002, if it is determined that information indicating C for a high probability common map is not included (S13002: No), it is determined whether information indicating A for a low probability common map is included ( S13004), and if it is determined that it is not included (S13004: No), the common map C winning flag is set to OFF (S13007), and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S13004 that information indicating a low-probability common map win A is included (S13004: Yes), it is determined whether the common map C winning flag is set to on (S13005), and the flag is turned on. If it is determined that it has been set (S13005: Yes), special performance enable information is set in the corresponding general figure winning information (S13006), the general figure C winning flag is set to OFF, and this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S13005 that it is not set to on (S13005: No), this process is directly ended. As a result, it is possible to predict in advance that a low-probability common map hit A will be executed next to a high-probability regular map hit C, and a special effect can be set according to the prediction result.

In addition, as in this modification, when providing benefits that are advantageous to the player by spanning the high probability state and low probability state of the normal symbol, for example, the number of small wins (small winnings) It is preferable that the high probability state of the normal symbols is terminated based on the number of times the game is executed. As a result, the first general drawing lottery is executed with high probability, and the second special drawing drawing is executed by the winning game, and a small winning is won. Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the timing when the small winning game is executed.

Since the high probability state of the normal symbol is still set at the timing when the special figure 2 lottery is executed, the next common symbol lottery is executed in the high probability state. Then, after the variable time has elapsed when winning a small hit in the special drawing 2 drawing, the winning game based on the next general drawing will be executed after the start timing of the small winning game to be executed. Set the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation in the probability state. With this configuration, it is possible to easily execute a winning game based on the next general drawing lottery using an operation pattern with a low probability state.

<Modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 285 to 296. Among the above-mentioned embodiments, in the embodiment using the technical idea of the first embodiment, in the state where the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, the first When a jackpot is won in the special symbol (special symbol 1) lottery, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is set to be a potential state, and when the potential state is set, the second special symbol ( By making it easier to execute the special drawing 2) lottery, it was configured to make it easier to execute the small winning game.

In the embodiment configured in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a game in which a small winning game frequently occurs (so-called RUSH game) using the period during which the jackpot is fluctuating in the special drawing 1. Since it is possible to continuously provide players with a plurality of different bonus games (RUSH games, jackpot games), it is possible to make players more motivated to aim for jackpot winnings, and the game can improve the interest of

Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, in order to prevent the jackpot winnings of the special symbols from being duplicated and excessive benefits being given to the player, The special drawing 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation of the jackpot is configured so that no jackpot is won. As a result, even if the special drawing 2 lottery is executed a plurality of times during the fluctuation of the special drawing 1 jackpot, the jackpot of the special drawing 2 will not be won. Therefore, the period from the end of the jackpot variation of special figure 1 until the start of the jackpot game (the jackpot variation period of special figure 1) can be set as the RUSH game period.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, it is specified that there is a range in the length of the variable time (60 seconds at the shortest and 600 seconds at the longest) that can be set when winning the jackpot of special drawing 1 ( (See FIG. 19(b)), in a state where the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, if the jackpot of special drawing 1 is won, that is, if the RUSH game is executed, FIG. 7(a) As mentioned above, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to stop displaying the performance symbol 813 for indicating the current jackpot fluctuation period. Then, the effect pattern 813 that is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the jackpot variation of the special pattern 1 starts according to the variation time of the special pattern 1 set this time and the type of the won jackpot is displayed. It was configured so that the aspect could be varied.

In this way, by having the third symbol display device 81 stop displaying the production symbol 813 and configuring it to suggest the length of the set special symbol fluctuation time instead of determining the validity of the special symbol lottery, the player On the other hand, the display mode of the symbols stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 could make the player more interested, and the presentation effect could be enhanced.

However, in the performance of the first embodiment described above, at the time when the jackpot fluctuation of special figure 1 starts (when the RUSH game starts), the length of the current RUSH game period and the time to be executed after the RUSH game ends are determined. Since the content of the jackpot game that will be played is suggested to the player, there is a risk that the player's desire to play during the RUSH game may be reduced depending on the content of the suggestion. Specifically, for example, a jackpot in which a short fluctuation period (for example, 60 seconds) is set as the RUSH period (special figure 1 fluctuation period), and the winning jackpot type is more disadvantageous to the player than other jackpot types. If it is a type (for example, jackpot D), by understanding the display mode of the stopped display pattern 813, it can be determined that the current jackpot winning of special drawing 1 is a lottery result that is not very advantageous to the player. As a result, there is a problem in that the game becomes less interesting during the RUSH period.

Here, if the display mode of the production symbol 813 is configured so that there is no correlation between the length of the RUSH game period and the content of the jackpot game executed after the RUSH game ends, the above-mentioned problem will not occur. However, it is not an effective countermeasure because the fun of predicting the future game development (RUSH game period and jackpot game content) based on the display mode of the performance symbols 813 is lost.

On the other hand, in a modified example of the fourth embodiment, based on the special pattern 2 lottery executed during the variation period of the special pattern 1, the lottery results of the special pattern 1 (variation time, jackpot game content) , a game state set after the end of a jackpot game) is configured to execute a suggestion performance that suggests a game state. The presentation mode of the suggestion presentation is configured to be varied depending on the result (whether or not there is a hit) of the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the variation period of the special drawing 1 and the number of times.

By configuring in this way, the more the special figure 2 lottery is executed during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1, the easier it is to predict the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is fluctuating. Players can be motivated to execute the special drawing 2 lottery during the period.

Furthermore, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, a RUSH game is executed by the special drawing 2 lottery during the fluctuation period of the special drawing 1 in which the potential state is set. Because of this configuration, it is possible to execute the special drawing 2 lottery more enthusiastically during the fluctuation period of the special drawing 1.

Note that the modification of the fourth embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment using the configuration of the first embodiment in that a part of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed, and the execution The difference is that the mode of presentation is changed, and other elements are the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

<About the production content in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 285 and 286, a characteristic effect executed in the modification of the fourth embodiment will be explained. In a modification of the fourth embodiment, during the RUSH game period (during the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation period in which the potential state is set), the current special drawing 1 jackpot lottery is based on the lottery of special drawing 2. The configuration is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that a suggestion effect for suggesting a result is executed.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the suggestion performance, a performance that suggests to the player the jackpot game content corresponding to the won jackpot type and the gaming state to be set after the jackpot game ends is configured to be executed. ing. Then, in order to show the lottery result of the special figure 2, the display mode of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the special figure 2 display area Dm2 of the third symbol display device 81 and the combination of numbers can be changed, and the combination of numbers can be changed. The system is configured to perform a suggestive performance by varying the performance mode of a RUSH performance (a performance in which a performance pattern 813 is displayed from a treasure box 812) indicating the result of the special drawing 2 lottery.

Next, an example of actual production content will be explained. Here, 110 seconds is set as the jackpot variation time of special drawing 1, 15 rounds of round games are executed as a jackpot game, and after the jackpot ends, a probability variation state that is advantageous to the player is set. An example of winning the 15R (probable change)) will be explained. FIG. 285(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small winning is won during the RUSH period, and FIG. 285(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a small winning is won during the RUSH period. It is a figure showing an example of a display screen.

As shown in FIG. 285(a), in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the remaining time of the current RUSH game period is displayed on the display screen of the first embodiment described above (FIG. 7(b)). They are different in that they are configured to display a remaining time display 851 to show the number of small wins to be won during the current RUSH game period, and a small win count display 825 to show the number of times small wins have been won during the current RUSH game period. . The same elements (display contents) are denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 285(a) shows the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 10 seconds after the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the remaining time display 851 shows "100 seconds". The value obtained by subtracting the 10 seconds that have already passed from the variable time of 110 seconds is displayed, and "1" indicating that the number of small wins won during the RUSH gaming period is 1 is displayed in the small win number display 825. There is. In addition, since the value of the small win count display 825 is configured to be updated (added by 1) at the timing when the small win game starts, the state shown in FIG. 285(a) is already 1 This shows a state in which the second small win is won (stopped and displayed) while the second small win game is being executed.

Next, the presentation contents regarding the suggestive presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 286(b). FIG. 286(b) shows a display screen when the lottery result of special drawing 2 is a loss. In this symbol 286(b), "95 seconds" is displayed as the remaining time display 851. In addition, in this modification, as in the first embodiment described above, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is not subtracted during the period in which the small winning game is being executed, so that the variation time shown in FIG. 286 ( The state shown in b) is a state in which 5 seconds have elapsed since the small winning game ended from the state shown in FIG. 286(a) described above. Therefore, the value of the small win count display 825 is increased by 1 and is displayed as "2" compared to FIG. 286(a).

As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the display mode (the display mode of the third symbol or the production symbol 813) for showing the lottery result of the special symbol 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period is used. The system is configured to suggest to the player the result of the special drawing 1 lottery that is currently being displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 285(b), as a suggestion display mode, the stop display mode of the third symbol (kanji character 285(b)) or the effect pattern 813 displayed from inside the treasure box 812. A gorgeous display mode is displayed.

In this way, by configuring the display format to indicate the lottery result of special map 1 using the display mode to indicate the lottery result of special map 2, the lottery result of special map 2 and the lottery result of special map 1 can be , can be determined based on the display mode of one symbol, so it is possible to make the player more interested in the display mode of the symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, although the details will be described later, the system is configured such that as the remaining period of the RUSH game period decreases, a presentation mode that makes it easy to distinguish the lottery result of special drawing 1 becomes more likely to be set as a suggestion mode. Therefore, in any period during the RUSH game period, by executing the special symbol 2 lottery, the player can be motivated to play the game in order to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol 1 in advance.

Next, the presentation contents of the jackpot content suggestion presentation will be explained with reference to FIG. 286. As described above with reference to FIG. 285, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the symbol (third symbol or production symbol 813) for indicating the result of the special symbol 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period is The display mode is configured to display a suggestion display mode that is changed according to the lottery result of the special figure 1 that is being displayed in a variable manner. In addition to this, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, if a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the lottery result of special drawing 2 executed during the RUSH game period (for example, the number of small winnings has reached 10) case), the jackpot content suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of special drawing 1 is configured to be executed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds).

As a result, the player will enthusiastically execute the special drawing 2 lottery while expecting that the jackpot content suggestion performance will be executed during the RUSH game period, so that the performance of the game can be improved.

Here, we will explain the specific content of the performance. FIG. 286(a) is a diagram showing an example of display content displayed during the jackpot content suggestion production, and FIG. 286(b) is an example of display content in which the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion production is displayed. FIG. In FIG. 286(a), “10” is displayed as the small win count display 825. Then, in order to notify the player that the number of small wins reaching 10 is the execution timing (establishment condition) of the jackpot content suggestion effect, the display format of the small win number display 825 is changed to the normal display format ( A highlighting mode different from that shown in FIG. 285(b)) is displayed.

Furthermore, when the jackpot content suggestion production is executed, the next jackpot notice 865 is displayed at the lower left of the main display area Dm as a notification mode for notifying the game of the summary of the production currently being executed, and the main display area Dm , three treasure boxes (treasure box 812, treasure box 860, and treasure box 870) are displayed. Of these three treasure boxes, the treasure box 812 is used to display the effect pattern 813 for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing 2, as described above with reference to FIG. 285.

Then, the treasure box 860 indicates to the player whether or not the gaming state after the end of the next jackpot (after the end of the jackpot based on the special figure 1 that is currently being fluctuated and displayed) is advantageous to the player. It is used for the purpose of notification), and is displayed in a display format with the character ``certain'' added to indicate this. In addition, the treasure box 870 is used to suggest (inform) the player about the contents (number of rounds, etc.) of the jackpot game to be executed next time, and is marked with the letter "R" to indicate this. It is displayed in the display mode shown below. As a result, even if multiple treasure chests are displayed in the main display area Dm, the player can easily understand which treasure chest suggests (informs) what, providing an easy-to-understand performance. can do.

In the sub-display area Ds, the message "RUSH in progress" is displayed to indicate that the current RUSH game period is in progress, and the comment "Open the box with the power of V" is displayed to guide the jackpot content suggestion performance. be done. In addition, as shown in FIG. 286(a), this jackpot content suggestion performance is performed independently of the performance for indicating the lottery result of special drawing 2 (the performance using the treasure box 812). During the period when this jackpot content suggestion production is being executed, the jackpot content suggestion production is displayed with priority (emphasized) over the production to show the lottery result of special drawing 2. There is. Specifically, the treasure boxes (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the presentation suggesting the jackpot content are displayed in a larger display format than the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the presentation for showing the lottery result of special drawing 2. It is configured so that With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the player pay close attention to the jackpot content suggestion performance.

Then, when the timing to show the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion performance is reached, as shown in FIG. 286(b), the treasure box 860 and the treasure box 870 are opened, and a display mode showing the content of the next jackpot is displayed from inside. In the example shown in FIG. 286(b), the treasure box 860 opens and the word "Lucky" is displayed as the game state suggestion display 861, and the treasure box 870 opens and the word "odd number" is displayed as the round number suggestion display 871. Ru.

Further, the performance results of the jackpot content suggestion performance executed during one RUSH game period are displayed as a history in the suggestion history display 880. In this modification, the execution condition for the jackpot content suggestion performance can be satisfied multiple times during one RUSH game period, and the reliability of the suggestion content increases as the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion performance increases. It is configured so that the lottery results are higher (so that players can easily understand the actual lottery results).

In this modified example configured in this way, by using the suggestion history display 880 to display the performance results of the jackpot content suggestion performance as a history, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player. In addition, this suggestion history display 880 has multiple stages of display modes ("cross mark", "triangle mark", "circle mark") based on the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion performance and the actual special drawing 1 lottery result. Since the structure is configured to display the results of the jackpot content suggestion performance in a variety of ways to prevent players from getting bored with the performance early, the performance is easy to understand as a history. Results can be announced.

In addition, in this modification, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 is configured to be variable in accordance with the performance result of one jackpot content suggestion production, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, The suggestion history display 880 may be configured to have a specific display mode only when a plurality of jackpot content suggestion performances are executed during the RUSH game period and each performance result is a specific combination. With this configuration, even if the first jackpot content suggestion performance is a performance result that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a performance result that suggests a jackpot with a small number of rounds played), the next time's The player can be made to play the game enthusiastically so that the jackpot content suggestion performance is executed.

Details will be described later, but the display contents (display format) showing the performance results of this jackpot content suggestion performance include a strong suggestion display that is easy for the player to predict, a weak suggestion display that is harder to predict than the strong suggestion display, is configured to be set based on the lottery result of special drawing 1, the display mode of the suggestion history display 880 (the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion production that has already been executed), and the number of executions of the jackpot content suggestion production. The configuration is such that the selection ratios for strongly suggestive displays and weakly suggestive displays are different. Furthermore, only when a specific condition is met, the system is configured to execute a performance that confirms the content of the next jackpot or a special performance that is different from the suggestion of the content of the jackpot.

By configuring this way, even for players who have almost determined the content of the next jackpot based on the jackpot content suggestion performance that has already been executed, the player is motivated to continue fulfilling the conditions for establishing the jackpot content suggestion performance. You can play games.

In addition, in this modification, the treasure box (treasure box 812) used for the presentation to show the lottery result of special drawing 2 and the treasure box (treasure box 860, treasure box 870) used for the presentation suggesting the jackpot content are configured to be separated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may be configured such that a single treasure box is used to perform the performance for showing the lottery result of the special drawing 2 and the performance suggesting the content of the jackpot. In this case, it is preferable to configure the performance mode of the jackpot content suggestion performance to be variable so that the timing of displaying the performance symbol 813 and the timing of displaying the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion performance are different. Thereby, even if one treasure box is used, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand performance to the player, and it is also possible to make the player think that the special drawing 2 lottery is being executed more often than actually.

In addition, in this modification, multiple elements (the number of round games and the game status after the end) for indicating the jackpot content are individually displayed as the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion production. The present invention is not limited to this, and only one of them may be displayed as the performance result of one jackpot content suggestion performance. In this case, the player may be configured to be able to select for which element the jackpot content suggestion effect is to be executed.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the performance results for multiple elements (the number of round games and the gaming state after the end) for indicating the jackpot content are displayed simultaneously as the performance result of the jackpot content suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be displayed at different timings. In this case, an arrangement may be made in which elements that result in a lottery result that is advantageous to the player and elements that result in a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player are discriminated, and the elements to be displayed first are determined based on the determination results. good. Specifically, it is preferable to configure the system so that elements that give a lottery result advantageous to the player are displayed later. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game so that many jackpot content suggesting effects are executed.

In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as a result of the special drawing 2 lottery during one RUSH game period, the jackpot is determined based on the number of small wins won and the number of times the special drawing 2 lottery was executed. The content is configured so that the execution conditions for the content suggestion effect are satisfied, but in addition to this, for example, the jackpot content suggestion is made to indicate that the number of times the number of winnings in the special drawing 2 lottery has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10 times). It may also be set as a performance execution condition. Thereby, even if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is a lottery result that is disadvantageous to the player (missing), it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play from decreasing. Further, the conditions for executing the jackpot content suggestion performance may be set not only based on the result of the special drawing 2 lottery during one RUSH game period, but also over a plurality of RUSH game periods. With this configuration, even after it becomes clear that the content of the next jackpot game is disadvantageous to the player, the player is motivated so that the jackpot content suggestion performance will be easily executed during the next RUSH game period. It is possible to make the player play the game.

In addition, in a modification of the fourth embodiment, a plurality of elements (the number of round games and the gaming state after the end) for indicating the jackpot content are suggested as a result of the jackpot content suggestion production. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a presentation result that combines a plurality of the above-mentioned elements may be suggested. In addition, it is configured so that the player cannot grasp the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period, and as a result of the jackpot content suggestion presentation, the remaining period of the RUSH gaming period, that is, the remaining fluctuation time of special drawing 1 is suggested. It may be configured.

<About the electrical configuration in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 289. The modification of the fourth embodiment differs from the fourth embodiment described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 are changed. Other points are the same as those in the fourth embodiment, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 287(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in a modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287(a), this embodiment is different from the fourth embodiment described above in that a suggestion mode selection table 222ja is provided and a suggestion effect selection table 222jb is provided.

The suggestion mode selection table 222ja selects the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the RUSH game that is executed when the potential state is set as the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). It is referred to when setting a suggestion mode that suggests the lottery contents (jackpot game contents, game state set after the end of the jackpot game) of special drawing 1 during jackpot fluctuation using the production mode to indicate the lottery result. This is a data table.

Here, the contents defined in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja will be explained with reference to FIG. 288. FIG. 288 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion mode selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 288, the suggestion mode selection table 222ja corresponds to the value of the acquired special figure 2 variation counter 223jb, the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc. Accordingly, a plurality of suggested modes are specified to be selected.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the types of suggestion modes specified in the suggestion mode selection table 222ja are "normal" in which no suggestion mode is set, and "normal" in which the suggestion mode is weak, that is, when the player selects the special drawing 1 lottery. ``Weak suggestion'', in which it is difficult to distinguish the lottery result (jackpot content), and ``strong suggestion'', in which it is easier for players to distinguish the lottery result (jackpot content) of the special drawing 1 lottery than in ``weak suggestion''. If "Normal" is selected as the suggestion mode, the normal presentation mode (see FIG. 285(a)) is displayed as the presentation mode for indicating the lottery result of the special drawing 2 lottery.

In addition, if "weak suggestion" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, it is not possible for the player to specifically determine the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery, but whether the lottery result is advantageous for the player? A presentation mode (see FIG. 285(b)) indicating whether or not the item is selected is displayed. Furthermore, if "strong suggestion" is selected as the suggestion mode, for example, the suggestion mode is such that the player can specifically distinguish the lottery result of the special drawing 1 lottery (for example, it indicates the lottery result of the special drawing 2 The number of rounds to be executed in the winning jackpot game and the suggestion mode with identification information to indicate the gaming state to be set after the end of the jackpot game are displayed in the presentation mode for the game. . In this way, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, since one type is selected from a plurality of suggestion mode types having different degrees of suggestion using the suggestion mode selection table 222ja, the RUSH game period The player can be motivated to play the game by displaying the suggested mode multiple times.

To specifically explain the provisions for the plurality of suggestion mode types mentioned above, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is "1 to 5" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is If it is "within 10 seconds", "normal" is defined regardless of the value range of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc, and if the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", the acquired "Normal" is defined when the value of the suggestive effect counter 223jc is in the range of "0 to 89", and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". If the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined regardless of the range of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

In addition, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is "6 to 39" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter ``Normal'' is defined as the value of 223jc in the range of ``0 to 59'', ``Strong suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``60 to 89'', and ``Weak suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``90 to 99''. ing. In addition, when the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", "normal" is in the range of "0 to 89" and "weak suggestion" is in the range of "90 to 99" for the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value. ” is stipulated. When the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "normal" is defined as the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value in the range of "0 to 59" or in the range of "90 to 99", and "60 to 99" is defined as "normal". ``Weak suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``-89''.

In addition, if the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb is "40 or more" and the remaining time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p is "within 10 seconds", the acquired suggestion effect counter "Normal" is defined as a value of 223jc in the range of "0 to 59", and "strongly suggestive" is defined as in the range of "60 to 99". In addition, when the remaining time information is "11 seconds to 90 seconds", "weak suggestion" is in the range of "0 to 89" and "weak suggestion" is in the range of "90 to 99" for the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value. "Strong" is specified. When the remaining time information is "91 seconds or more", "strong suggestion" is defined regardless of the value of the acquired suggestion effect counter 223jc value.

As described above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, according to the specified contents of the above-mentioned suggestion mode selection table 222ja, the larger the value of the special symbol 2 variation counter 223jb, the more the lottery of the special symbol 1 during jackpot variation. Since the contents can be made easier for the player to understand, the player can be made to perform the special drawing 2 lottery as many times as possible.

Furthermore, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is "1 to 5" and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p indicates that the remaining time is within 10 seconds, the suggestion mode is configured so that it is not selected. In other words, when the RUSH game is being executed, if the number of special drawing 2 drawings is small and the remaining time is short, it is possible that the RUSH game is not being actively played, so the jackpot will be executed later. In order to prevent the content of the game from being easily suggested to the player, the suggestion mode is configured to be difficult to select. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enthusiastically execute the special drawing 2 lottery in order to quickly grasp the lottery result of the special drawing 1 which is currently changing.

In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the more the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb during the RUSH game period increases, the easier it is for the player to identify the suggestion mode to be selected. ing. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game more enthusiastically.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion mode is selected based on the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb and the information of the remaining time storage area 223p, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the rate at which the suggestion mode is selected may be changed according to the lottery result of the special drawing 1 which is changing. ), the suggestion mode may be configured to be more likely to be selected than when winning a jackpot type (for example, jackpot D) that is more disadvantageous to the player than jackpot A. In addition, in this case, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is less than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 39), the proportion of suggestion modes selected is the same (including similar concepts with some errors), It is preferable to configure the ratio at which the suggestion mode is selected when the value is larger than a predetermined value (for example, 39) to be different. With this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game more enthusiastically.

Furthermore, in this modification, the suggestion mode is displayed to suggest the content of the next jackpot game to the player based on the displayed content, but the suggestion is not limited to this. The frequency at which the mode is displayed is varied depending on the winning type of jackpot (jackpot game to be executed), and the content of the next jackpot game is suggested to the player depending on how many times the suggestion mode is displayed. It may be configured.

This suggestion mode selection table 222ja is used for the suggestion mode setting process (Fig. 295 When the suggestion mode is selected, the display mode corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern of special figure 2 and the selected suggestion mode type is set (see S5392 in FIG. 295). (See S14204). As a result, when the variation pattern of the corresponding special figure 2 is a loss, the display mode of the symbol (third symbol, production pattern 813) indicating that the lottery result of the special symbol 2 is a loss is changed to the selected suggestion. Since the display can be varied and displayed in a display mode that corresponds to the mode, it is possible to provide the player with notification of the lottery result of special drawing 2 and a suggestion of the lottery result of special drawing 1 at the same time. can.

Returning to FIG. 287(a), the explanation will be continued. The suggestion production selection table 222jb is configured to select the second special symbol (special symbol 2) during the RUSH game that is executed when the potential state is set as the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). When the lottery result satisfies predetermined conditions, it is referred to when setting a suggestion effect that suggests the lottery contents (jackpot game contents, game state set after the jackpot game ends) of special drawing 1 during jackpot fluctuation. It is a data table.

Here, with reference to FIG. 289, the contents defined in the suggestive effect selection table 222jb will be explained. FIG. 289 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the suggestion effect selection table 222jb. As shown in FIG. 289, the suggestion effect selection table 222jb is based on the value of the obtained small win counter 223cc, the suggested information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and the winning result in the special drawing 1 lottery. It is specified that a plurality of suggestion effects are selected in correspondence with the information indicating the type of jackpot and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the types of suggestion effects specified in the suggestion effect selection table 222jb include "failure" in which the suggestion effect is not executed, and "failure" in which the suggestion effect is weak, that is, when the player selects the special drawing 1 lottery. ``Weak suggestion'', in which it is difficult to distinguish the lottery result (jackpot content), and ``Strong suggestion'', in which it is easier for players to distinguish the lottery result (jackpot content) of the special drawing 1 lottery than in ``weak suggestion''. In contrast, there is a "confirmation" that notifies the lottery result (jackpot content) of the special drawing 1 drawing, and a "bonus effect" that is executed when the lottery result of the special drawing 1 drawing has already been notified to the player. It stipulates that there is a ``pounding performance,'' which is an inciting performance that does not include any content.

This suggestion effect selection table 222jb is used when it is determined in the small win related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) that the execution condition for the suggestion effect (the number of small win wins is a multiple of 10) is satisfied (see FIG. 292). S4753: Yes) In the suggested effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) to be executed, if it is determined that the remaining time of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or more (S14102 in FIG. 293: Yes), the suggested effect is executed. (S14106 in FIG. 293).

If "failure" is selected as the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect is executed (although the display screen of FIG. 286(a) is displayed), but this is a failed effect in which the effect ends without opening the treasure chests 860, 870. is executed. In other words, an effect is performed that does not suggest the lottery result of special drawing 1 to the player. When "weak suggestion" or "strong suggestion" is selected as the suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 286(b), the treasure boxes 860 and 870 are opened as a result of the suggestion effect and the lottery result of special drawing 1 is drawn from inside. Comments (gaming status suggestion display 861, number of rounds suggestion display 871) that suggest (jackpot content) appear. The content of this comment is variably set in accordance with the type of suggestion performance selected as the suggestion performance.

In addition, when "confirm" is selected as the suggestion effect, an effect in which a comment notifying the lottery result of the special drawing 1 appears from the treasure boxes 860, 870 is executed as a result of the suggestion effect. Note that this modification is configured such that "confirm" is selected as the suggestion effect only when the lottery result is most advantageous to the player.

Further, when a "bonus effect" is set as a suggestive effect, an effect that is difficult to see otherwise (for example, an effect in which a character wears a special costume and congratulates the player) is executed. Thereby, even players who have already figured out the contents of the next jackpot during the RUSH game period can be made to continue playing the game with the intention of continuing to perform the suggestive performance.

In addition, when the "pounding effect" is set as the suggestive effect, similar to the failure effect described above, the result of the effect suggesting the jackpot to the player is not displayed, but the treasure boxes 860, 870 (see FIG. 286(b) ) is executed until the opening. In this way, as a production in which the production result suggesting the jackpot content to the player is not displayed (false production), the same production mode as the production in which the production result suggesting the jackpot content to the player is displayed is performed. By making it possible to set different false effects, it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the content of the suggested effect until the end.

In a modification of the fourth embodiment, a memory is provided in which a plurality of presentation modes (comment contents displayed from each treasure box) are stored corresponding to the type of suggestion presentation mode selected using the suggestion presentation selection table 222jb. It has means (not shown), and one performance mode is set from among a plurality of performance modes stored in the storage means. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with a wider variety of suggestion performances than the number of suggestion production types defined in the suggestion production selection table 222jb. Further, the suggestion performance history displayed in the suggestion history display 880 of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the type of suggestion production mode selected using the suggestion production selection table 222jb. It is configured so that Thereby, even if a wide variety of suggestion performances are executed, the suggestion performance history can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner after the suggestion performance is executed.

To specifically explain the regulations for the plurality of suggestion production types mentioned above, if the value of the small hit number counter 223cc is "10", that is, if the execution condition of the suggestion production is satisfied for the first time during the RUSH game period, , No suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (“-”), and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is in the range of “0 to 59” regardless of the jackpot type of special drawing 1. "Failure" is defined, and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of "60 to 99".

When the value of the small win number counter 223cc is "20", if no suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small win number counter 223cc is "10". ”, if “failure” is selected in the executed suggestion effect, the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc falls within the range of “0 to 59”, regardless of the jackpot type of special drawing 1. ” is defined, “strong suggestion” is defined in the range of “60 to 89”, and “failure” is defined in the range of “90 to 99”.

On the other hand, when the suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("present"), that is, when the value of the small win counter 223cc is "10", the "suggested" If "weak" is selected, the jackpot type of special figure 1 is "A", "failure" is defined as the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is in the range of "0 to 59", and "60 to 89" is selected. "Strong suggestion" is defined in the range of , and "failure" is defined in the range of "90 to 99." In addition, the jackpot type of special drawing 1 is "B to D", "failure" is defined in the range of "0 to 89" for the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc, and "suggestion" is defined in the range of "90 to 99". "Strong" is specified.

When the value of the small win number counter 223cc is "30", if no suggested information is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ("-"), that is, the value of the small win number counter 223cc is "10". ” and “20”, if “failure” is selected in the executed suggestion effect, the jackpot type of special figure 1 is “A” and the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is “0~ ``Strong suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``59,'' and ``weak suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``60 to 99.'' Further, the jackpot type of the special figure 1 is "B to D", and "weak suggestion" is defined in the range of the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc from "0 to 99".

On the other hand, if "weak suggestion" (yes, weak) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc is "0" regardless of the jackpot type of special drawing 1. ``Strong suggestion'' is defined in the range of ``60 to 99,'' and ``failure'' is defined in the range of ``60 to 99.'' In addition, if "strong suggestion" (yes, strong) is stored as suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, the jackpot type of special drawing 1 is "A, B", and the suggestion effect counter 223jc "Failure" is defined as a value in the range of "0 to 59," "confirmed" is defined in the range of "60 to 89," and "failure" is defined in the range of "90 to 99." Further, when the jackpot type of special drawing 1 is "C, D", "failure" is defined regardless of the value of the suggestion effect counter 223jc.

Then, if the value of the small winning number counter 223cc is "40" or more and is a multiple of 10, "confirmation" is stored as the suggested information in the suggested information storage area 223ja, and the special When the jackpot type in Figure 1 is "A, B", a "bonus effect" is defined in the range of suggestion effects "0 to 99", and in all other cases, an "exciting effect" is defined. has been done.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the condition for executing the suggestion effect is that the value of the small win counter 223cc reaches a predetermined value (a multiple of 10), but other conditions may be used as the condition for executing the suggestion effect. You can also set it. In addition, this modification is configured so that the suggestion performance can be executed multiple times during one RUSH game period, and is configured so that the suggestion performance whose degree of suggestion is lower than the suggestion performance executed in the past is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player entertained with the suggestive performance until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 287(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in a modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 287(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in a modification of the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 287(b), the fourth implementation described above is provided with a suggested information storage area 223ja, a special figure 2 variation counter 223jb, a suggestion production counter 223jc, and a suggestion production in progress flag 223jd. It is different from the form.

The suggested information storage area 223ja is a data area for temporarily storing the contents of the executed suggestion effects (see FIG. 286), and is a data area for temporarily storing the contents of the suggestion effects executed during one RUSH game period. It is possible to store history. This suggested information storage area 223ja stores information indicating the suggestion effect mode selected in the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) (S14108 in FIG. 293), and is used when selecting the next suggestion effect mode. The information stored in is read out (S14104 in FIG. 293). Then, the stored information is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (timing when the jackpot game starts) (see S4692 in FIG. 291). Further, a suggestion history display 880 is displayed based on the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja.

The special figure 2 variation number counter 223jb is a counter for measuring the number of variations (number of drawings) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) executed during the RUSH game period, and is a counter for measuring the number of variations (lottery number) for the special figure 2. In process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294), if it is determined that the potential state is set (S5303 in FIG. 294: Yes), the value of the counter is updated by 1 (see S5393 in FIG. 294). The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is referred to when setting the suggestion mode to indicate the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is changing using the presentation mode to indicate the lottery result of the special figure 2 (Fig. 295 (See S14201). Then, the value of the counter is cleared at the timing when the RUSH game ends (timing when the jackpot game starts) (see S4691 in FIG. 291).

The suggestion effect counter 223jc is a counter that is referred to when selecting the above-mentioned suggestion mode or suggestion effect, and is repeatedly updated in the range of 0 to 99. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is executed. The detailed configuration is the same as the above-described production counter 223h, so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

The suggestion performance flag 223jd is a flag for indicating that the suggestion performance is being executed, and is set on while the suggestion performance is being executed. This suggestive effect flag 223jd is set to ON when the suggestive effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293) is executed (S14109 in FIG. 293). Then, it is referred to in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) (see S5391 in FIG. 294). Here, if it is determined that the suggestive effect is being performed (S5391 in FIG. 294: Yes), a special display variation pattern command is set to perform the variable effect of special figure 2 in parallel with the suggestive effect (Fig. 294, S5394). When this display variation pattern command is set, a variation effect (a presentation with a lower effect than the suggestion effect) shown in FIG. 286 is executed. Then, in the liquid crystal presentation execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296), when it is determined that it is the timing to end the suggestion presentation (S14302: Yes), it is set to off (see S14303 in FIG. 296).

<About the control process in the modification of the fourth embodiment>
Next, control processing in a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 290 to 296. In a modification of the fourth embodiment, command determination processing 11 (see S4182 in FIG. 290) is replaced with command determination processing 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) for the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above. (see S14182), jackpot related processing (see S4502 in FIG. 64), jackpot related processing 11 (see S4592 in FIG. 291), small win related processing 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156), small win related processing 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292), the variable display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (see S5195 in FIG. 294) is executed in place of the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (see S5175 in FIG. 160). In place of the management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59), the liquid crystal presentation execution management process 11 (see S4160 in FIG. 296) is executed, the suggestion effect setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 293), and the suggestion mode setting process (see S14001 in FIG. 295). The difference is that the following is added (see S5392). Otherwise, the same processing is performed. Note that the same processes are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 290, command determination processing 11 (S14182) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in a modification of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 290 is a flowchart showing the contents of command determination processing 11 (S14182). Command determination processing 11 (S14182) is different from command determination processing 4 (see S4182 in FIG. 152) in the fourth embodiment described above, in that it is determined that a hit-related command has been received from the main controller 110 in the processing of S4215. The difference is that if (S4215: Yes), the win related process 11 (S14574) is executed instead of the win related process (S4216). Other processes are the same as command determination process 4 (S4182) in the fourth embodiment, so detailed explanations will be omitted.

In addition, the winning-related processing 11 executed in S14574 is a jackpot-related process (see S4502 in FIG. 64) that is executed when a jackpot-related command is received, in place of the above-mentioned winning-related processing (S4216). The difference is that the small win related process 11 (S14574 in FIG. 292) is executed instead of the small win related process 4 (see S4574 in FIG. 156), and the other elements are Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 291, hit-related processing is one of the processes in the command determination processing 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. The jackpot related process 11 (see S4592 in FIG. 291) executed in step 11 (see S14574) will be described. FIG. 291 is a flowchart showing the contents of jackpot related processing 11 (S4592). Jackpot-related processing 11 (S4592) differs from the jackpot-related processing (S4502 in FIG. 64) in the fourth embodiment described above in that the content of the process executed when a jackpot start command is received has been changed. , otherwise the same processing is executed. Detailed explanations of elements having the same processing content will be omitted.

When jackpot related processing 11 (S4592) is executed, first, it is determined whether a jackpot start command has been received (S4601), and if it is determined that a jackpot start command has been received (S4601: Yes), a display jackpot starts. The command is set (S4602), and then the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb is cleared (S4691), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (of the suggested effects performed during the RUSH game period) is cleared. history information) is cleared (S4692), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4601, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S4601: No), the processes of S4603 to S4613, which are the same as the jackpot related process described above (S4502 in FIG. 64), are executed and the main game is completed. Finish the process.

That is, in the jackpot related process 11 (S4592), at the start timing of the jackpot, a process is executed to initialize each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game executed before the start of the jackpot. Thereby, even if the RUSH game is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to reliably prevent the performance mode during the RUSH game from being set based on information regarding past RUSH games.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, since the RUSH game is configured to be executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the special drawing 1, the end of the RUSH game and the start of the jackpot game are at the same timing. Although the initialization processing of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game is used as the start timing of the jackpot game, the timing is not limited to this, and a determining means for determining that the RUSH game has ended is provided, and the determining means is provided. If it is determined that the RUSH game has ended, the initialization process for each parameter may be executed. Furthermore, since the condition under which the RUSH game can be executed is when a potential state is set as the gaming state, the determination result of the gaming state determining means for determining the current gaming state is determined to be not a potential state. In this case, the configuration may be such that initialization processing of each parameter temporarily stored during the RUSH game is executed.

Furthermore, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the initialization process for each parameter is executed every time one RUSH game ends, but the RUSH game is restarted within a predetermined period after the jackpot game. When executed, the configuration may be such that the information (value) of each parameter can be continuously updated. Thereby, it is possible to make the player play the game with a desire to continue playing the RUSH game multiple times. In this case, an elapsed period determining means is provided for determining whether a predetermined period of time (for example, a period until the special drawing lottery is executed 30 times) has elapsed after the end of the jackpot game, and the elapsed period determining means The configuration may be such that the initialization process for each parameter is executed when it is determined that a predetermined period of time has passed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, hit-related processing is one of the processes in the command determination processing 11 (see S14182 in FIG. 290) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the fourth embodiment. 11 (see S14574), the small hit related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) will be described. FIG. 292 is a flowchart showing the contents of small hit related processing 11 (S14574). Small win related process 11 (S14574) is a process that is executed when a small win start command is received, which is different from small win related process 4 (S4574 in FIG. 156) in the fourth embodiment described above. The process is the same except for the following points. Detailed explanations of elements having the same processing content will be omitted.

When the small win related process 11 (S14574) is executed, it is first determined whether a small win start command has been received (S4701), and if it is determined that a small win start command has been received (S4701: Yes), the above-mentioned The same processes as S4741 to S4753 are executed as the small win related process 4 of the fourth embodiment (see S4574 in FIG. 156), and in the process of S4753, it is determined that the value of the small win counter 223cc is a multiple of 10. If so (S4753: Yes), a suggestion effect setting process is executed (S14001). Thereafter, a small winning start command for display is set (S4702), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S4701, if it is determined that the small hit start command has not been received (S4701: No), S4703 is the same as the small win related process 4 of the above-mentioned fourth embodiment (see S4574 in FIG. 156). The process from S4710 to S4710 is executed and the process ends.

The suggestion effect setting process executed in the process of S14001 is a process for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect. In other words, the process of S4753 described above serves as a determining means for determining whether or not the execution conditions for executing the suggestive effect are satisfied. In this modified example, the value of the small win counter 223cc is set to a predetermined value (a value that is a multiple of 10) as an execution condition for executing the suggestion effect, but other elements are set as the execution condition. For example, it may be set as an execution condition that the number of special drawing 2 drawings executed while the potential state is set is a predetermined value (for example, a value that is a multiple of 20). good. In this case, the configuration may be such that the determination is made by reading out the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 223jb.

In addition, in this modification, since the suggestion effect is configured to be set based on the number of small wins won during the potential state (during the RUSH game period), the small win related process 11 (S14574) is configured to set the suggestion effect. Although the present invention is configured to include a process (S14001), if the execution conditions of the suggestion effect are different, the corresponding process may be configured to include a suggestion effect setting process. Furthermore, when setting multiple conditions for executing a suggestive effect, if one condition for executing a suggestive effect is met, the other condition for executing a suggestive effect is set within a predetermined period (for example, the number of drawings for special drawing 2 is 5 times). It is preferable to provide a restriction means to restrict the establishment of the condition within the period until the condition is reached (or within 30 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a plurality of different suggestive performance execution conditions from being satisfied in a short period of time and to prevent suggestive performances from occurring frequently. In addition, when the above-mentioned restriction means is provided, it is preferable to vary the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation based on the order in which a plurality of suggestion presentation execution conditions are met. As a result, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the execution of the suggestion effect, but also in which conditions for executing the suggestion effect have been established, thereby further enhancing the effect of the effect. .

In addition, as an execution condition for the suggestion performance to be executed during the RUSH game period, the cumulative value of the number of drawings of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the number of small winnings, and the number of winnings that are out of stock reach a predetermined value. In addition to the cumulative value condition that can be satisfied when the winning number is reached, a consecutive winning condition that can be held when the number of consecutive winnings that have been missed reaches a predetermined value (for example, 5 times) may be set. Furthermore, an operation condition may be provided that is satisfied when a specific operation is performed on the operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by the player. This allows the player to actively operate the operating means during the RUSH game period, thereby increasing the player's desire to participate in the game. In addition, it may be configured such that the execution condition for the suggestive effect is satisfied based on the game results other than the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period, for example, the number of balls that entered the ball entrance is The number of balls that enter the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (so-called over-winning balls) reaches a predetermined number. It may be configured such that the conditions for executing the suggestive effect are satisfied when the suggested effect is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 293, the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001 in FIG. 293) executed in the small hit related process 11 (see S14574 in FIG. 292) will be explained. FIG. 293 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion effect setting process (S14001). In this suggestion effect setting process, a process for setting the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed during the RUSH game period is executed.

When the suggested effect setting process (S14001) is executed, first, the time information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p, that is, the remaining time of the RUSH game period is acquired (S14101), and the acquired time information is 5 seconds. It is determined whether the time is longer than (S14102). Here, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestive effect is executed for 5 seconds. Therefore, in the process of S14102, if it is determined that the remaining period of the RUSH game period is 5 seconds or less, the RUSH game period ends at the end timing of the suggestion performance, so a new suggestion performance is not executed. It is configured as follows.

In addition, in this modification, the time of the suggestion effect is fixed to 5 seconds, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the structure may be such that the suggestion effect is executed for a plurality of durations. In this case, first determine the performance time of the suggested performance to be executed, then determine whether the remaining period of the RUSH game period is longer than the determined performance time, and execute the suggested performance based on the determination result. It may be configured to determine the presence or absence of. Alternatively, the remaining period of the RUSH game period may be determined first, and the suggested performance may be set from among the performance times that can be executed within the remaining period.

In the process of S14102, if it is determined that the remaining time is 5 seconds or less (S14102: No), this process ends because there is no period during which the suggestive effect can be executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining time is longer than 5 seconds (S14102: Yes), then the value of the small win counter 223cc is read (S14103), and the information stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja ( The information indicating the type of suggestion effects that have already been executed during the current RUSH game period is read out (S14104), and then the lottery results of the currently executed special drawing 1 lottery stored in the winning information storage area 223b are displayed. Information (information indicating the jackpot type) is acquired (S14105).

Next, based on each piece of information acquired (read) in the processing of S14103 to S14105, the suggestion effect selection table 222jb is used to select the effect mode of the suggestion effect to be executed this time (S14106), and the selected suggestion effect mode is selected. A corresponding display suggestion effect command is set (S14107). Here, in this modification, a plurality of presentation modes are set for the suggestion presentation mode selected in the process of S14106, and in the process of S14107, a plurality of presentation modes are set corresponding to the suggestion presentation mode selected in the process of S14106. A display suggestion performance command corresponding to one performance mode is set from among the plurality of performance modes (S14107).

When the process of S14107 is finished, information indicating the currently selected suggestive presentation mode is stored in the suggested information storage area 223ja (S14108), the suggestive presentation flag 223jd is set to ON (S14109), and this process ends. do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 294, the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195) will be explained. FIG. 294 is a flowchart showing the contents of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195). This variable display setting process 11 for special figure 2 (S5195) is a process for setting a variable effect corresponding to the variation pattern of special figure 2, and is the variable display setting for special figure 2 of the fourth embodiment described above. In addition to the process of process 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160), a process of setting a display variation pattern command when a suggestion effect is being executed, and a process of setting a suggestion mode during the RUSH game period are added. are different, and otherwise are the same. The same processing contents will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

When the special figure 2 variable display setting process 11 (S5195) is executed, first, S5301 to S5351, which are the same as the special figure 2 variable display setting process 4 (S5175 in FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above, are executed. Execute processing. Then, when the process of S5351 is finished, it is determined whether the suggestive presentation flag 223jd is set on (S5391). In the process of S5391, if it is determined that the flag 223jd is not set to ON (set to OFF), that is, if it is determined that the suggestive performance is not being executed (S5391: No), The process of S5352, which is the same as the variable display setting process 4 for special figure 2 (S5175 in FIG. 160) of the fourth embodiment described above, is executed, and the process proceeds to S5392.

On the other hand, in the process of S5391, if it is determined that the flag 223jd during suggestive production is set to ON (S5391: Yes), the second special symbol (special symbol) is displayed based on the extracted variation pattern and probability mode. 2) is set as the potential variation pattern command during the display suggestion effect (S5394), and the process proceeds to S5393. In other words, during the potential state, the variable performance of the special figure 2 is configured to be set differently depending on whether the suggestive performance is being executed or not. Specifically, when the suggestion effect is not executed, the entire main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is used to execute the variable effect of the special figure 2 (see FIG. 285(a)). On the other hand, when the suggestion effect is being executed, in order to emphasize the suggestion effect, the suggestion effect is executed using most of the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81, and the remaining part is used to emphasize the suggestion effect. The variation effect shown in FIG. 2 is executed (see FIG. 286(a)).

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the most noteworthy performance in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, as described above, in this modification, the display commands set in the audio lamp control device 113 are configured to differ based on whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, , the same display command is set, and the area in which the variable effect of the special figure 2 is displayed is varied based on the display command received by the display control device 114 and whether or not the suggestive effect is executed. Also good. This reduces the control load of the audio lamp control device 113 when only the display position (size of the display mode) is to be varied without changing the content of the variable effect of the special figure 2 depending on the presence or absence of the suggestive effect. It can be easily reduced.

When the process of S5352 is finished, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, and then the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is incremented by 1 (S5393), and this process is ended. In the process of S5392, a process for setting a suggestion mode for suggesting the result of the special figure 1 lottery that is being executed (changing) using the current special figure 2 variation effect is executed.

In this modified example, as described above, the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is not executed when the suggestion presentation flag 223jd is set to on. In other words, during the period when the effect suggesting the lottery result (jackpot content) of special figure 1 is being executed by the suggestion effect, the fluctuating effect of special figure 2 is used to suggest the lottery result (jackpot content) of special figure 1. It is configured so that the performance is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a plurality of suggestive effects from occurring at the same time and providing effects that are difficult for the player to understand.

Next, the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) will be explained with reference to FIG. 295. FIG. 295 is a flowchart showing the contents of the suggestion mode setting process (S5392). When the suggestion mode setting process (S5392) is executed, first, the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 223jb is read (S14201), and the information stored in the remaining time storage area 223p (remaining fluctuation time of special figure 1) is read out (S14201). (S14202), and selects the current performance mode using the suggestion mode selection table 222ja based on the counter value read out in the process of S14201 and the stored information read out in the process of S14202 (S14203 ). Then, a display command corresponding to the set variation pattern command and the selected presentation mode is set (S14204), and the present process ends.

By configuring in this way, when setting the variable effect of the special figure 2, it is possible to set a suggestion mode for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 using the variable effect of the special figure 2, It becomes possible to notify (suggest) multiple pieces of information (lottery results for special drawing 2, lottery results for special drawing 1) to the player in one fluctuating performance, and it is possible to make the player pay close attention to the fluctuating performance. can. In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, as a suggestion mode using the variable production of the special figure 2, there is a suggestion mode in which the display mode of the production pattern 813 is varied (see FIG. 285(b)), and a suggestion mode using the variation production of the special figure 2. A stop display mode is used to show the result of the special drawing 2 lottery, such as a suggestion mode that changes the display mode (see FIG. 285(b)), but the present invention is not limited to this, and suggestions can be made using a variable display mode. You may also set the mode. For example, when the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the lottery result of special symbol 1 can be suggested by changing the color of the background, or the display mode of the treasure box 812 in which the production symbol 813 is stored can be varied. By doing so, the lottery result of the special drawing 1 may be suggested. In addition, the lottery result of special symbol 1 can be suggested using not only the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 but also the audio output device 226 and lamp display device 227 provided in the pachinko machine 10. You may do so. Specifically, the sound that is output during the period when the variable display of special figure 2 is being executed is changed, and the lighting mode of the lamp is changed during the period when the variable display of special figure 2 is being executed. By doing so, the lottery result of the special drawing 1 may be suggested.

Next, with reference to FIG. 296, the contents of the liquid crystal performance execution management process 11 (S4160) will be explained. FIG. 296 is a flowchart showing the contents of the liquid crystal performance execution management process 11 (S4160). In this liquid crystal performance execution management process 11 (S4160), the suggested performance is The difference is that a process for determining whether or not the execution period is currently being added is added, but other than that, they are the same.

To briefly explain the above-mentioned liquid crystal performance execution management process (see S4110 in FIG. 59), it is a process for constantly determining the performance period of each performance set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the update period of the performance currently being executed. Processing is performed. Specifically, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 constantly manages the timing means (timer) and the set performance scenario (current performance scenario), and ends the current performance. Processing for managing the timing and the timing of switching the presentation mode is executed.

When the liquid crystal presentation execution management process 11 (S4160) is executed, first, it is determined whether the suggestive presentation flag 223jd is set to on (S14301), and if it is determined that it is set to off (S14301: No), the process moves to S14304. On the other hand, in the process of S14301, if it is determined that the flag 223jd during suggestive performance is set to ON (S14301: Yes), it is determined whether the present timing is the end timing of the suggestive performance (S14302). If it is determined in the process of S14302 that it is the timing to end the suggestive effect (S14302: Yes), the suggestive effect flag 223jd is set to OFF (S14303), and the process proceeds to S14304. On the other hand, in the process of S14302, if it is determined that it is not the timing to end the suggestion effect (S14302: No), the process of S14303 is skipped and the process moves to S14304. In the process of S14304, other liquid crystal presentation execution management is executed (S14304), and this process ends.

To explain the process of S14302, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed for 5 seconds, and the audio lamp control device calculates the elapsed time from the timing when the suggestion effect is executed. The time measurement means of the MPU 221 of No. 113 is used to measure the time, and the determination is performed based on the measurement result. Note that processes other than those described above may be used as long as they can determine the end timing of the suggestive effect. For example, when the suggestive effect is executed, a value corresponding to 5 seconds may be set in the counting means that can count the effect time. may be set, and the end timing of the suggestion performance may be determined when the value of the counting means reaches a value indicating the passage of 5 seconds.

As explained above, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, based on the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) that is executed while the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is varying, Since it is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting (notifying) the player the lottery result of the special drawing 1, it becomes possible for the player to predict the lottery result of the special drawing 1 in advance. . Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since it is configured to execute the above-mentioned suggestive effect using a variable effect to show the lottery result of special figure 2, the lottery result of special figure 2 and the lottery result of special figure 1 are combined into one effect. Since the game can be suggested (notified) to the player, the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since the system is configured to execute the suggestion effect when the lottery result of the special figure 2 satisfies a predetermined condition, the player can be motivated to execute the special figure 2 lottery. In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the more the special drawing 2 lottery is executed, the more likely the suggestion effect is to be executed, so that the player's desire to play can be further increased.

In other words, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) that is executed while the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is changing suggests the lottery result of the special symbol 1. The system is configured to have both the role of establishing the conditions for executing the suggestive performance and the role of executing the suggestive performance. Thereby, it is possible to make the player interested in whether a suggestion effect using the variable display of the special figure 2 will be executed or whether a suggestion effect different from the variable display of the special figure 2 will be executed.

Furthermore, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, as the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation, there is a suggestion presentation (strong suggestion) in which the player can easily predict the lottery result of the special symbol 1, and a lottery result of the special symbol 1 that is better than the suggestion presentation. Since it is configured such that at least a suggestive effect whose result is difficult to predict (weak suggestion) can be set, attention can be paid to the mode of the suggestive effect. In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect can be executed multiple times during one special figure fluctuation period, and the more the number of executions of the suggestion effect increases, the more the special figure 1 lottery The configuration is such that it is easy to set a suggestion effect (strong suggestion) that makes it easy to predict the result. Thereby, the player can be motivated to play the game so that more suggestive effects are executed.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery during the special drawing 1 variation, but multiple drawings that can be executed at the same time are used. For example, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be executed based on the drawing of the normal symbol (second symbol) during the special symbol 1 variation, or the special symbol (second symbol) may be drawn during the variation of the normal symbol (second symbol). 1 symbol) may be used to suggest the lottery result of the normal symbol. Further, it may be configured to perform a suggestion performance for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 based on the normal symbol lottery while the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are changing at the same time.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the content of the jackpot won is suggested based on the special drawing 2 drawing during the jackpot fluctuation when the drawing of the special drawing 1 has won a jackpot. In addition to this, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 may also be suggested. In addition, in a modification of the fourth embodiment, when one of the plurality of special symbols wins a jackpot (including during fluctuations in jackpot winnings), the lottery of the other special symbol The system is designed to prevent you from winning the jackpot. Therefore, since the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation of the special drawing 1 jackpot will not win a jackpot, even if the drawing result (jackpot content) of the special drawing 1 is suggested, a jackpot game that is different from the suggested content It is possible to suppress the situation in which (the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot won in the special drawing 2 lottery) is executed.

In addition, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation of the special drawing 1 winning the jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. , the suggestion effect may be executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the variation of the special figure 1 which has not won a jackpot. Thereby, by executing the suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player think that the changing special figure 1 has won a jackpot.

In addition, in a modification of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the fourth embodiment described above, if a jackpot is won with a variable probability state set, a probability state is set during the jackpot variation, and a special winning state is set. The system is configured so that the second lottery is easily executed. As a result, it is possible to execute more special drawing 2 drawings during fluctuations in the special drawing 1 jackpot, and therefore it is possible to easily provide suggestive effects to the player. In addition, in a state where the probability state is set, it becomes easier to win a small win different from a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery, so it is possible to make it easier to execute the special drawing 2 drawing more actively.

In a modification of the fourth embodiment, the special figure 1 jackpot game provides a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special figure 1 based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1. Although it is configured to be executed before the start of the game, the suggestion effect may be executed during a period other than this. For example, by applying the technique of this modification to the above-mentioned sixth embodiment, special figure 1 The lottery result of the special figure 1 (the contents of the jackpot game and the game state set after the end of the jackpot game) may be suggested based on the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the jackpot game.

In addition, in the modification of the fourth embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed based on the special drawing 2 lottery only during the jackpot fluctuation of the special drawing 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be configured to perform the suggestion effect based on the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the fluctuation of the out of line. Thereby, when the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible for the player to enjoy whether or not the changing special drawing 1 lottery is a jackpot.

In the modified example of the fourth embodiment described above, a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern 1 based on the special pattern 2 lottery executed during the variation of the special pattern 1 is added to the fourth embodiment. Although an example has been shown, the suggestion effect used in the modification of the fourth embodiment may be configured to be added to the other embodiments described above. For example, the suggestion effect used in the modification of the fourth embodiment may be added to the third embodiment. It may be configured as follows.

In the third embodiment, a variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot, and in the state where the variable probability state is set, a predetermined transition condition (jackpot winning, high probability state for normal symbols) is set. If a small hit win, 4th drawing of a special symbol) is established, the potential state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) is set to a predetermined end condition (4th lottery result of special symbol). The configuration is such that the period is set until the ``is stopped and displayed'' is established.

When executing the above-mentioned suggestion effect in the third embodiment configured in this way, the special figure 1 is selected based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the potential state is set. It is preferable to perform not only the lottery result but also a suggestion effect that suggests the opportunity (transition condition) for setting the potential state.

That is, in the third embodiment, a plurality of transition conditions for setting the potential state are defined, and the period for setting the potential state is configured to differ depending on the transition condition that is satisfied. Since the specific contents have been described above with reference to FIG. 112, the explanation thereof will be omitted. Furthermore, according to the configuration used in the third embodiment, until the special symbol 1 fluctuation for which the conditions for transition to the potential state are met is stopped and displayed, the player is not informed of the transition to the current potential state. It was not possible to tell what the trigger was.

Therefore, by adding the suggestion effect explained using the modified example of the fourth embodiment to the configuration of the third embodiment, during the special figure 1 variation when the transition condition to the potential state is satisfied. It becomes possible to suggest the lottery result of the special figure 1 which is changing based on the executed special figure 2 lottery. With this configuration, the player can predict the timing of the current transition to the potential state by looking at the suggested performance that is executed.

In other words, it is possible to set a first gaming state (for example, a potential state) that is advantageous to the player as a gaming state, and a second gaming state (for example, a variable probability state) that is more disadvantageous than the first gaming state. The special figure 2 variation is configured to be able to transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state when the transition condition is satisfied, and is executed during the special figure 1 variation when the first gaming state is set. (Lottery) It is preferable to make it possible to execute a suggestion performance for suggesting to the player what the transition condition was that led to the current first gaming state being set.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment described above, by executing the lottery of the special figure 2 during the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 (during the RUSH game period), the small winning game (RUSH game) is frequently executed. , in a configuration in which a prize ball can be given to a player without executing a jackpot game, the lottery result of special drawing 1 (jackpot game content, game state after jackpot game, special drawing) is determined based on the drawing of special drawing 2. Since the system is configured to be able to execute a suggestion performance that suggests the remaining variation time of 1 variation, it is possible to give multiple meanings to the special drawing 2 lottery during the RUSH game period. Specifically, the special drawing 2 lottery executed during the RUSH game period makes players expect a small hit to obtain a prize ball, while the lottery result of the fluctuating special drawing 1 is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make the user expect that a suggestive effect that suggests that this is the case will be executed.

When configured in this way, for example, if one of the multiple meanings of the special drawing 2 lottery is disadvantageous to the player, the other may be controlled to be advantageous to the player. good. Specifically, for example, as a result of the special drawing 2 lottery, a small win with a long fluctuation time (for example, small win A) and a small win with a shorter fluctuation time than that small win A (small win B) can be set. do. In this case, in order to execute many small winning games within the limited period of the RUSH game period, it is necessary to select many lottery results with a short fluctuation time as the lottery results of the special drawing 2. In other words, if the small win A mentioned above is won, the lottery result will be more disadvantageous to the player than if the small win B is won.

In such a case, it is preferable to configure the system so that the suggestion effect is more likely to be executed if the small win A is won than if the small win B is won. As a result, if the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is disadvantageous to the player, it becomes easier to provide another added value (suggestion effect), which significantly reduces the player's desire to play. can be suppressed.

In addition to the above-mentioned examples, for example, the first small winning game that is advantageous to the player as a game mode of the small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won, and the first small winning game that is more advantageous to the player than the first small winning game. To make it possible to set a second small winning game in which a small winning game disadvantageous to a player is executed, and to facilitate providing another added value (suggestion effect) when a small winning game disadvantageous to a player is won. It may be configured so that it can be done.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 316. In the first embodiment described above, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where variable probability states (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) are set. In addition, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is made into a potential state, and the small winning game is more likely to be executed when the potential state is set.

On the other hand, in the 11th embodiment, when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends first in the probability variable state (when the time saving number ends), and in some cases when the jackpot is won, the advantageous probability state The structure is designed to transition to . In addition, in gaming states other than the potential state, even if there is a jackpot, the probability that the potential state will be set is extremely low (for example, 5%), so other games When transitioning from a state to a probability state, most of the time is when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends in the probability change state.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the settings are set after the jackpot ends if the jackpot is won again in a relatively advantageous time-saving state or in a variable probability state than in the case where the probability variable jackpot is won in a disadvantageous normal state. It is configured so that the condition for ending the time saving state is more likely to be met in the probability variable state (it becomes easier to set a smaller number of time saving times). As a result, even if you win a probability-variable jackpot without being able to end the time-saving state of the normal symbol (that is, without being able to transition to the potential state), it will shift to the potential state. Since there is a higher possibility that it will become easier, it is possible to further improve the player's expectations regarding the probability state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment described above is that the configuration of the ROM 202 and RAM 203 in the main controller 110 has been partially changed; The configuration of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 in the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed, and the configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. The only difference is that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as in the first embodiment are given the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the eleventh embodiment will be briefly explained. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 306, four types of game states are provided in the eleventh embodiment. That is, there is a normal state that is most disadvantageous for the player, a time saving state that is more advantageous than the normal state, a variable state that is more advantageous than the time saving state, and a potential state that is the most advantageous for the player. ing.

In the time-saving state (the probability-changing state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols), the electric accessory 64a attached to the lower first ball entrance 64b2 is easily opened, and the lower first Since it becomes easier for the ball to enter the ball entrance 64b2, by playing the left-handed game, it becomes possible to execute the lottery of the first special symbol more efficiently than in the normal state. In other words, since the number of game balls to be fired and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering the lower first ball entrance 64b2 etc. are approximately the same, the number of game balls to be fired is approximately the same, so the number of game balls to be fired is approximately the same, and the number of game balls to be paid out based on the ball entering the lower first ball entry port 64b2 etc. is approximately the same. An advantageous state is formed in which the lottery can be executed. In addition, the probability variable state (probability variable state of special symbols and time-saving state of normal symbols) is better than the time-saving state because in addition to becoming a time-saving state of normal symbols, the probability of getting a jackpot in the lottery of special symbols is higher. It will be even more advantageous. In addition, in the potential state (probability change state of special symbols and normal state of normal symbols), the fluctuation time when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed is significantly shorter than in other game states (10 minutes). →1 second), when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a high probability (59/60) of a small win (a type of loss, and the first specific prize opening 65a of the first variable prize winning device 65 is The lottery results will be open for a period of time and you will be given an opportunity to win a prize ball), so just by playing a right-handed game aiming at the second ball entrance 640, the game ball will be sent to the first specific winning hole 65a. This creates an extremely advantageous gaming state in which it is possible to continue winning prize balls by frequently hitting balls.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 297 to 301, a characteristic interesting effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. As described above, the eleventh embodiment is configured to shift to the most advantageous potential state when the time saving state ends in a relatively advantageous probability variable state. Therefore, in the variable probability state, it is more likely to shift to the probability state by losing in the special symbol lottery for a set number of time-savings than by winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. It is possible to provide novel gameplay that makes players expect more strongly. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the state shifts to the variable probability state, a display effect is performed to suggest the remaining number of drawings until the state shifts to the probability state. As a result, when the state shifts to the variable probability state, by simply checking the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to check the approximate number of drawings remaining until the state shifts to the probability state. Convenience can be improved.

First, with reference to FIG. 297(a), in the eleventh embodiment, the display mode of the ending effect executed during the ending period of the jackpot game in which the probability change state or the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 297(a), when the ending effect according to the eleventh embodiment is executed, a A display area HR1 is formed in which the words "RUSH is guaranteed if you break through up to three rivers!?" are displayed. This display content allows the player to easily understand that the transition to RUSH (potential state) is confirmed when the character 811 breaks through three rivers at most. Note that the other display contents are the same as the display contents of the ending effect in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6(a)), so a detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

In the eleventh embodiment, there are also jackpot types (jackpot A11, jackpot H11) that directly shift to the potential state (RUSH) after the jackpot ends. Although not shown in the drawing, if the jackpot type is reached, entry into a potential state (RUSH) will be announced during the ending period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 297(b) to 299, a display effect executed during the time-saving state of the normal symbol (that is, during the probability variable state or the time-saving state) in the eleventh embodiment will be explained. . The details will be described later, but while the normal symbol time saving state is set, the normal symbol time saving state will end every time a special symbol lottery is executed a specific number of times (25 or 15 times). The player determines whether the time-saving state of the normal symbol will end and the time-saving state of the normal symbol will be changed to the most advantageous potential state, or whether the time-saving state of the normal symbol will continue (maintained). A production that suggests (informs) is executed. That is, depending on whether or not the character 811 crosses the river, a river crossing effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) that can suggest (notify) the game state after the end of the variation is executed. Note that the cycle at which the river breakthrough effect is executed is set to the number of fluctuations that may cause the time saving state to end. That is, when a jackpot occurs in the normal state and a variable probability state or a time saving state with normal symbols is set, the number of time saving times of 25, 50, or 75 is set. In addition, when a jackpot occurs in the variable probability state or the time saving state and the variable probability state is set, the number of time saving times of 10, 25, or 40 is set. By executing the river breakthrough effect every time the number of fluctuations that may result in the end of the time saving state, the game expects that the transition to the potential state will be notified each time the river breakthrough effect is executed. can be made to do so. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

First, with reference to FIG. 297(b), the effect mode (display mode) before the river breakthrough effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 297(b), until the river breakthrough effect is executed, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, an effect is executed in which the character 811 runs toward the right in front view. Further, a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular display area HR2 is formed to the right of the character 811 when viewed from the front. In this display area HR2, characters (display mode) indicating (suggesting) the number of remaining special symbols to be drawn until the character 811 reaches the next river are displayed. Note that FIG. 297(b) illustrates a state in which the words "20 steps remaining until the first river" are displayed. With this display content, the player can easily understand that if the special symbols are drawn 20 times in a row and the special symbols are drawn consecutively, it is a chance to move to an advantageous potential state. I can do it. Note that the other display contents are the same as the chance zone mode in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6(b)), so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. Here, the "chance zone" in the eleventh embodiment indicates the state while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 298(a), the display contents at the start of the river breakthrough effect will be described. FIG. 298(a) is a diagram showing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the start of the river breakthrough effect. As shown in FIG. 298(a), when the river breakthrough effect is started, an effect in which the character 811 discovers a river image KG imitating a river is executed. In addition, the words "Reach the first river!! Jump over the river!!" are displayed in the display area HR1 formed (displayed) at the top of the display screen. These display contents make it easy to understand that there is a possibility that the time saving state of the normal symbol will end (that is, the number of time saving times will elapse) in this variation. That is, the player can be made to understand that there is a possibility of transitioning to an advantageous potential state and a possibility of transitioning to a disadvantageous normal state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while paying attention to the river breakthrough effect.

FIG. 298(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the river breakthrough performance when the river is successfully breached and the continuation of the time saving state (chance zone) of the normal symbol is announced. As shown in FIG. 298(b), when success in the river breakthrough effect is announced, an effect in which the character 811 jumps and lands on the opposite bank of the river image KG is executed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 298(b), a signboard image 815 imitating a signboard is displayed beyond the river (on the opposite bank). This signboard image 815 is displayed to suggest (notify) a benefit due to the character 811 jumping over (breaking through) the river image KG. In FIG. 298(b), a case is illustrated in which the characters "Continue" are displayed, indicating that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues (the number of time saving times remains) after the next variable display. In addition, at the same time that the signboard image 815 is displayed, the words "First river breakthrough!! Opportunity zone continues!!" are displayed in the display area HR1 formed at the upper center of the screen. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the time-saving state of the normal symbols continues even when the next variable display transitions. Therefore, by continuing to lose until the next river breakthrough performance, it is possible to make the player play the game while giving them a sense of purpose to get a chance to move to the potential state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. can be done. In addition, if the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, the lottery result of the special symbol will be a loss. Therefore, in the small area Dm1 for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol, a third symbol of a combination indicating a loss (for example, a combination of "8", "1", and "5") is displayed.

Note that there is a time lag (for example, one seconds). As a result, the player can expect to be notified of the transition to the potential state (RUSH) as a bonus for jumping over the river image 811 during this one second period. Therefore, each time the river breakthrough performance is successful, the player can have a strong expectation that the potential state will be reported for at least one second, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 299(a) shows the display in the river breakthrough performance when the river is successfully breached and the transition to the potential state (RUSH) (the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended in the state of probability change) is announced. It is a figure showing an example of an aspect. As shown in FIG. 299(a), even when the transition to the potential state is announced, the character 811 An effect is executed in which the person jumps over the river image KG and lands on the opposite bank. On the other hand, when the transition to the potential state is notified, the word "RUSH" is displayed on the signboard image 815, and the text "First River Breakthrough!! RUSH" is displayed on the display area HR1. Invasion!!” is displayed. Furthermore, the characters displayed in the small area Dm3 are switched to "Right-handed hit", and the display content in the sub-display area Ds is switched to "RUSH in! Hit right-handed!!". These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has shifted to the most advantageous potential state (RUSH) and that it is sufficient to play a right-handed game.

Figure 299(b) shows an example of the display mode in the river breakthrough performance when the river breakthrough fails and a transition to the normal state (the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended in the time saving state) is notified. FIG. As shown in FIG. 299(b), when the transition to the normal state is notified, the character 811 jumps toward the opposite bank of the river image KG, but is unable to jump over the river image KG. An effect is performed in which the person falls towards the target. In addition, the text "Breakthrough failure...Chance Zone End..." is displayed in the display area HR1, and the text "Chance Zone End!!" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Ru. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has shifted to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player.

Next, referring to FIG. 300, in the eleventh embodiment, the game in the case where the chance zone is set after the end of the jackpot (that is, the probability variable state or the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot) The state and changes in presentation mode will be explained. First, with reference to FIG. 300(a), the transition of the gaming state and performance mode when the jackpot C11 is won in the normal state will be explained. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 303, jackpot C11 is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state, the number of times saved is set to 50 times, and the number of variable probability is set to 100 times. It is a type. In other words, if you lose in the special symbol lottery 50 times in a row after the jackpot ends, unless you win the jackpot after that, you will be in an advantageous potential state until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends. This is a type of jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 300(a), if you win the jackpot C11 in the normal state, the time saving state of the normal symbol will continue until the 50th special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot ends, and the 50th special symbol will be drawn. At the timing when the symbol lottery is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. On the other hand, the probability change state of the special symbol continues even if the special symbol lottery is executed 50 times or more (continues until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times at maximum). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300(a), the performance mode is a river breakthrough performance (Fig. 298 (See Figure 299 (a) ) is executed. Thereafter, a RUSH effect indicating that the player is in a potential state is executed in the same display manner as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 7(b)). In addition, when the time saving number is set to 25 times and it becomes a definite variable jackpot (jackpot D11), the transition to the potential definite state is notified by the first river breakthrough performance. On the other hand, in the case of a guaranteed variable jackpot (jackpot B11) in which the number of time reductions is set to 75, the continuation of the time reduction state (chance zone) of the normal symbol will be announced in the first and second river breakthrough performances, and 3 In the river breakthrough performance (river breakthrough performance performed in the variable display based on the execution of the 74th special symbol lottery), the transition to the potential state is notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 300(b), the transition of the gaming state and performance mode when the jackpot F11 is won in the normal state will be explained. Here, the jackpot F11 is a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to a time saving state, and the number of time saving times is set to 50. In other words, this is a type of jackpot in which if the special symbol is drawn 50 times in a row after the jackpot ends, the lottery results in a disadvantageous normal state.

As shown in Figure 300(b), if you win the jackpot F11 in the normal state, the time saving state of the normal symbol will continue until the 50th special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot ends, and the 50th special symbol will be drawn. At the timing when the symbol lottery is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended and the normal state of the normal symbol is set. Further, the state of the special symbol is maintained at a low probability state from the end of the jackpot. Therefore, when the special symbol lottery is executed for the 50th time after the end of the jackpot, the gaming state shifts to the normal state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 300(b), as a production mode, the continuation is announced during the execution of the variable display based on the execution of the 24th special symbol lottery (Fig. 298 (b)) was executed and the 49th special symbol lottery was executed. During the execution of the variable display based on the execution of the 49th special symbol lottery, the river breakthrough effect (see Fig. 299(b)) in which the river breakthrough fails is displayed. is executed, and the transition to the normal state is notified. From then on, the normal performance for the normal state is executed. In addition, in the case of a normal jackpot (jackpot G11) in which the time saving number is set to 25, the shift to the normal state is notified by the first river breakthrough performance. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot (jackpot E11) where the number of time reductions is set to 75, the continuation of the time reduction state (chance zone) of the normal symbol will be announced in the first and second river breakthrough performances, and 3 In the river breakthrough performance (river breakthrough performance performed in the variable display based on the execution of the 74th special symbol lottery), the transition to the normal state is notified.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, when the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is set to the probability variable state or the time saving state, the river is By executing the breakthrough performance, will the time saving state of the normal symbol continue, or will the time saving state of the normal symbol end and move to the potential state, or will the time saving state of the normal symbol end and move to the normal state. The structure is such that it periodically (every 25th or 15th special symbol lottery) is announced. By configuring this way, while the chance zone (time saving state with normal symbols) is set, it is possible for the player to play the game with one of the pleasures being that the next river breakthrough effect will be executed. Can be done. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the player wishes to continuously lose in the special symbol lottery at least until the next river breakthrough performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by creating a configuration in which there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal state if the river breakthrough performance fails, the continuation of the time-saving state is announced during the river breakthrough performance (even though the river has been breached, the state may change to the potential state). Even if the situation was not reported, it can be made to think that it is better than being notified of the normal state. That is, even if the potential state is not reported, it is possible to prevent players from being disappointed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 301, a small winning effect that can be executed in a potential state in the eleventh embodiment will be described. Here, in the present 11th embodiment, a plurality of performances with different modes are provided as the small winning performance, and when the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is executed, the lottery of the first special symbol that is fluctuating. Executed to suggest results. In addition, in the probability state, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended in the probability variation state where the reserved balls of the first special symbol are easy to accumulate, and the first special symbol is This is a case where the player shifts to the potential state while holding the ball with the design on hold. In this case, the game ball enters the second ball entry port 640 while the fluctuating display based on the suspended ball of the first special symbol is being performed, so that the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and The variable display of the second special symbol is executed overlappingly. The lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested by the small win effect when the lottery of the second special symbol results in a small win.

FIG. 301 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of a small win effect (a small win effect for high expectations) that suggests that the lottery result of the first special symbol is likely to be a jackpot. When the small hit effect for high expectations is executed, as shown in FIG. 301, the effect pattern 816 is displayed in a more flashy manner than the effect pattern 813 in the normal small effect effect (see FIG. 7(b)). is displayed. As shown in FIG. 301, in this production pattern 816, the font color of "V" to indicate a small win is set to a different font color (yellow) from the font color (black) in the production pattern 813, and " The effect around the letter V gives it a flashy appearance. These display modes make it easy for the player to understand that a small win effect that is different from the normal small win effect (see FIG. 7(b)) has been executed, resulting in a jackpot. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation regarding the event.

Although not shown in the drawings, in the eleventh embodiment, in addition to the normal small winning performance (small winning performance for low expectation level) and the small winning performance for high expectation level, a small winning performance for medium expectation level is used. There is also a small winning effect (a small winning effect for medium expectations). With this configuration, during a period in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be executed in duplicate, such as immediately after transition to the potential state, the second special symbol It is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is predicted depending on the type of small winning performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been widely known that each time a special symbol lottery result is executed, a variable display effect of symbols is performed to indicate the lottery result. In such conventional gaming machines, while performing the fluctuating symbol display performance, various kinds of entertainment performances that suggest the lottery results of special symbols are performed to increase the player's interest. However, in gaming machines with specifications that allow multiple fluctuating displays to be executed simultaneously, there is a problem in that while paying attention to the performance mode associated with one fluctuating display, the performance mode of the other fluctuating display performance may be overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in gaming machines that display one variable display in a manner that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the presentation mode of the other variable display (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variable display effect becomes difficult to confirm. There is a problem in that if a jackpot is started when the player is not paying attention to the game, the player may be confused.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the potential state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variable display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the first special symbol is displayed (in an easy-to-understand manner) and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed at the same time, the first special symbol is drawn by the small winning effect of the second special symbol (the effect mode accompanying the variable display). The structure is designed to suggest the results. With this configuration, it is possible to check the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol by simply paying attention to the production mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In addition, in the present 11th embodiment, the display mode in the small winning effect of the second special symbol was configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being executed at the same time is a jackpot. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is suggested by the performance mode of the performance executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbols on the second symbol display device may be configured to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a jackpot. good. With this configuration, by simply checking the variable display effect on the side that is easy to see, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to see, thereby realizing an easier-to-understand effect. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

<Electrical configuration of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 304. The ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)) in that it has the specified contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the specified contents of the small winning random number table 202b, The difference is that the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d and the specified contents of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f are partially changed. The other configurations are the same as the configuration of the main control device 110 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)), and detailed description thereof will be given later.

First, with reference to FIG. 302(a), details of the first winning random number table 202a provided in the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 302(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this first winning random number table 202a. The first winning random number table 202a in the eleventh embodiment is similar to the first winning random number table 202a in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(a)), in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, This is a data table in which random numbers (judgment values) that are determined to be a win in each gaming state are set.

As shown in FIG. 302(a), the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 302(a)) in the eleventh embodiment includes random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a jackpot in a low probability state of special symbols. ), two numbers "7, 8" are specified, while eight random numbers (counter value) from "0 to 7" are determined as a jackpot in the high probability state (probability variable state) of the special symbol. A random value is specified. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is 1/240 (2/480), and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state of the special symbol is 1/60 (1/480).

Next, the small winning random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 302(b). FIG. 302(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the small winning random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the small hit random number table 202b in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15(b)), this small hit random number table 202b is set with a random value (counter value) that is determined to be a small win in the special symbol lottery. This is the table that was created. As shown in FIG. 302(b), in the small win random number table 202b in the eleventh embodiment, a random number value that becomes a small win is not defined for the lottery of the first special symbol. That is, there is no chance of winning a small hit in the first special symbol lottery. On the other hand, for the second special symbol lottery, 472 random numbers (counter values) from "8 to 479" are defined in association with each other. Therefore, in the eleventh embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there will be a small win with a probability of 59/60 (472/480). That is, in the eleventh embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the potential state, it becomes a big hit or a small hit. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the potential state can be further increased.

Next, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 303. FIG. 303 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d. Similar to the jackpot type selection table 202d in the first embodiment (see FIG. 16(a)), the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment has a judgment value for determining the jackpot type for each type of special symbol. This is a data table stored in .

As shown in FIG. 303, the jackpot type selection table 202d in the eleventh embodiment includes seven jackpot types from "jackpot A11" to "jackpot G11" as jackpot types of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). is stipulated. On the other hand, three jackpot types, "Jackpot H11" to "Jackpot J11", are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 303, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "jackpot A11" when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4". They are defined in correspondence. This "Jackpot A11" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, depending on the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is set is variable. More specifically, when the "jackpot A11" is won in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, the time saving state of the normal symbol is not set (the value of the time saving counter 203f is set to 0). That is, when the "jackpot A11" is won in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, the state shifts to the most advantageous potential state. At this time, the probability variation count is set to 100 (100 is set to the probability variation counter 203j), so the maximum number of times is from the end of "Jackpot A11" until the special symbol lottery is executed 100 times. During this period, an advantageous potential state continues. On the other hand, if you win "Jackpot A11" in the probability state, the time saving number is set to 50 (50 is set to the value of the time saving counter 203f), so after the jackpot ends, you can draw a special symbol at most. Until this is executed 50 times, a relatively advantageous variable probability state is maintained. Therefore, "Jackpot A11" becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state when it is won in a gaming state other than the potential state. On the other hand, if you win in the probability state, it will be a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state (it is disadvantageous than the jackpot type in which the probability state is set, but it is more advantageous than the jackpot type in which the time saving state is set). Become).

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 5 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot A11", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot A11" being determined is 5% (5/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the jackpot type "Jackpot B11" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 14". This "Jackpot B11" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot B11" in the normal state, the number of time savings will be set to 75 times, but if you win "Jackpot B11" in the time savings state and variable probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 40 times. be done. That is, if the "jackpot B11" is won in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, the state shifts to a relatively advantageous variable probability state. On the other hand, if the jackpot B11 is won in the potential state, the time saving number is set to 0, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes the most advantageous potential state. Therefore, "Jackpot B11" is a jackpot type that is relatively advantageous in terms of the gaming state when it is won in a gaming state other than the potential state. On the other hand, if you win in the probability state, it will be the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot B11", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot B11" being determined is 10% (10/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, a jackpot type "Jackpot C11" is defined in association with a value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "15 to 69". This "jackpot C11" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot C11" in the normal state, the number of time savings will be set to 50 times, while if you win "Jackpot C11" in the time savings state and variable probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 25 times. be done. In other words, since the number of time-savings is set smaller than when winning "Jackpot B11" in the above three gaming states, it is easier to shift to the probability state (unless you continue winning until the time-saving state of the normal symbol ends). ). Therefore, in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, the "jackpot C11" is a more advantageous jackpot type than the "jackpot B11". On the other hand, if the jackpot B11 is won in the potential state, the time saving number is set to 0, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes the most advantageous potential state. Therefore, "Jackpot C11" becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state when it is won in the probability state.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, 55 random numbers (counter values) are associated with "Jackpot C11", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the ratio of "jackpot C11" being determined is 55% (55/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "70 to 79", and the jackpot type "Jackpot D11" is defined in association with the value "70 to 79". This "jackpot D11" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot D11" in the normal state, the number of time savings will be set to 25 times, but if you win "Jackpot D11" in the time savings state and variable probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 10 times. be done. In other words, in the above three gaming states, the number of time-savings is set smaller than when winning "Jackpot B11" or "Jackpot C11", so it becomes easier to shift to the potential state (the time-saving state of the normal symbol ends). ) Therefore, in the normal state, time saving state, and variable probability state, "jackpot D11" is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "jackpot B11" and "jackpot C11". On the other hand, if the jackpot D11 is won in the potential state, the time saving number is set to 0, so the gaming state after the end of the jackpot becomes the most advantageous potential state. Therefore, "Jackpot D11" becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of gaming state when it is won in the probability state.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 10 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot D11", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the ratio of "jackpot D11" being determined is 10% (2/100).

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "80, 81", and "jackpot E11" is defined as the jackpot type in association with it. This "jackpot E11" is a type of jackpot (normal jackpot for 8 rounds) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and a low probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot E11" in the normal state, the number of time savers will be set to 75, but if you win "Jackpot E11" in the time saver state, variable probability state, and probability state, the number of time savers will be set to 75. Set to 100 times. The time saving state is a type of jackpot that is disadvantageous to the player because even if the number of time saving times has elapsed, the game only shifts to the normal state (it does not shift to the advantageous potential state).

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are two random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot E11", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot E11" being determined is 2% (2/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "82 to 98", and the jackpot type "Jackpot F11" is defined in correspondence. This "jackpot F11" is a type of jackpot (normal jackpot for 8 rounds) in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 rounds, and a low probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot F11" in the normal state, the number of time savers will be set to 50, but if you win "Jackpot F11" in the time saver state, variable probability state, and probability state, the number of time savers will be set to 50. Set to 100 times. Therefore, "jackpot F11" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "jackpot E11" in the normal state, and is a jackpot with the same advantageous degree as "jackpot E11" in the time saving state, variable probability state, and probability state. .

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot F11" are 17, so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot F11" being determined is 17% (17/100).

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "99", and the jackpot type "Jackpot G11" is defined in correspondence. This "Jackpot G11" is a type of jackpot (normal jackpot for 8 rounds) in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 rounds, and a low probability state of a special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot G11" in the normal state, the number of time savers will be set to 25, but if you win "Jackpot G11" in the time saver state, variable probability state, and probability state, the number of time savers will be set to 25. Set to 100 times. Therefore, "Jackpot G11" is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "Jackpot E11" and "Jackpot F11" in the normal state, and is more disadvantageous than "Jackpot E11" and "Jackpot F11" in the time saving state, variable probability state, and probability state. It is a jackpot with the same advantage as ``.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, only one random number (counter value) is associated with "Jackpot G11", so the first special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "Jackpot G11" being determined is 1% (1/100).

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, as the jackpot of the first special symbol, when winning in the normal state, the probability variable jackpot ("jackpot B11" ~ "Jackpot D11") and normal jackpots ("Jackpot E11" to "Jackpot G11") in which the number of time saving times is set to 75, 50, and 25 are provided. That is, the timing at which the time saving state of the normal symbols ends is set in three patterns: 75 times, 50 times, and 25 times after the end of the jackpot. By configuring in this way, after the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it is possible to shift to the potential state every time the 25th, 50th, and 75th special symbol lottery is executed. can be expected. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in the eleventh embodiment, the proportion of jackpots in which the number of time reductions is set to 25 is extremely low (1%) in the normal jackpot distribution. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the type of jackpot that is the most disadvantageous for the player (the number of time savings is small and there is no possibility of shifting to a potential state), so it is possible to prevent the player from being too disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing. Moreover, the ratio of normal jackpots (jackpot E11) in which the number of time saving times is set to 75 is also configured to be relatively low (2%). As a result, when the number of time reductions exceeds 50 (that is, when the continuation is announced in the second river breakthrough performance), it is possible to improve the sense of expectation regarding the variable probability state. Therefore, even if the transition to the potential state is not reported in the second river breakthrough performance (i.e., even if the continuation is reported), expectations for the next (i.e., third) river breakthrough performance will be increased. can be improved.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, when winning a variable probability jackpot in a time saving state or a variable probability state (i.e., winning consecutive games), the number of winnings is smaller than when winning a jackpot in a normal state (i.e., in the case of a so-called first win). The configuration is such that the number of time reductions is set. In other words, the configuration is such that it is easier to satisfy the end condition of the time-saving state of the normal symbol when winning the probability-variable jackpot in the time-saving state or the probability-variable state, rather than winning the probability-variable jackpot in the normal state. In other words, the configuration is such that if you win the probability variable jackpot during the time saving state of the normal symbol, there is a higher possibility of transitioning to the potential state. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if he or she is getting closer to the potential state of winning the jackpot in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. .

It should be noted that when a normal jackpot is won in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the number of time saving times is set to 100, regardless of the type of jackpot. This increases the degree of advantage in the case of a normal jackpot that is disadvantageous in the time saving state or variable probability state (that is, the state does not shift to the potential state even if the end condition of the time saving state of the normal symbol is satisfied). Therefore, both in the case of a definite jackpot and in the case of a regular jackpot, the degree of advantage can be increased when so-called consecutive hits occur than when the so-called first hit occurs, so consecutive hits occur. It is possible to further improve a player's sense of expectation in such a case.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 303, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 74", and the jackpot type is "jackpot H11". ” are defined in association with each other. This "Jackpot H11" is a type of jackpot (16 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot H11" in a state other than the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 100 times, but if you win "Jackpot H11" in the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 0 times. Set. In other words, if you win "jackpot H11" in a gaming state other than the probability state, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot will be set to a probability variable state, while if you win "jackpot H11" in the probability state, after the end of the jackpot The gaming state of is set to the potential state.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, the random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot H11" are 75, so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot H11" being determined is 75% (75/100).

Further, as shown in FIG. 303, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "75 to 79", and the jackpot type "Jackpot I11" is defined in correspondence. This "Jackpot I11" is a type of jackpot (16 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and the probability variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot I11" in a state other than the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 100 times, but if you win "Jackpot I11" in the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 50 times. Set. That is, when the "jackpot I11" is won, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state, regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 5 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot I11", so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot H11" being determined is 5% (5/100).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 303, the jackpot type "Jackpot J11" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". This "Jackpot J11" has 16 rounds of jackpots, and is a type of jackpot (16 rounds normal jackpot) in which a special symbol low probability state is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, if you win "Jackpot J11" in a state other than the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 0, but if you win "Jackpot J11" in the probability state, the number of time savings will be set to 100 times. Set. That is, if you win "jackpot J11" in a gaming state other than the potential state, the state after the jackpot is set to the normal state, while if you win "jackpot J11" in the probability state, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the normal state. It is set to short time mode.

Among the 100 random numbers (counter values) that the first winning type counter C2 can take, there are 20 random numbers (counter values) associated with "Jackpot J11", so the second special symbol lottery In the case of a jackpot, the percentage of "jackpot J11" being determined is 20% (20/100).

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, if a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol in a gaming state other than the potential state, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is configured to be relatively unfavorable. . This is intended to suppress an irregular gaming method in which a player plays a right-handed game and draws the second special symbol even though the player is not in a potential state. In other words, if the configuration is such that the same gaming state as the potential state is set in the jackpot of the second special symbol won in a gaming state other than the potential state, the second special symbol will be intentionally drawn by right-handed hitting. Depending on the gaming method that is executed by the player, the player will end up shifting to the most advantageous potential state at a high rate of 75%, which will be excessively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, even if a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed and a jackpot is achieved, there is no possibility of transitioning to a probable state (i.e., the number of times shortened). Either the probability-variable state (in which the probability-variable state ends at the same time as the time passes) is set, or the most disadvantageous normal state is set, so it is disadvantageous for the player to win the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods in which a right-handed game is performed in a game state in which a left-handed game is supposed to be performed.

Next, details of the variation pattern selection table 202f in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 304. Similar to the variation pattern selection table 202f in the first embodiment (see FIG. 17), this variation pattern selection table 202f determines the variation pattern (variation time) of the variation display from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1. This is a data table for In the eleventh embodiment, in the variation pattern selection table 202f, the specified contents of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 and the potential probability variation table 202f3 are partially changed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 304(a), the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 in the eleventh embodiment is more efficient than the time saving/probability variable table 202f2 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 19(a)). It is configured so that the fluctuation time when the first special symbol hits is short (10 seconds to 20 seconds). In addition, as variation patterns when the first special symbol misses, there are a short variation with a variation time of 1 second, a middle variation with a variation time of 10 seconds, and a super variation with a variation time of 15 seconds. There is. Thereby, it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency in the time-saving state and the variable probability state, and to diversify the fluctuation patterns when losing. Furthermore, since the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state (see FIG. 18), it is possible to improve the gaming efficiency in the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbols is set. Note that, as with the first embodiment, the variation pattern of the second special symbol is configured to be set for 60 seconds regardless of the lottery result. As a result, if a right-handed game is played in a time-saving or variable-probability state in which a left-handed game should be played, the gaming efficiency can be deteriorated, so an irregular game in which a right-handed game is played in a gaming state in which a left-handed game should be played can be It is possible to control the gaming method.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 304(b), in the potential probability table 202f3j in the eleventh embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol is the same as the time saving/probability variation table 202f2. On the other hand, regarding the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a one-second variation pattern is set regardless of the lottery result. Therefore, when the player enters the potential state and plays a right-handed game, small winning games are executed at relatively short intervals (approximately 1 second intervals), so the first specific prize opening 65a is frequently opened. , you can win prize balls frequently. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of advantage of the player in the potential state.

As described above, in the eleventh embodiment, when the game enters the potential state, the jackpot probability becomes high, and the first specific prize opening 65a is opened at one second intervals, resulting in an extremely advantageous gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with one goal being to transition to the probable state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 305, the configuration of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 305 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 305, the configuration of the RAM 203 in the eleventh embodiment is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) by adding a probability variation counter 203ja instead of the probability variation flag 203g. They differ in some respects.

The probability variation counter 203ja is a counter for counting the number of lottery of the remaining special symbols until the probability variation state of the special symbols ends. If the value of this probability variation counter 203ja is 1 or more, it indicates that the special symbol is in a probability variation state, and if the value is 0, it indicates that the special symbol is in a low probability state. The initial value of this variable probability counter 203ja is set to 0, and the value is set to 0 when a jackpot is won. If the winning jackpot is a probability variable jackpot, 100 is set as the value at the end of the probability variable jackpot. Further, while the value of the probability change counter 203ja is 1 or more, the value is updated by subtracting 1 each time a new special symbol lottery is executed (see S623 in FIG. 310). When a special symbol lottery is executed, the value of the probability variable counter 203ja is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the probability variable state is in the variable probability state. (or the first random number table for low probability times) is selected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 306, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 306 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 306, the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is provided with four game states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, the variable probability state shown in the center left of FIG. 306, the time saving state shown in the center right of FIG. It is provided.

As mentioned above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, in which the probability of a jackpot is low and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to release (the game ball is in the lower position). It is difficult for the ball to enter the first ball entry opening 64b2), resulting in the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player. In addition, as mentioned above, the variable probability state indicates the variable probability state of special symbols and the time saving state of normal symbols, and the jackpot probability is high and by playing a left-handed game, the lower first ball entrance Since the game ball frequently enters the ball 64 (the electric accessory 64a is frequently released), the game state is relatively advantageous for the player. In addition, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although the jackpot probability is low, by playing a left-handed game, the lower first Since game balls frequently enter the ball entrance 640, a game state is created that is more advantageous for the player than the normal state. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the potential state refers to the variable probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol. Since the set variable time is significantly shorter than in the other three game states (from 60 seconds to 1 second), by playing a right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol can be executed efficiently. I can do it. As mentioned above, in the lottery of the second special symbol, there is a high probability (59/60) of winning a small hit and opening the first specific prize opening 64a. Game balls frequently enter the second ball entry hole 640 and the first specific winning hole 64a to form an extremely advantageous game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be won without going through a jackpot. Therefore, the potential state is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another state only in the case of a jackpot. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 306, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A11, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the hidden after the jackpot ends. Transition to a certain state. Therefore, when the jackpot A11 is reached, the player directly shifts to the most advantageous potential state, so in the normal state, the jackpot A11 is the most pleasing type of jackpot for the player. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots B11 to D11, which is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, the state will be changed to a relatively advantageous probability state. Transition. Furthermore, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a time saving state after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the fixed variable state and time saving state are set as the gaming state after the end of the jackpot, it is configured so that it is difficult to recognize which gaming state has been set (which gaming state However, the configuration is such that the river breakthrough effect is executed at the same timing). Therefore, the game can be played while paying attention to the result of the river breakthrough effect.

Furthermore, as shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of transitioning from the variable probability state to another gaming state not only when a jackpot occurs, but also when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. be. Specifically, if a jackpot occurs in the variable probability state and jackpot A11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the game shifts to an advantageous probability state after the jackpot ends. Further, when the jackpot E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected, the gaming state after the jackpot ends is set to the time saving state. On the other hand, if the time-saving state of the normal symbol ends before winning the jackpot, the state shifts to the most advantageous potential state. On the other hand, if the jackpot type of the first special symbol becomes one of the jackpots B11 to D11, which are determined at a rate of 75%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state again ( (loop through variable states). In other words, in a variable probability state, even if you win a jackpot, the probability will only shift to an advantageous probability state with a low probability (5% rate). It is possible to make the user feel that it is easy to transition to a new state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which the player expects to continue winning over a set number of time reductions. As mentioned above, the transition is based on winning a definite variable jackpot in the variable probability state or time saving state, rather than the variable state (the state transitioning to a variable state after the first win) based on winning a variable jackpot in the normal state. It is configured such that the average value of the set number of time reductions is smaller in the variable probability state (the variable probability state shifted after the occurrence of consecutive games). That is, while the average number of time reductions set at the time of a first win is 50, the average number of time reductions set at the time of successive hits is 25. Therefore, it is easier to pass the time saving number when a consecutive game occurs, so even if you win the jackpot before the time saving number elapses in the variable probability state and end up looping in the variable probability state, Since there is a high possibility that a number of time reductions (a small number of time reductions) that will easily lead to a transition to a certain state is set, the player's disappointment can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing.

Furthermore, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of transitioning from the time saving state to another gaming state not only in the case of a jackpot, but also when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends. be. Specifically, if a jackpot occurs in the time saving state and jackpot A11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the game shifts to an advantageous potential state after the jackpot ends. Further, when jackpots B11 to D11 determined at a rate of 75% are selected, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to a variable probability state. On the other hand, if the time saving state of the normal symbol ends before winning the jackpot, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the jackpot type of the first special symbol becomes one of the jackpots E11 to G11 determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time saving state again ( Loop the time saving state). In other words, in the time saving state, even if the number of time saving times for the normal symbol has passed, the state shifts to a disadvantageous normal state, so it is more advantageous to win the jackpot. In addition, as mentioned above, the time saving state is set because it is difficult to distinguish from the content of the production whether the normal symbol time saving state or the variable probability state is set. It is possible to expect the state to be variable even during the period. In other words, it is possible to make the user expect that the time saving number of normal symbols will elapse. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 306, there is a possibility of transitioning from the potential state to another gaming state not only when a jackpot is achieved, but also when the probability variation number of times has elapsed. Specifically, in the probability state, when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol and the jackpot I11 determined at a rate of 5% is selected, the state shifts to the probability variable state after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, when the jackpot J11 determined at a rate of 20% is selected, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the time saving state. On the other hand, if the variable probability count ends before winning the jackpot, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the second special symbol lottery results in a jackpot H11, which is determined at a rate of 75%, the gaming state after the jackpot is set to the probable state again ( (loop through the latent state). In other words, in the probability state, by winning the jackpot before the number of probability changes has elapsed, the probability state that is advantageous at a high rate (75% rate) is looped, so after shifting to the probability state allows the player to play the game while expecting a jackpot.

In this way, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to realize a gameplay that makes you expect a series of misses in a variable probability state, and a gameplay that makes you expect a jackpot in a probability state. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 307(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 307(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 222 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22(a)) in that the small winning effect selection table 222ja and the winning The difference is that a sound selection table 222jb is added.

The small winning performance selection table 222ja is a data table that is referred to in order to select the type of small winning performance during execution of the small winning game when a small winning is won in the lottery of the second special symbol. As mentioned above, if the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed overlappingly (at the same time), such as immediately after transitioning to the potential state, this small hit effect The lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested depending on the type. Details of this small winning performance selection table 222ja will be described later with reference to FIG. 308(a).

The winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table that is referred to in order to select a winning sound to be output when a winning to the specific winning hole 65a is detected during execution of the small winning game. In the eleventh embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol can be suggested (notified) also by the winning sound output during the small winning game. This allows the player to play the game paying attention not only to the small win effect but also to the winning sound, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Details of this winning sound selection table 222jb will be described later with reference to FIG. 308(b).

Next, with reference to FIG. 308(a), details of the above-mentioned small winning effect selection table 222ja will be explained. FIG. 308(a) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of this small winning performance selection table 222ja. As shown in FIG. 308(a), the small winning effect selection table 222ja includes the type of winning information of the first special symbol (data stored in the storage area corresponding to the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b). The range of the counter value of the performance counter (performance lottery counter) 223h and the performance mode of the small winning performance are defined in association with each other (type of performance).

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 308(a), when data indicating a jackpot is stored in the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (i.e., the fluctuation of the first special symbol during execution When the display is a jackpot), the normal performance mode (see FIG. 7(b)) is defined in correspondence with the value of the performance counter 223h in the range of "0 to 69", and the value of the performance counter 223h is in the range of "70 to 89". For the range of ``90 to 99'', a presentation mode for medium expectations is defined in association with a presentation mode for high expectations (see Figure 301). There is. Therefore, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the percentages of normal production mode, medium expectation production mode, and high expectation production mode being selected are 70% (70/100) and 20%, respectively. (20/100), and 10% (10/100).

Also, as shown in FIG. 308(a), if data indicating a jackpot is stored in an area other than the execution area as the winning information of the first special symbol (the jackpot is included in the reserved ball of the first special symbol) ), and when the execution area stores data indicating a super fluctuation (the fluctuation display of the first special symbol being executed is a super fluctuation), the value of the production counter 223h is "0 to 84". A normal presentation mode (see FIG. 7(b)) is defined in association with the range of , and a presentation mode for medium expectation level is defined in association with the range of "85 to 97". A presentation mode for high expectations (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with the range "98, 99". Therefore, when the reserved balls of the first special symbol include a jackpot, or when the first special symbol is missing and a super fluctuation is being executed, the normal production mode, the production mode for medium expectations, and the high The proportions at which the presentation mode for the expectation level is selected are 85% (85/100), 13% (13/100), and 2% (2/100), respectively. That is, the configuration is such that the selection ratio of the high-expectation and medium-expectation performance modes is lower and the selection ratio of the normal performance mode is higher than when the first special symbol is fluctuating into a jackpot. has been done. Therefore, if the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed at the time when the production mode for high expectations or the production mode for medium expectations is executed, the variable display of the first special symbol indicates a jackpot. This makes it more likely that it will be a fluctuating display. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while paying attention to the small winning performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 308(a), when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is not being executed or the losing super variation is being executed, and the jackpot is not included in the reserved balls of the first special symbol. , the normal performance mode (see FIG. 7(b)) is defined in association with the value of the performance counter 223h in the range of "0 to 94", and the value of the performance counter 223h in the range of "95 to 98", A presentation mode for a medium level of expectation is defined in correspondence, and a mode of presentation for a high expectation level (see FIG. 301) is defined in association with "99". Therefore, when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is not being executed nor the super miss variation is being executed, and the jackpot is not included in the reserved balls of the first special symbol, the normal performance mode and medium expectation level The proportions at which the production mode for 2018 and the production mode for high expectation level are selected are 95% (95/100), 4% (4/100), and 1% (1/100), respectively. In other words, the selection ratio of performance modes for high expectations and medium expectations is higher than when the jackpot variation or super miss variation of the first special symbol is in progress, or when a jackpot is included in the hold. is configured such that as the selection rate of the normal performance mode decreases, the selection ratio of the normal presentation mode increases. Therefore, if the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed at the time when the production mode for high expectations or the production mode for medium expectations is executed, and if there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, , the game can be played with the expectation that the variable display being executed will be a jackpot, or that the pending jackpot will be included. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is predicted from the performance mode of the small win effect every time a small win is obtained in the lottery of the second special symbol, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. can be improved.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been widely known that each time a special symbol lottery result is executed, a variable display effect of symbols is performed to indicate the lottery result. In such conventional gaming machines, the player's interest is increased by executing various interesting effects that suggest the lottery results of special symbols during the execution of the variable display effect of symbols. However, in gaming machines with specifications that allow multiple fluctuating displays to be executed at the same time, there is a problem that while paying attention to the performance mode associated with one fluctuating display, the performance mode of the other fluctuating display performance may be overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in gaming machines that display one variable display in a manner that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the presentation mode of the other variable display (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variable display effect becomes difficult to confirm. There is a problem in that if a jackpot is started when the player is not paying attention to the game, the player may be confused.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the potential state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variable display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is being executed at the same time as the first special symbol is displayed (in an easy-to-understand manner), the first special symbol will be drawn by lottery by the small winning performance of the second special symbol (the performance mode accompanying the fluctuating display). The structure is designed to suggest the results. With this configuration, it is possible to check the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol by simply paying attention to the production mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In addition, in the present 11th embodiment, the display mode in the small winning effect of the second special symbol was configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being executed at the same time is a jackpot. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is suggested by the performance mode of the performance executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbols on the second symbol display device may be configured to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a jackpot. good. With this configuration, by simply checking the variable display effect on the side that is easy to see, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the variable display effect on the side that is difficult to see, thereby realizing an easier-to-understand effect. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

Next, details of the winning sound selection table 222jb will be explained with reference to FIG. 308(b). As described above, this winning sound selection table 222jb is a data table that is referred to in order to select the winning sound to be output when a winning to the specific winning hole 65a is detected during execution of the small winning game. As shown in FIG. 308(b), the winning sound selection table 222jb includes production counters for each type of winning information in the execution area of the first special symbol (variation type of the variable display of the first special symbol being executed). (Performance lottery counter) The range of the counter value of 223h and the type of winning sound (any of three types: normal sound, chance sound, and confirmed sound) are defined in association with each other. Normal sounds consist of relatively short and plain sounds (e.g., "clink"), and chance sounds are long and flashy sounds (e.g., "jakin") compared to normal sounds. The confirmed sound is composed of the most flashy sound among the three types (for example, the sound "Dokkan"). Although details will be described later, the confirmation sound is a special sound that is output only when a game ball enters (wins) the first specific winning hole 65a during jackpot fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 308(b), when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being executed, the normal sound is played as the winning sound for the value of the production lottery counter 223h in the range of "0 to 79". For the range "80 to 98", a chance sound is defined as a winning sound, and for "99", a confirmed sound is defined as a winning sound. Therefore, when a win is detected in the first specific winning hole 65a during the execution of the jackpot variation of the first special symbol, the proportions at which the normal sound, chance sound, and confirmation sound are output are 80%, 19%, and 19%, respectively. and 1%. As mentioned above, the confirmed sound is a special sound that is selected only during execution of the jackpot variation. Therefore, when the confirmation sound is output, it is possible to give great pleasure to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 308(b), when the first special symbol loses super fluctuation is being executed, the value of the production lottery counter 223h is in the range of "0 to 89" as a winning sound. Normal sounds are defined in association with each other, and chance sounds are defined in association with the range of "90 to 99" as winning sounds. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the confirmed sound. Therefore, when a win is detected in the first specific winning hole 65a during the execution of the first special symbol missing super variation, the proportions at which the normal sound, chance sound, and confirmation sound are output are 90% and 10%, respectively. , and 0%. That is, compared to the case where the jackpot is fluctuating, the ratio of chance sounds being output is reduced (about half), and the ratio of normal sounds being output is increased. Then, there is no possibility that a definite sound will be output.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 308(b), when the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is not being executed or the losing super variation is not being executed, the value of the production lottery counter 223h is within the range of "0 to 94". A normal sound is defined in association with the winning sound, and a chance sound is defined in association with the range of "95 to 99" as a winning sound. On the other hand, the value of the effect counter 223h is not associated with the confirmed sound. Therefore, when a win is detected in the first specific winning hole 65a during the execution of the first special symbol missing super variation, the proportions at which the normal sound, chance sound, and confirmation sound are output are 95% and 5%, respectively. , and 0%. In other words, the output ratio of the chance sound is further reduced and the output ratio of the normal sound is further increased than in the case where the super-missing variation is being executed. Therefore, when the chance sound is output, it is possible to improve the expectation that the jackpot fluctuation is being executed. Further, by outputting the confirmation sound, it is confirmed that the jackpot fluctuation is being executed, so that the player can feel great joy. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game paying attention not only to the small winning effect but also to the winning sound output during the small winning game, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

Next, details of the RAM 223 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 307(b). FIG. 307(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 307(b), the configuration of the RAM 223 in the eleventh embodiment differs from the configuration of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22(b)) in that the configuration of the RAM 223 is different from that of the RAM 223 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 22(b)). The difference is that 223jb is added.

The variation counter 223ja is a counter for counting the number of variations (number of lottery draws) of the special symbol. The initial value of this variation counter 223ja is set to 0, and the value is added by 1 each time a variation display effect is started (that is, each time a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110). (See S5121 and S5125 in FIG. 314). Also, it is reset to 0 when the jackpot ends (see S4422 in FIG. 312). In the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set (probability variable state, time-saving state), it is determined whether or not the river breakthrough performance can be executed by referring to the value of this fluctuation number counter 223ja (S5132, S5133 in FIG. 315). reference).

The first hit flag 223jb is a flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol time saving state is set after the first hit. If this first hit flag is on, it means that the game is in the time saving state of the normal symbol set after the first hit, and if it is off, it means that it is not in the time saving state after the first hit. In the time saving state of normal symbols, this first hit flag 223jb is referenced every time the variable display performance of the special symbol starts, and whether it is in the time saving state after the first hit or in the time saving state after consecutive hits occur. It is determined whether there is. If the time is shortened after the first hit, the river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the 24th, 49th, and 74th variable display after the end of the jackpot (see S5132 in FIG. 315). On the other hand, if the time is shortened after the consecutive hits occur, the river breakthrough effect is set at the start of the 9th, 24th, and 39th variable display (S5133 in FIG. 315). As mentioned above, the number of fluctuations (special This is because the number of drawings of the symbols is different.

<About the control process of the main controller in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 309 to 311. First, with reference to FIG. 309, the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (S321) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34) in the first embodiment, and the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the first embodiment Similar to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 34), based on the set gaming state based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot.

In the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, the control content is changed by providing a variable probability counter 203ja in place of the variable probability flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, in each process of S401, S403 to S410, and S412 of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, the first special symbol jackpot in the first embodiment is determined. The same processes as S401, S403 to S410, and S412 of the determination process (see FIG. 34) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S401 is finished, the value of the probability change counter 203ja is a value larger than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more). If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S421: Yes), the process moves to S403. On the other hand, in the process of S421, if it is determined that the value of the probability change counter 203ja is 0 (S421: No), the process moves to S404.

Although not shown in the drawings, similar changes have been made to the control contents of the second special symbol jackpot determination process (see FIG. 40).

Next, details of the gaming state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 310. FIG. 310 is a flowchart showing gaming state update processing 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment. This gaming state update process 12 (S322) is a process that is executed in place of the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the gaming state update process (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment. Similarly, this is a process for updating the status of the pachinko machine 10 by updating various flags and counters indicating the status of the pachinko machine 10.

In the game state update process 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, the control content is changed by providing a probability change counter 203ja in place of the probability change flag 203g in the first embodiment. More specifically, in the gaming state update processing 12 (S322) in the eleventh embodiment, each of the processing in S601 to S604, S606, and S607 is the same as the gaming state updating processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). The same processes as those in S601 to S604, S606, and S607 are executed.

In addition, in the game state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S604 that the value of the time saving counter 203f is a value larger than 0 (S604: Yes), then the probability change It is determined whether the value of the counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621), and if it is determined that the value of the variable variable counter 203ja is greater than 0 (S621: Yes), the process moves to S606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter 203ja is 0 (S621: No), the process moves to S607.

Furthermore, in the gaming state update process 12 (see FIG. 310) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S606 or S607 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the probability change counter 203ja is a value larger than 0. (S622) If it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is a value greater than 0 (that is, a value of 1 or more) (S622: Yes), then the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is subtracted by 1 and updated. (S623), and sets a remaining probability variation number command indicating the value of the probability variation counter 203ja after the update (S624). When the process of S624 is completed, it is then determined whether the value of the variable probability counter 203ja after the update by the process of S623 has become 0 (S625), and if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja has become 0 ( S625: Yes), a state command indicating that the state has shifted to the normal state is set (S626), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S622 that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is 0 (S622: No), and if it is determined that the value of the variable probability counter 203ja is not 0 in the process of S625. , this process ends.

Next, details of the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 311. FIG. 311 is a flowchart showing the second winning process 12 (S2521) in the eleventh embodiment. This second winning process 12 (S2521) is a process executed in place of the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment, and is similar to the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment. Similarly, this is a process for performing control according to a win in the first specific winning hole 65a detected during execution of a small winning game.

Of the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S2701 to S2707 is different from each process of S2701 to S2707 of the second winning process (see FIG. 57) in the first embodiment. The same processing is performed. In the second winning process 12 (see FIG. 311) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S2704 is finished, the audio lamp control is used to notify that a winning to the first specific winning opening 65a has been detected during the execution of the small winning game. A small winning prize command is set to notify the device 113 (S2711), and the process moves to S2705.

The small hit winning command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is used for voice lamp control in the external output process (S2201) of the main process (see FIG. 52) executed by the MPU 201. It is sent to device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the small hit winning command, it refers to the winning information of the first special symbol and the value of the production counter 223h, and selects a winning sound from the winning sound selection table 222jb (see FIG. 308(b)). Select a sound and set the output of the selected winning sound. Thereby, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol can be suggested by the type of winning sound every time a winning occurs in the first specific winning hole 65a in the small winning game of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the eleventh embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 312 to 316. First, with reference to FIG. 312, the state command processing 12 (S4231) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the eleventh embodiment will be described. State command processing 12 (S4231) in the eleventh embodiment is a process executed in place of the state command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 62). ), this is a process for setting the current gaming state in the state setting area 223j based on the state command output from the main control device 110.

Of the status command processing 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, each of S4401 to S4406, S4410, and S4411 corresponds to S4401 to S4406 of the status command processing in the first embodiment (see FIG. 62), respectively. The same processes as S4410 and S4411 are executed. Furthermore, in the status command processing 12 (see FIG. 312) in the eleventh embodiment, when the process of S4401 is completed, it is then determined whether the current status command is a status command for indicating the gaming status after the end of the jackpot. (S4421), and if it is determined that it is a status command to indicate the gaming status after the end of the jackpot (S4421: Yes), the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is reset to 0 (S4422).

When the process of S4422 is completed, next, it is determined whether the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot (the gaming state determined in the processing of S4401) is the normal state (S4423), and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state. If it is determined that this is the case (S4423: Yes), the first hit flag 223jb is set to ON (S4424), and the process proceeds to S4436. On the other hand, in the process of S4423, if it is determined that the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is not the normal state (S4423: No), the first win flag 223jb is set to OFF (S4425), and the process moves to S4426. .

In the process of S4426 executed after the process of S4424 or S4425, a value corresponding to the gaming status notified by the status command is set in the status setting area 223j (S4426), and the process moves to S4402. On the other hand, in the process of S4421, if it is determined that the status command received this time is not a status command for indicating the gaming status after the end of the jackpot (S4421: No), each process of S4422 to S4426 is skipped, The process moves to S4402.

By executing this status command processing 12 (see FIG. 312), it is possible to determine whether the jackpot is a first hit (a jackpot won in a normal state) or a consecutive jackpot (a jackpot won in a gaming state other than the normal state). Accordingly, the first hit flag 223jb can be updated appropriately. Therefore, the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) can be executed at an appropriate timing (the number of fluctuations in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol may end).

Next, details of the small win related process 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 313. FIG. 313 is a flowchart showing small hit related processing 12 (S4521) in the eleventh embodiment. This small win related process 12 (S4521) is a process that is executed in place of the small win related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 65), and is the same as the small win related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 65). Similarly, this is a process for executing control according to the type of command related to small winnings.

Of the small win related processes 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S4701 to S4710 is different from each process of S4701 to S4710 of the small win related process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 65). The same processing is performed. In addition, in the small win related process 12 (see FIG. 313) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S4701 that the small win start command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S4701: No), Next, it is determined whether or not a small hit winning command has been received (S4721), and if it is determined that a small winning winning command has been received (S4721: Yes), then the winning sound selection table 222jb (FIG. 308(b) (see) (S4722), selects the winning sound corresponding to the data of the execution area of the first special symbol and the value of the production counter 223h from the winning information storage area 223b, and sets the output (S4723). ), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S4721, if it is determined that the small hit winning command has not been received (S4721: No), the process moves to S4703.

Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the variable display setting process 12 (S4121) in the eleventh embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 12 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process (see FIG. 69) in the first embodiment. Similarly, in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed based on the first or second special symbol variable pattern command received from the main controller 110. This is a process for setting a variable pattern command and transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

Of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, each process of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, and S5110 to S5113 is performed in the variable display setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 69). ) are executed. In addition, in the variation display setting process 11 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined that the special figure 1 variation start flag 223d is on in the process of S5101 (S5101: Yes), then the variation display setting process 11 (see FIG. 314) The value of the number counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5121), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S5102).

When the process of S5102 is completed, it is then determined whether the current state is a time saving state of normal symbols (S5122). In the process of S5122, it is determined whether the data set (stored) in the state setting area 223j is data indicating either a variable probability state or a time saving state. In the process of S5122, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time-saving state (S5122: Yes), a time-saving medium performance setting process is executed to set the performance mode (for example, river breakthrough performance) in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. (S5123), and the process moves to S5106. Details of this time-saving effect setting process (S5123) will be described later with reference to FIG. 315.

On the other hand, in the process of S5122, if it is determined that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S5122: No), the first special symbol display mode that shows a variable display mode according to the variable pattern extracted from the variable pattern command A variation pattern command is set (S5124), and the process moves to S5106.

In addition, in the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S5107 that the special figure 2 variation start flag 223e is on (S5107: Yes), then the variation display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) The value of the number counter 223ja is updated by adding 1 (S5125), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223e is set to OFF (S5108). Next, instead of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 is executed (S5126), and the process moves to S5110. Details of this variable display setting process 12 for special figure 2 (S5126) will be described later with reference to FIG. 316.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, details of the above-mentioned time-saving effect setting process (S5123) will be described. As described above, this time-saving medium performance setting process (S5123) is a process for setting the performance mode in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. When this time-saving medium production setting process (S5123) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the first hit flag 223jb is on (S5131), and if it is determined that the first hit flag 223jb is on (S5131). :Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is any one of 24, 49, and 74 (that is, whether it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the first hit). (S5132). In the process of S5132, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223jb is any one of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: Yes), the process for setting the performance mode of the river breakthrough performance (S5134 ~ Each process of S5137) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5132, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223jb is a value different from any of 24, 49, and 74 (S5132: No), it means that it is not the timing to execute the river breakthrough effect. Therefore, the process for setting the performance mode of the river breakthrough performance (each process of S5134 to S5137) is skipped, and the process moves to S5139.

On the other hand, in the process of S5131, if it is determined that the first hit flag 223jb is off (S5131: No), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is one of 9, 24, and 39. (That is, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to execute the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of consecutive games) (S5133). In the process of S5133, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is any one of 9, 24, and 39 (that is, it is the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of consecutive hits) (S5133: Yes), the process for setting the performance mode of the river breakthrough performance (each process of S5134 to S5137) is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S5133, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is not 9, 24, or 39 (that is, it is not the execution timing of the river breakthrough effect after the occurrence of consecutive hits) (S5133: No), the process for setting the performance mode of the river breakthrough performance (each process of S5134 to S5137) is skipped, and the process moves to S5139.

In the process for setting the performance mode of the river breakthrough performance (each process from S5134 to S5137), first, it is determined whether the remaining time shortening number is 1 (S5134), and if the remaining time shortening number is not 1 (2 (S5134: No), it is determined to execute the river breakthrough effect in the form indicating the continuation of the chance zone (see FIG. 298(b)) (S5135), and the process moves to S5139. do. On the other hand, in the process of S5134, if it is determined that the number of remaining time reductions is 1 (S5134: Yes), then it is determined whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state (S5136). In the process of S5136, if it is determined that the gaming state is in a definite variable state (S5136: Yes), it means that the state will shift to a definite state at the start of the next fluctuation, so there is no river breakthrough in the manner of notifying the rush entry. It is determined to execute the effect (see FIG. 299(a)) (S5137), and the process moves to S5139. On the other hand, in the process of S5136, if it is determined that the variable probability state is not (that is, the time saving state) (S5136: No), it means that the state will shift to the normal state at the start of the next fluctuation. It is determined to execute the river breakthrough effect (see FIG. 299(b)) in which the breakthrough fails (S5138), and the process moves to S5139. In the process of S5139, a variable pattern command for displaying the first special symbol is set based on the variable pattern extracted from the variable pattern command (S5139), and this process ends.

By executing this time-saving medium effect setting process (see Figure 315), while the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set, the river breakthrough effect will be executed every time the number of fluctuations that may cause the time-saving state to end is reached. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, details of the above-mentioned special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (S5126) will be described. This special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (S5126) is a process executed in place of the special figure 2 variable display setting process (see FIG. 71) in the first embodiment, and is Similar to the variable display setting process for 2 (see FIG. 71), this is a process for setting the variable display mode of the second special symbol.

Of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, each of S5301 to S5303 and S5309 includes the special figure 2 variable display setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. The same processes as those in S5301 to S5303 and S5309 (see 71) are executed. In addition, in the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the eleventh embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S5303 that the current gaming state is a potential state (S5303: Yes), then , it is determined whether or not the current lottery result of the second special symbol is a small hit (S5311). In the process of S5311, if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S5311: Yes), the small win effect selection table 222ja (see FIG. 308(a)) is read out (S5312), and the winning information storage area 223b is The production mode corresponding to the data corresponding to the first special symbol and the value of the production counter 223h is specified (S5313). Next, a variable pattern command for displaying a second special symbol indicating the specified performance mode is set (S5314), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S5311, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (S5311: No), the process moves to S5309.

By executing this variable display setting process 12 for special symbol 2 (see FIG. 316), each time a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol, the performance mode of the variable display effect that indicates the small win is changed during execution. , or the lottery result of the pending first special symbol can be suggested. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is configured to shift to the probable state when the number of time reductions elapses in the variable probability state. In the potential state, when you win a small hit with a high probability, the first specific prize opening 65a is frequently opened (you can get a chance to win the prize ball frequently), and when you win a jackpot, Since the same state is repeated (looped) at a high rate, a very advantageous gaming state is created for the player. Therefore, in the variable probability state, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the goal is to pass the time saving number of normal symbols and move to the probability state. It can improve your interest. In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, it is more likely that winning a probability variable jackpot in a probability variable state or time saving state than in a probability variable state (a probability variable state transitioned to after the first win) based on winning a probability variable jackpot in a normal state. It is configured such that the average value of the set number of time reductions is smaller in the variable probability state (the variable probability state shifted after the occurrence of consecutive games) based on the above. In other words, the condition for transition to the probability state is easier to satisfy in the probability variation state set when consecutive hits occur than in the probability variation state set at the time of the first hit. It is configured so that it is easy to Therefore, it is easier to pass the time saving number when a consecutive game occurs, so even if you win the jackpot before the time saving number elapses in the variable probability state and end up looping in the variable probability state, Since there is a high possibility that a number of time reductions (a small number of time reductions) that will easily lead to a transition to a certain state is set, the player's disappointment can be alleviated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation for playing from decreasing.

In addition, in the 11th embodiment, when the game state after the end of the jackpot is set to a variable probability state or a time-saving state, the river breakthrough effect is performed every time the number of fluctuations in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol may end is reached. By executing , will the time saving state of the normal symbol continue, will the time saving state of the normal symbol end and move to the potential state, or will the time saving state of the normal symbol end and move to the normal state. is configured to be notified periodically (every 25th or 15th special symbol lottery). By configuring this way, while the chance zone (time saving state with normal symbols) is set, it is possible for the player to play the game with one of the pleasures being that the next river breakthrough effect will be executed. Can be done. In addition, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the player wishes to continuously lose in the special symbol lottery at least until the next river breakthrough performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by creating a configuration in which there is a possibility of transitioning to the normal state if the river breakthrough performance fails, the continuation of the time-saving state is announced during the river breakthrough performance (even though the river has been breached, the state may change to the potential state). Even if the situation was not reported, it can be made to think that it is better than being notified of the normal state. That is, even if the potential state is not reported, it is possible to prevent players from being disappointed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the production mode during the small winning variation of the second special symbol and the output when a winning to the first specific winning opening 65a is detected during the execution of the small winning game. Depending on the type of winning sound, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the other special symbol variation (variation display of the first special symbol) will be a jackpot. Conventionally, gaming machines have been widely known that each time a special symbol lottery result is executed, a variable display effect of symbols is performed to indicate the lottery result. In such conventional gaming machines, the player's interest is increased by executing various interesting effects that suggest the lottery results of special symbols during the execution of the variable display effect of symbols. However, in gaming machines with specifications that allow multiple fluctuating displays to be executed at the same time, there is a problem that while paying attention to the performance mode associated with one fluctuating display, the performance mode of the other fluctuating display performance may be overlooked. There was a point. In particular, in gaming machines that display one variable display in a manner that is easier to visually recognize than the other, it becomes difficult to confirm the presentation mode of the other variable display (the side that is difficult to see), and the other variable display effect becomes difficult to confirm. There is a problem in that if a jackpot is started when the player is not paying attention to the game, the player may be confused. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol, which is mainly executed in the potential state, is prioritized (visually recognized) over the variable display of the first special symbol, which is difficult to execute. If the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is being executed at the same time as the first special symbol is displayed (in an easy-to-understand manner), the first special symbol will be drawn by lottery by the small winning performance of the second special symbol (the performance mode accompanying the fluctuating display). The structure is designed to suggest the results. With this configuration, it is possible to check the degree of expectation of a jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol by simply paying attention to the production mode accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In addition, in the present 11th embodiment, the display mode in the small winning performance of the second special symbol was configured to suggest the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol being executed at the same time is a jackpot. It is not limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the lottery result of the first special symbol is suggested by the performance mode of the performance executed during the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, the display mode of the variable display of the normal symbols on the second symbol display device may be configured to suggest (notify) the degree of expectation that the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a jackpot. good. With this configuration, by simply checking the fluctuating display performance on the side that is easy to see, it is possible to suggest to the player the result of the fluctuating display performance on the side that is difficult to see, thereby realizing a more easily understandable performance. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player.

In the eleventh embodiment, the number of probability variations is set to 100, but the number of probability variations is not limited to 100, and may be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the number of probability variations, the degree of advantage for the player becomes lower, so the gambling nature can be suppressed. On the other hand, by increasing the number of probability variations, it is possible to further increase the degree of advantage when the most advantageous potential state is reached, so players can play the game with a stronger expectation of transitioning to the potential state. I can do it. Similarly, the number of time reductions can be arbitrarily determined. By reducing the number of time savings, it becomes easier to transition from a variable state to a potential state, which can be advantageous for the player, and by increasing the number of time savings, it becomes difficult to transition to a potential state. This allows you to suppress your gambling tendencies.

In the eleventh embodiment, the ease of transition to the potential state depends on whether it is the first hit (a jackpot won in a normal state) or after a series of wins (a jackpot won in a state other than the normal state). (The ease with which the end condition of the time-saving state of the normal symbol is satisfied) was configured to be different, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that as the number of consecutive games increases, the number of time reductions set after the end of the jackpot decreases. As a result, even if it is not possible to shift to the potential state, the player can feel as if the player is getting closer to the potential state each time a series of wins occurs, so the player's play will be affected. It can improve your interest. In the eleventh embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, a "jackpot A11" is determined at a rate of 5%, and an advantageous potential state is set after the jackpot ends. In this sense, even with the configuration of the eleventh embodiment described above, it can be said that the more the number of consecutive hits increases, the higher the possibility of transitioning to the potential state becomes.

In the 11th embodiment, when a small win is achieved in the lottery of the second special symbol in the probability state, an effect is executed that suggests the degree of expectation that the first special symbol is in the process of changing the jackpot. However, it is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to indicate the expectation level, which is the type of jackpot that will transition to the probability state. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation that the advantageous potential state will continue, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. Further, it may be configured to notify (suggest) the degree of expectation that the jackpot is not included in the hold at the time of transition to the potential state during the fluctuating performance of the second special symbol. That is, if a jackpot is achieved in the drawing of the first special symbol even though the game has moved to the potential state, the potential state will be ended relatively early, which may disappoint the player. Therefore, there is a possibility that the player does not want to win the jackpot with the first special symbol in the probability state. Therefore, by adopting a configuration that suggests that the jackpot is not included in the reservation, it is possible to make the player understand that the potential state will not end at least with the jackpot of the first special symbol. It is possible to make the person expect that the latent state will continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, on the contrary, the expectation level (pinch degree) for being on the verge of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol in the probability state is changed during the fluctuating performance of the second special symbol (and during the small winning game). It may also be configured to notify (suggest). With this configuration, when a performance with a high degree of pinch is executed, it is possible to make the player play the game while creating a sense of tension, so it is possible to add variety to the game. In this case, when a specific type of small winning game is started in the lottery of the second special symbol, it may be possible to forcibly stop the variable display of the first special symbol in the event of a loss. In other words, by converting a normal jackpot into a loss, the potential state may be extended. With this configuration, after a performance with a high degree of pinch is performed, a specific type of small winning game is performed, thereby making the player feel a great sense of relief. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 317 to 339. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, the potential state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is likely to be executed and small winning games are frequently executed. In addition, by making the transition to the potential state most likely when the time saving state of the normal symbol ends in the variable probability state, we expect that the failure will continue over the set number of time reductions in the variable probability state. The structure was designed to allow for the realization of innovative gameplay.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is configured as an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and small winning games are frequently executed. was configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. Then, by ending the number of probability variations in the probability state, the system shifts to the most advantageous normal state. In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, it is configured to be able to directly shift from the most disadvantageous gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state without going through a jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game in the most disadvantageous probability state with one goal of making the probability variable number of times elapse.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment in terms of configuration in that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 The configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 has been partially changed. and that the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the gaming state in the twelfth embodiment will be briefly explained. As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the normal mode is configured as the most advantageous gaming state, and the potential state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state. In addition, the time saving state and the variable probability state are configured as gaming states that are more advantageous than the potential state. Since a special specification is adopted in which the normal state is advantageous, in the explanation of the transition, the advantageous normal state will be referred to as "continuous play mode." Further, the disadvantageous potential state will be referred to as a "normal mode", and the relatively advantageous probability variable state and time saving state will be referred to as "chance mode A" and "chance mode B", respectively.

Next, with reference to FIG. 317, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 317, the board structure of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment is different from the board structure of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 2). The upper first ball entry port 64b1 and the lower first ball entry port 64b2 are deleted, and a center first ball entry port 64c is provided instead. Furthermore, a small attacker 4650 is provided below the center first ball entrance 64c, which is opened when a small hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. In addition, since this small attacker 4650 is surrounded by nails and the central first prize opening 64c on the left, right, and upper sides, it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball during the small winning opening period of the first special symbol. . In the twelfth embodiment, the small win of the first special symbol is provided because the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive game mode, and the second special symbol is long. This is because it is installed for the purpose of forcibly ending the long fluctuation in the event of a fluctuation, and is not intended to allow you to win a prize ball. In other words, even if the second special symbol fluctuates long, it is configured so that when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, there is a high probability (475/480) of winning a small hit. With the start of , the second special symbol that has been fluctuating for a long time can be forcibly stopped with a missed stop symbol. Therefore, even if the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a game state other than the consecutive game mode and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol starts, you can easily change the long fluctuation by returning to the left-handed game. Fluctuations can be ended.

Further, as shown in FIG. 317, on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 on the game board 13, there is a second ball entrance (through gate) 67 and a right first ball entrance provided downstream of the through gate 67. A right electric accessory 64ra that can open and close the upper surface of the opening 64r and the first right ball entry opening 64r, and a right electric accessory 64ra that can open and close the upper surface of the right electric accessory 64r while the right electric accessory 64ra is closed. A second ball entry port 640 is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through can enter. As shown in FIG. 317, the falling path of the game ball is set so that only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 with the right electric accessory 64ra closed can reach the second ball entrance 640. is set. In other words, even if you hit right in the time saving state of the normal symbol where the right electric accessory 64ra is likely to be in the open state, almost all the game balls that passed through the through gate 67 will enter the right first ball entrance 64r. As a result, the game ball cannot enter the second ball entry port 640. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it possible to proceed with the game by playing right-handed games even in a variable probability state (chance mode A) or a time saving state (chance mode B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 317, in the game board 13 according to the twelfth embodiment, the second variable winning device 650 is deleted, and only the first variable winning device 65 is provided. As a result, in the case of a jackpot or a small win of the second special symbol, the first variable winning device 65 is opened. That is, chance mode A and chance mode B in which the time-saving state of normal symbols is set, the most advantageous consecutive winning mode in which small hits occur frequently by entering the game ball into the second ball entry port 640, and The jackpot state is configured so that it can be progressed by hitting the ball to the right. In other words, all states (states advantageous to the player in some respect) other than the most disadvantageous gaming state (potential state) for the player are configured to be playable by right-handed play. As a result, it is possible to classify right-handed games as advantageous and left-handed games as disadvantageous, making it possible to realize gaming properties that are easier for players to understand.

In addition, since the normal state of the normal symbol is set during the execution of the jackpot game, if you play the right-handed game in an attempt to win the prize ball by letting the ball enter the first specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot, almost When four or more game balls enter the second ball entrance 640, the number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game, the second special symbol almost starts to fluctuate. However, as mentioned above, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol, there is a high probability of a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol can be forcibly ended with a miss, so after the jackpot ends. Even if a game state other than the normal state is set as the game state and variable display of the second special symbol is started, the game can proceed without any problem.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 318 to 320, various characteristic entertainment effects in the twelfth embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 318, an example of the performance mode in the normal mode (potential state) will be described. As described above, the twelfth embodiment is configured to directly shift to the most advantageous continuous winning mode (normal state) by allowing the number of probability changes to elapse in the potential state. Therefore, in the normal mode, a performance aiming at a potential state is executed. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 318(a), an effect is performed in which a character 811 imitating a rabbit climbs up a rocky mountain. In addition, in the display area HR1 formed above the character 811 climbing the rocky mountain, the words "Aim for the top!!" are displayed, and in the display area HR2 formed on the right side of the character 811, the normal mode is displayed. Display contents indicating the remaining number of fluctuations until the period ends (the number of reliable fluctuations has elapsed) are displayed. In the example of FIG. 318(a), a case is illustrated in which the words "50 m remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. The remaining meter display to the top is subtracted by 1m each time the variable display is executed, so the remaining meter (distance) to the top is displayed to the player when entering consecutive game mode. It can be easily understood that this is the remaining number of fluctuations until the transition.

FIG. 318(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of display contents when the number of definite variations has elapsed in the normal mode (the result has been consecutively missed over 100 definite variations in the potential state). As shown in FIG. 318(b), when the number of probability changes has elapsed and the mode shifts to the continuous shooting mode, an effect in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain is executed, and the display area HR1 is displayed with the message "Top Reached!!” is displayed. Furthermore, the words "0 m remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that the game has shifted to the consecutive game mode.

Figure 319(a) shows the state (preparation) from the transition to consecutive game mode until the state where it is possible to actually win the prize ball (until winning the small hit in the lottery of the second special symbol). FIG. As shown in FIG. 319(a), in the preparation state, the words "Right hit" are displayed in the small area Dm3, and the message "Start RUSH by right hit!!" is displayed in the display area HR1. is displayed. Further, the words "RUSH preparation in progress" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that by hitting the ball to the right, the player enters a RUSH state in which he or she can win a prize ball.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 319(a), when the mode is shifted to consecutive winning mode, the small area Dm1 is switched to a display area for performing a variable display of the second special symbol. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, the small area Dm1 is configured as a display area for displaying a variable display of the special symbol that is mainly executed in each gaming state. In addition, a small area Dm2 for displaying a variable display of the other special symbol is located at the lower right side of the sub display area Ds, and is a display area that is relatively smaller than the small area Dm1 (in a manner that is difficult for the player to visually recognize). )Is displayed. Thereby, regardless of the game state, by checking only the small area Dm1, it is possible to visually recognize mainly the variable display of the special symbol to be executed, so that the convenience for the player can be improved. Further, by displaying the variable display on the side different from the side where the execution is mainly performed in a manner that is difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to draw attention to the small area Dm1. That is, the player can easily understand which variable display is mainly executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide gameplay that is easy for players to understand.

FIG. 319(b) is an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the preparation state and a small win is won in the second special symbol lottery. FIG. As shown in FIG. 319(b), when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in the prepared state and wins a small hit in the second special symbol lottery, a message saying “RUSH has started!!” appears in the display area HR1. ” are displayed, and at the same time, the words “RUSH enters!!” are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. Further, the treasure box 812 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that a state (RUSH) in which prize balls can be won in the consecutive game mode has started. Therefore, it is possible to realize gameplay that is easy for players to understand.

The twelfth embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is 1/2. In other words, even if a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, there is a relatively high possibility that it will simply be a miss (the probability is about 1/2 that it will be a miss). In the twelfth embodiment, the preparation state is configured so that if the second special symbol is out of lottery in the preparation state, the preparation state is continued as it is. In other words, the configuration is such that the start of RUSH is not notified until the player wins the small hit and is in a state where it is possible to actually obtain the prize ball. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied with the situation where the player continues to be unable to obtain prize balls even though the start of RUSH has been notified.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which when a lottery of one special symbol results in a jackpot, the lottery of the other special symbol executed during the execution of the jackpot variation is forcibly turned into a loss. ing. Therefore, if there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from normal mode to consecutive game mode, and the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that started at the same time as the start of consecutive game mode is a jackpot. , while the jackpot variation is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol will always be a loss. In other words, if the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts at the time of transitioning to the preparation state, even if the right-handed game is continued and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed consecutively, it will not be possible to win. By continuing (not winning a small hit), the preparation state continues for a long time (until the jackpot fluctuation ends). As mentioned above, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is 1/2, so the more successive misses occur in the preparation state, the more the anticipation during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol can be improved. More specifically, for example, in the preparation state, the possibility that the failure will occur four or more times in a row is about 6%, and the possibility that the failure will occur six or more times in a row is about 1%. Therefore, even if the player loses in the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation state, the player's expectation of a jackpot can be improved, so that the player's interest in the game in the preparation state can be further improved. .

In addition, in the present twelfth embodiment, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol was set to 1/2, but the probability of a small win is not limited to this, and the small win probability may be set arbitrarily. . For example, the small winning probability may be increased so that when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as in the eleventh embodiment, the small winning probability is almost (for example, 59/60 probability). Good too. With this configuration, if a miss occurs even once in the preparation state, the expectation that the fluctuating first special symbol will be a jackpot can be improved, so if the second special symbol misses in the preparation state. It is possible to improve the player's interest in such a case. Also, the higher the small winning probability, the shorter the preparation state is likely to be (the average number of drawings from the time you switch to consecutive game mode until you win a small win becomes smaller), so after switching to consecutive game mode , it is possible to shorten the period until the ball is secured by winning the prize ball. In other words, it becomes possible to award the prize ball to the player more quickly, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, the small winning probability may be lowered to make it easier to miss during the preparation state. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to lose consecutively, and therefore, it is possible to more frequently create a feeling of expectation that the first special symbol is in the process of changing into a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320, a description will be given of changes over time in the performance mode before and after the preparation state (before and after the start of RUSH) in the twelfth embodiment. First, referring to FIG. 320(a), if the reserved ball of the first special symbol is a miss at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive game mode, and the second special symbol is drawn twice during the preparation mode, A description will be given of changes over time in the performance mode when the lottery results in successive misses and a small win in the third lottery of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 320(a), in the twelfth embodiment, when the 99th special symbol lottery is executed in the normal mode (the probability state where the number of probability changes is set to 100), the above-mentioned An effect of reaching the top of a rocky mountain (see FIG. 318(b)) is executed. Then, the variable display of the 100th special symbol is started, and at the same time, the display mode is switched to the preparation state (see FIG. 319(a)), and a notification is given to play the right-handed game. During this preparation state, when the game ball is hit right into the second ball entrance 640, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the small area Dm1. Then, as shown in FIG. 320, the display indicating the preparation state is continued during the two missed fluctuations of the second special symbol, and the third fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation) of the second special symbol is started. At the point in time, the display mode is set to indicate RUSH entry (see FIG. 319(b)). Further, at the start of the small winning game, the fluctuation of the first special symbol which was fluctuating is forcibly stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the RUSH display continues until the consecutive game mode ends. In addition, in the present twelfth embodiment, since the consecutive winning mode is configured to be in the normal state (low probability state for special symbols and normal state for normal symbols), the advantageous consecutive winning mode is not activated unless you win the jackpot. continue. Therefore, it is possible to realize an innovative gaming experience in which the player plays the game over as long a number of drawings as possible in the hope that he will not win the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 320(b), the performance mode over time when the reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from the normal mode to the consecutive game mode is the lottery result corresponding to "Jackpot D12" Explain the changes. Here, "Jackpot D12" is a type of jackpot in which a time-saving state is set in which the number of time-savings is two after the jackpot ends. In other words, after the jackpot ends, it is a type of jackpot that shifts to consecutive winnings mode by winning the special symbol lottery up to two times in a row, and it is relatively easy to transition to consecutive winnings mode (game It is a jackpot of the type (which makes people happy). In the twelfth embodiment, the transition to consecutive winnings mode is notified only when the variable display corresponding to "jackpot D12" starts at the time of transition to consecutive winnings mode, and other first special When a jackpot of a symbol (relatively difficult to shift to continuous game mode) is pending, the system is configured to notify the jackpot winning without notifying the transition to continuous game mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed when the consecutive game mode ends without winning a small hit even though the game shifts to the consecutive game mode.

As shown in FIG. 320(b), when the transition to consecutive winning mode is started and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to "Jackpot D12" is started, the second special symbol that was started during the execution of the jackpot variation is All variable displays of special symbols will be missed. Therefore, while the jackpot variation is being executed, there will be successive misses, so the more the misses continue, the higher the player's expectation that the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being executed. can be done. In the twelfth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the first special symbol lottery in the consecutive game mode, a variable time of 10 seconds is set. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is out of the lottery, a one-second fluctuation time is set with a high probability. Therefore, if you take into account the period from when the game enters the consecutive game mode until the game ball enters the second ball entry port 640, and the institution that displays the lottery result of the second special symbol, etc., the jackpot will fluctuate. The variable display of the second special symbol can be executed around five times during (10 seconds). The probability of losing 5 times in a row in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol when the 1st special symbol is not changing is low (approximately 3%), so if the 1st special symbol continues to be a jackpot, the 1st special symbol will be a jackpot. It is possible to strengthen the player's confidence that the situation is changing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in playing the game in the preparation state.

<Electrical configuration in twelfth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 321(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321(a), the configuration of the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment differs from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment) described above (see FIG. 14) in the variation pattern scenario. The difference is that a table 202ka is added. The ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment is also different in that part of the first random number table 202a, part of the small winning random number table 202b, and part of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f have been changed. are doing.

The variation pattern scenario table 202ka is a data table that is referenced to select a table for determining a variation pattern from the variation pattern selection table 202f. When the special symbol lottery is executed, this variation pattern scenario table 202ka is referred to, one variation pattern table is selected from the variation pattern selection table 202f, and a variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table. be done. Details of this variation pattern scenario table 202ka will be described later with reference to FIG. 322(b).

First, with reference to FIG. 321(b), the configuration of the first winning random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321(b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the first winning random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 321(b), in the first winning random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment, a random value (counter value) of "0 to 3" is determined as a jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol. Four random numbers (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 321(b), five random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 4" are defined as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

Therefore, when a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol low probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/120 (4/480), while a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol high probability state. If executed, the probability of winning the jackpot is 1/96 (5/480). Note that the change in the jackpot probability in the twelfth embodiment is intended to prevent the consecutive game mode from becoming too advantageous and the normal mode from becoming too disadvantageous for the player. . That is, if the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is low (for example, the case of 1/240, which is the same as in the 11th embodiment), once the game moves to the consecutive game mode, it is difficult to end the consecutive game mode to which it has transitioned. This results in an excessive advantage for the player, which may be disadvantageous to the hole. In addition, if the jackpot probability in the high probability state of the special symbol is high (for example, in the case of 1/60, which is the same as in the 11th embodiment), the number of probability changes is elapsed in the normal mode (over 100 special symbol drawings) Since the possibility of consecutive misses is low, the possibility of transitioning to continuous winning mode is extremely low. This may put the player at an excessive disadvantage, and there is a possibility that the player may avoid playing games at the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the present twelfth embodiment, the jackpot probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is increased to prevent an excessive advantage when shifting to the consecutive winning mode, and the high probability state of the special symbol is increased. The jackpot probability is lowered to prevent the normal mode from becoming excessively disadvantageous.

Next, details of the small winning random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 322(a). FIG. 322 is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment. In the small hit random number table 202b in the twelfth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 322(a), the random number (counter value) for determining a small win in the lottery of the first special symbol is "5 to 479". 475 random numbers are defined. On the other hand, 240 random numbers from "240 to 479" are defined as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be small wins in the lottery of the second special symbol.

That is, in the twelfth embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the small win is won with a high probability (probability of 475/480). As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a state other than the consecutive game mode and the second special symbol makes a long change, the long change is This is to force the termination. That is, when the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed, by executing the lottery of the first special symbol, it almost becomes a small hit, and when the small win starts, the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped due to a miss. It can be displayed. Therefore, even if the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 in a game state other than the consecutive game mode and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol starts, you can easily change the long fluctuation by returning to the left-handed game. Fluctuations can be ended.

In addition, by setting the small hit probability of the second special symbol to 1/2 (240/480), the lottery of the second special symbol in the preparation state has a relatively high rate of winnings. As a result, if there are consecutive misses in the preparation state, the small win will be forcibly set to be a miss because the second special symbol was a miss in the lottery, or the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol is being executed. This can make it difficult to understand what is being done. Therefore, it is possible to realize an innovative game feature in which the more the second special symbol misses continuously in the preparation state, the higher the expectation of a jackpot of the other side's special symbol (that is, the first special symbol) becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment will be explained. FIG. 322(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 322(b), the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka shows the correspondence between the number of special symbols drawn after the jackpot ends (or after the RAM is cleared) and the selected fluctuation pattern for each type of previous jackpot. is stipulated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 322(b), when the previous jackpot type is a variable jackpot, the number of drawings for the special symbol is in the range of 1 to 99, A definite start table 202f11 is defined in association with the table 202f11. The details of this variable/potential start table 202f11 will be described later with reference to FIG. 324. On the other hand, a RUSH table 202f14 is defined in association with a range in which the number of lottery draws is 100 or more. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326(b), but when this RUSH table 202f14 is referred to and a fluctuation pattern is selected, a short fluctuation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol. (seconds) fluctuation pattern will be selected. Therefore, just by playing the right-handed game, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed continuously in a short period of time, creating an advantageous situation in which the player wins a small win with a high probability (1/2).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 322(b), when the previous jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the time-saving start table 202f12 are defined in association with each other. Details of this time-saving start table 202f12 will be described later with reference to FIG. 325. On the other hand, a RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326(b)) is defined in association with a range in which the number of lottery draws is 100 or more.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 322(b), in a state where no jackpot has been won even once (so-called state after RAM is cleared), the number of drawings of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99. , a normal start table 202f13 are defined in association with each other. Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 326(a), the normal start table 202f13 has a relatively long fluctuation time regardless of the lottery result when the second special symbol lottery is executed. This is a table in which long fluctuations (of 60 seconds) are set. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized and put into a normal state by clearing the RAM, it is possible to prevent the state from becoming the same as the consecutive game mode, which is advantageous to the player. In other words, like a general gaming machine, when initialized, it can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an advantageous state immediately after initialization and causing the hole to suffer an unexpected disadvantage. On the other hand, a RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326(b)) is defined in association with a range in which the number of special symbols drawn is 100 or more. For this reason, even after initializing the pachinko machine 10, the operation is the same as the normal mode except for the jackpot probability (the operation shifts to consecutive game mode when the special symbol is drawn 100 times consecutively and loses). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing games with the pachinko machine 10 due to the state after initialization becoming excessively disadvantageous to the player, and thus the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. .

In the fourteenth embodiment, whether or not the state is after RAM clearing (initialization) is determined is, for example, whether the RAM 203 has been won a jackpot at least once after RAM clearing. It is configured such that it can be determined by providing a flag (first time winning flag) indicating whether or not the winning result has been won. If the initial winning flag is off, it is determined that the state is normal after initialization, and if the number of fluctuations is within the range of 1 to 99 times, the normal start table 202f13 is referred to and the winning state is 100 times. In the above range, a variation pattern scenario in which the RUSH table 202f14 is referred to is set. On the other hand, by winning the jackpot, the first-time winning flag is set to ON, so that from then on, a scenario is set in which the normal start table 202f13 is not referenced.

Next, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 323. FIG. 323 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 323, in the twelfth embodiment, six jackpot types, "jackpot A12" to "jackpot F12", are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Furthermore, two jackpot types, "jackpot G12" and "jackpot I12", are defined as jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 323, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "Jackpot A12" as the jackpot type for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". They are defined in correspondence. This "jackpot A12" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and chance mode A (probability variable state) is set after the jackpot ends. This chance mode A continues until the special symbol lottery is executed a maximum of 100 times after the end of the jackpot, and when the 100 times have passed, the game shifts to the consecutive winning mode. Therefore, "Jackpot A12" is a relatively advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, the jackpot type "Jackpot B12" is defined in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 49". This "Jackpot B12" is a type of jackpot where the number of rounds of jackpot is 2 rounds, and after the jackpot ends, it is set to normal mode (potential state) or chance mode A (variable probability state) (2 round probability variable jackpot) It is. More specifically, if you win "Jackpot B12" in normal mode or consecutive game mode, after the jackpot ends, you will be set to the disadvantageous normal mode, while in the time saving state or variable probability state, you will win "Jackpot B12". If this happens, chance mode A is set which is relatively advantageous after the jackpot. Therefore, "Jackpot B12" is relatively advantageous if won in chance mode A or chance mode B, but relatively disadvantageous in normal mode or consecutive game mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 69", "jackpot C12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with it. This "Jackpot C12" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and the most disadvantageous normal mode (potential state) is set after the jackpot ends. That is, "jackpot C12" is the jackpot type that is the most disadvantageous in terms of gaming conditions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "70", "jackpot D12" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value "70". This "Jackpot D12" is a type of jackpot (normal jackpot for 8 rounds) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. This chance mode B ends when the special symbol lottery is executed twice after the end of the jackpot (the number of time saving times is set to 2). In other words, the game shifts to consecutive winnings mode by winning the special symbol lottery twice in a row at most, so it is an advantageous type of jackpot that is extremely easy to shift to consecutive winnings mode.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 323, for the values of the first winning type counter C2 of "71 to 74", "jackpot E12" is defined as the jackpot type in association. This "Jackpot E12" is a type of jackpot (2 round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. This chance mode B is set to 50 times if you win "Jackpot E12" in the normal mode or probability mode, and 25 times if you win "Jackpot E12" in the time saving state or variable probability state. be done. Chance mode B has a lower jackpot probability than chance mode A, and is advantageous to the player because it shifts to consecutive game mode after the number of time reductions has elapsed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 323, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "75 to 99", "jackpot F12" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. This "Jackpot F12" is a type of jackpot (2 round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds and the chance mode B (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. Note that the number of time reductions in chance mode B that is set after the end of "jackpot F12" is set to be greater than the number of time reductions in chance mode B that is set after the end of "jackpot E12". Therefore, the chance mode B after the end of "Jackpot F12" is in a disadvantageous state in which it is difficult to elapse the number of time reductions.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "jackpot G12" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 69". ing. This "jackpot G12" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the chance mode A (probability variable state) is set to 100 times after the jackpot ends. In addition, "Jackpot I12" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 99". This "jackpot I12" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 rounds and is set to chance mode B (time saving state) with 2 chances after the jackpot ends. As mentioned above, while it is extremely easy to pass two time-saving times, it is relatively difficult to lose continuously over 100 probability changes, so "Jackpot I12" is better. However, it can be said that it is a type of jackpot that is easier to shift to consecutive winning mode (that is, an advantageous type) than "Jackpot G12".

In this way, in the twelfth embodiment, the number of time reductions is set at least two times without providing a normal jackpot where the number of time reductions is 0 (a jackpot that directly shifts to the continuous winning mode after the jackpot ends). . By configuring so that the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is not directly set to the normal state, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from being in the same state as when it is initialized. In other words, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes longer, resulting in a disadvantageous state in which the game must be played by left-handed hitting (a state in which the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the normal start table 202d13, which will be described later). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of errors and determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the time-saving start table 202f12. That is, it can be configured to immediately shift to the RUSH state when the time saving number of times has elapsed. Therefore, while suppressing the state at the time of initialization of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming excessively advantageous to the player, the type of jackpot that is equivalent to a direct transition to the consecutive game mode (a jackpot with a time saving number of 2) type) can be provided. In addition, during the execution of the jackpot game, the probability of the normal symbol is low, so the right electric accessory 64ra is difficult to release, and as a result, the game ball frequently enters the second ball entrance 640 during the jackpot game. Enter the ball. That is, at the same time as the jackpot game ends, the second special symbol lottery is executed and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. Therefore, when two times are set as the number of time savings, the first number of time savings is used up at the same time as the jackpot ends. By hitting the game ball to the right and entering the right first ball entrance 64r during the long fluctuation of the second special symbol, there is a high probability of a small hit and the long fluctuation of the second special symbol can be missed. It can be forcibly terminated. Therefore, in the case where the number of times of time saving is set to two, it is possible to shift to the continuous winning mode only by generating one starting winning after the end of the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 324, details of the above-mentioned variable probability/potential start table 202f11 will be described. FIG. 324 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the table 202f11 for variable probability/potential start. As shown in FIG. 324, the table 202f11 for variable probability/probability starting time defines, for each type of special symbol, the correspondence between the gaming state at the time of executing the special symbol lottery and the variation patterns that can be selected. has been done. More specifically, a longer variation time is selected as the variation time of the first special symbol in the probability state (normal mode) than in the probability variation state (chance mode A). As a result, in the normal mode in which a left-handed game is played, the variable display mode can be diversified, while in the chance mode A, the game efficiency can be increased.

On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol, a long variation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the variation type or gaming state.As a result, if the second special symbol is varied in a gaming state other than consecutive game mode, the game efficiency will be significantly increased. Since this worsens, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is fired aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in a state other than the consecutive game mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 325, details of the above-mentioned time saving start table 202f12 will be described. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving start table 202f12. As shown in FIG. 325, when the time-saving start table 202f12 is referred to in order to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the time-saving start time table 202f12 is relatively short (1 to 20 seconds) in the time-saving state (chance mode B). ) variable time is selected. Thereby, the gaming efficiency in chance mode B can be improved. On the other hand, in a normal state (that is, after the number of time reductions has elapsed), an extremely short variation time (0.1 seconds or 10 seconds) is selected. As a result, after the end of the jackpot, the time-saving state is set, and after the number of time-savings has passed (after transitioning to consecutive game mode), if there are any reserved balls of the first special symbol remaining, the reserved balls will be displayed in an extremely short time. is digested.

On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol, regardless of the type of variation, a long variation of 60 seconds is set while the time saving state continues, and a short variation of 10 seconds or 1 second is set after the time saving state has passed. Set. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is fired aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive game mode. Moreover, after shifting to the consecutive game mode, an extremely advantageous state can be formed in which the lottery of the second special symbol and the small winning game are repeated in a short time. Therefore, since it is possible to have the player play the game with the goal of completing the number of times saved, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the normal start table 202f13 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 326(a). FIG. 326(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time-saving start table 202f13. As shown in FIG. 326(a), when the normal start table 202f13 is referred to to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, a relatively long variation time (7 seconds to 90 seconds) is selected. . Therefore, it is possible to diversify the variation display mode in a state where a left-handed game should be played, similar to the potential state.

On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol, a long variation of 60 seconds is set regardless of the variation type. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an irregular game method in which a game ball is fired aiming at the second ball entrance 640 in a game state other than the consecutive game mode.

Next, details of the above-mentioned RUSH table 202f14 will be explained with reference to FIG. 326(b). FIG. 326(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the RUSH table 202f14. As shown in FIG. 326(b), when the RUSH table 202f13 is referred to to select the variation pattern of the first special symbol, an extremely short variation time (0.1 seconds or 10 seconds) is selected. . Also, when the RUSH table 202f14 is referred to in order to select the variation pattern of the second special symbol, a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected. This makes it possible to further increase the degree of advantage after shifting to the RUSH state (consecutive game mode).

Next, with reference to FIG. 327, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 327 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 327, the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment has four modes (gaming states) that can be broadly classified. That is, the normal mode (potential state) shown at the top of FIG. 327, the chance mode A (variable state) shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, and the chance mode B (time saving state) shown on the right side of the center of FIG. and a continuous play mode (normal state) shown in the lower part of FIG. 327.

As mentioned above, the normal mode indicates the probability-variable state of special symbols and the normal state of normal symbols, and the probability of a jackpot is high, and the right electric accessory 64ra is difficult to release (the game ball is in the right (1) It is difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry opening 64r), resulting in the most disadvantageous gaming condition for the player. In addition, as mentioned above, chance mode A indicates a variable probability state of special symbols and a short time state of normal symbols, and has a high jackpot probability, and by playing a right-handed game, you can hit the first ball on the right. Since the game ball frequently enters the opening 64r (the electric accessory 64ra is frequently opened), the game state is relatively advantageous for the player. In addition, chance mode B indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although the jackpot probability is low, by playing a right-handed game, the right number Since the game ball frequently enters the first ball entrance 640r, a game state more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode is formed. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the continuous winning mode indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, and the variable time set when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. , is much shorter than the other three game states (from 60 seconds to 1 second), so by playing the right-handed game, it is possible to efficiently draw the second special symbol. As mentioned above, in the second special symbol lottery, there is a high probability (1/2) of winning a small hit and the first specific prize opening 64a is opened, so just by playing the right-handed game, you can win the small hit. Game balls frequently enter the second ball entry hole 640 and the first specific winning hole 64a to form an extremely advantageous game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be won without going through a jackpot. Therefore, the consecutive game mode is the most advantageous gaming state for the player.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another state when there is a jackpot or when a predetermined number of probability changes has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of Figure 327, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A12, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the chance will be given after the jackpot ends. Shift to mode A. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots D12 to F12, which are determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, the system will switch to relatively advantageous chance mode B. and transition. Further, after the normal mode is set, by allowing a predetermined number of probability changes (100 times) to pass, the game directly shifts to the most advantageous consecutive winning mode (without going through a jackpot). On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot B12 or jackpot C12, which is determined at a rate of 65% as the jackpot type, is determined, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more likely to be advantageous if the specified number of probability changes elapses than if the player hits the jackpot, so the player can be made to expect successive wins over the specified number of times. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

As shown on the left side of the center of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transitioning from chance mode A (probability variation state) to another state when a jackpot is achieved or when a predetermined number of probability variations has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the center left side of FIG. 327, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of jackpots D12 to F12, which are determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined). After the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to chance mode B, which is relatively advantageous. Furthermore, after the chance mode A is set, by allowing the specified number of drawings (100 times) to pass, the game will directly shift to the most advantageous consecutive winnings mode (the probability change number and the time saving number end at the same timing) ). Further, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and jackpot C12 determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type is determined, the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and either jackpot A12 or jackpot B12, which is determined at a rate of 50% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, the game goes back to chance mode A. (loop chance mode A). Therefore, in chance mode A, even if you hit the jackpot, it will be difficult to switch to the disadvantageous normal mode (chance mode A will be set at a higher rate), so you will hit the jackpot before the number of probability changes elapses. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming disappointed even if he or she wins (or is unable to shift to consecutive game mode). Note that in chance mode A, as in the normal mode, the jackpot probability is relatively high (1/96), so it is relatively difficult to make the number of probability changes elapse. Therefore, in chance mode A, it is possible to realize a gaming experience in which both the player expects to win a jackpot and to have successive losses, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown on the right side of the center of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transitioning from chance mode B (variable probability state) to another state when a jackpot is achieved or when a predetermined number of time savings has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the center right side of FIG. 327, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and either jackpot A12 or B12, which is determined at a 50% ratio as the jackpot type, is selected (determined). In this case, after the jackpot ends, the game shifts to chance mode A, which is relatively advantageous. Furthermore, after the chance mode A is set, by allowing a predetermined time saving number (any of 2, 25, 50, and 100 times) to pass, the game will directly shift to the most advantageous consecutive winning mode. . Further, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and a jackpot C12 determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type is determined, a disadvantageous normal mode is set after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and either jackpot A12 or jackpot B12, which is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the game will go to chance mode B again after the jackpot ends. (loop chance mode B). Therefore, in chance mode B, as in chance mode A, even if you win a jackpot, it is difficult to switch to the disadvantageous normal mode (chance mode A is set more often), so the number of time reductions has elapsed. Even if the player wins a jackpot before the game ends (the player cannot shift to the consecutive game mode), it is possible to prevent the player from becoming disappointed. In addition, in chance mode B, the jackpot probability is relatively low, and the number of time-saving times may be set to 50 or less, so compared to chance mode A and normal mode, it is possible to directly win without going through the jackpot. There is a high possibility that they will shift to consecutive home mode. Therefore, at the time of transition to chance mode B, the player can be made to feel that there is a high possibility of transitioning to the consecutive game mode, so that the player's expectations for the consecutive game mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, there is a possibility of transitioning from the consecutive winning mode (normal state) to another state only when a jackpot is achieved. Specifically, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 327, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot G12, which is determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the comparison is made after the jackpot ends. Shift to chance mode A, which has an advantage. In addition, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot I12, which is determined at a rate of 30% as the jackpot type, is determined, after the jackpot ends, the chance mode is easier to shift to consecutive winning mode than chance mode A. Move to B. In addition, in the case of jackpot I12, 2 times is set as the number of time reductions, so if chance mode B is set after jackpot I12, the number of time reductions will elapse and the game will go to continuous mode again. It can be migrated. Therefore, the jackpot I12 can be said to be a more advantageous jackpot type than the jackpot G12. As mentioned above, in this consecutive winning mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is significantly shorter than in other modes, and the lottery of the second special symbol has a high probability (1/2 probability) of winning a small In order to win, just by playing the right-handed game, the second special symbol will be drawn based on the ball entering the second ball entry hole 640, and during the small winning period (during the opening period of the first specific winning hole 65a). Winnings to the first specific winning hole 65a can occur frequently. Therefore, until you hit the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery, you can continue to win prize balls based on the ball entering the first special winning hole 65a (that is, you can continue to win a large amount of prizes just by continuing to hit the ball to the right). This creates an extremely advantageous gaming situation (in which it is possible to acquire balls). In addition, as mentioned above, regarding the normal state to which the pachinko machine 10 is transferred based on initialization, the configuration is such that a long variation (60 seconds) is set as the variation time of the second special symbol, so it is different from the normal mode. Similarly, creating an unfavorable gaming situation. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 from giving an excessive advantage to the player and causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall.

In this way, the twelfth embodiment is configured to switch between four modes (gaming states): normal mode, chance mode A, chance mode B, and consecutive game mode. Thereby, the gameplay changes each time the mode is changed, so it is possible to add variety to the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 328, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 328 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 328, the RAM 223 in the twelfth embodiment has a winning flag 223ka, a preparation state flag 223kb, and a RUSH The difference is that a medium flag 223kc is added.

The winning flag 223ka is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot has been won at least once since the power of the pachinko machine 10 was turned on. If this winning flag 223ka is on, it means that you have won the jackpot at least once after the power was turned on, and if it is off, it means that you have not won the jackpot even once after the power was turned on. means. If the gaming state is the normal state at the start of the variation, the state of this winning flag 223ka is referred to, and if it is off, the state is normal after the power is turned on (that is, the second special symbol variation pattern is long). If the number of special drawings is less than 100, then the effect for normal mode is executed.If it is on, the effect for consecutive game mode is executed. Execute.

The ready state flag 223kb is a flag for indicating whether or not the state is in the ready state. If it is on, it means that the state is in the ready state (see FIG. 319(a)), and if it is off, it means that the state is not in the ready state. It means no. In the normal state, this ready state flag 223kb is referenced to determine whether the ready state has already ended (the display has switched to RUSH), and whether to execute the ready state effect or not. Decide whether to perform the RUSH state effect.

The RUSH flag 223kc is a flag for indicating whether or not the game is in the consecutive games mode, and when it is on, it means that the game is in the consecutive games mode, and when it is off, it means that the game is not in the consecutive games mode. In the normal state, the preparation state flag 223kb and the RUSH state flag 223kc are referred to to determine which state the presentation mode should be set.

The ceiling effect execution flag 223kd indicates whether or not an effect (top reaching effect) in which the character 811 reaches the top of a rocky mountain is being executed, which is executed when the number of probability changes or the number of time reductions is 1 remaining. This is a flag indicating whether If this ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on, it means that the summit reaching effect (see Figure 318(b)) is being executed, and if it is off, it means that the summit reaching effect is not being executed. do. When the symbol stop timing comes while the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on, the game shifts to the consecutive game mode and becomes ready.

<About the control process of the main controller in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 333. First, with reference to FIG. 329, details of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) in the twelfth embodiment. This first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (S331) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 12 in the eleventh embodiment. Similar to the symbol jackpot determination process 12 (see FIG. 309), based on the set gaming state based on the value of the first winning random number counter C1 shifted to the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for executing a jackpot determination as to whether or not it is a jackpot.

Of the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, each of the processes S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421 is the first special symbol jackpot determination process in the eleventh embodiment. The same processes as S401, S403 to S410, S412, and S421 of No. 12 (see FIG. 309) are executed.

In addition, in the first special symbol jackpot determination process 13 (see FIG. 329) in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined in the process of S406 that the lottery result of the current first special symbol is not a jackpot, then a small win is determined. It is determined whether or not it has been won, and a special symbol 1 off variation process is executed to execute a process corresponding to the determination result (S431), and the present process is ended. This special figure 1 off variation process (S431) will be explained with reference to FIG. 330.

FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 off variation process (S431). In this special symbol 1 loss fluctuation processing (S431), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit or not (S3111), and if it is determined that the lottery result is a small win (S3111: Yes) ), the special symbol 1 small win flag to indicate that the first special symbol is changing in small win is set on (S3112), and then the lottery result of the first special symbol is set as a small win (S3113). ). Then, a small winning symbol is set as the first special symbol to be displayed on the first symbol display device 37 (S3114), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S3111, if it is determined that the lottery result of the first special symbol is not a small hit (that is, a loss) (S3111: No), the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 A missing symbol is set as a special symbol (S3115), and this process is ended. This special symbol 1 loss variation process (see FIG. 330) is a control process added by making it possible to win a small hit when the first special symbol is a loss in the lottery.

Next, details of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 331. The first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (S332) in the twelfth embodiment is executed in place of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) in the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment). Similar to the first special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35), this is a process in which the result of the judgment of the first special symbol and the variation type stored in the execution area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are processed. This is a process for selecting a variation pattern based on the value of the counter CS1.

Of the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, each process of S501 to S503 and S505 to S509 is the same as that of the eleventh embodiment (and first embodiment). The same processes as S501 to S503 and S505 to S509 of the 1 special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 35) are executed. Further, in the first special symbol variation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S503 is completed, the variation pattern scenario table 202ka (see FIG. 322(b)) is then read out, A variable pattern selection table corresponding to the previous jackpot type and the number of special drawing lots is read out (S521). Specifically, if the previous jackpot is a probability variable jackpot and the number of special drawings is 99 or less, read the potential probability/probability variation start time table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) as the variation pattern selection table, If the previous jackpot is a normal jackpot and the number of special drawing lots is 99 or less, the time-saving start table 202f12 (see FIG. 325) is read out as the variation pattern selection table. In addition, after initializing the pachinko machine 10, if the jackpot has never been won and the number of special drawings is 99 or less, the normal start table 202f13 (FIG. 326) is used as the fluctuation pattern selection table. a). On the other hand, when the number of special drawing lots is 100 or more, the RUSH table 202f14 (see FIG. 326(b)) is read out as the variation pattern selection table, regardless of the type of previous jackpot. When the process of S521 is completed, the process moves to S505.

By executing this first special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process 13 (see FIG. 331), a fluctuation pattern can be selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern selection table according to the previous jackpot type and the number of special symbol drawings. Therefore, variation patterns can be diversified. In addition, the degree of advantage is different between the normal state set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 and the normal state transitioned from another profitable gaming state, and after initialization, it is similar to a general gaming machine. Similarly, while it is possible to set the state to be disadvantageous to the player, it is also possible to form the normal state to which the player has transitioned via another gaming state as the most advantageous gaming state for the player. Although not shown, the second special symbol variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 42) also refers to the variation pattern scenario table 202ka (i.e., the previous jackpot type and the number of special symbol lottery numbers). ) has been modified to read the variation pattern selection table.

Next, details of the first special symbol variation stop processing 13 (S221) in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 332. This first special symbol variation stop process 13 (S221) is a process executed in place of the first special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38) in the 11th embodiment (and the first embodiment), and the first Similar to the special symbol variation stop process (see FIG. 38), this is a process for setting the stop display of the first special symbol.

Of the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, each of the processes S801 to S809 is the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing in the eleventh embodiment (and the first embodiment). The same processes as those in S801 to S809 (see FIG. 38) are executed. In addition, in the first special symbol fluctuation stop processing 13 (see FIG. 332) in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is off in the processing of S801 (S801: No), the The special symbol 1 missing stop process for setting the missing stop symbol for the 1 special symbol is executed (S821), and this process ends. The details of this special figure 1 off stop processing (S821) will be explained with reference to FIG. 333.

FIG. 333 is a flowchart showing the special figure 1 off-setting stop processing (S821). In this special figure 1 off stop processing (S821), it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit flag is on or not (S3211), and if it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is on (S3211: Yes), the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to on (S3212), and the special pattern 2 variation stop flag 203s is set to on (that is, the forced stop of the second special symbol is set). A special figure 2 fluctuation stop command is set for (S3213). Next, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol on the first symbol display device 37 (S3214), and a small win scenario corresponding to the current small win type is set (S3215). Then, the special figure 1 small hit flag is set to OFF (S3216), the small hit medium flag 203p is set to ON (S3217), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S3211, if it is determined that the special symbol 1 small hit flag is off (S3211), there is no possibility of forcibly stopping the fluctuating display of the second special symbol, and there is no possibility of starting a small win. Therefore, this process ends immediately.

By executing this special symbol 1 out-of-win stop processing (see Fig. 333), when a small hit is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is removed at the same time as the small winning symbol is stopped. You can force the display to stop. Therefore, in a state where the long variation of the second special symbol is being executed, the long variation of the second special symbol can be forcibly terminated simply by executing the lottery of the first special symbol and winning a small hit.

<About the control process of the audio lamp control device in the twelfth embodiment>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 334 to 339. First, with reference to FIG. 334, the variable display setting process 13 (S4121) in the twelfth embodiment will be described. This variable display setting process 13 (S4121) is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment, and is a process executed in place of the variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 314) in the eleventh embodiment. ), in order to display a variable display effect on the third symbol display device 81, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed based on the first or second special symbol variable pattern command received from the main controller 110. This is a process for setting a display variation pattern command for and transmitting the command to the display control device 114.

Of the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, each of S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125 is the variable display setting process in the eleventh embodiment. The same processes as S5101, S5102, S5106 to S5108, S5110 to S5113, S5121, and S5125 of No. 12 (see FIG. 314) are executed. Further, in the variation display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5102 is completed, the performance mode is then set according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. A presentation mode setting process is executed to perform the process (S5141), and the process moves to S5106. Details of this presentation mode setting process (S5141) will be described later with reference to FIG. 335.

In addition, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5108 is finished, the variable display setting process 12 for special figure 2 in the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 316) is performed. Instead, the special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 is executed (S5142), and the process moves to S5110. Details of this variable display setting process 13 for special figure 2 (S5142) will be described later with reference to FIG. 338.

Furthermore, in the variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 334) in the twelfth embodiment, when the process of S5113 is completed, the preparation state setting process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 319(a)) is then executed. (S5143), and this process ends. Details of this preparation state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 339.

Next, details of the above-mentioned performance mode setting process (S5141) will be explained. As described above, this production mode setting process (S5141) is a process for setting a production mode according to the variation type of the first special symbol notified by the variation pattern command. In this performance mode setting process (S5141), first, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (continuous show mode) (S13101), and if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (S13101: No), then the time saving state is entered. (Chance mode B) is determined (S13102). In the process of S13102, if it is determined that the time saving state is not in effect (S1302: No), it means that the state is in a potential state (normal mode) or a probability variable state (chance mode A), and 100 probability variations have passed. Since this means that there is no possibility of transitioning to consecutive game mode unless the game mode is changed, next, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13103).

In the process of S13103, if it is determined that the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13103: Yes), the ceiling effect is used to select the presentation mode of the last variable display effect before shifting to the continuous mode. Setting processing is executed (S13104), and the processing moves to S13111. On the other hand, in the process of S13102, if it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state (S13102: Yes), then it is determined whether the remaining time saving number is 1 (S13105), and the remaining time saving number is 1. If so, the same process as the above-described ceiling effect setting process (S13104) is executed (S13110), and the process moves to S13111. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S13105 that the remaining time reduction count is not 1 (S13105: No), and if it is determined that the value of the variation count counter 223ja is not 99 in the process of S13103 (S13103: No) Since there is no possibility of transitioning to the consecutive game mode, the performance mode corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S13106), and the process moves to S13111.

On the other hand, in the process of S13101, if it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state (S13101: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning flag 223ka is on (S13107), and the winning state is determined to be the normal state (S13101: Yes). If it is determined that the completion flag 223ka is on (S13107), a normal performance setting process for setting a normal state performance mode is executed (S13108), and the process moves to S13111. Details of this normal effect setting process (S13108) will be described later with reference to FIG. 337.

On the other hand, in the process of S13107, if it is determined that the winning flag 223ka is off (S13107: No), then it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation number counter 223ja is 99 (S13109), If it is determined that the value of the number counter 223ja is 99 (S13109), a ceiling effect setting process (S13110) is executed, and the process moves to S13111. On the other hand, in the process of S13109, if it is determined that the value of the variation number counter 223ja is not 99 (S13109: No), the process moves to S13108.

In the process of S13111 executed after any one of the processes of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110, a display variation pattern command is set that indicates the performance mode determined in any of the processes of S13104, S13106, S13108, and S13110. (S13111), and this process ends.

Next, details of the ceiling effect setting process (S13104, S13110) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 336. As shown in FIG. 336, in the ceiling effect setting process (S4131), first, the data of the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol is read out of the winning information storage area 223b (S13201), and the data of the read execution area is It is determined whether or not data corresponds to a jackpot (S13202), and if it is determined that it is a jackpot (S13202: Yes), the performance mode (to notify a jackpot) corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined. The presentation mode is determined (S13203), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S13202, if it is determined that the data read from the execution area is not data indicating a jackpot (S13202: No), then the pending number of the first special symbol in the winning information storage area 223b is The data of one area is read (S13204), and it is determined whether the read data of the first pending area is data corresponding to a jackpot. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot will be won immediately after shifting to the consecutive game mode. In the process of S13205, if it is determined that the data in the first pending area is a jackpot (S13205: Yes), then whether the data indicates a jackpot D12 (that is, after the jackpot ends, the (S13206) If it is determined that it is not a jackpot D12 (S13206: No) , the jackpot effect of the performance mode of the effect time which is the change time of the variable display to be executed this time plus 10 seconds (i.e. the change time of the jackpot change in consecutive game mode) (i.e. the change time of the first special symbol for two times) A straddling jackpot effect) is determined (S13207), and the present process ends. That is, in the twelfth embodiment, if it is determined by the look-ahead that a jackpot fluctuation of a jackpot type other than the jackpot D12 will start immediately after the start of the consecutive winnings mode, the transition to the consecutive winnings mode (see FIG. 318(b) ) without notifying the player, the player is configured to perform an effect as if he had won a jackpot just before the consecutive game mode. By configuring this way, it is possible to prevent players from feeling disappointed when a jackpot is started without ever enjoying a small winning game even though the game has shifted to consecutive game mode. can do.

On the other hand, in the process of S13205, if it is determined that the data in the reserved first area of the first special symbol is not data indicating a jackpot (S13205: No), and in the process of S13206, the data in the reserved first area is the jackpot D12 If it is determined that the data indicates (S13206: Yes), the effect mode in which the character 811 reaches the top of the rocky mountain (see FIG. 318(b)) is determined (S13208), and the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is turned on. (S13209), and ends this process.

By executing this ceiling effect setting process (see Fig. 336), the pre-reading result of the lottery result of the first special symbol at the time of transition to consecutive winning mode (normal state) (when the time saving number or variable probability number has ended) Depending on this, it is possible to suitably set whether or not to execute the summit reaching effect (see FIG. 318(b)).

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 338, details of the above-mentioned special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (S5143) will be explained. As described above, this special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (S5143) is a process executed in place of the special figure 2 variable display setting process 12 (see FIG. 316) in the 11th embodiment. When this special figure 2 variable display setting process 13 (see FIG. 316) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the RUSH flag 223kc is on (S13401), and if the RUSH flag 223kc is OFF. If it is determined (S13401: No), then the variable display mode of the second special symbol corresponding to the variation type indicated by the variation pattern command is determined (S13402), and this process is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S13401, if it is determined that the RUSH flag 223kc is on (S13401: Yes), then it is determined whether the ready state flag 223kb is on (S13403), and the ready state If it is determined that the medium flag 223kb is off (S13403: No), it means that the preparation state has ended in the consecutive game mode, so the The presentation mode is determined (S13404), and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S13403, if it is determined that the preparation state flag 223kb is on (that is, the preparation state is in progress) (S13403: Yes), then the small winning variation type is notified by the variation pattern command. (S13405), and if it is determined that the small winning variation type has been notified (S13405: Yes), the preparation state flag 223kb is set to off (S13406), and the current variation display effect is performed. As a mode, a presentation mode (see FIG. 319(b)) for notifying the rush entry is determined (S13407), and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, in the process of S13405, if it is determined that the type of variation is not a small hit (S13405: No), this means that the preparation state will continue at least until the variation ends, so the variation pattern The production mode for the preparation state corresponding to the variation type indicated by the command is determined (S13408), and this processing is ended.

By executing this special symbol 2 variable display setting process 13 (see Fig. 338), the situation when the second special symbol lottery is executed (in the preparation state or in the state where RUSH entry has been notified) It is possible to perform an appropriate mode of performance depending on whether the game is in a state other than the continuous play mode or not.

Next, details of the preparation state setting process (S5144) described above will be described with reference to FIG. 339. As described above, this preparation state setting process (S5144) is a process for setting the preparation state (see FIG. 319(a)). In this preparation state setting process (S5144), first, it is determined whether or not the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on (S13501), and if it is determined that it is off (S13501: No), the transition is made to the preparation state. Since there is no possibility of doing so, this process is ended as is. On the other hand, in the process of S13501, if it is determined that the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is on (S13501: Yes), the ceiling effect execution flag 223kd is set to off (S13502), and the display mode (RUSH preparation in progress) is set to OFF (S13502). (see FIG. 319(a)) is set (S13503). Next, the RUSH flag 223kc and the ready state flag 223kb are both set to ON (S13504), and this process ends.

By executing this preparation state setting process (see FIG. 339), the display mode of the preparation state can be set from the time the game shifts to the consecutive game mode.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the normal state is defined as an advantageous gaming state (continuous game mode) in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and small winning games are frequently executed. The latent state was configured as the most disadvantageous normal mode. Then, by ending the number of probability changes in the normal mode, it is configured to shift to the most advantageous consecutive winning mode. In other words, it is configured to be able to directly shift from the most disadvantageous gaming state to the most advantageous gaming state without going through a jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play a game in the most disadvantageous normal mode (potential state) with one goal of making the number of probability changes elapse.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been known in which the potential state is set to the most disadvantageous gaming state, and the number of probability variations is ended in the potential state, thereby transitioning to a relatively advantageous normal state. However, in such conventional gaming machines, an advantageous time-saving state is more likely to be granted after the jackpot is completed when the jackpot is achieved in the normal state than when the jackpot is achieved in the potential state. , it is configured so that the normal state is more advantageous, and while staying in the normal state (that is, until the jackpot is won), a disadvantageous state is formed in which the number of balls in possession is likely to decrease. It was something. In other words, even if the player moves to the normal state after passing the number of probability changes in the probability state, it is not advantageous for the player at that point. Even if the game is directly transferred to the normal state without going through the process, there is a problem in that it does not give the player a sense of satisfaction and it is difficult to increase the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the twelfth embodiment, by ending (elapsed) the number of variable probability in the disadvantageous normal mode (potential state), the system directly shifts to the most advantageous continuous winning mode (normal state). did. In other words, even if the player does not win the jackpot, the player can easily move to an advantageous state where he can continue to win prize balls intermittently just by continuing to play the right-handed game. By configuring in this way, when the number of fixed variations can be completed, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of satisfaction and sense of accomplishment, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. I can do it.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, there is a normal state that is set by initializing the pachinko machine 10, and a normal state that is transitioned to by ending the variable probability number or the time saving number in other gaming states. The configuration is such that the degree of advantage for the player is varied. In other words, different fluctuation pattern selection tables are referred to for the normal state set by initialization and the normal state transitioned to through other gaming states. (refer to the variation pattern selection table based on this). With this configuration, the normal state that has been transferred through another gaming state is formed as the most advantageous gaming state for the player, and the normal state that is set by initializing the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to create a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. In other words, like a general gaming machine, when initialized it can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player, so immediately after initialization it becomes advantageous to the player, and the hole becomes It is possible to prevent them from suffering unexpected disadvantages. Further, in the twelfth embodiment, even in the normal state to which the transition is made after initialization, if the number of drawings of special symbols reaches 100 or more, the system is configured to form the most advantageous state for the player. ing. For this reason, even after initializing the pachinko machine 10, the operation is the same as the normal mode except for the jackpot probability (the operation shifts to consecutive game mode when the special symbol is drawn 100 times consecutively and loses). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing games with the pachinko machine 10 due to the state after initialization becoming excessively disadvantageous to the player, and thus the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. .

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment is configured to notify the period from the transition to the consecutive game mode until the first small win is won in the lottery of the second special symbol as a preparation state. The system is configured to notify that an advantageous state (RUSH state) has been reached when the situation is such that a prize ball can be obtained (that is, when small winning fluctuations have started). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent players from feeling dissatisfied due to a situation in which prize balls cannot be won for a long time even though the RUSH state has been notified. Furthermore, in the present twelfth embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which when a lottery of one special symbol results in a jackpot, the lottery of the other special symbol executed during the execution of the jackpot variation is forcibly turned into a loss. ing. Therefore, if there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol at the time of transition from normal mode to consecutive game mode, and the fluctuating display of the first special symbol that started at the same time as the start of consecutive game mode is a jackpot. , while the jackpot variation is being executed, the lottery of the second special symbol will always be a loss. In other words, if the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol starts at the time of transitioning to the preparation state, even if the right-handed game is continued and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed consecutively, it will not be possible to win. By continuing (not winning a small hit), the preparation state continues for a long time (until the jackpot fluctuation ends). As a result, it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which the more successive misses occur in the preparation state, the more the anticipation of the execution of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol can be improved.

In addition, in the present twelfth embodiment, the probability of a small win in the lottery of the second special symbol was set to 1/2, but the probability of a small win is not limited to this, and the small win probability may be set arbitrarily. . For example, the small winning probability may be increased so that when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed as in the eleventh embodiment, the small winning probability is almost (for example, 59/60 probability). Good too. With this configuration, if a miss occurs even once in the preparation state, the expectation that the fluctuating first special symbol will be a jackpot can be improved, so if the second special symbol misses in the preparation state. It is possible to improve the player's interest in such a case. Also, the higher the small winning probability, the shorter the preparation state is likely to be (the average number of drawings from the time you switch to consecutive game mode until you win a small win becomes smaller), so after switching to consecutive game mode , it is possible to shorten the period until the ball is secured by winning the prize ball. In other words, it becomes possible to award the prize ball to the player more quickly, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, the small winning probability may be lowered to make it easier to miss during the preparation state. By configuring in this way, it becomes easier for the player to lose consecutively, and therefore, it is possible to more frequently create a feeling of expectation that the first special symbol is in the process of changing into a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the twelfth embodiment, basically, the configuration is such that when the variable probability count or the short time count ends, the mode shifts to the consecutive game mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the jackpot, a jackpot of a type in which the consecutive winning mode is set directly may be provided. In this case, if a jackpot of a type in which the direct consecutive winning mode is set is won, the RUSH table 202f14 may be referred to immediately after the jackpot ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from becoming excessively advantageous after initialization, and to provide a type of jackpot that directly shifts to consecutive game mode after the jackpot ends. The game can be played with attention depending on the type of jackpot. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be further improved. In addition, as a condition for transitioning to the continuous game mode, for example, if the variable probability state continues for a certain number of times (for example, 5 times) and the probability variable jackpot is won again, the gaming state after the jackpot is forcibly changed to the normal state. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is set to . That is, a so-called variable probability limit function may be installed. By configuring this way, even if the player wins consecutive jackpots in the unfavorable normal mode, it is possible to make the player feel as if he or she is approaching the consecutive winnings mode, which will reduce the player's motivation to play. can be increased.

In the twelfth embodiment, in order to prevent the initial state of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming excessively advantageous, the dedicated variation pattern table is referred to in the initial state. It may be configured to be a mode. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to start playing on the pachinko machine 10 immediately after the opening of the hall, expecting that it has been initialized, so the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. can be improved.

In the twelfth embodiment, the configuration is such that the more successive losses occur in the second special symbol lottery during the preparation state, the higher the expectation of a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery. In addition to this, it may be configured to execute an effect that indicates the number of successive misses during the preparation state (that is, indicates the degree of expectation that the first special symbol is fluctuating in the jackpot). Specifically, for example, the background color on the display screen in the preparation state may be changed from blue to green to red to rainbow color every time the failure occurs twice in a row. With this configuration, even a player who does not know how to use the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment can easily understand that the more consecutive second special symbols are missed, the better. Therefore, it is possible to realize gameplay that is easy for players to understand.

<13th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 340 to 344, the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment described above, the normal state is an advantageous gaming state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is easily executed and small winning games are frequently executed, while the potential state is The game is configured to be in a gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player. In addition, by assuming that most of the transitions to the normal state occur when the number of definite variations ends in the probable state, it is expected that failures will continue over the set number of definite variations in the disadvantageous probability state. The structure was designed to allow for the realization of innovative gameplay.

On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the two game states of the potential state and the normal state are configured as advantageous gaming states in which small winning games are frequently executed, while the variable probability state and the time saving state are It is configured as a gaming state that is disadvantageous for players. As a result, in general gaming machines, the period when the advantageous time-saving state is set can be made into a disadvantageous state, and the state where the time-saving state is not set can be made into an advantageous state, so that the time-saving state ends. It is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which players play the game in hopes of achieving the desired result.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 is different from the board configuration of the game board 13 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 2). ), the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 has been partially changed, and the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 has been partially changed. be. Other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 are described in the 12th section. This is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the twelfth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the mode in the thirteenth embodiment will be briefly explained. In the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most advantageous state, and the potential state is also configured as a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, although the degree of advantage is lower than the normal state. On the other hand, the variable probability state and the time saving state are configured as disadvantageous gaming states in which the game should be played by left-handed playing. It should be noted that the time-saving state is easier to shift to the most advantageous normal state than the variable-probability state, so it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player. In the thirteenth embodiment, the most disadvantageous probability change state is referred to as the normal mode, the time saving state is referred to as the chance mode, and the potential state that is advantageous to the player is referred to as consecutive win mode A. The normal state that is most advantageous for the player is called continuous play mode B. Note that, similar to the twelfth embodiment described above, in the normal state that is set based on the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, only the long variation is selected when the second special symbol lottery is executed. , creating a disadvantageous situation in which it is necessary to play the game by hitting left-handed.

<Electrical configuration in the thirteenth embodiment>
First, the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 340 to 342. Here, the ROM 202 in the 13th embodiment has the specified contents of the first winning random number table 202a, the specified contents of the second winning random number table 202c, and the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d, compared to the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment. The specified contents and the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table 202f have been partially changed. First, with reference to FIG. 238(a), the configuration of the first winning random number table 202a defined (stored) in the ROM 202 in the twelfth embodiment of the present thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 321(b) explains the first winning random number table 202a in the twelfth embodiment.

FIG. 340(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the first winning random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 340(a), in the first winning random number table 202a in the thirteenth embodiment, a random number (counter value) of "0 to 3" is determined as a jackpot in a low probability state of a special symbol. Four random numbers (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340(a), eight random numbers (counter values) from 0 to 7 are defined as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be a jackpot in the high probability state of the special symbol. ing.

Therefore, when a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol low probability state, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/120 (4/480), while a special symbol lottery is executed in a special symbol high probability state. If executed, the probability of hitting the jackpot is 1/60 (8/480). Note that the change in the jackpot probability in the thirteenth embodiment is made to further enhance the superiority of the normal state. That is, by configuring the system to make it easier to win a jackpot in a potential state, the system is configured to make it difficult for a potential state to continue for a long time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game with a stronger expectation that the state of frequently winning small wins will shift to the normal state where it is likely to continue for a long time, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, details of the second winning random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 340(b). FIG. 340(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the second winning random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 340(b), in the second winning random number table 202c in the thirteenth embodiment, "0" is used as the random number value (counter value) for determining a win for a normal symbol in a low probability state for a normal symbol. is stipulated. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 340(b), two random numbers (counter values) of "0, 1" are used as random numbers (counter values) to determine that the normal symbol is a hit in the time saving state of the normal symbol. stipulated.

In other words, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol is configured to hit only with a low probability. As a result, even if a left-handed game is played in a time-saving state or a variable probability state, the electric accessory 64a is difficult to open, so a game ball hardly ever enters the lower first ball entry opening 64b2. Therefore, it is necessary to execute the lottery of the first special symbol by entering the game ball into the upper first ball entrance 64b1 in a left-handed game, so in the variable probability state or the time saving state, it is disadvantageous that the number of balls you have is likely to decrease. It becomes a gaming state.

Next, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 341. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the thirteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 341, in the thirteenth embodiment, seven jackpot types, "jackpot A13" to "jackpot G13", are defined as the jackpot types of the first special symbol. Furthermore, three jackpot types, "Jackpot H13" to "Jackpot J13", are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 341, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "jackpot A13" when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4". They are defined in correspondence. This "jackpot A13" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and after the jackpot is over, the successive winning mode A (potential state) is set. As mentioned above, consecutive game mode A is a game state in which small winning games are frequently executed just by hitting right, so "Jackpot A13" is compared in terms of the playing state after the jackpot ends. This is an advantageous type of jackpot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, "Jackpot B13" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 9". This "Jackpot B13" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the most disadvantageous normal mode (probability variable state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, since the number of time saving times set after the end of "Jackpot B13" is set to 25, it becomes relatively easy to end the number of time saving times. By ending the time saving number, the game will be in consecutive game mode A until the probability variable number (100 times) ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 29", "jackpot C13" is defined as the jackpot type in association. This "jackpot C13" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and the most disadvantageous normal mode (probability variable state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, in the normal mode after "Jackpot C13" ends, the number of time reductions is set to 50, so it is more difficult to shift to consecutive winnings mode A than "Jackpot B13". Therefore, "Jackpot C13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than "Jackpot B13".

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, for the values of the first winning type counter C2 of "30 to 74", "jackpot D13" is defined as the jackpot type in association with each other. This "Jackpot D13" is a type of jackpot (2-round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and the normal mode (probability variable state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, in the normal mode after "Jackpot D13" ends, the number of time reductions is set to 75, so it is even more difficult to shift to consecutive winnings mode A than "Jackpot C13". Therefore, the "jackpot D13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than the "jackpot B13" and the "jackpot C13."

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "75", "jackpot E13" is defined as the jackpot type in association with the value "75". This "Jackpot E13" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, in the chance mode that is set after the end of "Jackpot E13", the number of times of time saving is set to two, so it is extremely easy to end the number of time saving times. When the time saving number ends in the chance mode, the mode shifts to the most advantageous successive winning mode B (normal state), so the "jackpot E13" is the most advantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbol.

Further, as shown in FIG. 341, when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "76 to 80", "jackpot F13" is defined as a jackpot type in correspondence. This "Jackpot F13" is a type of jackpot (2 round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds, and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, since the time saving number of chance modes set after the end of "Jackpot F13" is set to 50 times, it is more difficult to shift to consecutive game mode B than "Jackpot E13". Therefore, "jackpot F13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than "jackpot E13." In addition, in chance mode, the jackpot probability is low, and by ending the time saving number, you will directly move to the most advantageous continuous winning mode B, so it is better than "Jackpot B13" to "Jackpot D13" which transfer to normal mode. It can be said that it is an advantageous (easy to shift to continuous winning mode B) jackpot type. Also, if we focus only on the lower jackpot probability, it can be said that it is more disadvantageous than "Jackpot B13" to "Jackpot D13".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 341, for the values of the first winning type counter C2 of "81 to 99", "jackpot G13" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence. This "Jackpot G13" is a type of jackpot (2 round normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 2 rounds and the chance mode (time saving state) is set after the jackpot ends. In addition, the number of time reductions in the chance mode that is set after the end of "Jackpot G13" is set to 75 times, so it is more difficult to shift to consecutive game mode B than "Jackpot E13" or "Jackpot F13". . Therefore, "Jackpot G13" is a type of jackpot that is more disadvantageous than "Jackpot E13" and "Jackpot F13".

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "jackpot H13" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 24". ing. This "jackpot H13" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to continuous game mode A or normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, if "Jackpot H13" is won in consecutive winning mode B (normal state), after the jackpot ends, consecutive winning mode A (potential state) is set; If "Jackpot H13" is won in the normal mode (variable probability state), chance mode (time saving state), and successive winning mode A (potential state), the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends.

In addition, "Jackpot I13" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "25 to 74". This "jackpot I13" is a type of jackpot (8 round probability variable jackpot) in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 rounds and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to continuous game mode A or normal mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, if you win "Jackpot H13" in consecutive game mode A (potential state) or consecutive game mode B (normal state), after the jackpot ends, consecutive game mode A (potential state). On the other hand, if the jackpot H13 is won in the normal mode (variable probability state) or chance mode (time saving state), the normal mode is set after the jackpot ends.

Further, "Jackpot J13" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "75 to 99". This "jackpot J13" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the gaming state after the jackpot is set to chance mode. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 341, if "Jackpot J13" is won in consecutive game mode B, the number of times to save time is set to two, creating an advantageous situation in which it is extremely easy to end the number of times to save time. . Furthermore, if you win "Jackpot J13" in consecutive game mode A, 75 times will be set as the number of time savings, and if you win "Jackpot J13" in the normal mode or chance mode, 100 times will be set as the number of time savings.

In addition, in the normal mode or chance mode, if you win the jackpot with the second special symbol lottery, setting 100 times as the time saving number is because the second entry is made by playing the right-handed game in the gaming state where the left-handed game should be performed. This is to prevent irregular gaming methods that aim at the ball mouth 640. As described above, in the thirteenth embodiment, while the time saving state of normal symbols is set, a disadvantageous gaming state is formed for the player. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol in the normal mode or chance mode, by configuring the time saving state of the unfavorable normal symbol to continue for a long time (100 times), it is possible to create an irregular situation for the player. It can make the player feel like they don't want to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods in which a right-handed game is played in a gaming state in which a left-handed game should be played.

Next, with reference to FIG. 342, the table 202f11 for definite variable/potential start in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. The table 202f11 for variable/potential start in the thirteenth embodiment is different from the table 202f11 (see FIG. 324) for variable/potential start in the twelfth embodiment to draw the first special symbol in the probability state. The second special symbol lottery was executed in the potential state, in that only the variation pattern with a short variation time (0.1 seconds or 10 seconds) was selected as the variation pattern selected when this was executed. The difference is that only a variation pattern with a short variation time (1 second or 10 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern selected in this case. This change is such that, while the potential state in the twelfth embodiment is a normal mode that is disadvantageous to the player, the potential state in the thirteenth embodiment is configured as consecutive winning mode A that is advantageous to the player. This is due to what I did.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 343 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 343, the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment has four modes (gaming states) that can be broadly classified. That is, the normal mode (variable probability state) shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, the chance mode (time saving state) shown in the center of FIG. , and continuous play mode B (normal state) shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343 are provided.

As mentioned above, the normal mode indicates the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the regular symbol, and the probability of a jackpot is high, and the electric accessory 64a is more likely to be released than in the normal state of the regular symbol. However, the probability of the game ball being released is low, and the game ball rarely enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2. Therefore, since it is necessary to advance the game by letting the game ball enter the upper first ball entry port 64b1 in a left-handed game, a disadvantageous gaming state is created for the player. In addition, as mentioned above, the chance mode indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although it is necessary to proceed with the game by left-handed playing like the normal mode, It is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal mode because it is easier to shift to the most advantageous consecutive game mode A than the normal mode. In addition, continuous winning mode A indicates a variable probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols. Form. In addition, consecutive winning mode A indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, and like consecutive winning mode A, it is an extremely advantageous game in which small winning games are frequently executed. form a state.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal mode to another state when there is a jackpot or when a predetermined number of probability changes has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 343, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A13, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the series will be repeated after the jackpot ends. Shift to sho mode A. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots E13 to G13, which are determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, you will be transferred to a relatively advantageous chance mode. Transition. Further, after the normal mode is set, by allowing a predetermined number of probability changes (100 times) to pass, the game directly shifts to consecutive winnings mode A (without going through a jackpot), which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and a jackpot B13 to C13, which is determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is determined, the normal mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal mode, it is more likely to be advantageous if the specified number of probability changes elapses than if the player hits the jackpot, so the player can be made to expect successive wins over the specified number of times. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transitioning from the chance mode to another state when there is a jackpot or when a predetermined number of time saving times has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 343, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A13, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the series will be repeated after the jackpot ends. Shift to sho mode A. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots B13 to D13, which are determined at a rate of 70% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the game will shift to the disadvantageous normal mode after the jackpot ends. . Furthermore, after the chance mode is set, by allowing a predetermined number of time reductions (either 2, 25, 50, 75, or 100 times) to pass, the player can switch to consecutive game mode B, which is the most advantageous for the player. and transfer directly (without going through a jackpot). On the other hand, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and a jackpot E13 to G13 determined at a rate of 25% is determined as the jackpot type, the chance mode is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in chance mode, even if you hit a jackpot, there is a very high chance that you will maintain the status quo or fall into the disadvantageous normal mode, so it is more advantageous to let the specified number of time-savings pass than to hit the jackpot. easy to become Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to continue winning for a prescribed number of time reductions, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transitioning from consecutive winning mode A to another state when a jackpot is achieved or when a prescribed number of probability changes has elapsed. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 343, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot H13, which is determined at a rate of 25% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. Shifts to disadvantageous normal mode. Further, when the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and jackpot J13 determined at a rate of 25% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a disadvantageous chance mode after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after the consecutive game mode A is set, by allowing the specified number of probability changes to pass (100 times after the previous jackpot), the player will be directly transferred to the most advantageous consecutive game mode B (without going through the jackpot). )Transition. On the other hand, if the second special symbol becomes a jackpot and a jackpot I13 determined at a rate of 50% is determined as the jackpot type, consecutive winning mode A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in consecutive game mode A, players can win prize balls while staying in consecutive game mode, and if they hit the jackpot, it is relatively easy to loop through the same mode, which is advantageous for the player. becomes. Furthermore, if the number of guaranteed changes can be made to elapse, the game will move to the most advantageous continuous winning mode B, so even if the player wins the jackpot or misses (small wins) continuously, the player will have an advantageous state that is beneficial to him/her. Form.

Further, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343, there is a possibility of transitioning from consecutive winning mode B to another state only when a jackpot is achieved. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of FIG. 343, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot H13, I13, which is determined at a 75% rate as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the jackpot is a jackpot. After the game ends, the game shifts to consecutive game mode A, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and a jackpot J13 determined at a rate of 25% is determined as the jackpot type, a chance mode is set after the jackpot ends. In the chance mode that is set after the end of the jackpot J13, the number of time reductions is set to two, so it is possible to almost complete the number of time reductions and shift to consecutive game mode B. Therefore, this is a type of jackpot that is more pleasing to the player than the jackpots H13 and I13, which transition to consecutive game mode A. In this way, in consecutive game mode B, not only can you win prize balls while staying in consecutive game mode, but if you hit the jackpot, there is a possibility that the game will shift to the normal mode, which is disadvantageous to the player. This is very advantageous for players.

<Control processing of main controller in 13th embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 344, the control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the thirteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 344 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing 14 (S121) in the thirteenth embodiment. This normal symbol variation process 14 (S121) is a process that is executed in place of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48) in the twelfth embodiment (and the first embodiment), and is Similar to the processing (see FIG. 48), processing for displaying on the second symbol display device (not shown) and processing for accompanying the passage of the ball at the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 are performed. This is a process for

Of the normal symbol variation processing 14 (see FIG. 344) in this 13th embodiment, each processing of S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823 is performed in the 12th embodiment. The same processes as S1801, S1802, S1804, S1807 to S1810, S1812, S1814, S1816 to S1818, S1821, and S1823 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 48) in the form (and the first embodiment) are executed. be done.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, when the process of S1810 or S1812 is completed, 60 seconds is then set as the variation time of the normal symbol (S1831), and the process is started. The process moves to S1814. That is, in the thirteenth embodiment, a long variable time is set regardless of the lottery result of the normal symbol or the game state. Therefore, even in the variable probability state or the time saving state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the chances of the electric accessory 64a being released can be reduced.

In addition, in the normal symbol variation process 14 (see FIG. 344) in the thirteenth embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1821 that the normal symbol is not in the time saving state (S1821: No), the electric accessory 64a is released. The time and number of times are set to "0.1 seconds x 1 time" (S1832), and the process moves to S1823. On the other hand, in the process of S1821, if it is determined that the normal symbol is in the time saving state (S1821: Yes), the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 64a are set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time". (S1833), the process moves to S1823. In this way, in the thirteenth embodiment, even in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long (60 seconds) and the opening time of the electric accessory 64a is short, so the lowering occurs in the probability-variable state or the time-shortening state. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64b2. Therefore, the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbols is set can be set to a disadvantageous state for the player.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, the two gaming states, the potential state and the normal state, are configured as advantageous gaming states in which small winning games are frequently executed. Here, conventionally, a gaming machine is configured to win a small hit with a high probability by executing a lottery of the second special symbol in a probability state, and the probability state is more advantageous than the probability variable state. is proposed. In other words, a gaming machine has been proposed that is equipped with an advantageous state (so-called small hit RUSH function) that allows players to win prize balls even if they do not win a jackpot. However, in such conventional gaming machines, even if the game machine shifts to an advantageous state other than the probability state such as a probability change state, if it does not shift to the probability state (small win RUSH state), the player feels satisfied. It was difficult to get him to embrace it. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, two types of states with different degrees of advantage are provided as the so-called small win RUSH state, and in the small win RUSH state with a relatively low advantage (consecutive winning mode A), The configuration is designed to be relatively easy to migrate. With this configuration, it is possible to form a pachinko machine 10 that allows players to experience the small winning RUSH state relatively easily, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game.

<Modification of the thirteenth embodiment>
Next, a modification of the thirteenth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 345 and 346. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, it is easy to perform the lottery of the second special symbol that has a high probability of winning a small hit in two types of game states, the potential state and the normal state (the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is (short) formed as an advantageous state. In other words, just by continuously hitting the ball to the right, small hits with the second special symbol will occur frequently, and the first specific prize opening 65a will be opened frequently, so that even if you do not win the jackpot, you will receive the prize ball. It was designed to create an advantageous state that can be obtained continuously (intermittently).

On the other hand, in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment, by playing the game aiming at the first ball entry hole 64b1 in a left-handed game, small hits of the first special symbol frequently occur, and the small hits are By creating an advantageous state (potential state) in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second specific winning port 650a that is opened during the game, and by playing the game by aiming at the second ball entering port 640 by playing right-handed games, A structure that provides an advantageous state (normal state) in which small wins of the second special symbol occur frequently and in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second specific winning hole 650a that is opened during the small winning game. And so. In other words, by playing a left-handed game, there is an advantageous state (potential state) in which it is possible to intermittently (continuously) win prize balls even if you do not win the jackpot, and by playing a right-handed game, you can obtain prize balls intermittently (continuously). The present invention is configured to provide two types: an advantageous state (normal state) in which it is possible to obtain prize balls intermittently (continuously) even if the jackpot is not won. In addition, by configuring the small hit probability of the first special symbol (for example, 1/5) to be lower than the small hit probability of the second special symbol (for example, 59/60), the normal state This is a more advantageous state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball than in a potential state.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment in terms of configuration in that the small winning probability has been changed and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64aj has been changed. , and the board structure of the game board 13 has been changed. With reference to FIGS. 345 and 346, the board configuration of the game board 13 of this modification will be described.

As shown in FIG. 345, the game board 13 in this modification is provided with an electric accessory 64aj in place of the electric accessory 64a provided in association with the lower first ball entrance 64b2. Drink and drink differently. Similar to the electric accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment (and the first embodiment), the electric accessory 64aj is normally in a closed state (which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2). An open state (second state) in which the game ball enters the lower first ball entry port 64b2 more easily than in the closed state when the normal symbol is won in a lottery. form. In addition, although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, in this modification, even if it is set to the open state, the game ball will almost never enter the lower first ball entry opening 64b2. In addition, in this modification, when it becomes a big hit and when it becomes a small win in the lottery of the 2nd special symbol, it is comprised so that the 1st specific prize opening 65a may be opened, and the lottery of the 1st special symbol The configuration is such that when a small win occurs, the second specific prize opening 650a is opened.

Next, the correspondence between the state of the electric accessory 640aj and the falling path of the game ball will be explained with reference to FIG. 346. First, with reference to FIG. 346(a), the flow path of the game ball in the state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed will be described. As shown in FIG. 346(a), when the electric accessory 64aj is closed, the game ball flowing down from above toward the electric accessory 64aj will collide with (interfere with) the electric accessory 64aj and change its path. is changed (varied) and flows down to the right side of the second variable winning device 650 (route Ka1), or collides with (interferes with) the electric accessory 64aj and the path is changed, so that the second variable winning device 650 (route Ka2), and directly flows down toward the second variable winning device 650 without colliding with (interfering with) the electric accessory 64aj (route Ka3). That is, in the state where the electric accessory 64aj is closed, although the ball cannot enter the lower first ball entrance 64b2, it is relatively easy to make it reach the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, in a potential state where the normal state of the normal symbol is set (the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to be released), by playing a left-handed game, the lottery of the first special symbol will be executed with a probability of 1/5. When a small hit occurs and the second specific winning hole 650a is opened, it becomes possible to relatively easily enter the game ball into the second specific winning hole 650a. In addition, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the potential state, a long variation is set regardless of the lottery result, so even if the player continues to hit right, there is little benefit for the player ( Although the player wins the small prize, the interval between small winning games becomes longer, making it difficult to win the prize ball).

Moreover, FIG. 346(b) is a diagram showing the downstream path of the game ball when the electric accessory 64aj is opened. As shown in FIG. 346(b), when the electric accessory 64aj is open, the game ball flowing down from above the electric accessory 64aj collides with (interferes with) the electric accessory 64aj and the falling path is interrupted. Even if it is changed, there is a lower possibility that it will be reflected in the direction of the second variable winning device 650 (paths Kb1, Kb2). In addition, since the electric accessory 64aj is opened, the area of the area formed between the electric accessory 64aj and the lower first ball entrance hole 64b2 becomes wider, so that the lower first ball may interfere with the nail or the like. Game balls enter the ball entrance 64b2 relatively easily (for example, at a rate of about 1 out of 200 balls). It should be noted that the game ball is configured as a state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball, just because it is easier to enter the ball compared to the closed state, compared to the time saving state of the normal symbol in other embodiments. Therefore, in the probability variable state or the time saving state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the lower first ball entry hole 64b2 and the second specific winning hole 650a, so the first special symbol Disadvantageous state in which the game ball cannot enter the second specific winning hole 650a even though the second specific winning hole 650a is opened with a probability of 1/5 every time a lottery is executed. form. In addition, in this modification, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, every time the game ball passes through the through gate 67, a variable time of 0.1 seconds is set, and the winning probability is high (for example, 232/233). In the case of a win, the electric accessory 64aj is released for 2.5 seconds. That is, by playing a left-handed game, the player repeats a 0.1-second fluctuation and a 2.5-second release. In other words, the electric accessory 64aj remains open for the most part. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball from entering the second specific ball entry port 650a in the time saving state or the variable probability state.

In this way, in the modified example of the thirteenth embodiment, the second specific winning opening 650a is blocked by the electric accessory 64aj that is released when the normal symbol wins, so that the time saving state and the variable probability state The configuration is such that even if you hit left-handed and hit a small hit, it will be difficult to win the prize ball. As a result, only when a left hit is made in the normal state of the normal symbol (a state in which the electric accessory 64aj is difficult to release) and a small win is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, the game is transferred to the second specific winning hole 650a. It is possible to create an advantageous state in which it is easy (possible) for the ball to enter the ball. In other words, the configuration is such that a relatively advantageous state is created by performing a left-handed hit in a potential state. Therefore, it is possible to create an advantageous state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball by hitting left-handed, and an advantageous state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball by hitting right-handed, thereby making it possible to diversify gaming methods. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, in this modification, the degree of advantage is made different between a potential state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball by hitting to the left and a normal state in which it is easier to obtain a prize ball by hitting to the right. It is structured as follows: This makes it possible to add variety to the game, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this modification, by making the probability that the second special symbol will be a small hit higher than the probability that the first special symbol will be a small win, the probability state in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed is higher than that Although the normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly performed is more advantageous, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to varying the small winning probability depending on the type of special symbol, for example, the small winning probability of the first special symbol is higher than the small winning probability of the second special symbol in one small winning game. By configuring the game ball so that the number of game balls that can win a prize tends to decrease, the normal state in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly performed may be more advantageous. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entering the second specific winning hole 650a that is opened when the first special symbol is a small win, By making the number of prize balls smaller than the number of prize balls based on the balls entering the first specific winning hole 65a that is opened when It may be configured as follows. By implementing these modifications, the degree of advantage can be varied in a more diverse manner, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Although the thirteenth embodiment and its modified examples are configured so that the normal state is more advantageous than the potential state, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the potential state is more advantageous than the normal state.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 341. In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the configuration is such that an advantageous state in which it is easy to obtain prize balls due to a small hit is formed in two types of game states, the normal state and the potential state. In addition, by making the normal state and the potential state different in their advantageousness, and configuring the normal state to be more advantageous than the potential state, a more varied gameplay experience has been realized.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, only the potential state is configured as an advantageous game state in which it is easy to obtain prize balls due to small hits. Furthermore, in the fourteenth embodiment, the degree of advantage (ease of obtaining a prize ball) is configured to be variable depending on the number of special symbol drawings performed in the probability state. More specifically, as a potential state, the most advantageous state (potential state A) in which the second special symbol lottery is likely to be executed has a high probability of winning a small win (for example, a probability of 59/60); There are two types of states: a state where the degree of advantage is lower (potential state B) than a state where the degree of advantage is lower than a state where the lottery of the first special symbol is more likely to be executed (potential state A) where the probability of winning a small win is low (for example, a probability of 1/5). It is configured so that it can be switched. Thereby, even in an advantageous potential state in which a small winning game is likely to be executed, the degree of advantage can be further varied, so that the player's interest in the game can be further improved.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the main controller 110 has been changed. The configuration of the ROM 202 is partially changed, but the other configurations are the same as the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the thirteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the thirteenth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 347, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 347 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 347, the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment has an upper first ball entry hole, which is different from the configuration of the game board 13 in the thirteenth embodiment (and first embodiment) (see FIG. 2). 64b1, and instead of the lower first ball entrance 64b2, a central first ball entrance 64c with an attached central electric accessory 64ca is provided, and instead of the second ball entrance 640, a sorting device 6400D is provided. is provided, and the arrangement of the second variable prize winning device 650, which is released in the event of a jackpot or a small win of the first special symbol, has been moved to the right side of the board, and the game is launched by left-handed hitting. The change is that the upper left side is blocked by multiple nails to make it difficult for the ball to enter. The reason why the arrangement of the second variable prize winning device 650 was changed is because the first special symbol lottery has a relatively high probability (probability of 1/5) of winning a small win, so the gaming state in which a left-handed game should be played (latest) The purpose is to prevent a game ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 in a gaming state other than a certain state, which would be advantageous to the player.

The electric accessory 64ca attached to the first central ball entrance 64c is opened when the normal symbol hits, like the electric accessory 64a in the thirteenth embodiment. For this reason, in the time saving state and the variable probability state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, the game balls are more likely to enter the central first ball entry port 64c, making it difficult to consume the balls. Therefore, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, the gaming efficiency is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The sorting device 6400D is configured to be able to sort (let the balls enter) the entered game balls into either the first ball entry port 6400D1 or the second ball entry port 6400D2 provided inside. There is. The first ball entrance 6400D1, like the central first ball entrance 64c, is configured as a ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the second ball entrance 6400D2 is configured as a ball entrance that triggers the lottery of the second special symbol. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 347, the inside of the sorting device 6400D receives the game balls that have entered, and directs the received game balls to either the first ball entrance 6400D1 or the second ball entrance 6400D2. A distribution member 6400Da is provided to cause the flow to flow downward. This distribution member 6400Da is provided with receiving portions on the left and right sides that can receive balls flowing down from above. The distribution member 6400Da is arranged such that the receiving part on the right side is directly below the opening of the distribution device 6400D (position where game balls can enter), and the receiving part on the left side is located at the opening of the distribution device 6400D. There are two possible arrangements: one directly below the . FIG. 347 illustrates an arrangement in which the right receiving portion is directly below the opening.

If a game ball that enters the sorting device 6400D through the opening is caught by the right receiving part in a state where the right receiving part is placed directly below the opening, the game ball will not be played. Due to the weight of the ball, the distribution member 6400a rotates clockwise about the shaft 6400Db, so that the left receiving portion is located directly below the opening. Further, due to the rotation, the right receiving portion becomes inclined in the lower right direction when viewed from the front, so that the game ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows down to the lower right direction of the distribution member 6400Da. That is, the ball flows down in the direction of the second ball entry port 6400D2 and enters the second ball entry port 6400D2.

On the other hand, if a game ball that enters the distribution device 6400D is caught by the left side receiving part in a state where the left side receiving part is placed directly below the opening, the weight of the game ball is As a result, the distribution member 6400Da rotates counterclockwise about the shaft 6400Db, so that the receiving portion on the right side is located directly below the opening. Further, due to the rotation, the left receiving portion becomes inclined in the lower left direction when viewed from the front, so that the game ball rolls along the inclination, and as a result, flows down to the lower left direction of the distribution member 6400Da. That is, the ball flows down in the direction of the first ball entry port 6400D1 and enters the first ball entry port 6400D1. Therefore, each time a game ball enters the distribution device 6400D, it can be distributed alternately to the first ball entry port 6400D1 and the second ball entry port 6400D2.

Details will be described later, but in the fourteenth embodiment, in the potential state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol tends to be shorter (the small hit of the first special symbol starts while the second special symbol is fluctuating). As a result, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is likely to be shorter (potential state B) (potential state B) where the event of forced stop due to the fluctuation of the second special symbol is likely to occur (the first A state (potential state A) in which a small hit of the second special symbol is started during the fluctuation of the special symbol, which tends to cause an event in which the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced to stop due to a miss (potential state A) The configuration is such that the following status is set. That is, in the probability state, there is a state in which the first special symbol is mainly selected to win a small hit with a probability of 1/5, and a second special symbol is mainly drawn in which the second special symbol is selected to be a small win with a probability of 59/60. The configuration is such that there are two types of states: an execution state and an execution state. Along with this, the variable display on the game board 13 is designed so that both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed by simply performing a right hit in the potential state. A distribution device 6400D that can alternately distribute game balls to a first ball entrance 6400D1 and a second ball entrance 6400D2 is provided in the right side area of the device unit 80.

<Electrical configuration in the fourteenth embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 348 to 352, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described. Here, in the ROM 202 in the fourteenth embodiment, the configurations of the jackpot type selection table 202d, the fluctuation pattern selection table 202f, and the fluctuation pattern scenario table 202ka are partially changed from the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment. The difference is that Since the other configurations are the same as the configuration of the ROM 202 in the thirteenth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 348, details of the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the fourteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 348, in the variation pattern scenario table 202ka in the fourteenth embodiment, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot A14 or jackpot G14, the number of drawings of special symbols is in the range of 1 to 99. As a variation pattern selection table, a probability variation A table 202f21 is defined in association with the variation pattern selection table. Details will be described later in FIG. 350, but this A table for probability variation 202f21 is one of the tables that can be referenced while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and this table is referred to in the probability state. While this forms the most advantageous state in which the small winning game of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed, when this table is referred to in a variable probability state, the game efficiency is higher for left-handed players than right-handed players. This creates a relatively advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, a normal table 202f23 is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with a range in which the number of special symbol drawings is 100 or more. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 352, but when this normal table 202f23 is referred to, an extremely disadvantageous situation is formed in which the gaming efficiency is deteriorated by executing a right-hand hit in the normal state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is one of jackpot B14, D14, and F14, the probability variation B table 202f22 are defined in association with each other. This B table 202f22 for probability variation is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and when this table is referred to in the probability variation state, the small winning game of the first special symbol While this creates an advantageous state in which it is easier to execute, when this table is referred to in a variable probability state, a relatively advantageous game state is created in which the game efficiency is higher for left-handed players than right-handed players. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, for a range in which the number of drawings for special symbols is 100 or more, a normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with the range. .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 348, when the previous jackpot type is jackpot C14, the probability variation B table 202f22 (see FIG. 351) corresponds to the range of the number of drawings of special symbols from 1 to 24. A table for probability variation 202f21 (see FIG. 350) is defined in association with the range from 25 times to 99 times. This B table 202f22 for probability variation is one of the tables that can be referred to while the probability variation state of the special symbol is set, and when this table is referred to in the probability variation state, the small winning game of the first special symbol While this creates an advantageous state in which it is easier to execute, when this table is referred to in a variable probability state, a relatively advantageous game state is created in which the game efficiency is higher for left-handed players than right-handed players. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, for a range in which the number of drawings for special symbols is 100 or more, a normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined as a variation pattern selection table in association with the range. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 348, if the previous jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the normal table 202f23 (see FIG. 352) is defined in association with it, regardless of the number of special symbols drawn. There is.

In this way, in the fourteenth embodiment, the probability state is changed depending on whether the probability variation A table 202f21 or the probability variation B table 202f22 is referred to (that is, depending on the previous jackpot type). The configuration is such that the degree of advantage in the case of this can be varied. That is, in the potential state, there is a state in which a small winning game based on the drawing of the first special symbol with a relatively low advantage is likely to be executed (probable state B), and a small winning game based on the drawing of the second special symbol. Two types of states can be formed: a state that is likely to be executed (potential state A), and a state that is likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to create more states with different degrees of advantage for the player, thereby making it possible to diversify the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, details of the jackpot type selection table 202d in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 349. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the jackpot type selection table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 349, in the fourteenth embodiment, five jackpot types, "jackpot A14" to "jackpot E14", are defined as jackpot types of the first special symbol. Furthermore, three jackpot types, ``Jackpot F14'' to ``Jackpot H14,'' are defined as the jackpot types of the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 349, the jackpot type of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is "jackpot A14" when the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 4". They are defined in correspondence. This "Jackpot A14" is a type in which the number of rounds of jackpot is 8 rounds and is set to the most advantageous potential state A (potential state in which the small winning game of the second special symbol is likely to be executed) after the jackpot ends. This is a jackpot (8 round guaranteed odd jackpot). Since potential state A is the most advantageous gaming state, "jackpot A14" becomes the most advantageous jackpot type in terms of the gaming state after the jackpot ends.

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, "Jackpot B14" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first win type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 19". In this "Jackpot B14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and if you win in a gaming state other than the probability state, after the jackpot is over, it will be set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state, while in the probability state This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which when the jackpot is won, the state after the jackpot is set to a probability state B (an advantageous state in which a small winning game with the first special symbol is likely to be executed). In addition, if the variable probability state is set after the end of "Jackpot B14", by allowing the number of time reductions to elapse (end), the probability state B will be maintained until the number of variable probability (100 times) ends. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "10 to 29", "jackpot C14" is defined as the jackpot type in association. In this "Jackpot C14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and if you win in a gaming state other than the potential state, the state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state, while the probability state is This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which when the jackpot is won, the probability state A (the most advantageous state in which the small winning game of the second special symbol is likely to be executed) is set after the end of the jackpot. In addition, after the end of "Jackpot C14", the special symbol lottery is executed 25 times, thereby shifting from the probability state A to the probability state B, which is less advantageous (see FIG. 348). In addition, if the variable probability state is set after the end of "Jackpot B14", by allowing the time saving number to elapse (end), it will remain in the potential state B until the number of variable probability (100 times) ends. .

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "70 to 79", "jackpot D14" is defined as the jackpot type in association. In this "Jackpot D14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and if you win in a gaming state other than the potential state, the state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state, while the probability state is This is a type of jackpot (8-round probability variable jackpot) in which when the jackpot is won, the state after the jackpot is set to a probability state B (an advantageous state in which a small winning game with the first special symbol is likely to be executed). In addition, if the probability variable state is set after the end of "Jackpot D14", by allowing the time saving number to elapse (end), the potential state B will be maintained until the probability variable number (100 times) ends. . Here, if you win "Jackpot D14" in a gaming state other than the probability state, the number of probability variations is set smaller than in "Jackpot B14" or "Jackpot C14", so you will move to a more advantageous probability state. It is possible to make the player have a strong sense of expectation for the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 349, for the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99", "jackpot E14" is defined as the jackpot type in association. This "jackpot E14" is a type of jackpot (8 rounds normal jackpot) in which the number of rounds of the jackpot is 8 rounds, and the time saving state is set to 100 times after the jackpot ends. Since the time saving state in the fourteenth embodiment is more disadvantageous than the variable probability state, "jackpot E14" is the most disadvantageous jackpot among the jackpot types of the first special symbol.

On the other hand, as the jackpot type of the second special symbol (special figure 2), "jackpot F14" is defined as the jackpot type in correspondence with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 4". ing. This "Jackpot F14" has 16 rounds of jackpots, and if you win in a gaming state other than the probability state, after the jackpot is over, it will be set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state, while in the probability state This is a type of jackpot (16 round probability variable jackpot) in which when a winning is won, the state after the jackpot is set to a probability state B (an advantageous state in which a small winning game with the first special symbol is likely to be executed). In addition, since the variable probability state that is set after the end of "Jackpot F14" is set to 100 times as the number of time savings, the variable probability state of the special symbol also ends at the same time as the end of the number of time savings. Therefore, if the "jackpot F14" is won in a gaming state other than the potential state, there is no possibility of shifting to the advantageous potential state. This is intended to suppress irregular gaming methods in which players hit right in game states other than the potential state.

Further, "Jackpot G14" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "5 to 79". In this "Jackpot G14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and if you win in a gaming state other than the potential state, the state after the jackpot is set to a relatively advantageous probability variable state, while the probability state is This is a type of jackpot (16 round probability variable jackpot) in which when a winning is won in , the probability state A (the most advantageous state in which a small winning game with the second special symbol is likely to be executed) is set after the end of the jackpot. In addition, in the variable probability state that is set after the end of "Jackpot G14", 100 times is set as the time saving number, so similarly to "Jackpot F14", the irregular state where you hit right in a gaming state other than the potential state It is possible to control the gaming method.

Furthermore, "Jackpot H14" is defined as a jackpot type in association with the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99". In this "Jackpot H14", the number of rounds of the jackpot is 16 rounds, and if you win in a gaming state other than the potential state, the most disadvantageous normal state will be set after the end of the jackpot, while in the potential state This is a type of jackpot (normal jackpot for 16 rounds) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot ends if the player wins. Furthermore, if you win "Jackpot H14" in a gaming state other than a potential state, setting the most disadvantageous normal state is to suppress the irregular gaming method of hitting right in a gaming state other than a potential state. This is to aim for.

Next, details of the probability variation A table 202f21 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 350. FIG. 350 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation A table 202f21. As shown in FIG. 350, the probability variation A table 202f21 defines the correspondence between the gaming state at the time when the special symbol lottery is executed and the variation patterns that can be selected for each type of special symbol. More specifically, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 in the probability change state, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more. Become. Further, in the probability state, only the long variation of the first special symbol is selected, similar to the case where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one or more in the probability variable state.

On the other hand, regarding the second special symbol, in the case of a variable probability state, a long variation of 600 seconds is set regardless of the lottery result, while in the case of a probability state, a short variation of 0.1 seconds to 1 second is set. Set. As a result, when game balls are consecutively entered into the distribution device 6400D by right-handed batting in a variable probability state, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first ball entry port 6400D1 and the second ball entry port 6400D2. , the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol become longer, resulting in an extremely poor gaming efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed in a state of variable probability. On the other hand, when you hit right in a potential state, the ball enters the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2 alternately, so immediately after you start hitting right, the first special symbol is displayed fluctuating. and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed overlappingly. However, as shown in FIG. 350, in the potential state, while the long fluctuation of the first special symbol is set, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is less than 1 second, so the right-handed game is continued. By doing so, the lottery for the second special symbol can be executed more frequently than the lottery for the first special symbol. In other words, an advantageous state is formed in which the second special symbol wins continuously. Therefore, a potential state A that is most advantageous to the player is formed.

Next, details of the probability variation B table 202f22 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 351. FIG. 351 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the probability variation B table 202f22. As shown in FIG. 351, the probability variable B table 202f22 is configured such that the variation pattern selected in the probability variable state is exactly the same as the probability variable A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350). As a result, if the ball is hit to the right and consecutively enters the distribution device 6400D in the variable probability state where the scenario is set in which the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variation B table 202f22, the probability variation state is set. As in the case where the A table 202f21 is referred to, as a result of the game balls being alternately distributed to the first ball entrance 6400D1 and the second ball entrance 6400D2, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, The fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol become longer, resulting in an extremely poor gaming efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed in a state of variable probability.

In addition, in the potential state, while the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is 1 second or less, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set as a long fluctuation of 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result of the second special symbol. be done. As a result, if you play right-handed in a potential state, the first special symbol's fluctuation display of 1 second or less and the second special symbol's long fluctuation are executed overlappingly, so you can continue playing the right-handed game. By doing so, the lottery for the first special symbol can be executed more frequently than the lottery for the second special symbol. In other words, an advantageous state (potential state B) in which the first special symbol wins continuously is created. Note that the probability of getting a small hit in the first special symbol lottery is 1/5, while the probability of getting a small win in the second special symbol lottery is 59/60, so potential state B is as follows. Small winning games are executed less frequently than in potential state A. In other words, the potential state B forms a state that is less advantageous than the potential state A. Therefore, in the probability state, it is advantageous for the player to refer to the probability variation A table 202f21 (see FIG. 350) and determine the variation pattern.

Next, details of the normal table 202f23 in the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 352. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing the specified contents of the normal table 202f23. As shown in FIG. 352, the normal table 202f23 is configured so that the same variation time as the variation pattern selected in the probability variation state is selected. That is, by executing the drawing of the first special symbol by left-handed hitting, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 20 seconds or less is set, while right-handed hitting is continued in all states, normal state, time saving state, and fixed variable state. As a result, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol becomes 1 or more, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol occurs. The time and the variation time of the second special symbol become longer, resulting in an extremely poor gaming efficiency. Therefore, it is possible to suppress irregular gaming methods in which the player plays right-handed in states other than the potential state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 343, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 341 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 341, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourteenth embodiment has five states, which can be roughly divided. That is, the normal state shown on the upper left side of FIG. 341, the time saving state shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, the variable probability state shown in the center of FIG. 341, and the potential state B shown on the lower left side of FIG. , and a potential state A shown on the lower right side of FIG. 341.

The normal state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a normal state of normal symbols, which is the most disadvantageous game state in which the probability of a jackpot is low (1/240) and the electric accessory 64a is difficult to release. form. In addition, the time saving state indicates a low probability state of special symbols and a time saving state of normal symbols, and although the probability of a jackpot is low (1/240), the electric accessory 64a is likely to be released, so the left By hitting the ball, a relatively advantageous game state is created in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held. In addition, the variable probability state refers to the variable probability state of special symbols and the time-saving state of normal symbols, and the probability of a jackpot is high (1/80), and the electric accessory 64a is easily released, so it is easier to hit left-handed. By doing this, a game state more advantageous than a time-saving state in which the game can be played without reducing the number of balls held is formed. In addition, the probability state A and the probability state B indicate the probability change state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of a jackpot is high (1/80), and the electric accessory 64a is in a gaming state in which it is difficult to unlock. In addition, in the probability state B, since it becomes easier to execute the small winning game of the first special symbol by hitting right, the game ball enters the second specific winning hole 650a where it is possible to enter the game ball by hitting right. An advantageous state is formed in which a prize ball can be obtained by letting the game ball enter relatively frequently (every time the first special symbol lottery is executed about five times). On the other hand, in potential state A, as mentioned above, by hitting right, it becomes easier to execute the small winning game of the second special symbol, so the first specific prize that allows the game ball to enter by hitting right A more advantageous state than potential state B is formed in which a prize ball can be won by frequently entering the ball into the opening 65a (almost every time the second special symbol lottery is executed).

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of transition from the normal state to another state only in the case of a jackpot. Specifically, as shown on the upper left side of Fig. 341, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A14, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. The state shifts to the most advantageous potential state A. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots B14 to D14, which are determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, the state will be changed to a relatively advantageous probability state. Transition. Further, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and a jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a time saving state after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the normal state, winning a jackpot always shifts the player to a more advantageous state compared to the normal state, so it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation of winning the jackpot.

Further, as shown on the upper right side of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of transition from the time saving state to another state not only when a jackpot is achieved but also when the number of time saving times ends. Specifically, as shown on the upper right side of Figure 341, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot A14, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. The state shifts to the most advantageous potential state A. In addition, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of the jackpots B14 to D14, which are determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends, the state will be changed to a relatively advantageous probability state. Transition. Further, after the time saving state is set, by allowing the prescribed number of time saving times (100 times) to elapse (end), the player is directly transferred to the normal state, which is the most disadvantageous for the player (without going through a jackpot). On the other hand, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and a jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% is determined as the jackpot type, the time saving state is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the time saving state, if you win a jackpot, you will either move to a more advantageous gaming state, or at least the current gaming state (time saving state) will be maintained, while the number of time saving times will end. If this happens, the player will enter a disadvantageous normal state, so the player can play the game in the hope of winning a jackpot before the time-saving state ends.

Furthermore, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, there is a possibility of transitioning from the variable probability state to another state when a jackpot is achieved or when a predetermined number of time savings has elapsed. Specifically, as shown in the center of FIG. 341, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot E14, which is determined at a rate of 20% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the probability will change after the jackpot ends. Shifts to a time-saving state that is more disadvantageous than the current state. Further, when the first special symbol is a jackpot and a jackpot A14 determined at a rate of 5% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the state shifts to the most advantageous potential state B after the jackpot ends. Furthermore, after the probability change state is set, by allowing a specified number of time-saving times (10, 25, or 50 times) to pass, the player can directly enter consecutive winning mode A, which is relatively advantageous for the player (without going through a jackpot). to) transition. On the other hand, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and one of jackpots B14 to D14, which are determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is determined, a variable probability state is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in the variable probability state, while the rate of transition to a more advantageous state when a jackpot is achieved is low (5% rate), when the time saving state ends, the player will definitely move to a more advantageous probability state. Therefore, it is possible to realize an innovative game experience in which the player expects more strongly that the time-saving state will end.

Furthermore, as shown on the lower left side of Fig. 341, the transition from potential state B to other states occurs not only when a jackpot occurs, but also when the specified number of probability changes (100 times after the end of the jackpot) ends. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown on the lower left side of FIG. 341, if the first special symbol is a jackpot and jackpots A14 and C14, which are determined at a rate of 55% as the jackpot type, are selected (determined), the jackpot will be a jackpot. After the completion of the process, the process shifts to the most advantageous potential state B. Further, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and a jackpot E14 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a disadvantageous time-saving state after the jackpot ends. Moreover, when the number of probability variations (100 times after the end of the jackpot) ends, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, if the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and jackpots B14 and D14, which are determined at a rate of 25% as jackpot types, are selected (determined), potential state B is set again after the jackpot ends. Ru. Therefore, in the probability state B, it is possible to realize a gaming experience that makes the player expect to win the jackpot before the number of probability variations ends and the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state.

Furthermore, as shown on the lower right side of Figure 341, the transition from potential state A to other states occurs not only when a jackpot occurs, but also when the specified number of probability changes (100 times after the end of the jackpot) ends. there is a possibility. Specifically, as shown on the lower right side of Fig. 341, if the second special symbol is a jackpot and jackpot F14, which is determined at a rate of 5% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), after the jackpot ends. The state shifts to potential state A, which is relatively less advantageous. In addition, when the second special symbol is a jackpot and a jackpot H14 determined at a rate of 20% is selected (determined) as the jackpot type, the game shifts to a disadvantageous time-saving state after the jackpot ends. Moreover, when the number of probability variations (100 times after the end of the jackpot) ends, the game shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when the first special symbol becomes a jackpot and jackpot G14, which is determined at a rate of 75% as the jackpot type, is selected (determined), the potential state A is set again after the jackpot ends. Therefore, in potential state A, by winning the jackpot before the probability change count ends and the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state, the most advantageous potential state A can be changed to the most advantageous state A with a high probability ( This creates an extremely advantageous gaming state that loops at a rate of 75%.

As explained above, in the fourteenth embodiment, there are two types of games, a potential state A and a potential state B, as advantageous states in which it is possible to win a prize ball without going through a jackpot by playing a small winning game. The configuration is such that a state is provided. Both of these states are composed of potential states (probability change states for special symbols and normal states for normal symbols), and by varying the fluctuation pattern scenarios, the lottery will be biased towards the second special symbol with a high probability of winning. The configuration is such that a potential state A is executed (with a biased emphasis) and a potential state B is executed with a bias (biased emphasis) on the lottery of the first special symbol with a low probability of winning a small prize. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize different playability (playability that allows you to win more prize balls and playability that makes it difficult to win prize balls) in one potential state. It can improve people's interest. Furthermore, unlike the thirteenth embodiment described above, the potential state can be set as the most advantageous gaming state, and the normal state can be set as the most disadvantageous gaming state, so that when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, the normal There is no need to make any difference in control between this state and the normal state that transitions to via another gaming state. Therefore, the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Note that in the fourteenth embodiment, the normal state is configured as the most disadvantageous gaming state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, similarly to the thirteenth embodiment, the normal state may be configured as one of the advantageous states in which a small winning game is likely to be executed. That is, in addition to the potential state A and the potential state B, the normal state may also be configured to be advantageous to the player. With this configuration, the number of advantageous situations increases, so it is possible to increase the player's interest in playing the game.

In the fourteenth embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in a state other than the potential state, the long variation is always set as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. It is not limited to this. For example, when switching from a right-handed game to a left-handed game, such as immediately after the end of a jackpot or when the number of guaranteed variable times has passed in a potential state, the first special symbol will be drawn for a specific number of times (for example, 4 times). It may be configured such that even if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more, the long variation is not set (the variation time is set to 20 seconds or less). In other words, as a variation pattern scenario, if the variation display executed for the first time after the end of the jackpot or the 100th time after the end of the jackpot is a variation display of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is set regardless of the status of the reserved balls. It is also possible to set a scenario in which a variable time of 20 seconds or less is selected. In addition, in this case, the structure is configured so that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short (for example, 0.1 seconds) within 5 times after the end of the jackpot, and within the range of 100 to 105 times after the end of the jackpot. You may. With this configuration, after the end of the jackpot, the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol can be reduced to 0 before the variable display of the first special symbol ends, so that the regular gaming method can be It is possible to suppress a disadvantageous state in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are subject to long fluctuations even though they have been changed.

In the fourteenth embodiment, when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more in a state other than the potential state, by increasing the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the state other than the potential state is The structure was designed to reduce the gaming efficiency when a right-handed game is played in a gaming state, and to suppress irregular gaming methods in which a right-handed game is played in a state other than a potential state, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, in a state other than the potential state, the first special symbol may be configured to make a long fluctuation when the total number of reserved balls is 5 or more. When a regular game method (left-handed game) is performed in a state other than the potential state, only the reserved balls of the first special symbol are accumulated, so the number of reserved balls is at most four. On the other hand, if you play an irregular game method in which you hit right in a game state other than the potential state, the game ball will enter the first ball entry port 6400D1 and the second ball entry port 6400D2 alternately, as a result, More than 5 balls are held. Therefore, by continuing to hit right, an extremely disadvantageous game state is formed in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol have long fluctuations. It is possible to control the method. In addition, at first glance, it seems that the number of reserved balls is 4 or less by stopping the right-handed hitting when the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and restarting the right-handed hitting when the first special symbol finishes changing. It seems that there is a method of playing games by adjusting the amount. However, when this method is used, as the number of draws for the first special symbol increases, the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol that fluctuates long regardless of the lottery result or the number of reserved balls increases. When the lottery is held four times, there are almost four reserved balls. Therefore, from then on, the first special symbol also becomes a long fluctuation, creating a disadvantageous situation in which the gaming efficiency is extremely poor. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an irregular gaming method in which the player plays right-handed in a state other than the potential state.

In the 14th embodiment, by making the probability of a small hit of the second special symbol higher than the probability of a small win of the first special symbol, a potential state B in which the lottery of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Although the configuration is such that the potential state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly executed is more advantageous, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to varying the small winning probability depending on the type of special symbol, for example, the small winning probability of the first special symbol is higher than the small winning probability of the second special symbol in one small winning game. By configuring the system so that the number of game balls that can win a prize tends to decrease, the potential state A in which the lottery of the second special symbol is mainly performed may be configured to be more advantageous. . In addition, instead of or in addition to these, the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entering the second specific winning hole 650a that is opened when the first special symbol is a small win, By making the number of prize balls smaller than the number of prize balls based on the number of balls entering the first specific winning hole 65a that is opened when It may be configured as follows. By implementing these modifications, the degree of advantage can be varied in a more diverse manner, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

<15th embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 354 to 359. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, in a state where the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set, by ending the time saving state, the variable probability state (special symbol is low probability state) is set. When a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in a state where the high probability state of normal symbols and the low probability state of normal symbols are set, the gaming state during the jackpot fluctuation is set to a probability state. (an advantageous state in which small winning games are likely to be executed). Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment described above, the time saving number ends earlier than the number of probability variations in the probability variation state, thereby changing from the probability variation state to the potential probability state (an advantageous state in which a small winning game is easily executed). It was configured to transition to

On the other hand, in the present 15th embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed during the execution of the jackpot variation, thereby reducing the number of time reductions. is subtracted, and the system is configured so that it is possible to shift to a potential state during the execution of jackpot fluctuations. In other words, even during execution of jackpot fluctuations, it is possible to create an advantageous state in which small winning games are likely to be executed. Furthermore, by adopting the same state transition as in the eleventh embodiment, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is more likely to be advantageous in the probability state than in the probability variable state. As a result, when there is only a small amount of time remaining until the end of the jackpot fluctuation (even if it becomes easier to execute the small winning game, the jackpot game is started without being able to execute the small winning game). Even if there is, the player can be made to want to end the time saving number of times. Therefore, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the lottery of the second special symbol is actively executed during execution of the jackpot fluctuation.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment is that the board configuration of the game board 13 has been partially changed, and the main controller 110 has been changed. The only difference is that the configuration of the ROM 202 has been partially changed. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the eleventh implementation The configuration is the same as the pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the eleventh embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 354 and 355, the board configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 354 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 in the fifteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 354, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment is different from the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment described above, in that the right side area of the game board 13 (right-handed game The difference is that the configuration of the area (the area in which the ball shot by the ball falls) is different. Further, the difference is that a first ball entry port 64c is provided in the center instead of the first ball entry port 64b1 and the first ball entry port 64b2.

As shown in FIG. 354, a ball path ZK1 through which game balls can flow down (pass) is formed in the right side area of the game board 13, and in order from the upstream side of the ball path ZK1, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 1650 , a second ball entrance 640 with an electric accessory 640a attached thereto, and a variable prize winning device 2650 for small winnings that are opened during the small winning game are arranged. Further, above the second ball entry port 640, a right first ball entry port 64r is provided which becomes an opportunity to draw a first special symbol when a game ball enters the ball. Note that the right first ball entrance 64r is a position where the game ball that has flown down the ball path ZK1 is difficult to enter (repulsion (interference) with the ball path ZK1 and other game balls). ) where the ball can enter the ball only if Therefore, more than 90% of the game balls hit right enter the second ball entry port 640, or pass through the second ball entry port 640 and enter the small winning variable winning device 2650 or the out port 66. Enter the ball. The ratio of game balls entering the right first ball entrance 64r is about 1 in 20.

The variable winning device 1650 disposed on the ball path ZK1 is a device that opens and closes in accordance with a predetermined opening scenario when a jackpot is won in a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) lottery. A specific winning opening 1650a and an opening/closing door 1650f that can be changed between an open state in which a ball can enter the specific winning opening 1650a, and a closed state in which it is more difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 1650a. It is configured such that 15 balls are paid out as prize balls every time one ball enters during the jackpot game.

The second ball entry port 640 has an opening formed by cutting out a part of the lower surface of the ball flow of the ball path ZK1, and every time one ball enters, one ball is awarded as a prize ball. It is configured so that the ball is paid out. Further, similarly to the first control example described above, it is configured to trigger the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol. The opening of the second ball entry port 640 is covered with an electric accessory 640a, and the electric accessory 640a is divided into an open state in which a ball can enter and a state in which it is difficult (or impossible) to enter the ball than in the open state. It is configured such that the ease with which a ball enters the ball can be varied by variably controlling the ball to a closed state (possible).

In the state where the electric accessory 640a covers the opening of the second ball entry port 640 (closed state), the ball flowing down the ball path ZK1 passes over the electric accessory 640a and goes to the downstream side of the ball path ZK1. It is configured so that it flows downward. In other words, the game ball that flows downstream from the second ball entry port 640 in the ball path ZK1 is a game ball that did not (could not) enter the second ball entry port 640.

In the ball path ZK1, the ball flowing downstream from the second ball entrance 640 reaches the small winning variable winning device 2650. This small win variable winning device 2650 is composed of a small win winning hole 2650a and an opening/closing door 2650f for covering the opening of the small winning winning hole 2650a. It has an opening formed by cutting out a part of the lower surface of the ZK1 ball flow, and is configured so that for every ball that enters, 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. .

This small winning variable prize winning device 2650 is opened during a small winning game that is executed when a small winning is won in a special symbol (second special symbol) lottery, and the opening/closing door 2650f is opened in a predetermined manner. By opening the ball in an open scenario, it is variably controlled to an open state in which a ball can enter, and a closed state in which it is more difficult (impossible) for a ball to enter than in the open state. In addition, in this 15th embodiment, similarly to the above-mentioned 11th embodiment, when the lottery of the second special symbol is executed, it is configured to win a small hit with a high probability (for example, 59/60). .

In the closed state where the opening/closing door 2650f closes the small winning prize opening 2650a, the ball flowing down the ball path ZK1 is configured to pass through the top surface of the opening/closing door 2650f and flow down toward the out port 66. . The upper surface (ball passage surface) of this opening/closing door 2650f is provided with a delay means for delaying the flow of the ball, and is configured so that it takes 1 second for the ball to pass over the opening/closing door 2650f. . By providing this delay means, the necessary ball passage time can be secured in a smaller space. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the fifteenth embodiment, as a delay means, the ball path is opened and closed so as to have a high frictional resistance (friction coefficient) (higher frictional resistance than other ball path surfaces of the ball path ZK1). The upper surface of the door 2650f has an uneven portion that the ball can ride over.

As a delay means, a ball delay path can be formed by devising the structure of the ball path surface (for example, a path in which the ball path is serpentine), or a ball delay path can be created by devising the material of the ball path surface. Anything can be used as long as it forms a ball or delays the passage time for the ball to pass through a predetermined section.

Furthermore, the ball fired in the left-handed game (game aiming at the left side area (left side area) of the variable display unit 80) enters each winning hole (ball entry hole) provided in the ball path ZK1 mentioned above. A nail is installed below the game board 13 (below and to the right of the first ball entrance 64) as a regulating member (regulating means) for regulating the occurrence of the ball being thrown. With this configuration, it is possible to provide players with different games for right-handed games and left-handed games, so it is possible to provide players with games that they will never get tired of (hard to get bored of). .

Next, details of the ball flow in the right region in the fifteenth embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 355. FIG. 355(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the ball flow in a state where the time saving state or variable probability state is set as the gaming state, and FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a ball flow in a state where

The ball path ZK1 of the game board 13 of the fifteenth embodiment is the ball passage time from the through gate 67 to the second ball entrance 640 (the time required for the ball to pass through the through gate 67 to reach the second ball entrance 640). The configuration is such that the required time) is 0.5 seconds. In addition, the configuration is such that the ball passing time on the electric accessory 640a that covers the second ball entrance 640 (the time required for the ball to pass (flow down) from the upstream end to the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a) is 1 second. are doing.

A detailed explanation will be given later, but in the fifteenth embodiment, when the high probability state (time saving state, variable probability state) of normal symbols is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is 0.1 seconds. The configuration is such that the time is set to ~0.4 seconds, that is, shorter than the ball passage time from the through gate 67 to the second ball entry port 640. Further, when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, the opening operation of 0.2 seconds is executed twice with a closing period of 0.8 seconds in between. In other words, it is configured to perform an opening operation in which a closing period is set shorter than the time (1 second) for the ball to pass over the electric accessory 640a.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355(a), if a right-handed game is played when the time saving mode is set as the gaming mode, most of the balls will enter the second ball entrance 640. Furthermore, in the fifteenth embodiment, since the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to less than half of the ball passage time (0.5 seconds) from the through gate 67 to the second ball entry port 640, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is Even if one lottery is held in which the lottery result is a loss, the ball that caused the loss in the lottery can be entered into the second ball entry port 640 by winning the next lottery. can.

On the other hand, when the low probability state (normal state, potential state) of normal symbols is set as the gaming state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is 3 to 5 seconds, that is, from the through gate 67 to the second ball entry port. The configuration is such that a time longer than the ball passage time (0.5 seconds) up to 640 is set. Furthermore, when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, a 0.04 second opening operation is executed once. In other words, the configuration is such that the ball can enter the second ball entry port 640 for only 0.04 seconds for a period of 3 to 5 seconds.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 355(b), when playing a right-handed game when the potential state is set as the game state, most of the balls do not enter the second ball entrance 640. The ball will flow down toward the small winning prize device 2650. In addition, in the present 15th embodiment, the configuration is such that the time for the ball to pass over the electric accessory 640a is 1 second, and the configuration is such that the ball is fired once every 0.6 seconds. Therefore, by continuously playing the right-handed game, one ball always stays on the electric accessory 640a.

By configuring in this way, when a winning result is won in the normal symbol lottery, the ball can be reliably entered into the second ball entrance 640 and the second special symbol lottery can be executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the lottery of the second special symbol is not executed in a game state (variable probability state, time saving state, potential state) in which a hitting game is executed. As mentioned above, when the second special symbol lottery is executed, there is a high probability of winning a small hit, so in the probability state, the game ball enters the second ball entry port 640 at intervals of 3 to 5 seconds. While doing so, it becomes possible to enter the game ball into the small winning prize device 2650 and win the prize ball. In other words, an advantageous state is formed in which small winning games are frequently executed by drawing the second special symbol, and prize balls based on small winnings can be frequently obtained. On the other hand, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, almost all game balls hit to the right enter the second ball entry port 640 (or the right first ball entry port 64r), so small winning games are frequently executed. However, it becomes extremely difficult to make the game ball reach the small winning prize device 2650 during the execution period of the small winning game. Therefore, the variable probability state and the time saving state are states where it is only possible to efficiently enter the game ball into the second ball entry port 640 (or the first right ball entry port 64r). The degree of advantage is lower than in the accurate state (it becomes difficult to obtain the prize ball).

Next, with reference to FIG. 356, various operations will be described when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol during the variable probability state, which is a characteristic operation in the fifteenth embodiment. FIG. 356 is a timing chart schematically showing the contents of the variable display performance executed in response to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the changing situation of each special symbol in the fifteenth embodiment. Here, the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment will be briefly explained. Similarly to the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment has a variable display (dynamic display) for showing the lottery result of the first special symbol and a variable display for showing the lottery result of the second special symbol. (dynamic display) and can be executed simultaneously (in parallel).

As shown in FIG. 356, in the variable probability state, chance zone display (see FIG. 297(b)) is set as the performance mode. In addition, during the variable probability state, as described above, most of the game balls fired by hitting the ball to the right enter the second ball entrance 640, and rarely (for example, 1 out of 20 balls) hit the ball to the right. The ball enters the first ball entrance 64r. Therefore, during the probability change state, the number of time saving times is basically subtracted by executing the lottery of the second special symbol. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol while in the variable probability state, the variable probability state will be looped at a rate of about 75%, and the time saving state will be entered at a rate of 20%, similar to the eleventh embodiment described above. It is configured to move (fall) to In other words, even if you hit a jackpot in a variable probability state, there is a low possibility that it will shift to an advantageous probability state. It is possible to make the player play the game with a stronger expectation that the player will play the game. In addition, even if the game ball enters the right first ball entrance 64r and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the small win will not be won, but in the variable probability state, as described above, Since it is extremely difficult to enter the game ball into the small winning prize winning device 2650, the fluctuation of the first special symbol and the fluctuation of the second special symbol are executed overlappingly (simultaneously), thereby saving time. The player can be given the impression that they were able to subtract more times. Therefore, in the probability variable state, the more the game ball enters the right first ball entry port 64r, the more the player can be given the impression that the probability state is approaching, and therefore the player's game You can improve your interest in.

Then, in a state where the variable probability state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set, when the time saving number ends, as mentioned above, it shifts to a more advantageous probability state, and frequently A very advantageous situation is formed in which the small winning game of the second special symbol is executed and the game ball can be easily won into the small winning winning device 2650. In addition, in the probability state, when the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, there is no chance of winning a small win, which gives the player the impression that the remaining number of probability variations has been subtracted by one uselessly. can be used. Therefore, in the variable probability state, it is possible to realize a gameplay that makes you expect more game balls to enter the right first ball entry port 64r, whereas in the probability state, the right first ball entry port 64r It is possible to realize a gameplay that makes you expect that the game ball will not hit the ball. In other words, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which it is possible to switch the role of the first right ball entrance 64r (whether or not it is a ball entrance into which it is preferable to enter the ball) depending on the game state. .

Furthermore, in the present 15th embodiment, by changing the opening control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 depending on the game state, the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed even in the time saving state or the variable probability state. The configuration is mainly for execution. In other words, as in the eleventh embodiment described above, even if the long fluctuation of the second special symbol is not set in the time saving state or the variable probability state and the lottery of the first special symbol is executed, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. The configuration is configured so that a relatively short variation time is set even when the change is made. As a result, in the variable probability state, the time-saving number is used up by drawing the second special symbol, thereby realizing the gaming property of aiming at the most advantageous probability state. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to realize a game feature in which the time saving number of the second special symbols is used up while the jackpot variation of the first special symbols is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 356, in a state where the variable probability state is set as the game state, it is easy to execute the lottery of the second special symbol by the right-handed game, and a relatively low percentage (for example, the number of shot game balls is A game state is entered in which the first special symbol is also drawn at a rate of 1/20. In other words, in the variable probability state, since the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the electric accessory 640a is easy to open, the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640, and the small hit is possible. A game state is created in which it is difficult for game balls to enter the winning device 2650. In this variable probability state, if a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 356, only the lottery of the second special symbol is executed by hitting right during the jackpot variation. In addition, in this 15th embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, a long variation for 600 seconds is executed. During the jackpot fluctuation in this variable probability state, the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is also interrupted every time a small win occurs in the lottery of the second special symbol. Due to these, it becomes possible to execute the lottery of the second special symbol a plurality of times during execution of the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, while the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is being executed, it is possible to display the variation of the second special symbol for the remaining number of time reductions. In this case, since the jackpot of the first special symbol is fluctuating (the special symbol 1 jackpot flag 203h is on), there will be no chance of winning the jackpot twice in the lottery of the second special symbol (the lottery result is wrong or It will be a small win). Therefore, while the long variation of the first special symbol is being executed, there is no possibility that the lottery of the second special symbol will result in a jackpot and a variable probability state or a time saving state will be set. This creates an extremely advantageous situation in which the time saving number can be reliably subtracted every time the second special symbol lottery is executed. Also, since more than 90% of the variation time of the second special symbol is set to 1 second, by continuing to hit right during the long variation of the first special symbol, the long variation Regardless of the number of time reductions at the start, the number of time reductions can almost be ended during the long fluctuation. It should be noted that while the jackpot variation (long variation) of the first special symbol is being executed, a super chance zone effect (see FIG. 357) to be described later is executed. That is, by executing a right-handed hit and ending the time-saving number, an effect mode is executed to indicate a transition to an advantageous potential state.

As shown in FIG. 356, during the execution of the super chance zone performance (that is, during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the variable probability state), the second special symbol is drawn by lottery until the time saving number elapses (ends). When executed, the gaming state is changed from a variable probability state to a probability state. In other words, the state changes from a state in which it is difficult to make the game ball reach the small winning prize device 2650 to a state in which it is easy to make the game ball reach the small winning prize device 2650. Therefore, until the jackpot starts, the player can enjoy an advantageous game in which he can frequently win small winning games and win prize balls based on winnings in the small winning winning device 2650. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Note that, after transitioning to the potential state, a RUSH effect (see FIG. 7(b)) is executed as in the first embodiment. Furthermore, since the jackpot is started after the jackpot is reached, the gaming state (number of time reductions) after the jackpot is completed can be set with reference to the probability state. In other words, it is possible to treat the jackpot as winning in the probability state where the same state is looped at a high rate (75% of the time, the probability state is set again after the jackpot ends), so the jackpot ends. It is possible to configure the system so that there is a high possibility that the potential state will continue even afterward. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be increased at the time when the Super Chance Zone performance is started. In addition, in the case of a jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol, it is difficult for the ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64r even if the ball is hit right, and the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the second special symbol is also Since it is short, it becomes difficult to use up the remaining time saving number by drawing the first special symbol. Therefore, during the jackpot variation of the second special symbol, the normal jackpot performance is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, the characteristic effects of the fifteenth embodiment will be described. First, the super chance zone effect will be explained with reference to FIG. 357(a). This super chance zone performance is a performance executed during the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol in the probability change state. When this super chance zone production is executed, a production in which the character 811 discovers carrot images NG1 to NG3 that imitate carrots is executed, and a message saying "Carrot found! Eat it all!!" is executed in the display area HR1. is displayed. In addition, the words "15 remaining" are displayed in the display area HR2. Furthermore, the words "Entering the Super Chance Zone!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents make it easy for the player to understand that it will be more advantageous for the player if the character 811 eats up all the carrots shown in the carrot image. In the fifteenth embodiment, after the super chance zone performance is started, a performance in which the character 811 eats a carrot one by one is performed every time the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. This allows the player to easily understand that the remaining number of time reductions and the remaining number of carrots are linked (synchronized). In other words, you can easily make them understand that by eating all the carrots, they will move into a latent state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a performance mode that is easy for players to understand.

In the variable probability state, if the character 811 is able to eat the carrot (the number of time-savers ends) before the jackpot variation of the first special symbol ends, the display area HR1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 357. In response to this, the text "Eating complete!! RUSH has begun!!" is displayed, and the text "0 pieces left" is displayed in the display area HR2. Furthermore, the words "RUSH enters!!" are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the game has entered (transitioned to) the most advantageous potential state (RUSH state).

In addition, in the present 15th embodiment, as a super chance zone effect, the character 811 eats a carrot one by one for each change, so that it is possible to suggest the remaining number of drawings until the potential state is reached. However, it is not limited to this. The mode is not limited to this embodiment as long as it can indicate the remaining number of times; for example, as in the twelfth embodiment, the remaining number of shortened times may be suggested based on the height of climbing a rocky mountain (remaining distance to the top). It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In the present 15th embodiment, as a super chance zone performance, a performance suggesting the remaining number of drawings until the time saving number ends is executed, but instead of or in addition to this, the first special symbol It may be configured to perform an effect (for example, a countdown display of the remaining time, etc.) that suggests the remaining time until the end of the jackpot fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to make the player play the right-handed game more seriously in an attempt to finish the time saving number before the suggested remaining time elapses, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. can be done.

<Electrical configuration in 15th embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 358 and 359. First, with reference to FIG. 358, details of the second winning random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 358, in the second winning random number table 202c in the fifteenth embodiment, a random number (counter value) of "0 to 230" is used to determine a win for a normal symbol in a low probability state of a normal symbol. 230 random numbers (counter values) are defined. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 358, 231 random numbers (counter values) from "0 to 231" are defined as the random numbers (counter values) that are determined to be hits for normal symbols in the time saving state of normal symbols. There is.

In other words, in the fifteenth embodiment, the normal symbol is almost always hit every time the through gate 67 is passed, both in the time saving state of the normal symbol and in the normal state of the normal symbol. As a result, whether a right-handed game is played in the time-saving state or a variable probability state, or a right-handed game is played in the probable state, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened and the second A state can be created in which the ball can enter the ball entry port 640. As mentioned above, in the time saving state and variable probability state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes shorter and the opening time becomes longer, while in the potential state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes longer and the opening time becomes shorter. . Thereby, in the time saving state or the variable probability state, almost all the game balls that have reached the second ball entry port 640 can be made to enter the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, in the potential state, the game ball easily passes through the second ball entrance 640 while the second ball entrance 640 is closed, so the game ball enters the small winning prize device 2650. It becomes easier to do. Therefore, it is possible to create a state more advantageous to the player than a time saving state or a variable probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 359(a), the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 359(a) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the time saving/probability variation table 202f2. As shown in FIG. 359(a), in the time saving/probability variation table 202f2 in the fifteenth embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, the winning length is 600 seconds regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1. While the variation is set, if the lottery of the first special symbol results in a loss, a 10-second loss middle variation is set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 359(a), as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, relatively short variation patterns of 1 second to 20 seconds are defined in association with each other. As a result, when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in the variable probability state, it becomes possible to continuously execute only the lottery of the second special symbol by continuing to hit right. Therefore, by continuously hitting the right hand in the variable probability state, the second special symbol can be drawn at relatively short intervals, and the number of time-saving times can be used up. Therefore, it is possible to easily shift to the most advantageous potential state during execution of the jackpot fluctuation.

Next, the potential confirmation table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 359(b). FIG. 359(b) is a diagram showing the specified contents of the potential confirmation table 202f3. As shown in FIG. 359(b), the potential confirmation table 202f3 in the fifteenth embodiment sets a long variation of 600 seconds regardless of the lottery result as the variation time of the first special symbol, while the second A relatively short variation time of 20 seconds or less is defined as the variation time of the special symbol. Therefore, a more advantageous gaming state is formed in which the lottery of the second special symbol is more likely to be executed than the probability state or the probability variable state. In other words, only the small winning game with the second special symbol is executed, and the chances of the ball entering the small winning prize device 2650 increase, so the right To form a game state in which a large amount of prize balls can be continuously won by hitting.

As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, by performing a right hit in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the second game ball is suppressed from reaching the small winning prize device 2650. The board configuration and the control of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state are configured so that the lottery of special symbols can be easily executed. On the other hand, in the potential state, by hitting to the right, the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the small winning prize device 2650 in a well-balanced manner, creating an advantageous gaming state. . That is, in a gaming state other than the normal state, the game is configured to proceed mainly by executing the lottery of the second special symbol, and in a state other than the potential state, the game ball is sent to the small winning prize device 2650. The configuration is such that it prevents the ball from entering the ball. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to realize an easy-to-understand gaming property in which the game is proceeded by drawing the second special symbol in all gaming states other than the normal state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, the lottery of the second special symbol is executed while the jackpot variation is being executed, thereby saving time. The system is configured such that it is possible to subtract the number of times and shift to a potential state during the execution of jackpot fluctuations. In other words, even during execution of jackpot fluctuations, it is possible to create an advantageous state in which small winning games are likely to be executed. Furthermore, by making it possible to extinguish the time saving state and transition to the potential state during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation, when the first special symbol is a jackpot in the lottery, the time saving state can be changed to the potential state. It becomes easy to start hitting the jackpot. In other words, since the gaming state after the end of the jackpot can be set by referring to the potential state, it is possible to configure the game so that there is a high possibility that the potential state will continue even after the end of the jackpot. . As a result, a very special and novel gameplay feature is realized in which, regardless of the remaining number of times in the time-saving state, the user continues to hit right even during jackpot fluctuations with the aim of ending the time-saving number during the jackpot fluctuations of the first special symbol. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the common variation pattern selection table (time saving/probability variation table 202f2) in the time saving state and the probability variation state, but the present invention is not limited to this. do not have. For example, in the time saving state, the variation time may be configured to be shortened when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol. This is because there is no benefit to the player even if the number of time reductions is used up in the time reduction state.

In the 15th embodiment, only a long variation of 600 seconds is set when a jackpot is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol in a variable probability state, but this is not limited to this, and any variation time can be set. You may. The shorter the variation time, the higher the possibility that the jackpot will start before the time saving number ends even if the second special symbol lottery is executed continuously during the probability variation state. When a jackpot variation of symbols is executed (when a super chance zone performance is started), the game can be played while creating a sense of tension. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. On the other hand, the longer the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol, the easier it is to finish the time saving number during the jackpot fluctuation, so when the super chance zone starts, while giving a sense of security. You can play games. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

<Modification of the eleventh embodiment>
Next, a modification of the above-described eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 360. In the above-described eleventh embodiment, the river breakthrough effect (see FIGS. 298 and 299) is executed each time the number of drawings at which the time saving number may pass (end) is reached. In addition to this, in this modification, the river breakthrough performance is also configured to be performed as a performance suggesting that a jackpot has been won during the chance zone (time saving state of normal symbols). In addition, at the start of the river breakthrough performance, the player is informed in advance of the benefits (rewards) that can be given to the player if the player breaks through the river. This allows players to have more diverse expectations.

First, with reference to FIG. 360(a), the display mode at the start of the river breakthrough effect in this modification will be described. FIG. 360(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display mode in a river breakthrough effect executed in a lottery number in which there is a possibility that the time saving number ends. As shown in FIG. 360(a), in the river breakthrough performance in this modified example, the privilege (reward) that will be given to the player if the player breaks through the river in the current river breakthrough performance is displayed in the display area HR1. It is configured to do this. The example of FIG. 360(a) illustrates a case where it is announced that RUSH will be given as a benefit (transition to a potential state) by successfully breaking through a river. That is, the display area HR1 shows a state in which the words "Reaching the first river!! RUSH by breaking through! Finishing by falling..." are displayed. This display content allows the player to understand that a RUSH is entered by breaking through the river, so that the player can pay more attention to the result of the river breakthrough performance and play the game. In addition to the example shown in Figure 360(a), there are suggestions such as ``Continue with breakthrough! End with fall...'' and ``Break through with jackpot! End with fall...''. There is. In this way, by providing variations in the content of the suggestion, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the river breakthrough performance depending on the content of the suggestion. For example, if the display content is ``Rush when you break through! End when you fall...'', there is a big difference in the degree of advantage depending on whether you break through or fall, so it makes people expect you to break through even more. Can be done. In addition, if the display content is "Breaking through and hitting the jackpot! Falling and ending...", either the time saving number of times has ended, and either you hit the jackpot by chance or the time saving number of times has ended. Therefore, it can be made to feel that the possibility of winning the jackpot is low. Therefore, even if the time saving state ends, the shock can be alleviated. Furthermore, by executing the effect of breaking through the river in this display mode, it is possible to give great surprise and joy to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In this modification, as described above, the river breakthrough effect can be performed even at a timing where there is no possibility that the time saving state will end. That is, the river breakthrough effect is executed in the case of a jackpot and in some cases of a loss (for example, 1/100 of the case of a loss). The display mode in this case will be explained with reference to FIG. 360(b). FIG. 360(b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the river breakthrough effect that is executed in the case of a jackpot and part of the case of a loss. As shown in FIG. 360(b), if there is no possibility that the time saving number will end, a river image KG that is thinner than the normal river breakthrough effect is displayed. In addition, the words "Ogawa found! If you jump over it, you will win the jackpot or continue!!" are displayed in the display area HR1. These display contents make it easy for the player to recognize that it is certain that the player will break through the river. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot will be announced when the river breaks through, while in the case of a miss, the continuation will be announced.

In this way, in this modification, even if a jackpot occurs during the chance zone, the jackpot is notified by the river breakthrough effect. With this configuration, it is possible to give a sense of unity to the performance in the chance zone. Therefore, it is possible to realize a performance mode that is easier for players to understand. Moreover, in this modification, at the start of the river breakthrough performance, the privilege (reward) that will be given when the river is breached is notified in advance. With this configuration, it is possible to vary the player's expectations for the river breakthrough performance depending on the content of the bonus, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, at the start of the river breakthrough performance that is executed in the case of a jackpot or a miss, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot and the number of time reductions to be set after the jackpot ends may be suggested. More specifically, for example, there are four font colors for "Jackpot": white, green, and red, where white means there is a high probability of a normal jackpot, and green means a probability of a variable jackpot. If it is high and red, it may be configured so that it is a probability variable jackpot and the possibility of a small number of time savings (0 or 10 times) is increased (that is, it becomes easier to shift to a probability state). With this configuration, when green or red characters are displayed, it is possible to make the player play the game with a stronger expectation that a jackpot will be announced, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game. be able to.

In each of the embodiments described above, each time the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command Although a case has been described in which the information is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main controller 110, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. Further, the audio lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. This makes it possible to reduce the number of times the main controller 110 sends the number of pending commands to the audio lamp controller 113 and the number of times the audio lamp controller 113 receives the number of pending commands, so the main controller 110 and The control burden on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, entering the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls held is limited to four times. Instead, the number of times may be set to 3 or less, or 5 or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls, which is displayed in a variable manner based on winnings to the first ball entrance 64, can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four can be displayed by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured as follows.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to scrolling the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display may be performed by moving the symbols vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Furthermore, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the display of fluctuating symbols; for example, one or more characters may be displayed in a wide variety of motions or changes with or without the symbol. This also includes the presentation and display that will be displayed. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the embodiments described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol that is highlighted and displayed to the player and displaying the secondary symbol. Moreover, as the structure of the display means, a structure other than a liquid crystal display may be used.

In each of the embodiments described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed when the player is in a gaming state advantageous to the player (time saving state), and a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed when the player is in a normal gaming state. Although the configuration is such that a left-handed game is executed in which the game is aimed at, it is only necessary to change the target area of the game board 13 depending on the game state. It is also possible to have the player execute a right-handed game. Furthermore, the configuration may be such that games can be executed in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the above-described embodiments, frame buttons 22 and 23 are used as operating means that can be operated by the player, and the frame buttons 22 and 23 are used to determine that the operating means has been operated when the player presses the button. A lever-shaped operating means that can be used to determine whether the player has operated the lever by tilting it left or right or forward or backward, or a lever-shaped operating means that can be used to determine whether the player has operated it by touching or coming close to it. It is also possible to use a touch sensor type operation means that can be identified, a wireless type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c It may be configured such that part or all of the operation control is executed not by the main control device 110 but by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

In each of the embodiments described above, the audio lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is controlled by the audio lamp. Although configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the present invention is not limited to this, and the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as an effect. The same control device may execute the processing for With this configuration, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which a plurality of levels of probability combinations (commonly referred to as settings) are provided for the jackpot lottery, and the settings can be changed at the game parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In addition, for pachinko machines that have multiple settings, the combination of jackpot probabilities (combination of jackpot probability in a low probability state and jackpot probability in a variable probability state) can be set in one of multiple stages (for example, 6 stages). A typical example is one that can be set to , but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, the pachinko machine is capable of varying the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot depending on the settings. You can. That is, the rate at which jackpots of a type advantageous to the player are determined may be varied, or the rate at which jackpots of a type disadvantageous to the player are determined, may be varied depending on the settings. More specifically, for example, the rate at which jackpots are determined with a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be varied depending on the settings, or the rate at which jackpots are determined with a small number of rounds (for example, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may also be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting is varied by varying the proportion of each setting. In addition, for example, after the jackpot ends, the ratio at which a jackpot is determined that will give a large number of time savings (for example, 100 times) can be varied depending on the setting, or a jackpot that will give a small number of time savings (for example, 0 times). The rate at which the is determined may be varied depending on the settings. Furthermore, the rate at which jackpots are determined to transition (or are likely to transition) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, variable probability state) after the end of the jackpot can be varied according to settings, or may be changed to a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, normal state). ) may be changed depending on the setting. Further, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type is provided which has a significantly higher probability of being determined only in a specific setting (almost never being determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the settings can be set in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set to 6. In setting 6, if there is a jackpot, a 6-round jackpot is determined 2% of the time, while in other settings, a 6-round jackpot is determined only 0.01% of the time. It may also be a configuration. With this configuration, when the jackpot ends in 6 rounds, there is an extremely high possibility that the most advantageous setting is 6, so the player is forced to pay attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot when playing the game. be able to. In addition, instead of this, or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the proportion of the jackpot type in which 66 time saving times are given after the jackpot ends is higher than in other settings. With this configuration, it is possible to have the player play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or the accessory inside the jackpot) operates in a different operation pattern from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is more likely to be determined (the ratio of determination becomes higher) with a specific setting. In addition, when changing the combination of jackpot probabilities depending on the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in the variable probability state, the setting is less favorable to the player. A configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot probability increases as the number increases. This configuration is particularly suitable for a type of game ball type in which the number of special symbol drawings increases as the number of drawings for special symbols increases (the number of prize balls paid out is easier to increase than the number of game balls fired). Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, by applying this to a type of gaming machine that has a configuration in which the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot is won, and in which the variable probability state has a high probability of winning a small win, the advantage of high settings can be realized. You can improve your sexuality. That is, when the probability of a jackpot is low in a variable probability state, the number of drawings until the next jackpot is likely to be increased, so there are many chances to win a small jackpot and win a prize ball. Therefore, when the probability changes, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as the plurality of special symbol types, but the number of types of special symbols is not limited to this, and three or more types of special symbols are used. The special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Furthermore, in each of the above-described embodiments, a game feature in which a plurality of special symbols are drawn (varied) according to predetermined rules, and a game feature in which a lottery (variation) is carried out independently of each other are explained. However, the game features described in each embodiment may be replaced or combined.

Note that the slot machine is a well-known slot machine in which, for example, the symbols are changed by operating a control lever after inserting a coin and determining the symbol active line, and the symbols are stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is something. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a display device that variably displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then definitively displays the identification information. The changing display of the identification information is started, and the changing display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and the display is confirmed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined gaming value to the player, with the necessary condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one, and in this case, the gaming medium is typically coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbol definitively, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as gaming value in a gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

All or part of the embodiments and control examples described above may be combined.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<Characteristics A group> (Small hits possible during specific special figure fluctuations)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; and a dynamic display period setting means capable of executing the second determination. a second determination means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and a second display means for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the first identification information is displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second bonus game is executed. a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be performed than the first determination; and a first game state in which the first determination is performed more easily than the second determination. a second gaming state in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed; A gaming machine A1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during a target display period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is conducted to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period after the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the period during which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If you immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set will be shortened, and if you do not immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state The period during which the is set becomes longer. As described above, there has been a problem in that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming feature that grants benefits to players during a period in which an advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem in that the benefits given to players vary greatly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine A1, since the period in which the first determination is dynamically displayed can be set as the first gaming state in which the second determination is likely to be executed, the length of the period in which the first gaming state is set is can be set in advance. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine A1, the second determining means is configured to determine the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determining means determines the specific first determination result. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second bonus game, which is executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means, is more likely to be executed than the first bonus game, which is executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game desiring that the first gaming state is set, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, the first ball entering means, and the second ball entering means. a third ball entering means different from the first ball entering means; a first state in which the game ball can be guided to the second ball entering means; and a third ball entering means in which it is more difficult to enter the second ball entering means than in the first state. and a variable means that is variable between two states, and the first determining means determines whether the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. The second determining means is configured to be able to perform the second determination based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means, and in the second gaming state, A gaming machine A3 characterized in that the variable means is controlled to be more easily varied to the first state than to the first gaming state.

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first determination can be made more difficult to execute in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state. Therefore, in the state where the first game state is set, it is possible to easily perform a game in which the third ball entering means enters a ball, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. .

In the gaming machine A3, after the first bonus game is executed, the probability that the first determination is determined to be the specific first determination result is set to a high probability higher than that in normal times. and a setting means, wherein the gaming state setting means displays the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result when the high probability is set by the high probability setting means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on the start of dynamic display of the first identification information.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a high probability is set by the high probability setting means, the dynamic display of the first identification information that is to be displayed as the first identification information for indicating a specific first judgment result by the first judgment. Since the first gaming state is set based on the start, the process until the first gaming state is set can be set in stages. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make it easier for the player to continue playing the game.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the second bonus game is a game in which fewer bonuses can be given to the player than the first bonus game. Machine A5.

According to gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, in the second privilege game, fewer privileges can be given to the player than in the first privilege game, so it is not possible to give excessive privileges to the player during the period in which the first gaming state is set. This has the effect of being able to suppress the possibility of being added.

<Feature B group> (Game content and special 1 and special 2 set at once)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; a first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means; and a first dynamic display period determining means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; a second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, a second display means on which second identification information is displayed to show the determination result by the second determination means, and a second display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. a second dynamic display means for displaying the second identification information; a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating a first determination result is displayed, the second identification information for executing a first bonus game and indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. is displayed, in a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game, the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is displayed. a period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed; and a dynamic display of the second identification information executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means. A game machine B1 characterized in that it has a performance determining means for determining a performance corresponding to the performance, and a performance executing means for executing the performance determined by the performance determining means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period from the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the period during which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If you immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set will be shortened, and if you do not immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state will not be set. The period for which is set becomes longer. As described above, there has been a problem in that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming feature that grants benefits to players during a period in which an advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem in that the benefits given to players vary greatly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the performance that corresponds to the dynamic display of the second identification information to be executed during the dynamic display period determined by the period determination means is determined by the performance determination means, the performance that corresponds to the dynamic display of the second identification information is determined by the performance determination means. Since the performance corresponding to the dynamic display of the second identification information can be executed in association with the dynamic display period, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting future games based on the performance executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B1, the performance determining means determines the performance based on the dynamic display period determined by the period determining means and the game content of the first bonus game. Characteristic game machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, by understanding the performance executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to determine the dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed and the game of the first bonus game. It becomes possible to predict the contents. Therefore, since the player can be made to pay attention to the performance, there is an effect that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In gaming machine B1 or B2, a first gaming state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and a second gaming state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination. It has a settable gaming state setting means, and the gaming state setting means dynamically displays the first identification information to be displayed with the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result. The gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the first gaming state is executed during a dynamic display period in which the game is displayed.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the first gaming state is set during the dynamic display of the first identification information corresponding to the determination result that the first bonus game will be executed, the period until the first bonus game is executed is Using this, you can play a game aiming at the second bonus game. Furthermore, by understanding the performance executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to predict the period during which the first gaming state will be set, so it is possible to motivate players to play games during the first gaming state. effective.

In gaming machine B2 or B3, the first bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means includes a normal first bonus game and a small first bonus game that provides fewer benefits to the player than the normal first bonus game. and, the first dynamic display period determining means is capable of determining a first period and a second period that is longer than the first period. , the performance determining means is configured to perform a case in which the small first bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit and the second period is determined by the period determining unit, and a case in which the bonus game execution unit executes the normal The gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the same type of performance is determined when one bonus game is executed and the first period is determined by the period determining means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, when the effect of the two elements for determining the content of the performance is a different combination, the performance determining means performs the same mode. Since the performance is determined, by understanding the content of the performance executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to allow the player to predict a plurality of patterns of future gaming situations. Then, depending on the progress of the first game state, it is possible to gradually increase the accuracy of prediction. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy predicting more, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine B4, the performance determining means determines the specific performance when the normal first bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution unit and the second period is determined by the period determining unit. Game machine B5 is characterized in that it is a game machine.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are achieved. That is, by executing the specific performance, it is possible to notify the player that the most advantageous game content has been set, so there is an effect that it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority.

<Characteristics Group C> (Intrusion notification)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; a first dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means; a second determination means capable of executing the second determination means, a second display means on which second identification information is displayed to show the determination result by the second determination means, and a second display means capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means. a second dynamic display means for displaying the second identification information; a second dynamic display period determining means for determining a period during which the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means; When the first identification information for indicating a first determination result is displayed, the second identification information for executing a first bonus game and indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. is displayed, a first game state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination; a second gaming state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination; and a notification timing determining means for determining a notification timing for notifying a notification mode for indicating to the player that the first gaming state has been set based on the situation in the dynamic display of the identification information. A gaming machine C1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, depending on the lottery results, an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player is set for the period after the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot, and the player is notified that the gaming state has changed. A gaming machine that performs a performance has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). By the way, the gaming machine described above is configured to execute an effect to notify the player based on the setting of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The problem is that even if a new lottery cannot be executed, the player is notified that the game status has been set, causing discomfort to the player. was there. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine C1, the notification timing for notifying that the first gaming state in which the second determination is likely to be performed can be determined based on the dynamic display status of the second identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable at the notification timing of notifying that the first gaming state has been set.

In the gaming machine C1, the second dynamic display means is capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine C2, wherein the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the result of the first determination by the first determining means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first gaming state is set based on the determination result of the first determining means that is executed separately from the second determining means, the notification is made based on the situation in the dynamic display of the second identification information. The timing is determined. Therefore, it is possible to combine the first identification information and the second identification information, which can be dynamically displayed at the same time, to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

The gaming machine C2 includes dynamic display determining means for determining whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed at the time when the first gaming state is set, and the notification timing determining means is configured to determine whether the second identification information is dynamically displayed. If the second identification information is determined not to be dynamically displayed by the digital display determining means, the notification timing is determined based on the time when the first gaming state is set. Game machine C3.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are achieved. That is, if the second determination can be performed immediately after the first gaming state is set, it is immediately notified that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game in the first game state for a longer period of time.

In the gaming machine C2 or C3, the notification timing determining means terminates the dynamic display of the second identification information when the dynamic display determining means determines that the second identification information is dynamically displayed. A gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the notification timing is determined based on the timing of the notification.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are achieved. That is, even if the first gaming state is set, during the period in which the second determination cannot be performed, the setting of the first gaming state is not notified, and the second determination becomes executable. In this case, it is announced that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem of not being able to execute the second determination even though it is reported that the first gaming state has been set, and it is also possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect that it can be done.

The gaming machine C4 includes a remaining period determining means for determining a period from the timing at which the dynamic display of the second identification information ends until the first gaming state ends, based on the determination result by the remaining period determining means. A gaming machine C5 characterized in that it has a notification determining means for determining whether or not the notification timing is determined by the notification timing determining means.

According to the gaming machine C5, it is determined whether or not to determine the notification timing based on the period during which the second determination can be performed during the first gaming state. If the executable period becomes extremely short, it is possible not to notify the player that the first gaming state has been set. Therefore, even though the player is notified that the first gaming state has been set, it is possible to prevent the first gaming state from ending in a short period of time, causing discomfort to the player. There is an effect that it can be done.

<Characteristic Group D> (Long win discarded due to simultaneous fluctuations, small hit interrupted)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying for a predetermined period of time, a second determination means capable of executing the second determination, and a first dynamic display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means. 2 display means, a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information on the second display means for a predetermined period, and a first display means for displaying a specific first determination result on the first display means. When the identification information is displayed, the first bonus game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, the second bonus game is executed. In the gaming machine, the second dynamic display means includes a bonus game execution means for executing the second bonus game, and a second bonus game type setting means for setting the content of the second bonus game from a plurality of bonus contents. The second identification information can be dynamically displayed in a state in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, and the second identification information is dynamically displayed by the second dynamic display means. When the second identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed, the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means is performed based on the benefit content set by the second benefit game type setting means. A gaming machine D1 is characterized in that it has a stop control means for executing stop control.

BACKGROUND ART Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines have a gaming feature (so-called simultaneous fluctuation type) in which a plurality of drawings are executed simultaneously. In gaming machines with such gameplay, if the first lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and other lottery games that are currently being executed are forced to be played as a loss. It has been proposed to terminate the process automatically (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-319221). By the way, regardless of the type of bonus game, the gaming machine described above forcibly stops and displays other lottery results as a loss based on the stop display of the lottery result in which the bonus game is executed. There was a problem in that it made people feel uncomfortable. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine D1, it is possible to set the stop control content for the first dynamic display according to the content of the second bonus game to be executed, thereby suppressing a situation that would cause discomfort to the player. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D1, the stop control means performs forced stop control for stopping and displaying the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means using the first identification information indicating a determination result different from the specific first determination result. A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that it is possible to perform a temporary stop control in which measurement of a period dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means is stopped until a predetermined restart condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, depending on the content of the second bonus game to be executed, it is possible to set whether to forcibly stop the dynamic display by the first dynamic display means or to temporarily stop it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player, and by executing a bonus game that gives a small amount of benefits, a bonus game that gives a large amount of benefits is discarded. It has the effect of being able to suppress things.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the second benefit game type setting means is capable of setting a first benefit type and a second benefit type that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit type, and is capable of setting a second benefit type that is more advantageous to the player than the first benefit type. A gaming machine D3, wherein the control means executes the forced stop control when the second special type is set by the second bonus game type setting means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the second benefit type that is advantageous to the player is set, the dynamic display can be forcibly stopped by the first dynamic display means, so that excessive benefits are not given to the player. This has the effect of suppressing the

In the gaming machine D3, when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result, the dynamic display executed by the first dynamic display means is completed, and the specific first determination is completed. The player further comprises an invalidating means for invalidating the setting of the second privilege type by the second privilege game type setting means until the first identification information for indicating the result is displayed on the first display means. Gaming machine D4 is characterized by certain things.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the setting of the second benefit type is invalidated by the invalidation means during the dynamic display. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first benefit game and the second benefit game in which the second benefit type is set from being executed consecutively, and to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player. It has the effect of being able to suppress it.

In the gaming machine D3 or D4, the second benefit game type setting means sets the first benefit type and the second benefit type based on the determination result of the second determination means, and A gaming machine D5 characterized in that the first benefit type is easier to set than the second benefit type.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D3 or D4, the following effects are achieved. In other words, since the first benefit type is more likely to be set than the second benefit type, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to the player even if a large number of second benefit games are executed. There is.

<Other ideas 1> (Possibility state can be set before and after jackpot game)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a second determination means; a second determination means capable of executing the second determination; and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means. , when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, a first bonus game is executed, and a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game when the second identification information for displaying the second identification information is displayed, the second determination is made easier to execute than the first determination. It has a game state setting means that can set a first game state and a second game state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination, and the game state setting means is configured to set a predetermined first game state. When a condition is met, the first gaming state is set during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, and when a predetermined second condition is met, the first bonus game is ended. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the first gaming state is set later.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period from the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the period during which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If you immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set will be shortened, and if you do not immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state will not be set. The period during which the is set becomes longer. As described above, there has been a problem in that the period during which the advantageous gaming state provided to the player is set varies depending on the result of the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming feature that grants benefits to players during a period in which an advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem in that the benefits given to players vary greatly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine E1, since the timing at which the first gaming state is set can be divided into before and after the first bonus game, it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature G group> (Small hit RUSH during the pattern confirmation period)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first stop display means for stopping and displaying the first identification information; a stop display period setting means for setting a stop display period during which the first stop display means stops displaying the first identification information; and a second judgment capable of executing a second judgment. means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and said first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on said first display means. is displayed, a first bonus game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, a second bonus game is executed. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, a first game state that makes the second determination more likely to be executed than the first determination, and a first game state that makes the first determination more likely to be executed than the second determination. 2 gaming states, and the gaming state setting means is configured to set the first identification information in the stopped display period in which the first identification information is stopped and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G1 characterized in that a first gaming state can be set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period from the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the period during which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set varies depending on the lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. If you immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the period for which the advantageous gaming state is set will be shortened, and if you do not immediately win the next win in the lottery performed during the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state will not be set. The period during which the In other words, there is a problem in that the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set varies depending on the result of a lottery that is executed after the advantageous gaming state is set. Furthermore, if the gaming machine has a gaming feature that grants benefits to players during a period in which an advantageous gaming state is set, there is a problem in that the benefits given to players vary greatly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine G1, since the stop display period can be set in advance as the period in which the first gaming state is set, there is an effect that the period in which the first gaming state is executed can be appropriately managed. . In addition, since the first gaming state is set during the period in which the identification information for indicating the judgment result of the first judgment is stopped and displayed, the player is informed in advance of the game content after the first gaming state ends. You can make them understand. With this configuration, for example, when the first gaming state is set with a specific judgment result being displayed as the judgment result of the first judgment, after the first gaming state ends, It is possible to know in advance that the first bonus game will be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine G2 in the gaming machine G1, wherein the stop display period setting means sets stop display periods of different lengths based on the determination result of the first determining means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the stop display period is set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Whether or not to execute the above and the length of the stop display period are determined. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2, the stop display period setting means sets the stop display to be longer when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result than when the determination result is other than the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G3 characterized in that a period is easily set.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, when the determination result of the first determining means is a specific first determination result, the stop display period is longer than when the determination result is other than the specific first determination result. Since it becomes easier to set, it is possible to execute the first gaming state in which a longer period is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G2 or G3, the stop display period setting means is capable of setting stop display periods of different lengths when the judgment result of the first judgment means is the specific first judgment result. A gaming machine G4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2 or G3, the length of the stop display period can be varied even in the case of a specific first determination result. Therefore, even in the case of a specific first determination result, since the period for which the first gaming state is set is different, the player is encouraged to actively play the game so that the first gaming state is set for a longer time. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines G1 to G4, the second determining means determines the specific second determination result with a higher probability than the probability that the first determining means determines the specific first determination result. A gaming machine G5 characterized in that it is configured as follows.

According to gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the second bonus game that is executed based on the determination result of the second determination by the second determination means is more likely to be executed than the first bonus game that is executed based on the determination result of the first determination by the first determination means. Therefore, the first gaming state can be made more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game desiring that the first gaming state is set, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics H group> (Small win RUSH with big win when time saving ends fluctuates)
A first determining means capable of performing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means; and a second determining means capable of performing a second determination. a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. A privilege for executing a first privilege game when displayed, and executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. A gaming machine comprising: a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination; and a second game state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. and a gaming state setting means capable of setting a gaming state, and the gaming state setting means is capable of executing the second determination when both a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition are satisfied. A gaming machine H1 characterized in that the first gaming state can be set during a first period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period from the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, whether or not an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set is determined based on only one lottery result, so the process until the advantageous gaming state is set is explained to the player. There was a problem in that it was not possible to have the players play games while having fun. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine H1, when both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied, the first gaming state can be set for the first period, so that the second determination can be made during the first gaming state. can be carried out reliably. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first gaming state ends without executing the second determination even though the first gaming state has been set, which may cause dissatisfaction to the player. It is possible to provide games that are not available.

The gaming machine H1 includes a first determination number measuring means that can measure the number of times the first determination has been executed by the first determination means, and the number of times the first determination is measured by the first determination number measuring means. A gaming machine H2 characterized in that the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of times reaches a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H1, when the number of times of the first determination reaches a predetermined number, the first predetermined condition is satisfied, so that the first determination by the first determination means is executed. By doing so, it is possible to reliably advance the game content toward the fulfillment of the first predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the first predetermined condition is not satisfied when playing a game for a long time, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A gaming machine H3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the judgment result of the first judgment means is a specific first judgment result, so that the player can understand. This has the effect of providing easy games.

In the gaming machine H2 or H3, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state even when the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied, and the gaming state setting means , when the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the first predetermined condition, the first gaming state is set during a second period during which it is difficult to perform the second determination; A gaming machine H4 characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2 or H3, if only the first predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set only during the second period in which it is difficult to perform the second determination. Thereby, the first gaming state that is set when only the first predetermined condition is satisfied can be made into a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that both the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition are satisfied.

In the gaming machine H4, when the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the second predetermined condition, the gaming state setting means is configured to set the first gaming state to be shorter than the first period and to set the first gaming state. A gaming machine H5 characterized in that the first gaming state is set during a third period that is longer than two periods.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, if only the second predetermined condition is satisfied, the first gaming state is set during the third period, so that the game condition is lower than the first predetermined condition. There is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game in order to satisfy the second predetermined condition first.

<Characteristics Group I> (Small hit RUSH entry expectation level variable by time saving number)
A first determining means capable of performing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means; and a second determining means capable of performing a second determination. a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means; and a second display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. A privilege for executing a first privilege game when displayed, and executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. It is possible to set a game execution means, a first game state in which the second determination is more likely to be executed than the first determination, and a second game state in which the first determination is more likely to be executed than the second determination. In a gaming machine having a gaming state setting means, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting a third gaming state in which the first gaming state is more likely to be set than the second gaming state for a predetermined period of time. and a third gaming state period setting means capable of setting a first period and a second period longer than the first period as a period in which the third gaming state is set; A gaming machine I1 characterized in that setting the first period by a period setting means makes setting the first gaming state easier than setting the second period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that allows players to set an advantageous gaming state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player by playing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages according to lottery results (for example, JP 2015-058267A). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the ease of setting an advantageous gaming state in a gaming state in which an advantageous gaming state is easy to be set (semi-advantageous gaming state) is single, so the aim is to set an advantageous gaming state. There was a problem in that the contents of the game played were monotonous. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine I1, by varying the period for setting the third gaming state in which the first gaming state is likely to be set, the degree of expectation that the first gaming state will be set in the state where the third gaming state is set is increased. can be made different. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player interested in the setting contents of the third gaming state, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game even in the gaming process up to the setting of the first gaming state. The effect is that it can be done.

The gaming machine I1 includes a progress determining means for determining the passage of the predetermined period set by the third gaming state period setting means, and the gaming state setting means determines whether the predetermined period has passed by the progress determining means. A gaming machine I2 characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on a first setting condition that is satisfied when it is determined that.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, the first gaming state is set when the period in which the third gaming state is set has elapsed, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the gaming state setting means determines that when the third gaming state is set and the first determination result by the first determining means is the specific first determination result, A gaming machine I3 characterized in that the first gaming state is set based on a second setting condition being met.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, even when a third gaming state in which the first setting condition is difficult to satisfy, that is, a long-term third gaming state is set, During the third gaming state, a first gaming state can be set based on the determination result of the first determining means. Therefore, depending on the period of the third gaming state that is set, it is possible to aim for different transition conditions in order to set the first gaming state, so the desire to play can be reduced depending on the length of the period of the third gaming state that is set. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3, the third gaming state period setting means is capable of setting a third period that is longer than the second period, and the passage determining means determines the passage of the third period. In this case, the gaming machine I4 is characterized in that it has a condition limiting means that prevents the first setting condition from being satisfied.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, when it is determined that the third period has elapsed, the first setting condition is not satisfied by the condition limiting means, so the first gaming state is set. It is possible to reliably limit the Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessively advantageous situation from being provided to the player.

Any one of the gaming machines I2 to I4 has a first gaming state period setting means for setting a period in which the first gaming state is set, and the first gaming state period setting means is configured to: The gaming machine is characterized in that the period in which the first gaming state is set is set longer when it is determined that the first period has elapsed than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I4, when it is determined that the second period has elapsed, the first period is longer than when it is determined that the second period has elapsed. The gaming state is set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay close attention to the determination result of the progress determining means.

<Feature J group> (Small hit RUSH for a predetermined period)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means; and a second determination means capable of executing said second determination. means, a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means, and said first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on said first display means. is displayed, a first bonus game is executed, and when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means, a second bonus game is executed. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, a first game state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination, and a first game state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. a gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state; an advantageous period setting means for setting an advantageous period in which the first gaming state can be continuously set by the gaming state setting means; and an advantageous period setting means by the advantageous period setting means. a termination means that terminates the first gaming state when a first termination condition that is satisfied when the set advantageous period has passed or a second termination condition that is different from the first termination condition is satisfied; A gaming machine J1 characterized in that the gaming machine J1 has a termination restriction means for restricting the satisfaction of the second termination condition when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that allows players to set an advantageous gaming state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player by playing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages according to lottery results (for example, JP 2015-058267A). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set is variable based on the lottery result executed during the advantageous gaming state, so the advantageous gaming state is provided to the player for a predetermined period. There is a problem in that even though the player has taken pains to set an advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state ends in a short period of time, resulting in a decrease in the player's desire to play. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine J1, when a predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, the termination restriction means can restrict the fulfillment of the second termination condition. Therefore, the first gaming state can be set continuously during the advantageous period set by the advantageous period setting means, and there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means is capable of setting an advantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition can be satisfied and a disadvantageous first gaming state in which the predetermined continuation condition cannot be satisfied. A game machine J2 characterized by being a game machine.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1, the gaming state setting means can set an advantageous first gaming state and a disadvantageous first gaming state. There is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first game state is set.

In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied when the result of the first determination by the first determining means is the specific first determination result. J3.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J1 or J2, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result, the predetermined continuation condition is satisfied, so that the first determination means This has the effect that the player can be motivated to play the game so that the determination result becomes the specific first determination result.

A gaming machine J4, which is the gaming machine J2 or J3, further comprising a notification means for notifying that the first advantageous gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J2 or J3, the notification means notifies that the first advantageous gaming state is set, so that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. There is an effect.

Any of the gaming machines J2 to J4 has a determining means for determining that the second termination condition is met during the period in which the first advantageous gaming state is set, and the determining means A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it has a second notification means for notifying that the second termination condition has been met based on the determination result.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J2 to J4, the second notification means indicates that the second end condition is met during the period in which the advantageous first gaming state is set. Therefore, if it is assumed that the first gaming state currently set is not an advantageous first gaming state but a disadvantageous first gaming state, it is possible to determine whether the first gaming state has ended or not. The player can make the determination. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can experience the superiority of the currently set advantageous first gaming state.

<Characteristics Group K> (During the time saving state, provide a period in which the number of working hours is not subtracted)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a first determination result for a predetermined first period; and when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means, the first determination result is a gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state for a predetermined period of time that makes it easier to execute; a period measuring means for measuring the period of the advantageous gaming state set by the gaming state setting means; terminating means for terminating the advantageous gaming state when a period has been measured; measurement limiting means for limiting measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means when a predetermined limiting condition is satisfied; A gaming machine K1 having the following features.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player for a period after the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot depending on the lottery result (for example, 2012-217766). By the way, the gaming machine described above is configured to set the period until the number of drawings reaches a predetermined number as the period in which an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set. The problem is that it is easy to predict the period in which the It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine K1, since the measurement of the predetermined period during which the advantageous gaming state is set can be limited by the measurement restriction means, the period during which the advantageous gaming state is set can be extended. Therefore, it is possible to provide a surprising game to the player, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K1, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, a second display means on which second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means is displayed, and the second display means a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period; and when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is displayed on the first display means; , a bonus game execution means that executes a second bonus game when a first bonus game is executed and the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display unit; and configured to allow the second dynamic display means to dynamically display the second identification information while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. A gaming machine K2 characterized in that the predetermined limiting condition is satisfied when the determination result of the second determination means is the specific second determination result.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine K1, in a configuration in which the second identification information can be dynamically displayed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the second determination means When the determination result is a specific second determination result, a predetermined limiting condition is satisfied. Thereby, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed while the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K2, the measurement restriction means controls the advantageous gaming state by the period measuring means while the second dynamic display means is performing a dynamic display corresponding to the specific second determination result. A gaming machine K3 is characterized in that it limits the measurement of a period.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1, the period of the advantageous gaming state is measured while the second dynamic display means is executing a dynamic display corresponding to a specific second determination result. is limited. Therefore, the first determination by the first determination means can be executed while the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state is restricted. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3 is characterized in that it has a notification unit for notifying that the measurement of the period of the advantageous gaming state by the period measurement unit is restricted by the measurement restriction unit. Game machine K4.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the notification means notifies that the measurement of the period is restricted by the measurement restriction means, so that the game can be easily understood by the player. The effect is that it can be provided.

<Feature L group> (Small hit RUSH with different ending conditions)
A first determining means capable of performing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means; and a second determining means capable of performing a second determination. a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating the determination result by the second determination means; and a second display means for displaying the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result on the first display means. A privilege for executing a first privilege game when displayed, and executing a second privilege game when the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result is displayed on the second display means. A gaming machine comprising: a first gaming state that makes the second determination easier to execute than the first determination; and a second game state that makes the first determination easier to execute than the second determination. The gaming state setting means is configured to set a gaming state when a predetermined first condition is satisfied, or when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. The first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second condition, rather than the first gaming state being established based on the fulfillment of the second condition. A gaming machine L1 characterized in that when a gaming state is set, the first gaming state is made easier to continue.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that allows players to set an advantageous gaming state (potential state) that is advantageous to the player by playing a game in which a plurality of gaming states are shifted in stages according to lottery results (for example, JP 2015-058267A). By the way, in the gaming machine described above, since the end condition for the advantageous gaming state is single, it is not possible to vary the ease with which the set advantageous gaming state can be continued, and it is difficult for the player in the advantageous gaming state to There was a problem in that the games provided by the players became monotonous and the desire to play decreased. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the gaming state setting means can set the first gaming state that is easy to set continuously and the first gaming state that is difficult to set continuously, the first gaming state is set. Even after the game is played, the game can be played with the expectation that the first game state will continue for a long period of time, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine L1, the gaming state setting means sets a gaming state different from the first gaming state when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied in the state where the first gaming state is set; When the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the second condition, the predetermined end is more effective than when the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the first condition. A gaming machine L2 characterized in that a condition is difficult to satisfy.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L1, the first gaming state is set based on the satisfaction of the second condition, rather than the case where the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the first condition. When a gaming state is set, it can be made more difficult to end the first gaming state. Therefore, since it is possible to set the first gaming state that is easy to end and the first gaming state that is difficult to end for the player, even after the first gaming state is set, the first gaming state that is difficult to end can be set for the player. This has the effect that the game can be played while the game state is desired to be set, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 includes a termination condition setting means capable of setting a first termination condition and a second termination condition different from the first termination condition as the predetermined termination condition, and the second condition is satisfied. A gaming machine L3 characterized in that when the first gaming state is set based on this, the first ending condition is not satisfied.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L2, if the first gaming state is set based on the second condition being satisfied, the first ending condition is not satisfied, so it is difficult to end the game. A first gaming state can be executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game in an attempt to satisfy the second condition.

In the gaming machine L3, the termination condition setting means sets the second termination condition when the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. L4.

According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L3, a second termination condition is set when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific first determination result. Thereby, when the first gaming state ends based on the fulfillment of the second ending condition, a bonus game can be provided. Therefore, even if the first gaming state ends, the player can be given a benefit, so there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

A gaming machine L5, which is characterized in that the gaming machine L3 or L4 has a notification means for notifying that the first gaming state is set based on the fulfillment of the second condition.

According to the gaming machine L5, since the notification means notifies that the first end condition is not satisfied, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

<Feature M group> (Set the invalid period of falling of special map high accuracy)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and a first determination specific to the first display means. a bonus game execution means that executes a first bonus game when the first identification information for indicating a result is displayed; and a bonus game execution means that executes the first bonus game when a predetermined setting condition is met; a gaming state setting means capable of setting an advantageous gaming state in which the result of the first determination is more likely to result in the specific first determination result than the normal gaming state; is set, a gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and restricting the establishment of the predetermined transition condition. A gaming machine M1 comprising: transition condition limiting means.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, it is configured to set an advantageous gaming state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player for a period after the end of the bonus game until winning the next jackpot according to the lottery result, and in addition, a predetermined lottery ( A gaming machine has been proposed that terminates the advantageous gaming state when a player wins a winning lottery. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-152). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine is configured so that a fall lottery is executed based on the execution of a winning lottery, so the game machine always gives the player a sense of danger that the advantageous gaming state will end. There was a problem in that the players could not play the game with peace of mind because they were forced to do so. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine as described above, which allows players to play games with peace of mind and improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine M1, the transition condition limiting means can restrict the gaming state from shifting from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, so that the gaming state shifts from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. You can set a gaming period in which the game will not be played. Therefore, it is possible to provide a period in which the players can play games with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine M1, the first determination means executes the first determination when a predetermined first determination condition is satisfied; 1, wherein the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the judgment result by the special judgment means is a specific special judgment result. Characteristic gaming machine M2.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, a special judgment is executed when the first judgment condition is satisfied, and when the judgment result is a specific special judgment result, a predetermined transition condition is executed. holds true. Therefore, since the determination by the first determination means and the determination by the special determination means can be set in association with each other, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

In the gaming machine M1, when the determination result of the first determination means is a specific second determination result different from the specific first determination result, a second bonus game different from the first bonus game is executed. a second bonus game execution means; and a variable ball entrance means that is variably operated to an open state in which a game ball can enter the inside when the second bonus game is executed by the second bonus game execution means. , a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine M3 characterized in that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the game machine passes through.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, a predetermined transition condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through a specific area. Therefore, since the transition condition can be satisfied at a timing different from the determination timing of the first determination means, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Further, since it can be determined whether the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player shoots the game ball, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate can be increased.

In the gaming machine M3, the variable control means has a first variable control that makes it easier for the ball that enters the variable ball entry means to pass through the specific area, and a second variable control that makes it more difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A gaming machine M4 is characterized in that it is capable of setting two variable controls.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine M3, the variable control means provides a first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through a specific area, and a second variable control in which the ball does not easily pass through the specific area. Since the game can be set, it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game. Further, since it can be determined whether the transition condition is satisfied based on the game result of whether or not the player shoots the game ball, there is an effect that the player's desire to participate can be increased.

A gaming machine M5, in the gaming machine M4, further comprising a notification means for notifying that the second variable control is set by the variable control means.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M4, since the notification means notifies that the second variable control is set, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player. be.

<Characteristics Group N> (Game selection for small winning games)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determination means is displayed; and a first determination specific to the first display means. A bonus game execution means that executes a first bonus game when the first identification information for indicating a result is displayed, and identification that the determination result of the first determination means is different from the specific first determination result. If the second determination result is a second bonus game, the second bonus game is executed by a second bonus game execution means that executes a second bonus game different from the first bonus game, and the second bonus game execution means. In this case, the game ball has a variable ball entry means that is variably operated to an open state in which a game ball can enter the ball, and a variable control means for controlling the variable operation of the variable ball entry means, A specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided inside the variable ball entry means, and has a game state setting means capable of setting a disadvantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine N1 characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. A gaming machine has been proposed in which it is possible to set an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player when an advantageous bonus game is executed and a game ball passes through a specific area during the bonus game. 2013-152). In the gaming machine described above, an advantageous gaming state is set when the game ball passes through a specific area, so the player is forced to pay close attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine N1, a disadvantageous gaming state is set when a gaming ball passes through a specific area, so there is an effect that it is possible to provide a novel gaming experience to the player.

In the gaming machine N1, the variable control means has a first variable control that makes it easier for the ball that enters the variable ball entry means to pass through the specific area, and a second variable control that makes it more difficult for the ball to pass through the specific area than the first variable control. A gaming machine N2 is characterized in that it is capable of setting two variable controls.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N1, the variable control means provides a first variable control in which the ball entering the variable ball entry means easily passes through a specific area, and a control function that is faster than the first variable control. Since either the second variable control that makes it difficult to pass through a specific area is set, it is possible for the fired game ball to pass through the specific area when the game ball is fired, depending on the variable control content to be executed. You can have different genders. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of deciding whether to shoot the game ball or not.

In the gaming machine N2, the second bonus game executed by the second bonus game execution unit has a notification unit that can notify that the second variable control is set by the variable control unit. Gaming machine N3 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N2, the notification means notifies that the second variable control is set, so that when the player is made to decide whether or not to shoot the game ball, can provide reference information. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of deciding whether to shoot the game ball or not.

Any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3 includes a detection means for detecting that a game ball has passed through the specific area, and an invalidation means for invalidating the detection result by the detection means, and the invalidation means A gaming machine N4 is characterized in that the detection result by the detection means is invalidated based on the judgment result of the first judgment means.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the detection result by the detection means can be nullified by the nullifying means, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine N4, a measuring means for measuring the number of game balls detected by the detecting means during a period in which the detecting result by the detecting means is invalidated by the disabling means, and a measurement result of the measuring means. A gaming machine N5 characterized in that it has a measurement result notifying means for notifying information based on the measurement result.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N4, during the period when the detection result by the detection means is invalidated, the measurement result reporting means reports information based on the measurement result of the measuring means, so that the detection result is invalidated. The player can grasp the number detected by the detection means during the period. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily feel superiority.

<Characteristics Group O> (Time saving ends based on the condition that is met first among multiple conditions)
a first determination means capable of executing a first determination; a first display means on which first identification information is displayed to indicate a determination result by the first determination means; and the first identification information on the first display means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying a first determination result; and a privilege for executing a first privilege game when the first identification information for indicating a specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the first display means. a game execution means, a first game state in which the first determination is more likely to be performed, a second game state in which the first determination is more difficult to be performed than the first game state, and a game state setting means that can be set. The gaming machine has a termination means for terminating the first gaming state when a predetermined first termination condition is satisfied, or when a second termination condition different from the first termination condition is satisfied. , wherein the ending means ends the first gaming state based on the ending condition that is satisfied first among the first ending condition and the second ending condition. O1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine that can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-12907). By the way, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, since the subtraction of the period during which the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) which is advantageous to the player is set is the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, the advantageous gaming state cannot be set to the maximum. There was a problem in that the players were unable to do so and felt uncomfortable. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine O1, a first ending condition and a second ending condition are provided as conditions for ending the first gaming state, and when either ending condition ends, the first gaming state ends. , there is an effect that the first gaming state can be ended reliably.

In the gaming machine O1, a second determination means capable of executing a second determination, a second display means on which second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means is displayed, and the second display means a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for a predetermined second period, and the bonus game execution means is configured to display a specific second determination result on the second display means. A second bonus game is executed when the second identification information is displayed, and while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the second bonus game is executed. The second identification information is dynamically displayed by a digital display means, and when the first determination means is executed, the first termination condition is satisfied, and the second determination means is executed. A gaming machine O2 characterized in that the second termination condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O1, the first termination condition is satisfied based on the first determination by the first determination means, and the second termination condition is satisfied based on the second determination by the second determination means. Therefore, while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means, the gaming machine is capable of dynamically displaying the second identification information by the second dynamic display means. However, the first gaming state can be ended appropriately.

In the gaming machine O2, a first execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the first determining means, a second execution number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the second determining means, and the first execution number measuring means a summing means for summing up the measurement results of the second execution frequency measurement means and the measurement results of the second execution frequency measurement means; , a first period setting means for setting a predetermined number of times that is the sum of the number of times of execution of the second determination means; and during execution of the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means reaches the predetermined number of times. execution determination means for determining that the dynamic display is being executed, and the second determination means executes the second determination while the state determination means determines that the dynamic display is being executed. The gaming machine O3 is characterized in that the second termination condition is established before the second determination is executed when the second determination is executed.

According to the game O3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O2, the second end condition can be satisfied even during dynamic display where the first end condition can be satisfied, so that the first game state can be appropriately changed. This has the effect of being able to terminate the

In the gaming machine O3, the first termination condition is such that after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means reaches the predetermined number of times, the number of executions of the first determination means reaches the predetermined number of times. A gaming machine O4, characterized in that the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of determinations is greater than a predetermined number of times is satisfied at any time until the first determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O3, the first end condition is that the first determination is made after the dynamic display corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the first determination means reaches a predetermined number of times. Since the first determination corresponding to the case where the number of executions of the means becomes greater than the predetermined number of times is established until the first determination is executed, the predetermined first period can be set long. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine O4, a third determination means capable of executing a third determination, a third display means on which third identification information for indicating a determination result by the third determination means is displayed, and the third display means a third dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the third identification information; and a third benefit when the third identification information for indicating a specific third determination result is stopped and displayed on the third display means. a third bonus game execution means for executing a game, and the third determination means determines whether the second game state is set when the first game state is set by the game state setting means. The game machine O5 is characterized in that it is easier to execute than when it is executed.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O4, the first gaming state is set because it has a third determination means that is more likely to be executed when the first gaming state is set. By lengthening the period during which the third determination means is executed, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the third determination means is easily executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable.

<Characteristic P group> (Special figures fluctuate during the opening period of jackpot games)
A first determining means capable of performing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means; and a second determining means capable of performing a second determination. a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. A first bonus game is executed based on the display, and a second bonus game is executed based on the display of the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. A gaming machine having a bonus game execution means for executing the second determination means, wherein the second determination means executes the second determination during a specific first period out of the period in which the first bonus game is being executed. The gaming machine P1 is characterized in that the second determination is not performed during a second period that is different from the first period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and the plurality of special symbols can be changed simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine allows the player to efficiently draw a lottery by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, but if one special symbol wins, the other special symbol changes. Since the system is configured in such a way that fluctuations in the numbers are not carried out, there is a problem in that if the lottery efficiency decreases, the motivation to play decreases. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine as described above, which suppresses a decrease in the desire to play and improves the interest in playing the game.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the second determination can be performed while the first bonus game is being performed, the player can be made to perform more determinations. Therefore, there is an effect that the gaming efficiency can be increased.

In the game machine P1, a variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter a game ball than in the first state; and the first benefit. and variable control means for variably controlling the variable ball entry means between the first state and the second state when a game is executed, and the variable control means causes the variable ball entry means to be in the second state. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that the first period is a period that is variable.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second determination is executed using the period during which the first bonus game is being executed, during which the game ball cannot enter the variable ball entry means, the game result of the first bonus game cannot be known. The second determination can be executed without making it difficult. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for players to understand.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the second determination means provides a second advantageous determination result, as the second determination result, and a second advantageous bonus game that is more attractive to the player than an advantageous second bonus game executed based on the advantageous second determination result. It is possible to distinguish between the unfavorable second determination result in which an unfavorable second bonus game is executed, and the determination result of the second determination means executed during the first bonus game is the advantageous second determination result. A gaming machine P3 characterized in that it has a determination restriction means for restricting the results.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P1 or P2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the second determination performed during the first benefit game is limited by the determination restriction means so that the determination result does not become an advantageous second determination result, so that excessive benefits are not granted to the player. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the device is closed. Therefore, there is an effect that an appropriate game can be provided to the player.

The gaming machine P3 is characterized by having variable restriction means for restricting the variable means from changing from the second state to the first state by the variable control means during the disadvantageous second privilege game. Game machine P4.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the variable restriction means can restrict the first bonus game from being changed to the first state while the unfavorable second bonus game is being executed based on the determination result of the second determination unit. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the provision of difficult-to-understand games due to multiple bonus games being executed overlappingly.

In the gaming machine P4, when the variable restriction means restricts the first bonus game from changing to the first state, the first bonus game changes to the first state. Characteristic game machine P5.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, even if the variable restriction means restricts the first bonus game from being changed to the first state, the first bonus game can be changed to the first state. Since the length of the period is not variable, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, while the second period of the first bonus game is set, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game to perform the second determination until the end.

In any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the variable control means performs variable control so that the variable ball entry means is in the second state when the first bonus game is executed, and at least A gaming machine P6, characterized in that the first period is a period from when the first bonus game is executed until the variable ball entry means enters the first state.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines P2 to P5, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the second determination can be executed immediately after the first bonus game is executed, the second determination can be executed continuously from the period before the first bonus game is executed. This has the effect that the second determination can be performed during the first bonus game without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In the gaming machine P6, a second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate the determination result of the second determination means and the first period are different for the first bonus game. a first bonus game setting means capable of setting a plurality of the first bonus games, and the bonus game granting means grants the first bonus game set by the first bonus game setting means. and the first bonus game setting means is configured to set the first bonus game setting means at least for a period longer than the period for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the judgment result of the second judgment means set by the second dynamic display setting means. A normal first privilege game in which a first period is set, and a shortened first privilege game in which the first period is set, which is shorter than the period for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result of the second judgment means. A gaming machine P7 characterized in that it is possible to set and.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine P6, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first bonus game is normally set by the first bonus game setting means, it becomes possible to execute the second bonus game based on the determination by the second determination means during the first period, and the shortened first bonus game is set by the first bonus game setting means. When a bonus game is set, it can be configured such that it is difficult to execute the second bonus game based on the determination by the second determining means during the first period. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the first period during the bonus game, which is difficult to get the player interested in, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. effective.

Any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7 includes a second dynamic display setting means for dynamically displaying the identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate the determination result of the second determination means, and the first bonus game is executed. The gaming machine P8 is characterized in that it has a forced stop means for forcibly stopping and displaying the identification information dynamically displayed to indicate the judgment result of the second judgment means when the judgment result of the second judgment means is displayed.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects provided by any of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first bonus game is executed, the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result of the second determination means is forcibly stopped and displayed, so that a new dynamic display is not performed during the first period. This can make it easier to start. Therefore, it is possible to easily provide the player with the determination by the second determination means executed during the first period, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8 has a specific area through which a game ball can pass, and the bonus game providing means indicates that the determination result of the first determination means is the specific first determination result. The first bonus game is given when the game ball passes through the specific area while the identification information for the purpose is stopped and displayed, and the second determining means is configured to perform the determination by the first determining means. The period from when the identification information indicating that the result is the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed until the game ball passes through the specific area is also considered to be the second period. A gaming machine P9 is characterized in that it executes determination.

<Derivation of characteristic Pa group> (Small hit RUSH using special electric starting port)
A determination means capable of executing a determination, a display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a predetermined identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means. Based on this, the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game, and the bonus game execution means executes the bonus game from the first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, to the first state. a variable ball entry means that is changed to a second state in which a game ball enters the ball more easily; and after the predetermined identification information is displayed, the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state by the bonus game execution means. A gaming machine Pa1 characterized in that it has a special game execution means capable of executing a special game that changes the variable ball entry means to a second state until the variable ball entry means is changed.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and the plurality of special symbols can be changed simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine allows the player to efficiently draw a lottery by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, but in any game, unless the player wins a lottery, the Since bonus games cannot be given, there is a problem in that the interest in the game decreases. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machine Pa1, the variable ball entry means can be changed to the second state by the special game execution means before the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state by the bonus game execution means. , it is possible to provide players with unexpected games. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Pa1, the game ball changes from a first state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter based on the ball entering means that allows the ball to enter the ball entering means and the ball entering the ball entering means, to a state where the game ball is lower than the first state. has a second variable ball entry means that is variable to a second state in which the ball enters easily, and the special game execution means is configured to control the game ball based on the game ball entering the second variable ball entry means. A gaming machine Pa2 characterized in that it executes a special game.

According to the gaming machine Pa2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Pa1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the special game is executed by letting the game ball enter the second variable ball entry means, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game to the player.

The gaming machine Pa2 includes a special game setting means for setting the content of the special game to be executed by the special game execution means, and the special game setting means is configured to control when a game ball enters the second variable ball entry means. The game machine is characterized in that one special game is set from among a plurality of special games that have different preparation periods until the variable entry means changes the state to the second state. Pa3.

According to the gaming machine Pa3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Pa2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the preparation period from when a game ball enters the second variable ball entry means to when the variable ball entry means is changed to the second state can be varied depending on the special game to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to play a special game that requires a short preparation period while playing the game.

The gaming machine Pa3 has a gaming state setting means that can set a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the special game setting means is configured to set the special game state by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine Pa4 characterized in that when a first gaming state is set, it is easier to set a bonus game in which the preparation period is shorter than when the second gaming state is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Pa3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the first gaming state is set, a short preparation period is likely to be set, so it is possible to execute concentrated special games during the period when the first gaming state is set, and the game progress is improved. It has the effect of increasing interest.

In the gaming machine Pa4, the gaming state setting means sets the first gaming state based on the determination result by the determining means being the specific determination result. .

According to the gaming machine Pa5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Pa4, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the presence or absence of a bonus game and the setting of the gaming state are executed based on the determination result of the determination means, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the determination result of the determination means. .

The gaming machine Pa5 includes a waiting period setting means for setting a waiting period from when the predetermined determination result is displayed on the display means until the bonus game is executed, and the special game setting means includes: A gaming machine Pa6, characterized in that when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, the special game in which the preparation period is set shorter than the waiting period is set.

According to the gaming machine Pa6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine Pa5, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means, a special game with a preparation period shorter than the waiting period is set, so that the special game can be reliably executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Q group> (P group derivative)
A first determining means capable of performing a first determination; a first display means displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result by the first determining means; and a second determining means capable of performing a second determination. a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means; and a second display means for displaying second identification information for indicating a specific first determination result on the first display means. A first bonus game is executed based on the display, and a second bonus game is executed based on the display of the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result on the second display means. In the gaming machine, the second determination means performs the second determination during a specific first period of the period in which the first bonus game is being executed. The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that the second determination is executed and the second determination is not executed during a second period that is different from the first period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a plurality of types of special symbols are provided and the plurality of special symbols can be changed simultaneously (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-226399). By the way, the above-mentioned gaming machine allows the player to efficiently draw a lottery by changing a plurality of special symbols at the same time, but in any game, unless the player wins a lottery, the Since bonus games cannot be given, there is a problem in that the interest in the game decreases. Among the gaming machines described above, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game.

<Characteristic R group> (V winning rate varies depending on the variation time of the special drawing.)
A discriminating means that performs discriminating when a discriminating condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that dynamically displays identification information for a predetermined period on a display means to indicate the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and the dynamic display means. dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information; and providing a bonus game based on the identification information indicating the first determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means. The game ball enters the ball based on the fact that identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as a result of determination by the bonus game granting means and the determination means. It has a variable ball entry means that can change from a first state where it is difficult to enter a second state where it is easy to enter the ball, and a specific area through which a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means can pass, and the bonus game is provided. The means gives the bonus game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means sets a first period and the first period as the dynamic display period. A second period that is longer than the second period can be set, and setting the second period makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area than setting the first period. Gaming machine R1 is characterized by:

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that executes a specific game when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and also executes a bonus game when a ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example, , Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-192067). By the way, the gaming machine described above can improve the interest of the game because it allows bonus games to be executed at multiple opportunities; however, depending on the type of specific game being executed, Since the passing rate of the balls was varied, there was a problem in that the lottery result greatly influenced the subsequent game content, reducing the interest in the game. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine R1, the ease with which a game ball passes through a specific area can be varied depending on the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period setting means, so that the determination result of the determination means alone is not sufficient. Therefore, the player can keep his/her eyes on the display until the identification information indicating the determination result is stopped and displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine R1 includes a period group storage means having a plurality of period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods that can be set by the dynamic display period setting means are defined, and a plurality of period group storage means stored in the period group storage means. a period group selection means for selecting one period group from the period group, and the dynamic display period setting means is defined in the one period group selected by the period group selection means. One dynamic display period is set from among a plurality of dynamic display periods, and the period group storage means includes a first period group and a second period corresponding to the first period group. A gaming machine R2 having at least a second period group including many of the dynamic display periods.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine R1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a second period group is set in which the second period is easy to set, the second period can be set more easily than when the first period group is set. While the group is being set, there is an effect that the player can play an advantageous game with peace of mind.

The gaming machine R2 has a gaming state setting means that can set a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state as the gaming state, and the period group selection means is configured to set a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state. A gaming machine R3 characterized in that the period group is selected according to the gaming state set by means.

According to gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine R2, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the period groups are set according to the gaming state, once the second period group advantageous to the player is set, the second period group is not set until a different gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The two period groups will continue. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In the gaming machine R3, the dynamic display period setting means determines that the first determination result and the second determination result are different from each other as a result of the determination by the determination means in a state in which the second period group is set. A gaming machine R4 characterized in that a special dynamic display period can be set based on identification information indicating a different third determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine R3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display period that is set when the determination result of the determining means is the third determination result allows the player to understand that the currently set period group is the second period group that is advantageous to the player. can be done. Therefore, even if the determination result of the determination means is such that the bonus game cannot be executed, the player can be interested and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

<Feature S group> (R derivative)
A discriminating means that performs discriminating when a discriminating condition is satisfied, a dynamic display means that dynamically displays identification information for a predetermined period on a display means to indicate the result of the discrimination by the discriminating means, and the dynamic display means. dynamic display period setting means for setting a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the identification information; and providing a bonus game based on the identification information indicating the first determination result being stopped and displayed on the display means. The game ball enters the ball based on the fact that identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means as a result of determination by the bonus game granting means and the determination means. It has a variable ball entry means that can change from a first state where it is difficult to enter a second state where it is easy to enter the ball, and a specific area through which a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means can pass, and the bonus game is provided. The means gives the bonus game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the dynamic display period setting means sets a first period and the first period as the dynamic display period. A second period that is longer than the second period can be set, and setting the second period makes it easier for the game ball to pass through the specific area than setting the first period. A game machine S1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that executes a specific game when the lottery result is a specific lottery result, and also executes a bonus game when a ball passes through a specific area during the specific game (for example, , Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2012-192067). By the way, the gaming machine described above can improve the interest of the game because it allows bonus games to be executed at multiple opportunities; however, depending on the type of specific game being executed, Since the passing rate of the balls was varied, there was a problem in that the lottery result greatly influenced the subsequent game content, reducing the interest in the game. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

<Characteristic T group> (3 loops of 1 type and 2 types)
a discriminating means that performs discriminating when a discriminating condition is satisfied; a display means that displays identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and the above-mentioned identification for displaying the first discrimination result as the discrimination result on the display means. a bonus game granting means for granting a bonus game advantageous to the player when the information is stopped and displayed, and a first game state after the bonus game awarded by the bonus game granting means is completed; a game state setting means capable of setting a second game state in which the bonus game is more easily granted than in the first game state; and a third game state in which the bonus game is less likely to be awarded than in the first game state; Based on the fact that identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result as a result of the determination by the determination means is stopped and displayed on the display means, a period during which the game ball can pass through the specific area is set. and a period setting means for setting a period of time, and the bonus game giving means gives the bonus game even when a game ball passes through the specific area, and the gaming machine is configured to set the bonus game in the second game state. If a bonus game is awarded in a state where the bonus game is set, either the first game state or the second game state is set by the game state setting means rather than the third game state after the end of the bonus game. A gaming machine T1 characterized in that it is easy to set.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, if the lottery result is a specific lottery result, a special game is executed, and the ball passes through a specific area during the specific game, a bonus game is also executed, and if the ball passes through the specific area. A gaming machine that can set an easy gaming state has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-192067). By the way, the gaming machine described above can improve the interest of the game because it allows bonus games to be executed at multiple opportunities. There is a problem that the game ends immediately, which reduces the interest in the game. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of the game among the above-mentioned gaming machines.

According to the gaming machine T1, once the second gaming state is set, the third gaming state is not set when the next bonus game is awarded, making it easier to receive bonus games one after another. I can do it. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with peace of mind in a state where the bonus game is easily awarded.

In the gaming machine T1, the gaming state setting means is configured to provide a bonus game with the first gaming state set than when the bonus game is awarded with the second gaming state set. A gaming machine T2 characterized in that when the bonus game is granted, it is easier to set the third gaming state after the bonus game ends.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first gaming state is set, the third gaming state is more likely to be set based on the bonus game being awarded, so a gaming state advantageous to the player is set for a long period of time. can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate game.

In the gaming machine T1 or T2, the game state setting means selects, among the bonus games, a first bonus game that is awarded based on the determination result of the determination unit being a specific determination result, and the specific area. The game state is set differently depending on the type of the bonus game awarded by the bonus game granting means, from the second bonus game awarded based on the passing of the game ball. A gaming machine T3.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T2 or T3, the following effects are achieved. In other words, since the game state to be set can be different depending on whether the first bonus game is awarded or the second bonus game is awarded, it is possible to determine which type of bonus game the player will perform. It can make people interested in what happened. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3, the gaming state setting means determines that in the state where the second gaming state is set, it is more advantageous for the player to be awarded the second bonus game than to be awarded the first bonus game. A gaming machine T4 is characterized in that it makes it easy to set a gaming state.

According to the gaming machine T4, when the second gaming state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the second bonus game is awarded. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the gaming state setting means determines that in a state where the first gaming state is set, it is more likely that the player will be awarded the first bonus game than the second bonus game. A gaming machine T5 is characterized in that it facilitates setting of advantageous gaming conditions.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine T3 or T4, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first gaming state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the first bonus game is awarded. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics U group> (T group derivative)
a discriminating means that performs discriminating when a discriminating condition is met; a display means that displays identification information indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating means; and a stop display of the identification information indicating a specific discrimination result on the display means. In this case, after the bonus game granting means that grants a bonus game that is advantageous to the player, and the bonus game awarded by the bonus game granting means is finished, the first game state and the first game state are changed to the first game state. A gaming state setting means capable of setting a second gaming state in which the bonus game is more likely to be awarded, and a third gaming state in which the bonus game is less likely to be awarded than the first gaming state, and a result of the determination by the determining unit. Based on the fact that identification information indicating a second determination result different from the first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means, the game ball changes from a first state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to a second state in which it is easy to enter the ball. and a variable ball entry means that can be changed; and a specific area through which a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means can pass, and the bonus game granting means is configured to provide a bonus game when a game ball passes through the specific area. When the bonus game is awarded with the second game status set, the game status setting means is configured to grant the bonus game to the bonus game after the bonus game ends. A game machine U1 characterized in that either the state or the second game state is easily set.

<Characteristic Group V> (Small hit RUSH that does not require simultaneous fluctuations)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a first determining means capable of performing a first determination based on the ball entering the first ball entering means, and a determination result by the first determining means. a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information on the display means; a second ball entry means into which a game ball can enter; and a game ball entering the second ball entry means. an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the above information, a second determination means capable of performing a second determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and a second determination means for indicating the determination result by the second determination means. a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information on the display means; a storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means until the determination by the second determination means is performed; a second bonus game granting unit that grants execution of a second bonus game when the second identification information for indicating the specific second determination result is stopped and displayed on the display unit; a restriction means for restricting entry of game balls; and a restriction means capable of canceling at least the restriction means when the first identification information for indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. A gaming machine V1 characterized in that it has a first bonus game execution means for executing a first bonus game.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) in which a ball is likely to enter a specific ball opening after a bonus game ends according to a lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766 Public bulletin). By the way, the above-described gaming machine has a problem in that the player gets tired of playing the game quickly because it is possible to easily enter a ball into a specific ball entry hole at any time during an advantageous gaming state. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine V1, it is possible to enter a ball into the ball entry means only while a bonus game or special bonus game is being awarded, so that the bonus game or special bonus game is not awarded. This has the effect of restricting storage in the storage means when the data is not stored.

In the game machine V1, there is a second ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position which allows the game ball to enter the second ball entry means, and a position where the game ball enters the second ball entry means. a second position that regulates the ball; and a variable member that is variable in position, the variable member being variably controlled when the bonus game or the special bonus game is executed; The gaming machine V2 is characterized in that the restriction means positions the variable member at the first position, and the restriction release means positions the variable member at the second position.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the ease with which the ball enters the ball entering means can be varied depending on the variable status of the variable member executed in the bonus game or the special bonus game. The ball can be entered into the ball entry means in synchronization with the special bonus game. Therefore, there is an effect that the gameplay during the bonus game or the special bonus game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V1 or V2, when the special bonus game is executed, it is easier for the restriction canceling means to cancel the restriction by the restriction means when the special bonus game is executed than when the bonus game is executed. Game machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V1 or V2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the ease with which the ball enters the ball entry means can be varied depending on the type of game for which the variable member is varied, thereby improving gameplay during bonus games or special bonus games. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine V3, the gaming machine V4 is characterized in that the bonus game is more difficult to execute than the special bonus game.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine V3, the following effects are achieved. That is, although the bonus game is more difficult to execute than the special bonus game, it is possible to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entering means during the game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player actively aim to execute the bonus game, and there is an effect that the performance of the game can be increased.

<Feature W group> (Variable ease of establishing multiple game conditions with accessory movement patterns)
Setting a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination, a variable means that changes from a first state to a second state when the discriminating result by the discriminating means is a specific discrimination result, and variable operation contents of the variable means. and a variable control means that controls the variable means based on the variable operation content set by the variable operation setting means, and the variable control means is configured to control the variable operation setting means. When one variable operation content is set, the variable means is variably controlled so that a first benefit is more easily granted than a second benefit different from the first benefit, and the variable operation setting means When a second variable action content that is different from the first variable action content is set, the variable means is variably controlled so that the second benefit is more easily granted than the first benefit. The gaming machine W1 is characterized by the following.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine has been proposed that sets an advantageous gaming state (time-saving state) in which it is easy to variably operate a specific electric accessory after the end of a bonus game depending on the lottery result (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766). . By the way, in the gaming machine described above, the privilege that can be given to the player by variable operation of the electric accessory is always the same, and furthermore, by changing the variable operation content of the electric accessory, the same benefit can be granted to the player. Since it is only possible to set states that are easy to play and states that are difficult to play, there is a problem that the game becomes boring quickly. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that further improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine W1, it is possible to vary the award given based on the movable motion content set by the movable motion setting means, so that the player can be made to pay close attention to the variable status of the variable means. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine W1, a termination condition setting means for setting a plurality of termination conditions, a condition determination means for determining whether the plurality of termination conditions set by the termination condition setting means are satisfied, and a condition determination means for determining the termination conditions by the condition determination means. and variable control termination means for terminating the variable control of the variable means by the variable control means when it is determined that a specific termination condition among the plurality of termination conditions is satisfied. A gaming machine W2 characterized in that when the variable control termination means terminates the variable control, a special state is set in which the first benefit and the second benefit are likely to be granted.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since a special state is set when the specific end condition is met, the player can be motivated to play the game so that the specific end condition is met. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine W2 includes a ball entering means, a second determining means capable of performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering means, and a second determining means that determines whether the result of the determination by the second determining means is a specific one. A gaming machine W3 comprising: a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game when the second determination result is obtained, and the first benefit is one for which the second determination is executed.

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W2, the following effects are achieved. In other words, since the second determination that allows the player to execute the bonus game is given as the first benefit, the player is made to expect that the first variable action content that makes it easier to receive the first benefit will be set. You can play games while playing the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine W3, when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game execution means, the game ball changes from a first state in which it is difficult to enter the ball to a second state in which it is easier to enter the ball than in the first state. A gaming machine W4 having an operable variable ball entry means, wherein the second benefit is a game ball entering the variable ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine W4, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine W3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when a bonus game is being executed, it is possible to make the player play the game while expecting that the second variable action content will be set so that the second bonus is more likely to be awarded. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the gaming machine W5 is characterized in that the ending condition setting means sets the provision of the first benefit as the specific ending condition.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines W2 to W4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the special state can be set so that the player can play the game enthusiastically while expecting to be awarded the first benefit. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristics X Group> (Can pass through during winning games)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a determining condition establishing means that establishes a determining condition based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means, and the determining condition establishing means performs the discrimination. A determining means capable of performing determination when a condition is satisfied; a bonus game granting means granting a bonus game based on a determination result by the determining means being a specific determination result; A passing means through which a game ball can pass while a bonus game is given, a determining means capable of making a determination based on the passing of the game ball through the passing means, and a determination result that is a specific determination result. and a variable means that is variably controlled from a first position to a second position based on the fact that when the variable means is in the second position, the game ball enters the ball more than when it is in the first position. a second ball entering means that makes it easier to hit the ball, and the determining condition establishing means is characterized in that the determining condition is satisfied even when a game ball enters the second ball entering means. A gaming machine X1.

A gaming machine X2 in the gaming machine X1, wherein the second ball entry means is provided at a position where the ball that has passed through the passage means can enter.

In the gaming machine X2, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the determination means, and a dynamic display period for setting a period for dynamically displaying the identification information by the dynamic display means. and a setting means, and the dynamic display period setting means includes a first period in which a ball passing through the passing means can enter the second ball entering means, and a period in which the ball enters the second ball entering means after the first period. A gaming machine X3 is characterized in that it is possible to set at least a second period in which the difficulty occurs.

In gaming machine X3, gaming machine X4 is characterized in that the first period is longer than the second period.

<Characteristics Y group> (Advantageous general ending)
The method includes a determining means for executing a determination, and a period determining means for determining a period for notifying a determination result by the determining means, and a notification result for indicating a specific determination result is notified. A gaming machine that is in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the above-described advantageous state, further comprising a setting means for setting a set period after the end of the advantageous state until the next determination by the determination means can be executed, The gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that the period includes at least a first setting period and a second setting period that is more advantageous to the player than the first setting period.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-226399). By the way, there is a problem in that the period until a winning game or the like that is advantageous to the player is executed becomes long, making the game monotonous and causing the player to get tired of the game early. There is a need for a player to be able to enjoy the game even during the period until the winning game is executed, and to suppress the problem of early boredom with the game. To provide a game machine capable of suppressing early boredom with games.

According to the gaming machine Y1, it is possible to make the player expect that the second setting period will be set when an advantageous state is set, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early. effective.

The game machine Y1 has a first flow path through which the game ball can pass when the game ball is in the advantageous state, and when the second setting period is set, the game ball flows into the first flow path. A game machine Y2 characterized in that the game ball is configured to flow down more easily than when one set period is set.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y1, when the second set period is set, the game ball can be made easier to flow down into the first channel, and the second set period is This has the effect of increasing expectations that the setting will be made.

In the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, during the second setting period, the determination result by the determining means after the advantageous state becomes the specific determination result, and the advantageous state is reached, so that the flow path is transferred to the first flow path. The gaming machine Y3 is characterized in that the period is set such that the bonus is more likely to be awarded when the game ball passes through the gaming machine Y3.

According to the gaming machine Y3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y1 or Y2, by setting the second setting period, it is possible to increase the value of the next advantageous state being set, and the advantageous state is This has the effect of increasing expectations for what will be set.

In any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, a specific ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the first channel can be received, and at least a part of the benefit is granted when the game ball enters the ball. and a state setting means for setting a first state in which a game ball can enter the specific ball entering means, and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than in the first state, The gaming machine Y4 is characterized in that the second set period is comprised of a period during which the game ball can reach the specific ball entering means during the period in which the first state is set.

According to the gaming machine Y4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Y1 to Y3, the setting of the second setting period makes it easier for the gaming ball to reach the specific ball entering means. This has the effect of increasing expectations for the second setting period to be set.

In the gaming machine Y4, a ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the ball in the advantageous state, and a specific determination means that performs a specific determination based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. , a period determining means for determining a variable period for varying the period until the specific ball entry means is set to the first state, based on the execution of the specific determination by the specific determining means; A gaming machine Y5, wherein the period determining means is configured to be able to determine a period that is advantageous to the player even when the second set period is not set.

According to the gaming machine Y5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Y4, even when the second setting period is not set by the period determining means, a period that is advantageous to the player is determined, so that it is advantageous to the player. This has the effect of increasing the number of situations in which this occurs, and suppressing the problem of players getting bored with the game early.

<Feature β group derivation> (Advantageous for hitting normal figures at regular intervals)
a determining means for executing a determination; a period determining means for determining a period for notifying a determination result by the determining means; an advantageous state setting means for setting an advantageous state until a predetermined condition is satisfied; a first channel through which a game ball can pass when the advantageous state is set by the advantageous state setting means; and the first flow path is set to have a high probability of being able to pass when the interval at which the advantageous state is set is the first interval. Game machine β1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further improves the interest of gaming. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the gaming machine β1, when the interval at which an advantageous state is set is the first interval, the probability of passing through the first flow path is set high, so that after the advantageous state is executed, the next This has the effect of making the game more interesting by making the players more interested in the intervals at which the games are played.

In the game machine β1, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position that guides the game ball to the ball entry means, and a second position that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry means. A gaming machine β2 comprising a variable means that is variable, and wherein the advantageous state setting means changes the variable means to the first position as the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine β2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine β2, an advantageous state is set by changing the variable means to the first position, so there is an effect that the advantageous state can be easily understood. .

In the gaming machine β2, the advantageous state setting means cancels the setting of the advantageous state based on a predetermined number of game balls entering the ball entering means when the advantageous state is set. A game characterized in that, when the setting of the advantageous state is canceled, the game ball rolling on a predetermined range of the variable means is guided to the first flow path. Machine β3.

According to the gaming machine β3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine β2, it is possible to make the player interested in the game ball on the variable means even when the advantageous state is canceled, and the user can also expect the cancellation of the advantageous condition. It has the effect of being able to hold it.

In any of the gaming machines β1 to β3, a specific area is arranged in which the game ball guided to the first channel can enter, and a first state in which the game ball can enter the specific area. and a state variable means for changing the state to a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the ball entering state; a first variable control for changing the state changing means to the first state and then changing the state to the second state; and changing the state changing means to be in the first state during the period during which the flow period elapses. A gaming machine β4 characterized in that it has variable control means for executing at least one of the second variable control and the second variable control.

According to the gaming machine β4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines β1 to β3, it is possible to make the player expect that the second variable control will be executed by the variable control means, thereby improving the interest of the game. be.

<Characteristic Z group> (Attacker below general electricity)
A ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a determining means which can perform a determination based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and a display means for displaying identification information to show the determination result of the determining means. a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating a specific determination result on the display means; and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating a specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. , a variable means that is variable between a first state that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means and a second state that makes it more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state, and specific conditions. and variable control means for varying the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, based on the establishment of the variable means, wherein the variable means is in the first state. a specific flow path into which a game ball that has flown down is guided by the variable means and is changed to the second state before the ball enters the first ball entry means, and the specific flow path; a specific area into which the game ball that has flown down the road can enter, and the bonus game execution means sets an entry state in which the game ball can enter the specific area until an end condition is satisfied. A gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that it executes the bonus game.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-226399). By the way, there has been a demand for a gaming machine that further improves the interest of gaming. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that improves the interest of gaming.

According to the game machine Z1, even if the game ball cannot be caused to enter the ball entering means by the variable means, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the ball will enter the specific channel, thereby increasing the interest of the game. It has the effect of improving the

The gaming machine Z1 includes a dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period when starting dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display determined by the dynamic display period determining means. The period is such that at least an advantageous dynamic display period in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the specific area and an unfavorable dynamic display period in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific area are set. Characteristic gaming machine Z2.

According to the gaming machine Z2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Z1, it is possible to make the player interested in the dynamic display period of the identification information, and there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, the bonus game execution means starts executing the setting of the ball landing state in the specific area according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of the bonus game. Game machine Z3.

According to the gaming machine Z3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Z1 or Z2, a specific area is set to a ball entering state according to a certain rule based on the start of execution of a bonus game, so it is fair to the players. It has the effect of keeping sex constant.

<Characteristic AA group> (Production based on special figure 2 variation)
A ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a determining means which can perform a determination based on the ball entering the ball entering means, and a display means for displaying identification information to show the determination result of the determining means. dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information; dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; In a gaming machine having a specific ball entering means that allows a game ball to enter the ball until an end condition is satisfied when the identification information for indicating the ball is stopped and displayed, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down a flow path, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance during the dynamic display period, and the performance execution means includes a detection means capable of detecting a game ball flowing down a flow path. The gaming machine AA1 is characterized in that it executes at least a part of the performance based on the detection results obtained by the game machine AA1.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, when notifying the lottery results, the players can have high expectations for the lottery results by configuring the system so that the lottery results are notified to the players after a predetermined period of execution of an effect suggesting the lottery results. A gaming machine has been proposed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2013-226399). By the way, since the performance is executed based on the predetermined lottery results, the performance tends to be constant, making the game monotonous, and there is a problem that the player quickly gets bored with the game. To provide a game machine that can prevent players from getting bored with games early.

According to the gaming machine AA1, the detection means detects a game ball flowing down the channel that allows the ball to enter the specific ball entry means, and at least a part of the performance that is being executed is executed based on the detection result. Therefore, in addition to the dynamic display of the identification information, the performance being executed can be varied depending on the flow of the game ball, which improves the interest of the game and prevents players from getting bored with the game early. This has the effect of suppressing defects.

In the gaming machine AA1, the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means includes at least a first dynamic display period in which a game ball is set to easily enter the specific ball entering means. The gaming machine AA2 is characterized in that the performance executing means executes the specific performance on at least one condition that the first dynamic display period is determined.

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA1, the specific performance is executed with at least one condition that the first dynamic display period that is advantageous to the player is determined. By executing this, there is an effect that the user can expect that the first dynamic display period has been determined.

In the gaming machine AA2, the effect execution means executes the specific effect even if the first dynamic display period is determined, if the detection means does not detect a game ball in the specific detection period. A gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that it executes different effects.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA2, even when the first dynamic display period is determined, if the gaming ball is not detected by the detection means during the specific detection period, the specific performance is Since this is not executed, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem in which the specific effect is executed in vain and the level of expectation for the specific effect is lowered.

In any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, the specific ball entering means is provided with a specific area through which the entered game ball can pass, and the bonus game is played based on passing through the specific area. A gaming machine AA4 characterized in that settings for execution are executed.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines AA1 to AA3, when the game ball enters the specific ball entry means, the game ball passes through a specific area and a bonus game is executed. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AA4, a variable means that is variable between a first state that makes it easier to enter the game ball into the ball entry means and a second state that makes it more difficult to enter the game ball than the first state. and variable control means for varying the variable means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the establishment of a specific condition, and the flow path is controlled by the variable means. is guided by the variable means when the ball is in the first state, and is changed to the second state before the ball enters the first ball entering means, thereby allowing the flowing game ball to flow in. The gaming machine AA5 is characterized by:

According to the game machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine AA4, by changing the variable means, it is expected that game balls that have not entered the ball entering means will also flow into the channel. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In gaming machine AA5, gaming machine AA6 is characterized in that the specific ball entering means is configured such that a gaming ball that flows down the channel and enters easily passes into the specific area. .

According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA5, the expectation level for passing through a specific area by flowing down the flow path can be increased, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Characteristics Group AB> (Non-prize balls can win prizes in special trains)
A first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter; a first determining means capable of performing a first determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entering means; and a first determining means. a first dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a determination result on a display means for a predetermined period; a first state in which a game ball can be entered; a first variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second state in which ball entry is difficult; and when the determination result by the first determination means is a specific determination result, the first variable ball entry means is changed to a second state in which the ball entry is difficult; a first variable control means for changing the state from the first state to the first state; a first guide path capable of guiding a game ball to the first variable ball entry means; and a second guide path capable of guiding a game ball into the first state. A ball entering means, a second determining means capable of performing a second determination based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entering means, and a second identification for indicating a determination result by the second determining means. a second dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying information for a predetermined period of time on the display means; a first state provided on the first guiding path and in which a game ball can enter; a second variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second state in which ball entry is difficult; and when the determination result by the second determination means is a specific determination result, a second variable control means for changing the state from the first state to the first state, wherein the first variable ball entry means controls the first guidance without the ball entering the second variable ball entry means. A game machine AB1 is characterized in that a game ball flowing down a path can enter the game ball.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable display is performed for a predetermined period of time based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting winning hole, and the first symbol is displayed based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting winning hole. There is also a second symbol whose variable display is executed for a predetermined period based on the symbol, and each symbol can be varied at the same time. In such a gaming machine, if a predetermined lottery result (for example, a small win) is obtained as a lottery result for the second symbol, a small bonus game (for example, a small win game) that can give a small bonus to the player is provided. There are some games that are configured to be executed, and configured to be able to set a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is likely to be executed and a gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-39398).

In such a conventional gaming machine, by varying the length of the fluctuation time of the second symbol, it is possible to set a gaming state in which the lottery of the second symbol is easy to be executed and a gaming state in which it is difficult to execute. , because it is configured to set a game state in which it is easy to execute the small bonus game and a game state in which it is difficult to execute, for example, in a state in which it is easy to perform the lottery of the second symbol, the player is given a small bonus game. There was a problem in that it was not possible to make detailed settings such as varying the amount of benefits given to players, which resulted in a loss of interest in the game. The purpose is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine AB, the number of game balls that reach the first variable ball entry means can be varied depending on the situation of the second variable means, so the number of balls that reach the first variable ball entry means can be varied depending on the situation of the second variable ball entry means. 2. Adjustment can be made by controlling the control contents of the variable means. Therefore, since it is possible to adjust the amount of benefits given to the player in a game in which the first variable ball entry means is operated to open, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AB1, a gaming state setting means capable of setting a first gaming state and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state, and the second identification information executed by the second dynamic display means. a dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period from a different period, and the dynamic display period setting means is configured to set a dynamic display period when the first gaming state is set by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that it makes it easier to set a longer dynamic display period than when the second gaming state is set.

According to gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AB1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display period of the second dynamic display means can be varied depending on the gaming state that is set. Furthermore, when the first gaming state is set, a longer dynamic display period is more likely to be set than when the second gaming state is set. Therefore, since it is possible to lengthen the period during which a ball cannot enter the second variable ball entry means, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to reach the first variable ball entry means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

In the gaming machine AB2, the second variable ball entry means has at least an opening into which a game ball can enter, and an opening/closing lid member that opens and closes the opening, and the opening/closing lid member is configured to open and close the opening. When the section is closed, the top surface of the opening/closing lid member forms a part of the first guiding path, and the dynamic display period setting means is configured to control the first guiding path by the gaming state setting means. A gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that, when a gaming state is set, a dynamic display period that is longer than a passing time for a game ball to pass over the upper surface of the opening/closing lid member can be easily set.

According to gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AB2 described above, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first game state is set, it is possible to ensure that the ball reaches the first variable ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine AB2 or AB3 includes variable pattern setting means capable of setting a variable pattern that is variably controlled by the second variable control means from among a plurality of different variable patterns, and the variable pattern setting means is configured to set a variable pattern that is variably controlled by the second variable control means, and the variable pattern setting means A variable pattern is set in which when the first gaming state is set by the setting means, the period during which the second variable ball entry means is in the second state is longer than when the second gaming state is set. A gaming machine AB4 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine AB2 or AB3, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the first game state is set, a variable pattern is set in which the period in which the second variable ball entry means is in the second state is longer than when the second game state is set. One game state can be made into a game state more advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

<Characteristic AC group> (Suggests the special pattern 1 lottery result based on the special pattern 2 lottery during special pattern 1 fluctuation)
a first discrimination means capable of performing a first discrimination; a first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for a predetermined period of time to indicate a discrimination result by the first discrimination means; A second dynamic display that dynamically displays a first display means to be displayed, a second determination means capable of performing a second determination, and second identification information for indicating a determination result by the second determination means for a predetermined period of time. a second display means for displaying the second identification information; and a second display means for displaying the second identification information; a bonus game execution means for executing a second bonus game based on the second identification information for indicating a specific second determination result being stopped and displayed on the second display means; , suggesting the determination result of the first determining means based on the fact that the determination of the second determining means is performed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic displaying means; A gaming machine AC1 characterized in that it has a suggestive performance execution means capable of executing a suggestive performance for.

Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, the player is notified. An advantageous bonus game was being executed. Furthermore, a gaming machine that can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2015-12907). By the way, the gaming machine described above executes a variable performance dedicated to the first special symbol in order to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and executes a variable performance dedicated to the second special symbol to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. Since it is configured to execute a variable performance, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both special symbol lottery are executed enthusiastically. There was a problem in that the motivation to try was reduced. Furthermore, when a plurality of special symbols are changing at the same time, there is a problem in that the lottery result of each special symbol is notified to the player in a way that is difficult to understand. Furthermore, since an independent variable performance is performed for each special symbol, there is a problem in that the performance is performed without a sense of unity. In the above-mentioned game machine, an object is to provide a game machine that further improves the interest of the game by providing the player with an easy-to-understand suggestion performance for suggesting the lottery result of each special symbol.

According to the gaming machine AC1, the determination result of the first determination means is suggested based on the determination of the second determination means executed while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means. Since the suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to make the player play the game with enthusiasm in order to understand the discrimination result of the first discrimination means in advance and to execute the discrimination of the second discrimination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine AC1, gaming machine AC2 is characterized in that the suggestive performance execution means executes the suggestive performance when the determination result of the first determining means is the specific first determination result. .

According to gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AC1, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is the specific first discrimination result, there is an effect that the effect of the suggestion effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine AC2, the period from when the first determining means determines that the specific first determination result is the first determination result until the first identification information indicating the specific first determination result is stopped and displayed. , a gaming machine AC3 comprising a restriction means for restricting the determination result of the second determination means from being the specific second determination result.

According to gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AC2, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the discrimination result of the first discrimination means is a specific first discrimination result, the restriction means restricts the discrimination by the second discrimination means from becoming a specific second discrimination result, It is possible to prevent a bonus game different from the content of the suggested performance from being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the suggestive performance can be increased and the performance effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine AC4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AC1 or AC3, the suggestive performance execution means executes the suggestive performance using a display mode of the second identification information.

According to gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines AC1 to AC3, the following effects are achieved. That is, since the suggestion effect is executed using the display mode of the second identification information, the player can check the discrimination result of the second discrimination means and select the first one by simply looking at the display mode of the second identification information. It becomes possible to predict the discrimination result of the discrimination means. Therefore, the player pays close attention to the second identification information, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, a totalizing means for totalizing the determination results of the second determining means, and a condition satisfaction determining means for determining whether an execution condition is satisfied based on the determination results totaled by the second determining means. A gaming machine AC5, characterized in that the suggestive performance execution means executes the suggestive performance when the condition satisfaction determining means determines that the execution condition is satisfied.

According to gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the following effects are achieved. That is, the discrimination results of the second discrimination means are aggregated, and when the aggregate result satisfies the execution condition, the suggestive effect is executed, which prompts the player to play the game with enthusiasm in order to satisfy the execution condition. can be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC5 has a production mode setting means for setting a production mode of the suggestion production executed by the suggestion production execution means, and the production mode setting means is configured to set a production mode of the suggestion production executed by the suggestion production execution means, and the production mode setting means selects the first suggestion mode and its first suggestion mode. The gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that it is possible to set a second suggestion mode that suggests the discrimination result of the first discrimination means more easily than the first suggestion mode.

According to gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines AC1 to AC5, the following effects are achieved. That is, depending on the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means, an easy-to-understand suggestion presentation and a difficult-to-understand suggestion presentation are executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the discrimination result of the first discrimination means from being easily grasped by a single suggestion performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game in order to have the suggested effect executed a plurality of times.

The gaming machine AC6 includes a number measuring means for measuring the number of executions of the suggestion performance executed by the suggestion performance execution means, and the performance mode setting means is configured to perform execution of the suggestion performance measured by the number of times measurement means. A gaming machine AC7 characterized in that it is easier to set the first suggestion mode when the number of times is a specific number of times greater than the predetermined number of times than when the number of times is a predetermined number of times.

According to gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AC6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the more times the suggestion effect is executed, the easier the suggestion effect to be understood by the player will be executed, so there is an effect that the player can be motivated to play the game by having the suggestion effect executed a plurality of times.

<Characteristic BA group> (The more times the first advantageous state occurs consecutively, the more advantageous the second advantageous state is likely to be set)
a discriminating means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result; The gaming states after the bonus game ends are a first gaming state, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second gaming state. a first gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state; a second gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state to the third gaming state based on the first gaming state, and the specific condition is set based on the fact that the bonus game was executed during the first gaming state. The second gaming state, which is set based on the bonus game being executed during the second gaming state, is more likely to be established than the second gaming state in which the bonus game is executed during the second gaming state. A game machine BA1 is characterized in that it is a game machine.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state ends can be changed depending on the winning type. There are also some that are trying to increase interest in. Furthermore, in some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after a winning state ends, and in that relatively advantageous gaming state, a player consecutively loses in a specific number of drawings. In some cases, there are cases where the situation shifts to a more advantageous state.

However, in the conventional gaming machines mentioned above, the conditions for transitioning from a relatively advantageous gaming state to a more advantageous gaming state are fixed regardless of the situation at the time the relatively advantageous gaming state is reached. There has been a problem in that it is difficult to improve the player's expectations when the game state is set to be advantageous, and it is difficult to improve the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BA1, there is a discriminating means that executes discriminating based on the establishment of discriminating conditions, and based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means being a specific discriminating result, the game machine A bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game, a first game state as a game state after the end of the bonus game, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. a first gaming state setting means capable of setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a third gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the gaming state; a second gaming state setting means for setting the gaming state to the third gaming state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition; The second gaming state, which is set based on the fact that the bonus game is executed during the second gaming state, is better than the second gaming state, which is set based on the execution of the bonus game. The structure is such that it is easy for the following to hold true.

As a result, when the second gaming state is entered, it is more advantageous than the first gaming state, and it becomes easier to transition to the third gaming state, so that the player's expectations for the third gaming state are improved. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is such that the game after the end of the bonus game is more effective than when the second gaming state is set based on the bonus game being executed during the first gaming state. The gaming machine BA2 is characterized in that the gaming machine BA2 is configured such that the second gaming state is more likely to be established when the second gaming state is set continuously a specific number of times or more.

According to the gaming machine BA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA1, the specific condition is when the second gaming state is set based on the bonus game being executed during the first gaming state. The configuration is such that it is easier to establish the second gaming state when the second gaming state is set consecutively for a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. Even if the bonus game is executed without the specific conditions being satisfied in the third game state, the expectation for the third game state can be further improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the second gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state when the second gaming state is set based on the bonus game being executed during the first gaming state. The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means has become a different discrimination result from the specific discrimination result for a predetermined first number of consecutive times in the gaming state. The second gaming state setting means is configured to set the second gaming state in the second gaming state when the second gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game consecutively for a specific number of times or more. The third gaming state is set based on the fact that the determination result of the determining means is a different determination result from the specific determination result for a second number of times that is smaller than the first number of times. A game machine BA3 is characterized in that it is a game machine that

According to the gaming machine BA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA1 or BA2, the second gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state based on the fact that the bonus game was executed during the first gaming state. When the state is set, the discrimination result of the discrimination means has become a different discrimination result from the specific discrimination result for a predetermined first number of consecutive times in the second gaming state. The third gaming state is set based on the second gaming state, and the second gaming state setting means sets the second gaming state continuously for a specific number of times or more as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. , the determination result of the determination means has become a different determination result from the specific determination result continuously for a second number of times less than the first number of times in the second gaming state. The third gaming state is set based on the above.

As a result, in the second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the expectation is to see a series of incorrect judgment results rather than a specific judgment result, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing the game. It has the effect of being able to

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA3, a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entry means, and a front A variable means that is variable between a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means, and a determination result of the determination means. variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a second determination result different from a specific determination result; A gaming machine BA4, characterized in that the third gaming state is configured such that the variable game is easier to execute than the second gaming state.

According to the game machine BA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines BA1 to BA3, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a predetermined effect based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means; and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball entry means than the first position. and the variable means is variable from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from a specific discrimination result. and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game, and the third gaming state is configured such that the variable game is easier to execute than the second gaming state.

As a result, in the third game state, there are more opportunities for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA4, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating means, such that the discrimination by the second discriminating means has a higher probability of obtaining the second discriminating result than the discriminating by the first discriminating means. A gaming machine BA5, characterized in that the third gaming state is configured such that the second discrimination condition is more easily met than in other gaming states.

According to the gaming machine BA5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA4, the discrimination means is different from the first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition, and the discrimination by the second discriminating means is better than the discrimination by the first discriminating means. The game is configured so that the probability of obtaining a 2 discrimination result is high, and the third gaming state is configured so that the second discrimination condition is more easily satisfied than other gaming states. It is.

Thereby, in the third gaming state, there is an effect that the game can be played while paying attention to the determination result of the second determining means.

In any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA5, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a second ball entering means into which the game ball can enter. a second variable means that is variable between a third position where a game ball can enter and a fourth position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the third position, and the first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. The gaming machine BA6 is characterized in that it is realized by:

According to the gaming machine BA6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BA1 to BA5, there is a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. a second variable means that is variable between a third position where a game ball can enter the first ball entry means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the first ball entry means; , the first determining condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the second determining condition is established based on the fact that the game ball enters the second ball entering means. This is established based on the game ball entering the ball.

This makes it possible to draw attention to the variable position of the second variable means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BA6, the second gaming state is configured such that the second variable means is more easily varied to the third position than in the first gaming state and the third gaming state. The gaming machine BA7 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BA7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA6, the second gaming state has the second variable means variable to the third position more than the first gaming state and the third gaming state. Since the configuration is such that it is easy to play, there is an effect that the degree of advantage of the second gaming state can be improved.

In the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, there is a passing means through which the game ball can pass, a passage determining means that performs a determination based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing means, and a third determination result of the passage determining means. variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result; , when the third determination result is obtained with a first probability and the determination is executed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the third determination is made with a second probability lower than the first probability. A gaming machine BA8 characterized in that it is a gaming machine that produces a result.

According to the gaming machine BA8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BA6 or BA7, there is a passage means through which the game ball can pass, and a passage determination means that performs a determination based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passage means. variable control means for varying the second variable means in a predetermined variable pattern based on the determination result of the passage determination means being a third determination result; If the discrimination is executed in the second gaming state, the third discrimination result will be obtained with the first probability, and if the discrimination is carried out in the first gaming state and the third gaming state, the first probability will be higher than the first probability. Also, the third discrimination result is obtained with a low second probability.

This allows the player to play the game while paying attention to the determination result of the passage determining means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic BB group> (Suggesting the result of the dynamic display in a presentation to notify at least different content from the result)
A first determining means executes a determination based on the establishment of a first determining condition, and a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on the determination result of the first determining means being a specific determination result. a bonus game execution means that executes a first performance for indicating the determination result of the first determination means; and a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance for indicating the determination result of the second discrimination unit, overlappingly with the first performance, When the first performance and the second performance are overlapped by executing the second performance, the second performance execution means includes, in the second performance, the second performance shown by the first performance. A gaming machine BB1 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a specific performance mode that can suggest the determination result of the first determining means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters the starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a winning result, the player is advantageous. There are games that run winning games. Furthermore, among such conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine that can change the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-12907). By the way, the gaming machine described above executes a variable performance dedicated to the first special symbol to suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol, and executes a variable performance dedicated to the second special symbol to suggest the lottery result of the second special symbol. Since it is configured to execute a variable production, the game using one special symbol lottery and the game using the other special symbol lottery become independent, and both special symbol lottery are executed enthusiastically. There was a problem in that the motivation to try was reduced. Furthermore, when a plurality of special symbols are changing at the same time, there is a problem in that the lottery result of each special symbol is notified to the player in a way that is difficult to understand. Furthermore, since an independent variable performance is executed for each special symbol, there is a problem in that the performance cannot be suitably executed.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BB1, there is a first discriminating means that executes the discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and a discriminating result of the first discriminating means is a specific discriminating result. a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player; a first performance execution means for executing a first performance for indicating the determination result of the first determination means; and the first determination condition. A second discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a different second discriminating condition, and a second effect for showing the discrimination result of the second discriminating means can be executed in overlap with the first effect. a second performance execution means, and the second performance execution means is configured to perform the second performance when the first performance and the second performance are overlapped by executing the second performance. In the performance, the present invention is configured to be able to execute a specific performance mode that can suggest the determination result of the first determining means indicated by the first performance.

Thereby, the second effect can suggest not only the discrimination result of the second discrimination means but also the discrimination result of the first discrimination means, so there is an effect that a more suitable presentation mode can be realized.

In the gaming machine BB1, the second performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific performance mode in the second performance before the first performance indicates the determination result of the first discrimination means. The game machine BB2 is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB1, the second performance execution means performs an operation in the second performance before the first performance indicates the determination result of the first discrimination means. Since the specific performance mode is configured to be executable, the determination result of the first determination means can be confirmed by checking the second performance without checking the first performance to the end. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

The gaming machine BB1 or BB2 is provided with a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first discrimination condition is the first ball entering means. The second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the second determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. Game machine BB3 is characterized by being a game machine.

According to the game machine BB3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BB1 or BB2, it includes a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means. , the first determining condition is established based on the fact that a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and the second determining condition is established based on the fact that a game ball enters the second ball entering means. This is established based on the ball entering the ball.

This allows the player to play the game by paying attention to the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any of the game machines BB1 to BB3, variable ball entry means that can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than in the first state. and a privilege granting means for granting a predetermined privilege based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means; and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on the determination result, and the second performance The execution means is configured to be able to suggest the specific performance mode in the second performance that is executed based on the determination result of the second determination unit being the second determination result. Game machine BB4 is characterized by certain things.

According to the game machine BB4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines BB1 to BB3, there is a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball, and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than in the first state. a variable ball entry means that is variable in state, a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means, and a determination result of the second determination means. A variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period based on a second determination result different from the specific determination result. Execution means, the second performance execution means is configured to execute the specific performance in the second performance that is executed based on the determination result of the second determination means being the second determination result. It is configured to be able to suggest aspects.

This has the effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the determination result of the second determination means will be the second determination result.

In the gaming machine BB4, the gaming state after the end of the bonus game is a first gaming state in which the determination by the first determining means is more likely to be performed, and a first gaming state in which the determination by the second determining means is more likely to be performed than in the first gaming state. a second gaming state; and a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state; A gaming machine BB5 comprising: gaming state changing means for changing the state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB4, the gaming state after the end of the bonus game is a first gaming state in which the determination by the first determining means is more likely to be executed, and a first gaming state that is easier to perform than the first gaming state. a second gaming state in which the discrimination by the second determining means is likely to be executed; A gaming state changing means is provided for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition.

Thereby, in the first gaming state, it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the specific condition will be met, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BB1 or BB2, a variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the first state; and a benefit granting means for granting a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, wherein the second determining means determines whether the game ball has entered the variable ball entering means or not. The second performance is characterized in that the second performance is comprised of a performance that outputs a predetermined sound based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine BB6.

According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB1 or BB2, there is a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball, and a second state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than in the first state. The second determining means includes a variable ball entry means that can be changed, and a privilege granting means that provides a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means, and the second determining means is configured to It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the ball means, and the second performance is a performance that outputs a predetermined sound based on the game ball entering the variable ball entrance means. It is made up of.

As a result, it is possible to perform an auditory presentation using audio, which has the effect of further increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB6, the specific performance mode includes a first performance mode, and when the first performance for indicating the specific determination result is executed rather than the first performance mode. A gaming machine BB7 characterized in that it includes at least a second performance mode in which the rate of execution by the second performance execution means is increased.

According to the gaming machine BB7, in any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB6, the specific performance mode includes a first performance mode, and the first performance for indicating the specific determination result rather than the first performance mode. Since it includes at least a second performance mode in which the rate of execution by the second performance execution means is high when the second performance is being executed, it is assumed that the second performance mode will be executed in the second performance. It can make you expect more. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BB7, the specific performance mode includes a third performance mode that can be executed by the second performance execution means only when the first performance for indicating the specific determination result is being executed. A gaming machine BB8 characterized in that it includes at least.

According to the gaming machine BB8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB7, the specific performance mode includes the second performance only when the first performance for indicating the specific determination result is executed. Since at least the third performance mode that can be executed by the execution means is included, when the third performance mode is executed, it is possible to make the player feel greater joy. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Any one of gaming machines BB1 to BB8, wherein the second performance is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first performance, at least for a predetermined period of time. BB9.

According to the gaming machine BB9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BB1 to BB8, the second performance is executed in a manner that is easier for the player to visually recognize than the first performance, at least during a predetermined period. Therefore, by checking the easily visible second effect, it is possible to check both the determination result of the second determination means and the determination result of the first determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.

<Characteristic BC group> (Direct transition to an advantageous state based on the establishment of a specific condition that is at least different from a jackpot in an unfavorable state)
A discriminating means that executes a discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, a privilege game execution means that executes a privilege game advantageous to a player based on the determination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result, and a game. a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific setting condition at least different from the execution of the bonus game during the first gaming state disadvantageous to the player; , an acquisition game execution means for executing an acquisition game in which the player can acquire a predetermined benefit each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second game state; BC1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state ends can be changed depending on the winning type. There are also some that are trying to increase interest in. Furthermore, in some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, a relatively advantageous gaming state is set after a winning state ends, and in that relatively advantageous gaming state, a player consecutively loses in a specific number of drawings. In some cases, there are cases where the situation shifts to a more advantageous state.

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that it is difficult to shift to a more advantageous gaming state unless the gaming state is shifted to a relatively advantageous gaming state. The problem was that it was difficult to do so.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BC1, there is a discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and benefits that are advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a specific discrimination result. A second game advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a specific setting condition that is at least different from the execution of the bonus game between the bonus game execution means that executes the game and the first game state disadvantageous to the player. a second game state setting means for setting a state; and an acquisition game execution means for executing an acquisition game in which a player can acquire a predetermined benefit each time a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the second game state. and.

Thereby, in the disadvantageous first gaming state, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that the specific setting condition will be met, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BC1, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is more difficult to enter than the first position. a second position, a variable means that can be changed to a second position, and a privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the ball entering means; , when the specific condition is satisfied that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means moves from the second position to the second position for a predetermined period as the winning game. A gaming machine BC2 is characterized in that it is controlled so as to be variable to one position.

According to the gaming machine BC2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC1, there is provided a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter into the ball entry means, and a first position at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means. a second position in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball than the position, a variable means that can be changed to a second position, and a benefit granting means that grants the predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball hitting means; and the acquisition game executing means determines that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, and determines that the specific condition is met, and the variable means determines that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, and the acquisition game is executed as the acquisition game. is controlled to vary from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period of time.

As a result, in the second game state, it is possible to play the game by paying attention to whether or not the game ball enters the ball entering means, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. There is.

In the gaming machine BC2, when the winning game is executed at least in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is maintained even after the execution of the winning game ends. Game machine BC3.

According to the gaming machine BC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC2, when the winning game is executed at least in the second gaming state, the second gaming state remains the same even after the execution of the winning game ends. Since this is maintained, the degree of advantage of the second gaming state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BC2 or BC3 is provided with a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the discrimination condition is such that the first ball entering means is different from the first ball entering means. Consisting of at least a first determination condition that is established based on the game ball entering the means, and a second determination condition that is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means. The determination performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition has a higher probability of obtaining the second determination result than the determination performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. The first game state is configured such that when a determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition, it is more difficult to obtain a determination result than in the second game state. A gaming machine BC4 characterized by the following configuration.

According to the gaming machine BC4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC2 or BC3, it includes a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. , the discrimination condition is a first discrimination condition that is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and a game ball entering the second ball entry means. and a second determination condition that is satisfied, and the determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is more effective than the determination performed based on the establishment of the first determination condition. The first game state is configured such that the probability of obtaining the second determination result is high, and the first game state is the second game state when the determination is performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. It is configured so that the determination result is more difficult to obtain than the state.

As a result, the degree of advantage in the second gaming state can be further improved, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is maintained in the same gaming state at least until the determination result of the determining means becomes the specific determination result. A gaming machine BC5.

According to the gaming machine BC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BC1 to BC4, the second gaming state is a state in which the same game is played at least until the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result. Since the state is maintained in the second gaming state, it is possible to realize a novel gaming experience in which it is expected that a specific determination result will not be obtained in the second gaming state.

The gaming machine BC6 is characterized in that the second gaming state has a lower probability of achieving the specific determination result than the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BC6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC5, the second gaming state has a lower probability of obtaining the specific determination result than the first gaming state, so that the degree of advantage in the second gaming state is This has the effect of further increasing the

The gaming machine BC5 or BC6 is provided with an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and the second gaming state is constituted by a gaming state that is set when the initialization by the initialization means is performed. A gaming machine BC7 is characterized in that it is

According to the gaming machine BC7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC5 or BC6, it is provided with an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and the second gaming state is set when the initialization by the initialization means is performed. It consists of gaming states that are set when the game is played.

This has the effect that it is possible to provide a very special gaming experience different from that of general gaming machines, in which the gaming state set upon initialization becomes advantageous.

In the gaming machine BC7, the winning game is executed from when the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initializing means until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied. The game machine BC8 is characterized in that it is provided with a restriction means for restricting the game so that it is difficult to be played.

According to the gaming machine BC8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BC7, after the second gaming state is set based on the initialization performed by the initializing means, a predetermined specific condition is set. Since a restriction means is provided for restricting the acquisition game so that it is difficult to execute until it is established, it is possible to prevent the acquisition game from becoming too advantageous at the time of initialization. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming excessively advantageous to the player after the initialization and from causing a disadvantage to the hole.

In the gaming machine BC8, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is more difficult to enter than the first position. a second position, a variable means that can be changed to a second position, and a privilege granting means that grants the predetermined privilege based on a game ball entering the ball entering means; , when the specific condition is satisfied that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, the variable means moves from the second position to the second position for a predetermined period as the winning game. 1 position, and the limiting means is configured such that the period from when the determination result of the determining means becomes the second determining result until the start of the winning game is within the range of the first position. A gaming machine BC9 is characterized in that the game machine BC9 is controlled to be longer than when no restriction is performed by the restriction means.

According to the gaming machine BC9, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BC8, there is provided a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means. a second position in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball than the position; and a variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, and a benefit granting means that grants the predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball hitting means. and the acquisition game execution means determines that the determination result of the determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, and determines that the specific condition is satisfied, and the variable means executes the acquisition game as the acquisition game. is controlled to vary from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and the limiting means controls the acquisition after the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result. The period until the game starts is controlled to be longer than when the restriction by the restriction means is not performed.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage of the second gaming state after initialization can be lowered.

<Characteristic BD group> (The degree of advantage is different between the normal state at the time of RBAM clearing and the normal state transferred at other opportunities)
a first state setting means capable of setting the gaming state to a predetermined first gaming state based on the initialization of the settings of the gaming machine; a second state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state based on establishment of a setting condition; and a second state setting means for setting the first gaming state to the first gaming state. Based on the setting, a specific element regarding the advantageous degree is set to be below a predetermined specific advantageous degree, and based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the second state setting means, the specific A gaming machine BD1 characterized by comprising: a specific element setting means for setting an element to be higher than the specific advantage degree.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state ends can be changed depending on the winning type. There are also some that are trying to increase interest in. Furthermore, some of the conventional gaming machines have a novel game structure in which a gaming state is provided that is less advantageous than the gaming state (so-called normal state) that is set when the settings of the gaming machine are initialized. There are also sexual ones.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, if the degree of advantage of the gaming state after initialization is increased in an attempt to realize innovative gaming features, the initialization may become excessively advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is a possibility that the gaming machine becomes difficult for the hall to initialize.

On the other hand, the gaming machine BD1 includes a first state setting means that can set the gaming state to a predetermined first gaming state based on initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and a power source for the gaming machine. a second state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific setting condition that is at least different from input; Based on the fact that the first gaming state is set by the first state setting means, a specific element regarding the degree of advantage is set to a predetermined specific degree of advantage or less, and the second state setting means sets the first gaming state. and a specific element setting means for setting the specific element to be higher than the specific advantage level based on the fact that the specific element is set.

With this, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that the first gaming state will be set by the second state setting means rather than the first state setting means, so that the player's interest in the game can be verbally expressed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting means sets the specific element based on a predetermined specific setting condition being satisfied during the first gaming state set by the first state setting means. The gaming machine BD2 is characterized in that the degree of advantage is set to be higher than the specific degree of advantage.

According to the gaming machine BD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD1, the specific element setting means sets a predetermined specific setting condition during the first gaming state set by the first state setting means. Since the specific element is set to be higher than the specific advantage degree based on the fact that the specific setting condition is satisfied, the game can be played with the expectation that the specific setting condition will be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the game machine BD1 or BD2, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a game ball that is more difficult to enter than the first position. a second position that is variable, a variable means that is variable, a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and a determination based on the establishment of a determination condition. and a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. A gaming machine BD3 comprising: variable game execution means, wherein the specific element setting means is for varying the ease with which the variable game is executed as the specific element.

According to the game machine BD3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BD1 or BD2, there is provided a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means. a second position in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball than in the first position; and a variable means that is variable to the second position, and a privilege grant that provides a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. means, a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition, and the variable means changes the position from the second position to the second position for a predetermined period based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means being a specific discriminating result. A variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied to one position, and the specific element setting means is for varying the ease with which the variable game is executed as the specific element.

Thereby, in the first game state, the ease with which the variable game can be executed can be varied, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BD3, a display means capable of displaying identification information, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means, and a display means capable of displaying the discrimination information by the dynamic display means. dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of identification information, and the specific element setting means determines when the first gaming state is set by the first state setting means. Based on the dynamic display period determining means, the dynamic display period determining means controls to easily set a period having a length equal to or longer than the predetermined first period, and the second state setting means sets the first gaming state. Based on this, the gaming machine BD4 is characterized in that control is performed so that a period shorter than the first period is likely to be set.

According to the gaming machine BD4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD3, there is also a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a dynamic display device that dynamically displays the identification information indicating the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means. display means; and dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information by the dynamic display means, and the specific element setting means is configured to Based on the setting of the first gaming state, the dynamic display period determining means controls so that a period longer than a predetermined first period is likely to be set, and the second state is set. Based on the first gaming state being set by the means, control is performed so that a period shorter than the first period is likely to be set.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage can be more reliably varied in the first gaming state.

The gaming machine BD4 includes a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the above-mentioned discrimination condition is set such that the game ball enters the first ball entering means. and a second determination condition that is established based on the fact that the ball enters the second ball entry means, and The determining means provides the specific determination result when the determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition than when the determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. The specific element setting means determines whether the second discrimination condition is satisfied based on the first gaming state being set by the first state setting means. control so that a period longer than the first period is likely to be set as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the second state setting means, and the second state setting means controls the first game. Based on the state being set, a period shorter than the first period is set as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. A gaming machine BD5 is characterized in that it is controlled so that it is easily played.

According to the gaming machine BD5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BD4, it is provided with a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and The determining conditions include a first determining condition that is established based on the ball entering the first ball entering means, and a second determining condition that is established based on the ball entering the second ball entering means; The determining means is configured to perform at least the following when the determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the second determination condition than when the determination is performed based on the satisfaction of the first determination condition. is configured such that the probability of obtaining the specific determination result is higher, and the specific element setting means determines that the first gaming state is set by the first state setting means. control so that a period having a length equal to or longer than the first period is likely to be set as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition, Based on the first gaming state being set by the second state setting means, the first gaming state is set as a dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition. This control is performed so that a period shorter than one period is easily set.

This has the effect that the degree of advantage can be varied by varying the execution interval of the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

In the gaming machine BD5, a bonus game execution means executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a predetermined second determination result, and an end of the bonus game. The subsequent gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state in which the specific element is set below the specific advantage degree, and the specific element is set higher than the specific advantage degree. a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state; and the second state setting means includes the second gaming state. The gaming machine BD6 is characterized in that the first gaming state is set by determining that the specific setting condition is satisfied when a predetermined change condition is satisfied in a state where the gaming state is set.

According to the game machine BD6, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine BD5, a bonus game advantageous to the player is executed based on the fact that the determination result of the determination means has become a predetermined second determination result. a bonus game execution means, the game state after the end of the bonus game is more advantageous to the player than the first game state in which the specific element is set below the specific advantageous degree, and the specific element is gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state that is set higher than the specific advantageous degree; The second state setting means sets the first gaming state by determining that the specific setting condition is satisfied when a predetermined change condition is established in the second gaming state.

Thereby, in the second gaming state, the player can play the game with the expectation that the predetermined change condition will be met, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine BD6 is characterized in that the first gaming state is configured such that the probability that the determination result of the determining means becomes the second determination result is lower than that of the second gaming state. A gaming machine BD7.

According to the gaming machine BD7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BD6, the first gaming state has a lower probability that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the second discrimination result than the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the first gaming state becomes advantageous when set by the second state setting means, even though the determination result of the determining means is low. effective.

In the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means sets an action in the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on the establishment of the second determination condition based on the second gaming state being set. A gaming machine BD8 characterized in that control is performed so that a period longer than the first period is easily set as the target display period.

According to the gaming machine BD8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine BD6 or BD7, the specific element setting means executes the execution based on the establishment of the second discrimination condition based on the setting of the second gaming state. Since the control is performed so that a period longer than the first period is likely to be set as the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information, the second discrimination condition is difficult to satisfy in the second gaming state. The effect is that it can be done.

<Characteristic BE group> (Specific performance executed from the transition to small hit RUSH until the start of small win fluctuation)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position. a variable means that can be changed; a determining means that performs a determination based on the establishment of a determining condition; a first game state in which the variable game is difficult to execute based on the establishment of a specific setting condition in a gaming machine comprising: variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied from a second position to the first position; and a second game state in which the variable game is easier to execute than the first game state, a game state setting means for setting one game state from a plurality of game states including at least the second game state, and the game state setting means. a first performance execution means for executing a first performance based on the second gaming state being set by the means; and after the first performance is executed by the first performance execution means, the first performance is executed by the first performance execution means; A gaming machine BE1 comprising: a second performance execution means for executing a second performance in a performance mode different from the first performance based on the determination result being the specific determination result.

2. Description of the Related Art Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, gaming machines equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. In this conventional gaming machine, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing an advantageous jackpot game to the player. Furthermore, in addition to the symbols, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device, and a wide variety of interesting effects are executed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-325886 Public bulletin).

In addition, some of the conventional gaming machines have a performance mode (preparation performance mode) that indicates that an advantageous situation for the player is near in a predetermined gaming state, and a performance mode that indicates that an advantageous situation for the player is near, and a performance mode that indicates that an advantageous situation for the player is near. There are also systems that can perform an advantageous situation presentation to show that the situation is advantageous when the situation becomes advantageous to the user.

However, in such conventional gaming machines, even if the preparatory presentation mode is executed, the player only wants the advantageous situation presentation to be executed quickly, and if the execution period of the preparatory presentation mode becomes long. However, there is a problem in that there is a risk that the player's interest may be lost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BE1, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter into the ball entry means, and a game ball which is lower than the first position. a second position at which it is difficult to enter the ball; a variable means that is variable; a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a discriminating condition; and variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period, and based on establishment of a specific setting condition, Setting one game state from among a plurality of game states including at least a first game state in which the variable game is difficult to execute, and a second game state in which the variable game is easier to execute than in the first game state. a first performance execution means that executes a first performance based on the second game state being set by the game state setting means; is executed, a second effect execution means for executing a second effect in a different effect mode from the first effect based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the specific discrimination result; Equipped with.

This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BE1, a bonus game advantageous to the player is provided based on the display means capable of displaying identification information and the determination result of the determination means being a second determination result different from the specific determination result. and a dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, and the determination condition includes a first determination condition and a first determination thereof. and a second discrimination condition different from the condition, and the dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition, and the second discrimination condition. The gaming machine is configured to be able to perform the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition and the second discrimination condition. When the second discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination based on the establishment of one of the discrimination conditions, at least during the dynamic display period in the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the second discrimination result, the other discrimination A game characterized by comprising a determination result control means for controlling the determination performed based on the satisfaction of a condition to result in an out-of-order determination result that is different from both the specific determination result and the second determination result. Machine BE2.

According to the gaming machine BE2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE1, the display means capable of displaying identification information and the discrimination result of the discrimination means have become a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. and dynamic display execution means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result of the determination means, the determination condition being , at least a first discrimination condition and a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition, and the dynamic display means displays the identification information based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. The gaming machine is configured to be able to perform the dynamic display of the identification information and the dynamic display of the identification information based on the establishment of the second determination condition in duplicate, and the gaming machine dynamically displaying the identification information to at least indicate the second discrimination result when the second discrimination result is obtained in the discrimination based on the establishment of one of the discrimination conditions of the condition and the second discrimination condition; During the dynamic display period, the determination is performed based on the fulfillment of the other determination condition, and the determination is controlled so that the result is an out-of-order determination result that is different from either the specific determination result or the second determination result. Equipped with result control means.

This has the effect that it is possible to prevent the bonus game from being executed redundantly based on the determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition and the determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition.

In the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured such that determination based on the establishment of the second determining condition is more easily executed than in the first gaming state, and the second determining condition is The determination performed based on the establishment of is configured to result in one of the specific determination result, the second determination result, and the out-of-order determination result. Game machine BE3.

According to the gaming machine BE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE2, the second gaming state is configured such that determination based on the establishment of the second determination condition is more easily executed than in the first gaming state. The determination performed based on the establishment of the second determination condition is one of the specific determination result, the second determination result, and the out-of-order determination result. It is configured as follows.

This has the effect of making the player expect a specific determination result in the second gaming state.

The gaming machine BE3 is provided with a gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition that is at least different from the execution of the bonus game in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BE4 is characterized by

According to the gaming machine BE4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE3, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a specific condition that is at least different from the execution of the bonus game in the first gaming state. Since it is provided with a game state changing means for changing the state, it is possible to make the player play the game with the expectation that the specific condition will be satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine BE4, the gaming state changing means determines whether the bonus game is not executed between when the first gaming state is set and when the determining means executes a predetermined specific number of determinations. The gaming machine BE5 is characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state when the game occurs.

According to the gaming machine BE5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BE4, the gaming state changing means executes the determination by the determining means a predetermined specific number of times after the first gaming state is set. If the bonus game is not executed during this period, the gaming state is changed to the second gaming status, so it is a novel idea to play the game in the first gaming state with the expectation that the bonus game will not be executed. This has the effect of realizing playability.

In the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured such that when the discrimination by the discriminating means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a first probability, and the second gaming state is , when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability, and the gaming state changing means is configured to If the bonus game is not executed after the gaming state is set until the determination by the determination means is performed a predetermined specific number of times, the second determination result is determined by the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine BE6 is characterized in that the gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by varying the probability that , from the first probability to the second probability.

According to the gaming machine BE6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BE5, the first gaming state is configured such that when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a first probability. and the second gaming state is configured such that when the discrimination by the discrimination means is executed, the second discrimination result is obtained with a second probability lower than the first probability. , when the bonus game is not executed between the time when the first game state is set and the time when the determination means executes the determination a predetermined number of times, The gaming state is changed to the second gaming state by varying the probability that the second discrimination result will be obtained in the discrimination by the discrimination means from the first probability to the second probability.

As a result, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the lower the probability of the second determination result being, the more advantageous it is, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, an initializing means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and setting the gaming state to the second gaming state based on the initialization being executed by the initializing means. and an initialization time setting means, and the variable game is made more difficult to execute in the second game state set by the initialization time setting means than in the second game state set by the game state setting means. A gaming machine BE7, comprising: a limiting means for limiting.

According to the gaming machine BE7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BE1 to BE6, there is an initialization means for initializing the settings of the gaming machine, and based on the fact that the initialization is executed by the initialization means. , initialization setting means for setting the gaming state to the second gaming state, and in the second gaming state set by the initialization setting means, from the second gaming state set by the gaming state setting means; The game machine also includes a restriction means for restricting the variable game so that it is difficult to execute the variable game.

This has the effect that it is possible to realize a very special and innovative gaming experience in which it is possible to make the same gaming state as the state after initialization advantageous while suppressing that the state after initialization becomes too advantageous.

<Characteristic BF group> (Multiple small hit RUSH states with different degrees of advantage)
A ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a second position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than the first position. a variable means that can be changed; a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entering means; a determining means that performs a determination based on the establishment of a determining condition; a bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination means being a first determination result; and a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the determination unit, and the determination result of the determination unit is different from the first determination result. variable game execution means for executing a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a second determination result, and the establishment of a predetermined setting condition; Among a plurality of states including a first state, a second state in which the variable game is easier to execute than the first state, and a third state more advantageous to the player than the second state. A gaming machine BF1 comprising: a state setting means capable of setting a state from 1 to 1.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state ends can be changed depending on the winning type. There are also some that are trying to increase interest in. Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are equipped with an advantageous state in which so-called small winning games are easily executed, and it is possible to acquire gaming value even without a winning state. There are also some that are trying to further increase interest.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, once the game enters an advantageous state where it is easy to execute a small winning game, the subsequent games become monotonous in that they simply continue to acquire gaming value, and the game becomes difficult. There was a problem in that it became difficult to increase the interest of people.

On the other hand, according to the game machine BF1, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter into the ball entry means, and a game ball that is lower than the first position. a variable means that can be changed to a second position where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball, a benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the fact that a game ball enters the ball hitting means, and a determination condition is satisfied. a discriminating means for executing a discrimination based on the discrimination result, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the discrimination result of the discriminating means being a first discrimination result, and a discriminating means for the discriminating means. The variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a second determination result different from the first determination result. Based on the establishment of a predetermined setting condition, the game execution means determines a first state, a second state in which the variable game is more easily executed than the first state, and a second state that is more advantageous to the player than the second state. 3 states, and state setting means capable of setting one state from among a plurality of states including three states.

This allows the player to play the game in anticipation of the second or third state, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the gaming machine BF1, the state at the time when the second determination result is obtained is maintained at least even after the end of the variable game executed based on the second determination result. Game machine BF2 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine BF2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF1, the variable game is executed based on the fact that the state at the time when the second determination result is reached is the second determination result. Since it is maintained at least after the end of the variable game, the variable game can be executed multiple times in the second state. Therefore, there is an effect that the degree of advantage of the second state can be improved.

In gaming machine BF1 or BF2, gaming machine BF3 is characterized in that the third state is a state in which the variable game is more easily executed than the second state.

According to the gaming machine BF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF1 or BF2, the degree of advantage of the third state can be further improved because the variable game is more easily executed than the second state. effective.

In the gaming machine BF3, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means for executing the second discriminating condition, wherein the second discriminating condition is more likely to satisfy the first discriminating condition than the second discriminating condition; In the third state, the second discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discriminating condition, and the second discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discriminating condition. The gaming machine BF4 is characterized in that the gaming machine BF4 is configured such that there is a high probability that the second determination result will be obtained.

According to the gaming machine BF4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF3, the discrimination means is different from the first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition, and the second state is set to be higher than the second discriminating condition than the first discriminating condition. The second discriminating condition is more likely to be satisfied than the first discriminating condition, and the third state is more easily satisfied than the first discriminating condition. Also, the determination made by the second determining means is configured such that the probability of obtaining the second determination result is higher.

This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game with a stronger expectation that the second determination condition will be met.

In any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means sets one state from the plurality of states as a gaming state after the bonus game execution means finishes executing the bonus game. is possible, and the probability of obtaining the specific discrimination result in the second state is higher than the probability of obtaining the specific discrimination result in the third state. Features of gaming machine BF5.

According to the gaming machine BF5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BF1 to BF4, the state setting means sets the plurality of gaming states as the gaming state after the bonus game execution means finishes executing the bonus game. It is possible to set one state from among the states, and the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained in the second state is higher than the probability that the specific discrimination result will be obtained in the third state. It is structured as follows.

As a result, since the third state has a lower probability of obtaining a specific determination result, it is possible to configure the third state, which is advantageous, to continue more easily for a longer period of time. Therefore, when the third state is set, there is an effect that the player can feel a greater sense of satisfaction.

In the gaming machine BF5, a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and a game ball into which a game ball can enter the first ball entering means. and a fourth position where it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the third position, and the determining means includes the first ball entering means, Alternatively, the determination is performed based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the second state and the third state are different from the second variable state than the first state. A gaming machine BF6, characterized in that the means is configured such that it is difficult to change to the third position.

According to the gaming machine BF6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BF5, there is a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means. a second variable means that is variable between a third position where a game ball can enter the ball means and a fourth position where it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball means than the third position; The determining means executes the determination based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the second state and the third state are , the second variable means is configured to be more difficult to change to the third position than in the first state.

This has the effect that it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the state in which the second variable means is difficult to be varied to the third position is more advantageous than the state in which it is easily varied.

In the gaming machine BF4, the gaming state after the execution of the bonus game is selected from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. a gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state, the state setting means setting the first state based on the first gaming state being set, and the second gaming state being set. The gaming machine BF7 is characterized in that one of the second state and the third state is set based on this.

According to the gaming machine BF7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BF4, the gaming states after the execution of the bonus game are completed include a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous than the first gaming state. , and the state setting means sets the first state based on the first gaming state being set. Then, one of the second state and the third state is set based on the second gaming state being set.

Thereby, it is possible to provide a second gaming state in which the second state is set and a second gaming state in which the third state is set as the second gaming state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to realize a novel gaming property in which the degree of advantage is variable even though the gaming state is the same.

<Characteristic BG group> (The degree of advantage can be varied by subtracting the number of time savings during the execution of jackpot fluctuations)
Discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of a discrimination condition; Bonus game execution means that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the discrimination means being a specific determination result; A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying information, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information for showing the discrimination result of the discrimination means on the display means, a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the establishment of a setting condition; a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a different degree of advantage from the first gaming state, and the second setting condition is a motion of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A gaming machine BG1 is characterized in that the game machine BG1 can at least be satisfied during the execution of the target display.

Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines shift to a winning state when the result of a lottery conducted based on a winning of a game ball in the starting winning hole is a winning result. Some of these gaming machines are provided with multiple types of winnings with different numbers of rounds, and some are designed to increase the interest of winning by varying the gaming value that can be acquired (for example, , Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent No. 2514417).

Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines are configured so that the gaming state after the winning state ends can be changed depending on the winning type. There are also some that are trying to increase interest in.

However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, even if the gaming state is set to be advantageous, there is a possibility that the advantageous state will be shifted to a disadvantageous state due to a winning. There has been a problem in that it is difficult to increase the player's interest in the case of a winning situation.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine BG1, there is a discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of discriminating conditions, and benefits that are advantageous to the player based on the discriminating result of the discriminating means being a specific discriminating result. A bonus game execution means for executing a game, a display means capable of displaying identification information, and a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information to show the determination result of the discrimination means on the display means. a first gaming state setting means for setting a first gaming state based on the satisfaction of a first predetermined setting condition; a second gaming state setting means for setting a second gaming state having a different degree of advantage from the first gaming state based on the establishment of the setting condition; This can be established at least during the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the determination result.

As a result, even while the dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result is in progress, it is possible to allow the player to play in the expectation that the second setting condition will be met, so that the player's It has the effect of increasing interest.

In gaming machine BG1, the discrimination means includes a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a first discrimination condition, and a first discrimination means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discrimination condition different from the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means for dynamically displaying the first identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the first discriminating means. and a second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying second identification information for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, and the second setting condition The discrimination by the second discrimination means is performed while the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BG2 is characterized in that it is configured with conditions that can be established based on the following.

According to the gaming machine BG2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine BG1, the discrimination means is different from the first discrimination means that executes discrimination based on the establishment of the first discrimination condition. and a second discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition, and the dynamic display means is configured with a second discriminating means for displaying the discrimination result of the first discriminating means. the first dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the first identification information; and the second dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the second identification information for showing the discrimination result of the second discrimination means. The second setting condition is that while dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is being performed by the first dynamic display means in the first gaming state, , which is constituted by conditions that can be established based on the execution of the discrimination by the second discrimination means.

As a result, while the dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result is being executed, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the second determination means actively performs the determination. This has the effect of increasing interest in games.

In the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is that after the first gaming state is set and before the bonus game is executed, the determination by the determining means is performed a predetermined specific number of times. The game machine BG3 is characterized in that the game is established based on what has been done.

According to the gaming machine BG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BG2, the second setting condition is determined in advance after the first gaming state is set and before the bonus game is executed. This is true based on the fact that the determination by the determination means has been performed a specific number of times. This has the effect of realizing a novel gameplay in which the goal is to complete the game.

In the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information for a period longer than a predetermined specific period to indicate the specific determination result in the first gaming state. The second dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information for a dynamic display period shorter than the specific period as the dynamic display of the identification information in the first gaming state. The gaming machine BG4 is characterized in that it dynamically displays the identification information in a dynamic display period of length.

According to the gaming machine BG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine BG2 or BG3, the first dynamic display means dynamically displays the identification information for indicating the specific determination result in the first gaming state. , dynamically displaying the identification information in a dynamic display period having a length longer than a predetermined specific period, and the second dynamic displaying means dynamically displaying the identification information in the first gaming state. As the dynamic display, the identification information is dynamically displayed in a dynamic display period shorter than the specific period.

As a result, when the first dynamic display means is dynamically displaying the identification information for indicating a specific determination result in the first gaming state, the second dynamic display means is able to display more dynamic display. Since the game can be executed many times, it is possible to easily set the second game state.

In any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG4, there is a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter into the ball entry means, and a state where a game ball can enter the ball from the first position. a second position at which it is difficult for the ball to enter; a variable means that is variable; a privilege granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means; execution of a variable game in which the variable means executes a variable game in which the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on a second determination result that is different from the specific determination result; A gaming machine BG5 comprising means, wherein the variable game is more easily executed in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state.

According to the gaming machine BG5, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machines BG1 to BG4, there is provided a ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means, and a first position where a game ball can enter the ball entry means. a second position in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the ball than in the first position; and a variable means that can be changed to a second position, and a privilege grant that provides a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entry means. and the variable means is varied from the second position to the first position for a predetermined period based on the fact that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a second discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result. a variable game execution means for executing a variable game, and the second gaming state is such that the variable game is easier to execute than the first gaming state.

As a result, it is possible to create a state in which variable games are likely to be executed while the dynamic display of identification information for indicating a specific determination result is being executed, so that variable games cannot be played until the bonus game is executed. It has the effect of being entertaining.

A privilege that sets any one of a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game in any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5. The post-game setting means includes a post-game setting means, and the post-privilege setting means allows the post-privilege game setting means to perform the post-privilege game more easily when the privilege game is executed in the second gaming state than when the privilege game is executed in the first gaming state. A gaming machine BG6 characterized in that the second gaming state is configured to be easily set.

According to the gaming machine BG6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines BG1 to BG5, a plurality of gaming states including at least the first gaming state and the second gaming state after the end of the bonus game are provided. a post-privilege game setting means for setting any one of the game states, and the system is configured to provide a post-privilege game setting means for setting one of the following game states; The configuration is such that the second gaming state is more easily set by the post-privilege game setting means.

As a result, by shifting to the second gaming state before the bonus game is executed, it becomes easier to set the second gaming status even after the bonus game ends, so identification information for indicating a specific determination result is used. During the execution of the dynamic display, it is possible to realize a novel gameplay in which the second determining means more actively performs the determination.

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine γ1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine γ2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
64b1 Upper first ball entrance (part of the first ball entrance means)
64b2 Lower first ball entrance (part of the first ball entrance means)
640 Second ball entrance (second ball entrance means)
65a 1st specific prize opening (variable ball entry means)
111 Payout control device (privilege granting means)
S406 First determining means S408 Part of bonus game execution means S602 Game state changing means S1006 Part of second determination means S1008 Part of bonus game execution means S1101 Part of second determination means S1103 Variable game execution means S2403, S2404 Game state setting means S5104 First performance execution means S5126 Second performance execution means

In any of the gaming machines described above, gaming machine γ3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In game machines such as pachinko machines, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on the game board, a determination is made as to whether it is a hit or not, and if the determination result is a hit, it is advantageous to the player. There is a game that executes a special bonus game (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-217766).
However, in such conventional gaming machines, it may be difficult to suggest the determination results in a suitable manner.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suitably suggest the determination result.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 includes a first determining means that performs determination based on the establishment of a first determining condition, and a determination result of the first determining means that is a specific determination result. a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the result of the game; a first performance execution unit that executes a first performance for indicating the determination result of the first determination unit; A second discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition, and a second effect for indicating the discrimination result of the second discriminating means, which overlaps with the first effect. a second performance execution means capable of executing the second performance, and the second performance execution means is configured to perform the first performance and the second performance in duplicate by executing the second performance. Furthermore, in the second performance, a specific performance mode capable of suggesting the determination result of the first discriminating means indicated by the first performance can be executed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, in which the second effect executing means executes the first effect before the first effect indicates the discrimination result of the first discriminating means. It is configured to be able to execute the specific presentation mode in two presentations.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, which includes a first ball entering means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means. , the first discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second discrimination condition is established based on the fact that the game ball enters the first ball entry means. This is established based on the game ball hitting the ball.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 4 is a gaming machine according to any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, which has a first state in which a game ball can enter the ball, and a state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the game ball than in the first state. a variable ball entry means that can be changed to a second state; a privilege granting means that provides a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means; and a second determining means. Based on the determination result being a second determination result different from the specific determination result, executing a variable game in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time. and a variable game execution means, wherein the second performance execution means is configured to perform the second performance based on the determination result of the second determination means being the second determination result. It is configured to be able to suggest a specific performance mode.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 5 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, in which, as a gaming state after the end of the bonus game, a first gaming state in which the determination by the first determining means is easily executed; a second gaming state in which the determination by the second determining means is more likely to be executed than the gaming state; A gaming state changing means is provided for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the fulfillment of a predetermined specific condition.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the first discriminating means executes discriminating based on the establishment of the first discriminating condition, and when the discriminating result of the first discriminating means becomes a specific discriminating result. a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the first determination result; a first performance execution means for executing a first performance for indicating the determination result of the first determination means; and the first determination condition. A second discriminating means for performing discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the second discriminating means, and a second effect for showing the discrimination result of the second discriminating means can be executed in overlap with the first effect. a second performance execution means, and the second performance execution means is configured to execute the second performance when the first performance and the second performance are executed in duplicate by executing the second performance. In the second performance, the present invention is configured to be able to execute a specific performance mode that can suggest the determination result of the first determining means indicated by the first performance.
This has the effect that the determination result can be suitably suggested.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, the second effect execution means shows the determination result of the first discrimination means by the first effect. Since the configuration is such that the specific presentation mode can be executed in the second presentation, the first discriminating means can be executed by checking the second presentation without having to confirm the first presentation to the end. You can check the determination results. Therefore, there is an effect that the convenience for the player can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1 or 2, there is a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and what is the first ball entry means? a different second ball entry means, the first discrimination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and the second discrimination condition is , is established based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means.
This allows the player to play the game by paying attention to the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in any one of technical ideas 1 to 3, a second state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the ball; a variable ball entry means that is variable; and a benefit granting means that provides a predetermined benefit based on the game ball entering the variable ball entry means; , the variable ball entry means changes from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time based on the fact that the second judgment result of the second judgment means is a second judgment result different from the specific judgment result. and a variable game execution means for executing a variable game that is varied, and the second performance execution means is executed based on the determination result of the second determination means becoming the second determination result. The second performance is configured to be able to suggest the specific performance mode.
This has the effect that the game can be played with the expectation that the determination result of the second determination means will be the second determination result.
According to the gaming machine according to technical idea 5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to technical idea 4, the first discrimination by the first discriminating means is easy to perform as the gaming state after the end of the bonus game. a gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state and a second gaming state in which the determination by the second determining means is more likely to be executed than the first gaming state; , a gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined specific condition in the first gaming state.
Thereby, in the first gaming state, it is possible to have the player play the game with the expectation that the specific condition will be met, so there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Claims (5)

a first discriminating means that performs discriminating based on the establishment of a first discriminating condition;
a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game advantageous to the player based on the determination result of the first determination means being a specific determination result;
a first effect execution means for executing a first effect for indicating the discrimination result of the first discrimination means;
a second discriminating means that performs discrimination based on the establishment of a second discriminating condition different from the first discriminating condition;
a second performance execution means capable of executing a second performance for indicating the discrimination result of the second discrimination means, overlappingly with the first performance;
The second performance execution means is configured to perform a process indicated by the first performance in the second performance when the first performance and the second performance are overlapped by executing the second performance. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a specific performance mode that can indicate the determination result of the first determining means. The second performance execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific performance mode in the second performance before the first performance indicates the determination result of the first discrimination unit. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that: comprising a first ball entry means into which a game ball can enter, and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means,
The first determination condition is established based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second determination condition is established based on a game ball entering the second ball entry means. A variable ball entry means that is variable between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game ball to enter than in the first state;
A benefit granting means that grants a predetermined benefit based on the entry of a game ball into the variable ball entry means;
Based on the fact that the determination result of the second determination means is a second determination result different from the specific determination result, the variable ball entrance means changes from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time. a variable game execution means for executing a variable game to be played;
The second performance execution means is configured to be able to suggest the specific performance mode in the second performance that is executed based on the determination result of the second determination unit being the second determination result. 4. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein: The gaming states after the end of the bonus game include a first gaming state in which the determination by the first determining means is more likely to be performed, and a second gaming state in which the determination by the second determining means is easier to be performed than the first gaming state. and gaming state setting means for setting one gaming state from among a plurality of gaming states including at least
The game system is characterized by comprising a gaming state changing means for changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the establishment of a predetermined specific condition in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 4.

Images